Full text of "International aspects of oceanography; oceanographic data and provisions for oceanographic research"

Given in Loving Mennory of

Raymond BraisUn Montgomery

Scientist, R/V Atlantis maiden voyage
2 July - 26 August, 1931

Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution

Physical Oceanographer

1940-1949

Non-Resident Statf

1950-1960

Visiting Committee

1962-1963

Corporation Member

1970-1980

Faculty, New York University

1940-1944

Faculty, Brown University

1949-1954

Faculty, Johns Hopkins University

1954-1961

Professor of Oceanography,

Johns Hopkins University

1961-1975

Ilii

f^SH

X-

£0-

\ cr
\ o
= i-n
■ m
; tr

i D

" o

I r^

- m

Data Library & Archive
Woods Hoie Oceanographic Institution

Atlas Collection

INTERNATIONAL

ASPECTS OF
OCEANOGRAPHY

OCEANOGRAPHIC DATA

and

PROVISIONS FOR OCEANOGRAPHIC RESEARCH

THOMAS WAYLAND VAUGHAN

AND

OTHERS

NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Washington, D. C.

1937

Data Library & Archive
Woods Koie Ocean n graphic »n3titutfon

Atlas Collection

TO THE MEMORY OF

WICLIFFE ROSE

IN RECOGNITION OF HIS INTEREST IN OCEANOGRAPHY
AND HIS INFLUENCE IN ITS ADVANCEMENT

CONTENTS

PAGE

Preface vii

Acknowledgments xi

Introduction xiii

Serial sections of temperature and salinity in the dififerent ocean basins 1

General discussion 3

Atlantic Ocean and connecting seas 7

Oceanographic data, vertical sections of temperature and salinity for the Norwegian Sea,

the Polar Sea, and adjacent areas. By Harald U. Sverdrup and B. Helland-Hansen . . 7

Sources of data, the Norwegian Sea 9

Sources of data, the Sea east of Spitsbergen, Murman Sea, Barents Sea, et cetera 10

Sources of data, the Kara Sea, the Siberian Sea, et cetera 11

Sources of data, the Arctic area in general 11

Sources of data, Baltic Sea 11

Atlantic Ocean: Horizontal distribution of temperature, salinity, and density at standard

depths. By Georg Wiist 12

The source material 12

Temperature 13

Salinity and density 14

List of sources of data 15

Serial sections of temperature and saUnity in the Mediterranean and Adriatic Seas 19

Mediterranean Sea 19

Sources of data 19

Adriatic Sea 20

Sources of data 20

Literature especially on the periodic cruises by the Austrians on the Najade and

the ItaUans on the Ciclope 20

Serial sections of temperature and salinity in the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea 21

Pacific Ocean 22

Serial sections of temperature and saUnity 22

Sources of data for the north Pacific Ocean. Listed by A. Defant 23

Sources of data for the south Pacific Ocean. Listed by A. Defant 24

Supplemental sources of data on the Pacific Ocean 25

Red Sea and Indian Ocean 27

Red Sea, serial sections of temperature and sahnity 27

Sources of data 27

Indian Ocean, serial sections of temperature and salinity 27

Sources of data for the Indian Ocean. After A. Defant 28

Supplemental sources of data for the Indian Ocean 29

Charting the Bottom of the Oceans 31

Sounded and unsounded areas 33

Marine bottom deposits 35

Submarine earthquake epicenters, magnetic observations at sea, tidal records 39

The structure of the ocean basins as indicated by seismological data and earthquake epicenters.

By Beno Gutenberg 41

The structure of oceanic basins as indicated by seismological data 41

Earthquake epicenters in oceanic regions and along continental borders 44

iii

iv CONTENTS

List of the seismological stations of the world. By N. H. Heck 46

Magnetic survey of the oceans. By John A. Fleming 50

Tides. By H. A. Maimer 57

Results of maritime gravity research, 1923-1932. By F. A. Vening Meinesz 59

General statement 61

The gravity results in the Netherlands East Indies and adjoining areas 62

The gravity results in the West Indies and adjoining regions 65

Supplemental statement 67

Catalogue of institutions engaged in oceanographic work 71

General discussion 73

Previous catalogues 73

Methods of procuring information and dates of its validity 73

Oceanographic research outside oceanographic institutions 74

Activities by countries 74

Funds available for oceanographic research 76

Analysis of the activities of the institutions according to subject 77

Seismology 77

Hydrographic surveys 77

Tidal records and research 77

Records of temperature and salinity 77

Physics 77

Chemistry 77

Dynamical oceanography 77

Sediments 77

Meteorology 77

Gravity at sea 77

Terrestrial magnetism 78

Fisheries 78

Marine biology 78

Instruction in oceanography 78

List of institutions engaged in oceanographic work and their activities 80

International institutions 89

Institutions, east side of the Atlantic and connecting seas 104

Algeria to France, inclusive 104

Germany to Monaco, inclusive 124

Netherlands to Yugoslavia, inclusive 137

U.S.S.R., western part 155

Institutions, west .side of the Atlantic Ocean 164

British dominions 164

United States 168

Eastern South America 188

Institutions, east side of the Pacific Ocean 191

Canada 191

United States 192

Chile, Ecuador, Peru 199

Institutions, west side of the Pacific Ocean 201

Australia to Japan, inclusive 201

Java to Straits Settlements, inclusive 214

Institutions on the Red Sea and in India 219

Egypt 219

India 221

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PLATES

PLATE PAGE

1. Norwegian Sea, observation of temperature and salinity at 500 meters 11

2. Norwegian Sea, observations of temperature and salinity at 1000 meters 11

3. Norwegian Sea, observations of temperature and salinity at 2000 meters 11

4. Atlantic Ocean, temperature, salinity, and density at standard depths, depths 200-1000 meters. . .

5. Atlantic Ocean, temperature, salinity, and density at standard depths, depths 1250-2000 meters. .

6. Atlantic Ocean, temperature, salinity, and density at standard depths, depths 2500-4000 meters. . . 18

7. Atlantic Ocean, temperature, salinity, and density at standard depths, depths 4500-5000 meters. . .

8. Stations occupied by Discovery II in the South Atlantic and South Pacific, 1933-1935

9. Mediterranean Sea, serial sections of temperature and salinity 20

10. Adriatic Sea, serial sections of temperature and salinity 20

1 1 . Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea, serial sections of temperature and salinity 21

12. Pacific Ocean, general chart, serial sections of temperature and salinity 26

13. Japanese Islands to East Indies, serial sections of temperature and salinity 26

14. A. Oceanic areas adjacent to the Aleutian Islands, serial sections of temperature and salinity. ... 26
B. Gulf of Alaska to San Francisco, serial sections of temperature and salinitj^ 26

15. Off coast of southern California, serial sections of temperature and salinity 26

16. Off coasts of Costa Rica, Panama, and northern South America, serial sections of temperature

and salinity 26

17. Red Sea. serial sections of temperature and salinity 27

18. Indian Ocean, general chart, serial sections of temperature and salinity 28

19. Atlantic Ocean, northern part, sounded and unsounded areas 34

20. Atlantic Ocean, southern part, sounded and unsounded areas 34

21. Pacific Ocean, northern part, sounded and unsounded areas 34

22. Pacific Ocean, southern part, sounded and unsounded areas 34

23. Indian Ocean, sounded and unsounded areas 34

24. Atlantic Ocean, earthquake epicenters 44

25. Pacific Ocean, earthquake epicenters 44

26. Indian Ocean, earthquake epicenters 44

27. Seismological stations of the world 48

28. Tracks of chief vessels on which magnetic observations were made in the Atlantic Ocean, 1839-

1916 56

29. Tracks of chief vessels on which magnetic observations were made in the Pacific Ocean, 1839-

1916 56

30. World magnetic and electric survey. Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie Institution

of Washington, 1905-1937 56

31. Tidal stations, Atlantic and Indian oceans and connecting waters 58

32. Tidal stations, Pacific Ocean and connecting waters 58

33. Gravimetric map of the East Indian Archipelago 66

34. A. Gravimetric survey of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea on U. S. Naval submarines

S-21 and S-48 66

B. Route around the world of the Dutch submarine K-XIII and the gravimetric stations oc-
cupied 66

35. Gravity surveys by the Japanese Geodetic Commission since 1932 70

36. The gravity-expedition of Hr. Ms. .submarine 016 in the north Atlantic, January 11-March 16,

1937 70

vi LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

TEXT-FIGURES

FIGURE

1. Key chart to show the positions of five special charts, plates 13, 14A, 14B, 15, 16, of areas in the

Pacific 25

2. Distribution of larger deep-focus earthquakes in recent years 43

3. Tracks of chief vessels on which magnetic observations were made in the Indian Ocean, 1839-

1916 51

4. Longitudinal distribution of proportion of amiual change (AH/H) of horizontal intensity 52

5. Latitudinal distribution of proportion of annual change {AH/H) of horizontal intensity 52

6. Variation with longitude of AH/H (animal change averaged without regard to sign), of the dis-

tribution of the proportion of land and water areas, and of secular-change activity approxi-
mately determined by the density of the distribution of isoporic lines 53

7. Distribution of foci of rapid annual change of the magnetic declination, inclination, and horizontal

intensity, approximate epoch 1920-1925 54

8. Showing oceanic areas (shaded) between parallels of 60° north and south latitude for which secular

variation of magnetic elements could not be controlled by land stations on continents and

islands 55

9. Navy-Geophysical Union Gravity Expedition 1936-37 67

10. Chart showing the gravimetric stations occupied by the Italian submarine Vettor Pisani 68

PREFACE

On April 27, 1927, the National Academy of Sciences adopted a resolution which
read as follows:

THAT, "The President of the Academy be requested to appoint a Com-
mittee on Oceanography from the sections of the Academy concerned to
consider the share of the United States of America in a world wide program
of oceanographic research and report to the Academy."

The President of the Academy, at that time Prof. A. A. Michelsen, accordingly
appointed Messrs. Wm. Bowie, E. G. Conklin, B. M. Duggar, John C. Merriam, T. Way-
land Vaughan, and Frank R. Lilhe (Chairman), as members of the Committee. Dr.
Henry B. Bigelow, Curator of Oceanography in the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Harvard University, was engaged as Secretary. Subsequently the Committee's member-
ship was augmented by the appointment of Messrs. Bigelow and Arthur L. Day. When
Doctor LUlie became President of the Academy on July 1, 1935, Doctor Bigelow suc-
ceeded him as Chairman of the Committee.

Working in conjunction with the members of the Committee and after conferences
with numerous persons and visits to oceanographic institutions, Doctor Bigelow prepared
a report entitled "Oceanography, its scope, problems, and economic importance," which
was pubhshed in 1931.

As a result of the efforts of the Committee the Rockefeller Foundation provided
funds for the establishment of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. Associated
with the establishment of that Institution an effort was made to expand and stabilize the
Bermuda Biological Station for Research. To this project the Rockefeller Foundation
contributed £50,000, on the understanding that the Bermuda Government would con-
tribute £5,500 and other benefits and in the expectation that the Bermuda Station would
serve as an oceanic station of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. Further
information on this station is given in the last section of this report "Catalogue of institu-
tions engaged in oceanographic work."

Besides the funds for oceanographic research above mentioned, the Rockefeller
Foundation made a liberal contribution to the University of Washington for the erection
of a laboratory buUding for oceanographic research and for the operation or purchase of
an oceanographic research boat. This led to the establishment of the oceanographic
laboratories of the University of Washington. Further information on these laboratories
is given in the catalogue of oceanographic institutions.

In addition to the contributions above indicated, the Rockefeller Foundation allotted
$40,000 to assist in the erection of a second laboratory building, named Ritter Hall, on
the grounds of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of Cahfornia, La
Jolla, California. It was expected that further development would be taken care of by
the University of California in conjunction with the Scripps family. The execution of
the plan was interrupted by the great depression, but subsequently it has been put into

viii PREFACE

effect. A brief history of the Scripps Institution is given in the catalogue of oceanographic
institutions.

Although the development of the Bingham Oceanographic Foundation at Yale was
independent of the activities of the National Academy Committee on Oceanography,
it should be mentioned in this connection because of the extensive cooperation between
it and the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. The Atlantis of the Woods Hole
Institution has served as the research vessel for both the Woods Hole Institution and the
Bingham Oceanographic Foundation. A succinct account of the Bingham Oceanographic
Foundation is included in the catalogue of oceanographic institutions.

In the hope that the United States Navy might find it feasible to extend its activities
in oceanographic investigations, the members of the National Academy Committee on
Oceanography called on the Secretary of the Navy, at that time the Honorable Charles
Francis Adams. The conference led to the appointment of a Naval Committee on Ocean-
ography under the chairmanship of Rear Admiral Frank H. Schofield, now retired. This
Committee made several recommendations, one of which was that Naval vessels equipped
with sonic-sounding apparatus should, when feasible, follow routes which would carry
them over oceanic areas for which information on oceanic depths was inadequate. This
recommendation was adopted and it has led to probably the most extensive systematic
program of sounding for bottom configuration undertaken by any country. Since about
1928 most of the north Pacific north of a line from the California coast to the Hawaiian
Islands and thence to the Philippines has been covered by a series of closely spaced lines
from east to west and these lines have been crossed by other lines, north to south between
the Aleutian and the Hawaiian Islands and toward the northeast from the Hawaiian
Islands to Puget Sound. United States Naval vessels have also run many other lines of
soundings. In addition to the soundings, the Navy Department has endeavored to
assist investigations in many other fields, so that it has now become one of the world's
major agencies in oceanographic research. Serial sections for subsurface temperatures
and salinities, the plotting of sea surface temperatures and surface drift, and the utiliza-
tion of submarines for the determination of gravity at sea are noteworthy.

The Committee also took up oceanographic investigations with the United States
Coast and Geodetic Survey and the United States Coast Guard. Information on these
and other governmental institutions will be found in the catalogue of oceanographic
institutions to which reference has already been made.

Notwithstanding the activities above enumerated, it seemed to the members of the
Committee that the purpose of the original resolution of the Committee "to consider the
share of the United States of America in a world wide program of oceanographic research,"
had not been completely covered. Oceanography is necessarily a subject of world wide
extent. The oceans form about seventy per cent of the surface of the earth and their
margins are touched by most of the countries of the world. Rising from the ocean floors
there are multitudes of islands, some of them large, tens or even hundreds of thousands of
square miles in area, and they are under the jurisdiction of many nations. It is obvious
that any comprehensive systematic investigation of the oceans must be in large measure
an international enterprise. Recognizing these facts the Committee decided to attempt
the preparation of a digest of the oceanographic data available for the different ocean
basins and to compile a catalogue of the various institutions in the world engaged in anv
kind of oceanographic work.

PREFACE ix

The scope and general arrangement of the present report was decided upon at various
meetings of the Committee on Oceanography. As regards oceanographic information
on the different ocean basins, the purpose was to present in succinct form the degree of
exploration of as nearly all the areas of the oceans as is possible. The topics covered by
the report need not be listed here, but as an illustration of what was intended the chart
showing the available data on subsurface salinities and temperatures in the Indian Ocean
may be taken. It is immediately obvious that there are no records in an area between
10° and 30° south latitude and between 70° and 90° east longitude. That is, there is here
an area twenty degrees of latitude on one side and twenty degrees of longitude on the other
side for which there is not a single vertical section for subsurface temperatures and salini-
ties. There are in the Indian Ocean other areas ten degrees of latitude and ten degrees
of longitude on a side within which no observations have been made. The report was
intended to bring out in this way those areas in the different oceans on which there is no
information. It should, therefore, serve as a guide for oceanographic research on many
important oceanographic problems, especially those that deal with the geophysical aspects
of oceanography.

The catalogue of oceanographic institutions was intended to show for each country
the provisions in it for oceanographic research and the scope of its oceanographic activi-
ties. In this way just what was being done in each country would be made obvious, and
those countries, in which the provisions are inadequate, should they desire to do so, may
utilize the information for placing their programs in oceanography on a plane similar to
that of other countries.

The Committee commissioned Thomas Wayland Vaughan to prepare a report of
the kind indicated. On the first of September in 1932 he started on a trip around the
world to visit various oceanographic institutions and to consult with the oceanographers
in as many different countries as possible. After leaving the United States he went first
to England, thence to Norway, Sweden, Denmark, Germany, the Netherlands, France,
Spain, Monaco, Italy, Egypt, Siam, French Indo China, China, the Philippines, Japan,
and the Hawaiian Islands. On previous trips Mr. Vaughan had been in New Zealand,
Australia, the East Indies, and the Malay Peninsula, largely for the purpose of getting
information on oceanographic activities. Subsequent to his journey around the world
he visited oceanographic institutions along the Pacific coast of Canada and the United
States, the two marine laboratories in Scotland, and he either conferred with the directors
of or visited other oceanographic institutions in eastern Canada and the United States.

By the spring of 1934 the report had far advanced toward completion but in June,
1934, Mr. Vaughan was taken ill and was unable to resume work on the report until after
he retired from the Directorship of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography at the end
of August, 1936. During September he attended the meeting of the International Asso-
ciation of Physical Oceanography in Edinburgh and inspected marine laboratories in
Scotland. After his return to the United States, from the first part of November, 1936,
he gave the completion of the report his uninterrupted attention until it was ready
for press.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

A report such as this is necessarily a cooperative enterprise. Information is taken
not only from various publications but a great deal of it, perhaps most of it, has been
contributed by persons sympathetic with the purpose of the work. On the trip around the
world and on other visits to oceanographic institutions, everywhere the attitude was that
of sympathetic helpfulness. The governmental officials, the chiefs and the other members
of the staffs of oceanographic institutions, and the members of the faculties of the various
universities did everything possible to supply desired information. An imperfect list
of those from whom assistance was received on the journey around the world contains the
names of fully one hundred persons. These are thanked without listing individual names
but the names of those who have contributed to the report, either sections or manuscript
data, will be recorded.

Prof. Harald U. Sverdrup, formerly of the Michelsen Institute in Bergen, Norway,
and now the Director of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography at La JoUa, California,
and Prof. B. Helland-Hansen, Director of the Geophysical Institute in Bergen, Norway,
have prepared the section of the report entitled "Oceanographic Data, Vertical Sections
of Temperature and Salinity for the Norwegian Sea, the Polar Sea, and Adjacent Areas."
Much help was received from Prof. A. Defant, Director, and Prof. Georg Wlist, both of
the Institut flir Meereskunde, Berlin, Germany. Professor Defant gave permission to
use as base charts the charts published by him in his paper entitled "Systematische
Erforschung des Weltmeeres," and he also gave permission to use the text and charts to
illustrate the section of this report by Professor Wiist on "Horizontal Distribution of
Temperature, Salinity, and Density at Standard Depths in the Atlantic Ocean." Pro-
fessor Wiist consented to the use of this material and to the translation of the pages of
text that accompany the four charts. Messrs. C. O. Iselin and A. E. Parr compiled on a
chart the oceanographic stations occupied in the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mexico
by the Mabel Taylor and Atlantis. Manuscript information was supplied by Dr.
Stanley Kemp and Dr. N. A. Mackintosh on the stations occupied by Discovery II and
Wm. Scoresby. Sir Douglas Mawson supplied information on the stations occupied by
the Discovery I. Messrs. Hakon Mosby and J. K. Eggvin of the Geophysical Insti-
tute, Bergen, Norway, contributed a list of the stations occupied around Antarctica by the
Norwegian ship Norwegia. Mrs. Johannes Schmidt and Mr. Helge Thomsen gave in-
formation on the stations occupied by the Dana during its circumnavigation of the globe
in 1928-29. Dr. T. G. Thompson supplied lists of stations occupied in the north Pacific
by the Catalyst. Many manuscript records were received from the United States
Hydrographic Office and the Scripps Institution of Oceanography. Colonel R. B.
Seymour Sewell supplied information on the stations occupied by the Mabahiss in the
Indian Ocean and Dr. C. Crossland prepared a long manuscript list of stations occupied
by the same vessel in the Red Sea.

Dr. C. S. Piggot of the Geophysical Laboratory of the Carnegie Institution of Wash-

xiv INTRODUCTION

ganisms and the water. Available data on vertical sections of temperature and salinity
for the different ocean basins, the basic data for the treatment of the dynamics of the
movements of the water masses, are presented in the section of this report following this
Introduction. There is also, on subsequent pages, a short statement on available tidal
records. The only information on biological data is contained in the catalogue of institu-
tions. It would have been desirable to catalogue the available data on oxygen content,
the minimum oxygen layer, and the COj-content of seawater, chemical relations largely
controlled by organic activity in conjunction with circulation, but to do so was im-
practicable.

2. The study of the interaction of the sea and the atmosphere; solar radiation and its
penetration into seawater. Except to indicate data on temperature and salinity and to
catalogue institutions engaged on researches in marine meteorology, this complex of
subjects is not specially considered in this volume. Here may be noted only some geo-
physical and biological commonplaces. It is generally known that the engine that drives
the atmospheric and oceanic circulations is the Sun, and the engine that actuates life on
the earth, through its making photosynthesis possible, is the Sun. On the circulation of
the atmosphere and of the waters in the oceans, the rotation of the earth on its axis has a
directing influence. Any changes in density of seawater take place only at the sea surface
by heating or cooling, by precipitation or evaporation. Below the surface, the changes
are by the mixing of water masses of different densities. Winds blowing over the surface
of the sea produce surface currents which may uphold an abnormal distribution of density.
The characteristics of the contact zone between the atmosphere and the sea surface are of
great importance. Any change in the velocity of the wind over the surface results in a
change in the velocity of the surface currents. Since water possesses great heat capacity,
ocean currents cause the transfer of large quantities of heat. A change in the velocity of
an ocean current, due to a change in atmospheric circulation, may later influence meteoro-
logical conditions in a remote region. This concept may be of value in long range weather
forecasting, for one of the principles utilized in such forecasts is that of the time lag
between changes in oceanic phenomena and the corresponding change in atmospheric
conditions. Correlations of the kind indicated have been established in some parts of the
earth, as in western Norway. The depth of penetration of light into sea water controls
the depth to which plants may thrive in the sea.

It would be desirable to present synopsis of information available on these topics,
but that could not be done for this report.

3. The study of the ocean-bottom — its configuration, the material on its surface,
and the material that lies below it. The present state of knowledge of the configuration
of the sea-floor is indicated by five charts; notes are made on the latest studies of marine
bottom deposits; the results of studies of gravity at sea are contained in a chapter on that
subject; a summary of present knowledge of submarine earthquake epicenters is given on
three charts, there is a map showing the positions of the seismological stations of the world,
and there is a brief discussion of the structure of the ocean basin as indicated by seismo-
logical data, accompanied by a map of deep-focus earthquake epicenters; and finally there
is a chapter on the magnetic survey of the oceans. The summary discussions of these
aspects of the oceans are comprehensive and indicate how far knowledge of them has
advanced.

INTRODUCTION xv

A statement should now be made regarding those topics that are not discussed in
detail in this report, except in so far as they have already been mentioned and in so far
as they are considered in the catalogue of institutions engaged in oceanographic work.
They are the biological aspects of oceanography, including fisheries, the interaction
between the atmosphere and the ocean, and the penetration of solar radiation into the
sea. The emphasis of the report is on the geophysical aspects of oceanography, but with
only subordinate consideration of marine meteorology and solar radiation, two very
important subjects.

It has already been said more than once that the purpose of this volume is to present
synopses of information available for the study of several aspects of the oceans. Only a
few interpretations of data are here attempted, but the ultimate object is interpretation
toward which the cataloging of data is only a step, while the catalogue of institutions
merely shows the agencies concerned with collecting and interpreting data. Although
there are no interpretations of most of the data, it is pertinent to include some references
to literature in addition to those in the lists of sources of data.

Two publications on oceanographic expeditions by Rafael de Buen, the second a
revised edition of the first, are as follows :

de Buen, Rafael, Lista cronologica de las campanas y navegaciones a las que
se deben observaciones cientificas de caracter oceanografico : Consejo
Oceanog. Ibero-Amer., Mem., no. 5, pp. 62, 1930.
de Buen, Rafael, Liste chronologique des croisieres oceanographiques : Com.
internat. Expl. Sci. Mer Medit., Man. Observ. oceanog. a la Mer,
vol. l,pp. 73, 1934.

Gerhard Schott in his "Georgraphie des Atlantischen Ozeans" (1926) gives a history
of the voyages of discovery in the Atlantic Ocean (pp. 1-20) and an account of investiga-
tions of the Atlantic up to the end of 1925 (pp. 21-39). Since 1926 there has been a great
deal of additional research on the Atlantic. The names of the principal expeditions are
given in the lists of sources of the data plotted on the charts of stations occupied for
vertical sections of temperature and salinity, and there are references to the latest most
important literature on the dynamical oceanography of the Atlantic.

Schott in his volume "Geographie des Indischen und Stillen Ozeans" (1935) has given,
in the same way as in his volume on the Atlantic, an account of the voyages of exploration
in the Pacific (pp. 1-15), and of the researches prosecuted on those tw^o oceans (pp. 16-31).

In each of the volumes by Schott there are extensive lists of publications, making it
possible for the reader to go to the sources from which he took his data.

Another publication worthy of mention is the volume, "Oceanography," published
as volume five of the "Physics of the Earth" by the United States National Research
Council in 1932. The contents of this volume are as follows:

Introduction :

* Introduction: The domain of oceanography. N. H. Heck.
Bottom of the Ocean :

* Configuration of the oceanic basin.s. G. W. Littlehales.
Deep-sea deposits. Leon W. Collet.

Properties of Sea Water :

* Physical properties of sea water. Thomas G. Thompson.

* Chemistry of the sea. Thomas G. Thompson and Rex J. Robinson.

xvi INTRODUCTION

Movements of Sea Water :

* The waves of the sea. R. S. Patton and H. A. Marmer.

* Tides and tidal currents. H. A. Marmer.

* A summary of basic principles underlying modern methods of dynamical oceanography.

George F. McEwen.

* A survey of present knowledge of oceanic circulation based upon modern physical and chemical

observations. Arnold Schumacher.

* Ice in the sea. Edward H. Smith.
Oceanographic Instruments :

* Oceanographic instruments and methods. Floyd M. Soule.
Additional oceanographic instruments. W. E. Parker.
Deep sea bottom samplers. C. O. Isehn.

Relations of Oceanography to Other Sciences:

* Oceanography and meteorology. Charles F. Brooks.
Relation of biology to oceanography. A. G. Huntsman.

* The periodicity of oceanic spreading, mountain-marking, and paleography. Charles Schuchert.
Index.

The chapters that contain bibUographies are marked with asterisks. Some of the
bibliographies are extensive, containing references to the most important literature up
to the end of 1931.

Other references to literature will be found in the reports now appearing on many
expeditions, such as those of the Meteor, Discovery II and William Scoresby, Dis-
covery I, WiLLEBRORD Snellius, Atlantis, Carnegie, Mabahiss, ct Cetera. To give
lists of the parts of all these reports would require too much space. For those who wish
to do so, by combining the references contained in the publications above listed or indi-
cated, with the hundreds of citations on later pages of this volume, a fairly comprehensive
bibliography of oceanographic Uterature can be compiled.

Abstracts and lists of current oceanographic literature are contained in the Journal
du Conseil permanent international pour I'Exploration de la Mer, published in Copenhagen,
and in the Hydrographic Review, published by the International Hydrographic Bureau
in Monaco. Complete lists of Japanese publications on oceanography are given in Rec-
ords of Oceanographic Works in Japan, published by the National Research Council of
Japan, Tokyo. The Italian delegation of the Commission pour I'Exploration Scientifique
de la M^diterranee has published since 1928 a series entitled Bibliographia Oceanographica,
in which most current oceanographic literature is listed.

Many periodicals, such as the Geographical Review, published by the American
Geographical Society, and the Geographical Journal, published by the Royal Geographical
Society, contain reviews, and there are many notices in the Annalen der Hydrographic
und maritimen Meteorologie, published by the Deutsche Seewarte. Records of much of
the oceanographic activities in the United States are to be found in the Transactions of
the American Geophysical Union, Section of Oceanography, published by the United
States National Research Council. The triennial report of the International Committee
on the Oceanography of the Pacific, under the auspices of the Pacific Science Association,
gave summaries of oceanographic activities in the Pacific for the periods 1926-1929'

' Vaughan, T. Wayland, Reports of the International Committees on the Oceanography and the Coral Reefs of the
Pacific: Fourth Pacific Sci. Cong., Java, 1929, Proc, vol. 1, pp. 136, Batavia, 1930.

INTRODUCTION xvii

and 1929-1933.^ For the seven years covered by the reports they give a comprehensive
account of oceanographic activities in the Pacific. It was hoped that the work of that
Committee as a stimulating and coordinating agency for oceanographic research in the
Pacific would continue, but the future of the Pacific Science Association is doubtful.
The functioning of that Committee as an independent organization deserves consideration.
In the catalogue of institutions engaged in oceanographic research the provisions for
the publication of scientific results are given at the end of the account of each institution
whenever the desired information could be procured. By utilizing these suggestions, it
is possible to obtain references to most of the current literature on oceanograohic subjects.

^ Vaughan,T. Wayland, International Committee on the Oceanography of the Pacific — Report of the Chairman: Fifth
Pacific Sci. Cong., Victoria and Vancouver, 1933, Proc. vol. 1. pp. 245-384, 1934.

SERIAL SECTIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY IN
THE DIFFERENT OCEAN BASINS

GENERAL DISCUSSION

Just when the concept of the unity of all oceans
originated is not easy to ascertain. As soon as it
was recognized that the cold water in the depths of
the oceans had to come from Polar regions and that
the renewal of the supply of water in those regions
had to come from other latitudes, the idea of a world
ocean was born, and research was directed toward
both the circulation within and the exchange of
water between the different ocean basins. Appar-
ently the first one to undertake comprehensive
investigations in a systematic way was Alfred Merz,
who as long ago as 1922 initiated a card catalogue
of all hydrographic observations in all three oceans.'
These compilations were utilized in the preparation
of several articles by Wiist on both the Atlantic and
Pacific Oceans and one entitled "Meridionale
Schichtung und Tiefenzirkulation in den Westhalften
der drei Ozeane,"^ and another by Lotte Moller
on the Indian Ocean. Defant in a paper, "Die
systematische Erforschung des Weltmeeres,"^ pub-
lished four charts, two for the Atlantic, one for the
Pacific, and one for the Indian Ocean, on which
were shown the positions of the stations at which
vertical sections of temperature and salinity were
made in depths of 1,000 meters and in depths of
3,000 and more meters, according to records avail-
able at the Institut fur Meereskunde up to February
1, 1928, and he pubhshed lists of the sources of the
data. This chapter of the present volumes may be
regarded as an extension of the work initiated by
Merz, but several areas not covered by the charts
published by Defant have been added, viz., the
Norwegian, the Polar, and adjacent seas, the Medi-
terranean Sea, the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean
Sea, and the Red Sea. For various reasons it was
decided to omit the Bosporus and the Dardanelles
and the Black Sea.

Regarding the Bosporus and Dardanelles, it will
be said that the Institut fur Meereskunde in Berhn
pubhshed in April 1928 "Alfred Merz Hydro-

1 See article b y G. Wtist, this volume, p. 12.

'i Conseil internat. Explor. Mer, Jour., vol. 5, pp. 7-21,
1930. The bibliography contains references to pertinent
literature.

' Gesellsch. Erdkunde Berlin, Jubilaums-Sonderband,
1928, pp. 459-505, 1928.

graphische Untersuchungen in Bospoms und Dar-
danellen," bearbeitet von Lotte Moller; Inst.
Meeresk. Veroffentl. Neue Folg., A., Geogr. natur-
wiss. Rhe., Heft 18. There are 284 pages of text
and a foho atlas of sixteen hthographed plates.
Merz made two expeditions himself, 1917 and 1918,
and he utilized the observations of others. Before
his death he had done much toward putting the
results into form for publication, but he did not
complete his manuscript. Profes.sor Moller finished
the report, and it was presented to the Gesellschaft
fur Erdkunde of Berlin on the One Hundredth
Anniversary of its founding "im Andenken an ihrem
unvergesslichen Vorstandsmitglied Alfred Merz,
gewddmet vom Institut fiir Meereskunde."

During recent years the Russians have conducted
extensive investigations in the Black Sea. Ref-
erences to some papers on the work have been
found but they are very fragmentary. No complete
account of the work nor any synopsis or summary
of results has been available. To give references to
the few publications examined seems inadvisable.

Some notes will be made on the utilization of
temperature and salinity in determining oceanic
circulation. The methods of modern djoiamical
oceanography rest primarily on the researches of
V. Bjerknes and V. W. Ek:nan, but the develop-
ments and elaborations by Helland-Hansen, Sand-
strom, Hesselberg and Sverdrup, and others, have
been invaluable in building up not only the princi-
ples but also the technique of practically applying
the principles. Two summaries of modern methods
will be mentioned. They are Albert Defant's
"Dynamische Ozeanographie"« and G. F. McEwen's
"A summary of baisic principles underlying modern
methods of dynamical oceanography."'

Concurrently with increase in knowledge of the
physics of the sea and of the methods of utilizing
the physical facts derived from the sea in solving
problems of circulation, better plans for work at sea
have been formulated and there has been improve-

* Einfiihrung in die Geophysik III, Berlin, verlag von
Julius Springer, 1929, pp. 222.

«• Physics of the Earth, vol. 5, U. S. National Res. Council
Bull. 85, pp. 310-357, 1932. There are three pages of
bibliography.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

ment in oceanographic instniments. It is now
generally recognized that oceanographic stations
should be closely spaced in nets, so as to make it
possible to construct sections in almost any direc-
tion, and the observations and collections should
extend to the bottom. The instruments used in
recording temperatures and determining the depths
at which observations and collections are made must
be of a high order of precision. The bottles for
collecting water samples must be efficient — they must
not leak. The titrations for chlorine must be made
with the greatest attainable accuracy, for on them
depends the calculations of sahnity and density.
The object is to make accurate physical measure-
ments for use by mathematical methods, or by
graphical methods which require as great precision
as the mathematical treatment.

Nearly all modern oceanographic work, both at
sea and in the laboratory, whether on shipboard or
on land, meets the requirements of accuracy, but
many older observations and determinations, some
of rather recent date, are faulty. Since Professor
Wiist in the article by him translated for this volume
has adequately discussed methods of testing the
accuracy of observations and determinations, noth-
ing more will be said on the subject in this place.

For this volume the compilation for the Nor-
wegian, North Polar, and adjacent seas was made
by Dr. H. U. Sverdrup and Prof. B. Helland-Hansen ;
that for the Atlantic Ocean by Professor Wiist ; and
most of that for the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean
Sea by Dr. A. E. Parr and Mr. C. Iselin. For
other ocean areas, except to use data already pub-
hshed by Professor Defant, the data have been
assembled by the compiler of this volume. As
has been stated, most modern records, such as
those on the Arihauer Hansen, the Dana, the
Discovery Expeditions, the Mabahiss, and a
number of other vessels are acceptable. For the
Pacific Ocean a card catalogue of stations at which
hydrographic observations were made, similar to
the catalogue initiated by Merz, was started. Many
hundreds of cards were prepared and T-S curves
of the usual kind were drawn for each of the stations
represented by a card. Two facts quickly became
obvious. The first was that most of the older
records were too inaccurate to be serviceable in the
study of the dynamics of the water masses, and,
except those stations plotted on Defant's charts,
most of them were discarded. The .second fact
was that to prepare cards for all stations in the
Pacific and to draw T-S curves would require

more time than was available for the preparation
of this report. The cards and T-S curves that
had been prepared were used as checks, in so far as
possible. Those who may use this report will
have to be guided by the names of the vessels and
the dates of the observations in passing on the
trustworthiness of the records.

There are a few warnings that can not be too
strongly emphasized. The finst is that sufficiently
accurate subsurface temperatures cannot be deter-
mined by the old style reversing thermometers that
were not equipped with auxiliary thermometers.
The auxiliary thermometers are essential. With
proper thermometric equipment the limit of error
of the temperature records should not exceed
±.01°C., and it is possible to attain even greater
precision, limit of error about ±.003°C. The
safinities should be determined by or checked by
chlorine titration and the hmit of error should not
exceed ±.01 °/oo. The most recent memoir on
the determination of the constants of sea water is
that by Willy Bein, Heinz-Giinther Hirsekorn, and
Lotte Moller, entitled "Konstantenbestimmungen
des Meerwassers imd Ergebnisse iiber Wasserkor-
per."' Four methods for determining the density
of sea water are given: (1) Optical methods, by the
measurement of refraction; (2) electrical conduc-
tivity; (3) chlorine titration; (4) direct determina-
tion of den.sity. This publication should be studied
by all who are working on the physics of seawater
and dynamical oceanography.

In addition to the warnings already given, there
is another. It is the necessity of precision in the
determination of the depths at which temperature
records and collections of samples are made. Depths
intermediate between the surface and the bottom
should be determined by means of improtected
reversing thermometers. Because of errors in the
determination of depths, probably due to too great
ware-angle, some temperature records that seem
to be accurate enough have had to be discarded.

When the expense of conducting oceanographic
operation at sea is so great, no pains should be
spared to procure and use properly the best obtain-
able instruments. Unless the precautions above
indicated are heeded, observations made at great cost
may possess little, even no value.

Surface temperatures and temperatures at shallow-
depths are considered not at all or only casually in
this compilation. Whenever a station is occupied

« Institut fur Meere-skunde, Veroffent, N. F., Heft 28,
pp. Ill, 240, 14 pis., 1935.

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

for vertical sections of temperature and salinity, it
is customary to make a record of the surface tem-
peratures and to collect a sample of the water at the
surface for the determination of the salinity.
Schott has published compilations for both the
Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, and there are numerous
other publications. The Australian Meteorological
Service is preparing and distributing quarterly charts
of surface temperatures for the area bounded by
longitude 90° and 165°E. and by latitude 0° to 45°S. ;
the Royal Netherlands Meteorological Service has
recently issued a large two volume folio atlas of
charts for the China Sea; the Marine Observatory
at Kobe is publishing records of sea-surface tempera-
tures made by Japanese vessels; the Kydrographic
Office of the United States Navy has pul)lishcd
monthly charts of sea-surface temperature by one-
degree quadrangles for the north Pacific and it ha.s
other compilations in progress. Other organiza-
tions, such as the Marine Division of the Royal
British Meteorological Service, are also studying
sea-surface temperatures. Sea-surface tempera-
tures, as well as surface currents, are significant for
the study of various meteorological problems. A
note has already been made on the possible value of
such information in attempts at long-range weather
forecasting. The value for navigational purposes
is obvious.

It is clear from what has been said that the
emphasis in the present section of this volume is
mostly on the temperature and salinity of the
water at depths of 1000 meters and more. Not so
much attention is given to shallow depths, but the
subject should not be passed over without some
consideration. Defant in his paper already referred
to, "Systematische Erforschung des Weltmeeres,"
proposed to divide ocean waters between the Polar
fronts into three layers (a) a surface layer of agita-
tion and nearly uniform temperature; (b) a lower
layer in which the temperature decreases rapidly,
the layer of the thcrmocline; and (c) a still lower
layer in which the temperature range is slight, only
a few degrees Centigrade. The upper two layers
(a and b) are designated the troposphere; while the
lower layer (c) is called the stratosphere. The
papers by Wiist already cited contain discussions
of the tropospheric and stratospheric circulations
in the three oceans. Defant in his memoir, "Die
Troposphare"' gives an elaborate account of the

' Defant, A., Schichtung und Zirkulation des Atlan-
tischen Ozeans, dritte Lieferung, Die Troposphare: Wis-
sensch. Ergeb. Meteor Exped. 1925-1927, vol. 6, pt. 1,
pp. 289-411, text-figs. 26-76, pis. 36-54a, 1936.

various features of the Atlantic troposphere and its
circulation. The sources of the data are also given.
Defant follows Wiist in considering the minimum
oxygen layer as the base of the troposphere. Fur-
ther consideration of the southwestern north Atlan-
tic is contained in the two papers by Giinter Dietrich
cited below.' The interpretations of the tropo-
spheric and part of the stratospheric circulation of
the oceans advocated by Wiist, Defant, and Dietrich
are not accepted by all oceanographers, as has been
expressed by Iselin.'

Iselin calls attention to two views regarding the
depth of the lower boundary of the major ocean
currents. According to the older view the velocity
gradually decreases with depth but there is some
flow parallel to the surface movements down to at
least 2,000 meters. According to the newer \'iew
the layer of water with the minimum oxygen content
is nearly motionless and marks the lower limit of
surface currents. The axis of the minimum oxygen
layer varies from depths of 300 to 400 meters near
the equator to 800 meters in higher latitudes. The
results of calculations of the volume and the velocity
of ocean currents are conditioned by which of the
above theories the particular investigator favors.
Very divergent results are obtained according to the
interpretation adopted. The relative merits of the
proposed interpretations will not be discussed in the
present volume. Only the differences of opinion
will be pointed out and it will be said that additional
careful, critical investigation is needed.

The data on serial sections of temperature and
salinity besides being of value in studies of problems
of oceanographic circulation are indispensable for
computing oceanic depths from the time interval
in deep-sea sounding by means of echo methods.

Since the positions of the .stations that have been
occupied for serial sections of temperature and
salinity are shown on the charts of the different
oceans, it does not seem necessary to discuss in
detail in the text of this volume those areas on
which information is deficient. But it will be
remarked, that there are still enormous areas in the
Pacific Ocean on which there are no data that can be

* Dietrich, Giinter, Die Lage der Meeresoberflache im
Druckfeld von Ozean und Atmosphare, mit besonderer
Beriicksichtigung des westlichen nord atlantischen Ozeans
und des Golfes von Mexiko: Inst. Meereskunde Berlin,
Veroffentl. N. F., Geogr.-naturwiss. Reihe, Heft 33, pp.
1-52, Jan. 1937.

Dietrich, Giinter, Ueber Bewegung und Herkuft des
Golfstromwassers: Ibid., pp. .53-91.

' Iselin, Columbus, How deep do ocean currents flow:
Abstract of paper presented before National Academy of
Sciences, April 26, 1937, Science, vol. 85, p. 439, May 7, 1937.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

used for the study of the physical and chemical
properties and the movements of the water masses —
for example, west of the Galapagos Islands, between
the equator and 10° of north latitude, to 140° west
longitude, there is no information except at one
station on the equator which was occupied for sub-
surface temperature. There are no data on the
area between 10° and 20° north latitude and 100°
and 130° west longitude. In the south Pacific there
are large areas within which there are no available
observations. In the west Pacific west of 170°
west longitude over to the area of operation of the
Japanese there are very few observations.

In the Indian Ocean, between the areas recently
worked by the Mabahiss and the Dana in its
northern part, and the areas investigated by Dis-
covery I and Discovery II and Norwegia around
Antarctica, and between lines from Antarctica to
the Cape of Good Hope and from Antarctica to
southern Australia, there are very few observations.
There are many areas 10 degrees of latitude and 10
degrees of longitude on a .side for which there is not
a single observation.

Until more oceanographic observations have been
made in these areas it will not be possible to solve

numerous important oceanographic problems. For
example, for the strip, between 10°S and 20°N
latitude, across the Pacific Ocean that includes
the North Equatorial Current, the Equatorial
Counter Current, and the South Equatorial Current
there are very few observations. The Carnegie
in its cruises in the Pacific crossed this belt along
three lines and a few observations were made by the
Dana. Otherwise, except records of temperature
and one fine of serial sections of temperature and
salinity, reliable data are confined to the east and
west ends of the belt.

To make more extended comments seems un-
necessary.

Professors Sverdrup, Helland-Hansen, and Wiist
have put on the charts prepared by them the num-
bers for the different stations, as well as abbrevi-
ations. It would have been preferable to have done
this for the other stations instead of merely put-
ting down the abbreviations for the names of the
vessels from which the observations and collections
were made, but with the references to sources of
data additional information on the stations can be
procured by those who desire it.

ATLANTIC OCEAN AND CONNECTING SEAS

OCEANOGRAPHIC DATA, VERTICAL SECTIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY FOR
THE NORWEGIAN SEA, THE POLAR SEA, AND ADJACENT AREAS

By Prof. HARALD U. SVERDRUP
Director, Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California

AND

Prof. B. HELLAND-HANSEN

Director, Geophysical Institute, Bergen, Norway

Pl-ites 1, 2, 3

Following the plan agreed upon during confer-
ences in Bergen I have completed the compilation
of the oceanographic data from the Norwegian Sea,
the Polar Sea, and adjacent areas.

I had special charts of the Norwegian Sea made
and on these the available observations of tempera-
ture and salinity at the depths 500, 1000, and 2000
meters have been entered. I included the 500
meter level in order to give a more comprehensive
view of the greater amount of material which is
available from the upper layers. In the charts the
1000 meter isobath has been shown. It will be
noted that some stations with observations below
1000 meters fall inside the line. The reason is that
the depth curve has been taken from Helland-
Hansen and Nansen's bathymetric chart of the
Norwegian Sea of 1909 and has not been corrected
according to results of later soundings. The chart,
however, can not be much in error.

I include here lists giving:

1. Abbreviations used in the charts.

2. List of publications containing observations

from the Norwegian Sea.

3. List of publications containing observations

from the sea east of Spitsbergen, Murman
Sea, Barentz Sea, etc.

4. List of publications containing observations

from the Kara Sea, the Siberian Sea, the
Polar Sea, etc.
■ 5. List of publications containing observations
from the Baltic.
No special list of publications containing observa-
tions from the North Sea has been prepared, since
practically all data are contained in the Bulletins
of the Conseil International.

I beg to note that a great number of observations

in the Faeroe-Scotland channel have not been
entered in the charts, because they would become
overfilled.

I hope that the lists are complete, but our library
and the other libraries to which we have access
may not contain all existing publications.

Since the paper prepared by Professor Sverdrup
could not be promptly published after it was sub-
mitted, additional oceanographic observations
needed to be incorporated. This supplement was
kindly undertaken by Prof. B. Helland-Hansen, the
Director of the Geophysical Institute at Bergen,
who makes the following comments:

The published observations are to be found in the
Bulletins Hydrographiques. The stations are marked
and distinguished after the same principles as have been
used by Sverdrup. Data from the Bulletins are indicated
thus: Bull. 1932 C17, 1933 C18, 1934 C'19, and 1935 C20.
For 1933 I have also entered some stations marked CIS''.
The observations are to be found in an appendix for that
year, accompanying the Bulletin for 1934. All of them
are made by the Norwegian sealer Heimland I. The
areas neglected by Sverdrup and mentioned in his text,
have been neglected here too.

Beside the stations from which observations have been
published in detail, I have also marked on the charts all the
stations occupied by the Armauer Hansen in the southern
part of the Norwegian Sea 1935 and 1936. These stations
are not distinguished by any letters; the numbers for each
year are indicated in such a way that the number of every
station can be found out. It will be some time before the
observations can be printed. They will be published in con-
nection with all our meteorological observations and the re-
sults of dynamic calculations. I think that it may be of in-
terest to see the grouping of these stations. It may be
added that our observations in The Norwegian Sea from
1935 and 1936 only rarely embrace 500 meters. We had in
1935 observations at 400 and 600 meters wherever the depth
to the bottom was large enough. Most of these stations are
indicated in the chart for 1,000 meters. In 1936 we also had

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

stations between those indicated in the chart for 1,000
meters, but there the observations were made only down to
400 meters. Thus, for 400 meters, we had in 1936 many
more stations than shown in the charts.

Abbreviations used on the charts

# Temperature.

O Salinity.

O Temperature and salinity.

—2 The publication gives 2 observations at one position.

A Nansen, F. : Northern waters. Videnskabs-Selska-

bets Skrifter 106. I. Mat.-Naturv. Klasse, No. 3.
(Christiana 1906.)

AH Armauer Hansen.

B Blafjeld.

Bl Bulletin (Trimestriel) des Resultats acquis pendant
les croisieres periodiques. Conseil International.
(Copenhagen 1903-08.)
Ann6e 1902-03.

B2 1903-04.

B3 1904-05.

B4 1905-06.

B5 1906-07.

B6 1907-08.

BR Braarud, Trygve, and Ruud, Johan T.: The 0ST
Expedition to the Denmark Strait 1929. I. Hy-
drography. HvalrSdets Skrifter Nr. 4. (Oslo
1932.)

CI Bulletin Hydrographique. Conseil International.
(Copenhagen 1910-.)
Ann fee 1908-09.

C2 1909-10.

C3 1910-11.

C4 1911-12.

C5 1912-13.

C6 1913-14.

C7 1920-21-22-23.

C8 1924.

C9 1923-24. Append. I and II.

CIO 1925.

Cll 1926.

C12 1927.

C13 1928.

C14 1929.

C15 1930.

C16 1931.

Da Danish observations.

Eg Scottish observations.

F Akerblom, Filip: Recherches oceanographiques.

Uppsala Univers. Arskrift 1903. Mat. and
naturv. II. (Uppsala 1904.)

Fa Farm and Blomstersael.

G Great Britain observations.

H Helland-Hansen, Bi0rn: Physical Oceanography and

Meteorology. Part II; repr. from Rep. of the
Scientific Results of the Michael Sars North
Atlant. Deep Sea Exped. 1910. Vol. I. (Ber-
gen 1930.)

Hj
HO

M-I.4

M-17

M-19

MS-01
MS-02

Pg
RA

Sc
T
W

Hamberg, Axel: Hydrographische Arbeiten der von
A. G. Nathorst geleiteten schwedischen Polarex-
pedition 1898. Kungl. Svenska Vetenskaps-
Akademiens Handlingar, vol. XLI, No. 1. (Stock-
holm 1906.)

Johan Hjort.

Due d'Orleans: Croisiere Oceanographique accom-
plie a bord de la Belgica dans la Mer du Gr0nland
1905. Oceanographieet Biologic. Journal dea
stations. (Bruxelles 1909.)

Helland-Hansen, Bj0rn and Nansen, Fridtjof:
The sea west of Spitsbergen. Skrifter utgitt av
Videnskapsselskapet i Kristiania Mat.-Naturv.
Klasse, 2 bind. (Kristiania 1913.)

Knudsen, Martin: Hydrography. The Danish
Ingolf-Expedition, Vol. I, Part I, No. 2. (Copen-
hagen 1899.)

Nielsen, J. N.: Hydrography of the Waters by the
Faroe Islands and Iceland during the Cruises of
the Danish Research Steamer Thor in the summer
1903. Medd. fra Komm. for Havunders0gelser
Serie: Hydrografi, Bind I, No. 4. (K0benhavn
1904.)

Nielsen, J. N.: Contribution to the Hydrography of
the Waters North of Iceland. Medd. fra Komm
for Havunders. Serie: Hydrogr. Bind I, No. 7.
(K0benhavn 1905.)

Nielsen, J. N.: Contribution to the Hydrography of
the Northeastern Part of the Atlantic Ocean.
Medd. fra Komm. for Havunders. Serie: Hy-
drografi, Bind I, No. 9. (K0benhavn 1907.)

Helland-Hansen, B. and Nansen, F.: The Nor-
wegian Sea. Rep. on Norwegian Fishery and
Marine Investigations, Vol. II, No. 2. (Ber-
gen 1909.)

Ibid.

Nansen, Fridtjof: Spitsbergen Waters. Videnskabs-
Selskabets Skrifter 1915. I. Mat.-Naturv. Klasse,
No. 2. (Christiania 1915.)

Page.

Martens, Erik: Hydrographical Investigations dur-
ing the Michael Sars Expedition 1924. Rapports
et Proces-Verbaux des Reunion, Vol. LVI. (Co-
penhague 1929.)

Sj0strand, Johannes: De hydrografiska forhM-
landena i Norra Ishafvet mellan norska kusten
och Spetsbergen etc. ir 1920. Ur Svenska Hy-
drografisk-Biologiska Kommissionens Skrifter.
VII. (G0teborg 1922.)

Scottish observations.

ToviK.

Sverdrup, H. U.: The Wilkins-EUsworth Arctic
Expedition, Scientif. Results, Part I; II Oceanog-
raphy. Papers in Physical Oceanography and
Meteorology, Vol. II, No. 1. Publ. by Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology and Woods Hole
Oceanographic Institution.

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

Sources of Data, The Norwegian Sea
(Iceland, East-Greenland, Spitsbergen, and Norwegian Waters)

PCBL1CAT10N8

Bulletin (Trimestriel) dcs Resultats acquis pendant les croisifires periodiques.
Conseil International. Copenhagen 1903-08:
Annee 1902-03. (Da(nish), N(or\vegian) and Sc(ottish) observations)
Annee 1903-04. (Da., N., Sc. observations)
Annfee 1904-05. (Da., Sc. observations)
Ann6e 1905-06. (Da., So. observations)
Ann6e 1906-07. (Sc. observations)
Ann^e 1907-08. (Sc. observations)
Bulletin Hydrographique. Conseil International. Copenhagen 1910- :
Annee 1908-09. (Sc. observations)
Annee 1909-10. (Da., Sc. observations)
Annee 1910-11. (N., Sc. observations)
Ann^e 1911-12. (Sc. observations)
Annee 1912-13. (N. observations)
Ann6e 1913-14. (Sc. observations)
Annfee 1920-21-22-23. (Sc. observations)
Annee 1924. (Da., N., Sc. observations)
Annee 1923-24 Append. I and II. (N. observations ^yith Joh.\n Hjorth,

Blafjeld, Armauer-Han.sen, ToviK, Farm, and Blomster.sael)
Annee 1925. (Da., N., Sc. observations)
Annee 1926. (N. observations)
Annee 1927. (N., Sc. observations)
Annee 1928. (N. observations)
Annee 1929. (N., Sc, observations)

Ann^e 1930. (N. observations) D. at East-Greenland below oOO m.
Ann^e 1931. (N. observations)
NB: Ca. 80 observations at 1000 m. in the area between 60°-62° N. Lat. and
0°-10° W. Long, are not inserted on the chart. The observations are
publisWd in the following "Bulletins": B3, B5, B6, CI, C2, C3, C4, C6,
C7, C8, CIO, C12, C14
A large number of observations in the area between 60°-64'' N. Lat. and
0°-10° W. Long, are not inserted on the 500 m. Chart
Report (Northern Area) on fishery and hydrographical investigations in the Below 500 ni.
North Sea. (London 1904- .) In these publications are given supple-
mentary statements to the Scottish observations printed in the "Bulle-
tin Hydrographique"
Braardd, Trygve, and Klem, Alf: Hydrographical and Chemical Investiga- BR
tions in the Coastal Waters off M0re and in the Romsdalsfjord. Hval-
radets Skrifter Nr. 1. (Oslo 1931)
Due D'Orleans: Croisiere Oceanographique accomplie a bord de la Belgica dans HO
la Mer du Gr0nland 1905. Oceanographie et Biologie. Journal des
stations. (Bruxelles 1909)
Hamberg, Axel. Hydrographische Arbeiten der von A. G. Nathorst geleiteten
schwedischen Polar-expedition 1898. Kungl. Svenska Vetenskaps-
Akademiens Handlingar, vol. XLI, No. 1. (Stockholm 1906)
Helland-Hansen, B. and Nansen, F.: The Norwegian Sea, Norwegian Re-
searches 1900-04 with Michael Sars. Report on Norwegian Fishery
and Marine Investigations, Vol. II, No. 2. (Bergen 1909)
Knudsen, Martin: Hydrography. In The Danish Ingolf-Expedition. Vol. I,
Part I, No. 2. (Copenhagen 1899)

The temperatures are stated only to tenths of a Centigrade.
Makaroff, S.: Yermak wo Ijedakh (In the ice) (St. Petersburg 1901)
Martens, ErUc: Hydrographical Investigations during the Michael Sars Ex- RA
pedition 1924

and
Martens, Erik: Hydrographical Investigations in the Norwegian Sea off M0re
1925-28. In Rapports et Proces-Verbaux des Reunion, Vol. LVI

IBREVIA-

OBSERVATIONS AT

T10N3

DEPTH OF

2000,

1000, 500 meters

2000,

1000, 500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

1000,

500 m.

CIO

1000,

500 m.

Oil

500 m.

012

500,

1000 m.

013

1000,

500 m.

014

1000,

500 m.

015

1000,

500 m.

C16

500 m.

500, 1000 m.

2000, 1000, 500 m.

1000,

500 m.

2000,

1000, 500 m.

MS-01

MS-02

2000,

1000, 500 m.

500 m.

10 INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

AEBREVIA- OBSERVATIONS AT

DEPTH OF

PUBLICATIONS TI0N8

Nansen, F. : Northern Waters. (Capt. Roald Amundsen's oceanogr. observa- A 2000, 1000, 500 m.

tions in the Arctic Seas (1901). Videnskabs-Selskabets Skrifter 1906.

I. Mat.-Naturvidensk. Klasse, No. 3. (Christiania 1906)
Nansen, Fridtjof: Spitsbergen Waters. Oceanogr. observations during the N 1000,500 m.

cruise of the Veslem^y to Spitsbergen in 1912. Vidensk.-Selskapets

Skrifter 1915. I. Mat.-Naturvidenskapelig Klasse, No. 2. (Chris-
tiania 1915)
Nielsen, J. N. : Contributions to the Hydrography of the North-Eastern Part of M-19 500 m.

the Atlantic Ocean. Meddelelser fra Kommisionen for Havunders0gel-

ser. Serie: Hydrografi. Bind I. No. 9. (K0benhavn 1907)
Nielsen, J. N.: Contribution to the Hydrography of the Waters North of Ice- M-17 500 m.

land. Medd. fra Komm. for Havunders0gelser. Serie: Hydrografi,

Bind I. No. 7. (K0benhavn 1905)
Nielsen, J. N.: Hydrography of the Waters by the Faroe Islands and Iceland M-14 1000, 500 m.

during the cruises of the Danish research steamer Thor in the summer

1903. Medd. fra Komm. for Havunders0gelser. Serie: Hydrografi,

Bind I. No. 4. (K0benhavn 1904)
Sj0stkand, Johannes. De hydrografiska forhSUandena i Norra Ishafvet mellan S7 500 m.

norska kusten och Spetsbergen etc. &r 1920. Ur Svenska Hydrografisk-

Biologiska Kommissionens Skrifter. VII. (G0teborg 1922)
SvERDRUP, H. U.: The Wilkins-EUsworth Arctic Expedition, Scientific Results, W 2000, 1000, 500 m.

Part I; II Oceanography. Papers in Physical Oceanography and

Meteorology, Vol. II, No. 1. Published by Massachusetts Institute of

Technology and Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution
Trolle, Alf: Hydrographical Observations from the Denmark E.\pedition. T 2000,1000,500 m.

Danmark-Ekspeditionen Til Gr0nlands Nord0stkyst 1906-08. Bind I.

Nr. 2. Reprinted from "Meddelelser om Gr0nland.'' Bind XLI.

(K0benhavn 1913)
Akerblom, Filip: Recherches oceanographiques. Expedition de M. A. G. F 2000,1000,500 m.

Nathorst en 1899. Uppsala univers. Arskrift 1903. Mat. & naturv. II.

(Uppsala 1904)

The following publication is not included in the list, the temperatures being
stated only in tenths of a centigrade, and the salinities being useless:

Ryder, C: Den 0stgr0nlandske Expedition 1891-1892. Part I. V. Hydro- 1000,500 m.

graphy. Meddelelser om Gr0nland, Bind XVII. (Kj0benhavn 1895)

Sources of Data, The Sea East of Spitsbergen, Knipowitsch, N.: GrundzUge der Hydrologie im europais-

MURMAN Sea, Barents Sea, ET cetera <^hem Eismeer (1906). (Mentions all publications of

interest in these waters up to 1906.) (St. Petersburg).

Bulletin Trimestriel des Resultats acquis pendant les Malinina, W. S.: Zur Hydrographie des Barentsmeeres

croisieres p6riodiques. Conseil International . . . , Berichte des Wissenschaftlichen Meeresinstitutes, IV,

Copenhagen. Annee 1903-04, 04-05, 05-06, 06-07. Lfg 2. (Moscow 1929)

(Russian observations.) (Copenhagen 1903-07) Nansen, Fridthjof: The Norwegian North Polar Expedi-

Bulletin Hydrographique etc. Conseil International . . . , tion 1893-96— Scientific results. Vol. III. (Chris-
Copenhagen. (Continuation of the above series), tiania 1902)

1912-13 (German obs.), 1923-24 Appendices (Norwe- Rossolimo, J.: On the Hydrography of the Sea of Barents,

gian obs.), 1929 (Norwegian obs.). (Copenhagen) Berichte des Wiss. Meeresinstitutes. Band III. Lfg.

Breitfuss, L. L. : Expedition fuer wissenschaftlich-prak- j (Moskau 1928)

tische Untersuchungen a. d. Murman-Ktiste. Bericht Rpppi^, e.: Die Hydrographie des Barentsmeeres im Som-

iiber die Tatigkeit pro 1902. (St. Petersburg 1903) ^^^ jgjg Wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen,

Breitpuss, L. L.: Expedition fuer etc. Bericht iiber die Helgoland XIII, 1919. (Kiel 1919)

Tatigkeit pro 1903. (St. Petersburg 1906) o r> t, ■ -u^ -u^i- -o ■ w 11, i n

_ ^ ^ '^-. _ .\. , , n • Li 1- J- Schulz, Bruno: Bericht uber die Reise von Wilhelm Bren-

Breitfuss, L. L.: Expedition fuer etc. Bericht uber die , , t, . t^ ^ trvoo a

Tatigkeit pro 1904. (St. Petersburg 1908) "^'=''^ '" ^as Barentsmeer im Fruhsommer 1923. Anna-

Breitfuss, L. L.: Expedition fiir etc. Bericht uber die 'e" der Hydrographie und Maritimen Meteorologie.

Tatigkeit pro 1905. (St. Petersburg 1912) LV. Jahrgang, Heft VI. (Berlin 1927)

Knipowitsch, N.: Expedition fiir wissenschaftlich-prak- Schulz, Bruno and Wolff, Alfred: Hydrographische und

tische Untersuchungen an der Murman-Kuste. Band planktologische Ergebnisse der Fahrt des Fischereis-

I. (St. Petersburg 1902) chutzbootes Zieten in das Barentsmeer 1926. Berichte

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 1

--i.

^0 2MOlTAV«3aaO
Oe TA «:» YTIMUA3 QMA !

*i»«3,W^«3.**ji^

i] IL

fr,

>J&1

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 2

lOE.

NoRWRoiAN Sea, Obsekva hons of TEMPHUATrRE wi) Salimitt at 1000 Meters

''-i'^Ai?0^>^ L^ ".'■^;

■.•-■0-T-;ViPjTV

-0^

r _■- i.-iM^s^r-

'"0 J.y*Oi

,{S^

^.V-J^

■■> ■

'■■' .,,15-

fOrM

'K:

'- ; !. J ... " ■

ooof TA (O) yr;

-.X^JJ T.i YTT",-V! T.. -• (!'/,■ T,S ) t'Afi'?

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 3

OBSERVATIONS OF TEMPERATURE (•)
AND SALINITY (O) AT 2000 METERS

Norwegian Sea, Observations of Temperature and Salinity at 2000 Meters

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

der deutschen Wiss. Komm. fiir Meeresforschung.
Neue Folge, B. Ill, H. 3. (Berlin 1927)

ScHULz, Bruno and Wolff, Alfred; Hydrographie und
Oberfliichenplankton des westlichen Barentsmeeres im
Sommer 1927. Berichte der deutschen Wiss. Komm.
fijr Meeresforschung. Neue Folge, B. IV, H. 5. (Ber-
lin 1929)

SouvoROw, E. : An Expedition to the Cheskaya Bay in the
Year 1926 and its Hydrographical Works. Transac-
tions North. Scientific and Economic Expd. No. 43,
(U.S.S.R. Sei. Techn. Dept. No. 278). Moscow 1929)

TiMONOFF, V. V. : Zur Frage tiber das hydrologische Regime
der Strasse zwischen dem Weissen und dem Barents-
meere, in Institute Hydrologique de Russie. Explora-
tion des mers russes. Fasc. 1. (Leningrad 1925)

Wasnetzov, W. a.: Hydrographische Beschreibung der
Tschesskaja Bai nach den Materialen der lOten Expedi-
tion des Wiss. Meeresinstitutes. Berichte des Wiss.
Meeresinstitutes IV, Lfg. 2. (Moscow 1929)

WiESE, W.: Scientific Results of the Expedition with
Malyguin in Barentssea 1928. Transactions of the
Institute for Exploration of the North. No. 45.
(Moscow 1929)

WiESE, W.: Scientific Results of the Expedition to Franz
Josephs Land in the Summer 1929. (Wiese and Lak-
tionoff: Tiefseebeobachtungen) Transactions of the
Institute for Scientific Exploration of the North.
No. 49. (Moscow 1931)

Zdbow, N. N.: Hydrological Investigations in the South-
western Part of the Barents Sea during the Summer
1928. Transactions of the Oceanogr. Institute, Vol.
II, No. 4. (Moscow 1932)

Sources of Data, The Kara Sea, Siberian
Sea, et cetera

Nansen, Fridthjof: The Norwegian North Polar Expedi-
tion 1893-96. Scientific Results. Vol. III. (Chris-
tiania 1902)

SvERDRUP, H. U.: The Waters on the North-Siberian Shelf.
The Norwegian North Polar Expedition with the Maud
1918-1925. Scientific Results, Vol. IV, No. 2. (Ber-
gen 1929)

Vega-expeditionens Vetenskapliga Jakttagelser. Bd. 2
(Stockholm 1883)

Wasnetzov, W. A.: On the Hydrology of the Kara Sea.
Transactions of the Oceanogr. Institute, Vol. I, No.
2-3. (Moscow 1931)

WiESE, W. J. : Etude hydrologique des mers: des Laptevs et
de la Siberia orientale. (Giving complete list of litera-
ture up to 1926) Materiaux de la Comm. pour I'dtude
de la Republique ASS lakoute, Livr. 5. (Leningrad
1926)

Sources of Data, The Arctic Area in
General

Breitfus-s, L.: Das Nordpolargebiet (1913-31); Geogr.
Jahrbuch XLVII. (Giving list of literature 1913-31).
(Berlin 1932)

Sources of Data, Baltic Sea

Bulletin Trimestriel des R6sultats acquis pendant les
croisieres periodiques. Public par Conseil Interna-
tional. Copenh. Annee 1902-03, 03-04, etc.-1908
(Danish, Finnish, German, and Swedish observations).
(Copenhagen 1903-08)

Bulletin Hydrographique. Publi6 par Conseil Interna-
tional (as continuation of the above series) Copenhagen.
Ann6e 1908-09, 1909 etc. 1914. 1920-21-22-23, 1925 etc.
1931. (Danish, Esthonian, Finnish, German, Polish
(below 100 meters), Russian and Swedish observations.
The Finnish observations later than 1928 incl. may also
be found in Havforskningsinstituttets Skrift No. 66,
70 etc.) (Copenhagen 1910- )

Havforskningsinstituttets Skrift. No. 5, 6, 8, 9, 12, 16,
20, 21, 26, 27, 30, 32, 34, 38, 39, 45, 46, 49, 51, 58, 65, 66,
70, 75, 78, 81, 82. (Helsingfors 1920- )
No. 1: Hydrographische Untersuchungen im Nordlichen

Teile der Ostsee etc. 1898-1904. (Helsingfors 1907)
No. 7: Rolf Witting: Zusammenfassende Ubersicht der
Hydrographie des Bottnischen und Finnischen Meer-
busen etc. nach den Untersuchungen bis Ende 1910.
(Helsingfors 1912)
No. 8: Rolf Witting: Beobachtungen von Temperatur und
Salzgehalt an festen Stationen in 1900-10. (Helsing-
fors 1912)
No. 10: Rolf Witting: Jahrbuch 1911 enthaltend hydrogr.
Beobachtungen in den Finland umgebenden Meeren.
(Helsingfors 1912)
No. 12: Rolf Witting: Jahrbuch 1912 enthaltend et cetera.

(Helsingfors 1913)
No. 13: Rolf Witting: Jahrbuch 1913 enthaltend et cetera.
(Helsingfors 1914)

Lebendinzeff, a. a.: Hydrologische und hydrochem.
Untersuchungen d. Ostsee Aug. -Sept. 1908. (St.
Petersburg 1910)

PuTNiNs, R.: Die hydrographischen Ergebnisse der let-
tischen Terminfahrt

and

Putnins, R.: Observations de profondeur du Bateau de
I'Etat Hidrografs Folia Zoologica et Hydrobio-
logica. Vol. I, 1929. (Riga)

RuppiN, Ernst: Die Belt- und die Ostsee im November
1912. Annalen der Hydrographie und Maritimen
Meteorology, Heft 6, 1913. (Berlin 1913)

ScHULZ, Bruno: Hydrographische Untersuchungen beson-
ders ueber den Durchluftungszustand in der Ostsee im
Jahre 1922 (Forschungsschiffe Nautilus und Ska-
gerak). Aus dem Archiv der deutschen Seewarte)
XLI, No. 1. (Hamburg 1923)

SoHULZ, Bruno: Hydrographische Beobachtungen ins-
besondere ueber die Kohlensaure in der Nord- und
Ostsee im Sommer 1921 (Forschungsschiffe Poseidon
und Skagerak). Aus dem Archiv der deutschen
Seewarte, XL, No. 2. (Hamburg 1922)

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

ATLANTIC OCEAN: HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION OF TEMPERATURE, SALINITY AND

DENSITY, AT STANDARD DEPTHS'

By GEORG WtJST

Inslilul fur Meereskunde, Berlin, Germany

Plates 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

1. The Source Material

In an endeavor to indicate the thermohaline
constitution of the oceans in relation to the deep
circulation of the water masses, the procedure is
not by presenting the data in horizontal and vertical
sections but by presenting them as curved surfaces
which correspond to the contours of the core layers
(Kernschichten) of the stratospheric water bodies.
After having first achieved in this way a representa-
tion in space of the extension and the mixing of the
core water masses, we are prepared for a complete
understanding of the horizontal distribution of
temperature, salinity, and density at standard
depths. Therefore, the construction of the charts,
with which the work originally began, is placed at
the end of our investigation. The first fundamental
preparation for this goes back to A. Merz himself,
who, before the expedition, had planned (after 1922)
a card catalogue of all hydrographic observations
in the three oceans after the dates of the Challen-
ger and Gazelle expeditions; and for the Atlantic
Ocean had completed it for the condition of research
up to the beginning of the Meteor expedition.
A. Merz- has reported in detail in another place on
the initiation of the card catalogue, with the
preparation of which at that time Doctor H. H. F.
Meyer was especially entrusted, and on the point of
view, which fixed the method for obtaining values
at standard depths. After the end of the expedition
the author has carried forward along the lines
laid down by Merz the card catalogue for the
Atlantic ocean, concerning which more detailed
information is given in volume 4 of this work, pp. 7
et seq. Work on the exhaustive collection of all
available, uniformly reduced, and prepared observa-
tional material took, as a result of the greatly
increased number of deep-sea investigations since
the Meteor Expedition, so extensive a scope that
it could be handled only by a series of cooperators,

' Translated by T. VVayland Vaughan from "Schichtung
und Zirkulation des Atlantischen Ozeans," Zweite Liefer-
ung "die Stratosphiire." VVissensch. Ergeb. der Deutsehen
Atlantischen Expedition auf dem Forsehungs und Ver-
messungssehiff Meteor 1925-1927, Vol. 6, 1st Ft., pp. 224-
233, 248-251, Beilagen 32-35, 1935.

^Preus. Akad. Wissensch. Phys.-Math. KI., Ber., 1925,
vol. 31, p. 58.

of whom special mention should here be made of
Doctor G. Bohnecke, Doctor G. Dietrich, Doctor
H. H. F. Meyer, and the technical as.sistants. Misses
M. A.sche, J. Peter, and J. Zietz. The number of
the stations recorded in the card catalogue soon
exceeded 10,000. In order not to jeopardize the
execution of the Merz plan to represent the constitu-
tion of the oceans on charts of oceanographic factors,
the author next eliminated all of the shelf regions
and adjacent seas except the Caribbean Sea, and
devoted attention only to stations exceeding 200
meters in depth in the open Atlantic Ocean. For
the open Atlantic Ocean the northern limit was
taken as the 65th degree of latitude at the Faroe-
Shetland Swell ; the limit for the Pacific Ocean was
fLxed at the 70th meridian of west longitude; and
that for the Indian Ocean at the 35th meridian of
ea.st longitude.

After the exclusion of the stations for which there
are only bottom observations, the results obtained
from a study of those that exceed 4,000 meters in
depth are presented elsewhere,' and after the elimi-
nation of all defective series, there remain a total
of 3,440 stations with serial measurement of tem-
perature and about 3,100 with simultaneous serial
measurements of salinity, executed by about 70
research vessels in the years between 1873 and 1934.
For each station large scale vertical curves of tem-
perature and salinity were constructed. When
necessary the results of the different expeditions
were uniformly reduced to depths in meters, tem-
peratures to degrees centigrade, and, salinities were
reported in conformity to Knudsen's hydrographic
tables. The values for salinity were, when it
appeared necessary, recalculated^ and tested by the
correlation Temperature and Salinity in order to
recognize those of defective values, and to calculate
the corresponding salinity for the intermediate
depths in which there were only temperature data.
The vertical curves were, in so far as possible, laid
out in geographical order so that in working up the
series comparisons could be made between neigh-

' This volume, 1st Lieferung.

* For example for the Challenger and other series
compare: L. Moller: Zur Kritik und Aufbereitung der
Dichte- und Salzgehaltswerte iilterer Expeditionen: Veroff.
Inst. f. Meereskde., Reihe A, H. 15, Berlin 1926.

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

boring stations. While the plotting of the observa-
tion points was mostly assigned to technical as-
sistants, the vertical curves were constructed with
the greatest possible care by scientific workers.
From these curves the temperatures and salinities
were taken with estimates to parts per hundred for
the standard depths, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1,000,
1,250, 1,500, 1,750, 2,000, 2,500, 3,000, 3,500, 4,000,
4,500, and 5,000 meters. For the older temperature-
series Professor Merz, himself, had completed the
work. These values together with the abbrevia-
tions of the names of the expeditions and of the
months of the observations, with the appropriate
isobaths, were plotted on surface-true charts on a
scale of 1:20 million; for the regions in which there
are more numerous observations such as the South
Antilles Sea, Newfoundland, and the west European
continental slope, special charts on a larger scale
were constructed. On the basis of the interpolated
values of temperature and salinity, the density
values were calculated, which because of the general
greater con.stancy at deep levels made possible
another test of the data. In the case of strongly
discrepant values it was possible in most instances to
decide whether the error lay in the measurement
of the temperature or in the determination of the
salinity, or whether in the construction of the
vertical curves insufficient attention was paid to the
correlation of Temperature-Salinity and whether a
.subsequent equalization of the curves for both
factors was necessary. It results from this graphical
investigation of the values at standard depths and
from the construction of horizontal charts, tempera-
ture, salinity, and density, that the curves may
not be constructed one independently of the other,
but that because of the essential relation between
the three factors every bulge in a salinity curve
necessarily requires a definite course of the tem-
perature curve, and that the density in depth should
show no irregularities. So far as it is attainable by
present state of the investigation, the charts of the
three factors must be drawn so that one is com-
parable with the other. Naturally it is not possible
to exclude all errors in working up so heterogeneous
material. Many bulges and peculiarities in the
isotherms, isohalines, and isopycnics apparently are
attributable to such sources of error. Among the
sources of error, above all other uncertainties that
manifest themselves, are those which result from
interpolation from observations with relatively
wide vertical observational intervals. These uncer-
tainties, especially in the temperature, exceed in

most ca.ses all other sources of error in the measure-
ments; they are uncontrollable in amount if inter-
mediate maxima or minima occur between the
points at which measurements are made.

A. TEMPERATURE

In this presentation of facts it seems superfluous
to give a critical review of the methods of measuring
temperatures on the different ships, as has been
done for the measurement of bottom temperatures.*
Also for the present purpose the deep sea thermome-
ters used since 1873 may in general be regarded as
.sufficiently precise. With the old observations by
means of maximum-minimum thermometers, the
errors in measurement are mostly due to the subse-
quent displacement of the index. Systematic
deviations even in the depth of the intermediate
temperature maxima, where such deviations are to
be expected on account of the principle of measure-
ments on which the extreme thermometers are
based, are so in.significant that they play no role
on the horizontal charts. Rather is it necessary
to reckon with systematic errors in the measure-
ments with reversing thermometers of the old
construction in the years 1885 to 1905. Then in
most cases, because of the absence of an auxiliary
thermometer, the subsequent expansion of the
broken quicksilver mass was not eliminated from
the thermometric reading. The temperatures re-
ported by such research vessels as the Albatross,
Belgica, Princess Alice, and probably also in
part those of the Gauss and Pourquoi Pas, are
notably too high, particularly in the great depths
of the tropics and the subtropics. With the excep-
tion of the Meteor, Atlantis, and in part the
Deutchland, which controlled the depth of the
reversal by thermometric measurement, we must
consider in all serial measurements systematic
errors which result from the failure to take into
account the wire angle produced by the drifting of
the vessel. Because of the strong vertical gradients
there, errors due to this cause occur in numerous
serial measurements in the upper water layers of the
tropics. The strikingly high values which occur in
numerous series of the National, occasionally also
in those of the Berlin, Discovery, Margrethe,
and Valdivia can be attributed to too great wire
angle. Finally there remains to be considered that
the measurements were made in different months
and years since 1873, and that even the deeper layers

' Compare, this volume, 1st Lieferung, pp. 12 et seq.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

obviously are not free from marked periodic and
secular changes of oceanographic factors which on
the horizontal charts are expressed as local devia-
tions. In the higher latitudes, where such secular
changes are especially marked, the stations occupied
during the summer half of the year are strongly
predominant. But, as has been said, in addition
to all of these errors and disturbing factors, comes
the uncertainty contingent upon interpolation from
inadequate vertical observational intervals, and this
source of error is many times the most important.
All strongly discrepant values were placed in paren-
theses on the horizontal charts, as soon as they could
be attributed with some probability to one of the
designated sources of error, and in the construction
of the isotherms they were considered either not
at all or only with caution. The following table 38
gives a statistical summary of the number of sta-
tions with the serial measurement of temperatures,
made since 1873 by research vessels and cable
ships in the open Atlantic Ocean and available at the
Institut fiir Meereskunde at the beginning of 1934.'
Four layers, 200-1000 m., 1250-2000 m., 1250-2000
m., 2500-4000 m., and 4000-5000 m., are recognized.
The catalogue of sources is given in the Appendix.
The detailed station li.st and the four charts (supple-
ments XXXII-XXXVI) of the source material
make clear the status of the investigation of the
open Atlantic Ocean in the four principal layers
below 200 meters. Both of the uppermost layers
(200-1000, 1250-2000), considering the great extent
of the ocean, can be regarded as relatively well
investigated (although in the second layer there
are less than one half as many serial measurements
as in the uppermost layer). But for the deeper
layers, greater than 2000 meters, the only relatively
well explored regions are the regions investigated by
the Meteor, and the South Antilles Sea, the prin-
cipal region of work of the Discovery E.xpedition.
Of the 743 serial measurements which have yielded
the material for the layer between 1250 and 2000
meters the Meteor has supplied 275 series (includ-
ing the Greenland voyage), and the three ships of
the Discovery Expedition have supplied 254 series,
which are predominantly in the South Antilles Sea.
Then follows the Atlantis with 173 series of closely

' For this opportunity I express the thanks of the Institut
fur Meereskunde to Professor H. Bigelow and Dr. Seiwell
for making available manuscript material of the Atlantis
Expeditions, to Professor Fleming and Professor H. U.
Sverdrup for similar material of the Carnegie Expedition,
and to Professor Helland-Hansen, Professor H. U. Sver-
drup, and Doctor H. Mosby for such material from the
expedition of the Nobvegia.

spaced stations, along lines of special profiles in the
northwest Atlantic. As the charts show, the
Meteor in its investigation has placed great weight
on the investigation of the deepest levels (> 4000
meters), which as a rule have been neglected. Of
the 126 series which have supplied values for the
horizontal charts (4000 and 5000 meters), the
Meteor has contributed 77.

B. SALINITY AND DENSITY

In the source material of the salinities we have
recognized two fundamentally different groups:
(1) Those in which the salinities were determined
by physical methods — hydrometer, electrical con-
ductivity (salinity-tester) — which show great un-
certainties; and (2) Those which depend upon the
chemical method of chlorine titration and which
because of the standardization of the method
(normal water) are mostly comparable. The series
of salinities obtained by the use of hydrometers,
which constitute only about three per cent of those
for the uppermost layers and a still smaller propor-
tion for the lower layers, notwithstanding modern
methods of handling data, are eliminated from the
observational material above considered. After the
elimination of entirely defective values through the
correlation — salinity, such data are utilized only as
auxiliary points in regions that are poor in observa-
tions. The method of electrical conductivity (salin-
ity-tester), used on the vessels of the Ice Patrol
and on the Carnegie' apparently because of ther-
mal disturbances, is also not sufficiently accu-
rate to recognize the finer differences in salinity in
the greater depths. In depths of more than 2000
meters we have therefore placed in parentheses
those values obtained in this way. Our salinity
charts therefore represent only the distribution of
the chlorine content which has been transformed
into salinity according to the recognized relation of
chlorine to salinity.* As already noted, the salinity

' According to a communication in a letter from Pro-
fessor Sverdrup the limit of error of the electrical method
in comparison with that of titration for chlorine reaches
about 0.04 Voo in salinity. On our salinity charts for
1.500-4500 meters in depth the Carnegie salinity in the open
Atlantic Ocean shows on the average around 0.03-0.04 Voo
too low, as does also a comparative consideration of the
curves S-f (t) of the Carnegie stations with the neighboring
stations of other expeditions. (In some places the devia-
tion of the Carnegie salinites varies between —0.10 and

+0.02 Voo)- , , ,

» Since doubt has recently been expressed as to whether
the composition of sea water is sufficiently constant for such
a calculation, it has been proposed by Carter, Moberg,
Skogsberg, and Thompson, that it would be more precise to
abandon this transformation and in its place present charts
of chlorine-content. The author cannot agree to this step

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

values were tested by the construction of the curves
showing the relation of salinity to temperature, and
defective measurements were recognized in this way
and discarded; for the intermediate depths in which
only temperature data were available, tiepoints
were found for the construction of the salinity
vertical curves. Faulty determinations were ex-
cluded through this procedure and comparability
with temperature made sure. But the uncertainties
of interpolation which are due to the many times
too great vertical intervals between observations
could not be eliminated, and to such sources of
error are attributable many irregularities in the
isohalines and isopycnics.

Table 39 gives the statistical summary of the
number of salinity series which constitute the
source material for the horizontal charts of salinity
and density in the four layers. In the uppermost
layer (200-1000 m.) lie the impressive number of
3047 stations with serial salinities, which are only
slightly less than the corresponding number of
serial temperatures. The great progress which is
shown in the investigation of the salinity of the
deeper layers since 1921 is obvious when one calls
to mind that W. Brennecke' could base his first
incomplete attempt to construct charts of the
salinity distribution for six deep horizons in 200-
1000 m., on only about 100-150 stations, and in
some parts of the ocean, because of the absence of
observations, had to leave out entirely the drawing
of isohalines. Highly noteworthy is the number of
serial salinities, 1226, in the next layer (1250-
2000 m.). Only 622 stations have supplied material
for the layer 2500-4000 m. When one considers
the corresponding station chart, he recognizes that
up to now, work has been done in a systematic way
only by the Meteor, 238 series, in its two regions

because we must take into account conclusions based on the
usage for many years of the determined salinity values. It
may be recommended, however, that in the future for these
determinations the symbol Sqi be used.

' Deutsche Seewarte, Archiv., 1921, p. 165 and plates
13 and 14.

of work in the south and north Atlantic; and
by the Discovery, 154 series, in the South Antilles
Sea; while the Atlantis has worked along profiles
the important number of 100 series. For the two
lowest horizons (4600 and 5000 m.) the Meteor
has contributed 72 series, that is two thirds of the
total material. The charts show with clearness
the gaps in the thermo-haline investigation of the
Atlantic Ocean: North of 15° north and also in the
South Polar Sea there is a series of 5°-fields from
which there are no serial measurements of tempera-
ture and salinity at depths of 2500 meters and more ;
and as regards its greatest depths, the water of the
north Atlantic Ocean north of 20° is almost un-
explored.

The results from the working up of all available
source material are presented on 45 charts'" of
which 15 are devoted to temperature, salinity, and
density.

The foregoing account of the horizontal distribu-
tion of temperature, salinity, and density at standard
depths in the Atlantic Ocean by Professor Wiist
should be supplemented by mention of "A Study
of the circulation of the Western North Atlantic,"
by C. O'D. Iselin.'' This memoir makes important
additions to knowledge of the oceanography of the
part of the Atlantic with which it deals. The
bibliography accompanying it contains references
to several papers published subsequent to the com-
pletion of Wiist 's manuscript.

Another paper of importance in this connection
is one by C. G. Rossby entitled "Dynamics of steady
ocean currents in the light of experimental fluids
mechanics."'- This publication deals rather with a
possible interpretation than with the presentation
of data.

'" Atlas to this volume.

" Papers in Physical Oceanography and Meteorology,
published by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
and the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, vol. 4,
No. 4, pp. 101, August, 1936.

'- Pap. in Phys. Oceanog., Mass. Inst. Technology and
Woods Hole Oceanogr. Institution, vol. 5, no. 1, pp. 43, 1936.

ABREVI-

ATION

Lists of Sources of Data

Abbremations of the Ships' Names and Indications of the Sources

SHIP

"Acadia'

"Albatross"

TEAB OF OBSERVATION SOURCE AND REMARKS

1915 P. Bjerkan, Results of the hydrographical observations

made by Dr. J. Hjort in the Canadian Atlantic waters.
Ottawa 1919.

1884-85 C. H. Townsend, U. S. Fish Coram. Report for 1900, Wash-
ington 1910.

1919-20 Report U. S. Comm. of Fisheries for 1920. App. Ill, Wash-
ington 1921.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

ABBEVI-
NO. ATION

Di'

BHIF

"Armauer Hansen"

"Albacora"

"Antarctic"

"Atlantis"

"Bache"

"Belgica"

"Berlin"

Bu '

"Buccaneer"

Cdo

"Cinco de Outubro'

"Carnegie"

"Challenger"

Cha

"Challenger"

. On

"Chance"

"Deutschland"

'Dana"

"Discovery"
"Discovery 11"
"Eduardo Dato'
"Explorer"
"Frithjof"

TEAR OF OBSEBV ATION SOURCES AND REMARKS

1913-14 Bj Helland-Hansen u. F. Nansen, The eastern North Atlan-
tic. Geofysiske Publikasjoner. Vol. IV, Nr. 2. Oslo
1926.

Ebenda.

Rapports et proces-verbaux (Conseil permanent interna-
tional pour I'exploration de la mer). Bd. 40 u. 44.
Kopenhagen 1926 u. 27.

Ebenda. Rapport Atlantique (Cons. perm, intern.). Bd.
55 u. 70. 1927-29. Kopenhagen 1929, 1931.

O. Nordenskjold, Die ozeanographischen Ergebnisse.
Wiss. Erg. d. Schwed. Siidpolar-Expedition. Bd. I, 2.
Stockholm 1917.

Bulletin hydrographique 1932 nebst Appendice pour 1931
(Conseil perm, internat.). Kopenhagen 1933.

Report U. S. Comm. of Fisheries for 1915. App. V, Wash-
ington 1917.

Res. du voyage du S. Y. "Belgica" 1897/99. Oceanog-
raphie. Antwerpen 1908.

Handschrift der Beobachtungen des Kreuzers "Berlin" im
Institut f. Meereskunde Berlin.

J. Y. Buchanan, The exploration of the Gulf of Guinea.
The Scottish Geogr. Magazine 1888 (abgedruckt in: J. Y.
Buchanan, Scientific papers, Cambridge 1913).

Rapports et proces verbaux. (Cons. perm, internat.) Bd.
35. Kopenhagen 1925.

Handschriftliches Material der Carnegie Institution (Prof-
Fleming).

Report on the scientific results of the voyage of H. M. S.
Challenger, Physics and chemistry. Vol. I, London 1884.

Bulletin hydrographique 1932. (Cons. perm, internat.)
Kopenhagen 1933.

C. Iselin, A report on the coastal waters of Labrador. Pro-
ceedings Americ. Ac. of Arts and Sciences. Vol. 66,
Nr. 1. 1930.

W. Brennecke, Die ozeanographischen Arbeiten der Deuts-
chen Antarktischen Expedition 1911-12. Aus dem Archiv
d. Dt. Seewarte, Hamburg 1921.

The Danish Expedition 1920-22. Oceanogr. Reports Nr. 1,
Introduction by J. Schmidt. Kopenhagen 1929.

J. P. Jacobsen, Contribution to the hydrography of the
North-Atlantic. The Dana Exp. 1921-22. Copenhagen
1929, S. 54.

Bulletin hydrographique 1931. (Cons. perm, internat.)
Kopenhagen 1932.

Bulletin hydrographique 1932. (Cons. perm, internat.)
Kopenhagen 1933.

Discovery Reports Vol. I. Station List 1925-1927. Cam-
bridge 1929.

Discovery Reports. Vol. IV. Station List 1929-1931.
Cambridge 1932.

Rapports et proces verbaux. Rapport Atlantique (Cons,
perm, internat.) Bd. 55. Kopenhagen 1929.

Bulletin hydrographique 1929 u. 1931. (Cons. perm, in-
ternat.)

Kopenhagen 1930 u. 1932. F. Nansen, The waters of the
north eastern North Atlantic (Internat. Rev. d. ges.
Hydrobiol. u. Hydrogr. Hydrogr. Suppl. 2. Serie).
Leipzig 1913.

1922
1925-26

1927-29

1901-02

1931-32

1914

1898

1924

1886

1923

1928

1873-76

1932

1926

1911-12

1921-22

1925

1931

1932

1926-27

1930-31

1927-28

1929-31

1910

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

ABREVI-

NO.

ATION

SHIP

"Falken"

"Flinders"

"Gazelle"

"GauC"

GGr

"General Greene

"Godthaab"

"Goldfinch"

"Grampus"

"Goldseeker"

YEAR OF OBSERVATION

SOURCES AND REMARKS

37 Mo

38 Mo

39 Mr

40 Ms

"Helga"

"Huxley"

"Ingolf"

"Moltke"

"Margrethe'

"Modoc'

"Mo we'

'Muirchu"

"Michael Sars"

'Meteor"

1912

1928

1874-76

1901-03
1931-32

1928

1902-03

1914-16

1906-07

1909
1910-11
1905-13

1909

1895-96

1882
1913-14

1925-26

1911-12

1925-30

1932

1900-02

1902

1910

1924
1925-27

Bulletin hydrographique 1911-12 (Cons. perm, internal. )
Kopenhagen 1913.

Bulletin hydrographique 1928. (Cons. perm, internat.)
Kopenhagen 1929.

Die Forschungsreise S. M. S. "Gazelle" 1874/76. Hrsg. v.
d. Hydrographischen Amt der Admiralitat. Bd. II,
Berlin 1888.

E. V. Drygalski, Ozean und Antarktis. Deutsche Siidpolar-
Expedition. Bd. VIII. Berlin 1925.

International Ice Observation and Ice Patrol Service
1931/32 (U. S. Treasury Department, Coast Guard Bull.
21). Washington 1932/33.

Bulletin hydrographique 1928. (Cons. perm, internat.)
Kopenhagen 1929.

List of oceanic depths for 1903. Hydrogr. Department of
the Admiralty. London 1904.

H. B. Bigelow, Doc. 969. Bureau of Fisheries. Washing-
ton 1927.

Bulletin des resultats Annee 1906-07. (Cons. perm, in-
ternat.) Kopenhagen 1908.

Ebenda. Annee 1909/10. Kopenhagen 1910.

Ebenda. Annge 1910/11. Kopenhagen 1912.

Bulletin des r6sultats. (Teil B) bzw. Bulletin hydro-
graphique. AnnSe 1904-05, 1906-07, 1908-09, 1909-10,
1910-12, 1912-13. (Cons. perm, internat.) Kopen-
hagen 1906-1914.

Bulletin des resultats. Annfee 1908-09. (Cons. perm,
internat.) Kopenhagen 1909.

M. Knudsen, Hydrography. The Danish "Ingolf" Expedi-
tion. Vol. I, Nr. 2. Kopenhagen 1899.

Annalen der Hydrographie usw. 1882, S. 741.

Bulletin hydrographique. Ann6e 1913-14. (Cons. perm,
internat.). Kopenhagen 1915. J. P. Jacobsen, Contri-
bution to th* hydrography of the Atlantic. Medd elelser
f. Komm. f. Havunders0gelser, Hydrografi, Bd. II, Nr. 5,
Kopenhagen 1916.

International ice observations and ice patrol service 1925,
1926 (U. S. Treasury Department Coast Guard, Bull.
13, 15). Washington 1926, 1927.

G. Schott u. B. Schulz, Die Forschungsreise S. M. S.
"Mowe." Aus dem Archiv der Deutschen Seewarte.
1914. H. 1. Hamburg 1914.

Rapports et proces verbaux (Cons. perm, internat.). Bd.
40, 55, 70, 76. Rapport Atlantique 1925, 1927. Kopen-
hagen 1926, 1929, 1931.

Bulletin hydrographique 1932. (Cons. perm, internat.)
Kopenhagen 1933.

Bj. Helland-Hansen und F. Nansen, The Norwegian Sea.
Kristiania 1909.

Bull, des resultats. (Cons. perm, internat.) Kopen-
hagen 1903.

Bj. Helland-Hansen, Physical oceanography and meterol-
ogy. Results of the "Michael Sars"-North Atlantic deep
sea expedition 1910. Vol. I. Bergen 1930.

Rapports et proces verbaux. (Cons. perm, internat.)
Bd. 56. Kopenhagen 1929.

G. Wiist u. a., Das ozeanographische Beobachtungsmaterial
(Serienmessungen). Wiss. Ergebn. d. Deutschen At-
lantischen Expedition auf dem Forschungs- und Ver-
messungsschiff "Meteor" 1925-27. Bd. IV, Zweiter Teil.
Berlin 1932.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

ABBEVI-
NO. ATION

TEAR OF OBSERVATION

80UHCES AND REMARKS

Pol

56 St

57 T

"Marques de la Victoria"

"National"

"Norvegia"

Portugiesische Bewach-
ungsschiffe

"Planet"

"Proserpina"

"Polaris"

"Pourquois pas?"

"Princesse Alice"

"Romanche"

1883

"Rambler"

1895

"Research"

1900

"Rosemary"

1929-30

'Scotia''

"Stephan"
"Thor"

"Tanche"

H. Wattenberg, Das chemische Beobachtungsmaterial und
seine Gewinnung. Ebenda Bd. VIII, Berlin 1933.
1929-30 Handschrift der Beobachtungen der Gronlandfahrten
1929/30, im Institut fur Meereskunde Berlin.

1925 Rapports et proces verbaux (Cons. perm, internat.). Bd.

40. Kopenhagen 1926.
1889 O. Kriimmel, Geophysikalische Beobachtungen. Ergeb-

nisse der Plankton-Expedition. Kiel 1893.
1927-31 Handschriftliches Material des Geofysiske Institut in

Bergen.
1910-11 O. Pettersson, Einige Bemerkungen zu G. Schotts Geog-

raphie des Atlantischen Ozeans. (Internat. Revue d.

ges. Hydrobiol. u. Hydrogr.) Leipzig 1913.
1906 W. Brennecke, Ozeanographie. Forschungsreise S. M. S.

"Planet" 1906/07. Bd. III. Berlin 1909.

1926 Rapports et proces-verbaux (Cons. perm, internat.). Bd.

44, Kopenhagen 1927.
1932 Bulletin hydrographique 1932. (Cons. perm, internat.)

Kopenhagen 1933.
1909 J. Rouch, Oceanographie physique. Deuxieme expedition

antarctique fran^aise. Paris 1913.
1912-13 J. Charcot, Temperatures et salinit6s recueillis dans I'At-
lantique, le Golf de Gascogne et la Manche occidentale.
Annales hydrographiques 1921.
1921-22 Rapports et proces-verbaux (Cons. perm, internat.). Bd.
29 u. 31. Rapport Atlantique 1921. Kopenhagen 1923.
1902-03 J. Thoulet, Memoires oc6anographiques. I. Serie. Resul-
tats des Campagnes Scientifiques, accomplies sur son
Yacht par Albert ler. Fasc. 29. Monaco 1905.
1904 G. H. Allemandet, Analyse des echantillons d'eau de mer

recueillis pendant la campagne du yacht "Princesse
Alice" en 1904. Bull, de Musee oceanographique de
Monaco Nr. 43. 1905.
M. Martial, Sur les sondages effectues par le Romanche.

Annales hydrographiques. Paris 1884.
List of oceanic depths 1895. Hydrographic Department

Admiralty. London 1896.
List of oceanic depths 1900 usvv. London 1901.
Bulletin hydrographique 1929 u. 1930. (Cons. perm,
internat.) Kopenhagen 1930 u. 1931.
1903-04 W. S. Bruce, The temperatures, specific gravities and salin-
ities of the Weddell Sea and of the North and South At-
lantic Ocean. Transactions of the Royal Society.
Edinburgh Bd. 51, Teil I, Nr. 4. 1906.
1913 Report on the work carried out by the S. S. Scotia 1913.

London 1914.
1911 Handschriftliches Material der Kabeldampferreise von

Prof. A. Merz. Im Institut fiir Meereskunde Berlin.
1903 Bulletin des resultats. Annee 1903-1904. Teil B (Cons,

perm, internat.). Kopenhagen 1904.
1904-05 J. N. Nielsen, Contribution to the hydrography of the
north-eastern part of the Atlantic. Meddelelser fra
Komm. f. Havunders0gelser, Serie Hydrografi. Bd. I,
Nr. 9, Kopenhagen 1927.
1906-10 Jobs. Schmidt, Report on the Danish Oceanographical Ex-
peditions 1908-1910 to the Mediterranean and adjacent
seas. Vol. I. Kopenhagen 1912.
1908 Bulletin des Resultats. Annee 1907-08, Teil B (Cons.

perm, internat.). Kopenhagen 1908.
1923 Rapports et proces-verbaux. Bd. 35 (Cons. perm, inter-

nat.). Kopenhagen 1925.

< _5

INTERNATIONAL' ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 8 15

Symbols
Temperature Salinity Depth (Meiers)
» D 500-1000

• O 1000-3000

■ a OVER 3000

Stations Occupied by DISCOVERY II in the South Atlantic and the South Pacific, 1933-1935

^c.

'X:

rriMIJoS 3ltU7Ail3<)M3T

\ %

•*>

ctiil oSi-'I ,t;ig;:j/.H uiuoa asT aWA ditzajtA Hraoa anr lu il i.fia..UJc5iU. yu -laiija.O BViujiA'i''!'.

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

HO.

59
60

ABREVI-
ATION

Td
Tp

SHIP

"Tadorne"
"Tampa"

"Vitiaz"

"Valdivia'

63 Vi

"Viking"

1925-29

1886-89
1898

1913

"Vikingen"

1929-30
1930

"Waterwitch"

1894-95

"William Scoresby"

1926-27
1928-29
1929-31

"Xauen"

1930
1932

0. N.

Ohne Namensangabe

1927

TEAR OF OBSERVATION SOURCES AND REUARKS

1925 Ebenda Bd. 40. Kopenhagen 1926.

International ice observation and ice patrol service. 1925
ff. (U. S. Treasury Department Coast Guard.) Washing-
ton 1926 ff.

Makaroff, Le Vitiaz et I'ocean pacifique. St. Petersburg
1894.

G. Sehott, Ozeanographie und maritime Meteorologie.
Wiss. Ergebn. der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem
Dampfer "Valdivia." Jena 1902.

Th. P. Funder, Hydrographic investigations from the
Danish school ship Viking in the South Atlantic and
Pacific. Meddelelser fra Komm. f. Havunders0ge!ser.
Bd. II, Nr. 6. Kopenhagen 1916.

Journal du Conseil (Cons. perm, internat.) Vol. V, Nr. 3.
Kopenhagen 1930.

Hvalr&dets Skrifter. Det Norske Videnskaps-Akademi
Oslo Nr. 2. Oslo 1932.

List of oceanic depths 1894, 1895. Hydrographic Depart-
ment Admiralty London 1895, 1896.

Discovery Reports Vol. I, Station List 1925-1927. Cam-
bridge 1929.

Discovery Reports Vol. Ill, Station List 1928-1929. Cam-
bridge 1930.

Discovery Reports Vol. IV, Station List 1929-1931. Cam-
bridge 1932.

Notas y resumas. Serie II. Nr. 39, 50, 51. Madrid 1930,
1931.

Bulletin hydrographiquc 1932 (Cons. perm, internat.).
Kopenhagen 1933.

Bulletin hydrographiquc 1927 (Cons. perm, internat).
Kopenhagen 1928 (schottisches Beobachtungsschiff).

SERIAL SECTIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY IN THE
MEDITERRANEAN AND ADRIATIC SEAS

Mediterranean Sea
Pl.^te 9

On the chart for the Mediterranean Sea a few-
stations are shown in the Adriatic but the work
done by the Austrians and the Italians cooperatively
between 1911 and 1914 was of such outstanding
importance that a special chart of the Adriatic has
been prepared on which the positions of those sta-
tions that were worked to depths of one hundred or
more meters are shown. A list of the publications
giving the results of these cruises is also hereto
attached. In order to make the bibliography com-
prehensive a reference to a paper by Merz on
hydrographic investigations in the Gulf of Trieste
has been included.

Because of its dealing with the oceanographic
features of the Mediterranean in general, mention is
made of the paper by Prof. Gerhard Sehott entitled
"Die Gewasser des Mittelmeeres. Vorzugsweise
nach den Arbeiten des danischen Forschungs-

dampfers, Thor, 1918-1910."" As a few records
were taken from this article, it is also cited in the list
of sources of data.

Sources of Data

The sources of the data for the Mediterranean
Sea plotted on the chart are as follows : (The letters
after the ships' names are the abbreviations used
on the chart.)

Admirante Lobo (AL) : de Buen, Od6n, Croisi^re oceanog-
raphique du transport Admirante Lobo: Cons. Inter-
nat. E.xpl. Mer, Rapports, vol. 37, pp. 33-57, 1925.

Armauer-Hansen (AH): Helland-Hansen, Bj0rn, Avdeling
A. Hydrografi: Det geofysiske Institutt, Saertrykk av
Bergens Mus. Arsberetning, pp. 2-11, 1930-31.

Dana (D): Dana Expedition. List of Stations, Dana
Report No. 1, pp. 17-78, seven plates, 1934. Stations
3520-3530, pp. 19, 20; stations 4026-4071, pp. 64-71.
(The Carlsberg Foundation's Oceanographical Expedi-
tion Round the World 1928-1930, and previous Dana

" Ann. d. Hydr. usw. 1915. Heft 1, pp. 1-79, 8 plates.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Expeditions, under the leadership of Prof. Johannes
Schmidt.)

Eider and St^no (ES): Richard, J., and Sirvant, L., List
des operations faites dans les parages de Monaco 4 bord
d I'EiDER et du Steno pendant annees 1907, 1908, 1909:
Musee Oc6anogr. Monaco, Bull. 160, pp. 1-153, 1910.

GiRALDA (G): de Buen, Oden. Croisiere de la Gibalda
(1920-21); Musee Oceanogr. Monaco, Bull. 445, pp.
4-15, 1924.

Hebtha (HE): Luksch, Josef, und Wolf, Julius, Berichte
der Commission flir Erforschung des oestlichen Mittel-
meeres: Akad. Wissensch. Wien, Denksehr., vol. 59,
pp. 17-82, 1892.

Najade (N): Schott, Gerhard, Die Gewasser des Mittel-
meerea: Hydrogr. und Marit. Meteorol. Annalen
(1915), pp. 1-79, 1915.

NcSez de Balboa (NB) : de Buen, Oden, El Institute
Espanol de Oceanografia y sus primeras campaiias por
Oden de Buen: Trabajos de Oceanogr. y Biologia
Marina, Mem. no. 1, pp. 6-24, 1916.

Pola: Luksch, Josef, and Wolf, Julius, Berichte der Com-
mission fiir Erforschung des oestliclien Mittelmeeres:
Ak. Wissensch. Wien, Denksehr., Bd. 59, pp. 22-49,
1892; Bd. 60, pp. 91-108, 1893; Bd. 61, pp. 72-91, 1894.

Thoe (T): Schmidt, Johannes, Danish oceanographical
expeditions 1908-1910 to the Mediterranean and adja-
cent seas: Report, vol. 1, 1912.

Xauen (X): de Buen, Rafael, Resultados obtenidos en las
campaiias del Xauen por el Estrecho de Gibraltar
en 1929: Inst. Espanol Oceanogr., Notas y Resumenes,
Serie 2, no. 39, pp. 1-27, 1930.

Adriatic Sea

Plate 10

Sources of Data

CiCLOPE (CI): See Italian publications in attached list.
Najade (NA): See Austrian publications in attached list.

Literature Especially on the Periodic Cruises by the

Austrians on the Najade and by the

Italians on the Ciclope

Verein zur Forderung der naturwissenschafilichen Erforsch-
ung der Adria in Wien.

Die erste Kreuzungsfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee
der Adria, 25. Februar bis 7. Marz 1911. Vor-
liiufiger Bericht im Auftrage des Vereines zur Forder-
ung der naturwissenschaftliohen Erforschung der
Adria in Wien, erstattet von Prof. Dr. Ed. Briickner.
K. k. Geograph. Gesellsch. in Wien 1911, Heft 4,
35 pp. —

Bericht iiber zvveite Kreuzungsfahrt S. M. S. Najade in
der Hochsee der Adria, 16. Mai bis 4. Juni 1911. Im
Auftrage etc., erstattet von Fregattenkapitiin W. V.
Kesslitz, Prof. Dr. A. Grund, Prof. Dr. C. I. Cori,
idem, 1911, Heft 9, 19 pp.

Die dritte Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee
der Adria, 16. August bis 5. September 1911, etc.,
erstattet von Prof. Dr. Ed. Briickner, idem, Wien,
1912, Heft 1 u. 2, 37 pp.

Die vierte Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee

der Adria, 16. November bis 8. Dezember 1911, etc.
erstattet von Prof. Dr. Alfred Grund, idem, 1912,
Heft 4, 6 pp.

Die fiinfte Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee
der Adria, 16. Februar bis 11. Marz 1912, etc., erstat-
tet von Prof. Dr. Alfred Brund, idem, 1912, Heft 9 u.
10, S. 503-511.

Die sechste Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee
der Adria, 17. Mai bis 13. Juni 1912, etc., erstattet
von Prof. Dr. Alfred Grund, idem, 1912, Heft 11 u.
12, S. 639-349.

Die siebente Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee
der Adria, 16. August bis 11. September 1912, etc.,
erstattet von Prof. Dr. Alfred Grund, idem, 1913,
Heft 3, S. 164-176.

Die achte Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee
der Adria, vom 16. Marz bis 1. April 1913, Idem 1913,
Heft 9 u. 10, S. 471-487.

Die neunte Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade in der Hochsee
der Adria, vom 16. Mai bis 1. Juni 1913, Vorlaufiger
Bericht iiber die Fahrt und die hydrographischen
P>gebnisse derselben im Auftrage des Vereines zur
Forderung der naturwissenschaftlichen Erforschung
der Adria in Wien, erstattet von Prof. Dr. Alfred
Grund, Idem 1913, Heft 11 u. 12, S. 652-663.

Die zehnte, elfte und zwolfte Terminfahrt S. M. S. Najade
in der Hochsee der Adria, in der Zeit vom 16. August
1913 bis 9. Marz 1914, Vorlaufiger Bericht liber die
Fahrten und die hydrographischen etc., erstattet
von Prof. Dr. Alfred Grund, Idem 1914, Heft 5 u. 6,
16 pp.
Hydrographische Untersuchungen im Golfe von Triest,
von Dr. Alfred Merz. 11 Taf. 1. Karte, Kaiserl.
Akad. Wissensch. Math.-Naturw. Kl., Band 87, 107
pp. Wien, 1911.
Permanenle Internationale Komission fiir die Erforschung
der Adria.

Berichte iiber die Terminfahrten. Osterreichischer Teil,
herausgegeben vom Verein zur Forderung der
Naturwissenschaftlichen Erforschung der Adria in
Wien, redigiert von Prof. Dr. Ed. Briickner, No. 1-4,
Beobachtungen auf den Terminfahrten S. M. S.
Najade im Jahre 1911. 1. Terminfahrt: 25. Feb-
ruar bis 7. Marz 1911, S. 1; 2. Terminfahrt: 16. Mai
bis 4. Juni 1911, S. 19; 3. Terminfahrt 16. August bis
5. September 1911, S. 47; 4. Terminfahrt: 16. Novem-
ber bis 8. Dezember 1911, S. 83-119. 1912. Tafell^.

Berichte iiber die Terminfahrten. Osterreichischer Teil,
etc., . . . No. 5-7, Beobachtungen auf den Terminfahr-
ten S. M. S. Najade im Jahre 1912. 5. Terminfahrt:

16. Februar bis 11. Marz 1912, S. 1; 6. Terminfahrt:

17. Mai bis 13. Juni 1912, S. 39; 7. Terminfahrt: 16.
August bis 11. September 1912, S. 77-114. 1913.
Tafel 1-3.

Berichte iibder die Terminfahrten. Osterreichischer
Teil, etc. No. 8-12, Beobachtungen etc. in den Jah-
ren 1913 und 1914. 8. Terminfahrt: 16. Marz bis 1.
April 1913, S. 1; 9. Terminfahrt: 16. Mai bis 1. Juni
1913, S. 21; 10. Terminfahrt: 16. August bis 1. Septem-
ber 1913, S. 41; 11. Terminfahrt: 16. November bis 6.
Dezember 1913, S. 59; 12. Terminfahrt: 16. Februar
bis 9. Miirz 1914, S. 81-102, 1915. Tafel 1-4.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Meditebrakban Sea, Serial Sections of TEMPEaATUBB and Salinity

0001

OCOf

OOd

■

HTAeoai

B3T3M OOOt

JJJifliO

A08JAS 30

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 10

TEMPERATURE SALINITY DEPTH (METEI S)

. Ci 100 - 500

• D 500 - 1000

. O 1000 - 3000

NA NAJAOE (1911-1914)

CI CICLOPE (I9II-I9I4)

1000-METER ISOBATH

46°

Adriatic Sea, Serial Sections op TEMPERATtJRE"'AND^SAiiiNiTy

i i

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Gulf of Mexico and Cabibbban Sba, Sebial Sections of Tempebatcbe and Salinity

YHIAflOOHAaOO 10 3T

ITAyp. :

••* \

-»S r.l9

TA®

I \

i 'v

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

R. Comilato Talassografico Ilaliano.

Risultati fisico-chimioi delle prime cinque crociere
Adriatiche (Agosto 1909-Febbraio 1911). Luigi di
Marchi. Memoria III, Tab. pp. 83, 1-30, Tavole
1-11, 1911.

Risultati di esperienze con Galleggianti, per lo studio
delle correnti del Mare Adriatico negli anni 1910-
1914. Di G. Feruglio. Appendice. Le correnti
dell'Adriatico secondo la distribuzione superficiale
della salsedine e della temperatura. Di G. Feruglio
e L. de Marchi (con 25 tavole ed 1 fotografia).
Memoria LV, pp. v-xv, 1-129. 10 charts. 1920.

Commissione inlernazionale permanenl per lo studio dell'-
Adriatico. Boll, delle Crociere Periodiche.

Ricerche Italiane esequite dal R. Comitato Talasso-
grafico, Fasc. 1, Osservazioni fatte durante le 3
crociere della R. N. Ciclope, 1. a (25 Febbraio-14
Marzo).— 2. a (16 Maggio-11 Giugno)— 3. a (17
Agosto-6 Settembre 1911) 53 pp., 1912.

Fasc. 2. Same title, 4. a (15-21 Agosto)— 5. a (17 Novem-
br(^16 Dicembre 1912). 41 pp., 1913.

Fasc. 3. Osservazioni fatte durante le 5 crociere della
R. N. Ciclope, 6a (26 Febbraio-9 Marzo 1913)
7a (14 Maggio-4 Giugno 1913) ; 8a (16-31 Agosto 1913)
9a (16-24 Novembre 1913); 10a (16 Febbraio-1 Marzo
19 Marzo-30 April 1914). 93 pp., 1914.

SERIAL SECTIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY IN THE
GULF OF MEXICO AND CARIBBEAN SEA
Plate 11

The stations in the Gulf of Mexico and the
Caribbean Sea for serial sections of temperature and
salinity shown on the accompanying chart were
derived from three sources. First, Messrs. A. E.
Parr and C. Iselin II, compiled on a chart the posi-
tions of all stations occupied by the Mabel Taylor
and the Atlantis for the determinations of sub-
surface temperatures and salinities. Reference is
made to the two papers by Doctor Parr cited below.'*

The next source of information is the United
States Hydrographic Office and the Scripps Institu-
tion of Oceanography. The Hydrographic Office
supplied information on the positions of the stations
occupied by the U. S. S. Hannibal. Some of the
chemical work on the water samples collected at the
Hannibal stations in the Caribbean Sea was done
at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography and from
it some of the information incorporated on the chart
was received.

The third source of information is the Dana

" Parr, A. E., Report on hydrographic observations in
the Gulf of Mexico and the adjacent straits made during
the Yale Oceanographic Expedition of the Mabel Taylor
in 1932: Bingham Oceanographic Collection Bull., vol. 5,
Art. 1, September, 1935.

Parr, A. E., A contribution to the hydrography of the
Caribbean and the Cayman Seas. (Based upon the obser-
vations made by the Research Ship Atlantis, 1933-34.)
Bingham Oceanographic Collections Bull., vol. 5, Art. 4,
January, 1937.

Expedition in 1928. The title of the publication
in which information on the stations is given is
contained in the footnote below. '^

On the chart the abbreviations for the different
vessels are as follows:

Atlantis

(AT)

Dana

(D)

Hannibal

(H)

Mabel Taylor

(MT)

Some consideration was given as to whether
stations occupied a number of years ago by the
U. S. S. Blake should be included but it was decided
that it was preferable to omit them. Although the
Blake's temperature records appear trustworthy,
as they were taken with Miller-Casella maximum-
minimum thermometers, the depths records are
not so accurate as those reported more recently by
vessels that use unprotected thermometers for the
determination of depths at which observations and
collections arc made. The older determinations of
salinity by the use of hydrometers, in general, are
not accurate enough for modern oceanographic work.

" Dana Expedition. List of Stations, Dana Report
No. 1, pp. 17-78, seven plates, 1934. Stations 3804-3809,
3812-3973, pp. 45-60. (The Carlsberg Foundation's Oceano-
graphical Expedition Round the World 1928-1930, and pre-
vious Dana Expeditions, under the leadership of Pro-
fessor Johannes Schmidt.)

PACIFIC OCEAN

SERIAL SECTIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

Plate 12, 13, 14A, 14B, 15, 16, 17

For the compilation here presented the chart
entitled "Hydrographische Reihenmessungen seit
1870 im Stillen Ozean mit Beobachtungen von mehr
als 1000 m. bzw. 3000 m.," published by Defant'
is used as a base. The data indicated on Defant's
chart have been used by Wiist^ in his article cited in
the footnote. Defant plotted on the chart pub-
lished by him the data available in the Institut fiir
Meereskunde up to February 1, 1928.

Subsequent to the date of publication, 1929, of the
paper by Wiist, cited above, other important con-
tributions to the knowledge of the oceanography
of the Pacific Ocean have been published. Some
of these are listed opposite the names of vessels that
have conducted oceanographic expeditions in the
Pacific during the past few years but a few others
should be mentioned.

Attention will first be called to the monumental
work of Gerhard Schott' entitled "Geographic des
Indischen und Stillen Ozeans," published in Ham-
burg in 1935. This work, besides describing the
general oceanographic features of the Pacific and
presenting many excellently executed charts, con-
tains numerous references to literature, and there
are two chapters devoted to the history of explora-
tion and research in the Indian and Pacific Oceans.

Another paper is entitled "A Report on Oceano-
graphical Investigations in the Peru Coastal Cur-
rent," by E. R. Gunther,^ and a third is "The
Hydrology of the Southern Ocean," by G. E. R.
Deacon.^

Although an endeavor has been made to ]:)lot
on the charts of the Pacific as many as possible

' Defant, A., Die systeraatische Erforschung des Welt-
meeres: Gesellsch. fiir Erdk. Berlin. Zeitseh., Jubilaums-
Sonderband, 1928, pp. 4.59-505, pi. 32, figs. 18-31.

- Wiist, Georg, Schichtung und Tiefenzirkulation des
Pazifischen Ozeans: Institut fiir Meereskunde, Berlin, N. F.,
A. Geograph.-Naturwissensch. Reihe, Heft 20, pp. 1-64,
4 pis., 14 figs., 1929.

• ' Pp. xix, 413, 114 text figs., 37 pis.. Section on bottom
deposits by W. Schott, and a chapter on life in the Indian
and Pacific Oceans by E. Hentschel.

* Discovert Reports, vol. 13, pp. 107-276, pis. 14, 16,
1936.

' Discovert Reports, vol. 15, pp. 1-124, pis. 1^4, 1937.

of the stations occupied for the subsurface deter-
mination of temperature and salinity, it is known
that there are at least two deficiencies. More sta-
tions have been worked by the Japanese than have
been put down on the charts. In addition to the
stations which had already been plotted by Defant,
there have been plotted stations occupied by the
Mansyu in its operations between April, 1925, and
March, 1928, as recorded in the list of sources from
which information was taken. The report on the
result of the operations of the Mansyu was pub-
lished in 1933. There have also been added the sta-
tions occupied in the Japan Sea by the fisheries
steamer Soyo Maru in 1932. The Japanese, how-
ever, have done much more oceanographic work
than is shown by these stations. For references
to the Japanese literature "The Records of Oceano-
graphic Works in Japan," should be examined.
In this series there are classified lists of papers and
reports on oceanographic subjects published in
Japan. The publications are classified under the
captions "Physical and Chemical Oceanography,"
"Fundamental Marine Biology," and "Fisheries
and Fisheries Technology." During recent years
the Japanese have become very active in oceano-
graphic research and their later work meets in its
precision the requirements of modern oceanographic
research.

Although the Russians have been active in
oceanographic work in the northern part of the Sea
of Japan, the Okhotsch Sea, and in the northwest
Pacific east of Kamtchatka, records of the stations
occupied have not been available for use in the prep-
aration of this report except those for two vessels
the Krasny Vimpel and the Vorovsky. The
names of both of these vessels are entered in the
list of the sources of data and references are given
to the U. S. S. R. Hydrometeorological Observations
of Hydrographic Expeditions.

Except the deficiencies above enumerated it is
hoped that the records of the sources of data are
practically complete.

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

Comment should be made on the data taken from
the manuscript records of several of the vessels.
The final reports on the operations of the Carnegie
in the Pacific are now in press as publications of the
Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington. Not only the
details of the observations made at the stations
will soon become available in print but also the
scientific interpretations. Dr. Harald U. Sverdrup
has had charge of the preparation of the reports
on the physical oceanography.

The hydrological results of Discovery I under
the direction of Sir Douglas Mawson will also soon
be in print. The interpretation of the hydrological
data has been undertaken by Doctor Sverdrup who
has prepared that section of the report. The report
on the results of Discovery I will deal with the
southwest corner of the Pacific and will extend
entirely across the southern Indian Ocean.

The records of stations occupied by Discovery II
and the William Scoresby were sent to me in the
form of a manuscript chart by Dr. Stanley Kemp,
without distinction between the stations occupied
by each vessel. The chart did not indicate the
depth to which scientific observations and collec-
tions were made,, and I have not yet seen any pul:)-

lished lists of those stations, but I have seen copies
of the station lists for the south Atlantic Ocean.
Therefore on the chart of the Pacific and also on
that of the Indian Ocean for the stations occupied
by the Discovery II and the William Scoresby
a triangle, without indication of depth, has been
used to indicate the positions of the stations,
instead of other symbols that give definite depths.
Dr. Stanley Kemp also sent me manuscript charts
showing the positions of the stations occupied by the
William Scoresby off the west coast of South
America. For some of the stations the depth to
which observations and collections were made were
indicated but not for quite all of them. Therefore
for those stations for which information is not com-
plete the same kind of a triangle has been used as
that used for the stations of the Discovery II
and the William Scoresby around the Antarctica
for which information on depths was not available.
It may be confidently expected that the station lists
for the Discovery II and the William Scoresby
will, before a great while, become available in print.
The two papers by Messrs. Gunther and Deacon,
cited above, used information derived from the work
of the Discovery II and the William Scoresby
in the south Pacific.

Sources of Data for the North Pacific Ocean

NAME OF SHIP
TUSCARORA

Challenger

Gazelle

Elisabeth

Rambler

TIME OF WORK

1873

January/April 1874
June 1874
July/Augu.st 1874

October/Nov. 1874 & \
January 1875 J

February 1875
March 1875
April, June, July 1875
August 1875
June/July 1875

February 1878

June/July 1890

Listed by A. Defant

POSITION OF STATION

34-54°N, 121-130°W
20-29°N, 144°W-160°E
41-44°N, 145-150°E
51-54''N, lo3°VV-168°E

0-17°N, 117-126°E

4-6°N, 124-130°E
2-19°N, 141-146°E
22-38°N, 137°E-160''W
20°N, 157°W
0-2 °N, 134-147 °E

27°N, 140°W

2-20°N, 1 15-125 °E

SOUnCES OF DATA

Makaroff, Le Vitiaz et rOc6an pacifique,
Petersburg 1894. Note: The original
source, G. E. Belknap, Deep sea sound-
ings in the North Pacific Ocean, ob-
tained by U. S. S. TuscARORA, Wash-
ington 1874, U. S. Hydrographic Office
Nr. 54 could not be examined nor could
the manuscript of the serial temperature
on the voyage Hawaii-Phoenix Islands,
Fiji Islands 1875-76.

The Report of the Scientific Results of
the voyage H. M. S. Challenger dur-
ing the years 1873-1876, vol. 1, Physics
and C'hemistry, London 1884, pis. 123,
124, 126-129, 132, 134, 148, 150, 180.

Forschungsreise S. INI. S. Gazelle, hrsg.
vom Reichsmarineamt, Physik und
Chemie, Bd. 2, Berlin 1888/89, p. 40.

Kapitan z. S. Wickede, Tiefseebeobach-
tungen S. M. S. Ellsabeth, Annalen
der Hydrographie 1878, p. 319.
Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths 1890, London
1891, pp. 10, 11.

NAME OF SHIP

Albatross

Penguin

Albatross

Penguin

Egeria
Waterwitch
Alexander
Aoassiz

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

TIME OF WORK

Mansytj

Challenger

Gazelle

Egeria

Myrmidon

Rambler

Albatross

Penguin

Waterwitch

Penguin

February/April 1891

November/Deo. 1891
April/May 1892

August 1893
August 1895

May/September 1897

June 1899
July 1901

June/August 1911 and
February 1913

POSITION OF STATION

0-10°N, 78-96°W

0-19°N, 115-126°E

54-56°N, 172-175°W
54-55°N, 167-172°W

0-18°N, 152-166°W

42-46°N, 128-132°W
15°N, 118°E
32-33°N, 117-120°W

October/Nov. 1927

25-34°N, 128-146°E
1(>-30°N, 122-137°E

SOURCES OF DATA

C. H. Townsend, Report of the U. S. Fish
Commission for 1900, Washington 1901,
p. 495.

Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths 1891, London
1892, pp. 10, 11.

C. H. Townsend, Report of the U. S. Fish
Commission for 1900, Washington 1901,
pp. 498-500.

Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths 1897, London
1898, pp. 44-45.

Ibid 1899, London 1900, pp. 16-17.

Ibid. 1902, London 1903, pp. 16-17.

E. L. Michael and G. F. McEwen, Hydro-
graphic, plankton and dredging record
of the Scripps Institution for biological
Research of the University of California
1901-1912, University of Cal. Publica-
tions, Zoology 1915-1916, vol. 15,
Berkeley 1916 und Continuation 1913-
1915, Ibid., vol. 15, No. 2.
Hydrogr. Department Tokyo, Hydrogr.
Bulletin Tokyo, from 1925.

Sources of Data for the South Pacific Ocean

June 1874
July 1874
August 1874
September 1874
February/March 1875
September 1875
October 1875
November/Dec. 1875
May/ June 1875
Oct. 1875/Nov. 1875
December 1875
January 1876
December 1887
June/August 1888
Nov. 1888-June 1890

November/Dec

June 1890

26 March 1891

1888

August/Sept. 1894
February-August 1895

May /December 1895
May /June 1896

July 1896
November 1896
December 1896
May 1897
September 1897
November 1897

Listed by A. Defant

34-39°S, 154-166°E
25-40°S, 177°E-172°W
12-19°S, 146-178°E
5-6°S, 130-134°E
0-2°S, 138-147°E
0-17°S, 149-15rW
23-40°S, 112-149°W
33-45°S, 73-105°W
2-7°S, 125-130°E
19-34''S, 156-179''E
14-18°S, 168-178°W
22-5rS, 80-165°W
37-39°S, 133-138°E
22-34°S, 175°W-178°E
12-29°S, 173°W-176°E

5-8°S, 129-131°E
0-3°S, 126-131°E
0°20'S, 85°8'W

12-2rS, 155-161°E
10-35°S, 153°E-174°W

11-39°S, 154°E-176°W
21-33°S, 153-170°E

8°S, 179°E

26°S, 177°E

40°S, 160°E

1-13°S, 168°W-176°E

1-11°S, 163-173°W

21°S, 150-179°E

Report of the scientific Results of the
voyage H. M. S. Challenger during
the years 1873 to 1876, vol. 1, Physics
and Chemistry, London 1884, pis. 103,
105, 106, 108, 109, 111-113, 116, 119, 121,
122, 137-139, 190, 197, 201, 206, 209-213,
215, 216, 218, 219, 221, 222.

Die Forschungsreife S. M. S. Gazelle,

hrsg. vom Reichsmarineamt, Physik

und Chemie, vol. 2, Berlin 1888/89,

pp. 40, 42.
Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,

List of Oceanic Depths, 1888, pp. 2-5;

1889, pp. 14, 15; 1890, pp. 10, 11, London

1889, 1890, 1891.
Ibid. 1888, London 1889, pp. 4, 5.
Ibid., 1890, London 1891, pp. 10, 11.
C. H. Townsend: Report of the U. S.

Fish Commission for 1900, Washington

1901, p. 495.
Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,

List of Oceanic Depths 1894, pp. 10, 11;

1895, pp. 16, 17, London 1895/96.
Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,

List of Oceanic Depths 1895, pp. 20-21;

1896, pp. 16, 17, London 1896/97.
Ibid., 1896, pp. 16, 17; 1897, pp. 42, 43;

1898, pp. 14, 15: 1899, pp. 18, 19; 1900,
pp. 30, 31; 1903, pp. 20, 21; London,
1897 to 1901, 1904.

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

NAME Oy SHIP

TIME OF WOBK

POSITION OF STATION

December 1898

22-33°S, 157-175°W

January 1900

43-44°S, 143-144°E

April 1902

31-34°S, 154-177°E

Egekia

Sept./Oct. 1897

17-24 °S, 72-74°W

Belgica

19 February 1899

70°30'S, 94°12'W

SOURCES OF DATA

Discovery

Albatross

8 January 1902

Nov. 1904/Febr. 1905

Tones, 173''22'E

4-22''S, 79-133°W

Planet

October 1906

June/September 1908

3°S, ISl'E
1-14°S, 147-156°E

Supplemental Sources of Data on the
Pacific Ocean

The positions of the stations plotted by Defant
are without abbreviations. There were plotted with

Ibid., 1897, London 1898, pp. 48, 49.

H. Arctowski und H. R. Mill, Oceanog-
raphie, Rfilations thermiques, Expedi-
tion Antarctique Beige. Resultats du
voyage du S. Y. Belgica 1897-99,
Antwerpen 1908, p. 35.

Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths 1904, London
1905, pp. 17-25.

A. Agassiz, General Report of the Expedi-
tion to the Eastern Tropical Pacific.
Report on the scientific Results, Vol. 5,
Memoir of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology at Harvard College, Cam-
bridge 1906, p. 24.

Die Forschungsreise S. M. S. Planet,
hrsg. vom Reichsmarineamt, vol. 3,
Berlin 1909, p. 61.

Salzgehaltsbestimmungen aus dem sud-
westlichen Stillen Ozean, Annalen der
Hydrographie 1909, 491. (Compiled by
Hans H. F. Meyer.)

tailed charts of certain areas, the positions of sta-
tions, of dates mostly subsequent to February 1,
1928. A list of the sources of data for the stations
that were added is as follows: (The letters follow-
ing the names are the abbreviations used on the

abbreviations on Defant 's chart and on more de- charts.)

Fig. 1. Key Chart to Show the Positions of Five Special Charts
Plates 13, 14A, 14B, 15, 16, of Areas in the Pacific

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Albacobe (A): Bigelow, Henry B., and Leslie, Maurine,
Reconnaissance of the waters and plankton of Monterey
Bay, July, 1928: Mus. Com. Zool., Harvard Coll., vol.
70, No. 5, pp. 430-581, 1930.

Albatross (F) : Manuscript at Scripps Institution of
Oceanography.

BusHNELL (B): Manuscript records from U. S. N. Hydrogr.
Off. and Scripps Institution of Oceanography.

Carnegie (C): Manuscript from Dr. John A. Fleming,
Dept. Torres. Mag., Carnegie Inst, of Washington.
(Reports in press.)

Catalyst (CT): Manuscript from Dr. T. G. Thompson,
Oceanographic Laboratories, University of Wash-
ington.

Chelan (CH) : Zeusler, F. A., Thompson, T. G., and others,
Report of Oceanographic Cruise, U. S. Coast Guard
Cutter Chelan, Bering Sea and Bering Strait, 1934:
U. S. Coast Guard special mimeographed publication
June, 1936, pp. 72, many plates and tables.

Dana (D): Schmidt, Johannes. Manuscript from Dr.
Helge Thomson. Subsequently published. List of
Stations, Dana Report No. 1, pp. 17-78, seven plates,
1934. Stations 3548-3803, pp. 21-45; stations 3810-
3811, p. 45. (The Carlsberg Foundation's Oceano-
graphical Expedition Round the World 1928-1930, and
previous Dana Expeditions, under the leadership of
Prof. Johannes Schmidt.)

Discovery I (DI): Manuscript from Sir Douglas Mawson.
Reports in press.

Discovery II and William Scoresby (DS): Around Ant-
arctica and off the west coast of South America. Manu-
script from Dr. Stanley Kemp.

Discovery II: Manuscript from Dr. N. A. Mackintosh.
Across the south Atlantic and south Pacific, and western
Indian Oceans, 1933-35. Special chart. No abbrevia-
tion for name.

Gannett (G): Manuscript records from LT. S. N. Hydrogr.
Off.

Guide (GU): Manuscript, data from U. S. C. and G. S. at
Scripps Institution of Oceanography.

Hannibal (H): Manuscript U. S. S. Hannibal data 1932-
1936, through U. S. Hydrographic Office and Scripps
Institution of Oceanography. Part of data published.
Dynamic Oceanographic Data for the central eastern
Pacific Ocean, Collected by U. S. S. Hannibal and the
yacht Velero III. U. S. Navy Hydrographic Office
publication H. O. 212, pp. V, 1-41, 1934.

International Fisheries Commission (IF): McEwen, George
F., Thompson, Thomas G. and Van Cleve, Richard.
Hydrographic sections and calculated currents in the
Gulf of Alaska 1927-1928: Internat. Fish. Comm. Re-
port No. 4, pp. 5-36, 1930. Manuscript, data from
Internat. Fish Comm. Subsequently published.

Thompson, T. G., McEwen, G. F., and Van Cleve, R.
Hydrographic Sections and Calculated Currents of the
Gulf of Alaska, 1929. Internat. Fish. Comm. Report,
No. 10, pp. 32, 1936.

Krasny Vimpel (KV): U. S. S. R. Hydrometeorological
Observations of Hydrographic Expeditions, 1926, Issue
No. 6, pp. 46-48.

Louisville (L) : Manuscript records from U. S. N. Hydrogr.
Off. and Scripps Institution of Oceanography.

Mansyu and other Japanese vessels (J): The report of
oceanic survey in western part of the North Pacific
Ocean carried out by H. J. M. S. Mansyd from April
1925 to March 1928: Hydrogr. Dept., Imperial Jap.
Navy Bull. vol. 6, text pp. 496, 1933, Charts, vol. 6,
pis. 135, 1933.

NoRWBGiA (N): Manuscript from H&kon Mosby and J. K.
Eggvin through Prof. H. U. Sverdrup. Records of a
considerable number of stations are contained in
Mosby, HSkon, The waters of the Atlantic Antarctic
Ocean: Norwegian Antarctic Expedition, 1927-28 et
seq., instituted and financed by Consul Lars Christen-
sen, Scient. Results, No. 11, Det Norske Videnskaps-
Akademi i Oslo, Oslo 1934; Rustad, A., Antarctic
Enphausiids from the Norwegia Expeditions, 1929-
30, 1930-31, Norw. Antarct. Exped. Scien. Results,
no. 12.

Oglala (OG): Manuscript records from U. S. N. Hydrogr.
Off.

Pioneer (PI): Manuscript data U. S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey at Scripps Institution of Oceanography.

Scripps (SC): Michael, Ellis L., and McEwen, George F.,
Hydrographic, plankton, and dredging Records:
University of California Publication in Zoology, vol.
15, no. 1, pp. 1-206, July 15, 1915; and vol. 15, no. 2,
Nov. 29, 1916, pp. 207-254. Manuscript data at Scripps
Institution of Oceanography.

Skogsberg (SK): Manuscript data from Dr. T. Skogsberg.

SoYO Maru (JF): Uda, M., Hydrographical studies based
on simultaneous oceanographical surveys made in the
Japan Sea and in its adjacent waters during May and
June, 1932. Records of Oceanographic Works in Japan,
vol. 6, no. 1, pp. 19-107, March, 1934.

VoBovsKY (VA): U. S. S. R. Hj'drometeorological observa-
tions of hydrographic expeditions, 1926, Issue no. 6,
pp. 45-46.

Willebrord Snellius (SN): van Everdingen, E. The
Snellids Expedition. Conseil International pour
I'ExpIoration de la Mer, Journal vol. 5, no. 3, pp. 320-
328, 1930. van Riel, P. M. "Derde Bulletin van de
Willebrord Snellius Expeditie, pp. 1-12, Indisch
Comite voor Wetenschappelijke Onderzoekingen.

William Scoresby (S): Manuscript data from Dr. Stanley
Kemp.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

no-

180°

130

" 140° 150° 160°

100° 1
—J 1

.0° 140"

120°

1 rw^ik^_-

110° 100°

-J^-c Ir

90° 60°

— t i^T.

70°

Ir .

^y X.

%^^

-e-

f — \_^, .V_

-?f'^X'-^ \ ""^^ --''•^-- \'

/ 5ov,^[^\/ y^ y/

K/<:

^^^^

i><>^V-Sk

/ X X ^^ / ^^ /

/ //J -

""T^^i-LS

vxS

/ *°/\/^ / / ^?/r^

\ ^ ©^sV*" FRANCISCO \ \ ^JVC''''^ \ \ ^

B. / ®B /

/ ®"/

/ ®£

1 ®'\
1 \_®?

/ / ^^^^ ij^^^"^^^^ • / .•

/ // /^u^^4^^

/ •

/ r^i

®i B. *

r So

/ s. a

/ 1 Sli '

®
®

®c a n

®og\

®00 \

^oj_|\

/ hit^^^Orki / s /■■■ B« /

/ /\ / *. ': °f^r^ — r~—*—L^ ' /

/ / /:'••■•• ../I ® / /^~;;ti — /

■/■' •

^®" '.1

' . ®.o

A3xMrW

/^^

{■'

1 ®c

®c

g^Pa, — 1

•

.• ®.

•' .*®
. • ®

®c

■

{

F /i"

®,.;V'

® 510

•

.i^ ,

•

/-• ®

••

CV^'

'■■■■■■

®c

®t

•
• •

a®'
®^®c '®=

51'.

• ,i ■'

i^_^V

•

• •
® *

•

®f
®

Bt *
®t

•

®c

ffl f^'l-. • il

"W^JT^

MN:

• '■■.«'

•

®' a' a

®c ®c 1

®c / ®^/ ®c / /
S<^ i / / Be ®c/

~iTSrfT\| -J

\-\w\\V^

••\ "SI

— — \ *

mo \osAf •

\ *'A/-
\oiM®

1 '; ; •■'■■'•

•

■■ ■

1 J ' /^^T^^f /
/ ®' / / / T' ^7^^

~—4~~^Jr?' / / ®7 W /

/ ®%r^ ^-/-^ / ®' / *^ /

/ V /~~^~7^ / W/ /

20° /

\ \ \\ \ .---V — \^^°^^^uIibx

/ — ~t-

i / ® ® /

/ 7

\§v\\^

M3, 1

D lA^* \

/ •/

\v5vv\

1 \ A"^

/ L °^

li®/®„ /

xjxKVX

— V — V I "A

\ \ \ OS

Rf~

N. \. \. y^

'^""XL^-rr^C*^ \ \

/ /

\>^

^^^N^^

5ZM^

>^^^

0^^©° ^/^

IIOO

19n«

-l'* — "

20 130° 110° 160° 180° 160° ia0° 120° 100° 90° 60° 70°

Pacifiu Ocean, General Chart
Serial Sectioim of TeinpiTatiirc and Salinity. Stations without Abbreviations, after A. Defant, up to February I, 1928. .Stations with Abbreviations, subsequent to that date

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 13

Japanese Islands to East Indies, Serial Sections of Temperature and Salinity'

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 14

=^^

TEMPERATURE

SALINITY DEPTH (METERS)

D 500 - 1000. ■

,•■■ •

O 1000 - 3000\

•

D OVER 3000

CHELAN CI934)

OGLALA (1935)

GANNET (1933-

1000 METER ISOBATH

ft"'--..

■.^•^

A. Oceanic Areas Adjacent to the Aleutian Islands, Serial Sections op Temperature and .Salinity

B. Gulf op Alaska to San Francisco, Serial Sections of Temperature and Salinity

H 3TAJ1

I li: - y:

•ninia/.o tfHA aacTT/

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 15

118°

36«

TEMPERATURE

SALINITY

DEPTH (METERS)

100 - 500

500 - 1000

•

1000 . 3000

■

OVEH 3000

METER ISOBATH

ALBACOF

CABNEGIE

ALBATROSS

GUIDE

PIONEER

SCRIPPS

SKOGseERG

FSAN
OIEGO

120°

Off Coast of Southern California, Serial Sections op Temperature and Salinity

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 16

Off Coasts of Costa Rica, Panama, and Northern South America, Sebial Sections of Temperature and Salinity

The triangular symbol signifies, depths not available

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 17

4S"

*s»

TEMPERATURE SALINITY DEPTH (METERS!

. Q 100 - 500

• D SOO 1000

• O 1000 ■ 3000

1000 METER ISOBATH

M MAGNAGHI

P POLA

SN SNELLIUS

MA MABAHISS

25"

20'

20°

15'

PORT SODANO

Red Sea, Serial Sections of Temperature and Salinity

RED SEA AND INDIAN OCEAN

RED SEA, SERIAL SECTIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

Plate 17

The sources of the data for the Red Sea plotted
on the chart are as follows: (The letters after the
ships' names are the abbreviations used on the
chart.)

Sources of Data

Mabahiss (MA) : Station list pp. 3-29, 1 chart. John Mur-
ray Expedition to the Indian Ocean 1933-34. Under
the leadership of Lt. Col. R. B. SejTnour Sewell, CLE.,
F.R.S. Stations A, 1-11, 203-209, M. B. I. in the Red
Sea. Manuscript list from Dr. C. Crossland for sta-
tions occupied in 1934 and 1935.

Magnaghi (M): Picotti, Mario, Ricerche de Oceanografia
Chimica, Part I— Tabelle generali della analisi clo-
rometriche e dei di temperatura, salinity e density :
Inst. Idrograf. della Reg. Marina., Ann. Idrograf.,
vol. 11 Bis, no. 3048, pp. 1-47, 1927.

PoLA (P): Koss, Karl, Expedition S. M. Schifl Pola in das
Rothe Meer: Berichte der Commission fur Oceano-
graphische Forschungen, 6 Reihe 1895-1896, pp. 1-572,
1898, and 7 Reihe, pp. 1^85, 1897-1898, 1901.

WiLLEBRORD Snellius (SN): Van Riel, P. M., Einige
ozeanographische Beobachtungen im Roten Meer, Golf
von Aden, und Indischen Ozean: Ann. Hydrogr. und
marit. Meteorol., 60 Jahrg. (1932), Heft 10, pp. 401-
407, 1932.

INDIAN OCEAN, SERIAL SECTIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

Plate 18

As the base chart of this compilation there was
used Defant's chart entitled, "Hydrographische
Reihenmessungen seit 1870 im Indischen Ozean. "^
The indicated data have been used by Lotte M5ller
in her paper cited in the footnote.^ After the data
obtained by the Dana were in condition for use
Helge Thomsen published the paper cited below,'
and it was followed by a discussion by Lotte Moller.''
Because of the additional data procured by the
Dana, Thomsen thought Moller's interpretation
of the deep-water circulation of the Indian Ocean
required modification. He questioned the existence
of a southward moving current between depths of
2,000 and 3,000 meters. In 1932 Lt. Col. R. B.
Seymour Sewell's "Geographic and oceanographic

' Defant, A., Die systematische Erforschung des Welt-
meeres: Zeitsch. der Gesellsch. fiir Erdkunde zu Berlin,
Jubilaums-Sonderband, 1928.

'Moller, Lotte, Die zirkulation der Indischen Ozeans:
Inst. Meeresk. Berlin, Veroffentl. N. F., A. Geograph.-
naturwissensch. Reihe, Heft 21, pp. 1-48, 24 Abbild. im
Text, April, 1929.

' Thomsen, Helge, The circulation in the depths of the
Indian Ocean: Cons. Internat. Expl. Mer., Jour., vol. 8,
pp. 73-39, 1933.

* Moller, Lotte, Zur Frage der Tiefenzirkulation im
Indischen Ozean: Ann. d. Hydr. usw. 1933, Heft 7-9, pp.
233-236, pis. 29, 29a.

research in Indian waters"* was published. It
marked a distinct advance in knowledge of the
oceanography of the northern part of the Indian
Ocean, and served as a ba.sis of a discussion by G.
Wiist^ of the origin of the bottom water of the Indian
Ocean as inferred from potential temperatures.

In 1933-34 there was an important expedition to
the Indian Ocean on His Egyptian Majesty's ship
Mabahiss under the leadership of Lt. Col. R. B.
Seymour Sewell. This was the first expedition the
expenses of which were defrayed from a fund set
aside from the estate of the late Sir John Murray.
Therefore the expedition is called the John Murray
Expedition to the Indian Ocean. The reports
giving the results of the expedition are now being
published by the British Museum (Natural History).
The station list of the expedition has just ap-
peared in print.

Professor Defant plotted on the chart published
by him the data available in the Institut fiir Meeres-
kunde up to February 1, 1928. The sources of his
data for the Indian Ocean are as follows:

' Asiatic Soc. of Bengal, Mem., vol. 9, 1932.

' Wiist, G., Anzeichen von Beziehungen zwischen Boden-
strom und Relief in der Tiefsee des Indischen Ozeans: Die
Naturwissensch. 1934, Jahrg. 22, Hft. 16, pp. 241-244, 1934.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Sources of Data for the Indian Ocean

NAME OF SHIP

Challenger

Gazelle

Elisabeth

Investigator

Penguin
Investigator

Waterwitch

Stork

Valdivia

Gauss

Sealark

Planet

Sealark

MowE

Merlin

Ammiraglio
Magnaghi

Ormonde

TIME OF WORK

December 1873

March 1874

March 1875
April 1875
May 1875
9, January 1877

October 1887

April 1891

April 1892
October 1892 & 1893
January 1895
April/May 1897
January 1898
December 1898
January 1899
February 1899
March/ April 1899
Dec. 1901-May 1903

29, September 1905

April 1906
May 1906
June 1906
April-May 1909

January/February 1913

November 1920

April 1924

April/Mai 1927

After A. Defant

POSITION OF STATIONS

45-46°S, 34-48°E
42-50°S, 123-134°E

22-36°S, 58-72°E
28-36°S, 76-122''E
8-16°S, 117-124''E
39°S, 26°E

6-10°N, 90-91°E

22-27°S, 110-111°E
9-15°N, 74-81°E
12''N, 70-73°E
39°S, 23-27°E
2-6°N, 55-56°E
34°34'S, 25°54'E
56-62°S, 14-59°E
36-15°S, 78-96°E
7°N-rS, 76-96°E
9°N-5°S, 43-53°E
Siidwestindischer Ozean,

Subantarktisches
Gebiet

10°S, 51°E

49°31'S, 29''16'N

5-6°N, 80-82°E

Route: Kapstadt, Dur-
ban, Beira, Lindi

4°N, 85-93°E

11°55'N, 45°50'E

12-13°N, 44-47°E

SOURCE OF DATA

Report on the scientific Results of the
voyage of H. M. S. Challenger during
the years 1873-1876, Physics and Chem-
istry, vol. 1, London 1884, pis. 93-95,
98-100.

Forschungsreise S. M. S. Gazelle, Hrsg.
vom Reichsmarineamt. Physik und
Chemie, vol. 2, Berlin 1888/89, p. 40.

Kapitan z. S. Wickede, Tiefseebeobach-
tungen S. M. S. Elisabeth, Annalen
der Hydrographie, 1878, p. 319.

Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths, 1888, London
1889, pp. 8, 9.

Ibid., 1891, London 1892, p. 10, 11.

Ibid., 1892, London 1893, pp. 10, 11 und
1893, London 1894, pp. 10, 11.

Ibid., 1895, London 1896, p. 20.

Ibid., 1897, London 1898, pp. 50, 51.

G. Schott, Ozeanographie und maritime
Meteorologie. Wiss. Ergebnisse der
Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition 1898/99,
vol. 1, Jena 1902, Text figs., pis., 18,
20-22, 24-26.

E. V. Drygalski, Ozean und Antarktis,
Meereskundliche Forschungen und Er-
gebnisse der Deutschen Siidpolar-Ex-
pedition 1901-1903, vol. 7, Berlin 1925,
pp. 476-483.

Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths 1905, London
1906, pp. 30, 31.

Die Forschungsreise S. M. S. Planet,
hrsg. vom Reichsmarineamt, voL 3,
Berlin 1909, pp. 57-59.

Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths 1909, London
1910, p. 24.

Ozeanogr. Arbeiten S. M. S. Mowe im
westlichen Indischen Ozean 1913, An-
nalen der Hydrographie 1915, p. 341.

Hydrogr. Department of the Admiralty,
List of Oceanic Depths 1920, London
1921, p. 23.

Campagna idrografica nel Mar Rosso della
R. N. Ammiraglio Magnaghi 1923/24,
Ricierche di oceanografia fisica. Part 4,
Annali Idrografici 1926.

D. J. Matthews, Temperature and Salin-
ity Observations in the Gulf of Aden,
Nature 1927, London 1927, p. 512.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 18

Symbols
Temperature Salinity Depth (Meters)
» D 500-1000

• O 1000-3000

■ a >3000

a a not. available

Indian Ocean, General Chart
Serial Sections of Temperature and Salinity. Stations without abbreviations taken from Defant, prior to February 1, 1928;
stations with abbreviations added to Defant's charts, mostly subsequent to February 1, 1928.

TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY

Supplemental Sources of Data for the
Indian Ocean

The positions of the stations plotted by Defant
are without abbreviations. There are added with
abbreviations the positions of other stations, mostly
of dates subsequent to February 1, 1928. A list of
the sources of the data is as follows: (The letters
after the ships' names are the abbreviations used
on the chart.)

Dana (D): List of Stations, Dana Report No. 1, pp. 17-78,
seven plates, 1934. Stations 3804-3809, 3812-3973, pp.
45-60. (The Carlsberg Foundation's Oceanographical
Expedition Round the World 1928-1930, and previous
Dana Expeditions, under the leadership of Prof.
Johannes Schmidt.)

Discovery I (DI): Manuscript data from Sir Douglas
Mawson. Reports in press.

Discovery II and William Scoresby (DS): Manuscript
data from Dr. Stanley Kamp.

Mabahiss (MA) : Station list pp. 3-29, 1 chart: John Murray
Expedition to the Indian Ocean 1933-34. Under the
leadership of Lt. Col. R. B. Seymour Sewell, CLE.,
F.R.S. Stations 12-202 in the Indian Ocean.

Egeria, Investigator, Planet, Valdivia, and Vitiaz
(E) (I) (PL) (VA) (V): Sewell, R. B. Seymour, Geo-
graphic and Oceanographic Research in Indian Waters:
Asiatic Society of Bengal, Memoirs, vol. 9, no. 6, pp.
357-424, 1932.

WiLLEBRORD Snelliu.s (SN): van Riel, P. M., Einige
Ozeanographische Beobachtungen im Roten Meer,
Golf von Aden, und Indischen Ozean: Ann. Hydrog. u.
marit. Meteorol., vol. 60, Jahrg. 1932, Heft 10, pp. 401-
407, 1932.

CHARTING THE BOTTOM OF THE OCEANS

SOUNDED AND UNSOUNDED AREAS

Plates 19, 20, 21, 22, 23

The accompanying charts showing the sounded
and unsounded areas of sea bottom are based upon
charts prepared by the United States Hydrographic
Office. Several years ago that office published five
charts, one each for the north and south Atlantic,
one each for the north and south Pacific, and one
for the Indian Ocean, on which were shown the
sounded and unsounded areas in the three oceans.
These charts were intended to guide United States
Naval vessels, equipped with sonic-sounding ap-
paratus, in compljdng with instructions that when
practicable their courses be laid across unsounded
areas, so as gradually to complete surveys of the
ocean bottom for bottom configuration. The sup-
plemental information, much of it not yet published,
that had been assembled in connection with this
report has been added to the charts already drawn.
It is hoped that these charts represent with fair
accuracy what has been done in ascertaining the
configuration of the sea bottom, and that they may
serve to guide ves.sels of other countries, as well as
those of the United States, to these areas on which
there is inadequate information.

It is pertinent here to refer to the article. "The
bathymetric soundings of the oceans," by Lt. Com.
H. Bencker, published by the International Hydro-
graphic Bureau, June 1930, and presented at the
meeting in Stockholm of the Section of Physical
Oceanography, International Union of Geodesy and
Geophysics, August 1930. This paper, in addition
to a general account of the growth of knowledge
of the bathymetry of the oceans, contains five
appendices, one of which is "Chronological list of
oceanic explorations from the year 1800," and
another is "List arranged by oceans, of principal
oceanic deeps."

Mention may be made of converting the sound
intervals of echo soundings into true depths. Data
on subsurface temperatures and salinities in the
oceans are now becoming so extensive that the time
is ripe for a revised edition of the British Admiralty's
"Tables of the velocity of sound in pure water and
sea water for use in echo-sounding and sound-rang-
ing," published in 1927. Tho.se institutions that

have acquired pertinent data would render meri-
torious service to oceanography by cooperating with
the British Admiralty in perfecting that valuable
publication. It should be practicable to deduce
almost instantaneously the true depth from the
echo time-interval.

A glance at the accompanying charts shows that
for the more general features the north Atlantic and
the north Pacific have been mostly, but not entirely,
covered. Recently, largely because of the activities
of the Meteor and Discovery II, knowledge
of the south Atlantic has been greatly increased, but
the lines of soundings north of latitude 50°S. are
still so far apart that only the outlines of the grosser
features may be surely recognized. Exploration of
Antarctic waters has been intensely prosecuted
since 1925 by the Discovery II and William
ScoRESBY, and, beginning somewhat later, by Dis-
covery I and NoRWEGiA. So many additional lines
have been run that it should now be possible to
construct a new bathymetric chart for the seas
around Antarctica, south of about 50°S. latitude.
There are also lines from Antarctica to southern
Africa, .southern Australia, New Zealand, and
southern South America. The Mabahiss has
recently, 1933, greatly added to knowledge of the
northwestern Indian Ocean, as shown in an article
by Wiseman and Sewell.' Other important recent
work on the bathymetry of the Pacific comprises
new bathymetric charts of the South China Sea by
the Institut Oceanographique de ITndochine, of the
seas adjacent to Japan by the Hydrographic De-
partment of Imperial Japanese Navy, of Philippine
waters by the Philippine Coast and Geodetic Survey,
and of the Netherlands East Indies by the Snellius
Expedition. The last mentioned charts constitute
one of the finest publications on bottom topography
ever is.sued.'- Plate 1, composed of two sheets, is a
colored bathymetric chart of the eastern part of the

' Wiseman, J. H. D., and Sewell, R. B. S., The floor of the
Arabian Sea: Geolog. Mag., vol, 74, pp. 219-230, pi. 11,
May, 1937.

2 van Riel, P. M., Bottom configuration in relation to the
flow of the bottom water: Snellius Expedition, vol. 2,
Oceanographic Results, part 2, chapter 2, pp. 63, 6 pis., 16
detailed charts, 1934.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

East Indian Archipelago on a scale of 1:2,500,000.
Plate 2 is a colored bathymetric chart of the East
Indian Archipelago on a scale of 1 : 5,000,000. It is
also gratifying to record that the International
Hydrographic Bureau is publi-shing a revised edition
of the Carte bathym^trique gen^rale des Oceans.

The foregoing few notes on recent progress in the
study of sea-bottom configuration are gratifjdng,
but there are still two enormous areas of sea bottom
on which only a little information is available.
These are most of the Pacific Ocean, except near its
shores, between the Equator and 50°S. latitude,
and, except adjacent to Antarctica, most of the
Indian Ocean east of longitude 70°E. and south of
latitude 10°S. There are other areas on which
information is inadequate, such as that between
the Hawaiian Islands and the American coast, but
the two above indicated are the most outstanding
large areas on which there is little or no inform-
ation.

The remarks so far made apply to the larger fea-
tures of bottom configuration, but before leaving the
subject some consideration should be given to the
more minute features of relief. It would require
considerable searching of literature to discover who

was the first to recognize that there are on the ocean
floor earth-forms that are trench-like, others that are
precipitous and simulate fault-scarps, et cetera, but
we do know that the invention of radio-acoustic
position-finding and the invention of echo-sounding
devices has made possible the recognition of minutiae
of sea-bottom configuration that was entirely im-
possible only a few years ago. While in sight of
land, by making closely spaced line-soundings it is
possible to develop the side walls and floor of a
trench, as Shepard has done,' but when farther out
at sea other methods of successive place-finding are
essential. It has now been convincingly shown that
the continental shelf off the east coast of the United
States is incised by numerous trenches which can be
traced to depths of 1,800 meters or more.'' The
origin of these features is one of the great enigmas
of geology and oceanography. They are mentioned
here in the hope that research on them may be
extended to other parts of the world.

' Shepard, F. P., Continued exploration of California
submarine canyons: Amer. Geophys. Union, meeting 1936,
Trans, pp. 221-223, 1936.

* Smith, Paul A., Submarine valleys: U. S. Coast and
Geodetic Surv. Field Engineers Bull. No. 10, pp. 150-158,
Dec. 1936.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

INDEX CHART OF UNSOUNDED AREAS

Alantic Ocean, Northern Part, Sounded and Unsodnded Areas

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

1M)K\ (-HART OF UNSOUNDEP AREAS

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN

INDEX CHARTOF UNSOUNDED AKEAS

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

SOUTH PACIFIC OCEAN

INDEX CHART OF UNSOUNDED AREAS

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

INDIAN OCEAN

INDKXC'IIAinOFlTNSOIINDED AREAi5

MARINE BOTTOM DEPOSITS

No general review of the subject of marine bottom
deposits will be attempted here but a sufficient
number of references to literature will be given to
show the present status of mapping the material
on the sea-floor. Nearly all, if not all, modern
research expeditions have systematically collected
samples of the sea bottom, and reports on the ma-
terial obtained have either been written or are in
preparation. Since the later reports utilize the
information contained in the earlier publications,
it is necessary to mention only recent reports.
Although the material collected by modern expedi-
tions has been or is being utilized, it must be recog-
nized with regret that there are enormous collections
of marine bottom samples procured by earlier ex-
peditions that have not been critically studied —
for example, there are thousands of such samples in
the United States National Museum awaiting study.
There have been far too few students of marine
bottom deposits. The only large museum that has
on its staff a member whose major duty is to study
marine bottom samples is the British Museum of
Natural History. Several of the oceanographic
institutions have specialists on the subject attached
to their staffs, but the researches of most of the
investigators are incidental to other activities.

For the Atlantic Ocean the most comprehensive
reports are those on the results of the Meteor
Expedition. Two of them, by Correns and his
associates' have been pubhshed. The study of the
samples obtained in the south Atlantic was en-
trusted to 0. Pratje, who has published one Lieferung
on his results,- and it is understood that another
part will follow. Until now no chart presenting the
results for the entire Atlantic has appeared.

Three reports on collections made by the Dis-

> Correns, Carl W., A. Die Verfahren der Gewinnung
und Untersuchung der Sedimente: Die Sedimente des
aquatorialen Atlantischen Ozeans, Wissench. Ergeb.
Meteor, vol. 3, 3d pt., 1st Lief., pp. 42, 193.5.

Schott, W. 15., Die Foraminiferen in dem aquatorialen
Teil des Atlantischen Ozeans: Ibid., 1st Lief., pp. 43-134,
3 Beilagen, pis. 1, 2, 1935.

Correns, Carl W., C. Zusammenstellung der Untersuch-
ungs Ergebnisse nach Stationen geordnet; D. Auswertung
der Ergebnisse, mit Beitriigen von V. Leinz und O. K.
Radczewski: Ibid., 2 d Lief., pp. XH, 135-298, pis. 3, 4, 1937.

^ Pratje, O., Gewinnung und Bearbeitung der Boden-
proben: Die Sedimente des Siidatlantischen Ozeans,
Wissensch. Ergeb. Meteor, vol. 3, pt. 2, 1 Lief., 1935.

covERY II and William Scoresby have appeared.'
Two papers by Thorp are cited in a footnote.*
The second paper by Thorp is concerned with only
shallow-water deposits of the kind indicated in the
title. It contains references to all important litera-
ture on the subject, for both the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans.

For the Pacific and Indian Oceans, W. Schott^
has given a comprehensive review, accompanied by
a bibhography, of the subject up to the end of 1934.
Thorp, in the short paper cited below,^ describes the
shallow-water calcium-carbonate deposits of another
area in the Pacific. Of the Discovery Reports
already published only the one Neaverson, already
noted, deals with Pacific sediments. An extensive
report by Roger Revelle on the bottom samples
collected in the Pacific by the Carnegie is now in
press as a publication of the Department of Terres-
trial Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of
Washington. P. H. Kuenen has in preparation a
report on the marine bottom samples collected by
the WiLLEBRORD Snellius in the Netherlands
East Indies. The specimens collected by the
Mabahiss are being studied by J. D. H. Wiseman,
who has published an interesting article on volcanic
rock dredged from the bottom off Providence Is-
land' and the paper by him and R. B. S. Sewell,
"The floor of the Arabian Sea," already cited, con-

' Matthews, L. Harrison, The marine deposits of the
Patagonian continental shelf: Discovery Reports, vol. 9,
pp. 175-206, pis. 2-14, 1934.

Moore, Hilary B., Faecal pellets from marine deposits:
Discovery Reports, vol. 7, pp. 17-26, 1 text-fig., 1933.

Neaverson, E., Sea-floor deposits, L General characters
and distribution: Discovery Reports, vol. 9, pp. 295-350,
pis. 17-22, 1934.

' Thorp, E. M., Descriptions of deep-sea bottom samples
from the western north Atlantic and the Caribbean Sea:
Scripps Inst. Oceanogr. Tech. Bull., vol. 3, pp. 1-31, 5
text-figs., 1 chart, 1931.

Thorp, E. M., Calcareous shallow-water marine deposits
of Florida and the Bahamas: Carnegie Inst. Washington
Pub. no. 452, pp. 37-143, 14 text-figs., 5 pis., Dec. 1935.

* Schott, W., Die Bodenbedeckung des Indischen und
Stillen Ozeans: in G. Schott's Geographic des Indischen
und Stillen Ozeans, pp. 109-122, pi. 5, 1935.

' Thorp, E. M., The sediments of the Pearl and Hermes
Reed (Midway Islands): Jour. Sed. Petrol., vol. 6, pp. 109-
118, 1 fig., 1936.

' Wiseman, J. D. H., The petrography and significance
of a rock dredged from a depth of 744 fathoms, near to
Providence Reef, Indian Ocean. Linn. Soc. Zool. Trans,
ser. 2, vol. 19, pp. 437-443, 3 text-figs., 1936.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

tains information on material on the bottom of the
Indian Ocean. Basaltic lava, dredged at two places,
is noteworthy because of its low radium-content.

The relative exploration of the sea-bottom for
material composing it is only approximately indi-
cated by the distribution of stations for serial sec-
tions of temperature and salinity, for numerous
bottom samples have been collected at places for
which information on the physical features of the
water is lacking or inaccurate. There are large
areas in the Pacific and Indian Oceans, the same
areas for which other information is deficient, from
which few or no collections of bottom material have
been made.

During recent years there have been great changes
in the methods of studying marine sediments due to
the application of the principles of physical chemis-
try to numerous problems of the .sediments them-
selves and to problems of the seawater associated
with the sediments and due to the utilization of
X-ray analysis. It is not necessary to discuss the
methods of this later work for they are described
in connection with the reports on the samples col-
lected by the Meteor, Carnegie, and other re-
search vessels, and in other papers on marine
sediments. It is pertinent to call attention here to a
volume "Symposium on Recent Sediments" now
in preparation by the Committee on Sedimentation
of the United States National Research Council,
under the editorship of Parker D. Trask. Many
specialists are cooperating in the work.

Another development of significance is the im-
provement of the older, and the invention of new
devices for obtaining cores of the sea bottom.
There have been numerous modifications of Ekman's
bottom sampler, which depends upon a weight to
drive a tube into the bottom. One helpful modifi-
cation is that of Trask.' A comm.endable feature of
Trask's design is its cheapness, the cost need not
exceed about five dollars. Another valuable device
is that of Kuenen.'

The most noteworthy advance in the design of
coring devices is that of Piggot.'" The power to

* Trask, Parker D., Oceanography and oil deposits:
Amer. Geophys. Union, Trans., Nat. Res. Council Bull,
no. 61, pp. 235-242, 1927.

Trask, Parker D., Origin and environment of source
sediments of petroleum: Gulf Pub. Co., Houston, Tex.,
1932. See p. 12, fig. 1, C.

' Kuenen, Ph. H., Die Viermeter-Lotrohre der Snellius
Expedition: Ann. d. Hydrogr. u. marit. Meteorologie,
March, 1932.

'" Piggot, C. S., Apparatus to secure core samples from
the ocean bottom: Geol. Soc. Amer. Bull., vol. 47, pp. 675-
684, 3 pis., 1 fig., 1936.

drive the tube into the bottom is derived from an
explosive, that is the upper part of the apparatus
is a gun. The numerous cores, up to ten feet
long that have been taken, retain the stratification
of the material sampled and make possible a study
of the stratigraphy of the bottom material. It
may be confidently expected that the Piggot gun
will come into general use for sampling sea-bottom
material, and that those samplers that take material
only from the surface of the bottom will be replaced.
Provisions for operating the Piggot gun have been
made on the research vessels of both the Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution and the Scripps
Institution of Oceanography. It is probable that
similar arrangements will be made on other vessels.

The incentive that led Doctor Piggot to invent
his gun was to procure core-samples for the study
of the radium-content of marine bottom-deposits.
He determined the amounts of radium in a series of
samples collected by the Carnegie by means of a
snapper-type of sampler. The results were not
altogether satisfying — cores were needed. He has
kindly prepared the following summary statement
for this report.

Radium Content of Marine Bottom Deposits, by
C. S. Piggot, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie
Institution of Washington.

Though many determinations have been made
of the radium content of various rocks from many
localities on the continental surfaces of the earth,
very few .such measurements have been made on the
materials comprising the ocean-bottom sediments.
The reasons for this are obvious, but when the vast
area covered by these sediments is considered, and
especially their high radium content, it is apparent
that they may have a geophysical significance of
very great importance.

The meagerness of the available data is empha-
sized Vvhen it is pointed out that only some sixty-
eight determinations have been published, of which
Joly published twelve in 1908, '^ Hans Pettersson
twenty-eight in 1930,'- and Piggot twenty-eight in
1932", and these represent a material covering nearly
three-fourths of the surface of the earth. Further-
more, these sediments are of unknown thickness, and
as there is little likelihood that direct measurements
of the thickness will ever be made, a knowledge of

" Joly, J., Phil. Mag., vol. 16, p. 190, 1908.

'- Pettersson, Hans, Teneur en radium des depots de mer
profonde: Resultats de Campagnes Scientifiques par Albert
I<" Prince Souverain de Monaco, fascicule 81, 1930.

" Piggot, C. S., Radium content of ocean-bottom sedi-
ments: Amer. Jour, of Sci., vol. 25, pp. 229-238, March, 1933.

MARINE BOTTOM DEPOSITS

this factor can be got only by a study of the rate
of deposition. The most promising method for ac-
complishing this is one based upon radioactive
considerations. Therefore, a study of ocean bottom
sediments from this point of view is of the greatest
importance in securing fundamental information
about these vast deposits.

The radium content of the granitic rocks of the
earth varies from about 1-3 X lO"'- grams of radium
per gram of rock ; and of the basaltic rocks about 1
on the same scale. The sedimentary rocks average
less than the basalts, whereas the ocean bottom
sediments are found to contain several times as
much as even the granites. The average for Joly's
twelve determinations is 17.8 X 10""'- grams Ra
per gram of sample, which is considered to be
rather high. Pettersson's twenty-eight determina-
tions average 10.96 X 10~'- grams/gram, with a
maximum of 49.5 X 10~'^ grams/gram. Piggot's
re.sults average 6.52 X 10~'- grams/gram with
21.40 X 10~" grams /gram as the greatest.

These high concentrations of radium are the more
remarkable when one considers that the uranium
represented by this radium must come originally
from the igneous rocks. Apparently it did not
concentrate to any great extent in the sedimentary
rocks at the time of their formation presumably in
shallow seas but has concentrated to a considerable
extent in those sediments which are now accumulat-
ing slowly in the deeper and more remote portions
of the ocean.

Usually the red clays contain a higher concentra-
tion of radium than do the other deposits. Of the
samples examined by Petters.son and Piggot whose
characters are definitely known, 27 red clays average
12.1 X 10~'- grams Ra per gram, and 13 Globigerina
oozes average 4.1 X 10~'- grams Ra per gram of
sample.

Joly suggested that the minute organisms of the
sea abstract uranium, more or less selectively, from
the water and when they die their skeletons carry
it to the bottom with them. However, the higher

radium concentrations are not found associated with
any of the various skeletal deposits.

Pettersson found high radium concentration
as-sociated with evidences of volcanic activity and he
suggests that the unusual concentrations are brought
about by submarine volcanism. Pettersson's ex-
planation seems rather specialized to be of general
application.

Piggot points out that the oxides of uranium like
those of iron and manganese are among the least
soluble of its compounds and that it is in those
portions of the ocean bottom, in general, where the
oxides of manganese and iron are separated, as re-
vealed by the nodules of these elements, that the
uranium concentration as revealed by the radium
content is the higher. This accords with the
observations of the oxygen content with depth made
by the Carnegie, which revealed that though the
oxygen content fell off very rapidly down to about
1000 fathoms, it increa.sed from then on and soon
attained a magnitude about two-thirds of that at
the surface. Therefore the deep, undisturbed
areas, far from land and detrital debris, furnish an
oxidizing environment where the uranium separates
out, and appears in the highest concentrations at
those places of slowest sedimentation.

The geophysical significance of this highly radio-
active material depends upon its thickness and its
history subsequent to being formed. If it be of
great thickness or have served to take such concen-
trations of radium into the structure of the earth's
crust, its influence must be considerable, either as
insulating the flow of heat into the ocean, as re-
quired by Joly's thermal cycles, or as providing
sources of intense energy for any part of the earth's
crust within which it may become incorporated.

Obviously the elucidation of such questions awaits
considerable further research and more particularly
the development of some device which will provide
core samples, from a study of which some knowledge
of the character and rate of deposition may be
obtained.

SUBMARINE EARTHQUAKE EPICENTERS, MAGNETIC
OBSERVATIONS AT SEA, TIDAL RECORDS

THE STRUCTURE OF THE OCEAN BASINS AS

INDICATED BY SEISMOLOGICAL DATA AND

EARTHQUAKE EPICENTERS

By B. GUTENBERG

Batch Graduate School of Geological Sciences, California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, Calif., U.S.A.

Contribution No. Z26

THE STRUCTURE OF THE OCEAN BASINS AS INDICATED BY SEISMOLOGICAL DATA

When an earthquake occurs, two different kinds
of waves are generated : waves which travel through
the interior of the earth (space waves), and waves
whose energy is propagated chiefly along surfaces
(surface waves). The records of both kinds of
waves can be used to study certain physical proper-
ties of the several layers of the earth, especially of
the earth's crust.

According to theory and to observations there
are two different types of space waves : longitudinal
waves, caused by the propagation of changes in
volume (either compression or rarefaction, there
being no difference in propagation between these
cases), and shear waves (transversal waves), due to
the propagation of a shear. The velocities of the
longitudinal waves {V) and of the transversal waves
(v) are connected with the bulk modulus k, the
coefficient of rigidity ji, and the density d of the
material in which the wave is propagated, by
the following formulae:

fc + lM

V =

From the seLsmograms we find the times of arrival
of the different phases. Further, in very many
cases we are able to calculate the position and depth
of the focus, and the time of origin. In such cases
we can find the travel time (time between occurrence
of the shock and the arrival of a certain phase at the
station), and plotting these travel times against the
distances, we get the "travel-time curves" which
allow us to find the velocities of the several kinds of
waves as a function of the depth.

Unfortunately it is very difficult to get travel
times of near shocks whose waves run only through

the material at the bottom of the ocean. To get
true velocities, the instrument must be in contact
with the material of the earth's crust beneath the
ocean. It is very difficult to state how far this is
true in the case of instruments installed on islands.
The only observations which may fulfill such condi-
tions to a certain degree, have been published by
Angenheister' using seismograms near shocks regis-
tered at Apia (Samoa). They show that both kinds
of forerunners arrive earlier than in other regions
considered so far, and they were the first indication
of the fact that there are large inequalities in the
earth's crust.

Another way to find data on the differences in the
earth's crust has been suggested by B. Gutenberg
and C. F. Richter.^ The amplitudes of waves
reflected from the surface of the earth depend on
the velocities at the point of reflection, in addition
to other quantities. The observations show that
waves reflected at the bottom in the Pacific basin,
with the exception of a few limited areas, and in the
Polar basin show usually much smaller amplitudes
than waves reflected under otherwise equal condi-
tions in the continents, the Atlantic or Indian Ocean.
The maximum difference occurs for epicentral dis-
tances of about 5000 km. ; at distances of this order
Pacific reflections, on an average, have only about
J of the amplitudes of continental reflections, indi-
cating a higher velocity of waves in the surface
layers of the Pacific.

The observations of surface waves, that is waves

" Angenheister, G., Beobachtungen an pazifischen Beben.
Gottinger Naehrichten, 1921.

2 B. Gutenberg and C. F. Richter, On Seismic Waves
(Second Paper). Gerlands Beitr. zur Geophysik, vol. 45
(1935) pp. 280-360.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

which are propagated along the surface of the
earth, also can be used to find the velocities of waves
in different regions. In a medium which is not
homogeneous, the velocity of surface waves depends
upon the period. Short waves are propagated only
in a thin layer, whereas the energy of long waves is
propagated in a thick layer. In general, a con-
siderable amount of the energy of these waves is
propagated in that part of the earth's crust with a
thickness several times as great as the wave-length.
With increasing depth the energy propagated by
elastic surface waves diminishes exponentially. If,
for example, we have two layers, the upper one with
a thickness of ten kilometers and a velocity of three
kilometers per second for transversal waves, the
lower, with a velocity of four kilometers per second,
surface shear waves with a period of one second
(wave-length of the order of three kilometers),
will be propagated with a velocity of three kilo-
meters per second; if the wave has a period of ten
seconds, the wave-length will be greater than the
thickness of the layer, so a noticeable part of the
energy will be propagated in the deeper layer, and
the velocity of the wave will be between three and
four kilometers per second. If, finally, we consider
a wave with a period of 60 seconds, the wave-length
(nearly 240 kilometers) will be large as compared
with the thickness of the layer, nearly all the energy
will be propagated in the deeper layer and the
velocity of this wave will be nearly four kilometers
per second. As the whole matter is somewhat
complicated, we will not go into detail.

If instead of two layers with constant velocity in
each we have a material in which the velocity in-
creases with depth, the effect will be similar; in this
case, too, the velocity of the waves will increase
with the period. In using this method B. Guten-
berg found in 1923 the difference in structure be-
tween the Pacific basin and all other regions of the
earth.'

Combining the most recent data found from the
various investigations mentioned so far, Gutenberg
and Richter* arrived at the following conclusions:
The crust of the earth is divided in most regions
into several layers, the uppermost is the layer of
sedimentary rocks, with velocities of longitudinal
waves from about 1 km./sec. in very unconsolidated

' B. Gutenberg, Dispersion und Extinction von seismis-
chen Oberflachenwellen und der Aufbau der obersten Erd-
schichten. Physikal. Zeitschr. vol. 25 (1924) pp. 377-381.

* B. GutenJDerg and C. F. Richter, On Seismic Waves
(Third Paper). Gerlands Beitrage zur Geophysik, vol. 47
(1936) pp. 73-131.

recent material to at least 6 km./sec. in very old,
consolidated sediments. The thickness of the sedi-
mentary layer varies locally withui very wide limits;
it may be totally absent, or may extend to depths
of over 12 km. (Depths of this order have been
found in the Los Angeles Basin by the use of applied
seismic methods.) Beneath these sedimentary rocks
is a layer which in many cases is known to consist
of granitic rock, in which the velocity of longitudinal
waves is about 5.5 km./sec. In some regions the
sediments are directly underlain by basaltic rock;
where data are available, usually one or two deeper
layers have been recognized within the crust.

The base of the granitic layer has been found,
in the continental regions where it has been studied,
at depths between 15 and 20 km. In these same
regions the total thickness of the crust (depth of the
first major discontinuity) has been found to be from
30 to 50 km. Relatively small values for this
thickness have been found for the southwestern
United States, western Europe, and northeastern
Japan; about average thicknesses occur in central
and western North America, and in South America.
The largest values found thus far are in the region
of the Alps. In the Atlantic and Indian Oceans,
the total thickness of the crust is only a fraction
of that on the continents; the seismological data
offer no evidence as to the nature of the rocks
composing the crust in these areas, but in both
oceans there still is a well-marked discontinuity
between the crustal rocks and the mantle. There
is no evident vertical discontinuity between these
oceans and the adjacent continents.

In the region of the Pacific basui no marked dis-
continuity between crust and mantle exists; except
for local accumulations of erupted basaltic material,
it does not appear that the elastic constants near the
rock surface differ significantly from those in the
mantle. Data for the north polar basin definitely
indicate the existence of a considerable area with
properties similar to those of the Pacific basin.

All available evidence indicates that a continental
type of structure exists in certain outlying areas of
the Pacific Ocean. This is the case in the Poly-
nesian region, including the area west of the Bonin,
Marianne, and Caroline Islands. Besides, there is
evidence for continental structure in a limited area
in the southeastern Pacific, at considerable distance
from the coast of South America.

The problem, of what materials the various layers
consist has not been solved completely yet. In
crystalline rocks, velocities of 4^-6 km./sec. have

STRUCTURE OF OCEAN BASINS

been found for longitudinal waves, in basalt 5-5f
km. /sec. It is very probable that the values found
for the upper layer beneath the continental areas
correspond to granite under somewhat higher pres-
sure. No waves through more basic rocks have been
investigated by means of explosions. It seems to be
very probable that the continental layers consist of
granite at the top, and rocks with increasing basicity
at greater depths, that the bottom of the Atlantic
Ocean is formed by the same types of rocks, the
layers being noticeably thinner, and that the
entire bottom of the Pacific Ocean and all regions
of the earth at dei;)ths of more than 50 kilometers
consist of a very much more basic material than is
characteristic of the uppermost part of the con-
tinents.

There are other observations confirming these
results. Surface waves undergo a certain amount of
extinction when propagated. For very long waves,
this seems to be the same everywhere. Indeed, the
energy of these waves is propagated almost com-
pletely at considerable depths, the wave-length
being a few hundreds of kilometers, and the structure
at that depth apparently is the same in every region
of the earth. But if we use short waves we find a
very definite dependence of extinction upon the
region. The least values are to be found at the
bottom of the Atlantic Ocean and on the continents.
The values for the bottom of the Pacific Ocean are
somewhat scanty, as in this case epicenter and sta-
tion must be situated in the ocean (Honolulu, Apia).
They do not differ much from those just mentioned;
however, noticeably larger loss of energy is found
for waves which have traversed the boundary of the
Pacific Ocean, even if the station is situated very
close to the ocean. In particular, the values found
from paths along the coast (Japan-Manila, Japan-
Batavia) are very high, indicating that it is not a
high absorption of the energy at the bottom of the
Pacific Ocean that is the cause of the large values
there, but the fact of the crossing of the coasts.
No corresponding effects have been found from
waves passing the coasts of the Atlantic Ocean.
In this case, no surfaces between layers of different
material must be crossed, but as we found before,
and as is stated by the investigation of the extinction
of surface waves, the physical coast of the Pacific
Ocean (Japan-Philippines-New Guinea) is the
boundary, between two completely different kinds
of material. The large losses of energy of the
surface waves crossing this vertical surface between
the material at the bottom of the Pacific Ocean

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

and the very much less basic material in the upper
layer of the continents, are caused by reflection
and refraction of the energy which arrives there.
The vertical extent of these vertical surfaces cannot
be more than a few tens of kilometers, as the very
long waves seem to show no effect of the kind men-
tioned.

Nevertheless these vertical discontinuities may
affect the conditions down to a few hundreds of
kilometers. Inv^estigations on the depths of foci
of earthquakes^ have shown that everywhere in the
earth depths of foci of not more than 40-50 km.
prevail. In many earthquake regions there are
found, in addition, foci at depths down to 100 km.
Still greater depths occur in some earthquake regions
as in the Hindu Kush (200-250 km.), in the south
Atlantic (about 150 km.), Central America (about
130 km.), eastern Mediterranean region (150-200
km.), and many regions surrounding the Pacific
Ocean. Earthquakes originating at depths of
three hundred km. and more, however, are found
only in a relatively narrow belt around the Pacific
Ocean. They have been located thus far in Man-
churia, Sea of Okhotsk, south of Japan (near 30°N.,
140°E.), in the Central East Indies about Celebes,
in the Solomon Islands, the Fiji-Kermadec area,
and western South America, but not North America.
(See figure.) The greate.st depths, of between 600-
720 km. thus far have been found in almost all these
regions, but especially in the Fiji-Kermadec area
and in western South Anierica. In general the
distances from the Pacific Ocean increases with
increasing depth. In South America, for example,
the normal shocks are close to the coast, shocks
with depths between 100-250 km. are beneath the
Andes and a third group of shocks with depths
between 600-700 km. have been located east of the
Andes. It has been found, besides, that in general
the type of movement is the same regardless of

depth. That means that if we have a movement
towards the north on one side of a fault near the
surface, the movement is also in general in a north-
erly direction on the same side at larger depths
The data available so far are rather scanty in some
areas; however, they leave no doubt about the fact
that the Pacific Ocean basin bears a unique relation
to the occurrence of deep shocks. No similar phe-
nomena have been observed around other ocean
basins nor at the bottom of the Pacific Ocean.

If we summarize our results we find that the
region comprised within the limits of the Pacific
Ocean as given above has one kind of structure and
all other regions of the earth, perhaps excluding a
part of the Arctic basin, another. In these latter
parts of the earth (non-Pacific area) there is a
continental layer which consists of several shells.
Its thickness is about 40-50 km. under the conti-
nents but decreases towards the Atlantic and
probably the Indian Ocean, where its thickness is
of the order of 20 km. There is no indication that
the continents have broken during any geological
time and drifted apart ; however, our findings would
be in agreement with the assumption that in early
geological times the thickness of the continental
crust was different in many localities from what it is
today and that plastic flow in the continental crust
may have changed the distribution of land and sea
in the area including all continents and the Atlantic
and Indian Ocean.

The basin of the Pacific Ocean proper is a unique
element of the earth's crust and its boundaries
affect the layers down to many hundreds of km.
As it is not evident how the continental crust could
have been removed in a gradual way from the Pacific
Ocean the conclusion seems to be probable that the
Pacific Ocean either never has had such a crust or
that it has been removed by a cosmic event.

EARTHQUAKE EPICENTERS IN OCEANIC REGIONS AND ALONG
CONTINENTAL BORDERS

Plates 24, 25, 26

The accompanying charts are intended to give a
general idea about earthquake epicenters rather
than to present a map of specific shocks. The
following symbols are used:

' B. Gutenberg and C. F. Richter, Depth and Geo-
graphical Distribution of Deep-focus Earthquakes. Paper,
presented at a joint session of the Geological Soc. of Amer-
ica, Cordill. Sect, and the Seismological Society of America
at Berkeley, April 10, 1937.

O Strong shocks frequent in that region. In most cases
one symbol stands for a few or even many shocks!

# Occasionally strong shocks in that region.

O Occasionally medium size shocks (about like the
Long Beach shock), but strong shocks rare.

-|- Occasional shocks, but no recent strong shocks.

As in many cases the epicenters are not known
to a higher degree of accuracy each symbol refers
to a region with a radius of a few hundred km. An

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 24

140° 130° 120° 110° 90° 60° 3dW 0° 20°E 40° 50° 60° 70° 80°

00° 80° 60° 30'W 0° 20t 40° 60° 70° 60°

Atlantic Ocean, Earthquake Epicenters
(Base chart, after G. Wiist)

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

IN MOST CASES ONE SYMBOL STANDS
fOR A FEW OR EVEN MANY SHOCKS
® STRONG SHOCKS
FREQUENT IN THAT REGION
• OCCASIONALLY STRONG
SHOCKS IN THAT REGION

O OCCASIONALLY MEDIUM
SIZE SHOCKS ABOUT LIKE
THE LONG BEACH SHOCK BUT

STRONG SHOCKS LESS FREQUENT
+ OCCASIONALLY
SHOCKS BUT NO
RECENT STRONG
SHOCKS

Pacific Ocean, Earthquake Epicenters
(Base chart, after A. Defant.)

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 26

Indian Ocean, Earthquake Epicenters
(Base chart, after A. Defant.)

saaTAJs

:: i ...

e ; >"■

'«!s ia.ua> Jii I jji

■K^

STRUCTURE OF OCEAN BASINS

endeavor has been made to eliminate the effect of
the different density in distribution of the earth-
quake observatories but it may not have been
entirely successful. For example, the Atlantic-
Arctic region, on which there have been a few
detailed investigations made, may be less active
than the map indicates. In the Southern Hemi-
sphere, on the other hand, as there have been only a
very few investigation.?, many earthquakes of
moderate size may have escaped attention. But
it is my belief that the difference between the

bottom of the Pacific Ocean and the surrounding
regions is not exaggerated. Our records for recent
years have confirmed the indicated relations, the
regions with the most epicenters are more distant
from us than the quiet regions.

The following is a list of the charts of the different
oceans showing the position of earthquake epicen-
ters on the sea floor and on the continental margins:

1. Chart of the Atlantic Ocean.

2. Chart of the Pacific Ocean.

3. Chart of the Indian Ocean.

LIST OF SEISMOLOGICAL STATIONS OF THE

WORLD

By N. H. heck
Captain, United States Coast and Geodetic Survey

Plate 27

NO.

STATION

LOCATION

NO.

STATION

LOCATION

Aachen

Germany

Cambridge

USA

Abisko

Sweden

Cape of Good Hope

South Africa

Adelaide

South Australia

Cardiff

Wales

Accra

West Africa

Carloforte

Italy

Agra

India

Cartuja

Spain

Aidu

Japan

Cernauti

Roumania

Akita

Japan

Charlottesville

USA

Albany

USA

Chatham Islands

South Pacific

Alger-BouzarSah

Algeria

Cheltenham

USA

Alicante

Spain

Chiavari

Italy

Alipore (Calcutta)

India

Chicago (Loyola)

USA

Alma-Ata

USSR

Chicago

USA

Almeria

Spain

Chihuahua

Mexico

Amboina

Dutch East Indies

Christchurch

New Zealand

Ambulong

Philippine Is.

Chur

Switzerland

Andalgala

Argentina

Chiufeng

China

Andijan

USSR

Cincinnati

USA

Angra do Heroismo

Azores

Clausthal

Germany

Ann Arbor

USA

Clermont-Ferrand

France

Apia

Western Samoa

Cleveland

USA

Arapuni

New Zealand

Coimbra

Portugal

Asahigawa

Japan

Coire

Switzerland

Ascension

Is. of Ascension

Colaba (Bombay)

India

Athens

Greece

Colombo

Ceylon

Awomori

Japan

Columbia

USA

Bagneres-de-Bigorre

France

Copenhagen

Denmark

Baguio

Philippine Is.

Copiap6

Chile

Baku

USSR

Dairen

Japan

Balboa

Central America

Dakar

West Africa

Barcelona

Spain

Dannevirke

New Zealand

Basle (Bale)

Switzerland

De Bilt

Netherlands

Batavia

Java

Dehra Dun

India

Beirut

Syria

Denton

USA

Belgrade

Yugoslavia

Denver

USA

Benevento

Italy

Des Moines

USA

Bergen

Norway

Dubrovnik

Yugoslavia

Berkeley

USA

Ebro

Spain

Besan?on

France

Edinburgh

Scotland

Bidston (Liverpool)

England

Eger

Czechoslovakia

Bochum

Germany

Eskdalemuir

Scotland

Bogota

Colombia

Florence Xim.

Italy

Bozeman

USA

Florence

Italy

Budapest

Hungary

Florissant

USA

Buffalo

USA

Foggia

Italy

Bunneythorpe

New Zealand

Fordham

USA

Burlington

USA

Fort de France

Martinique

Butuan

Philippine Is.

Frunse

USSR

LIST OF SEISMOLOGICAL STATIONS OF WORLD

NO.

STATION

Fukui

Georgetown

Gifu

Glenmuick

Gottingen

100

Gorje

101

Graz

102

Grennoble

103

Greymouth

104

Guadalajara

105

Guam

106

Haboro

107

Haiwee

108

Hakodate

109

Halifax

110

Haraada

111

Hamamatsu

112

Hamburg

113

Harvard

114

Hastings

115

Hatidyozima

116

Havana

117

Heerland

118

Heidelberg

119

Heijo

120

Helgoland

121

Helsingfors

122

Helwan

123

Hikone

124

Hilo

125

Hiroshima

126

Hof

127

Hohenheim

128

Hoko

129

Hong Kong

130

Honolulu

131

Huancayo

132

Hukuoka

133

Husan

134

Husiki

135

Hyderabad

136

Idzuhara

137

lidia

138

Imola

139

Innsbruck

140

Irkutsk

141

Ishigakijima

142

Ishinomaki

143

Ithaca

144

Ivigtut

145

Jena

146

Jinsen

147

Johannesburg

148

Kabansk

149

Kagoshima

150

Kakioka

151

Kalocsa

152

Kamakura

153

Kanazawa

154

Karenko

155

Karlsruhe

LOCATION

Japan

USA

Japan

New Zealand

Germany

Yugoslavia

Austria

France

New Zealand

Mexico

Mariana Is.

Japan

USA

Japan

Canada

Japan

Germany

USA

New Zealand

Japan

Cuba

Netherlands

Germany

Korea

Germany

Finland

Egypt

Japan

Hawaii

Japan

Germany

Formosa

China

Hawaii

Peru
Japan
Korea
Japan

India
Japan
Japan

Italy

Austria

Siberia

Japan

USA

Greenland

Germany

Korea

South Africa

Siberia

Japan

Hungary

Japan

Formosa

Germany

NO.

STATION

LOCATION

156

Keeling Islands

Cocos Island

157

Keijo

Korea

158

Kew

England

159

Kingston

Br. West Indies

160

Kiyosumi

Japan

161

Kobe

Japan

162

Kochi

Japan

163

Kodaikanal

India

164

Kodiak

Alaska

165

Kofu

Japan

166

Kona

Hawaii

167

Konigsberg

Germany

168

Kosyum

Formosa

169

Ksara

Syria

170

Kucino

USSR

171

Kumagaya

Japan

172

Kumamoto

Japan

173

Kure

Japan

174

Kushiro

Japan

175

Kyoto

Japan

176

Kysuyu

Japan

177

La Jolla

USA

178

La Paz

Bolivia

179

La Plata

Argentina

180

Lawrence

USA

181

Leipzig

Germany

182

Le Mans

France

183

Lemberg

Poland

184

Leningrad

USSR

185

Lima

Peru

186

Lisbon

Portugal

187

Little Rock

USA

188

Livorno

Italy

189

Ljubljana

Yugoslavia

190

Lund

Sweden

191

Madison

USA

192

Madrid

Spain

193

Maebashi

Japan

194

Makeevka

USSR

195

Malabar

Java

196

Malaga

Spain

197

Manila

Philippine Is.

198

Manzanillo

Mexico

199

Maron

Java

200

Marseilles

France

201

Matsumoto

Japan

202

Matsuyama

Japan

203

Mauritius

204

Mazatlan

Mexico

205

Medan

Dutch E. Indies

206

Melbourne

Australia

207

Mera

Japan

208

Merida

Mexico

209

Meszstetten-Ebingen

Germany

210

Milwaukee

USA

211

IMineo

Italv

212

Mineral

USA

213

Misaki

Japan

214

Misima

Japan

215

Mitaka

Japan

216

Mito

Japan

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

NO.

STATION

LOCATION

NO,

STATION

LOCATION

217

Miyako

Japan

278

Pulkovo

USSR

218

Miyatsu

Japan

279

Quito

Ecuador

219

Miyazaki

Japan

280

Ravensburg

Germany

220

Mizusawa

Japan

281

Reno

USA

221

Mobile

USA

282

Reykjavik

Iceland

222

Moncalieri

Italy

283

Rio de Janeiro

Brazil

223

Montecassino

Italy

284

Riverside

USA

224

Montezuma

Chile

285

Riverview

Australia

225

Morioka

Japan

286

Rocca di Papa

Italy

226

Mostar

Yugoslavia

287

Rome

Italy

227

Mt. Hamilton

USA

288

Saga

Japan

228

Mount Wilson

USA

289

St. Boniface

Canada

229

Munich

Germany

290

St. Helena Island

Is. of St. Helena

230

Muroran

Japan

291

St. Louis

USA

231

Muroto

Japan

292

Sakai

Japan

232

Nagano

Japan

293

Samarkand

USSR

233

Nagasaki

Japan

294

San Fernando (Cadiz)

Spain

234

Nagoya

Japan

295

San Juan

Porto Rico

235

Naples

Italy

296

Santa Barbara

USA

236

Nase

Japan

297

Santa Clara

USA

237

Nemuro

Japan

298

Santiago

Chile

238

Neuchatel

Switzerland

299

Sapporo

Japan

239

New Haven

USA

300

Sarajevo

Yugoslavia

240

New Orleans

USA

301

Sasebo

Japan

241

New Plymouth

New Zealand

302

Saskatoon

Canada

242

Niigata

Japan

303

Scoresby-Sund

Greenland

243

Niihama

Japan

304

Seatoon

New Zealand

244

Nordlingen

Germany

305

Seattle

USA

245

Numazu

Japan

306

Sebastopol

USSR

246

Oaxaca

Mexico

307

Sendai

Japan

247

Obihiro

Japan

308

Seven Falls

Canada

248

Oiwake

Japan

309

Shimonoseki

Japan

249

Okayama

Japan

310

Shionomisaki

Japan

250

Okinawa

Japan

311

Sibenik

Yugoslavia

251

Omahama

Japan

312

Sikka

Japan

252

Ooita

Japan

313

Simferopol

USSR

253

Ootomari

Japan

314

Simizu

Japan

254

Osaka

Japan

315

Sion

Switzerland

255

Ottawa

Canada

316

Sitka

Alaska

256

Oxford

England

317

Sofia

Bulgaria

257

Padova

Italy

318

Spokane

USA

258

Palo Alto

USA

319

State College, Pa.

USA

259

Pare Saint-Maur

France

320

Stockton

USA

260

Pasadena

USA

321

Stonyhurst

England

261

Pavia

Italy

322

Strasbourg

France

262

Perth

Western Australia

323

Stuttgart

Germany

263

Piacenza

Italy

324

Subiaco

Italy

264

Piatigorsk

USSR

325

Sucre

Bolivia

265

Pic du Midi

France

326

Sumoto

Japan

266

Pittsburgh

USA

327

Suttu

Japan

267

Philadelphia

USA

328

Suva

Fiji Islands

268

Plauen

Germany

329

Sverdlovsk

USSR

269

Plymouth

England

330

Swarthmore

USA

270

Point Loma

USA

331

Sydney

Australia

271

Ponta Delgada

Azores

332

Tachkent

USSR

272

Port-au-Prince

Haiti

333

Tacubaya

Mexico

273

Potsdam

Germany

334

Tadotu

Japan

274

Poughkeepsie

USA

335

Taihoku

Formosa

275

Prague

Czechoslovakia

336

Taiku

Korea

276

Prato

Italy

337

Tainan

Formosa

277

Puebla

Mexico

338

Taito

Formosa

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

YlilAHSOt-'

r03S8A JAHOITAMH:='

W-'.^

■ I

'■'••jh j«jo«'"

LIST OF SEISMOLOGICAL STATIONS OF WORLD

NO.

STATION

339

Taitytl

340

Takaka

341

Takata

342

Takayama

343

Tananarive

344

Tarente

345

Taunus

346

Technology

347

Theodosia

348

Tiflis

349

Tinemaha

350

Titibu

351

Togane

352

Tokushima

353

Tokyo

354

Tokyo

355

Toledo

356

Toronto

357

Toyooka

358

Travnik

359

Trenta

360

Treviso

361

Trieste

362

Tsingtao

363

Tsitsishima

364

Tsu

365

Tsukuba-san

366

Tuai

367

Tukuba

368

Tucson

369

Tunis

370

Tyosi

371

Uccle

372

Ukiah

373

Unzen-dake

374

Upsala

375

Utsunomiya

376

Uwazima

377

Uwekahuna

378

Uzhorod

379

Valle di Pompei

LOCATION

Formosa

New Zealand

Japan

Madagascar

Italy

Germany

USA

USSR

USA

Japan

Spain

Canada

Japan

Yugoslavia

Italy

China

Japan

New Zealand

Japan

USA

Africa

Japan

Belgium

USA

Japan

Sweden

Japan

Hawaii

Czechslovakia

Italy

NO.

STATION

LOCATION

380

Venice

Italy

381

Vera Cruz

Mexico

382

Victoria

Canada

383

Vienna

Austria

384

Vladivostok

USSR

385

Volcano House

Hawaii

386

Wakayama

Japan

387

Wellington

New Zealand

388

Worcester

USA

389

Yagi

Japan

390

Yalta

Crimea

391

Yamagata

Japan

392

Yokohama

Japan

393

Yokosuka

Japan

394

Zagreb

Yugoslavia

395

Zi-kawei

China

396

Zinsen

Korea

397

Zurich

Switzerland

Additions

398

Phu Lien

China

399

Rathfarnham

Ireland

400

West Bromwich

England

401

Woodstock

USA

402

Fairbanks

Alaska

403

Salt Lake City

USA

404

Weston

USA

405

Butte

USA

406

Ferndale

USA

407

Fresno

USA

408

Kaitaia

New Zealand

409

Monowai

New Zealand

410

Rotorua

New Zealand

411

San Francisco

USA

412

Williamstown

USA

The numbers in the foregoing table appear on the ac-
companying map (Plate 27) showing the positions of the
seismological stations of the world, but because of the im-
practicability of publishing the map on a larger scale, [they
can be read only with a reading glass.

MAGNETIC SURVEY OF THE OCEANS

By J. A. FLEMING'

Plates 28, 29, 30

The large portion of the Earth's surface covered
by the oceans makes the determination of accurate
values of the magnetic elements at sea a major ob-
jective of the world-wide magnetic and electric
survey. It was not until 1905 that full realization
of this objective had its beginning through the
systematic oceanic magnetic survey then sponsored
by the Carnegie Institution of Washington through
its Department of Terrestrial Magnetism.

The first attempt to accomplish a magnetic survey
at sea was the expedition of Halley between 1698
and 1700. He was placed in command of the
Paramour Pink and was told by King William III
to proceed with her "on an expedition to improve the
longitude and the variations of the compass."
Halley made several voyages in the North and
South Atlantic oceans determining magnetic declina-
tion only — instruments for measuring magnetic
inclination and magnetic intensity at sea had not
then been devised. The results were embodied in
Halley's chart "Lines of equal magnetic variation"
of the Atlantic for the year 1700— the first isomag-
netic chart. The next really important imdertaking
was the expedition under the general direction of
Sabine of the Erebus, the Terror, and the Pagoda
during 1840^5, chiefly in southern waters. On
these all three magnetic elements were observed,
the Fox dip-circle for measuring the magnetic
inclinations and intensity at sea having been just
devised. The Austrian frigate Novara measured
magnetic declination while circumnavigating the
globe in 1857-60. During the notable cruises of the
Challenger in 1872-76, and of the Gazelle, a
German vessel, in 1874-76, observations of the three
magnetic elements were made over various oceans.
Magnetic observations at sea were also made more
recently by the naval services of various countries
and by later Antarctic expeditions, notably the
Discovery and the Gauss. The accompanying
plates 28 and 29 and fig. 3 show the tracks of chief

> Director, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Car-
negie Institution of Washington.

vessels on which magnetic observations were made
during 1839-1916.

All these observations were of varying degrees of
accuracy set by available instruments and by the
disturbing factors originating in the magnetic
character of the vessels, while their distribution,
both as regards position and epoch, was not such
as to yield coordinated charts applying to definite
periods. Therefore, when planning in 1904 for the
magnetic and electric survey of the Earth the
Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie
Institution of Washington, gave careful considera-
tion to the oceanic survey.

The Institution's earliest work at .sea was done
with the chartered vessel Galilee during 1905-08.
The experience gained during her three cruises
proved conclusively that oceanic observations of the
magnetic elements sufficient for practical and scien-
tific needs could be assured only by a vessel designed
specially for such work. The Carnegie was
designed in 1908 primarily for magnetic and electric
surveys and investigations and her construction and
equipment were completed in 1909. The first of the
seven cruises of this unique vessel during 1909-29
in all oceans was begun in 1909. The theoretical
and practical values of the knowledge acquired and
of the resulting discussions of the Earth's magnetic
and electrical fields are attested by many expressions
of appreciation made by the leading hydrographical
establishments and by investigators of geophysics
in all countries.

The observational work accomplished before the
destruction of the Carnegie by explosion and fire
at Apia, Western Samoa, November 29, 1929, was
obtained during the seven cruises which aggregated
297,579 nautical miles. The data obtained during
these cruises and the three previously made by the
Galilee, include declination at 3844 points, in-
clination and horizontal intensity at 2321 and 2322
points, respectively, and atmospheric-electric ele-
ments on 1913 days. The extent of the Institution's
survey on land and sea is shown by plate 30.

MAGNETIC SURVEY OF THE OCEANS

While more information on secular-variation
changes in the Earth's magnetism is required for
navigation, yet future magnetic and electric data
over the oceans are far more necessary to advance

continue the work of the Carnegie because further
surveys of like accuracy will enhance the theoretical
value of the work already done. As an example,
attention may be called to the apparent diminution

Tracks of Chief Vessels on Which Magnetic Observations Were Made in the Indian Ocean. 1839-1916

r.mcgtc, 1911-1916 -^
Novara, 1857-1860 •

C.u«. 1902-1903

Erebus and Terror 1839-1843 ■

Challenger, 1872-1876

Dijcovery. 1902-1904

Pagoda. 1845

Gazelle. 1874-1876"— ^—

Fig. 3

theoretical studies. The full value of magnetic of the intensity of the Earth's magnetic field dis-

results of the few earlier expeditions under various covered by the Department's investigations of the

governments has never been attained because of the data thus far obtained, this dimunition being marked

shortness of the cruises. It is of first importance to over oceanic areas, especially in the Southern

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Hemisphere. The interpretation of such data
doubtless will be important in geophysical and
geological research to advance understanding and
interpretation of Earth phenomena.

For example, from observed earthquake-wave
velocities and reflections for different regions and
depths the crustal layer, which under most of the

tribution of magnetic secular-variation agrees with ,
that of land-areas (see figs. 4 and 5, after Fisk,
based upon data from 75° north to 65° south^) —
as witness the moderate rates of annual change
over the Pacific as compared with those over the
Atlantic and adjoining continental areas. Further
data bearing on correlation thus indicated between

Fig. 4. Longitudinal Distribution of Proportion op Annual Change (AH/H) of Horizontal Intensity

Fig. 5. L.\titudinal Distribution of Proportion of Annual Change {AH/H) op Horizontal Intensity

continental and water-covered continental struc-
tures is about 25 km. thick, is indicated as either
lacking or quite thin under the Pacific Ocean includ-
ing possibly the Arctic region. Under the Atlantic
and Indian oceans this layer is of appreciable depth.
Thus under the Pacific Ocean the basic surface of
the Earth's mantle is practically exposed. There
then we may expect different geological and geo-
graphical properties from those found elsewhere.
Thus the observed longitudinal and latitudinal dis-

the surface-distribution of the secular-change ac-
tivity promise conclusions concerning secular-varia-
tion processes localized in the crustal layer and

^ In these graphs showing distribution of annual change
(AH/H) of magnetic horizontal intensity the lower curves
represent the average positive values of AH/H in each lune
between the meridians (upper figure) and between its paral-
lels at 20-degree intervals while the upper curves represent
the numerical magnitude of the average negative values.
Thus the shaded areas between the curves are measures
of the excess of the negative over the positive annual
change.

MAGNETIC SURVEY OF THE OCEANS

only where this layer is present. Thus continued
secular-variation surveys at sea should bring to-
gether seismic and magnetic methods of approach
to crustal adjustments and possibly gravimetric
work.

On the side of practical application the increasing
use of the oceans in the commerce of nations by sea
and air makes the continuation of the survey a
matter of international concern and benefit.

Those theoretical investigations demanding con-
tinuation of the oceanic survey in terrestrial mag-
netism include, among others, the following:

(a) Determination of secular-variation of progressive
changes of the Earth's magnetic field involving particularly
their accelerations which the data accumulated so far indi-
cate can not be extrapolated reliably over periods as long
as five years. A definite control is necessary for a number
of epochs to facilitate the investigation of causes producing

during the cruises of the Carnegie is desirable in
several directions. Among these are the following:

(a) Additional determinations to establish changes in the
values of the atmospheric-electric elements with geographic
position. Such distribution-data are necessary for the
further investigations of the origin and maintenance of the
Earth's electric charge and of the relations to its magnetic
condition.

(b) More and widely distributed determinations of the
diurnal variations in atmospheric electricity particularly
to confirm the discovery that such variations in the potential
gradient progress with universal time — a deduction first
indicated from results obtained on the Carnegie. Condi-
tions at sea for such work are superior to those on land
where variable meteorological disturbances and topography
mask the true characteristics of the phenomena.

(c) Determinations and investigations of earth-currents —
a field not yet touched at sea. Two outstanding character-
istics of the water-area of the globe are (1) its extent and (2)
its far greater homogeneity as compared to the land-area.

Fig. 6. Variation with Longitude of t^H/H (annual change averaged without regard to sign), of the Distribdtionof

THE Proportion of Land and Water Areas, and of Secular-Change Activity Approximately Determined

BY the Density of the Distribution of Isoporic Lines

and governing these progressive changes which, it appears,
would be favored by accurate knowledge of their accelera-
tions and distribution. The importance of the determina-
tion of secular-variation over the oceans may be readily
seen by a study of figure 6. Figure 7 showing world dis-
tribution of foci of rapid annual change of magnetic
declination also emphasizes the continued need for secular-
variation data at sea.

(b) The study of regions of local disturbance and particu-
larly of those indicated by the work of the Carnegie over
"deep-sea" areas including accompanying determinationjof
oceanic depths by sonic-sounding devices and of gravity.

As regards the domain of terrestrial electricity
continuation of the survey of the oceans initiated

The question arises whether the theoretical
requirements might not be met in a less expensive
way than through construction and maintenance of
vessels similar to the Carnegie. A careful study
was made by the Department after the loss of the
Carnegie to determine what might be done in an
attempt to control magnetic secular-variation data
through observations on land only over the oceans
between 60° north and 60° south latitude. [In
any case requisite additional data on land- and
ocean-areas in the polar regions beyond the parallels
of 60° — less than one-seventh of the surface of the
globe — can be secured only, as in the past, through
or in cooperation with special expeditions by land or

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

air.] The maximum control so effected would
result from 150 secular-variation stations along the
coasts of the continents and on islands; about 90
of these have been occupied by the Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington one or more times during 1905
to 1937, but the remainder include the more inac-
cessible islands of the oceans and are subject, gen-
erally, to magnetic local disturbance. Such dis-
turbance introduces uncertainties both in the
effects upon secular-variation changes and in the
relation between the normal and the island value,
even though the inaccessibility of stations insures
possibility of exact reoccupations. The reduction
to common epoch would be more difficult because of
the length of intervals between reoccupations and

by 900 miles in the southeast Indian to the south
of Australia. [Local disturbances existing at many
of the possible stations on islands, which doubtless
would make data from a majority of them unsuitable
for discussion actually make these areas greater than
indicated in Figure 7.] The need of continued work
at sea is emphasized because these areas involve
portions of the Earth's surface where there are at
present the greatest irregularities in the progressive
character of the secular variation, namely in the
central and south Atlantic, Indian, north Pacific,
east central Pacific, and south Pacific oceans.

Failure to provide a vessel suited for magnetic
and electric observations also would mean that
future data for the distribution of the absolute values

Fig. 7. Distribution of Foci of Rapid Annual Change of the Magnetic Declination, Inclination, and

Horizontal Intensity, Approximate Epoch 1920-1925

of the lack of the better distribution of data which
would result from observations at sea. The study
shows that the regions for which the necessary data
for the continued theoretical investigations would be
lacking are very large even if the complete scheme
for control by observations on land could be carried
out as based on the assumption that the distribution
of secular-variation stations need not be greater
than one every 800 miles. These areas (see fig. 8)
approximate 3400 by 800 miles in the north Pacific,
3600 by 1500 miles in the east central Pacific, 3600
by 1800 miles in the south Pacific, 600 by 600 miles
in the north Atlantic, 2400 by 800 miles in the
middle north Atlantic, 1900 by 900 miles in the west
south Atlantic, 1500 by 700 miles in the east Indian,
3600 by 750 miles in the central Indian, and 2400

of the atmospheric-electric elements would be lim-
ited to relatively few stations obtained at relatively
great expense since, to eliminate, for short series of
observations, the topographic and meteorological
conditions at stations on land, only selected points
in wide bays or estuaries could be used where it
would be possible to observe on floats. Atmos-
pheric-electric observations could be obtained on
board ordinary vessels and doubtless some of the
maritime companies would be ready to permit in-
stallation of the special equipment at reasonable
cost, but it is not feasible to obtain on such vessels
the caliljration-observations required for the de-
termination of the necessary reduction-factors nor,
despite earnest desire to cooperate, is it possible to
control the deck-space and eliminate vitiating

JVIAGNETIC SURVEY OF THE OCEANS

effects of smoke and exhaust gases. Furthermore,
it would be necessary to repeat such work and
control of such conditions on many vessels in order
to accomplish the requisite distribution of observa-
tions over the oceans. Despite the considerable
expense that would be incurred, the accumulated
data would be subject to many uncertainties and
would involve an expenditure of time for reductions
in the office out of all proportion to that required
were there a survey-vessel available.

Because of the great desirability of continuing the
operation conducted for a quarter-century by the
vessels of the Carnegie Institution of Washington,

in certain regions been determined. One of the first
tasks, therefore, of the Research will be the repeti-
tion of the observations of the Carnegie in these
regions to determine the secular change so that
the isogonic charts may be corrected to date and
prepared for succeeding epochs. This vessel is to
be of the same beam as the Carnegie and .slightly
greater overall length. The proposed instrumental
equipment will parallel closely that used on the
Carnegie as it has not appeared advisable to depart
from designs gradually evolved from the experience
of many years of observational work at sea.

With the completion of the Research and its

Fig. 8. Showing Oceanic Areas (Shaded) between Parallels of 60° North and South Latitude for Which Secular
Variation op Magnetic Elements Could Not be Controlled by Land Stations

ON Continents and Islands

it is gratifying that, in view of the Institution's
decision not to replace the Carnegie by a similar
vessel, the British Admiralty has designed and in
September 1936 placed a contract to build a non-
magnetic vessel, to be named Research. The
chief reason for this action on the part of Great
Britain was found in her world-wide maritime in-
terests. Magnetic charts published for the last
two decades by the American, British, French,
German, and other governments for use at sea have
been based in an increasingly large degree upon data
obtained by the Carnegie. There are now serious
gaps in the present data which would have been
filled had the Carnegie completed her last cruise
and had the rapid change in the secular variation

continuation of the oceanic survey we may look
forward to further advance of geophysical research.
Not only will the resulting additional observations
increase the opportunities of geophysical investiga-
tions but they will enhance the value of the earlier
data.

The task of the geophysical survey of the oceans
is so great that other hydrographic services of mari-
time nations should be stimulated by the action
of the British Admiralty to provide similar vessels
wath equipment and personnel to take their appro-
priate share in the execution and in the coordination
of such service. Resolutions adopted after thor-
ough discussions by the Commission of Terrestrial
Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity of the Inter-

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

national Meteorological Organization at Warsaw,
Poland, in September 1935, and by the Association
of Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity of the
International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics
at its triennial assembly at Edinburgh in September
1936, urge and recommend that other maritime
nations should consider the construction of such

non-magnetic vessels. It is to be hoped that our
own United States may assume its share in obtaining
additional oceanic data to the further enrichment
of our knowledge of the Earth's science.

Deparlment of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie
Institution of Washington.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 28

100* M

Tracks of Oiief Vewels on Which Magnetic Observations Were Made in the Atlantic Ocean, 1839-1916

G«M«. 1908 (Pacific) -

Carnegie. !%<» 1915"

-»- Cluclt. 1914

Erebus and Terror, 1839-1843 Challenger, 1872 1876 Pagoda. 1845 — • — " • * — •"

Novara. 1857-1860 Discovery, 19(12-1904 Gaielle. 187+-I876 • 77'^"

Causs 1902-1O03 Coast and Geodetic Survey. 1903-1915 ••

'-^

■i^DiT

{■

\V. (-

n-r

«»w

.iniiitD

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 29

■y '?• 'W IM* iW 170' laf 170' IM' 150' 140r 13o' 120" 110* m' SO' 80* Jo"

ly^

120 150" HO 150

lOT* ITif 180* ITO' no' ISO' mf

Tracks of Chief Vessels on Which Magnetic Observations Were Made in the Pacific Ocean. 1839-1916

Galilee. 1905-1908

arnegie. I9II-I9I6 ■*"

Guett. 1914 (Atlantic)

Erebus and Tenor. 1839-1843 Novara, 1857-1860 ChaUenger. 1872-1876 ^.^r,^,

Gazelle. 1874-1876 »—♦ — ♦ Discovery. 1902-1904 Coast and GeodeUc Survey. I90J-I9I5'^-

t .iy>iu.

TIDES

By H. a. MARMER

United States Coast and Geodetic Survey

Plates 31, 32

With regard to systematic tidal investigations at
the present time, it may be said that with but few
exceptions they are being carried on by govern-
mental agencies and not by educational or research
institutions. Furthermore, the governmental agen-
cies engaged in tidal work are carrying on this work
primarily as a necessary adjunct to other work.
For example, in the United States the tidal work is
centered almost exclusively in the Coast and
Geodetic Survey which carries on this work pri-
marily in connection with its hydrographic and
geodetic surveying operations. The three major
oceanographic research institutions in the United
States do not include tidal investigations in their
programs of study, although each of these cooperates
with the Coast and Geodetic Survey in maintaining
a tide station at its institution.

This almost complete indifference on the part of
educational and research institutions to tides has
naturally acted to limit drastically the number of
students of tidal phenomena. Furthermore, the
governmental agencies engaged in tidal work are
necessarily interested in its technical rather than
in its scientific aspects. As a consequence, tidal
investigations in recent years have been largely
concerned with technical problems rather than
with scientific research.

The status of tidal investigation at the present
time, so far as the observations are concerned, is
well pictured in the two maps shown here which
are generalized from a manuscript chart showing
the locations of tide stations given in Special Publi-
cation No. 31 of the International Hydrographic
Bureau, now in press. The red dots indicate tide
stations in operation in 1935, the blue dots the loca-
tion of tide stations at which observations have been
made previously. Because of the small scale of the
chart, red lines are used to indicate a number
of stations in operation along the particular coast,
while blue lines indicate the location of a number of
stations which were in operation in previous years.

These maps do not attempt to show all places
where tide observations have been made, but rather
the places where systematic observations have been
carried on. Since the tide varies from day to day,
month to month, and year to year, it is obvious
that scattered observations of a few days or even
more can give nothing but quaUtative information
relating to the tide. Such scattered observations
on the range and time of the tide are not shown
on these maps as they do not furnish sufficiently
precise data and do not lend themselves readily to
the harmonic analysis, the results of which are of
primary importance in tidal research. In passing,
too, it may be noted that no attempt has been made
to indicate the locations in the Arctic and Antarctic
where tide observations have been made.

A glance at these maps brings out immediately
two important facts. First, that along large
stretches of the coast there are no tidal observa-
tions available. And secondly, out in the open sea
observations are wholly wanting except for a few
islands.

With regard to the continental coast, it may
reasonably be expected that such observations will
become available over the greater part of the world
in the not distant future in connection with the
hydrographic surveys and with the securing of tidal
data for tide tables.

In the open sea the problem of securing tide
observations is a difficult one. While pressure gages
have been used in shallow depths, they do not lend
themselves for observations at considerable depths.
But advantage might be taken of the islands scat-
tered through the oceans. The cost of a tide gage
is relatively little and its operation is extremely
simple. After installation it can be maintained
in operation by a local resident.

Tide observations in the tropical regions are
especially needed not only to bring out the local
tidal features and their relations to the tidal phe-
nomenon as a whole, but also in connection with the

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

question of changes in sea level which is of basic
importance in connection with the coral reef
problem.

Quite apart from the purely tidal problems for
which tide observations are necessary, such ob-
servations furnish the basic data for problems of a
wider scope. One of these may be mentioned here,
namely, that relating to sea level. From long
continued tide observations it can be determined
whether the relative elevations of land to sea at
any given place are changing. This problem is
obxaously of importance in various practical and
theoretical fields.

Two tidal bibliographical undertakings which
are now being carried out on a comprehensive

scale should be mentioned in this connection. The
first, by the Committee on Tides of the Association
Internationale d'Oceanographie Physique. This
bibliography lists in a concise form all the publica-
tions issued during a period of years under definite
groupings which are of especial value to research
students of the subject. The second is the List of
Harmonic Constants issued from time to time by
the International Hydrographic Bureau, which
covers the whole world. Mention should also be
made of a publication on Sea Level and Its Varia-
tions which will give the monthly and annual values
of sea level at various tide stations throughout the
world and which is now in press, being published by
the above-named Committee on Tides.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

TIDE STATION PREVIOUSLY OPERATED
. TIDE STATIONS PREVIOUSLY OPERATED

• TIDE STATION IN OPERATION
TIDE STATIONS IN OPERATION

Tidal Stations, Atlantic and Indian Oceans and Connecting Waters

INTERNATiONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

TIDE STATION PREVIOUSLY OPERATED
•TIDE STATIONS PREVIOUSLY OPERATED

, TIDE STATION IN OPERATION
TIDE STATIONS IN OPERATION

Tidal Stations, Pacific Ocean and Connecting Waters

RESULTS OF MARITIME GRAVITY RESEARCH, 1923-32

RESULTS OF MARITIME GRAVITY RESEARCH,

1923-32

Bt Dr. F. a. VENING MEINESZ
Professor of Geodesy, University of Utrecht

Plates 33, 34, 35, 36

GENERAL STATEMENT

This report has been made at the request of Prof.
W. Vaiighan, for inchi.sion in his report on the status
of oceanographic research.

The following expeditions have been made by the
writer for determining gravity at sea :

1923, from Holland via Suez to Java o/b Hr. Ms. Subm.
K II

1925, from Holland to Alexandria, o/b Hr. Ms. Subm.
KXI

1926, from Holland to Java via Panama, o/b Hr. Ms.
Subm. K XIII

1928, from Washington to the West Indies, o/b U. S.

Subm. S 21
1929/30, three expeditions in the East Indies, o/b Hr.

Ms. Subm. K XIII

1931, research in the North Sea o/b Hr. Ms. O 13

1932, e.xpedition in the West Indies o/b U. S. Subm.
S48

1932, expedition in the Atlantic o/b Hr. Ms. Subm. O 13

The expeditions o/b Dutch submarines have been
made for the Netherlands Geodetic Commi.ssion,
the expedition o/b the U. S. Subm. S 21, where the
writer was cooperating with Dr. Fred E. Wright
and Elmer B. Collins, for the Carnegie Institution
of Washington and that o/b the U. S. Subm. S 48,
during which the writer was assi.sted by Dr. Harry
Hess and by Mr. Townsend T. Brown, for the
International Expedition to the Bahamas under the
Directorship of Dr. Richard M. Field.

The observations have been made by means of the
multiple pendulum method, which is described and
discussed at length in "Theory and Practice of
Pendulum Observations at Sea," by the writer
(published by the Netherlands Geodetic Commi.s-
sion, Waltman, Delft) and which is likewise treated
of in the publication of the U. S. Naval Ob.servatory
of the Expedition of the U. S. S. S-21.

In 1931 the Italian Navy has organized an expedi-
tion in the Western part of the Mediterranean;

Prof. Gino Cassinis took the direction of the
gravimetric research. The results of this expedition
are not yet available.

Most of the results of these expeditions are
represented on the three accompanying maps, one
map giving the results of the expeditions of 1923,
1925, and 1926 between Holland and the Indies,
another containing the gravity data found in the
Netherlands East Indies and adjoining parts and
the third representing the results for the West
Indies found in 1926, 1928, and 1932 supplemented
by a great many values on land determined by the
U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.

The maps contain the gravity anomalies in
milligal, i.e., the observed values after isostatic
reduction according to the system of Hayford-
Bowie,' minus the value for normal gravity as it is
given by the formula of Cassinis :
= 978.049 (1 + 0.0052884 sin=<^- 0.0000059 sin^ 2<t>)
The study of these results reveals two remarkable
rules that appear to be fairly generally valid. These
rules are:

1°. The positive anomalies seem inclined to occur

in fields, while the negative anomalies are

mostly occurring in strips; the positive

fields coincide often with deep basins:

2°. The anomaly shows a tendency to increase, in

a positive sense, when going from shallow

water towards deep water; this seems to

occur as well for continental coasts as for

island coasts.

Instances of the second rule are found at the

Atlantic end of the English Channel, near the

Azores, near the southeast coast of Spain, near Suez,

near Sokotra, near the Maldive Islands, near the

south coast of Ceylon, at the Atlantic side of the

'The isostatic reduction of the results has been made at
the Bureau of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Bahamas, in the gravity profile West of Cuba,
at the West coast of America between Panama and
San Francisco, and in many places in the Nether-
lands East Indies. The basins in the Bahamas
are an exception to this rule.

Instances of the first rule are found in the Nether-
lands East Indies, where a narrow strip of strong
negative anomalies is found, bordered on both
sides by fields of positive anomalies and where
other strips of slighter negative anomalies can
likewise be detected. The same disposition is found
in the West Indies, where the Gulf of Mexico, the

Caribbean and the sea West of Cuba show positive
fields while negative strips are found North of
Porto Rico and Haiti, West of N. W. Cuba, near Gr.
Cayman Island, near Jamaica and in the inland
seas of the Bahamas. A third instance has been
stated in the investigated part of the Atlantic,
where an extensive field of positive anomalies was
found, interrupted by strips of lesser anomahes near
the Azores and in a few other places.

We shall consider these rules again at the end of
this report.

THE GRAVITY RESULTS IN THE NETHERLANDS EAST INDIES AND

ADJOINING REGIONS

Because of the world-crisis the results have not
yet been supplemented by gravity research on the
islands but the field is already complete enough
for drawing conclusions and these conclusions are
important for many problems of the Earth's crust.

The results show strong deviations from isostasy
of which the main feature was mentioned above:
a strip of great negative anomalies (maximum —
204 mgal; mean about — 100 mgal) of a width of
only 50-100 miles, running through the whole
archipelago and bordered on both sides by fields of
positive anomalies (maximum -|- 166 mgal, mean
about -f 45 mgal). Considered as a whole, the
region is nearer to isostatic equilibrium; the mean
of all the anomalies is -|- 20 mgal.

The correlation of the strip with the distribution
of earthquake-centers confirms the obvious supposi-
tion that it is connected with the tectonic action
in the crust. Taking this for granted, it gives a
valuable indication of the course of the geosyiicline,
that is considered responsible for this action.
It proves that the Alpine-Himalayan geosyncline,
which is knowii to continue through Malacca and
Sumatra, does not go on through New Guinea, but
that it bends Northwards in the Eastern part of the
Archipelago and that it continues in the Pacific
geosyncline running along the east coast of Asia.
It proves likewise that the Australian continent does
not play the prominent part in the tectonics of this
region that the supporters of the Wegener hypothe-
sis of migrating continents think; instead of the
anomalies being more intense, where the strip is
bordering on this continent, as it ought to be
expected in the light of this theory, they are just
as pronounced where the strip is bordering on the
Indian or the Pacific Oceans. If we follow the

geologists in considering this geosyncline as a region
of strong lateral compression of the Earth's crust,
we may draw the important conclusion that the
crust under these parts of the oceans offers the same
resistance to the compressional stresses as the Aus-
trahan continent.

The strip shows only in a slight degree some
dependence on the topography and this dependence
corresponds to the second rule, the strip is mostly
coinciding with a submarine ridge, while the
positive fields coincide with the deeper parts. The
strip shows often a correlation with the deeps but
it is besides them, as it is for instance the case for the
Java Deep and the Weber Deep. The fact that the
anomalies for those parts of the strip that are near
deeps are not stronger than for other parts, clearly
indicates that deeps are not independent features,
but that they are accompanying features of much
greater phenomena. Gravity surveys of deeps will,
therefore, have to encompass wider areas than the
deeps themselves.

The fact that the strip is not coinciding with the
deeps but mostly with submarine ridges, prevents
explaining it by incomplete compensation of surface
features. It is neither acceptable to explain them
by assuming recent surface movements that are not
yet compensated ; the course of the strip makes this
assumption unlikely as it would assume the down-
ward pressing of the ridges. So the only explana-
tion that is left is to assume abnormal light masses
in the upper layers of the Earth.

It will, however, hardly be feasible to locate this
whole mass-defect in the sialic layer, because we
should then have to assume densities that are
too small for being acceptable. For a great part
at least we shall have to ascribe it to a protuberance

RESULTS OF MARITIME GRAVITY RESEARCH

at the lower boundary of the crust of the lighter
sialic layer in the denser simatic layer. In case we
assume a second density-discontinuity in the crust
itself, a part of the mass-defect will occur in the
same way at this latter boundary.

This explanation leads to the hypothesis that
the crust of the Earth of a thickness of some 25
km is buckling inwards along the axis of the strip
and that only a relatively shallow upper layer is
folding and overthrusting outwards and causing the
irregular topography of the Archipelago. This
hypothesis is in agreement with the Airy view of the
isostatic balance of mountain-chains, which assumes
great roots of lighter surface-material below the
mountains. That these roots are only coming into
existence along one axis in the present period, seems
mechanically sound, as it would be difficult to
understand that the crust should give way simul-
taneously along several lines of weakness, one behind
the other.

Accepting this hypothesis, we have to realize
that the crust is bulging downwards in regions where
the temperature is higher. So we may safely
assume that its plasticity will gradually increase
and we have to expect that, at least partially, the
protuberance will flow away laterally along the
lower boundary of the crust. The melting and the
corresponding expansion of these masses will prob-
ably bring about a rising of the mountain area and
this agrees with the geomorphological facts: many
mountain-chains have shown rising in the period
following on the folding.

The melting and flowing away of part of the
downward protuberance will also bring about a
decrease of the negative anomalies and a widening
of the strip. Besides this cause, there is another
reason for a decrease of the deviations of isostasy in
the later stages of the phenomenon, viz. the fact
that the lateral movement of the crust towards the
strip will automatically bring about a concentration
of the surface formations over it; this tends likewise
towards a reestablishment of isostasy.

So we cannot expect older ranges to have concen-
trated roots of the same kind as in the Netherlands
East Indies and showing the same narrow strip
of negative anomalies. We may, however, expect
that isostasy has not been quite reestablished and
that there will still be left a remnant of these anoma-
lies. This appears to be the case; we find, after
isostatic reduction, an area of negative anomalies
below the Alps and a similar thing is found in the
United States under the old range of the Appalachi-

ans and in other instances. In these last cases it is,
however, possible that the anomaly may be explained
by deviations of density in the crust itself.

The Indian Archipelago shows likewise an instance
of a strip of smaller negative anomalies that is likely
to be the remnant of an older folding phenomenon,
i.e., a strip running over the arc of les.ser Sunda
Islands and continuing over the inner Banda Arc.
It is possible that there are more of these strips in
the western half of the Archipelago, but the lack
of gravity values on the islands prevents any cer-
tainty on this point.

The geologist.s- have, however, found a strip of
another kind in the Archipelago which merits
special mention in this connection. This is a strip
of strong sedimentation in recent times, which
discloses some evidence of folding but no efifects of
strong lateral compression, as is found on the
islands in the strip of strong negative anomalies
(Timor, Key Islands, Ceram). This other strip
is found in east Sumatra, in north Java, in S. W.
Celebes and in east Borneo; it is not continuous but
it is interrupted in some places. Where gravity
has been determined above this strip, it shows small
negative anomalies or at least smaller positive ones
than those in the neighborhood. I think we may
safely interpret this strip as a down-bending of the
crust, without buckling, and a filling up of this
trough with sediments. The negative anomalies
may be explained by the smaller density of these
sediments without its being necessary to assume
mass-defects at the lower boundary of the crust by
the replacement of denser subcrustal material by
lighter crustal material. We may thus consider
this as an instance of a strip of small negative
anomalies, that has another meaning than a remnant
of an older folding phenomenon. We may conclude
that we have to be careful in interpreting these
strips of smaller negative anomalies; they may
point to old folding but they may likewise be ex-
plained by a thick layer of sediments which has
formed in a sunken strip of the crust.

Getting back to the main feature of the gravity
field, the strip of strong negative anomalies, I may
mention that the root at the lower boundary of the
crust must have dimensions of some 25 x 50 km
in order to explain the magnitude of the anomalies.
Assuming that the crust has a thickness of 25 km,
the root must have a width of at least 50 km,

2 "Het Neogeen in den Indischen Archipel," by Prof.
Dr. J. H. F. Umbgrove;Tydschr. Ned. Aardryksk. Genoots-
chap, 1932, no. 6.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

according to the buckling hypothesis, and we get a
shortening of the crust of about 50 km. This
figure is confirmed by other considerations.

This confirmation has to do with the gravity
anomahes found west of Sumatra and east of the
Philippines. Here the strip has no longer the same
symmetric character that it has in the middle part
of its course through the Archipelago; the negative
anomalies are smaller and the transition to the
positive values on the ocean side is less sudden.
Taking into account the character of these gravity
profiles and the fact that in these parts the direction
of the strip is nearly parallel to the most probable
direction of the stress, S. S. E., the most likely
interpretation of the phenomenon seems here to be
that Sumatra and the Philippines are sliding along
the line of the stri;) combined with a shght over-
riding of the ocean-floor. This would mean that
the movement is nearly parallel to the strip with
only a small component perpendicular to it. The
downward bending of the ocean-floor would bring
about a gravity profile of the character that is
mentioned above.

South of the Philippines, near the Talaud Islands,
and .south of Java, the direction of the strip changes
and makes a greater angle with the direction of the
stress; the gravity profile assumes at once another
character that points to a buckling of the crust in
the way we have discussed it. We found a figure
for the shortening of the crust, corresponding to this
buckling, of about 50 km. Now it is a remarkable
coincidence that the geologists are inclined to think
that Java has moved southward with regard to
Sumatra and that the amount of this movement is
estimated at about 40 km. It is likewise remarkable
that the bathymetric curves south of the Philippines
show a similar bulging towards the east of the same
amount; this topography is now known in detail
thanks to the expedition of the Snellius under the
leadership of Van Riel which has made more than
30,000 soundings in the Eastern part of the Archi-
pelago.

These facts provide us with a welcome confirma-
tion of the buckling hypothesis; they point at least
towards a connection of the gravity field with
horizontal movements of the crust. Another still
stronger confirmation is given by the fact that
the only islands where great overthrusting has been
stated since the beginning of the Tertiary period^,
are those islands that are located over the .strip:
Timor, Tenimber Islands, Key Islands, Ceram,
Buru, and the eastern part of Celebes; the other
islands over the strip are not yet known sufficiently.

These overthrustings date from the earliest part
of the Miocene, which puts them about 8,000,000
years back.

It is a remarkable fact that these islands have not
experienced great deformations in the more recent
periods. Still it seems probable that the great
tectonic phenomenon is continuing in the present
period, because the earthquakes are violent and
frequent and the localization of their centers indi-
cates that it is still the same strip that is active.
These facts suggest the continuation of the lateral
compression of the crust without the taking part
of the surface layer. It makes the impression as if
the crust is pushing together under the islands and
disappearing downwards, while the islands have
been elevated above the region of compression, so
that they are not partaking of the great deformation
save some block-faulting movements that have been
going on on some of these islands; this block-faulting
proves that the apparent quiescence is not real
and that greater phenomena are going on in deeper
layers. A comparison of this hypothesis with
what is known about the tectonic history of the
Alps gives promising outlooks for the understanding
of the mechanism of mountain-formation; I may
refer here to another paper about this subject.'

Lastly I wish to mention a remarkable correlation
of the course of the strip of strong negative anomalies
with the distribution of volcanoes in the Archipelago.
Nearly every curve of the strip is accompanied on
the inner side by a parallel row of volcanoes at a
distance of a few hundred kilometers. This corre-
lation appears to be in harmony with the buckling
hypothesis, which makes it understandable that the
crust, when moving towards the strip from the inner
side of a curved part, is subject to tensile stresses
in a sense parallel to the strip. That this circum-
stance will facilitate the formation of volcanoes,
seems acceptable.

Examining the fields of positive anomalies in the
Archipelago, we see that there are three fields of
especially strong anomalies and these fields coincide
with three deep basins, the Celebes Sea, the N. W.
Banda Sea, south of the Sula Islands, and the Banda
Sea, west of the inner Banda Arc. With the
exception of the typical throughs, all other parts of
the seas in the Archipelago are less deep. These
basins show all the same morphological type, a
smooth and even bottom and steep sides.

Taking the evidence together, we get the im-

^ The Mechanism of Mountain-Formation in Geosyn-
clinal Belts, by F. A. Vening Meinesz, Proc. Amsterdam
Acad. Sc. Vol. XXXVI, No. 4, 1933.

RESULTS OF MARITIME GRAVITY RESEARCH

pression that we have to do here with three areas,
where the Earth's crust has been subject to an
increase of density and that this is the cause of the
positive gravity anomaUes as well as of their sinking
away. Apparently this sinking has not continued
so far that the isostatic equilibrium has been com-
pletely reestablished. This view is hypothetical

and the cause of the supposed density increase is
still more so. It is obvious to bring it in connection
with the great lateral stresses that have been as-
sumed in the Archipelago, but whether we can ex-
plain it exclusively by elastic compression of the crust
or whether we have to assume also changes of state
or temperature, seems as yet impossible to decide.

THE GRAVITY RESULTS IN THE WEST INDIES AND ADJOINING REGIONS

Geologically speaking, the West Indies are
similar to the East Indies. They are likewise
tectonically active and the morphological properties
of both regions show much resemblance: island rows
of mountainous character, separated by deep basins,
and great volcanic activity. The tectonical char-
acter is in both cases of the geosyncline type.

We need not be surprised, therefore, that the
gravity results of the West Indies show many
points of resemblance to the results of the East
Indies. The Gulf of Mexico, the Caribbean and
the sea west of Cuba show positive anomalies in
the same way as the deep basins of the East Indies.
The same remarks may be made concerning them.

North of Porto Rico, north of Haiti and near
Windward Passage a similar strip of strong negative
anomalies was found as that which has been dis-
cussed for the East Indies. The continuation of
this strip to the westward is still imccrtain. It is
possible that the negative values obtained in the
Bahamas, although less intense and not concen-
trated in a narrow strip, may be considered as such,
but the most probable interpretation of the data
seems to be that the critical zone continues along
the Bartlctt Deep and that, for this part of the
strip, the relative movement of the two parts of the
crust Is nearly parallel to it. In this way there
would be no compression perpendicular to the
direction of the trough and it might even be that
there is a small component of the relative movement
of both crustal parts away from each other. This
would explain the deep as a rift-formation in con-
trast to mo.st other deeps, which, from the point of
view of the buckling hypothesis, have to be con-
sidered as compressional features, revealing the
downward movement of the crust in the buckling
zone. This explanation of the Bartlett Deep is in
harmony with the irregular submarine topography,
suggesting sunken blocks.^ It is likewise in agree-
ment with the gravity field, which shows irregular

' This agrees with the views of Taber expressed in several
of his publications.

and not very intensive anomalies over the Bartlett
Deep. There is no clear evidence of a narrow strip
of negative anomalies, as has been found near all the
East Indian deeps and over the Nares Deep north
of Porto Rico.

The gravity profile over the strip north of Porto
Rico is nearly identical with the profiles over the
strip south of Java; the horizontal dimensions as
well as the difference between the negative anomalies
in the axis of the strip and the positive anoma-
lies beside it are about the same. This suggests a
similarity of both phenomena.

This suggestion is further confirmed by the fact
that the more westward profile, the gravity profile
over Windward Passage, shows much resemblance
to the profiles west of Sumatra, i.e., the negative
anomalies in the strip are less and the transition to
the positive anomalies on the Atlantic side is more
gradual than north of Porto Rico. In the same
way as for the strip west of Sumatra we have here
that the most {irobable direction of the relative
movement, E. N. E., is nearly parallel to the strip
and this suggests the same explanation of this
changed gravity jirofile: no buckling but an over-
riding of the northern block by the southern block
because of a small component of the relative move-
ment perpendicular to the strip. If the above
explanation of the Bartlett Deep is right, this
component gets zero and changes sign where, still
further westward, the strip gets again another
direction.

The gravity field in the Bahamas merits a short
discussion. The whole area shows negative anoma-
lies but the deep basins are stronger negative than
the islands. In this regard this region is one of the
few exceptions to the second rule; the anomaly
does not increase, in a positive sense, when going
from shallow water to deep water but we find the
reverse. The most probable interpretation seems
to be that we have to do here with a stiff crustal
block that has been sinking away and on which the
islands have been elevated by the coral-reef-builders;

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

according to this view the islands are surface loads
on the crust, that are not in local isostatic compen-
sation and so the gravity on the islands is greater
than over the neighboring basins.

For further details of the gravity results in the
West Indies I may refer to the publications of the
two expeditions of the U. S. Navy, that have been
mentioned in the introduction.

The four gravity profiles that have been made,
perpendicular to the coast, between Panama and
San Francisco all show rather strong positive
anomalies over the foot of the shelf and about nor-
mal gravity over its top. In two instances this
profile can be continued in the continent, in Mexico
and near San Francisco. In Mexico this continua-
tion shows fairly strong negative anomalies in a
strip parallel to the coast and so we get the im-
pression that we have here another instance of the
same feature : a strip of negative anomalies bordered
on both sides by positive anomalies. The profiles
perpendicular to the coast look as if they are the
outer parts of profiles over this strip. The correla-
tion with the earthquake activity appears to con-
firm this view. More research will be necessary
before we can be sure about it and before we know
if this strip is the continuation of the critical zone
in the West Indies, which appears to continue
through the Bartlett Trough.

The second profile, over San Francisco, confirms
our supposition up to a certain degree, but the strip
is less intense than those in the East and West
Indies. The greatest negative value, found outside
the coast, is only —57 mgal. Another deviation
of this gravity profile from the normal profile in the
Indies is, that the anomaly remains slightly negative
in the U. S. up to a great distance from the coast,
instead of showing the positive values found else-
where besides the strips.

After this more detailed discussion of two regions,
we may shortly consider again the two general rules
mentioned in the beginning. We found both
rules vahd in the East and West Indies and we have
discussed a hypothesis about what is going on in
these parts. If this hypothesis is true we have to do
with a buckling towards the inside of the Earth's
crust along a curved line and this buckUng brings

about a thickening of the crust along this line.
This is accompanied with strong negative anomalies
because of the accumulation of fight crustal ma-
terial and in most parts with a submarine ridge
because of the outward bulging of the surface layer.
We find thus both rules realized by this phenome-
non: the coming into existence of strips of negative
anomalies and a tendency of the anomaly to in-
crease, in a positive sense, when going from smaller
to greater depths.

We have further found that the deep basins in the
East and West Indies show positive anomalies and
this is also in harmony with the two rules. A well-
founded explanation of these positive anomalies is
still lacking, but there seems to be little doubt
that there is some connection with the tectonic
phenomena in these regions.

We are now confronted with the important ques-
tion whether the other instances, where these rules
have been found valid, can also be explained in the
same way, or, in other words, whether all these
instances can be considered to be related to the same
tectonic phenomena, active or extinct, that are going
on the East and West Indies. Or are there other
phenomena, bringing about similar results for the
gravity field?

This important question cannot yet be answered;
future research will have to provide the data for
attacking this problem. As far as the gravity
research is concerned, the following program seems
indicated. First the further investigation of tec-
tonically active areas for the elucidation of the great
geophysical problems of these regions. Secondly
the investigation of the distribution over the Earth's
surface of the fields of positive anomalies, that
occur in some regions, e.g., in the Atlantic and,
though less intense, in the Pacific, in order to see if
they are of the same kind as the fields of positive
anomalies in the deep basins of the East and West
Indies. Thirdly, the investigation of the gravity
transition for all steep submarine slopes, e.g. near
continental shelves and near island coasts. This
further research may provide us with important
possibilities for the investigation of the Ea/th's
crust under the oceans.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

I F I C OCEAN

« « » OHAVIMETHIC STATIONS
AND ROUTES OF THE
DUTCH SUBMARINE K-XIII

AXIS OF THE BAND OF
NEGATIVE ANOMALIES-

/ N D

I A N

GRAVIMETRIC MAP OF THE EAST INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

90" 80' 70=

• -

r'-rr^^^^^r^-^ Florida 5j'

so-

Ir^"^

S ^ ' ^-L -9

^ : ^"^ \ 1 \

M,y^^i

•

• ( •■" \

K «

• •

, •-. ... ^. ..„

-.4|».. ,.-31^ .

.-,.-'5 .-:■%•,"

... ^ >-«-X_

20'

UCATAN/ " ••"

•♦11

so-

i ">■'

■-= • • •""'

■" •• \

7 t^

•i.tt».7 •-'^ ^ ( H AIT 1

Q> ,,68 -1* -laj

MEXICO

a/ ••

-■3T •-« <0
• .»

<i.-_^-^

<:^

• •n

*S1

^\ /

\ \

/--i \k-^

^^ ca "

... J \

..„ r" X

^— ^...'^^J?

90" 00° 70'

A. GRAVIMETRIC SURVEY OF THE GULF OF MEXICO AND THE CARIBBEAN SEA ON U.S. NAVAL SUBMARINES S-21 AND 5-48.

•0

B- ROUTE AROUND THE WORLD OF THE DUTCH SUBMARINE K-Xlll AND THE GRAVIMETRIC STATIONS OCCUPIED.

RESULTS OF MARITIME GRAVITY RESEARCH

SUPPLEMENTAL STATEMENT

Plates 35, 36

Since the foregoing paper by Professor Vening
Meinesz could not be promptly published after he
submitted his manuscript, a supplement is needed.
The notes that follow do not claim to be exhaustive
but they indicate the activity in gravity deter-
minations at sea by five different countries. The
fundamental significance of such research is force-
fully presented by Vening Meinesz in the first
jjublication by him cited below.

After his manuscript was prepared Vening Meinesz
himself made a voyage in 1935 on a submarine

Vening Meinesz, F. A., with collaboration of Urab-
grove, J. H. F., and Kuenen, Ph.H., Report of the
gravity expedition in the Atlantic of 1932, and the
interpretation of the results: Gravity Expeditions
at Sea, 1923-1932, vol. 2, pp. 208, 4 pis., text figs.,
1934. (Publication of Netherl. Geod. Com.)

Vening Meinesz, F. A., Interpretation of the anomalies
of gravity: Hydrogr. Review, vol. 14, no. 1, pp.
107-108, May, 1937. (Translated from the French,
reproduced from an article published in Bulletin
G6od6sique, no. 46, Paris, 1935.)

Vening Meinesz, F. A., The gravity expedition of Hr.
Ms. Submarine O 16 in the north Atlantic, January

NAVY-GEOPHYSICAL UNION

GRAVITY EXPEDITION

1936-7

Fio. 9

from the Netherlands across the Atlantic to Rio de
Janeiro and thence by the Cape of Good Hope and
Australia to the East Indies, and in the early
months of 1937 he made another voyage across the
Atlantic, from the Netherlands by way of the Azores
to Chesapeake Bay, and he returned by a more
northerly route. Except the indicated itinerary
other information on these voyages is not yet
available.

Three publications by Vening Meinesz, one in
collaboration with Umbgrove and Kuenen are as
follows :

11-March 16, 1937: Konink. Akad. VVetensch. Am-
sterdam, Proc. vol. 40, no. 5, pp. 382-388, 1 chart,
1937.

The chart illustrating the route is reproduced as
plate 36.

It would be interesting to insert here the inter-
pretations of the results procured by Professor
Vening Meinesz and his associates but that is not
now practicable.

During the winter of 1936-37 there was an expedi-
tion on the U. S. Naval Submarine Baracuda to
the West Indies. A note on this expedition is

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

contained in the following paper by Capt. H. E.
Kays:

expedition to the West Indies. ' ' The route and the
stations occupied are illustrated by fig. 5, here
reproduced as fig. 9 of this work.)
Kays, H. E., The oceanographic work of the Hydro-
graphic Office and the United States Navy from At the same meeting of the American Geophysical

CHART SHOWING THE GRAVIMETRIC STATIONS OCCUPIED
BY THE ITALIAN SUBMARINE VETTOR PISANI.
Fig. 10

April, 1936, to April, 1937: Amer. Geophys. Union, Union the following papers which will be published
17th Ann. Meeting 1937, Trans., pp. 194-201. (One in the Transactions of the meeting, were also
section of this report is entitled "Gravimetric presented:

RESULTS OF MARITIME GRAVITY RESEARCH

Ewing, Maurice, Gravity measurements on the U. S. S.

Baracdda.
Hess, Harry H., Geological interpretation of results of

the cruise of the U. S. S. Baracuda — a preliminary

report.

The Italians have been active in studies of gravity
at sea. References to their work are as follows:

L. T. (L. Tonta), Short note on the measurement of the
acceleration of gravity at sea and on an Italian
gravimetric cruise in the Tyrrhenian Sea: Hy-
drogr. Review, vol. 8, pp. 243-248, 1931.

Cassinis, G., An Italian gravimetric cruise in the
Mediterranean: Hydrogr. Review, vol. 9, pp. 148-
149, 1 fig., 1932.

Cassinis, G., I resultati della crociera gravimetrica del
R. Soramergibile Vettor Pisani e la gravita in
Italia: Soc. Ital. Progr. Scienze, 22 Riun., Bari,
Oct. 1933, Atti, vol. 2, 1933. Abstr., Hydrogr.
Review, vol. 11, pp. 185-186, 1934.

Figure 10 shows the route of the vessel and the
positions of the stations occupied.

The French have also done some work in the
Mediterranean. A note on their expeditions is
contained in the following article :

Cot, D., L'Etude de la pesanteur sur la mer: Assoc.

interuat. d'Oceanogr. phys.. Gen. Assemb., Edin-
burgh, Sept. 1936, Proc.-Verb., no. 2, pp. 163-164,
1937. (Note on cruises of the French Navy in the
Mediterranean in 1933 and 1936.)

The Japanese for several years have been active
in the study of gravity at sea over the Nippon
Trench and adjacent areas. References to three
publications are as follows :

Matuyama, M., Measurements of gravity over the
Nippon Trench on board the I. J. Submarine RO-
57, preliminary report: Imper. Acad. Proc, vol.
10, pp. 626-628, 1934.

Matuyama, M., Distribution of gravity over the Nippon
Trench and related areas: Ibid., vol. 12, pp. 93-95,
1 fig., 1936.

Matuyama, M., Gravity survey by the Japanese Geo-
detic Commission since 1932 : Internal. Union Geod.
and Geophys., Si.\th Gen. Assemb., Edinburgh,
1936, Japan Nat. Com. Geod. and Geophys. Rept.
no. 2, pp. 8, 1 fig., 1936.

Plate 35 is a reproduction of the chart presented
in the third paper by Professor Matuyama. This
chart is interesting in that it shows a distribution
of gravity anomalies similar to those that have been
discovered in both the East and the West Indies

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

PLATE 35

Gravity Surveys by the Japanese Geodetic Commission Since 1932

: I A..inT»'i;

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

F. A. VENING MEINESZ: The Gravity-Expedition of Hr. Ms. Submarine 016 in the North Atlantic, Januari ii— March 16, 1937.

w'-PT^.

y:^:^*-.

JtMp^

■M{ ,^-

1 >?h^,;a>^^' i.^;.-!j?f'

|-i:--|-!-:.rt:-tJ<<r4^.;y'L-^J..-,:-7r^-.

. 7 -■-S'r}©-"'— ,

■>* * --;..> *

:=1J-^

•'-■/?x Ci^'

^^.fel^-

-rc-.-

iU:-^-

vry - ^^^.^ _ ^ I f i?p^--:}<^rI?:^---^-

s^«gms#

— -..^^^-s----^:

.^^f^Txr.

--^?^-i--:=-"-:

srv-

•'->:-*'■•..

Proceedings Royal Acad. Amsterdam, Vol. XL, 1937.

The liouTE of H. .M. Submarine Olfl in the North Atlantic is Indicated bt a Fdll Line. The Routes of Former Expeditions H. M. K. XIIL O. XIH, and K. XVIII bv Dotted Lines. The Few Stations Near Europe
Obtained with H. M. K, II and K. XI aveH Been Added. The Stations by Three Expeditions of the United States Navy in the West Indies and Adjoining Waters by U. S. S. S-21, S^8, and the Baracuda

Have Also Been Put on the Chart

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN
OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK

GENERAL DISCUSSION

PREVIOUS CATALOGUES

In 1910 Charles Atwood Kofoid published a
volume entitled "The Biological Stations of
Europe,"' in which accounts are given of both
the marine and fresh water biological laboratories
and also the stations for fish culture in Europe. A
number of the institutions, of which Kofoid gives
accounts, are included in the present volume but in
the twenty-seven years that have elapsed since
Kofoid's book was published there have been many
changes. Some of the stations have undergone
great development, while others have been aban-
doned. Although it might be interesting to compare
conditions in 1910 with those at present it does not
seem necessary to do so. A succinct history is
given in the present catalogue of each station for
which information could be procured. Those who
wish to do so may make the comparison. One
feature of Kofoid's book is an extensive bibliography
of earUer publications dealing with the European
.stations.

In 1927 Prof. G. Magrini published a catalogue
entitled "Instituts et Laboratoires s'occupant de
1 ^tude de la mer." (Edition provisoire.)- This
catalogue is preceded by another entitled "Liste
des oceanographes des pays adherants a I'Union."
(2e Edition) 5 Another catalogue is that of the
marine stations of the Pacific* Accounts of several
important oceanographic institutions are included
in the two volumes Forschungsinstute; ihre Ges-
chichte, Organisation, und Ziele edited by Brauer,
Ludolph, and others.^ Numerous magazines carry
accounts of institutions. One of them is the
Collecting Net, published by Ware Cattell, during
the summer months at Woods Hole, Massachusetts.
The Year Book issued by the International Hydro-
graphic Bureau at Monte Carlo gives an up-to-date
list for each year of the hydrographic services for all
countries and constitutes a valuable book of ref-
erence.

METHOD OF PROCURING INFORMATION AND DATES OF ITS VALIDITY

The journey that the author of this volume made
around the world has been mentioned in the preface.
Wiile on the journey, conferences were held in each
country with those who were believed to be the be.st
informed regarding oceanographic institutions in
that country. With the help of these advisers lists
were made for each country of the institutions on
which information was desired. Some information
was obtained on the ground by visits to many insti-
tutions but the chief dependence was put upon the
replies to questions that were sent to each institu-
tion. It has already been stated that the responses
to requests for information were most gratifying.
The accounts as given can for nearly all institutions
be credited to the chief officer of the institution.
For such countries thanks are here expressed to all
who helped assemble information. For some coim-
tries, as has already been stated, an individual
undertook to obtain the A'arious accounts for his

' United States Bureau of Education, Bull, whole number
440, pp. XIII, 360, 55 pis., 48 text figures, Washington
Government Printing Office, 1910.

country. A list of those who rendered such as-
sistance has already been given.

The information as first assembled was of the date
of about January 1, 1934, but, as has been stated, the
manuscript of the report could not be completed at
the expected time. Therefore it was necessary to
get the information as nearly as possible as of the
date of January, 1937. In the catalogue of the
institutions, after the name of the institution, the
date of the information has been given, usually as
'34 or '37. It will be seen that answers were
received from nearly all requests for revisions.
Only a few of those to whom inquiries were ad-

' Cons. Internat. Rech., Union G6od4s. et G^ophys.
Internat., Sect. d'Oceanogr., Bull. no. 7, pp. 115, 1927.

' Ibid., Bull. no. 6a (1 re livraison) (Afrique du Sud,
Alg^rie, Australie, Bahamas, Birmanie, Canada, Egypte,
Espagne, France) pp. 33, 1925; Bull. no. 6b (2 ieme livraison)
(Etats Unis, Grande Bretagne, Italic), pp. 67, 1927.

* Vaughan, T. W., Catalogue of marine stations of the
Pacific, in International Committee on the Oceanogaphy
of the Pacific — report of the Chairman: Fifth Pacific Sci.
Congr. Proc, vol. 1, pp. 361-380, 1934.

' Hamburg, 1930.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

dressed failed to respond, and these may be excused
on the probabiUty of the requests not having
reached them or because no revisions of statements
already submitted were needed. A very few of the
records are taken from the list of Professor Magrtni
('27) cited above. Regarding the institutions in
Spain, it should be said that Prof. Rafael de Buen

helped to get accurate records of the Spanish insti-
tutions for about the summer of 1934 — they were
probably accurate to the end of 1934. Because of
the distressing civil war in Spain the records have
been left as they were submitted by Professor de
Buen. It is not possible to forecast what the
conditions will be after the war is ended.

OCEANOGRAPHIC RESEARCH OUTSIDE OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTIONS

Although the account of oceanographic institu-
tions is mtended to give a picture of the researches
conducted by them it does not cover all the im-
portant oceanographic work, for example, Prof. V.
Bjerknes, the father of modern dynamical oceanog-
raphy, is connected with the Department of
Physics at the University of Oslo and is now not a
member of the staff of any oceanographic institu-
tion, although he was at one time connected with
the Geophysical Institute at Bergen, Norway.
Prof. Johan Hjort and his assistants are preparing
reports on oceanographic collections in the biological
laboratory of the University of Oslo. Prof. H. H.
Gran is the head of the botanical institute in the
same university. Prof. V. W. Ekman, another
leader in dynamical oceanography, is professor of
hydrodynamics at the University of Lund. The
names of others might be mentioned.

It was desirable to include in this report a cata-
logue of oceanographers, but that was not practi-
cable. The list of oceanographers prepared by
Professor Magrmi has been mentioned. For those
who care to do so an extensive but incomplete list
of the research workers in oceanography can be
compiled by taking from this report the names of
those who are members of the staffs of the different

institutions and the names of others who are men-
tioned in the discussion of various topics.

Much valuable oceanographic research is done at
institutions in which such investigations are only
incidental to other activities. An instance of this
is the investigation of the various aspects of marine
bottom deposits at the United States Geological
Survey. An investigation now under way at it is
the study of the bottom cores obtained in the
northern Atlantic by the use of the Piggot gun
mentioned at another place in this report. Many
museums conduct, on collections, sent them, re-
searches that are of great value to oceanography.
In general these museums are not listed in this
catalogue, but a few will be mentioned here. The
British Museum of Natural History conducts
investigations on collections obtained by oceano-
graphic expeditions and it is not restricting its
researches to biological material. Recently Dr.
J. D. H. Wiseman has been appointed a member
of the staff of the Mineralogy Department and he
will work on marine bottom deposits. Another
museum at which valuable work is done is the one
at Hamburg. Nearly all of the large museums,
that serve as depo.sitories of oceanographic collec-
tions, make by the researches of the members of
their staffs valuable contributions to oceanography.

ACTIVITIES BY COUNTRIES

The catalogue here presented contains the names
of 245 institutions, after eliminating the Pourquoi
Pas? which was destroyed in September, 1936. It
is probable the names of a few inactive or abandoned
institutions, names taken from Magrini, 1927,
are included, and it is also probable that there have
been some omissions, but it is believed that a fair
picture is given of the provisions for work on the
various aspects of the oceans in the different coun-
tries. The distribution of the institutions by
countries is indicated by the following table, but it

does not necessarily follow that the oceanographic
output of a country can be inferred from the number
of institutions or marine stations in it. In some
countries the work is concentrated. In Germany,
for example, instead of there being a number of
marine biological stations, as in France, the United
States, and Japan, there is one large excellently
equipped station on Helgoland. A large number
of small stations helps the students of many uni-
versities to get access to the sea and its inhabitants.
France has large stations as at Roscoff and Arago

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— GENERAL DISCUSSION

Distribution hij Countries of Institutions Engaged
in Oceanographic Work

COUNTRY NUMBER

International 9

Algeria 2

Belgium 2

Czechoslovakia 2

Denmark 3

Egypt 3

England 10

Estonia 1

Finland 4

France 17

Germany 8

Greece 2

Hungary 1

Iceland 1

Ireland 1

Italy 15

Latvia 2

Lithuania 1

Monaco 1

Netherlands 3

Norway 8

Poland 1

Portugal 2

Rumania 2

Scotland 3

Spain 9

Sweden 7

Tunis 1

Turkey 1

Union of South Africa 4

Yugoslavia 2

U. S. S. R. (west part) 13

(Siberia) _2^ 15

Bermuda 1

Canada (east) 5

(west) _2 7

Newfoundland 1

United States (east) 20

(west) 12 32

Argentina 2

Brazil 2

Uruguay 2

Chile 2

Ecuador 1

Peru 4

Australia 5

China 5

French Indo-China 1

Hong Kong 1

Japan 18

Neth. East Indies 2

New Zealand 1

Philippine Islands 5

Siam 1

Straits Settlements 1

India 8

de Banyiil sur Mer, as well as small stations. Sev-
eral countries that have relatively few institutions,
as Denmark, Finland, Norway, and Sweden, are
among the leaders of the world in oceanographic
research.

Attention should be called to the jmucity of
oceanographic stations south of the Equator. In
South Africa there is one and there soon will be two,
in Java one, in Australia one, in New Zealand one,
and on the east coast of South America perhaps two
of three fishery stations. With reference to the
tropics, including the stations both north and south
of the Equator, there are the stations in India
which are mostly for fishery research, one in Java,
one in the Philippines at Puerto Galera, one in
French Indo-China, the Palao station of the Japa-
nese, and the station at Wakaiki, Oahu, Hawaiian
Islands. The station at Tortugas, Florida, of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington, falls just
outside the northern limit of the tropics, while the
Bermuda station is still farther north but semi-
tro]iical. The station at Ghardaqa in the Red Sea
is also semi-tropical, although it is considerably
north of the Tropic of Cancer. The number of
accessible, well equipped stations is very small and at
present they are all principally for marme biology —
other aspects of oceanography receive either no or
only secondary attention. An endeavor should be
made to establish on some island within the high
tropics a research station both for marine biology
and other aspects of oceanography. Several of the
.stations are well situated except for accessibility.
This is true of the station at Puerto Galera in the
Philippines and that of the Japanese in the Palao
Islands. Information has been obtained on the
suitability of a number of places in the Pacific. The
sites that seem to merit most consideration are the
Island of Tahiti, and some island of the Samoan
or Fiji group. All of these islands are on major
trans-Pacific steamship routes and offer opportunity
for the study of a wide range of oceanographic
problems. There should also be a station on some
island in the West Indies. The station at Bermuda
is outside the tropics; the one at Tortugas, Florida,
is more tropical but it is not easily accessible and
it is in operation only a part of the year. There
arc good sites in the Virgm Islands, on the Island of
Jamaica, and probablj' on other islands that are
regidarly visited by passenger vessels.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

FUNDS AVAILABLE FOR OCEANOGRAPHIC RESEARCH

One of the questions on the requests for informa-
tion was "Income — Source — Amount," for the
purpose of ascertaining how much was being ex-
pended in each country on oceanographic work.
For many institutions the desired data were given,
but for others the question was not answered. Since
the data are inadequate for a satisfactory statistical
study of the matter, only a few comments will
be made.

A discouraging fact is that some important
institutions are in financial difficulties. This is
true of the Institut Oceanographique, including the

Musfe Oceanographique, founded by H. S. H.
Prince Albert I of Monaco, and of the Stazione
Zoologiche of Naples. It is probable that the
achievements in Spain have been nullified by the
devastating civil war in that unhappy country.
In some countries, particularly Japan and the
United States, there has been great progress within
the past ten years. In each of them oceanographic
research was backward, but they are now among
the leaders. Much interesting information is con-
tained in the records here given, but it is not suited
to statistical treatment.

ANALYSIS OF THE ACTIVITIES OF THE INSTI-
TUTIONS ACCORDING TO SUBJECT

The activities of the institutions engaged in
oceanographic work have been tabulated according
to fourteen topical headings. Only short notes
will be made on each of the topics, except "instruc-
tion" of which there will be succinct but fuller
discussion.

Seismology. Although seismological research is
not prosecuted at any of the institutions here con-
sidered, except the United States Coast and Geodetic
Survey, many stations have seismographs installed
on their premises and they cooperate with seismo-
logical specialists. The vital importance of seismol-
ogy for oceanography is shown by the article con-
tributed to this volume by Professor Gutenberg.

Hydrographic s^irveys. Each important country
has a hydrographic service usually attached to its
navy. The United States divides its hydrographic
work between two organizations, the Navy, for
foreign waters and the high seas, and the Coast and
Geodetic Survey, for home waters. The hydro-
graphic services of several countries are among the
foremost contributors to oceanographic knowledge.
Tidal records and research. The note on Tides
by Mr. H. A. Marnier in this report gives a picture
of tidal research. Automatically recording tide
gages are installed at many marine stations, but
tidal research is prosecuted at very few. Among
those that are active are the Liverpool Observatory
and Tidal Institute, England, the Institut fiir
Meereskunde, Berlin, Germany, the Geophysical
Institute at Bergen, Norway, the Borno Station,
Sweden, and the Thalassological Institute of Fin-
land. Tidal experts are connected with most of
the larger hydrographic services, and some of them
conduct researches on problems of tidal theory.

Records of temperature and salinity. Records of
temperature are kept at many, probably nearly all,
marine stations for at least a part of the year, and
at some for the entire year. The determination of
the salinity of the water Ls not so general. The
fully equipped oceanographic institutions conduct
systematic studies of temperature and salinity over
the entire field of their operations. It is probable
that more work is indicated in the table than is
actually done, biit accuracy was not practicable.

Physics. Mo.st of the work on the physical prop-
erties of sea water is of a very simple kind, such
as the depth of the visibility of a Secchi disc, but
at some institutions the researches are of excellent
quality. Among the subjects investigated are the
depth of penetration of radiant energy, evaporation,
convection, heat conduction and diffusion, and the
content of radioactive substances — a subject that
is both physics and chemistry.

Chemistry. Because of the biological significance
of many chemical features of seawater, routine
chemical determinations and some actual research
are conducted at many stations. Much of the chem-
ical work has appHcations to other aspects of
oceanography, for example, to .studies of circulation
and to geological problems.

Dynamical oceanography. Although water move-
ments are observed and recorded more or less
qualitatively at many places and although numerous
institutions are building up bodies of data necessary
for the study of the dynamics of water masses,
researches on the principles and the application of
the principles of modern dynamical oceanography
are prosecuted at relatively few institutions. The
training of a larger number of young people in
dynamical oceanography is one of the needs of the
science.

Sediments. Marine bottom samples are collected
by a number of institutions and several others serve
as depositories, but actual research is conducted at
only a few places. This subject is further discussed
on page 35 of this report.

Meteorology. Observations are recorded at many
places, and a number of institutions are repositories
of data, which are compiled, averaged, and plotted,
but there is far too little fundamental research.
Investigations in marine meteorology involve re-
searches in physics, also included under that caption.

Gravity at sea. Since the determination of gravity
at sea depends upon having submarines available
for the requisite cruises, such work is necessarily in
conjunction with the Navy departments of inter-
ested countries. The leader in this work is the
Netherlands. Other countries that have been
active are France, Italy, Japan, and the United

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

States. (See article by Prof. F. A. Veiling Meinesz,
this report page 59.)

Terrestrial magnetism. Observations to aid navi-
gation are made by most hydrographic services, but
research has been very restricted. (See article by
Dr. J. A. Fleming, this report, page 50.)

Fisheries. Except general marine biology, the
provisions for fishery investigations e.xceed those
for any other kind of oceanographic work. Nearly
every country of importance has either a .separate
fishery service, or fishery research is assigned as a
function to an institution of broader oceanographic
scope, for example, the Institvit oc^anographique
de rindochine. In some countries, such as the
United States, subordinate political subdivisions
support special services, for example, the State of
California. It is probable that some of the sub-
ordinate fishery services have not been included in
this catalogue.

Marine biology. There is in this volume no special
discussion of marine biology. The amount of
attention paid the subject is shown in the table of
institutions engaged in oceanographic work. More
attention is given marine biology than to any other
aspect of the sea. The investigation of the marine

environments has lagged behind the study of the
organisms that live in those enviromnents. Refer-
ences are given in the footnote below' to two
symposia, of which most of the papers are here
pertinent. The purport of the one by the compiler
of this volume is obvious from its title. The article
is based on a study of the programs of the leading
marine biological stations of the world.

1 Ecolog. Mon., vol. 4, no. 4, pp. 421-554, 1934.
Conditions of Existence of Aquatic Animals, Symposium
at the Century of Progress Exposition, Chicago, Illinois,
.Tune 22, 1933:

Conditions of life in the ocean, August Krogh.
Conditions of life at great depths in the ocean, August

Krogh.
Particulate and dissolved organic matter in inland

lakes, E. A. Birge and C. Juday.
Ecology of lake fishes, A. S. Pearse.
The biochemistry of the invertebrates of the sea, Paul

S. Galtsoff.
Faith in the results of controlled laboratory experi-
ments as applied in nature, V. E. Shelford.
Oceanography, Symposium, Boston, Massachusetts,
December 30, 1933:

Present trends in the investigation of the relations of
marine organisms to their environment, T. Way-
land Vaughan.
The distribution and conditions of existence of bacteria

in the sea, Selman A. VVakman.
Factors affecting the vertical distribution of copepods,

George L. Clarke.
Concerning the organization of marine communities,
W. C. Allee.

INSTRUCTION IN OCEANOGRAPHY

This catalogue of institutions was intended to
make records of those institutions engaged in
oceanographic activities other than in.struction, but
as instruction is a part of the programs of many,
it has been indicated both in the statements regard-
ing the institutions and in the table. Leaving out
those institutions that are concerned only with
biological subjects, a list of the institutions in the
table that give instruction in oceanography, its
physical and chemical aspects, with variable em-
phasis on its biological aspects are as follows :

Czechoslovakia: Prague, Geographical Institute,
Charles University.

England: Hull, Department of Zoology and Oceanog-
raphy, University College, Hull. Liverpool, De-
partment of Oceanography, University of Liver-
pool.

France: Paris, Institut Oceanographique.

Germany: Berlin, Institut fUr Meereskunde.

Kiel, Universitiit, Meereschemisches Laboratorium
and Meeresgeologische Forschungsstelle.

Italy: Naples, Gabinetto di Oceanografia e Meteoro-
logia. University, di Napoli.

Norway: Bergen, Det Geofysiske Institutt.

Sweden: Goteborg, Oceanografiska Institutionen vid
Goteborgs Hogskola.

United States: Cambridge, Mass., Department of
Oceanography, M. C. Z., Harvard University.

La Jolla, Calif., Scripps Institution of Oceanography,
University of California.

Pacific Grove, Hopkins Marine Station, Stanford
University.

Seattle, Wash., Oceanographic Laboratories, Univer-
sity of Washington.
Japan: Kyoto, Institute of Physical Oceanography,
Imperial University of Kyoto.

Tokyo, Imperial Fisheries Institute.

Special instruction in hydrographic surveying
and allied subjects is given to naval officers by
several of the hydrographic services of important
countries.

The foregoing tabulation and note do not repre-
sent all available instruction in oceanography.
Supplements are as follows:

Norway: Oslo, Institute of Geography, University of
Oslo, Professor Werner Werenskiold conducts the
course. A volume by him is mentioned below.'

Prof. V. Bjerknes at Oslo gives no courses but is avail-
able for conferences.

2 Werenskiold, Werner, Fysisk Geografi, I. Geofysik,
Meteorologi, Oceanografi: H. Aschehoug and Co., Oslo,
1925, Oceanografi, pp. 244-340.

ANALYSIS OF ACTIVITIES OF INSTITUTIONS

Germany: Hamburg, Universitat. Excellent and com-
prehensive instruction in "Physik and Chemie des
Meerwassers" is given by Prof. B. Schulz and
associates.

Netherlands: Utrecht, University, a course in physical
oceanography every other year by Prof. E. van
Everdingen, Jr., and some lectures by Prof. K.
Oestreich, the head of Geographical Institute. At
Amsterdam lectures are given by Prof. W. van
Bemmelen.

Sweden: Lund, University. Prof. V. W. Ekman gives
no courses in oceanography but he is available for
conferences.

United States: Cambridge, Mass., Massachusetts
Institute of Technology. Instruction in physical
oceanography is offered by Prof. C-G. Rossby and
Mr. C. O. Iselin II.
New York, Columbia University provides extension
courses in oceanography by Mr. V. P. de Smitt as a
part of the geographical program.

Japan: Tokyo, College of Agriculture and Forestrj',
Tokyo Imperial University, instruction by Dr.
Juta Hara.

Sapporo, Fishery Institute, Hokkaido Imperial
University, some instruction in connection with
the courses on fisheries subjects.

,\lthough the foregoing list is almost certainly
incomplete, it is nearly enough complete to show
that the provisions for instruction in the funda-
mental principles of oceanography are far from
sufficient. One of the desiderata of English speak-
ing students is an adequate text in English on the
principles of dynamical oceanography. It has been
suggested that either Dcfant's "Dynamische Ozean-
ographie" be translated or that McEwen's "A
summary of basic principles underlying modern
methods of dynamical oceanography" be expanded
into a volume. (Both of the.se publications have
already been mentioned.) The adoption of either
suggestion would be helpful, but a new text, up
to date in all respects with such elaborations as
students need, would probably be more satisfactory.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

International

International
International
International

International

Algeria

Belgium

Czechoslovakia

Denmark

Denmark
Egypt

Egypt

England
England
England

England

England
England

England
England
England

Estonia

IXSTITCTION

Assoc. Internat. d'Oceanographie

Physique
Commis. Internat. pour I'Explor.

Scien. Mer Medit.
Conseil Permanent International

pour I'Exploration de la Mer
Consejo Oceanogrdfico Ibero-

Americano
Internat. Com. on Oceanography

of the Pacific
Internat. Fisheries Commis.
Internat. Hydrog. Bureau
Internat. Service of Ice Observ.

& Ice Patrol in the North At-
lantic
No. American Council on Fishery

Investigations
Station Zoologique Maritime sur

la Jet6e Nord
Station d'Aquiculture et de

Peche de Castiglione
Royaume de Belgique, Service

de THydrographie
Institut Maritime de Belgique

at Ostend
Geographical Institute of the

Charles Univ. In Prague. (Geo-

graficky ustav Karlovy univer-
sity, Praga)
Biological Station at Rab
Dansk Biologisk Station
Koraissionen for Danmarks

Fiskeri- og Havunders0gelser
Kongelige Sokort-Arkiv
Laboratoire des Recherches sur

les Pecheries
Mawani P'anarat (Port & Light-
house Administration)
Fisheries Experiment Station
Dove Marine Laboratory
Dept. Zoology & Oceanography,

University College
Dept. of Oceanography, Univ.

of Liverpool
Liverpool Observatory and Tidal

Institute
Hydrography Dept., Admiralty
Meterological Office (Marine

Div.) Air Ministry
Fisheries Laboratory
Plymouth Marine Laboratory
Port Erin Marine Biological

Station
Kaitsevagede Staabi Topo-

Hiidrograafia Osakond

LOCATION

Indefinite

Copenhagen

Madrid, Spain

Indefinite

Seattle, Wash.
Monte Carlo
Washington,
D. C.

Indefinite

Algiers

Castiglione

Brussels

Ostend

Prague

Rab, Dalmatia

Copenhagen

Copenhagen
Alexandria

Alexandria

Conway

Cullercoats

Hull

Liverpool

London
London

Lowestoft
Plymouth
Port Erin Bay

Tallinn

ANALYSIS OF ACTIVITIES OF INSTITUTIONS

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Continued

Finland

France

France
France

France

France
France
France

France

France
France
France
France

France

France
Germany

Germany

Germany
Germany

Germany

INSTITCTION

Bureau for Fishery Investiga-
tions

Laboratory for Hydrobiological
Investigations

Merenkulliuhallitus Merikart-
talaitos (Hydrographic Off.)

Thalassological Institute

Le Laboratoire Arago de Banyuls

sur Mer
Station Biologique d'Arcachon
Laboratoire de Luc-Sur-Mer de
la Faculte des Sciences de Caen
Laboratoire de Zoologie et de
Physiologie Maritimes du Col-
lege de France
Laboratoire Maritime du Mu-
seum National d'Histoire
Naturelle
Laboratoire de Guethary
Institut Oceanographique du

Havre
Laboratoire de Biologic Marine

de "Le Croisic"
Laboratoire Marion de Marseille
r Institut Oceanographique
Office Scientifique et Technique

des Peches Maritimes
The boat POURQUOI-PAS

Service Central Hydrographique
Station Biologique de Roscoff
Station Biologique de Sete
Station Biologique de Tamaris

sur Mer
Station Zoologique de I'Univer-

site de Paris h Villefranche sur

Mer
Station Zoologique de Wimereux
Deutsche wissenschaftliche Ko-

mission fur Meeresforschung
Fischerei-biologische Abtheilung

im Deutschen Seefischerei-

Verein
Institut und Museum fiir Meeres-

kunde
Nautische Abteilung, Oberbe-

fehlshaber der Kriegsmarine
Deutsche Seewarte
Biologische Anstalt auf Helgo-
land
Meereschemisches Laboratorium

der Universitat in Kiel
Meeresgeologische Forschungs-

stelle der Universitat Kiel

LOCATION

Helsinki

(Helsinki)

Helsingfors
Arago de Banyuls

Arcachon
Calvados (Luc-

sur-Mer)
Concarneau

Dinard

Guethary
Havre

Le Croisic

Marseille

Paris

Destroyed, Sept.,

1936
Paris
Roscoff
Sete, Herault
Tamaris sur Mer

Villefranche sur
Mer, Alpes
Maritimes

Wimereux

Berlin

Berlin
Berlin

Hamburg
Helgoland

Kieler Forde,
Ostsee

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Continued

COUNTRY

INSTITUTIOS

LOCATION

o
o

o
s

s z

>•

El]

n
<

.3 K

< O

z
u

o
o

K
O
(A
H

>•

<
a
o

Greece

Hydrographic Offine of the Navy

Phaleron Biological Station

Hungarian Oceanographic Insti-
tution

Vitamdiastjorn (Lighthouse Ad-
min.)

Dept of Agriculture, Fisheries
Branch

Istituto di Zoologia della R. Uni-
versita di Catania

R. Osservatorio di Pesca marit-
tima di Ganzirri

Istituto Idrografico della R.
Marina

Marine Laboratory of the Isti-
tuto di Zoologia della R. Uni-
versita di Genova

Istituto Centrale di Biologia
Marine in Messina

Gabinetto di Oceanografia e
Meteorologia

Stazione Zoologica di Napoli

Istituto di Ricerche Biologiche
in Rodi

R. Comitate Talassografico
Italiano

Ispettorato Generale della Pesca
e Divisione Amministrativa
per la Pesca

R. Laboratorio Centrale di Idro-
biologia

Istituto Italo-Germanico di Bi-
ologia Marina di Rovigno
d'Istria

Istituto Demaniale di Biologia
Marina di Taranto

Istituto Geofisico di Trieste

Ufficio Idrografico del Magis-
trate alle Acque a Venezia

Hidrografiska Dala, Jurniecibas
Departments, Finansu Minis-
trija

Hydrobiological Station of the
University of Latvia

Susisiekimo Ministerija, Uosto
Valdyba (Ministry of Com-
munication, Harbor Office)

Musfie OcSanographique de
Monaco

Koninklijk Nederlandsch Me-
teorologisch Instituut

Zoologisch Station der Neder-
landsche Dierkundige Vere-
eniging

Athens

Old Phaleron

Budapest

Reykjavik

Dublin

Catania

Ganzirri

Genoa

Messina

Naples

Naples
Rodi

Rome

Rovigno d'Istria

Taranto

Trieste
Venezia

Riga

Riga
Klaipeda

Monaco-Ville
De Bilt
Den Helder

Greece

Hungary
Iceland

Ireland

X
X
X

Italy
Italy
Italy

Italy
Italy

Italy

X
X

Italy

X
X

Italy

Italy
Italy

X
X

Italy

Italy
Italy

Latvia

X
X

Latvia

Lithuania

Monaco

X
X

Netherlands

ANALYSIS OF ACTIVITIES OF INSTITUTIONS

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Continued

COUNTBT

INSTITUTION

LOCATION

>•
o

o
a
2
a

a. o
S z

H <

s
n

< o

z
w
s
H
a
m

>-
o
o
.J
o

o
a

E-

a o

c: <

>•

o
o
.J

OS
H

Netherlands

Department van Defensie, Af-

deeling's Hydrografie
Fiskeridirektoratet, Avdeling for

Havundersokelser
Det Geofysiske Institutt
Statens Fiskeriforsoksstasjon
Universitets Biologiske Stasjon
Bergens Museums Biologiske

Stasjon
Sjokartverket (Nautical Charts

Office)
Troms0 Museum
Trondheims Biologiske Station
Biuro Hydrograficzne Marynarki

Wojennej
Aqudrio Vasco da Gama-Esta^ao

de Biologia Maritima
Direc^ao de Hidrografia, Nave-

gagao e Meteorologia Nautica
Serviciul Hidrografic al Marinei

de Razboi
State Maritima, Regele Ferdi-
nand I
The Torry Research Station
Marine Laboratory of the Fishery

Board for Scotland
Scottish Marine Biological Asso-
ciation
Laboratorio Oceanografico de

Canarias
Instituto Espanol de Oceano-

grafia
Laboratorio de Mdlaga
Laboratorio de Palma de Mal-

lorca
Servicio Hidrografico
Instituto y Observatorio de

Marina de San Fernando
Sociedad de Oceanografia de

Guipuzcoa
Laboratorio de Santander
Laboratorio de Vigo
Borno Research Station
Klubbans Biological Station
Kristinebergs Zoologiska Station
Oceanografiska Institutionen vid

Goteborgs, Hogskola
Svenska Hydrografisk-Biologiska

Komissionen
Havsfiskelaboratoriet
Kungliga Sjokarteverket (Hydro-
graphic Service)
Oceanographic Station of Sa-

lambo

Gravenhage

Bergen

Bergen
Bergen
Dr0bak
Herdla

Oslo

Troms0

Trondheim

Warsaw

Dafundo

Lisbon

Constantza

Agigea, Prov.

Constantza
Aberdeen
Aberdeen

Millport

Las Palmas, Ca-
nary Islands
Madrid

Mdlaga

Palma de Mal-

lorca
San Fernando
San Fernando

San Sebastian

Santander

Vigo

Borno

Fiskebackskil

Goteborg

GuUmar-fjord
Stockholm

Salammbo

Norway

X
X

Norway
Norway
Norway
Norway

X
X

Norway

X
X

Norway

Poland

Portugal
Portugal

X
X

Rumania

X
X

Scotland

X
X

Scotland

Spain

Spain
Spain

X
X

Spain

X
X

Spain

X
X

Spain

Sweden

X
X

Sweden

X
X

X
X
X

X
X

Sweden

X
X

Sweden

Tunis

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Continued

Turkey

Union of South

Africa
Union of South

Africa

Union of South

Africa
Union of South

Africa

Yugoslavia

U. S. S. R.

U. S. S. R.
U. S. S. R.

U. S. S. R.

U. S. S. R.
U. S. S. R.

U. S. S. R.

U. S. §. R.

U. S. S. R.

U. S. S. R.
Bermuda

Canada
Canada
Canada

Canada
Canada

INSTITUTION

Harta Genel Direktorltigii Hidro-
grafi Subesi (Hydrographic
Sect. Cartograph. Serv. of
Army)

Fisheries Survey Division

Marine Biological Station &
Headquarters of Division of
Fisheries

Marine Biological Station of Div.
of Fisheries Survey

Department van Verdediging,
Hydrographic Survey Section

Hidrografski ured Kraljevske
Mornarice

Oceanografski Institut Kral-
jevine Jugoslavije

The Azerbaidjan Fisheries Sta-
tion

Fisheries Station of Georgia

Manguistau Branch of the Uralo-
Caspian Scientific Fisheries
Station

The Uralo-Caspian Fisheries
Station

Asov-Black Sea Scientific Re-
search Institute

The Turkmenistan Fisheries
Station

Gidrograficheskij Otdel (Hydro-
graphic Department)

Daguestan Fisheries Station

The All-Union Scientific Re-
search Institution of Marine
Fisheries & Oceanography

Polar Scientific Research Insti-
tute of Marine Fisheries and
Oceanography

Novorossiisk Arnoldi Biological
Station

Ukrainian Odessa Fisheries Sta-
tion

Sevastopol Biological Station

Bermuda Biological Station for
Research

Canadian Hydrographic Service

Atlantic Biological Station

Prince Edward Island Marine
Station

Meteorological Service of Can.

Station Biologique du Saint-
Laurent

LOCATION

Ankara

Capetown
Capetown

St. James Bay

Pretoria

Split

Baku

Batoum
Bautino

Gouriev

Kertch

Krasnovodsk

Leningrad

Makhach-Kala
Moscow

Murmansk

Novorossiisk

Odessa

Sevastopol

St. George's West

Ottawa

St. Andrews

Ellerslie

Toronto
Trois-Pistoles

ANALYSIS OF ACTIVITIES OF INSTITUTIONS

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Continued

Newfoundland

United States

United States
United States
United States

United States

Argentina
Argentina
Brazil

Brazil

Uruguay
Uruguay

Canada
Canada

INSTITUTION

Fishery Research Lab. of the
Newfoundland Fishery Re-
search Commission

Bingham Oceanographic Founda-
tion

Dept. of Terrestrial Magnetism,
Carnegie Inst, of Washington

Coast & Geodetic Survey

U. S. Coast Guard
Bureau of Fisheries
Hydrographic Office, U. S. Navy
U. S. National Museum

Johnson-Smithsonian Deep-Sea

Expedition
Marine Division, U. S. Weather

Bureau
Tortugas Laboratory
Univ. of Maine Laboratory
Mt. Desert Island Biological

Laboratory
Chesapeake Biological Lab.

Dept. of Oceanography, Museum
of Comparative Zoology

North Atlantic Fishery Investi-
gations, U. S. Bureau of
Fisheries

Woods Hole Oceanographic Insti-
tution

Isles of Shoals Marine Zoological
Station

Dept. of Tropical Research, New
York Zoological Society

U. S. Fisheries Biological Labora
tory

Marine Biological Laboratory
of R. I. State College

Servicio Hidrografico

Divisi6n de Pesca

Directoria de Navegagao Etats-
Unis du Bresil

Servigo de Caga e Pesca

Instituto de Pesca

Servicio Hidrografico de la
Marina

Pacific Biological Station

Pacific Fisheries Experimental
Station

LOCATION

Bay Bulls

New Haven,

Conn.
Washington,

D. C.
Washington,

D. C.
Dry Tortugas
Lamoine, Maine
Mt. Desert Is.,

Maine
Solomons Island,

Maryland
Cambridge, Mass

Cambridge, Mass

Woods Hole,

Mass.
Isles of Shoals,

New Hampshire
New York, N. Y.

Beaufort, N. C.

Ft. Kearney,

R. I.
Buenos Aires
Buenos Aires
Rio de Janeiro

Rio de Janeiro

Montevideo

Nanairao, B. C.
Prince Rupert,
B. C.

X
X

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Continued

COUNTRY

INSTITUTION

LOCATION

o
o
.J
o
s
2

Ed »
Ck Q

i
»

< a
" o

>•
o

o
s

« o
a <

>•

o
o

o
n

X
X
X
X
X

Ha
o

Tlnit.pH States

KerckhofF Marine Laboratory

Pomona College Marine Labora-
tory

Scripps Institution of Ocean-
ography

Marine Biological Station, Univ.
of Southern Calif.

Hopkins Marine Station of Stan-
ford University

California State Fisheries
Laboratory

Coos Bay Marine Station

U. S. Fisheries Biological Station

Washington State Dept. of
Fisheries, Div. of Biological
Research

Biological Dept., Dept. of Game,
State of Washington

Oceanographic Laboratories,
University of Washington

Marine Biological Laboratory

Servicio Meteorol6gico
Departamento de Navegacion
Servicio Hidrografico de la

Armada
Servicio Hidrografico y Faros
Escuela Naval
Compafiia Administradora del

Guano
Servicio Meteorologico
Low Island Queensland
Australian Hydrographie Service
Marine Meteorological Section,

Commonwealth Meteorological

Bureau
Fishery Department
Marine Laboratory of the Uni-
versity of Sydney
Summer Survey of the Marine

Biological Association of China
Hj'drographic Department of the

Chinese Navy
Tinghai Marine Station
Tsingtao Aquarium

Dept. (if Oceanography Tsingtao

Observatory
Institut Oceanographique de

I'lndochine
Royal Observatory

Corona del Mar,

Calif.
Laguna Beach,

Calif.
La Jolla, Calif.

Los Angeles,

Calif.
Pacific Grove,

Calif.
Terminal Island,

Calif.
Coos Bay, Ore.
Seattle, Wash.
Seattle, Wash.

Seattle, Wash.

Honolulu, Ha-
waiian Islands
Santiago
Valparaiso
Guayaquil

Callao
La Punta
Lima

Lima

Low Island
Melbourne
Melbourne

Sydney
Sydney

Amoy

Shanghai

Tinghai
Beach Park,

Tsingtao
Observatory Hill,

Tsingtao
Nhatrang, Annara

Kowloon

TTnit.pH Stat.ps

X
X
X

TlnitpH StatpR

X
X

TTnifpH Stqtps

X
X

TTnitpH Stntps

X
X

TInitpH St.at.ps

TTnitpd Stntps

T'nitpH States

Chile

X
X

Peru

X
X

Peru

X
X

China

X
X

China

X
X

French Indo-

X
X

China
Hong Kong

ANALYSIS OF ACTIVITIES OF INSTITUTIONS

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Continued

COUNTRY

INSTITUTION

LOCATION

o
o

a
n

ft. a
a z

H
u

i-
o
o

a
o

a z

K O
K <

(-
o
o

o
m

X
X

Japan

Akkeshi Marine Biological Sta-
tion

Amakusa Marine Biological
Laboratory

Marine Biological Station of
Asamushi

Imperial Marine Observatory

Kominato Marine Biological
Laborator}'

Institute of Physical Ocean-
ography

Misaki Marine Biological Station

Miyako Meteorological Observa-
tory

Inst. Algological Research

Palao Tropical Biol. Station

Seto Marine Biological Labora-
tory

Shimoda Marine Biological Sta-
tion

Mitsui Marine Biological Station

Imperial Fisheries Experimental
Station

Imperial Fisheries Institute

Hydrographic Department of the
Imperial Japanese Navy

Central Meteorological Observa-
tory of Japan

Government Fishery Experi-
mental Station of Chosen

Kominklijk Magnetisch en
Meteotologisch Observator-
ium te Batavia

Laboratorium voor het Onder-
zoek der Zee

Porto Bello Marine Fisheries
Investigation Station

Bureau of Science, P. I.

Coast and Geodetic Survey

Fish & Game Administration

Manila Observatory

Puerto Galera Marine Biological
Lab., Univ. of Philippines

Krom Uthoksat (Hydrographic
Serv., Royal Siamese Navy)

Kamchatka Fisheries Station

Pacific Institute of Fisheries and
Oceanography

Akkeshi Gulf

Tomioka, Ama-
kusa
Asamushi

Kobe
Kominato

Kyoto

Misaki
Miyako

Muroran, Hok-
kaido

Korror Id., Palao
Group

Seto-Kanayama

Shimoda, Kana-
zawa Prefecture

Susaki, near Shi-
moda

Tokyo

Tokyo
Tokyo

Tokyo

Fusan, Korea

Batavia

Dunedin

Manila
Manila

Manila
Manila
Puerto Galera

Bangkok

Petropavlovak
Vladivostok

X
X

Japan
Japan

X
X

Japan

X
X

Japan

X
X
X
X
X

X
X

Japan

X
X

Japan

Japan
Japan
Japan

X
X

Netherlands

East Indies
Netherland

X
X
X

X
X

East In ies
New Zealand

Philippine Is.

Siam

Siberia

X
X

Siberia

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

LIST OF INSTITUTIONS ENGAGED IN OCEANOGRAPHIC WORK AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

— Concluded

CODNTBV

INSTITUTION

LOCATION

>•
o

i
si

Q
H

« t

K <

ft. a
E z

s
n

< o

o O

a
a
a
u
m

K
O

>
<

>*
o
o

2
n

Strts. Settlmts.

Department of Fisheries

Marine Biological Station of the

University of Egypt
Marine Survey Office, British

India
Zoological Survey of India
Ennur Biological Station
Krusadai Biological Station
Madras Aquarium
Madras Fisheries Department
Meterological Department Gov-
ernment of India
West Hill Biological Station

Singapore

Ghardaqa

Bombay

Calcutta

Ennur

Krusadai Island

Madras

Poona

West Hill, Cali-
cut, Malabar
Coast

& Fed. Malay

States
Egypt

India

X
X

India

INTERNATIONAL INSTITUTIONS

Association Internationale d'Oceanographie
Physique ('37)

History or origin: Successor to the Section d'Oceano-
graphie of the International Union of Geodesy
and Geophysics. This Union was founded in
1919 and had for one of its original constituents
the "Section d'Oceanographie Physique." The
first General Assembly of the Section was held
at Paris in 1921 and its scientific scope was
summarized as follows:

"Morphology of the sea bottom,
Morphology of the surface of the oceans and seas,
Movements of water masses, and
Physical and chemical studies of sea water."

A General Assembly of the Section was held at
Rome in 1922 on the occasion of the first General
Assembly of the Union. At this Assembly it was
decided to invite the cooperation of biologists and
the Section was subsequently styled "Section
d'Oceanographie."

A General Assembly of the Union was held at
Stockholm in 1930, the last under the original
Statutes. New statutes of the Union were drawn
up and the Sections were replaced by Associations.
It was decided that the "Section d'Oceanographie"
should be replaced by the "Association d'Oceano-
graphie Physique," and at the General Assembly
at Lisbon in 1933, statutes of the Association
were drawn n\).

Location: No permanent headquarters.

Organization to which attached: Union Geod6sique et
Geophysique Internationale.

Purposes: (1) To promote the study of problems
which concern physical oceanography.

(2) To stimulate and coordinate those researches
that need the cooperation of several countries
and to assure their scientific discussion as well
as their publication.

(3) To assist special researches, such as a com-
parison of instruments used in different countries.

Scope of activities: The section of oceanography in
which mathematics, physics, and chemistry are
utilized for the scientific study of the sea.

Equipment: None.

Staff: Officers and Executive Committee for the
period commencing December 24, 1936.

President, Professor B. Helland-Hansen, Det

Geofysiske Institutt, Bergen, Norway.
Vice President, Monsieur E. Fichot, 47 Avenue

de Neuilly, Neuilly dur Seine.
General Secretary, Professor J. Proudman,

The University, Liverpool, 3.
Members of the E.xecutive Committee, to
retire in 1939: Mr. D. J. Matthews, Professor
T. G. Thompson, Professor R. Witting.
Members of the Executive Committee, to
retire in 1942: Professor M. Knudsen, Dr. T.
Okada, Dr. A. Ramalho, Dr. P. M. van Riel.
Provisions for visiting investigators: None.
Income: Sources: Subscriptions from adhering coun-
tries received through the Union Geodesique et
Geophysique Internationale.
Amount: Variable.
Provision for publication of i-esults: Two series of
special publications: "Publications Scientifiques,"
and "Proces-Verbaux."

Commission Internationale pour I'Exploration
Scientifique de la Mer Mediterranee (37)

History or origin: The organization' meeting of this
Commission was held in Madrid on November 17
to 20, 1919, at the invitation of the Spanish
Government. The King of Spain presided at the
first meeting of the conference. The subsequent
meetings were presided over by His Serene
Highness, the Prince of Monaco. The following
governments were represented by delegates:
Egypt, Spain, France, Greece, Italy, Monaco,
Tunis, and Turkey.

Location: The Commission meets at different places
as determined by the Central Bureau.

Independent organization composed of delegates of

' Commission internationale pour I'Exploration scien-
tifique de la Mer Mediterranee Conference de Madrid, Bull.
Comm. internat. I'Explor. sci. Mer Mediterranee, no. 1,
pp. 1-24, January 15, 1920.

Commission internationale pour I'Exploration scien-
tifique de la Mer Mediterranee, Bull. Comm. internat.
I'Explor. sci. Mer Mediterranee, no. 2, pp. 1-23, February
29, 1920.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

the different contracting states and administered
by a Central Bureau appointed for a period of
five years. The Commission meets every two
years and fixes the place and date of the following
meeting. The Central Bureau is composed of a
president, a secretary-general, one member repre-
senting each adhering state, and associate secre-
taries, who are the secretaries of the different
national commissions of the adhering states.

Purpose: The purpose is to afford means for achiev-
mg coordinated investigations of the oceanog-
raphy and the fisheries of those countries whose
shores border the Mediterranean Sea.

Scope of activities: Each country that adheres to the
Commission has its own national commission,
the secretary of which must keep the Secretary-
General, and through him the Central Bureau,
informed of the activities of the country of whose
national commission he is a member.

Besides the national commissions, there are
special committees on hydrologic and biologic
subjects.

Under hydrology, five sub-committees were
originally designated: (1) tides, (2) currents, (3)
chemistry of sea water and the properties of
normal water, (4) marine meteorology, (5) meth-
ods and instruments to be used in the collection
of marine organisms. There are also instructions
for the operations to be conducted at different
oceanographic stations and the instruments to
be used.

The biological work is divided into general
biology and applied biology. Special instructions
are given for cruises, the making of biological
observations, particularly with reference to fishes
of economic value, and for the distribution of
material to specialists on different biological
groups.

Under work at the different laboratories, each
laboratory is instructed to prepare a bathymetric

chart, on a scale of _. „_„, and a lithologic chart
5U,0UU

of the sea bottom of the region in which it is
situated. Each laboratory will also make hydro-
logic studies and biologic studies, especially of the
useful animals and plants. The operations on
cruises for biologic purposes are to be made
according to a program decided upon by the
Commission.

At the meeting of the Commission in Bucarest
(Roumania), in September, 1935, the reporters
appointed for different subjects were as follows:

Oceanographic physique et hydrologie marine,
M. G. Belloc and R. de Buen.

Chimie gfe^rale, M. Picotti.

Methodes acoustiques, P. Marti.

Chimie marine et industrielle, M. Boury.

G4ophysique, G. Galbis.

Marees et niveau moyen, F. Vercelh.

Biologic gfeerale, U. d'.lncona.

Plancton, R. Issel.

Biologic industrielle des delphinides, G. Brunelli.

Thon rouge et sa peche, H. Heldt.

Clupeides et leur peche, F. de Buen.

Crustaces (Biologic), Mme. H. Heldt.

Sponges et coraux, MM. M. Sella.

Botaniques (plantes marines), J. Politis.

Protistologie, J. Georgevitch.

Statistique des p^ches, D. Remy.

Faunistique des iles de la Mediterran^e occi-
dentale, L. Germain.

Etudes generales sur la Mediterran^e orientale,
G. Antipa.

Relations entre la Mediterranee et la mer Rouge,
H. Faouzi.

Geologic sous-marine, G. Georgalas.

Hygiene et salubrite des coquillages, M. Teis-
sonniere.
Equipment: The equipment, shore laboratories and

vessels, belongs to the different adhering counrties.
Officers of the Central Bureau:

President, Admiral Thaon di Revel.

Vice-Presidents, Professor Odon de Buen, Pro-
fessor G. Antipa.

Secretary-General, Dr. Edouard le Danois.

Honorary President, Professor Vito Volterra.

Honorary Secretary-General, Dr. J. Richard.

One member representing each adhering state,
Cyprus, Egypt, Spain, France, Greece, Monaco,
Zone espagnole du Protectorat du Maroc,
Palestine, Roumanie, Tunisie, Turkey, and
Yugoslavia.

Associate secretaries, one from each country.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Visitors can be

accommodated at the shore laboratories, and they

may at times participate in cruises.
Income: Each adhering state pays annually a sum

of at least 5,000 francs.
Provision for the publication of results: Ten numbers

of the Bulletin of the Commission were published

in Monaco between January 15, 1920, and De-
cember, 1924. The format of the regular publi-
cation of the Commission was changed beginning

with the meeting of the Central Bureau, in Paris

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INTERNATIONAL

in February, 1925. In addition to the Bulletins
the results of the different national commissions
are to be published, according to rules established
by the Central Bureau, by the countries adhering
to the Commission. The publications may be in
English, Spanish, French, Greek, or Italian.

The preparation and publication of bathymetric
charts and of the lithologic charts of the sea
bottom have already been mentioned. The
combination of the different partial charts into a
complete chart for the Mediterranean has been
considered. It was also ■ proposed to undertake
the publication of separate photographs of an
atlas to illustrate the fauna and flora of the
Mediterranean, of which twenty jiarts had been
issued prior to December, 1934, and to publish
a manual of oceanography and an encyclopedia
of physical oceanography.

The Italian Delegation of the International
Commission for the Scientific Exploration of the
Mediterranean Sea has published since 1908
Bibliographia Oceanographica, and it also pub-
lished Monografia della Laguna Venezia and
Manualetti di Oceanografia.

Consejo Oceanografico Ibero-Americano ('34)

History or origin: The Consejo Oceanogrdfico Ibero-
Americano was organized in Madrid on March 1,
1929, by diplomatic agreement signed by repre-
sentatives of the Argentine, Costa Rican, Ecua-
dorian, Salvadorian, Spanish, Guatemalan, Mexi-
can, Panamanan, Peruvian, Dominican, and
Uruguayan republics. The member countries, in
September, 1932, were Argentina, Costa Rica,
Ecuador, Salvador, Spain, Guatemala, Mexico,
Panama, Peru, Republica Dominicana, and Uru-
guay. The organization was originally intended
to be composed of tho.se countries in the Iberian
Peninsula and America in which the language
was either Spanish or Portuguese. The duration
of the Council was to be for a term of eight years,
which could be automatically renewed. The
Council is expected to meet every three years.
Subsequent to the organization meeting it has
been proposed to admit to membership in the
Council other American and European countries
that have pcssessions in iVmerica. The extended
membership would include the United States of
America, Canada, Newfoundland, France, Eng-
land, Holland, and Denmark. The.se countries
have accordingly been invited to send delegates
to the next meeting of the Council which was to

have taken place in Madrid in June, 1933, but
because of adverse circumstances, the meeting
was postponed until April, 1935.

Location: Madrid.

Organization to which attached: Independent organi-
zation supported by the participating govern-
ments.

Purposes and scope of activities: To promote, coordi-
nate, and standardize oceanographic, fisheries,
hydrographic, and limnologic investigations within
those countries that belong to the Council. In
order to accomplish this purpose, each member
state will form a national committee. The
different national committees may act either alone
or in connection with other national committees.
They may submit to the Council for consideration
and discussion any pertinent question. The
Council will also publish the results of scientific
works which are of interest to the member states
and it will accumulate a library, including charts,
on various oceanographic, fisheries, hydrographic,
and limnologic subjects. The Council will also
serve as a medium for exchanging information
between the different member countries and
between the institutions in countries that do not
adhere to it.

Equipment: Administrative offices and a library.

Staff: Executive Committee, Prof. Odon de Buen,
President; Admiral Ernesto Caballero y Lastres,
Vice-President; Prof. Rafael de Buen, Secretary-
General.

Provisions for visiting investigators.

Income: Source: Contributions from the different
adhering countries.

Amount: There is an assessment unit of 300
pesos gold, which can be changed by the Finance
Committee of the Conference according to cir-
cumstances.

The annual contribution of each country and
the number of votes is as follows:

NUMBER
NUMBER OF

POPULATION OF THE COUNTRY OF ASSESSMENT

VOTES UNITS

TO BE CON-
TRIBUTED

Less than one million inhabitants 1 2

Between one million and three million.. . 2 2

Between three and five million 3 3

Between five and ten million 4 5

Between ten and fifteen million 5 7

Between fifteen and twenty million 6 10

More than twenty million 7 13

Provisions for the publication of results: "Memorias,"
of which Nos. 1-16, 1930-1934 have been issued.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

"Revista," of which vols. 1
have been published.

-6, 1930-May, 1935

Conseil Permanent International pour I'Exploration
de la Mer ('37)

History or origin:- The first International Con-
ference on the exploration of the sea took place in
Stockholm on the 15th of June, 1899, in response
to an invitation from His Majesty, King Oscar II
of Sweden. This invitation was extended by the
Swedish Ministry of Foreign Affairs to the govern-
ments of Germany, Denmark, Great Britain, and
Ireland, as well as to the Norwegian, Netherlands,
and Russian governments, and transmitted a
program indicating the purpose of the Conference,
which was to undertake in the interests of fisher-
ies, the exploration of the Arctic Ocean, the North
Sea, and the Baltic by means of international
endeavor. Translations of extracts from the
program proposed by His Majesty, Iving Oscar,
to the Conference are as follows:

"Periodic and simultaneous scientific observations,
four times a year, on the salinity of sea water, its tem-
perature, its content of different gases, the quality and
quantity of the plankton at places indicated by previous
researches as being the most important.

"1. The system of currents of the North Atlantic and
the changes which take place there during the different
seasons, for upon them depends the variation in the
plankton, or the food of fishes which is suspended in
the water, as well as the appearance and disappearance
of migrant fishes, in the above mentioned marine areas;
"2. The temperature of, and the quantity of heat
which is found in the water layers at different seasons
and on which depend the climate and the weather in the
countries bordering the North Sea as well as in all of
northern Europe, especially in the winter and in the
spring.

In order to answer these questions the Conference
should be charged:

a. To organize a complete network of observations
and to divide them according to territory to be studied
between the contracting parties according to the prin-
ciple that each country should make scientific re-
searches in that part of the sea which is nearest its
own coast;

* The account here given of the establishment of the
International Council for the Exploration of the Sea is
based upon an article entitled "La fondation du Conseil
International pour I'Exploration de la Mer par les Con-
ferences de Stockholm (1899), de Christiana (1901), et de
Copenhague (1902)," in Rapport Jubilaire (1902-1927):
Cons. Perm, internat. pour I'Explor. de la Mer, Rap. et
Proc.-Verb. des Reun., vol. 47, pt. I, pp. 3-29, 1928. A
number of the passages in this article have been translated
into English, other parts are briefly summarized or merely
mentioned.

b. To fix the periods of the simultaneous observa-
tions that are to be made;

c. To determine the methods to be used in making
soundings on board ships and in the analytical work in
laboratories. It will be necessary, for example, to
take measures to ascertain the exact relations between
the salinity of the waters of the sea, its specific gravity,
and its temperature, and to ascertain the best methods
for determining these constants, as well as to test
methods for the qualitative and quantitative estima-
tion of plankton (under which is included the floating
eggs and the larvae of fishes) ;

d. To indicate the general bases for the coordination
of the results obtained and their publication.

"1. By means of fishery experiments, undertaken at
the same time as the scientific investigations on the
hydrographic and biological features, under the direction
of qualified scientific specialists on board ships equipped
for this purpose. As examples of this kind, there may be
cited the investigations of Hensen and of Apstein in the
North Sea in 1895 and those of the Fishery Board along
the coast of Scotland during several summers, and of
the Danish Biological Station in the Cattegat.

"2. By sending aboard ordinary fishing vessels (trawl-
ers, drifters, and vessels engaged in the capture of whales
and seals) assistants, who simultaneously with fishing,
would make hydrographic and biological observations
on the food content for fishes of the water and of the sea
bottom, as well as on the eggs and larvae, and they would
observe the quantity, the size and the stage of develop-
ment of the fish taken on the fishing grounds with dif-
ferent gear.

Ill

"1. An agreement between different maritime stations
of the North Sea for the division of work and the study of
certain questions important for the fisheries. For
example,

a. The conditions of existence of oj'sters and lobsters,

their propagation and growth;

b. The racial characters, morphologic and physiologic

of the edible fishes, such as the herring, plaice,

cod, mackerel, et cetera.
The Conference should endeavor to organize the
scientific work in common and to make a division of the
work between all those stations, which today work in
isolation, and to give them every possible support by
international cooperation."

At the first Conference, which was opened on
the 15th of June, 1899, the following countries
were represented: Germany, Denmark, Great
Britain and Ireland, Norway, the Netherlands,
Russia, and Sweden. The following is a transla-
tion of the resolutions which were unanimously
adopted :

"Considering that a rational exploitation of the sea
should be based in so far as possible on scientific research,

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INTERNATIONAL

and considering that international cooperation is the best
means for obtaining satisfactory results in this direction,
especially if during the investigations it is kept in view
that their principal end is the promotion and improve-
ment of fisheries by the aid of international agreement,
this international assembly has resolved to recommend
to the states in question the following plan of research
which should be put into execution for a period of at
least five years.

"After each delegate had communicated the instruc-
tions received from his government the work was divided
into sections of which the first (A) should elaborate the
program of hydrographic work and the second (B) that
of the biological work. At last a common program was
prepared for the organization and the administration
of the international cooperation."

Program for the hydrographic and biological work
on the northern areas of the Atlantic Ocean,
in the North Sea, the Baltic, and adjacent seas:

The principal line.s of this program inckided:

The establi.shment of an International Council
for the Exploration of the Sea, composed of two
delegates from each country who were to elect a
president, vice-president, a secretary-general,
and substitutes, and establish the statutes and
the order of work of the institution ;

Statistics on fisheries which woud be prepared
for the participating countries according to
principles adopted in common;

The establishment of a central laboratory for
physical and chemical researches which are related
to the exploration of the sea;

The synoptic study of the sea during all seasons
by means of periodic voyages within the areas
to be investigated.

These general resolutions are followed by three
sections, (A) Hydrographic work, (B) Biological
work, (C) Organization of the central bureau.

A. Hydrographic work

"The hydrographic researches should have for their
object: The distinction between the different layers of
water according to their geographical distribution, their
depth, their temperature, their salinity, their content of
gas, plankton, currents, in order to ascertain the funda-
mental principles not only for the determination of the
external environment of the useful marine animals, but
also for meteorological predictions for extended periods
in the interest of agriculture.

"As the hydrographic conditions are subject to sea-
sonal changes and as these influence seriously the dis-
tribution and the condition of life of useful marine
animals and the condition of the weather and other

meteorological conditions in general, it is desirable that
the observations be made in so far as possible simul-
taneously during the four typical months, February,
May, August, and November, at certain definite points
along the same determined lines."

Following the two foregoing paragraphs there
are eight other paragraphs giving instructions
regarding the hydrographic work. These are on
pages 12 to 15 of the article here cited. They
give an interesting account of the details of the
plan for the hydrographic work but it is scarcely
necessary to translate them for this statement.

B. Biological work
I

"(a) Determination of the geographic and bathymetric
distribution of the eggs and larvae of commercially
valuable marine fishes, for example, according to such
quantitative methods as those of Hensen, and with spe-
cial references to the most important fishes, as plaice,
cod and haddock, herring, etc.

"(b) Continuous investigation of the life history and
the conditions of life of young fishes of economic species
in the post larval stages and up to maturity, paying
particular attention to their local distribution.

"(c) Systematic observations of marketable fishes in
the mature state with reference to local varieties and
migrations, their conditions of life, food (for example
by examining stomach contents), and their natural
enemies, that is to say observations on the presence and
nature of the food of fishes on the bottom of the sea,
on the surface, and in the intermediate waters to a
depth of at least 600 meters.

"(d) Determination of the periodic variations in the
presence, abundance, and mean size of useful fishes,
and their causes.

"(a) Experimental fishing on known fishing grounds
during the time of fishing as well as outside those areas
and at other times.

"(b) Preparation of uniform statistics of the result of
these catches, indicating in detail the number of species,
the size and weight, and the condition of the fish: for
example, as the 'Scottish Fishery Board' has done on
board the Garland.

"(c) The uniform use of gear appropriate to the experi-
mental capture of fishes of different species and different
sizes.

"(d) The experimental marking and liberation of fish,
for example, of the plaice in as large quantities as possible
and in extensive areas, as has been done, for example,
by Dr. C. G. Joh. Petersen and Dr. T. W. Fulton (Re-
ports of the biological station of Denmark and the
'Scottish Fishery Board'), and others.

Ill

"(a) It is desirable to collect uniform statistics on the
number, the weight, and the value of the fish caught, on

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

the means employed for the fishery, and on the people
engaged in it, as for example, in the General reports of
the 'Scottish Fishery Board.'

"(b) It is necessary to collect material for the prepara-
tion of charts indicating the fishing grounds and the kind
of fishery which is prosecuted there."

From the account which has been given of the
e.stablishment of the International Council for the
Exploration of the Sea, it is obvious that the
Council was founded to aid the fishery industry
in the northeast Atlantic and its connecting
waters.

Location: Copenhagen was selected as the seat of the
Central Office of the Council, which in 1936 was
transferred to Charlottenlund Slot, eight kilo-
meters north of the center of Copenhagen.

Organization and scope of activities: The present
organization of the International Council may be
taken from the account of the recent reunion in
Copenhagen in June, 1936. There is at the top
the Bureau of the Council, which at present is
composed of five members and of which Mr. H. G.
Maurice is the president. Besides the Bureau
there are members of the Council and experts.
Each of the following countries has two members,
of the Council and as many experts as it may
desire: Germany, Belgium, Denmark, Spain,
Finland, France, Great Britain, Irish Free State,
Latvia, Norway, the Netherlands, Poland, Portu-
gal, and Sweden. Under the Council there are
seventeen committees as follows:

Consultative Committee, composed of sixteen members,
of which Professor J. Hjort is chairman.

North Western Area Committee, composed of six mem-
bers, of which Dr. A. Vedel Tuning is chairman.

North Eastern Area Committee, composed of nine mem-
bers, of which Professor J. Hjort is chairman.

Atlantic Slope Committee, composed of ten members,
of which Dr. Edouard le Danois is the chairman.

Atlantic Committee, composed of members of the At-
lantic Slope Committee and of the North Western Area
Committee, of which Dr. Edouard le Danois is chair-
man.

Combined North Sea and Eastern Channel Committee,
of which Professor G. Gilson is the chairman.

Northern North Sea Committee, composed of eight
members, of which Dr. R. S. Clark is the chairman.

Southern North Sea Committee, composed of nine mem-
bers, of which Dr. A. Biickmann is chairman.

Transition Area Committee, composed of five members,
of which Dr. H. Blegvad is chairman.

Baltic Area Committee, composed of seven members,
of which Dr. K. A. Andersson is chairman.

Hydrographic Committee, composed of twenty-five
members, of which Professor Martin Knudsen is
chairman.

Plankton Committee, composed of twenty members, of

which Professor H. H. Gran is chairman.
Statistical Committee, composed of fifteen members, of

which Sir D'Arcy W. Thompson is chairman.
Salmon and Trout Committee, composed of thirteen

members, of which Professor M. Siedlecki is chairman.
Whaling Committee, composed of eight members, of

which Professor J. Hjort is chairman.
Editorial Committee, composed of ten members of which

Professor O. Pettersson is chairman.
Finance Committee, composed of six members, of which

the President of the Bureau of the Council is chairman.

The various committees consider investigations
which logically fall within the scope of their
activities and make recommendations to the
Council. As a result of the consideration given
various problems, it is possible to decide upon
specific programs which may be carried out by
those especially concerned. As the members of
the Council have official connections, they are
able to direct the efforts of the organization with
which they are connected to the end that the
decisions of the officials of the Council may be
made effective. The reports of the committees
are published in the series "Rapports et Proems
Verbaux des Reunions."

The headquarters of the Council are situated
in the Charlottenlund Castle, Denmark where
the International Council's office work is managed
by an Administrative Secretary, Captain W.
Nellemose, who is assisted by a Hydrographer,
Dr. J. P. Jacobsen, and a permanent staff of 8
assistants.

Income: The funds for the operation of the Council
are derived from contributions from the govern-
ments that adhere to it. The estimate of these
contributions for the year 1936-1937 is 155,000
Danish Kroner.

Provisions for -publication: The International Council
issues several series of reports, as follows:

Les Rapports et Proces Verbaux, of which one hundred
and one volume have been issued, to date,

Les Bulletins hydrographiques, of which volumes have
been issued yearly from 1908 to 1936 inclusive,

Les Bulletins Statistiques, of which twenty-four volumes
have been issued to date,

Le Journal du Conseil, of which eleven volumes have
been issued to date, and

Les Publications de Circonstance which have been dis-
continued.

La Faune Ichthyologique, of which sixteen covers with
24 sheets each have been issued (two or three further
covers to finish this publication).

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INTERNATIONAL

Concluding remarks: Although the International
Council was established primarily for the purpose
of aiding the fisheries industry, many researches
of significance to general oceanography have been
prosecuted under its auspices. The Jubilee
report for the meeting in 1927, twenty-five years
after the establishment of the Council, contains a
number of articles on what had been accomplished
in the different countries. Besides the work on
fishes, this report contains accounts of investiga-
tion.s in dynamical and chemical oceanography
and a variety of biological investigations such
as a paper on micro-biology by F. Liebert of the
Netherlands, plankton investigations by C. H.
Ostenfeld, and the conditions of life for plankton
in the coastal waters of northern Europe by H. H.
Gran.

As a further indication of the kind of investiga-
tions cultivated under the auspices of the Inter-
national Council, the report of the proceedings
of a special meeting on "General marine physiol-
ogy, conditions of growth of phytoplankton,"
held on March 27, 1931, at Copenhagen, may be
cited. Besides the preface by Dr. John Hjort,
this number of the Rapports et Proces ^'erbaux
des Reunions, volume 75, contains the following
articles :

"Dissolved substances as food of aquatic organisms,"

by August Krogh,
"On the conditions for the production of plankton in the

sea," by H. H. Gran,
"Biochemical and biological investigations of the varia-
tions in the productivity of the west Norwegian oyster

pools," by T. Gaarder and R. Spiirck,
"Eine biologisch chemische Studie in Hafenwasser von

Helsingfors," by Kurt Buch,
"Beziehungen zwischen Kalkgehalt des Meerwassers und

Plankton," by H. Wattenberg, and
"On the rate of photosynthesis by diatoms," by H. W.

Harvey.

Two of the more recent volumes of the Rapports
et Proces-Verbau.x des Reunions will be men-
tioned. One is Volume 95, March 1936, the
contents of which are as follows:

A review of some aspects of Zooplankton research,
by F. S. Russell, Plymouth.

Further investigations upon the photosynthesis of
phytoplankton bj- constant illumination, by H. Hoglund
and S. Landberg, Born0.

The continuous plankton recorder: a new method of
survey, by A. C. Hardy, Hull.

Die Ergebnisse der internationalen hydrographischen
Beobachtungen im Kattegat im August 1931, by B.
Schulz, Hamburg.

The second part of voume 101, July 1936, is
devoted to a series of papers entitled "The
measurement of submarine light and its relation
to biological phenomena." This mmiber contains
six articles, two by biologists and four by
physicists.

International Committee on the Oceanography
of the Pacific ('37)

History or origin:^ At the final general meeting
of the Second Pan-Pacfic Science Congress held
in Sydney, Australia, in September, 1923, an
International Committee was established to
collect data on the temperatures, chemical fea-
tures, and currents of the Pacific Ocean, the
committee to be composed of at least one repre-
sentative of each country represented at the
Third Pan-Pacific Congress and in which investi-
gations of the kind indicated were being actively
prosecuted.

At the Third Pan-Pacific Science Congress,
it was decided to discharge the Committee on
the Physical and Chemical Oceanography of the
Pacific and to replace it by a Committee on the
Oceanograph}' of the Pacific which would be more
broadly representative of the science. Accord-
ingly the following four resolutions were adopted :

RESOLVED:

I. That the President or Administrative Council of the
Pacific Science Association appoint the Chairman of the
Committee on Oceanography of the Pacific and that
the appropriate scientific body in each country repre-
sented in the As.sociation appoint for the International
Committee a member who shall be the Chairman of a
National Committee for his country.

II. That at least three subcommittees be formed on
(a) Physical and Chemical Oceanography; (b) Funda-
mental Marine Biology; (c) Fisheries Technology.

III. That the closest possible relations be cultivated
between the different National Committees and between
the members of the special Subcommittees for the dif-
ferent countries; that they submit their respective
programs one to another, seek suggestions and advice
regarding the different features of their work, and

2 Committee on the Chemical and Physical Oceanography
of the Pacific, report of the Chairman, T. Wayland Vaughan.
Third Pan.-Pac. Sci. Cong., Tokyo, 1926, Proc, vol. 1,
pp. 141-167, 1929. (Preprint, 1927.)

Reports of the International Committee on the
Oceanography and the Coral Reefs of the Pacific, T. Way-
land Vaughan, Chairman. Fourth Pac. Sci. Cong., Java,
1929, Proc, vol. 1, pt. 2, pp. 1-136, 1930.

International Committee on the Oceanography of the
Pacific, Report of the Chairman, T. Wayland Vaughan.
Fifth Pac. Sci. Cong., Canada, 1933, Prof., App. 1, pp.
245-384, 1934.

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

endeavor to bring about the greatest degree of standardi-
zation and coordination; and that the proceedings of the
different National Committees and Subcommittees be
reported to the International Chairman, who shall sub-
mit a general report to the Pacific Science Association.
IV. That the work of the Committee be conducted with
the intent of establishing for the Pacific an institution
similar to the North Atlantic International Council for
the Exploration of the Sea.

Location: The Committee has no permanent central
office. The chairman is appointed at the end of
each Pacific Science Congress and serves until his
successor is designated. The Committee meets
in connection with the Pacific Science Congresses.
Organization to u'hich attached: Pacific Science Asso-
ciation, of which it is a standing Committee.
Purposes: To stimulate oceanographic research in
the Pacific, to enable the different countries whose
shores border the Pacific or which have possessions
in the Pacific to coordinate their researches, and
to standardize the methods and appliances used
in oceanographic research.
Scope of activities: Each national committee was em-
powered by the Fifth Pacific Science Congress
to establish five subcommittees as follows:
physical and chemical oceanography, marine
biology, corals and coral reefs, fisheries, and
fishery technologJ^
Equipment: None.

Staff: The composition of the International Com-
mittee on the Oceanography of the Pacific in
February, 1936, was as follows:
Australia, Mr. E. C. Andrews, formerly Govern-
ment Geologist, New South Wales, Sydney,
Australia.
Canada, Prof. C. McLean Eraser, University of

British Columbia, Vancouver, B. C.
China, Mr. P. Z. Tsiang, Tsingtao Observatory,

Tsingtao.
France.

French Indo-China, Dr. P. Chevey, active direc-
tor, Institut Oc^anographique de I'lndochine.
Great Britain, Sir Gerald Lenox-Conyngham,

Cambridge University.
Japan, Prof. H. Yabe, Tohoku Imperial Univer-
sity, Sendai.
Netherlands, Prof. Dr. E. van Everdingen, Jr.,
Director, Netherlands Meteorological Institute,
De Bilt, Netherlands.
Netherlands East Indies, Prof. Dr. J. Boerema,
Director, Royal Magnetic and Meteorological
Observatory, Batavia.

New Zealand, Dr. Patrick Marshall, New Zea-
land Institute, Wellington.

Philippine Islands, Dr. Manuel L. Roxas, Chair-
man, Committee Physical-chemical Oceanog-
raphy, National Research Council, University
of the Philippines, Manila.

Union of the Soviet Socialist Republics, Prof.
J. M. Schokalsky, Academy of Science, Lenin-
grad.

United States of America, Prof. T. G. Thompson,
Director, Oceanographic Laboratories, Univer-
sity of Washington, Seattle, Washington, Chair-
man.
Provisions for visiting investigators: None.
Income: No special funds are allotted.
Provisions for publication: The reports on the work

of the Committee are published in the Proceedings

of the different Pacific Science Congresses.

International Fisheries Commission ('37)

History or origin: Established by a treaty ratified
on October 21, 1924, between Canada and the
United States for preservation of the halibut
fishery of the northern Pacific Ocean including
the Bering Sea.

The treaty provided for an entire cessation of
halibut fishing for three months of each year and
for the appointment of an International Fisheries
Commission, to consist of two commissioners
from each country. The duties of the Commis-
sion were to make a thorough investigation into
the life history of the halibut, to report the
results of the same to the two governments, and
to make recommendations regarding any desirable
changes in the closed season and as to other
regulation of the fishery for its preservation and
development.

As a result of its biological and statistical
studies of the species and its fishery, the Com-
mission became con\'inced that the stocks of
halibut could not stand the intensity of fishing
to which they were being subjected, and that
additional regulation was necessary for the
preservation of the fishery.

Early in 1928, the Commission reported its
findings to the two governments and recom-
mended: the limitation of the catch in the dif-
ferent sections of the coast, according to their
indi\adual needs and the annual reduction of the
limits until the declme which was taking place
in each section should cease; the extension of the
closed season with provision for its adjustment

CATALOGUIO OF INSTITUTIONS— INTERNATIONAL

should this prove advisable; the prohibition of
fishing gear deemed unduly destructive of small
unmarketable fish; the licensing of fishing vessels
for purposes of treaty, including the collection of
compulsory statistical returns; and the closure
to halibut fishing of areas, proved to be populated
by small immature haliljut.

A new treaty between the United States and
Canada, for the preservation of the halibut fishery
of the northern Pacific Ocean and Bering Sea,
was ratified on May 9, 1931. In this, power was
given the Commission to make all the proposed
regulations effective.

Location: Offices and laboratories in Fisheries Hall
No. 2, University of Washington, Seattle, Wash-
ington, near the canal connecting Lake Wash-
ington with Puget Sound.

Organization to which attached: International, gov-
ernments of Canada and the United States.

Purposes: Regulation of the halibut fisheries of the
northern Pacific Ocean and Bering Sea to per-
petuate the fisheries.

Scop of activities: Regulation of the fisheries by
limitation of catch. Collection and analysis of
biological statistics of abundance of the halibut
from Bering Sea to California, to determine the
effects of regulation. Investigation of the early
life history, growth, migrations, reproduction,
mortality, etc., as a basis for and a check on
regulation. This involves study of the distribu-
tion aiid abundance of the eggs and larval stages
and their drift vnth the ocean currents, to which
study the Commission devoted a certain amount
of time each year.

Equipment: Laboratory and storage space sufficient
for a staff of fourteen at Fisheries Hall No. 2.
A library which has been recently begun and now
contains approximately 1,000 volumes. This
library is of a higlJy specialized nature, concerning
itself mainly with fisheries literature pertinent to
the various phases of the investigations of the
Commission, since the nearby University of
Washington library is well equipi)ed for general
fishery work. Wlaenever necessary for field work,
a vessel suitable for operations in the open sea is
chartered.

Stajf: Commissioners: Chairman, George J. Alexan-
der, A. J. AVhitmore, Edward W. Allen, Frank
T. Bell.
Scientists: Director of Investigations, William F.
Thompson; Ass't. Director, age, growth, etc.,
Harry A. Dunlop; Biological statistics, market

mea.surements, etc., F. Howard Bell; Early
life history, abundance and distribution of
eggs and larvae, Richard Van Cleve; Migra-
tions, mortality, etc., John L. Kask.
Others: 2 scientific a.ssistants, 2 clerical assistants,
3 statistical assistants, 1 librarian.
Provision for visiting invcstigatms: There are no

provisions for \asiting investigators.
Income: By annual appropriations. United States
and Canadian. This has varied from .?30,000 to
$60,000 according to the amount of field work
which must be done. Normally between 40 and
50 per cent of the appropriation is for vessel
charter.
Provision for publication of results: Besides progress
reports published by the fisheries .ser\dces of
United States and Canada, the Commission has
published (1) scientific reports of which numbers
1-11 have already been issued, and (2) circulars
with popular digests and statements, of which
numbers 1-4 have been issued.

International Hydrographic Bureau ('37)

History or origin: The International Hydrographic
Bureau was created in 1921 and established its
seat at Monaco. The objects of its work may be
summarized in the words: — "to make navigation
easier and safer in all the seas of the world."

The following 21 maritime states became mem-
bers: Argentine, Belgium, Brazil, British Empire:
Great Britain and Australia, Chile, China, Den-
mark, Egypt, France, Greece, Italy, Japan,
Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Peru, Portugal,
Siam, Spain, Sweden, United States of America.

The Governments of Belgium, Germany, Italy,
Netherlands, and Peru have since withdrawn and
Greece is no longer a member, but Ecuador, Po-
land, and Uruguay have become members and
thus the Bureau is now supported by the govern-
ments of 19 maritime States.

The Principality of Monaco was selected as the
seat of the Bureau largely because of its position
on the sea, its central location, its excellent com-
munications with the rest of the world and also
because of the interest taken by the late Prince
Albert I. of Monaco in all questions connected
\%dth the sea.

The Govermnent of Monaco offered in 1927 to
erect a building specially for the Bureau, vrith.
the sole proviso that the Bureau would remain
therein for not less than 25 years. This very
gracious offer was accepted by the States mem-

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

bers, and in April, 1929, the cornerstone of the
building was laid by Prince Louis, with appro-
priate ceremony, in the presence of the delegates
to the First Supplementary International Hydro-
graphic Conference then in session.

On the 14th of January, 1931, the International
Hydrographic Bureau was installed, with appro-
priate ceremony, in the handsome and convenient
building on the Quai de Plaisance of the harbour
of Monaco, by H. S. H. Prince Louis II. of
Monaco, accompanied by the Hereditary Prin-
cess, the Minister of State, and most of the
officials, both native and foreign, in the Prin-
cipality.

The Bureau is supported by yearly contribu-
tions from the States members, based on each
State's total combined naval and mercantile
tonnage. Each State member has one vote on
technical and administrative questions, but for
the election of the directors and secretary-general
the number of votes allotted to each State is
based on the same tonnage figure as that which
determines its contribution.

The Bureau having been established after the
Treaty of Versailles (the majority of the mem-
bers being members of the League of Nations),
it was necessary, as well as desirable, for the
Bureau to be affiliated with the League, but it is
completely and entirely autonomous.

Under the statutes of the Bureau its work is
conducted by a Directing Committee, chosen by
the vote of the members, consisting of three
Directors elected for a period of five years, and
by a Secretary-General also elected for a term of
five years assisted by a staff of technical and
administrative assistants. The first Directing
Committee and Secretary-General were:
Directing Committee: President, Admiral Sir
John F. Parry, K. C. B. (Great Britain) ; Mem-
bers, Rear-Admiral J. M. Phaff, (Netherlands)
and Captain S. H. Miillcr (Norway).
Secretary-General: Commander G. B. Spicer-
Simson, D. S. O.

Had it not been for the unfortunate death of
Monsieur Renaud, who was a renowned French
hydrographer and who originated the idea of the
creation of the Bureau, he would undoubtedly
have been selected as a member of the first
Directing Committee. The President is the
director who receives the highest number of votes.
A Hydrographic Conference is held at Monaco
every fi^'e years at which all questions connected

with hydrography are discussed and the report of
the work carried out by the Bureau since the
previous conference is considered as also is the
financial statement. At the end of the conference
voting takes place for electing the three Directors
and the Secretary-General for the next five years.

Location: Monte Carlo, Principality of Monaco.

Organization to which attached: International, 19
adhering countries.

Purposes and scope of activities: The statutes pre-
scribe that the principal work to be undertaken
by the Bureau is the following:

The study of documents published by hydrographic

offices;
The drawing up and publication of various lists, such as

of geographical positions, abbreviations and conven-
tional signs used on charts, etc.;
The study of methods of hydrographic surveying;
The study of methods employed for the production of the

results of surveys for publication;
The study of the construction and use of hydrographic

instruments and appliances;
The study of the methods of recruiting and training

personnel for surveying vessels and hydrographic

offices;
The making of researches on any other subjects which

affect hydrography;
Reports on the results of such studies and research,

which appear to be of general interest, are published

in French and English.

In general it may be stated that the Interna-
tional Hydrographic Bureau not only links the
various hydrographic offices of the different
States, but it is a sort of "clearing house" for all
hydrographic information.

The Bureau satisfies, as far as possible, all
requests for information or advice in connection
with hydrography addressed to it by a member,
and gives considered opinions on all questions
dealing with its work which are referred to it by
conferences or by scientific institutions.

Among the most interesting phases of the work
recently undertaken by the Bureau is the collation
and plotting of all deep sea soundings obtained.
This is being done in order to keep the General
Bathymetric Chart of the Oceans up-to-date.

The Bathymetric Chart was originally drawn
up, at the suggestion of the Seventh International
Geographical Congress held at Berlm (Germany)
in 1899, by H. S. H. the Prince of Monaco. The
first edition of the chart was communicated to the
Eighth Congress at New York on September 13,
1904. Before drawing it up, however. Prince
Albert I. had taken the advice of a committee

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INTERNATIONAL

set lip by the Se\'enth Congress to elaborate a
terminology to be employed in describing the
forms of the relief of the ocean bottom. This
committee consisted of Baron von Richthofen,
Chairman, Professors Kriimmel, Pettersson, Su-
pan, Thoulet, Doctors Hugh Robert Mill and
Nansen, and Admiral Makaroff; and it met at
Wiesbaden (Germany) in April, 1903. It was
at this meeting that Prince Albert offered to
draw the chart and meet all the expenses con-
nected therewith. In 1912 a second and up-to-
date edition was commenced, but it was not until
1930 that this was completed. Meanwhile, un-
fortunately. Prince Albert died and, though he
had made provision for the completion of the
second edition, no funds existed to carry on the
valuable work. However, in April, 1929, the
First Supplementary International Hydrographic
Conference decided that this should be done by
the International Hydrographic Bureau.

The use of original charts, instead of reprints
by foreign nations, has long been held advisable,
and one of the purposes of the Bureau is to help
realize this ami. Naturally, this could not be
attempted unless the signs, symbols, and abbrevia-
tions on all charts all over the world were stand-
ardized. This question has been discussed in
detail at all the International Hydrographic
Conferences, and gradually more and more of the
.symbols in common use have been standardized
by the various hydrographic offices. In order to
facilitate this, the Bureau has prepared a synoptic
table showing the various symbols and abbrevia-
tions in use by the different countries. In spite
of the desire of practically all hydrographic
offices to conform to a standard set of signs and
symbols, the realization of this aim still lies in the
distant future owing to the excessive cost of
making changes on existing charts. The be.st
which can be hoped, under these conditions, is
that, with the issue of new charts, the symbols
adopted at the conferences will gradually be sub-
stituted for the old symbols.

The International Hydrographic Bureau has
prepared also a synoptic table showing the signs,
symbols, and abbreviations in use by the various
hydrographic offices which publish charts for
aerial navigation. This table was then turned
over to the International Committee on Aerial
Navigation, where it was made the basis of a
study by the delegates to a conference on aerial
navigation. Fortunately, as but few hydro-

graphic offices had started the publication of
charts for coastal aerial navigation, there is great
hope of early standardization, which will obviate
the confusion which prevailed owing to the multi-
plicity of symbols formerly in use on marine
charts.

From the above it will be seen that the Inter-
national Hydrographic Bureau, although created
with the principal object of coordinating the
work of the hydrographic services of its members
and to establish a close and permanent association
between them, has as its main object the improve-
ment of navigation and thus should appeal to all
tho.se who "go down to the sea in ships."

Equipment: Offices and library, especially a large
collection of charts.

Staff: Directing Committee: President, Vice- Ad-
miral J. D. Nares, D.S.C. (Retired) (Great
Britain) ; Members, Rear-Admiral W. S. Crosley,
U. S. Navy (Retired), Ing^nieur Hydrographe
G^n^ral de r&erve P. de Vanssay de Blavous
(France); Secretary-General, Vacant.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Members may
temporarily attach an official to the Bureau for
study or obtaining information.

Income: 169,600 gold francs (about $56,500) at the

. moment.

Provision for publication of results: The following are
the regular publications of the Bureau:
Annual Report

This contains a general report on the adminis-
tration and work of Bureau.
Special Publications

These publications are issued at irregular inter-
vals and contain information which is likely to be
of more than passing interest. Some of them
contain tables which are of permanent interest.
Hydrographic Review

The first number was issued in March 1923, but
in 1924 and thereafter this publication has been
issued twice annually, in May and November,
except in 1926 when one number only was issued
(in July). Each volume consists of two numbers,
which are themselves fair-sized books, containing
from 200 to 300 pages. The contents are very
varied and include articles by authorities of many
nations, dealing with nearly every aspect of
hydrography and with many allied sciences in so
far as they affect hydrography. It is an organ
for free discussion and exchange of views between
hydrographic surveyors and it contains a bibliog-
raphy of hydrographic publications.

100

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Inlernational Hydrographic Bulletin

This publication has been issued each month
commencing in January, 1928, until January,
1934, since when it has been issued every two
months. It contains information which may be
important but is of ephemeral interest only.
Year Book

This is published annually, commencing in
January, 1928. It gives the titles, addresses, etc.,
of hydrographers, information as to hydrographic
offices, a list of survejang vessels with their
tonnage, etc., for the whole world, so far as such
information has been communicated to the
Bureau, besides other information of interest
to seamen. In addition to the above, the Bureau
has published: —

Reports of Proceedings of the International Hy-
drographic Conferences :

1st Conference, London, 1919.

2nd Conference, Monaco, 1926.

1st Supplementary Conference, Monaco, 1929.

3rd Conference, Monaco, 1932.
The Statutes of the International Hydrographic
Bureau, 1926.

By these means the International Hydrographic
Bureau disseminates information on subjects
pertaining to hydrography and navigation. The
International Hydrographic Bulletin contains
information of immediate interest and importance.
It includes also a list of all recent hydrographic
documents and publications received from the
various hydrographic offices of the world, and
directs attention to matters of urgent importance.
The semi-annual Hydrographic Re\dew, pub-
lished in both French and English, contains
monographs of general interest to hydrographers
and navigators, important articles tran.slated
from foreign publications and descriptions of new
methods and instruments in use in the various
countries. In this manner each hydrographic
office is enabled to keep in touch with the methods
in use and work being done by the other hydro-
graphic offices; this should tend to lead gradually
to an improvement in the methods in use, besides
helping to bring about uniformity in hydrographic
documents and publications.

In general it has been found, at the Interna-
tional Hydrographic Conferences, that all coun-
tries are anxious to bring about that uniformity
in hydrographic documents and publications
which is so greatly to be desired. Possibly the
greatest hindrance to the realization of this

ideal is the ever present question of cost and,
while it may be relatively easy to obtain agree-
ment regarding some questions, in others the cost
of making the changes involved is almost pro-
hibitive.

The International Hydrographic Bureau has
to its credit a long list of accomplishments which
will certainl}'^ do much to make navigation easier
and safer. Amongst these may be noted: the
universal adoption of compass graduation from
0° to 360°, the .standardization of numerous signs
and symbols in use on marine charts, the estab-
lishment of central offices at various ports for the
exhibition of notices to mariners, as well as the
publication of numerous Special Publications on
technical subjects, which include: 4 on echo
sounding, 2 on visibility of lights, 3 on uniformity
of buoyage, 2 on data on uniformity m storm
warning signals, and one on each of the following:

International Low Water.

Data on Wind Force and the Beaufort Scale.

Investigation of Harmonic Constants; prediction of

tides and currents and their description by means of

these constants.
Tide predicting machines.

Data on coastal signals, with proposals for their unifi-
cation.
Data on port signals.
List of life-saving stations.
Ocean currents in relation to oceanography, marine

biology, meteorology, and hydrography.
Summary of data on safety of life at sea.
General list, arranged by oceans, and historical cards of

shoals of doubtful existence and of shoals the positions

of which are doubtful or approximate.
Table of Meridional parts.
Manual of symbols and abbreviations.
Limits of oceans and seas.
Oceanographical positions.
Catalogue of original charts (in two parts).
List of nautical documents issued by hydrographic

offices.
Planisphere.

List of tidal harmonic constants.
Reproduction of Mercator's chart, 1569.
Vocabulary concerning tides.
Vocabulary concerning fog signals.

All publications of the Bureau, including the
Bath>anctric Chart, are on sale to the public.

International Service of Ice Observation and Ice
Patrol in the North Atlantic Ocean ('37)

History or origin: At the International Conference
on the Safety of Life at Sea, which was convened
in London on November 12, 1913, the subject

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INTERNATIONAL

101

of patrolling the ice regions in the vicinity of the
Grand Banks of Newfoundland along the trans-
Atlantic steamship lanes, where in the spring and
early summer icebergs form a menace to naviga-
tion, was thoroughly discussed, and the conven-
tion signed on January 20, 1914, by the repre-
sentatives of the various maritime powers of the
world provided for the inauguration of an inter-
national service of ice observation and ice patrol
in the North Atlantic Ocean. The Government
of the United States was invited to undertake the
management of this service, the expense to be
defrayed by the powers interested in transatlantic
navigation in a fbced proportion, which was
definitely agreed upon, subject to ratification by
the law-making bodies of the governments con-
cerned.

As the convention when ratified would not go
into effect until July 1, 1915, the Government of
Great Britain, on behalf of the several powers
interested, made inquiry on January 31, 1914,
as to whether the United States would be disposed
to undertake at once this international service
under the same mutual conditions and obliga-
tions as provided in the convention. The propo-
sition was favorably considered by the President,
and on February 7, 1914, he directed that the
Coast Guard begin as early as possible in that
month the international service of ice observation
and ice patrol. Each year since then, with the
exception of the World War years 1917 and 1918,
ice observation studies, oceanographic investiga-
tions, and a sei-vice of ice patrol has been carried
on by the United States Coast Guard. It is a
matter of national pride that smce this duty was
assumed by the Coast Guard there has not been
a life lost in the area being patrolled.

The International Conference on Safety of Life
at Sea, signed at London on May 31, 1929, made
provision for the continuance of this international
service along the same general lines as provided
for in the Convention of January 20, 1914. The
Congress of the United States, by Act approved
June 25, 1936, foUowmg the ratification of the
International Convention by the United States,
provided by law for the conduct of this Interna-
tional Ice Observation and Ice Patrol Service by
the United States Coast Guard.
Location: North Atlantic Ocean and Davis Strait.
Organization to ichich attached: United States Coast

Guard.
Purposes: Safety of life at sea, and furtherance of

knowledge of ice conditions and oceanography
in the North Atlantic and Davis Strait region.
Scope of actimties: Briefly stated, the duties of the
Coast Guard in conducting the Ice Patrol consist
in finding and keeping in touch day by day with
icebergs and field ice, determining their set and
drift, reporting their presence and location to the
Hydrographic Office of the Navy, and broadcast-
ing the information by radio for the protection of
shipping. The Coast Guard cutters while on this
work also perform such incidental ser\'ice, not to
interfere, however, with the paramount duty of
the patrol, as rendering assistance to vessels in
distress, gix'ing medical aid to crews of passing
vessels, removing obstructions to navigation, and
extending such other assistance to the mariner as
may be practicable.

Scientific observations are made of the ocean
currents, their direction and rate of flow; salinity
content of the water; bathymetry; and upper air
currents; and .such other observations and experi-
ments for the aid and furtherance of oceanographic
knowledge, particularly with relation to ice
conditions in the North Atlantic Ocean, as might
be deemed advisable and feasible.

Equipment: Normally three vessels are detailed
from the regular Coast Guard organization for
the duty of ice observation and ice patrol during
the ice menace season. During the balance of the
year scientific cruises are planned and conducted
by one vessel when the need for such observations
are necessary or advisable.

Staff: One commissioned officer and one senior
physical oceanographer specialize in the scientific
work associated with the International Service of
Ice Observation and Ice Patrol. This duty is
carried on as a part of the prescribed work of the
United States Coast Guard, and the administra-
tive and operating forces of the Coast Guard are
utilized to such extent as may be necessary for
the proper and efficient conduct of this interna-
tional service.

Scientific (permanent members)

Mr. Floyd M. Soule, Senior Physical
Oceanographer.
The commissioned officer assigned as ice obser-
vation officer serves on such detail for usually
about three years when he is relieved by another
commissioned officer of the Coast Guard.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

Income: Provision for the conduct of the Interna-
tional Service of Ice Observation and Ice Patrol

102

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

is made by appropriations by the Congress of the
United States. No specific appropriation is
made, the appropriations made for the conduct
of the United States Coast Guard being utilized
as may be necessary and when available. Reim-
bursement is made to the United States Govern-
ment for the expense of maintaining and operating
the International Service of Ice Observation and
Ice Patrol by the interested governments, signa-
tory to the International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea, and in the proportionate
amounts specified in the International Con-
vention.
Provision for -publication of results: Each year the
Coast Guard publishes a Bulletin giving a full
report of the operations of the International Serv-
ice of Ice Observation and Ice Patrol during
each ice season, and containing a comprehensive
and detailed account of scientific observations
made. Occasionally, bulletins are issued dealing
with scientific subjects bearing upon observa-
tions and investigations of the International
Service of Ice Observation and Ice Patrol.

North American Council on Fishery
Investigations ('37)

History or origin: In the spring of 1920, the Canadian
Government took up with the governments of the
United States and NcwfouncOand, the matter of
the establishment of some cooperative arrange-
ment between the coimtries of the western North
Atlantic for the investigation of those fisheries
problems of interest to the countries concerned.
The governments of both the United States and
of Newfoundland concurred with the Canadian
Government in the view that cooperative action
was desirable and on September 2.3, 1920, fishery
experts representing the three governments men-
tioned met at Ottawa on the invitation of the
Canadian Government. This conference unani-
mously adopted the following resolution which
was subsequently approved by the respective
governments.''

"BE IT RESOLVED, that it is the sense of this meeting
that, on the nomination of the fishery services of the
countries represented, each of the respective Govern-
ments should forthwith designate three persons to con-
stitute an International committee on marine fishery
investigations, this committee to determine what meas-
ure of International cooperation is desirable, what

* North American Council on Fishery Investigations,
Proc. 1921-1930, no. 1, 1932.

general investigations should be undertaken, consider
definite problems that may be awaiting study, submit
recommendations to their respective Governments,
and coordinate and correlate the results of the work.
It is the expectation that the respective Governments
will undertake to provide the necessary ways and means
for conducting such independent and cooperative inves-
tigations as may be adjudged desirable by the Interna-
tional Committee.

It is recommended that the International Committee
establish contact with the Permanent International
Council for the Exploration of the Sea."

In 1922 France, because of her important
fisheries in the western North Atlantic and her
pursuit of scientific investigations relating to
them, requested representation on the committee
and her request was approved.

Location: The Council has no specific place of
meeting but selects a place in accordance with
the desires of its members.

Independent organization composed of representa-
tives nominated by the fisheries services of the
four countries concerned.

Purposes: The principal objectives accomplished by
cooperative effort in coordinating the work of the
several Governments have been: (1,) to provide
more complete fishery .statistics of the oiTshore
fisheries; (2) to correlate and encourage investiga-
tions of the fisheries resources in which the
member nations have a common interest; and (3)
to accumulate data on the oceanographic condi-
tions and their relationship to fish life, including
drift-bottle experiments, records of water tem-
peratures, etc. These phases of the work of the
council are developed in greater detail hereafter.
The council has given incidental consideration
to many other problems which have arisen from
time to time but has centered its activities on the
subjects mentioned. The council has approved
the establishment of informal contacts between
it and the International Council for the Ex-
ploration of the Sea and the International Geo-
detic and Geophysical Union, for the purpose of
exchanging information.

Scope of activities: In the copy of the first number
of the published Proceedings of the Council, the
work of the United States is reported under cap-
tions as follows: Fishery statistics. Cod investiga-
tions, Mackerel investigations. Haddock investi-
gations, and Hydrological investigations.

The work of Canada is reported under the
captions: Fishery statistics. Cod fishery. Haddock
fishery, Mackerel fishery. Water circulation,

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INTERNATIONAL

103

Water temperatures, and Passamaquoddy power
project.

The work of Newfoundland is reported under
the following captions: Fishery statistics, Cod
fishery, Water circulation, and Water tempera-
tures.

The work of France is reported under the
captions: History of the investigations made at
Newfoundland, Hydrological system of the New-
foundland region. Relation between the hydrologi-
cal phenomena off Greenland and those of the
Newfoundland region. Remarks on the fauna
of the Newfoundland Banks, Bottom fauna, and
Mapping.

In the second number of the published pro-
ceedings of the Council the general captions for
the combined work of the Council are as follows:
Cooperation with the International Council for
the Exploration of the Sea, International Pas-
samaquoddy Investigations, Fishery Statistics,
and Hydrography.

There is a report for each of the adhering
countries with captions as follows:

United States: Mackerel investigations. Had-
dock investigations, Cod investigations. Fishery
statistics, Hydrological investigations, and Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution, which reports
on hydrography, drift bottles, plankton, mackerel,
and haddock.

Canada: Cod investigations. Haddock investi-
gations, Salmon investigations. Herring investiga-
tions. Fishery statistics. Bait investigations,

Water temperature, Hydrological investigations,
and Plankton investigations.

Newfoundland : Hydrological investigations.
Surface drift bottles. Plankton investigations,
Bait-fishes and squid, Salmon investigations. Cod
investigations, and Haddock investigations.

French investigations at Newfoundland and
Greenland in 1931, 1932, and 1933: Observations
made in 1931 in Greenland, Investigations carried
on in 1932, Investigations carried on in 1933.

Equipment: None.

Officers: The Council is composed of representatives
nominated by the fisheries services of Canada,
France, Newfoundland, and the United States.
The Council selects its own chairman from
among its members. The present members of the
Council are as follows :

Canada: W. A. Found, J. P. McMurrich, A. G.
Huntsman, Secretary.

France: Edouard LeDanois.
Newfoundland :

United States: F. H. Bell, Elmer Higgins, H. B.
Bigelow, Chairman.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

IncoTne: No special appropriation for the work
of the Council.

Provision for publication of results: The results of the
investigations conducted under the advice of the
Council are published by the respective govern-
ments but two reports entitled "North American
Council on Fishery Investigations," Proc. 1921-
1930, No. 1, and 1931-33, No. 2, have been pub-
lished by the Canadian Government.

INSTITUTIONS, EAST SIDE OF THE ATLANTIC
AND CONNECTING SEAS

ALGERIA TO FRANCE, INCLUSIVE

Algeria

Station Zoologique Maritime sur la Jetee Nord

(Alger) ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1888 by Dr. Camille
Viguier (March 16, 1890, to February 17, 1930.)

Location: City of Algiers.

Organization to which attached: Faculty of Sciences
of the University of Algiers, to the laboratory of
General Zoology.

Purposes and scope of activities: Research in marine
biology. Licenciate students (with certificates
of higher studies in general zoology) come for
practical work and to initiate themselves in the
study of marine animals.

Equipment: Working laboratory.

Staff: Director, L. G. Seurat; Professor, M. Rose;
Chief of Works, H. Gauthier; Preparator, Dr. R.
Dieuzeide.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Foreign investi-
gators after correspondence with the director may
have the facilities of the laboratory extended to
them.

Provision for the publication of results:

Station d'Aquiculture et de Peche de
Castiglione ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1921 by Professor
Bounhiol. The building was erected behind the
boundary of the maritime public domain.

Location: At Castiglione, 47 kilometers west of
Algiers. Area, 1 hectare.

Organization to which attached: The General Govern-
ment of Algeria.

Purposes and scope of activities: Laboratory of marine
biology applied to fishes. Investigation of mi-
gratory fishes, the exploration of the sea, plank-
ton, and marine faunas; fishery investigations,
fishing gear, the capture of fishes, tuna fishery,
preservation, and the study of fishery products.

Equipment: Laboratories, 2 aquaria, room for glass
working, fishing gear, refrigeration installation to

— 30° for the study of freezing fish. A water
tower 19 meters high enables the delivery under
pressure of both fresh and salt water. In addi-
tion, in the park of the establishment there are
several basins of fresh water for the cultivation of
several species of fishes useful in the fight against
mosquitoes. Library.

Staff: Director, Professor L. G. Seurat; Head of the
Station, Dr. R. Dieuzeide.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Foreign workers
are admitted for researches in marine biology at
the Station after agreement with the director.
A special laboratory is at their disposal and there
are guest rooms.

Provisio7i for the publication of results: Since 1926
two fascicles are published annually of "Bulletin
des Travaux de la Station Experimentale d'Aqui-
culture et de Peche de Castiglione." Fourteen
fascicles have been issued.

Belgium

Royaume de Belgique, Service de
I'Hydrographie ('37)

Location: 90, rue de la Loi, Brussels.

Staff: Head of Scheldt Hydrographic Office (Acting),
Ingenieur Principal des Ponts et Chaussees J. J.
Blockmans; Head of Coast Hydrographic OSice,
Hydrographe-Acljoint Principal J. A. P. Lauwers.

Equipment:

BURVEYINa VESSEL DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

ViCTOiRE 242 2 6

BODILLON 100 1 6

Institut Maritime de Belgique at Ostend ('37)

History or origin: Established about 1900 in quite a
rudimentary condition. Reorganized in 1935.
Buildings under construction.

Location: Ostend, on the Belgian sea-front, at the
entrance of Ostend Harbor.

104

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— ALGERIA, BELGIUM, CZECHOSLOVAKIA

105

Organization to which attached: Autonomous institu-
tion under supervision of the government.
Subventions obtained from various ministries.
Declared Institution of Public Utility. Con-
nected with the Musee Royal d'HLstoire naturelle
of Brussels.

Purposes: To make an intensive biological survey
of the waters adjacent to the Belgian coast and
the Mer Flamande. Investigations on fisheries
in the southern part of that sea.

Scope of activities: Exploration of the sea bottom,
observations on temperature, salinity, etc., in-
vestigations on fishes, plankton, organisms of the
coastal zone; trawling; dredging.

Equipment: Small laboratory; study aquaria with
sea-water circulation; biological library. The
new building will be provided with general and
private working rooms. A public aquarium is
contemplated. Vessels provided by the Mini-
stere des Transports, AdminLstration de la Marine.

Staff: Director, Professor G. Gilson of the University
of Louvain. (Internal organization not yet
arranged.)

Provisions for visiting investigators: Working places
in the laboratory and materials provided as far as
possible. No lodgings.

Income: Not yet fixed.

Provision for the publication of results: Annales de
I'Institut Maritime de Bclgique. Three memoirs
have been published.

CzECHOSLOVAKL\

Geographical Institute of the Charles University in
Prague (Geograficky ustav Karlovy university,

Praha, Ceskoslovensko ; L'Institut de GcDgraphie
de rUniversite Charles IV, Prague) ('36)

History or origin: The Charles University is the
oldest University of Central Europe, founded in
1348. Oceanographic research has been carried
on for five years, lectures on physical and an-
thropological oceanography have always been
included in the program.

Location: Prague II, Albertov 6, Czechoslovakia
(Praha II, Albertov 6, Ceskoslovensko; Prague
II, Albertov 6, Tch^coslovaquie).

Organization to which attached: Charles University,
of which the Institute is a department.

Purposes: In.struction in oceanography as part of the
general instruction in geography. Research.

Scope of activities: Researches in physical oceanog-
raphy with lectures in physical and human

oceanography. Biological oceanography is car-
ried on separately in the departments of plant
and aninial physiology. Marine bottom deposits
are studied in the geological, mineralogical,
petrographical, and paleontological departments.
Equipment: The Institute occupies the second floor
of the Science Building with a floor-space of 1750
square meters, and has 750 and 114 square meters
of laboratories under the roof, altogether the
Institute occupies 2614 sq. meters. The Library
of the Institute has more than 25,000 volumes,
including a rich collection of oceanographic
books. The collection for the Polar Seas is one
of the richest in Europe. Well equipped is the
collection of Admiralty Charts of various states.
The Institute owns equipment for small oceano-
graphic and limnological researches.
Staff: Prof. V. Svambera, Director, lecturer on
Polar Seas and physical oceanography.
Prof. B. Salamon, lecturer on the geophysics of

the ocean.
Prof. V. Dedina, lecturer on the geomorphology

of the recent and former ocean basins and their

coasts.
Prof. F. Stula, lecturer on oceanography in

general with special regard to economic geog-
raphy.
Dr. V. J. Novlk, lecturer on the geophysics of the

ocean.
Dr. J. Kunsky, research and lecturer on the

special geomorphology of the ocean basins and

their coasts.
Dr. J. Moschelesova (Miss), lecturer on human

oceanography.
Dr. K. Kuchaf, cartographer and lecturer on

cartography.
Dr. J. A. Zukriegel, research in physical

oceanography and chemistry, sea-ice researches.
5 clerical assistants.
2 maintenance and operation workers.
Provisions for visiting investigators: The Institute
and Library are open to all students of geography
of Charles University, at present about 200.
Income: State In.stitute with paid staff and a regular
annual income from the State of 40,000 Kc for
books, charts, and instruments.
Provision for publication of results: The Institute is
publishing a series entitled "Travaux g^o-
graphiques tcheques." The members of the staff
also publish papers in various scientific periodicals
at home and abroad.

106

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Biological Station at Rab, Isle Rab, Dalmatia,
Yugoslavia ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1930 by "Rab,"
Czechoslovak Society of Marine Biological Station.

Location: Rab, Isle Rab, Dalmatie, Yugoslavie.
Building "Komensky."

Organization to which attached: The above-named
Society, which is composed from the staff of
several Czechoslovak universities and other high
schools.

Purposes: Czechoslovakia has no sea, it is thus
necessary to profit from the hospitality of Yugo-
slavia. General purpose: to enable Czechoslovak
biologists to work in sea biology.

Scope of activities: Description of local fauna and
flora, cataloging its seasonal occurrence. His-
tological, cytological, physico-chemical research.
Installation of local biological museum.

Equipment: Elementary equipment for microscopy,
elementary general laboratory equipment, sensi-
tive galvanometer. For the present no gas,
no electric current. 2-3 working places, 1 room.
Special apparatus and chemicals should be
provided by the visitors.

Staff: No permanent staff. Administration of the
Station is in the hands of the Society: President,
Prof. B. NSmec, Prague; Secretary, Prof. J.
Belehrddek, Brno.

Only advanced workers are admitted and only
members of the Society, except introduced guests.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Gratuitous
bedroom and food for 2 members of the Society.
Otherwise 10% reduction in local hotels Praha
and Bristol (proprietor A. MachS,r, member of the
Society).

Income: Source : From private sources, sale of speci-
mens, annual memberships. Equipment main-
tained and enlarged chiefly by donations from
Czechoslovak university laboratories and labora-
tory utensil houses.

Amount: Small, irregular.

Provision for publication of results: Workers are
obliged to furnish to the Society reprints of
papers published in various periodicals. First
volume of "Travaux" for 1930-32 to be sent for
exchange in the autumn 1933 from the secretary.

Denmark

Dansk Biologisk Station (The Danish Biological

Station) ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1889. C. G. Joh.

Petersen was the first Director, succeeded by

A. C. Johansen 1926 and by H. Blegvad 1932.
In 1936 the Laboratory was transferred to the
old castle "Charlottenlund Slot," facing the
Sound and about 8 kms. north of the center of
Copenhagen.

Location: Charlottenlund Slot, Copenhagen, and
Nyborg (at the bottom of a small Danish Fjord).

Organization to which attached: Ministeriet for Land-
brug og Fiskeri (Ministry of Agriculture and
Fisheries).

Purposes: Marine and fresh water investigations
with special regard to fisheries.

Scope of activities: Researches in biology of marine
and fresh water organisms, especially fishes;
chemical and physical investigations of sea and
freshwater; valuation of sea bottom; transplanta-
tion of fish; output of artificially reared fry;
marking experiments.

Equipment: A main Laboratory in Charlottenlund
Slot. A floating laboratory at Nyborg with
service buildings and accommodations for aquaria.
A freshwater laboratory at Frederiksdal, Lyngby.
A research steamer Biologen, 143 tons, for
investigations in Danish home waters.

Staff: Scientific: Director, Dr. Phil. H. Blegvad, 1
permanent assistant, Dr. Phil. Erik M. Poulsen,
2 research assistants, Mag. Sc. C. V. Otterstr0m,
Cand. S. W. Fogh. Clerical and operation: 1
clerk, 1 librarian, 8 research steamer crew.

Provisions for visiting investigators: 2 or 3 work
places either at the laboratories or on board the
research steamer.

Income: Source: From the Danish Government.
Amount: about 110,000 Kroner for 1936-37.

ProvisioJi for publication of results: Report of the
Danish Biological Station I-XXXVII, 1890-1931.

Komissionen for Danmarks Fiskeri- og Havunders0-
gelser (The Danish Committee for Fisheries
Investigations and the Study of the Sea) ('37)

History or origin: In Denmark the "Komi.ssionen for
Havunders0gelser" (The Commission for Investi-
gations of the Sea) was created in 1902; its
purpose was to secure the execution of Denmark's
part of the investigations planned by the Inter-
national Council for the Exploration of the Sea.
Chairman of the Commission was Dr. C. G. Jobs.
Petersen, the Director of the Danish Biological
Station; the other members were Capt. C. F.
Drechsel, Doctor C. H. Ostenfeld, and Dr.
Martin Knudsen.

In the year 1909 Doctor Petersen withdrew

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— CZECHOSLOVAKIA, DENMARK, EGYPT

107

from the Commission and Dr. Johannes Schmidt,
Dr. A. C. Johansen, and Inspector of Fisheries
F. V. Mortensen, became members; Capt. C. F.
Drechsel was chairman. In 1925 C. F. Drechsel
withdrew and F. V. Mortensen, Director of Fish-
eries, became chairman. The Commission was
reestabUshed in 1926, and the name was altered to
"Kommi.ssionen for Danmarks Fiskeri- og Havun-
ders0gelser" ; two representatives elected by the
Fishermen's organization entered the Commission :
M. C. Jensen, M.P., and Axel Henriksen; Pro-
fessor C. H. Ostenfeld was succeeded by Professor
Ove Paulsen in 1931; Dr. A. C. Johansen in 1931
by Dr. H. Blegvad; and Professor Jobs. Schmidt
by Dr. A. Vedel Tuning in 1933. In 1935
Director of Fisheries F. V. Mortensen resigned
as chairman of the Committee and Director of
Fisheries C. Trolle-Thomsen became chairman.
Location: Charlottenlund Slot, an old castle facing
the Sound and about 8 kms. north of the center of
Copenhagen.
Organization to which attached: Ministeriet for
Landbrug og Fiskeri (Ministry of Agriculture
and Fisheries).
Purposes: Fisheries investigations and general marine

biological and hydrographical investigations.
Scope of activities: Researches on the biology of
fishes, especially with reference to commercial
fisheries; phyto- and zooplankton; marine benthos
and bottom deposits ; physics and chemistry of sea
water; general researches in oceanography.
Equipment: Laboratory building, 4 floors; annexed
buildings for collections, public exhibition, stock
of publications, etc. Research vessel Dana III,
launched January 9, 1937, for the North Sea and
Atlantic in%-estigations; about 400 tons, diesel
motor ship.
Staff: Chairman of the Committee: Director of

Fisheries C. Trolle-Thomsen.
Hydrographical Laboratory: Prof. Dr. Martin

Knudsen, Director; Dr. J. P. Jacobsen, Magister

Helge Thomsen; 2 technical assistants.
Plankton Laboratory: Prof. Dr. Ove Paulsen,

Director; Dr. P. Jespersen, Dr. E. Steemann

Nielsen.
Fisheries Laboratory for the investigations in the

Danish waters: Dr. H. Blegvad, Director; Dr.

Age J. C. Jensen; 1 clerical and 2 technical

assistants.
Marine Biological Laboratory for the investigation

in the North Sea, Faroese and Icelandic waters:

Dr. A. Vedel T&ning, Director; 3 clerical and

technical assistants. With the Laboratory for
the investigations in the North Sea, Faroese
and Icelandic waters is connected "Carlsberg-
fondets Dana Ekspeditioner" consisting of the
oceanic collections from the Dana Expeditions.
The Carl.sberg Foundation defrays the expenses
of this department and publishes a report on
the results. Dr. A. Vedel Taning, Director;
Dr. V. Ege, Dr. A. F. Bruun; 7 clerical and
technical assistants.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Work places
for foreign investigators can be provided in the
laboratory and on the research vessel.
Income: About 168,400 Danish Kroner from the
Danish State for the financial year 1936-37;
25,000 Danish Kroner from the Carlsberg Foun-
dation for the oceanic collections "Carlsberg-
fondets Dana Ekspeditioner."
Provision for publication of results: "Meddelelser
f ra Komissionen for Danmarks Fiskeri- og Havun-
ders0gelser." "Skrifter fra Komissionen for Dan-
marks Fiskeri- og Havunders0gelser." "Dana-
Report" of the "Carlsberg Foundation's oceano-
graphical Expedition round the world 1928-30
and previous DANA-Expeditions."

Kongelige Sokort-Arkiv (Royal Nautical
Chart Archives) ('37)
Location: Toldbodvej 19, Copenhagen.
Staff: Hydrographer, Kommandor Kaptajn P. C. S.
Jensen.
Head of 1st Section (Surveys) Kaptajnlojtnant

C. H. A. Madsen.
Head of 2nd Section (Notices to Mariners and
Sailing Directions), Kaptajn C. C. Zieler (ret'd).
Head of 3rd Section (Instruments, calculations,

etc.). Orlogskaptajn 0. Pade, R.N.R.
Head of 4th Section (Surveys, Danish waters)
Kaptajnlojtnant E. J. Saabye.
Equipment:

8DRVEVING VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

Mahstrand 172 3-4 24

Heimdal 900 9 38

Egypt

Laboratoire des Recherches sur les Pecheries ('34)

History or origin: Recent, building fanished in 1931.

(See: Memoire sur I'Organization des Recherches

des Pecheries, Ministere des Finances, Direction

des Recherches des Pecheries, Notes et Memoires,

no. 1, 1933.)

Location: Kaj'cd Bay within the City of Alexandria

108

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

upon the probable site of the ancient Ptolemaic
Pharos.
Organization to which attached: Under the adminis-
tration of the Coast Guard and Fisheries, Minis-
try of Finance.
Purpose and scope of activities: All researches needed
in the study of the marine and fresh water fishes
of Egypt. Taxonomy, classification, life histories,
physiology and ecology of fishes, plankton,
benthos, and hydrography (the physical and
chemical properties of the water) . Oceanographic
cruises are contemplated.
Equipment: 4 small workrooms, a large common
room, all provided with fresh and salt water and
gas. The laboratory possesses instruments and
material for biological and chemical work. It is
always advisable for a visitor to give advance
information regarding the things that he will
need for his work.
A small library and a small museum are being

formed.
1 ketch for collecting along the shore.
1 research boat 45 m long, the Mabahiss, was
loaned by the Egyptian Government for the
John Murray Expedition in the Indian
Ocean, and for subsequent use in the Red Sea.
Staff: Director, Dr. Hussein Faouzi; 2 assistants.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Visitors can be
received: the region to be investigated is very
large, 2 seas, 5 large lagoons, Suez Canal with its
series of large lakes, and the Nile.
Income: The laboratory budget is a part of the State

budget.
Provision for the publication of results: Annual Re-
ports on Fisheries and a series. Notes and Memoirs,
of which two have already appeared and five
are in press.

Note: Data on the Marine Biological Station at
Ghardaqa are given under the Red Sea
and in India. See page 219.

Mawani Fanarat (Ports and Lighthouses
Administration) ('37)

Location: Alexandria.

Staff: Director General, H. E. el Lewa, G. A. Wells;

Deputy Director General, El Lewa M. Hamdy

el Deeb Pacha.

England

Fisheries Experiment Station, Castle

Bank, Conway ('37)

History or origin: Started in 1915 to deal with

problems connected with shellfish pollution.

In 1931 was reorganized, with some augmentation
of staff, under present title of "Shellfish Services."

Location: Laboratory and offices: "Castle Bank,"
Conway, Caernarvonshire, North Wales

Purification and experimental tanks, and branch
laboratory: Benarth Road, Conway, Caernarvon-
shire, North Wales.

Organization to which attached: Ministry of Agricul-
ture and Fisheries, London.

Purposes: The study of shellfish in general, with
special reference to public health and economic
problems.

Scope of activities: 1. In collaboration with the
Ministry of Health, London, to combat the
dangers arising from the pollution of shellfish.

2. The establishment at the chief shellfish-
producing centers of shellfish purification plants
similar to that in operation, during the last
eighteen years, at Conway.

3. The carrying out of bacteriological surveys of
polluted shellfish beds.

4. Experimental work designed to facilitate the
establishment of an international standard method
of bacteriological examination of shellfish.

5. Research into oyster breeding problems.
Equipment: 1 building containing bacteriological,

biological, and chemical laboratories, offices,
etc., 3 floors and basement.

The shellfish purification installations at Conway
and Lympstone each consisting of storage and
chlorinating tanks (capacity of each 90,000
gallons), and two treatment tanks (capacity of
each 40,000 gallons) . These tanks can be used
in the summer season for shellfish research,
notably large-scale oyster breeding experiments.

2 oyster breeding tanks (capacity of each 19,000
gallons).

2 uncovered, and 2 covered and heated, tanks
(capacity of each 2,600 gallons) for research
into the conditions necessary to achieve
purification in oysters.
Staff: R. W. Dodgson, O.B.E., M.D. (London),
M.R.C.P., M.R.C.S. Director of Shellfish
Services.

Mr. H. P. Sherwood, M.C., B.S., assistant to the
director (Naturalist).

Mr. H. A. Cole, M.Sc. (assistant naturalist).

Mr. J. P. Harding, B.Sc, M.A., Ph.D. (assistant
naturalist).

Mr. E. M. Cartmel-Robinson, principal technical
assistant.

Miss D. H. Campbell, technical assistant.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— EGYPT, ENGLAND

109

Mr. F. G. Phipps, laboratory assistant.

Mr. H. Lees, tank superintendent, Lympstone,

Devon.
Mr. H. Brown, tank superintendent, Conway,

North Wales.
1 shorthand-typist.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Provision is
made, by arrangement, for visiting investigators.

Income: From State. Maintenance expenses, ap-
proximately £750; salaries £3,430.

(N.B. There is a set-off against the expenses
of the station of about £650 per annum in respect
of fees paid for cleansing mussels for the market.)

Provision for publication of results: Contributions
are made to the Ministry's Fisheries Investiga-
tions, Series II, Sea Fisheries, and pamphlets
are issued from time to time dealing with shellfish
matters.

Dove Marine Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1897. The present
building was constructed in 1908.

Location: On the sea front at Cullercoats, Northum-
berland, England.

Organization to which attached: Armstrong College,
University of Durham. The Laboratory is a
department of the College and is under the
direction of the Professor of Zoology.

Purposes: Major purpose, research. Instruction in
marine biology is also given to students of Arm-
strong College and of other Universities. Special
instruction in different fields of biology may also
be given.

(Scope of activities: Research is carried out on local
fishery problems, with special reference to herring
and salmon; faunistic work; general biology and
comparative physiology of fi.sh and marine in-
vertebrates; river pollution. The Laboratory is
also visited by school children. Teachers are
advised as to the conduct of clas.ses in marine
biology, and Easter classes are held at the Labora-
tory. The staff also gives lectures to various
societies in the district.

Equipment: One laboratory building, 64 x 29 feet.
The ground floor is given up to the aquarium
with eleven large and thirty-eight small tanks
for the supply of which fresh sea-water is pumped
into storage tanks daily. On the first floor Ls a
general laboratory divided into cubicles suitable
for work which does not require much apparatus,
a large room which has been recently fitted up
specially for experimental work and is also

suitable for teaching and other purposes, a small

chemical laboratory, and the library (two rooms).
One small, sound-proof hut for the study of

problems of animals' behavior.

The Laboratory is equipped with apparatus

for the conduct of research in most forms of

research in general zoology, and comparative

physiology.

The most important publications in marine

biology are available either in the library of the

.station or in that of Armstrong College.
Staff: Director, A. D. Hobson, M.A. (Cantab.),

F.R.S.E.; Naturalist, B. Storrow, M.Sc, A.L.S.;

Biologist, H. 0. Bull, B.Sc, Ph.D.; Librarian,

Mrs. Cowan.
Provision for visiting investigators: About ten in

addition to the staff of the .station could be

accommodated.
Income: Source: Grants from H. M. Development

Commissioners, Armstrong College and various

local sources, admission of public to aquarium and

sale of specimens.

Amount for year ending March 31st, 1937,

about £2,250.
Provision for publication of results: Dove Marine

Laboratory Reports and scientific periodicals.

Department of Zoology and Oceanography,
University College, Hull ('37)

History or origin: The Department of Zoology came
into existence at the opening of the College in
October, 1928, and in 1931 it was enlarged to a
Department of Zoology and Oceanography. The
new oceanographical laboratories were opened in
December, 1931.

Location: At the University College of Hull, on the
northern outskirts of the city.

Organization to which attached: University College of
Hull.

Purposes: (Of oceanographic section of the Depart-
ment.) Research, particularly in biological
oceanography in relation to fisheries. A year's
post-graduate course is offered in biological
oceanography, intended particularly for students
taking up work in relation to fisheries.

Scope of activities: At present (1936) the activities
of the Department are being concentrated upon a
survey of the changing plankton of the North
Sea from month to month in relation to the
fisheries by means of continuous plankton re-
corders worked on four diiTerent steamship lines
across the North Sea and also by means of

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

smaller instruments — plankton indicators — used
on commercial fishing craft. In addition re-
searches into the biology of fishes and marine
organisms in general are undertaken by post-
graduate research workers.

Equipment: 6 research laboratories, preparation
room, and office.
Small museum.

Library forming section of general College library.
Photographic dark room.

At present no research ship is employed, all the
work at sea being carried out with special equip-
ment on steamship lines and fishing craft.

Staff: Director, Professor A. C. Hardy, M.A. Re-
search Biologists, G. T. D. Henderson, B.Sc,
Ph.D. ; C. E. Lucas, B.Sc. ; K. M. Rae, B.Sc. Two
maintenance workers.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Hull, while a
great center of the fishing industry, is situated
on the Humber and not on the sea coast proper,
so that the department which is twelve miles
from the sea does not offer facilities for the study
of the coastal fauna and flora, which in the
immediate vicinity are poor. The Department
is concerned with the wider oceanographic prob-
lems of the North Sea and the Arctic Seas in
relation to the fishing industry. Post-graduate
research workers wishing to take part in such
investigations are welcomed, and in addition the
zoological laboratories, which are provided with
marine aquaria, are equipped for all ordinary
zoological research.

Income: In 1936-37 approximately £2,000.

Provisions for publication of results: For the present
the Department issues no journal of its own.
The results of researches are published in different
journals already existing.

Department of Oceanography of the University
of Liverpool ('37)

History: The Department was established by the
University in 1919, when the late Sir W. A.
Herdman endowed a professorship of Oceanog-
raphy. The Liverpool Marine Biological Com-
mittee was then dissolved and its property
transferred to the new Department. This prop-
erty included the Port Erin Marine Biological
Station. The Professors of Oceanography have
been as follows: W. A. Herdman, 1919-1920;
J. Johnstone, 1920-1932; J. Proudman, 1933 to
present.

Location: The headquarters, laboratories, and mu-
seum are situated in Liverpool, 3.

Organization to which attached: The University of
Liverpool.

Purposes: (i) To prosecute research, (ii) To train
graduate-students in the methods of research,
(iii) To serve as a bureau of information, (iv)
To teach the elements of oceanography to under-
graduate students.

Scope of activities: All branches of oceanography,
physical and biological, including fisheries.

Equipment: Chemical and fisheries laboratories;
museum of fisheries, relating principally to the
Irish Sea; motor drifter with auxiliary sail.

Staif: Scientific, Prof. J. Proudman; Lecturer, R. J.
Daniel; Technical and clerical.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Visiting investi-
gators are subject to the general regulations of
the University.

Income: General funds of the University. Amount:
about £3,200 per annum, apart from the sum
spent on the maintenance of the buildings.

Provision for publication of results: The Department
administers a publications fund, which is expended
in subsidizing the "Proceedings and Transactions
of the Liverpool Biological Society."

The Liverpool Observatory and Tidal Institute ('37)

Histonj or origin: The Institution was formed in
1929 by the union of the Liverpool Observatory
and the Tidal Institute of the University of
Liverpool. The Observatory was founded in
1845 and since 1858 has been maintained by the
Mersey Docks and Harbour Board. The Tidal
Institute was founded in 1919 with funds provided
by Sir Alfred A. Booth, Bart., and Mr. Charles
Booth.

Location: The Observatory is situated at Bidston
on the Birkenhead side of the Mersey, but the
Director and one assistant are normally stationed
at the University in Liverpool.

Organization to which attached: The Institution is
governed by a Committee appointed partly by
the University of Liverpool and partly by the
Mersey Docks and Harbour Board.

Purposes and scope of activities: The continuous
prosecution of scientific research into all aspects
of knowledge of the tides and of kindred geophysi-
cal subjects. The analysis of tidal observations
and the preparation of tide-tables. The taking
of meteorological and seismological observations,
together with the supplying of information on

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— ENGLAND

111

these subjects. The maintenance and firing of
the Time-gun. The testing of chronometers and
navigational instruments.

Equipment: Two tide predicting machines, one built
for the Tidal Institute by Kelvin, Bottomley,
and Baird; and one by Leg^, built for the late
Mr. Edward Roberts. A number of instruments
for meteorological observation. Two Milne-
Shaw seismographs, one sometimes used as an
earth-tilt meter. A number of standard clocks,
calculating machines, and wireless installations.
Arrangements for testing sextants and chrono-
meters.

Staff: Scientific: Director, J. Proudman; Associate
Director, A. T. Doodson; Chief Assistant, H. J.
Bigelstone; Assistant, R. H. Corkan. Technical
and clerical: 6.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Special arrange-
ments are made to suit each individual case.

Income: Source : Large grant from the Mersey Docks
and Harbour Board.

Small grant from the University of Liverpool.
Interest on investments.
Earnings, amounting to about one-half of the

total.

Amount: About £3,300 per annum, beyond the
sum spent on the maintenance of buildings, rates,
and taxes.

Provision for 'publication of 7'esults: The results of
research are published in journals and .societies'
proceedings, references being given in the small
Annual Report issued by the institution.

The Hydrographic Department, Admiralty ('37)

History or origin: The Hydrographic Office of the
Admiralty was established in 1795 in order to
overcome the great inconvenience, especially
when ordered abroad, felt by officers commanding
His Majesty's Ships respecting the navigation,
and to prevent the difficulty and danger to which
His Majesty's Fleet must be exposed from defects
on this head.

The first Hydrographer to be appointed was
Mr. Alexander Dalrymple, F.R.S., who for many
years was in the service of the East India Com-
pany; he was succeeded in 1808 by Captain
Thomas Hurd, R.N., since which time the office
of Hydrographer has been held by Naval Officers
of captain's rank and above.

At its inception the cost of the Hydrographic
Department was £470 per annum and the staff
consisted of about four persons. At the present

day the estimates run into some £136,200 and the
total number of persons employed by the De-
partment is 330.

Location: Admiralty, Whitehall, London, with
branches at Cornwall House, Waterloo Road,
London, and at Cricklewood, London.

Organization to which attached: Admiralty.

Purposes: Hydrographic surveys, oceanography,
compUation, engraving and printing of admiralty
charts, sailing directions, light lists, tide tables,
wireless time signals, notices to mariners, etc.

Scope of activities: British Empire, at home and
abroad, and other work in the open seas which is
of a world-wide nature.

Equipment: Eight surveying ships are employed —
four abroad and four in home waters. The
Department is fully equipped for all kinds of
hydrographic and cartographic work. W'ith the
exception of two of the larger vessels, the whole
of the surveying ships are being replaced by new
construction and it is anticipated that an addi-
tional vessel will be available for service abroad
making nine in all.

SURVEYING VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

Beaufort 800 8 79

Challenger 1,140 11 90

Endeavor 1,280 11 129

FiTZROY 800 8 79

Flinders 800 8 79

Herald 1,650 11 121

Iroquois 1,760 10 121

Kellett 800 8 79

Ormonde 1,180 11 128

The names of the surveying vessels in the
above list have been taken from the year book
of the International Hydrographic Bureau for
1937.

The Royal Research ship Research is under
construction at Dartmouth and when completed
will undertake magnetic work at sea and the
study of atmospheric electricity, oceanographj',
etc.
Staff: Hydrographer, Rcar-Admiral J. A. Edgell,

C.B., O.B.E.
Assistant Hydrographer, Captain E. F. B. Law,

R.N.
Director of Navigation, Captain W. G. Bcnn,

R.N.
Chief Civil Assistant, Mr. W. Ewart Llewellyn,

O.B.E.
Superintendent of Charts, Commander A. Day,

R.N.

112

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Assistant Superintendent of Charts, Mr. G. B.

Stigant.
Superintendent of Sailing Directions, Captain

F. A. Reyne, R.N. (retired).
Superintendent of Tidal Work, Commander

Harold D. Warburg, R.N. (retired).
Superintendent of Light Lists, Captain S. A. G.

Hill, D.S.O., R.N. (retired).
Superintendent, Chart Production and Supplies
Branch, Cricklewood, Mr. C. Jowsey.
Provision for visiting investigators: Naval officers,
scientists, engineers, surveyors, and others, are,
as a rule, shown over the Department provided
arrangements are made beforehand.
Income: Derived from the sale of charts, etc., but is
returned to the Treasury in accordance with the
usual custom for Government offices.
Provision for publication of results: Charts are pub-
lished by the Department and books by H. M.
Stationery Office, as and when required.

Meteorological Office (Marine Division) Air
Ministry, London ('37)

History or origin: The Meteorological Department
of the Board of Trade was established in 1855
for marine meteorological work.

In 1865 the Meteorological Office was estab-
lished as a separate department and the Meteoro-
logical Department of the Board of Trade became
the Marine Division of the Meteorological Office.
In 1919 the Meteorological Office, with all its
Divisions, was made a Department of the Air
Ministry.
Location: Kingsway, London.
Organization to which attached: See above.
Purposes: To collect from British ships information
on winds, weather, currents, and ice of the
oceans with the object of improving ocean naviga-
tion and making it safer.
(Scope of activities: The Marine Division arranges
for and supervises the voluntary observations
made by the officers of 350 British ships which
make regular observations and of a number of
ships which make occasional ob.servations.

Of the 350 ships which make regular obser-
vations :

(a) Thirty ships take observations at the end
of each watch and record them in the
Meteorological Log; these ships are engaged
mainly in the North Sea, the north and
south Pacific Ocean, and the Arctic and
Antarctic.

(b) The remaining 320 ships take observations
at one or more of the international hours
for synoptic observations at sea, namely
0000 hr., 0600 hr., 1200 hr., and 1800 hr.
G.M.T. and record them on Form 911
which is called the Meteorological Record
to distinguish it from the Meteorological
Log referred to in (a) above.

(c) Of the 350 ships referred to in (a) and (b)
281 are "Selected Ships" and transmit
their observations at scheduled times by
W/T for the information of other ships
and of national meteorological services.

The meteorological logs and records from the.se
ships are examined in the Marine Division and the
necessary data extracted for discussion and
publication. Special attention is being given at
present to the data of ocean currents and a series
of current charts of the oceans is being prepared
and published.

In addition to the 350 regular observing ships
arrangements are made with a number of British
ships to make observations and to report them
by W/T when they are in regions where there
are no selected ships. The list of these ships is
at present small but it is being added to as oppor-
tunity offers.
Equipment: All British Observing ships, whose
names appear in the fleet list in the "Marine
Observer," carry a reliable mercurial barometer.

The Meteorological Office lends to meteorologi-
cal log-keeping ships a complete set of meteoro-
logical instruments, consisting of a Kew Pattern
Marine Mercurial Barometer, Thermometers with
screen, and Hydrometers.

"A" Selected Ships, that is Selected Ships
which have long range wireless telegraphy, are
also equipped with thermometers with screen and
a barograph. Some "B" Selected Ships which
have not satisfactory instruments of their own
are also provided with thermometers and screens
by the Office.

The Marine Division itself has the usual office
equipment; has access to the technical and
scientific library of the Meteorological Office,
and has the advantage of the use of the Air
Ministry Hollerith Electrical Sorting lithographic
and printing pres.ses.
Staff: Headquarters: Marine Superintendent, 1
nautical a.ssLstant, 1 meteorological assistant,
9 technical a.ssistants, 13 clerical assistants.
London Docks: 1 nautical assistant, 1 clerk.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— ENGLAND

113

Liverpool Docks: 1 nautical assistant, 1 clerk.
Eight agents (master mariners resident at the
ports).

Provision for visiting investigators: As occasion arises.

Income: Source: By Parliamentary vote.

Provision for publication of results: His ]Majesty's
Stationery Office publish books, charts, and at-
lases, compiled in the Marine Division, as neces-
sary.

Fisheries Laboratory, Lowestoft ('37)

History or origin: Staff of Marine Biological As.so-
ciation of the United Kingdom previously sta-
tioned at Lowestoft and engaged in International
Investigations taken over by Ministry of Agri-
culture and Fisheries and transferred to London
in 1910.

Present organization and location date from
1920, when the staff was greatly augmented.

Location: Lowestoft, Suffolk, England. On sea
front between harbour and Claremont Pier.

Organization to which attached: Ministry of Agricul-
ture and Fisheries, London.

Purposes: Study of fishery problems, both national
and international, the latter in cooperation with
the Conseil International pour I'Exploration de
la Mer, Copenhagen.

Scope of activities: Problems connected with the
life history of fishes and other forms of marine
life, special attention being paid to those problems
connected with over-fishing and the prediction of
yield.

Equipment: 1 laboratory building, containing rooms
for staff, library (about 5,000 volumes), lecture
room and the usual equipment for research, 4
floors and basement, about 70 by 50 feet.

1 fisheries .store — 1 building three floors, 60 by
20 feet and 1 building 2 floors, 25 by 20 feet.

2 research vessels as follows:

George Bligh, steam trawler of "Lord Mersey"
type. Length 138^ feet; breadth 231 feet; depth
12| feet (in hold). Average draft aft 15 feet.
Gross tonnage 324.27; register tonnage 13L.53;
H.P. Nominal 68.9; H. P. indicated 600.0. Cruising
radius of about 5,000 miles.

Onaway, motor drifter, Scottish type. Length
53.2 feet; breadth 16.3 feet; depth 6.85 feet. Ton-
nage 26.73; engine: Norris, Henty, and Gardner,
serai-diesel, B.H.P. 48, R.P.M. 4.50.

Staff: The Director of Fishery Investigations, Dr.
E. S. Russell, is stationed in London.
Resident staff:

Mr. F. M. Davis (in charge), principal naturalist
(biologist) .

Mr. H. J. Buchanan-Wollaston, principal
naturalist (biologist).

Mr. R. E. Savage, naturalist (biologist).

Dr. J. N. Carruthers, naturalist (hydrographer).

Mr. G. M. Graham, naturalist (biologist).

Dr. W. C. Hodg.son, naturalist (biologist).

Mr. J. R. Lumby, assistant naturalist (hy-
drographer).

Miss D. E. Thursby-Pelham, assistant natu-
ralist (biologist).

Commander W. H. Stewart, assistant naturalist
(Master of the George Bligh).

Mr. F. S. Wright, a.ssistant naturalist (biolo-
gist).

Mr. H. H. Goodchild, a.s.sistant naturalist
(biologist).

Mr. C. F. Hickling, a.ssistant naturalist (biolo-
gist).

Mr. R. S. Wimpenny, assistant naturalist
(biologist).

Mr. B. G. Clarke, chief laboratory assistant.

Mr. H. Stokes, 1st class laboratory assistant.

4 laboratory assistants.

Mr. E. A. Bennett, higher grade clerk (officer in
charge).

Mr. W. H. New.some, higher grade clerk (in
charge of statistical and clerical staff).

11 clerical officers (Statistical Branch).

2 .shorthand-typist.

3 fish-measurers.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Provision is
made for visiting inveistigators by special arrange-
ment.

Income: From State, for maintenance of station
and ships approximately £9,000, for staff .£15,480.

Provision for publication of results: The Ministry
publishes the following series: "Fishery Investiga-
tions, Series II, Sea Fisheries." Provision is also
made for occasional publication of Fishery No-
tices, which usually consist of pamphlets on
special subjects for general public consumption.

Plymouth Marine Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: Established by the Marine Bio-
logical Association of the United Kingdom of
which Professor Huxley was the first president
and Sir Ray Lankester was the originator and
first secretary. It was opened on June 30, 1888.
The buildings and fittings had at that time
co.st £12,000. Between that time and 1933 a

114

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

sum exceeding £16,000 was spent on additional
buildings. A general description of the buildings
was published by Doctor E. J. Allen in Marine
Biological Association Journal, vol. 15, no. 3, pp.
735-828, November, 1928. Subsequent to 1928
the buildings were enlarged by the addition of
several rooms. On the ground floor, a library
room, two work rooms, photographic room, and a
physiological laboratory were added. On the
first floor a balance room, two small laboratories,
and a large chemical laboratory were added.
The description published by Dr. Allen needs to
be supplemented by the additional buildings
mentioned in the foregoing sentences.

Location: Plymouth on the sea front of Citadel Hill.

Organization to which attached: The Marine Biological
Association of the United Kingdom.

Purposes: All kinds of biological research, with
special attention to several fisheries problems,
the study of hydrographic conditions in the
adjacent waters of the English Channel, the
provision of facilities for visiting investigators,
and the conduct of Easter and Autumn classes
for students.

Scope of activities: Since the Marine Biological
Laboratory in Plymouth has been in continuous
operation since 1888, it would reasonably be
expected that there might be some change in the
program and the emphasis which has been placed
on difTerent kinds of problems during the forty-
five years of the existence of the Laboratory.
The scope of the investigations at the Institution
is indicated by the designations after the names
of the members of the staff as given below. A
wide variety of the problems of the physiology
of marine organisms and the interrelation between
the organisms and the marine environment are
being investigated. Several of the investigators
are concerned with the life histories of marine
organisms, others are studying special fisheries
problems. The Laboratory also pays particular
attention to hydrography and to the chemistry
of sea-water as related to marine organisms and
other phenomena. It supplies specimens of
marine animals and plants for biological research
and teaching purposes.

Equipment: The original building contained a gen-
eral laboratory with cubicles and a series of small
aquaria for the use of the staff or visiting investi-
gators; and the aquarium on the ground floor
which is opened to the public; an extensive
library of biological publications which includes

the leading biological and biochemical journals;
a residence for the director; four or five small
laboratories; and an office and living quarters for
the engineer-caretaker. Subsequently an addi-
tional building known as the Allen building, 24
feet by 24 feet in dimension, divided into two
laboratories by a temporary partition was added.
Later a second story was added to this building
and the whole was converted into a library. At a
still later date there was added a new wing in
which there is a well-equipped chemical laboratory
and a large and varied stock of chemicals, and
well-equipped physiological and fisheries labora-
tories. On the ground floor there is an aquarium
or tank room which measures 70 feet by 24^ feet.
There is a detached building for the vacation
courses with accommodation for twenty students.
The Laboratory owns a wooden steam drifter,
the Salpa, which is 88 feet long, 19.9 foot beam
and draws 10.5 feet aft and 5 feet forward, and is
capable of a speed of QJ knots. She is equipped
with a winch for trawling and a small deck-house
laboratory. The Laboratory also owns the
motor boat Gammarus which is 25 feet long,
eight-foot beam, a draught of 2 feet 9 inches.

The library contains a valuable collection of
scientific books, periodicals, and reports of all
countries relating to fish and fisheries, the collec-
tion in this respect being one of the most complete
in the country. The more important zoological
journals are well represented, as well as the
reports of the various oceanographical expeditions,
and there are a large number of separate papers on
general marine biology. A collection of modern
books and journals dealing with general physiology
has also been added. Members of the Association
have access to the library.
Staff: Director, Stanley Kemp, Sc.D., F.R.S.

Assistant Director and Fishery Naturalist, E.

Ford, A.R.C.Sc.
Head of Department, General Physiology, W. R.

G. Atkins, O.B.E., Sc.D., F.I.C., F.Inst.P.,

F.R.S.
Naturalist, Miss M. V. Lebour, D.Sc, Plankton

and larval stages of bottom fauna.
Hydrographer, H. W. Harvey, M.A.
Naturalist, F. S. Russell, D.S.C., D.F.C., B.A.,

Plankton and young fishes.
Physiologist, A. Sand, Ph.D.
Naturalist, D. P. Wilson, M.Sc, Polychaete larvae

and shore fauna.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS-ENGLAND

115

Director's research assistant. Mrs. E. W. Sexton,

F.L.S., Mendelian heredity.
As-sistant Naturalists: G. A. Steven, B.Sc,
F.R.S.E., fishes and the commercial fisheries.
G. M. Spooner, M.A., Behavior of fishes.
Assistant Chemist, L. H. N. Cooper, Ph.D., F.I.C.
Research Assistants: W. J. Rees, M.Sc, Hydroids
and medusae; P. G. Corbin, Mackerel.
Provision for investigators: The accommodation
provided for visitors includes cubicles, separate
rooms, or bench space with adequate fittings for
biochemical and physiological work, the use of all
ordinary glassware, chemicals, and apparatus of a
general nature. The Association undertake.s, as
far as possible, to supply the animals or plants or
water samples required for any investigator, or
such facilities for obtaining them as may be at the
command of the Laboratory.

Microscopes are not usually provided. Intend-
ing visitors are advised to write to the Director,
stating the nature of the investigation which they
propose to carry out and the apparatus which
they will require. Every effort is made to provide
any special apparatus which is needed, and to
collect the animals wanted for research.

The Laboratory is open for research durmg the
entire year, including holidays, and workers are
provided with a key so that they may work at
night when they desire to do so.

The facilities are primarily mtended for visitors
who are engaged in their own research or wish to
collaborate with members of the staff who are
investigating some particular problem of bio-
logical science.

About thirty investigators can be accommo-
dated in addition to the regular staff of the
Laboratory.
Income: Source. A grant from the Government,
private donations, the dues of the members of the
Marine Biological Association, entrance fees to
the aquarium, and sales of specimens.
Amount. About £16,000 aniuially.
Provision for publication of results: The Journal of
the Marine Biological Association of the United
Kingdom and various scientific periodicals. "The
Plymouth Marine Fauna", published by the
Association in 1931 contains a list of the local
species and notes on their distribution.

Port Erin Marine Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: The Liverpool Biological Com-
mittee was founded at a Public Meeting in 1885

which was called by Sir William Herdman and
held in the Zoological Laboratory at University
College, Liverpool. It was resolved to investigate
the Marine Biology of Liverpool Bay.

1892 Original Station at Port Erin erected.
1902 Present Station at Port Erin erected with
cooperation of Isle of Man Government.
1910 A new wing added to main building.
1932 New laboratory added to main building.
Location: On the south side of Port Erin Bay,
southwest coast of Isle of Man, situated in Irish
Sea.
Organization to which attached: The Liverpool Marine
Biological Committee in December, 1919, trans-
ferred the Station to the University of Liverpool
(Department of Oceanography).
Purposes: Main building in three parts. An aquar-
ium for the public, a .sea fish hatchery, and a
biological station proper. The latter provides
laboratories and working accommodation for
students. These classes attend with members
of the staff of their own particular university.
No instruction at present carried on by resident
.staff which is engaged in research.
Scope of activities: Fishery research in connection
with the Manx Herring Fisheries. Investigations
upon the rearing of oyster larvae (Ostrea edulis).
Equipment: Main building, 90 feet by 40 feet, 2
stories. DetaUs as follows:

Center block, aquarium 30 feet by 30 feet,

with gallery. 9 main tanks and subsidiary ones.

Wing, fish hatchery, 30 feet by 26 feet. Ground

floor: Nine fleets of hatching boxes. First floor:

Biochemical laboratory.

Wing, biological, 30 feet by 26 feet. Ground
floor: Six separate research rooms and library.
First floor: Combined laboratory and lecture
room.

To the foregoing there have been added, as
follows :

New wing 1910: 44 feet by 18 feet, 2 stories.
Ground floor: Store room, dark room, 2 class
rooms for 8-10 students, and room containing
sorting tables (for sorting collected material).
First floor: 8 separate research rooms.

New laboratory 1932, single story and built to
take a second story if necessary. Accommoda-
tion for 25 students.

Tanks, two outside tanks for storing sea water
and used as spawning ponds in connection with
hatchery. Capacity of each about 16.000 gallons.

116

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

An upper tank built into the cliff face. Capacity
11,000 gallons.
Staff: Honorary Director, R. J. Daniel, D.Sc,
Lecturer in Oceanography, University of Liv-
erpool.
Naturalist and Biochemist, J. R. Bruce, M.Sc.
Algologist, M. W. Parke, Ph.D.
Curator, Mr. W. C. Smith.
Assistant Curator, Mr. T. N. Cregeen.
Fisherman Naturalist, Mr. W. Christian.
Assistant, Mr. K. Woodworth.
Provisions for visiting investigators: During Easter
vacation because so many students use the
station, no visitors can be accommodated, but
for the rest of the year it can house nine investiga-
tors with a cubicle each. If more than nine are
accommodated, cubicles have to be shared or work
done in the big laboratories.
Income: Sources: University of Liverpool; Isle of
Man Government ; British Government (Develop-
ment Commission) ; Aquarium receipts.
Amount: About £2,450 per annum.
Provision for publication of results: The Annual
Report of station includes Faunistic and Algal
Notes. The staff publish in recognized British
Journals. Fishery work is publi.shed in Proceed-
ing and Transactions of Liverpool Biological
Society.

Estonia

Kaitsevagede Staabi Topo-Hiidrograafia Osakond

(Topographical and Hydrographic Section of the

General Staff of the Army) ('37)

Location: Toomkooli, 9, Tallinn.

Staff: Head of the Section, Kolonel-Leitnant
Eduard Ahman; Head of the Hydrographic Sub-
Section, Vanemleitnant J. Weizenberg.

Finland
The Bureau for Fishery Investigations ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1924.

Location: Helsinki.

Organization to which attached: Board of Agriculture.

Purposes and scope of activities: To carry out in-
vestigations relating to economics of fisheries,
both in the sea and in lakes. Until now prin-
cipally salmon and coregonid fishing has been
studied.

Staff: Two scientific workers: Chief: Prof. T. H.
Jarvi. Biologist, Vidjo Jaaskelainen.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.
Incoyne: In the budget of the Government.
Provision for publication of results: Suomen Kalata-

lous, Finlands fisherier. Acta Zoologica fennica,

and Annales Acad. sc. fennicae.

Laboratory for Hydro-biological Investigations ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1919. (Earlier

organization from 1899.)
Location: Helsinki (Helsingfors).
Organization to which attached: Finnish Society of

Sciences.
Purposes and scope of activities: The study of the

lower plant and animal life of the sea and inland

waters of Finland.
Equipment: Laboratory for microscopical works.
Staff: 1 permanent worker, two others who take

part in the work. Director: Prof. K. M. Levan-

der. Assistant Zoologist : Mag. phil. Sven Seger-

strale. Assistant Botanist: Dr. Ernst Hayren.
Provisions for visiting investigators: No regular.
Item in the budget of the Finnish Society of Sciences.
Provision for publication of results: In the series

Commentationcs biologicae Societatis Scientiarum

Fennicae.

Merenkulkuhallitus Merikarttalaitos (Board of
Navigation, Hydrographic Office) ('37)

Location: Helzinki.

Staff: Director General of Board of Navigation,
Captain I. A. Jokinen.
Head of Hydrographic Office, Kapteeniluutnantti

U. Suomela.
Assistants, Captains L. Parrio and G. Kolckmann.
Head of Chart Section, Kapteeni L. Parrio.
Head of Section for Notices to Mariners, Kapteeni

G. Kolckmann.
Heads of Sur\'eying and Sweeping Expeditions,
Captains J. Hyrsky, E. Elo, and A. Hakri,
Kapteeniiluutnantti T. Fabritius, Merivaen-
luutnantti E. Kerttula.
Equipment:

DISPLACE-

SUnVEY

INQ VESSELS

MENT

OFFICERS

CREU

Sextant, . .

.. 195

YSTAVA. . . .

Aland

Klas Horn

.. 420

10
9

Nautilus. .

.. 140

Kaiku 1

" 2

Ech

■> .
ing

sound-

" 3

launches

" 4

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— ENGLAND, ESTONIA, FINLAND, FRANCE

117

Thalassological Institute, Finland' ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1918. (Earlier
organization from 1899.)

Location: Helsinki (Helsingfors).

Organization to ivhich attached: Governmental Scien-
tific Institution and the Ministry of Commerce.

Purposes and scope of activities: Scientific studies
around Finland: general conditions, the physical
and chemical properties of the sea water, the
variations of the water level, the currents and the
ice, as well as other related questions. Regular
ice reports for navigational purposes issued during
winter. The Institute represents Finland in
international oceanographic work.

Equipment: Laboratory for work on the physical
and chemical aspects of oceanography; wireless
station; 17 water-stage registering stations, 21
tide-pole stations; more than 100 stations for
ice-ob.servation; routine oceanographic observa-
tions made at 26 coastal stations and 8 light
vessels; s.s. Natulius placed at the disposal of
the institution for the work in summer.

Staff: Scientific:

Director: vacant. Acting Director: Mag. G.

Granqvist.
Consulting members: Prof. Hj. Tallqvist; Prof.

K. M. Levander.
Thala!3sologists: Dr. S. E. Stenij, Chief of Section
for the study of Water-Level; Dr. E. Palm^n,
Chief of Thalassological Section; Mag. G.
Granqvist, Chief of Section for Ice.
Scientific assistants: Mag. Risto Jurva; Dr.

Stina Gripenberg; Two vacant.
Technical and clerical: 5; 1 wireless operator.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No regular.

Income: Item in the budget of the Government.

Provision for the publication of results: Finliindische
Hydrographisch - Biologische Untersuchungen,
quarto, nos. 1-10, and 12 and 13 published
between 1907 and 1914. No. 11 has not been
published (not continued).

Present series of publications: Merentutkimus-
laitoksen Julkaisu (Finnish), Havsforskningsin-
.stitutets Skrift (Swedish), octavo, nos. 1-108

' Witting, Rolf, Orgartization des Instituts fiir Meeres-
forschung in Finnland, III Hydrologische Konferenz der
Baltischen Staaten, Warezawa, Mai 1930.

Witting, Rolf, and Granqvist, Gunnar, Thalassological
work in Finland. Appendix 9, pp. 52-58: Association
d'Ocfeanographie Physique, Veme, Assemblee Generals
r6unie k Lisbonne 1933, Proces-Verbaux No. 1, Appendix 9,
pp. 52-58, Helsingfors 1934.

Annual Reports for the years 1919-1935, published in the
series mentioned below.

published between 1920 and 1936. The publica-
tions are i-ssued either in Finnish and Swedish
(separately or bilingual) or in English, German, or
French.

France
Le Laboratoire Arago de Banyuls sur Mer ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1881 by Henri de
Lacaze-Duthiers.

Location: Banyuls sur Mer.

Organization to which attached: Part of the Faculty
des Sciences dc Paris. (As also Lab. de Roscoff.)

Purposes: Zoology and botany.

(Scope of activities: Marine biological and oceano-
graphic conferences and practical work for the
students of the University.

Equipment: 22 individual work-rooms, more than 40
work places in common rooms ; 28 sleeping rooms,
5 of them double. Public aquarium, besides an
aquarium set aside with work benches. 1
gasoline boat St. Vincent; 3 .small boats (canot);
Important library.

Staff: Director, Professor O. Duboscq; Chef de
travaux. Mile. 0. Tuset; Assistant, M. LeCalves;
1 chief mechanician, M. Becque; 1 assistant;
1 chauffeur; 4 sailors; 1 laboratory assistant.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The prices of the
work places is fixed at 200 francs per month.
There is no charge to investigators from those
countries who have rented a table by the year
(4,000 francs).

Income: Source: Work tables and the sale of ani-
mals, 10,000 francs; budget from the University,
150,000 francs; Amount, 160,000 francs.

Provisions for publication of results: Generally in the
Archives de Zoologie Experimentale.

Station Biologique d'Arcachon ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1863.

Location: Arcachon (Girondc).

Organization to which attached: Private, belonging
to La Soci6t6 scicntifique d'Arcachon.

Purposes: Marine biology.

Equipment: 10 laboratories, 1 for physiological stud-
ies, all possessing fresh and sea water, gas and
electricity. Motor boat ; important library; rooms
for workers.

Staff: Scientific :

Director, Dr. R. Sigalas, Professor of Faculty
of Medicine, Bordeaux.
Librarian-keeper of collections, Com. Metzger.

118

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Maintenance and operation:

2 sailors, in charge of fisheries and laboratories.
1 porter.

Provisions for visiting investigators: On request to
the director, he puts at the disposal of workers
its laboratories, material, and library. Furnishes
animals and plants at cost to French and foreign
laboratories. Boat at disposal. Finds accommo-
dations for workers on larger fisheries boats.
Rooms at disposal of visitors for a small sum for
.service.

Income: From La Socidte scientifique d'Arcachon.

Provision for -publication of results: Bulletin of Station
Biologique d'Arcachon.

Laboratoire de Luc-sur-Mer de la Faculte des
Sciences de Caen ('37)

History or origin: Established 1880.

Location: Luc-sur-Mer (Calvados).

Organization to which attached: Small university of

Caen. State Institution.
Equipment: Working library, fishing boat, aquaria

for marine animals.
Staff: Director, M. Mercier, Professor, faculty;

Sub-Director, M. Audige, Professor, faculty;

Chief of Laboratory, Me. Le Roux; Assistant,

M. Guibe.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Rooms at the

disposition of workers.

Laboratoire de Zoologie et de Physiologie Maritimes
du College de France ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1859 by Coste.

Location: Concarneau (Finistere). On the sea-
front, between the pier and the fish market.
Annex on the Cigogne (archipel des Glenans).

Orga7iization to which attached: College de France.
State institution.

Purposes: Orientation: questions of pure and applied
marine biology.

(Scope of activities: Marine zoology and physiology,
chemistry.

Equipment: Laboratory building, 3 floors, 33 x 9
meters. Rooms and apparatus for chemistry,
physiology, histology, fishing. Aquarium of sea
water and sea-tanks. Collecting apparatus (ap-
pareils d'elevage). Motor-, sail-, row-boats. Li-
brary and collections.

Staff: M. Faral, administrator of the College de
France. MM. Duclaux, Faur^-Fremiet, Jolly,
Mayer, Nageotte, Nattan-Larrier, Pi6ron (Pro-
fessors at College de France). Sub-Director, R.

Legendre. Preparator, H. Bouxin. 2 operation

workers.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Between 20

and 25.
Income: Source: State.

Amount : About 80,000 francs.
Provision for publication of results: Travaux du

Laboratoire (suspended since the war).

Laboratoire Maritime (Aquarium et Musee de la

Mer) du Museum national d'Histoire

naturelle ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1924 at Saint
Servan, transferred in 1935 to a new locality at
Dinard opposite the preceding on the left bank
of the Rancc.

Location: Situated at Dinard (Ille et Vilaine), 17
Grande Rue, at the mouth of the Ranee.

Organization to which attached: The Museum of
Natural History, Paris.

Purposes: Researches in oceanography and marine
zoology; zoology, botany (algae), geology, physi-
ology, etc.

Scope of activities: All marine biological sciences
and fresh water in general.

Equipment: Four rooms for one or two workers;
one room for five workers; one laboratory for
physiological chemistry for three workers; one
large room for four workers: In all seven rooms
with a library of current literature. One large
library containmg periodicals and various treatises,
about 3,000 volumes. One sail boat with a
motor twenty-six tons, 24 hp. motor; one "scout"
and one "you-you," each with a 10 hp. motor,
and small boats.

Staff: Director, M. A. Gruvel, Professor at the
Museum; Sub-Director, M. H. Bertrand, D.Sc;
Four employees and boatmen.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The workers are
lodged in a beautiful villa adjacent to the labora-
tory and situated in a large garden. The villa
contains 15 rooms, each for one or two persons.

Income: Derived from the entrance fees to the
aquarium and a subvention from the government.

Provision for the publication of results: Bulletin du
Laboratoire maritime de Dinard which appears
irregularly in fascicules contains resumes of the
results of persons who work at the laboratory.

Laboratoire de Guethary ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1893.
Location: Guethary (Basses-Pyr^n^es).

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— FRANCE

119

Organisation to which attached: Annexed to the
Station Biologique d'Arcachon. Private insti-
tute. Personal laboratory of M. C. Sauvageau,
Professor on the Faculty of Sciences at Bordeaux.

Purposes: Marine biology.

Scope of activities: Fauna and flora, algology.

Staff: Director, M. C. Sauvageau, Honorary pro-
fessor of the Faculty of Sciences at Bordeaux.

Provisions for visiting investigators: At the disposition
of workers who apply to the Director of the
Station Biologique d'Arcachon.

Income: From the Society scientifique d'Arcachon.

Provision for publication of results: Bulletin de la
Station Biologique d'Arcachon.

Institut Oceanographique du Havre ('27, Magrini)

History or origin: Established 1918 and endowed by
a budget from the Municipality of Havre; is
aided morally and financially by the Society
des Amis de I'lnstitut Oceanographique du Havre.

Location: Havre.

Organization to which attached:

Scope of activities: Laboratory of marine biology,
aquarium of fresh water (Museum du Havre);
observations on board the steamers of Ponts et
Chauss^es (towing, fueling) and fishing barks.

Equipment: Laboratory, work-shop.

Staff: Director, Dr. Adrien Loir; Laboratory chief:
M. Henri Legangneux, pharmacist; Chief, bio-
logical works: M. fitienne Peau.

Provision for publication of results: In Bulletin de la
Soci^te des Amis de I'lnstitut Oceanographique
du Havre.

Laboratoire de Biologie Marine de "Le Croisic" ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1920, reattached
in 1922 to the School of the Practice of Medicine
and Pharmacy at Nantes (ficole de plein Exercice
de M^decine et de Pharmacie de Nantes).

Location: Le Croisic on the Loire Inferieure, France.

Organization to which attached: ficole de plein Exercice
de M^decine et de Pharmacie de Nantes.

Purposes: Marine biology, oceanography, oyster-
culture, fauna and flora of salt marshes. Open
in July, August, September.

Equipment: Working library; 1 laboratory building,
1 floor; 1 research boat Cytos; .several service
buUdings.

Staff: Director, Prof. Alphon.se Labbe, ficole de
m^decine de Nantes.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Seven or eight
can be accommodated.

Income: Source: Municipalite de Nantes.
Amount: 500 francs annually.

Laboratoire Marion de Marseille (Endoume) ('37)

History or origin: Created by F. Marion in 1834.
Location: On the sea shore at Marseille (Endoume),

France.
Organization to which attached: Faculty of Sciences

of Marseille.
Purposes and scope of activities: Instruction and

research in marine zoology.
Equipment: Aquarium; 4 research laboratories;

laboratory of physiological zoology; the library

is that of the Faculty of Sciences at Marseille.
Staff: Director, M. Kollmann, professor in the

Faculty of Sciences; chief in charge, M. M.

Van Gaver; in charge of work, Timon David.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Nine or ten

workers can be accommodated.
Income: Source: Budget of the Faculty of Sciences
and the Chair of Zoology.

Amount: About 20,000 francs.
Provision for the publication of residts: In Travaux

du Laboratoire de Zoologie et du Laboratoire

Marion (Extraits des Annales de la Faculte des

Sciences de Marseille); et Annales du Muse6

de Marseille.

Institut Oceanographique ('37)

History or origin: Created and endowed in 1906 by
S. A. S. Albert the First, Prince of Monaco, and
recognized by the French Government as a public
utility on May 16, 1906.

Location: 195 Rue St. Jacques, Paris.

Organization to which attached: Independent institu-
tion.

Purposes: The institution is for research and ad-
vanced and popular instruction in oceanography.

(Scope of activities: All kinds of oceanographic
researches and the physiology of marine animals.
The work at sea is conducted in the coastal labora-
tories (laboratories of the Oceanographic Mu.seum
of Monaco and laboratories of National Educa-
tion).

Equipment: Laboratories of three services especially
equipped for researches in oceanography and
phy.siology. Special library of oceanography to
which is attached the library of the Zoological
Society of France.

Staff: Assistant Secretary, M. Richet.

Professors: L. Fage, biological oceanography,
Francis Bernard, assistant. Physical oceanog-
raphy, this year replaced by conferences

120

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

conducted by various scientists. Paul Portier,
physiology of marine organisms, M. Fontaine,
assistant.
Provisions for visiting investigators: The laboratories
are open to French and foreign investigators
accepted by the professors.
Income: Endowment made in 1922 by S. A. S. Albert
ler. Prince de Monaco, and the receipts from the
Musee Oceanographique de Monaco.
Provision for publication of results: Annales de I'lnsti-
tut Oceanographique which con.stitute annually a
volume of about 400 quarto pages.

Office Scientifique et Technique des Peches
Maritimes ('37)

History or origin: By law of December 31, 1918.
Location: 3, Avenue Octave Gr^ard, Paris.
Organization to which attached: Ministfere de la Marine

Marchande.
Purposes: Scientific and technical researches con-
cerning marine fisheries.
/Scope of activities: Chemical and biological researches
concerning fish. Technical research concerning
fishing gear, nets, oils, preservation, sanitary
control of oyster culture, and studies on the
wholesomeness of shell-fish.
Equipment: Laboratories (See attached note) and
research vessel. Scientific laboratory at the office
in Paris. Chemical laboratory at the office in
Paris. Technological and Low Temperature Lab-
oratory in Paris. Laboratory of Ostrea culture
in Paris. Biological laboratory at Boulogne-sur-
Mer. Biological Laboratory at Lorient. Bio-
logical Laboratory at La Rochelle. Biological
Laboratory at Biarritz. Laboratory of Sanitary
Control at Auray. Laboratory of Sanitary Con-
trol at St. Servan. Laboratory of Sanitary
Control at La Rochelle. Laboratory of Sanitary
Control at La Tremblade. Laboratory of Sani-
tary Control at Arcachon.
Staff: Director, M. Edouard le Danois, Dr. Sc.
Administrative Personnel: Administrative Secre-
tary, M. D. Remy, Lie. es. 1, 8 collaborators.
Scientific Personnel: 5 chiefs of laboratories; 6

preparators.
Personnel of Sanitary Control: Inspector general,
M. L. Lambert, Dr. Pha. ; 7 regional inspectors;
4 laboratory assistants; 10 attendants; 1
employee.
In command of the research vessel: M. L. Beaug^,
Capitaine de Frigate de R&erve, Commandant,
le navire dont le port d'attache est h, Lorient.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Foreign scientists
can be received in the different laboratories after
an understanding with the director of each
establishment.

Income: Amount: The total annual budget of the
office is about 3,000,000 Frs.
Source: Derived from taxes levied on the fishing
vessels, owners of fishing establishments, fish
packers. To these are added the products of
sales of the publications of Sanitary Control.

Provision for the publication of results: Notes and
M6moires and Revue des Travaux. The Memoirs
of which a list is on the backs of the new volumes
published since 1928 from la Revue des Travaux
de rOSice des Peches Maritimes.

The personnel of the different laboratories is
as follows:

Laboratoire de Boulogne-sur-Mer — 17, Boulevard de
Chatillon: M. Le Gall, Agr6g6 d'Universit6, Chief
of the Laboratory ; M. Furnestin, Preparator; 1 labora-
tory boy; 1 laboratory aide.

Laboratoire de Lorient — Port de Peche de Lorient
K^roman; M. Desbrosses, Lie. es sc, Chief of the
Laboratory; M. Priol, Preparator; 1 laboratory boy;
1 woman servant.

Laboratoire de La Rochelle — 74, AUees du Mail: M.
Belloc, Lie. es so., Chief of the Laboratory; M.
Cadenat. Lee. es. se., Preparator; 1 laboratory boy;
1 housekeeper.

Laboratoire de Biarritz — Palais de la Mer k Biarritz:
M. Arne, Lie. es. sc.;M. X. . . . Preparator.

Laboratoires de Chimie — d'essais technique et frigori-
fiques — et de biologie ostreicole, 3, Avenue Octave
Gr^ard a Paris: M. Boury, Agricultural Engineer,
Chief of the Chemistry Laboratory; M. Bonfils,
Preparator, in charge of low temperature studies;
M. L. Borde, Preparator, in charge of oyster culture.

Sanitary Control: Inspector General, M. Lambert, Dr.
Pha., 1 employee. Regional Inspector of Le Havre:
M. Chevallier. Regional Inspector of St. Servan:
M. Jardin, M. , Laboratory Assistant. Re-
gional Inspector of Brest: M. Lesquin. Regional
Inspectorof d'Auray:M. Herman ;M. Mercier, Labora-
tory Assistant; M. le Goff, Assistant; M. Ligeour,
Assistant; M. Vaugrenard, Assistant. Regional In-
spector of LaRochelle: M. Dupain; M. Chemin,
Laboratory Assistant; M. Adrien, Assistant. Re-
gional Inspector of La Tremblade-Marennes: M.
Chaux-Thevenin, Lie. es sc; M. Baron, Preparator
Aide; Mme. Baron, Laboratory Assistant; Mm.
Bordin, Charles, fiveque, Fayard, Le Baron, Assist-
ants. Regional Inspector of d'Arcachon: M. Ladouce,
Dr. Pha.; Mme. Lanau, Laboratory aide; M. Raby,
Assistant; M. Deyzi, Assistant; M. Clemenceau,
Assistant.

The boat Pourquoi-Pas (Laboratory of marine re-
search of I'Ecole Pratiques des Hautes fitudes

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— FRANCE

121

attached to the Museum national d'Histoire
naturelle)

This vessel and M. Charcot were lost on the

west coast of Iceland on September 16, 1936, but

subsequent publications may contain accounts of

scientific results.

History or origin: Established in 1911.

Location: Usually at St. Servan (Ille-et Villaine),
but may change ports.

Organization to which attached: State.

Purposes: Any scientific investigations in connection
with the sea.

Scope of activities: All regions including polar.

Equipment: The Pourquoi-Pas was a 3-mast boat,
500 tons, steam engine of 500 hp. Sounding,
dredging apparatus, etc. Laboratories, and could
accommodate a major scientific establishment of
4 to 7 persons. Cruises were available from the
military Marine for tliree months of the year.

Library: 1,000 volumes, physical, biological
oceanography; general science; literature.

Staff: Director, Dr. J. B. Charcot; Technical and
clerical (variable) : Generally 4 to 7.

Provisions for visiting investigators:

Income: Source: State, Military Marine and In-
struction Department combined.
Amount: About 100,000 francs a year. Depended
on cruises and necessary repairs.

Provision for publication of results: Rapport annuel
dans le Bulletin du Service hydrographique.

Service Central Hydrographique (de la Marine) ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1817.

Location: 13 Rue de I'Universite, Paris.

Organization to which attached: Ministry of the
Military Marine.

Purposes: Setting up and publication of marine
charts, nautical works, tide tables for navigators;
instruction for (a) young hydrographic engineers
and foreign officers, (b) for marine officers candi-
dates for deputy hydrographers.

(Scope of activities: Improvement of marine charts
and nautical works; study of coastal processes in
collaboration with the Department of Public
Works; improvement of chronometers, sextants,
sounding instruments, etc.; perfection of me-
teorological observations on board ships. Inci-
dentally, support of oceanographic studies.

Equipment: 1 building. Service Hydrographique a
Paris, 85 m X 25 m, offices, studios for design,
engraving, photography printing.

Library, 60,000 volumes, store-room.

DISPLACE-
SURVETING VESSELS MENT OFFICERS CREW

Ypres 654 7 104

La Perouse 793 10 105

Utile 323 4 67

G.vsTON RiviER 320 2 55

ESTAFETTE 320 3 31

Sentinelle 320 3 31

Octant 320 3 31

Astrolabe 320 3 31

DuBOURDiEu 460 2 64

Crabe 370 17

tourteau 360 17

Seminole 800 2 51

Cap-Verd 333 30

Staff: Hydrographer, Ing6nieur Hydrographe G6-

n^ral Cot.
Assistant Hydrographer, Ing^nieur Hydrographe

en Chef de l'^ Classe Courtier.
Head of 1st Section (General Hydrography),

Ing^nieur Hydrographe en Chef de 2"°' Class

P61issier.
Head of 2nd Section (Coasts of France), Ing6nieur

Hydrographe en Chef de 1" Classe Volmat.
Head of 3rd Section (Charts and Archives),

Ing^nieur Hydrographe en Chef de V Classe

Ricard.
Head of 4th Section (Sailing Directions), Capi-

taine de Frigate Saillant.
Head of 5th Section (Scientific Instruments),

Ing^nieur Hydrographe en Chef de 2^ Classe

Villain.
Head of 6th Section (Tides), Ingenieur Hy-
drographe en Chef de 2" Classe Villain.
Head of 7th Section (Maritime Meteorology),

Capitaine de Vaisseau Ladonne.
1 technical counsellor for oceanography.
20 engineers, officers in Paris.
20 officers on board ship.
20 deputy hydrographers.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Up to the
present the Service has entertained only 3 engi-
neers or foreign officers per year.
Income: Budget for 1932, 7,000,000 francs; 1933,

5,600,000 francs.
Provision for publication of results: Annales hy-
drographiques; Recherches hydrographiques sur
le Regime des Cotes; Annuaire des Maries des
Cotes de France; Tables des Maries des Colonies
frangaises de I'Atlantique, de I'Ocean Indien,
des mers de Chine.

122

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Station Biologique de Roscoff (Laboratoire Lacaze

Duthiers) ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1871 by H. Lacaze-
Dutliiers and enlarged by his successor Yves
Delage in 1909. More recently, in 1930, new
additions to grounds and real estate have doubled
the area of the station which is now about 60 ares.

Location: Roscoff (Finistere).

Organization to which attached: Attached adminis-
tratively to the Faculty of Sciences of the Uni-
versity of Paris. With the Laboratoire Arago
de Banyuls sur Mer it constitutes the National
Institute of Marine Biology of the University of
Paris. Each of these laboratories is autonomous
and has its own director and its own budget.

Purposes: All researches relative to marine biology
in the most general sense; also instruction of
students.

Scope of activities: Laboratories fitted for researches
in zoology, parasitology, botany, algology, his-
tology, embryology, physiology, bacteriology,
physics, and biological chemistry; also laboratories
for instruction.

Equipment: 25 large stalls for investigators; 10
small stalls for beginners in research; laboratory
of physiology; stalls for physics and chemistry;
dark-rooms for photography; sea water, fresh
water, gas, and electric current everywhere;
vacuum in the rooms for physiology, physics,
and chemistry; aquarium room with 2 large basins
and 47 stalls assigned to investigators; library,
2,000 volumes, 5,000 brochures and reprints, 70
periodicals, altogether about 10,000 volumes;
lodging, 40 rooms in which 50 people can be
accommodated. Boats: Dxjndee with a motor,
18 tons, 10.5 m long, power 30 c.v.; gasoline boat,
4 m; small boats. Automobile, 1 omnibus, 14
c.v., 17 seats and 1 conveyance, 16 c.v., 7 seats,
with an effective range of 100 kil. around Roscoff;
blacksmith shop, mechanical shop, locksmith
shop, carpenter shop.

Staff: Director, Charles Perez, Professor of Zoology
at the Faculty of Sciences of Paris, Member of the
Academy of Sciences. Sub-director, Georges
Teissier, Chief of Investigations at the Faculty of
Sciences of Paris. Assistant, Marcel H^rubel.
Assistant prcparator, Pierre Manigault. Sub-
ordinate personnel : 5 marines (seamen, fishermen) ;
1 porter.

Provisiofis for visiting investigators: Tables may be
rented by governments, academies, universities,
or other oSicial foreign organizations or institu-

tions. Requests should be addressed to the
Director, M. Charles Perez, 1, Rue Victor Cousin,
Paris 5.
Income: Sources: Budget from the Faculty of

Sciences of the University of Paris, rent for

tables, special donations.
Amount: About 250,000 francs per annum.
Provision for publication of results: Travaux de la
Station Biologique de RoscoiT; Memoirs or mono-
graphs published singly, since 1923. "Les Presses
Universitaires de France," Paris. The investiga-
tors are free to publish their results in periodicals
of their own choosing.

Station Biologique de Sete ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1896. Founded
by the University of Montpellier by means of
state and regional contributions.

Location: Sete, Herault (the spelling "Sete" is the
new official spelling for Cette).

Organization to which attached: The Institute of
Zoology and of General Biology of the University
of Montpellier and Ecole pratique des Hautes
Etudes, Paris.

Purposes: Biological investigations, as stated below.

Scope of activities: The biological study of the fauna
and flora of the shore, the sea, the salt lakes, the
salt marshes, and the fresh waters of Bas-Langue-
doc; experimental researches; the site of the
Laboratory of the Biology of the Protista of the
Ecole des Hautes Etudes, Paris.

Equipment: 2 buildings. Of these the principal one
contains research laboratories, 10 rooms, of which
8 are individual and 2 for groups; 1 room for
practical instruction; 1 room for collections; a
library; 2 rooms for a public aquarium; local
quarters for investigators.

The second building is an annex in which there
are a workshop, experimental aquaria, machines,
hangar, garage, special experimental equipment
for the culture of microorganisms and small
metazoa.

A landing for a power boat 8 meters long
Fishing gear.

Marine material is supplied by the important
fishing fleet of Sete.

Staff: Director, Professor E. Chatton of the Univer-
sity of Montpellier. Assistants: M"" B. Biecheler,
Dr. Meyrueis, M"" Brachon. Technical and
clerical: 1. Maintenance and operation: 2.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Workers are
lodged at the station, fed at their own expense by

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— FRANCE

123

the "concierge," if desired. All the resources of
the station, boat and fishermen, are at the dis-
posal of workers.

Income: Sources: University of Montpellier, the
State, City of Sete, etc.

Amount: About 35,000 francs annually. The
personnel is paid separately.

Provision for the publication of results: Travaux de
la Station de Sete, of which 19 volumes have
appeared since 1896; they are being continued.

Station Biologique de Tamaris sur Mer ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1901.

Location: Tamaris sur Mer (Var.) near Toulon.

Organization to which attached: University of Lyon
at Ecole des Hautes Etudes.

Purposes: Experimental researches on marine or-
ganisms; studies of the Toulonnais littoral fauna
and flora.

Scope of activities: Special researches in biochemistry
and the electro-physiology of invertebrates.

Equipment: Laboratory of biochemistry, 1 room
6 m. X 6 m., 2 rooms 3 m. by 3 m. ; electro-physiol-
ogy, 1 room 6 m. X 6 m., 1 room 3 m. by 3 m.;
museum, the collections are devoted to the
fauna and flora of the road-stead of Toulon.
Gasoline boat, 6 m. long, for fishing and dredging
on the bottom from 2 to 25 meters in depth
and for collecting plankton; one boat 6 m. long,
with a glass bottom for making biological observa-
tions; and one canoe. 6 bed-chambers for
workers.

Staf: Director, Doctor H. Cardot, Professor of
Physiology of the Faculty of Sciences of Lyon.
Sub-director, Doctor A. Bonnet, in charge of the
courses in zoology, of the Faculty of Sciences
at Lyon. Assistant, Doctor A. Jullien. 1 fi.sher-
man-caretaker.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The station can
admit about 10 investigators, nothing is demanded
of them except reimbursement for room service
and from those who take lodgings.

Income: Sources: Regular grant from the Ministry
of Public Instruction, 25,000 fr. Regular grant
from I'Ecole pratique des Hautes Etudes, 5,000
fr. Various subventions from scientific funds.
Ministry of Marine, Director of Hygiene, etc.

Provisions for publication of results: None. The
station sends each year a series of separates of the
work published during the course of the year for
purposes of exchange. 160 notes were published
from 1927 to 1936

Station Zoologique de I'Universite de Paris a
Villefranche sur Mer ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1886 by Professor
A. Korstneff; functioned until 1914 as a private
laboratory. In 1914 it was transferred to the
Russian Government and was attached to the
Russian Ministry of Public Instruction. Since
1931 the station has been attached to the Univer-
sity of Paris.

Location: Villefranche sur Mer, Alpes MaritLmes,
France.

Organization to which attached: The University of
Paris and functions as regards administration
as an annex of the Laboratoire Arago a Banyuls
sur Mer but with an autonomous budget.

Pxirposes: Study of pelagic fauna, macro- and micro-
plankton, which is particularly rich in the Bay of
Villefranche sur Mer and its immediate vicinity.
Researches by specialists on different problems
of marine biology, zoology, botany, bacteriology.
Practical and theoretical instruction in zoology
Is given for students of the universities and the
upper schools.

Scope of activities: Investigations on the plankton
and its distribution (foraminifera, radiolaria);
studies of vertical and horizontal submarine
currents.

Equipment: Room for practical work for 30 students;
laboratories for 10 separate workers; 10 large
aquaria, installations for 24 research aquaria;
museum of local fauna; library of 12,000 volumes;
motor boat of 4 tons for collecting pelagic or-
ganisms and handling small dredges, boat with
oars and sail; 8 bedrooms for 16 workers.

Staff: Director in common with the station and
laboratory at Arago a Banyuls sur Mer, 0.
Duboscq, Professor at the Sorbonne. Sub-
director, G. Tregouboff, radiolaria and parasitic
protista. Assistant, Mr. le Docteur Roger,
Etude des MoUusques. 1 mechanic, 1 fisherman,
1 woman housekeeper, 1 concierge.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The station can
receive at one time, 30 workers of which 16 can
be given lodgings. The workers of all countries
are admitted on the payment of the subscription
of 200 fr. per month. Workers registered in the
French universities and the subjects of countries
that rent work tables in the station (4000 fr.
per year) are exempt from the payment of fees.

Income: Annual grant from the Ministry of Public
Instructions, 120,000 fr. ; in addition to which

124

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

is the amount derived from the hire of work
tables by visiting foreigners.
Provision for publication of results: Travaux de la
Station Zoologique de Villefranche sur Mer, in
which are assembled the memoirs and the notes
published in the different scientific publications
based upon researches conducted by scientific
investigators at the station.

Station Zoologique de Wimereux
(Pas de Calais) ('37)
History or origin: Founded in 1874 by Alfred Giard.
Location: On the sea-shore, 2 km. north of the village

of Wimereux (station Bains de Mer), 7 km. north

of Boulogne-sur Mer, 260 km. from Paris.
Organization to which attached: Faculty of Science,

University of Paris.
Purposes: Research and instruction in zoology and

botany.

(Scope of activities: Study of marine and littoral flora
and fauna; all questions of biological and related
subjects.

Equipment: 1 laboratory (12 places), annex for
physiology; aquarium (sea water circulation);
museum; library; 1 gasoline boat; 1 row boat; 11
sleeping rooms for workers.

Staff: Director, Prof. M. Caullery; Assistant, L.
Callien; 1 keeper; 1 mariner during the season.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Lodging and
table for workers. About 15 can be accommo-
dated.

Income: Regular resources, about 40,000 francs.

Provision for publication of results: Travaux de la
Station Zoologique de Wimereux, quarto, 11
volumes published, (the twelfth in course of
publication).

GERMANY TO MONACO, INCLUSIVE

Germany

Deutsche wissenschaftliche Komissioii fiir
Meeresforschung ('37)

History or origin: The Commission was established
in 1901 under the name the Deutsche Komission
fiir die Internationale Komission fiir Erforschung
der Nordeuropiiischen Meere.

Location: Office of administrative head, Berlin W. 9,
Pot.sdamerstrasse 10-11.

Organization to which attached: Reichs-und Preus-
sisches Ministerium fiir Ernahrung und Land-
wirtschaft, (at Berlin W. 8, Wilhelmstr. 72).

Purposes: The principal purpose is the scientific
investigation of fisheries problems and those
physical, chemical, and biological aspects of the
sea which influence fisheries.

Scope of activities: 1. To understand so fully the
interrelations of life processes in the sea that
important questions of sea fisheries can be com-
pletely answered at any time. The work of the
D. W. K. deals with (a) concrete specific problems
and (b) the fundamental biological problems of
fishes.

2. To obtain knowledge of the general relations
of the sea, its physical conditions, its chemical
compo.sition, and its currents, especially those
which may transport fish eggs and larvae, the
exchange of water between the different seas and
between the different parts of the same sea. The
work of the Komission therefore is based on

results obtained through hydrographic and
oceanographic investigations.

3. The more restricted investigations of fisher-
ies-biology include (a) specific parts of the sea or
specific fishes, (b) special important fundamental
problems. To the latter class belong the in-
vestigations of Brandt on the nitrogen relations
in the sea and of von Buddenbrock on the action
of different .salt concentrations on life in the sea.
In its international cooperative work two prob-
lems, the investigation of the races of fishes and
the fluctuations in abundance, stand foremost.
The work in fisheries-biology in its narrower sense
is divided into that for the North Sea and that
for the Baltic.

4. Another .section of the work deals with
fisheries statistics.

5. The D. W. K., from the beginning of the
International Council for the Exploration of the
Sea, till 1915, and then again since 1926, has been
a member of this Council, its representatives on
it being: Staatssekretiir i. R. Dr. Heinrici and
Professor Dr. Hagmeier.

Equipment: The Deutsche wissenschaftliche Komis-
sion utilizes in its researches other institutions
which have extensive equipment. They are the
Biological Station on Helgoland, the Zoological
Institute at Hamburg, the Deutscher Seefischerei-
Verein at Berlin, and the Deutsche Seewarte at
Hamburg, and has relations with the Institut fiir
Meereskunde in Berlin. The Deutsche wissen-

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— FRANCE, GERMANY

125

schaftliche Komission has at its disposal the
research vessel Poseidon.
Staff: Members of the Commission:
Vorsitzender: Dr. jur. C. Heinrici, Staatssekretar

i. R.
Stellvertretender Vorsitzender: Profe.ssor Dr.

Hagmeier, Helgoland.
Ehrenmitglieder: Geheimrat Professor Dr. Hen-
king, Berlin, Professor Schott, Hamburg.
Ordentliche Mitglieder : Professor v. Buddenbrock,
Halle a/S; Doctor Erich Fischer, Berlin;
Profe.ssor Hentschel, Hamburg; Professor Dr. B.
Schulz, Hamburg; Studiendirektor Dr. Strodt-
mann, Hamburg; Professor Dr. Schnakenbeck,
Hamburg; Director R. Ahlf, We.sermiinde.
Ausserordentliche Mitglieder: Doctor Hertling,
Helgoland; Professor Dr. Witter, Berlin; Pro-
fessor Dr. Wulff, Helgoland; Dr. Biickmann,
Helgoland, also Secretary of the Commission.
Promsiojis for visiting investigators:
Income: For 1926, 100 000 RM; for 1927-1930,
each year 500 000 RM; for 1931-1932 about
100 000 RM each year. These amounts do not
include the expense of the operation of the
vessel Poseidon.
Provision for publication of results: Berichte der
Deutschen wLs,senschaftlichen Komission fiir
Meeresforschung, Neue Folge. (Im Verlage der
E. Schweizerbart'schen Verlagsbuchhandlung
(Erwin Nagele) G.m.b.H., Stuttgart-W., Jo-
hannes.str. 3 a). In addition to the series men-
tioned, the Reich.sministerium fiir Ernahrung und
Landwirtischaft publishes yearly a report entitled
"Jahresbericht iiber die Deutsche Fischerei."

Fischerei-biologische Abtheilung im Deutschen
Seefischerei-Verein ('37)

History or origin: Established in the year 1885.

Location: Berlin S.W. 11, Hedemannstras.se. 33.

Organization to which attached: Deutscher See-
fischerei-Verein.

Purposes: 1. Investigations in fishery biology as
part of the work of the International Council
for the Exploration of the Sea.

2. Special investigations for particular fisheries.

Scope of activities: The North Sea, the Baltic, and
the North Atlantic.

Equipment: A research ship Poseidon and chartered
fishery boats.

Staff: Dr. Erich Fischer; Dr. P. F. Meyer; Dr.
Altnoder.

Provisions for visiting investigators:

hicome: Source : Reichsernahrungsministerium.
Amount: 10,000-12,000 RM.

Provision for the publication of results: Abhandlungen
des Deutschen Seefischerei Vereins, Berichte der
Deutschen wissenschaftlichen Komission fiir
Meeresforschung, Zeitschrift fiir Fischerei und
deren Hilfswissen.schaften und Die deutsche
Fischwirtschaft.
Institut und Museum fiir Meereskunde ('37)

History or origin: E.stablished in 1900 as the result
of the efforts of Freiherr von Richthofen and
others attached to the University of Berlin to
establish an institute which would have for its
scope the entire field of oceanography. Three
published accounts of the history of the Institut
are referred to in the footnote below. ^

Location: Berlin N. W. 7, Georgenstrasse 34-36.

Organization to which attached: Friedrich Wilhelms
Universitat.

Purposes: Research and instruction.

Scope of activities: (a) Oceanographic section, physi-
cal, dynamical, and chemical oceanography,
marine meteorology, continental hydrography
limnology, biology, cartography.

(b) Economic geography in its widest sense,
general and theoretical economic geography and
economic geography of particular parts of the
land; world economics, navigation, and harbors.

Equipment: (a) 2 buildings of three stories in Berlin.
On the ground floor and the first story is a
museum which contains a section for ship and
machine building, navigation, features of coasts
and harbors, life-saving, sea fisheries, biology,
oceanography, collection of models and instru-
ments, history of battleships.

On the second story are the work rooms of the
scientific officers, laboratory, library with 20,000
books and periodicals, 15,000 separates, collection
of photographs with about 12,000 negatives,
collection of 6,000 cards, and instrumentarium, 1
small and 1 large lecture hall.

(b) A small one-story building on Sakrower
Sea near Berlin with instruments for limnological
work, 1 motor boat and 1 row boat.

Staff: Director, Prof. Dr. Albert Defant, o. Profe.ssor
der Ozeanographie an der Universitat Berlin.

' Denkschrift iiber die Begriindung und Ausgestaltung
des Instituts und Museums fiir Meereskunde zu Berlin,
Juli, 1901.

Das Institut und Museum fiir Meereskunde an der konigl.
Friedrich Wilhelms-Universitjit in Berlin. (Lenz, Ges-
chichte der Universitat Berlin, Bd. III.)

Das Institut und Museum fiir Meereskunde an der
Friedrich Wilhelms-Universitiit in Berlin, Marz, 1929.

126

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

5 Section chiefs and custodians: Biology, Pro-
fessor Dr. Thilo I&umbach. Professor of
economic geography, Professor Doctor Carl
Troll, o. Professor der Wirtschaftsgeographie
an der Universitat Berlin. Oceanography,
Professor Dr. Georg Wiist, a.o. Professor an
der Universitat Berlin. Hydrography and
limnology. Dr. Lotte Moller, a.o. Professor
an der Universitat Berlin. Navigation and
Cartography, Dr. Th. Stock.
3 Assistants: Oceanography, Dr. Gtinther Die-
trich; Cartography, Cand. Phil. Bittelmeyer;
Economic geography, Dr. R. Schottenloher.
Draughtsmen and computers; building superin-
tendent; 4 office as.sistants; a few museum
guards.
Provision for visiting investigators: Work places in

the laboratory and in the library.
Income: At present about 40,000 R.M. without
the salaries of the officers. In normal times
considerably more.
Provision for publication of results: Wissenschaftliche
Veroffentlichungen : Veroffentlichungen des Ins-
tituts fiir Meereskunde, Alte Folge 15 Hefte;
Neue Folge: (A) Geographischnaturwis.senschaft-
liche Reihe, bisher 33 Hefte; (B) Historisch-
Volkswirtschaftliche Reihe, bisher 11 Hefte.
Volkstiimliche Reihen: (a) Meereskunde, Samml-
ung volkstiimlicher Vortrage, 205 Hefte; (b)
Das Meer in volkstiimlichen Darstellungen, 5
Bande.
Mit dem Institut fur Meereskunde verhunden: (a)
Archiv und Ge.schiiftsstelle der Deutschen At-
lantischen Expedition (METEOR-Expedition). (b)
Herausgabe der Wissensschaftlichen Ergebnisse
der Deutschen Atlanti-schen Expedition, bisher 14
Bande und 9 Lieferungen.

Nautische Abteilung, Oberbefehlshaber der

Kriegsmarine (Hydrographic Department

of the Navy) ('37)

Location: Tirpitzufer 72/76 Berlin, W. 35.
Staff: Director, Kapitan zur See Kurze.

Head of 1st Section (Books and Manuals of
Maritime Sciences, Notices to Mariners, Wire-
less Notices), Oberregierungsrat Schellong.

Head of 2nd Section (Cartography and Surveys),
Korvettenkapitan Hain.

Head of 3rd Section (General Affairs connected
with Navigation), Korvettenkapitan Fallier.

Head of 4th Section (Physics and Nautical In-
struments) Regierungsrat Dr. Gabler.

Head of 5th Section (Oceanography and Nautical
Education), Konteradmiral a. D. Dr. Conrad.

Equipment:

DIRPLACE-
8UHVETING VESSELS MENT OFFICERS CREW

Meteor 1,200 6 108

Peilboot II 90 1 13

Peilboot V 90 1 13

Deutsche Seewarte ('37)

History or origin: The Deutsche Seewarte was
established in the year 1868 as the Norddeutsche
Seewarte, and in the year 1875 it was taken over
by the German Government as the Deutsche
Seewarte.
Location: Hamburg 3, Alfred Wegener- Weg 1.
Organization to which attached: Independent, imme-
diately .subordinate to the Reichs Ministry of
Communication.
Purposes: Investigations in the fields of navigation,
in.struments, oceanography and tides, meteorol-
ogy, and astronomy for the promotion of maritime
commerce and the economy of the sea.
Scope of activities: The work of the Seewarte is
divided into two sections, the Nautical-Hydro-
graphic and the Meteorological.

The work of the Nautical-Hydrographic section

comprises as follows:
The collection and evaluation of observations
made on ships, the testing and further devel-
opment of nautical instruments and methods;
The magnetism of the earth and of ships,

astronomy and time-service;
This section has charge of the library and

publishes the periodicals mentioned below.
The Meteorological section has charge of a
synoptical weather service for navigation and
agriculture, as well as for aerial flights over the
sea; maritime meteorology and the meteorology
and climatology of foreign countries; the testing
and development of meteorological instruments.
Staff: President of the Deutsche Seewarte, Konter-
admiral a. D. Dr. Spiess. Other members of the
staff are as follows:

Oberregierungsrat: Prof. Dr. Kleinschmidt (Ab-
teilungsleiter Wetterdienst) ; Dr. von Schubert
(Abteilung.sleiter Nautik u. Hydrographie) ;
Prof. Dr. Castens; R. Karbiner; Prof. Dr. E.
Kuhlbrodt; Prof. Dr. B. Schulz; Dr. A.
Repsold; Prof. Dr. H. Seilkopf.
Regierungsrat: Dr. Burath; Dr. Georgi; Dr. Lohr;
Dr. Markgraf ; Dr. Pummercr; Dr. Schumacher;

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— GERMANY

127

Dr. Semmelhack; Dr. Soltau; Ullrich; Liick;

Oellrich; Lay.

There are also a considerable number of scien-
tific and nautical helpers, as well as the personnel
for the administration.
Provision for visiting investigators: For visitors
engaged in scientific research a small number
of work places can be provided.
Provisions for publication of results: Periodicals
published :

1. Annalen der Hydrographie und maritimen

Meteorologie (1937 erscheint der 65 Band).

2. Aus dem Archiv der Deut.schen Seewarte

(1937 erscheint der 57 Band).

3. Der Seewart.

In addition to the regularly appearing periodi-
cals there are numerous other publication.s of
which a list is given on the inside of the covers
of the individual parts of the Ann. d. Hydr. and
also in the Jahresbericht der Deutschen Seewarte.

Biologische Anstalt auf Helgoland ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1892. For its
principal purposes: (1) Researches in pure marine
biology by means of general biology, physical
chemistry, (2) zoological and botanical investiga-
tions in the North Sea, and (3) applied biology,
through investigations in the service of fisheries.
In the biology of fishes the following were the
principal tasks: Investigation of the fishing
grounds (the configuration of the bottom, the
fauna, and the production of edible fish), experi-
ments in fish culture, researches for the purpose of
ascertaining the proper limits of closed seasons for
edible fish, monographic descriptions of the most
important commercial fishes, and the investiga-
tion of the plankton as the basic source of food in
the sea.'

• For the history of the Biological Station on Helgoland,
see article by Prof. W. Mielck entitled "Die Biologische
Anstalt auf Helgoland und die Seefischereiforschung":
Cons. Internat. Expl. Mer, Rapports et Proces-Verbaux
des R6unions, vol. 47, part 3, pp. 17 to 33, 1928.

Other pertinent articles are as follows:
Mielck, Wilhelm, Die Preussische Biologische Anstalt auf
Helgoland: In Brauer, Lud'olph (et al.), Forschungsins-
titute, vol. 2, pp. 175-199, 6 plates, 2 figures each. 1930.
Hagmeier, A., Aufgaben und Bedeutung der Preussischen
Biologischen Anstalt auf Helgoland: Der Biologe, Heft
7, 3 Jahrgang, Juli, 1934, pp. 161-166, figs. 1-4.
Hertling, H., Die Biologische Anstalt auf Helgoland als
Meeresstation und Lehrinstitut: Ibid., pp. 167-173,
figs. 5-10.
Hagmeier, A., Okologische Untersuehungen der Biologi-
schen Anstalt. (a) Bodenfauna: Ibid., pp. 173-174.
WulfiF, A., Okologische Untersuehungen der Biologischen
Anstalt. (b) Plankton: Ibid., pp. 175-177.

Location: On the Island of Helgoland in the North
Sea, 67 kilometers northwest from the coastal
city of Cuxhaven.

Organization to which attached: Independent, but
immediately subordinate to the MinLsterium fiir
Wissenschaft, Erziehung, und Volksbildung.

Purposes and scope of activities: I. In the field of
marine biology and oceanography:

1. Scientific investigations especially in the
North Sea and northern waters;

2. Scientific and practical work in applied
oceanography (for the use of high-seas fisheries,
coastal fisheries, and land reclamation) ;

3. Zoological and botanical marine station
with work places and the supply of living and
preserved material for research.

II. In the field of ornithology:

4. Ornithological station (investigation of bird
migration, bird banding, protection of nature).

III. For the completion of the instruction in the

universities and the advancement of teach-
ing of natural sciences:

5. Provisions for instruction in marine biology
and ornithology for students and teachers;

6. Supply of living and preserved material for
instruction, and supply of North Sea animals,
sea water, and algae for aquaria.

Connected with the Biologische Anstalt there are

on Helgoland : An exhibition aquarium. North Sea

mu.seum, seismological station, and a work place for

the representative the Deutsche wissenschaftliche

Komission fiir Meeresforschung.

In Wesermiinde : Work places for the fisheries

investigation of the Biological In.stitute in

Helgoland and of the Institute of Sea Fisheries

in Wesermiinde.

Special subjects: Plankton, bacteriology, biology

of useful fishes, oysters, lobsters, biology and

physiology of other marine animals and algae,

especially in their economic relations, marine

fauna, fisheries biology, hydrography, marine

bottom deposits, investigation of bird migra-

Schreiber, E., Forschungen an Meeresalgen: Ibid., pp.

177-178.
Buckmann, A., Die angewandte Meeresforschung an der

Biolog. Anstalt. (a) Fischereiforschung: Ibid., pp.

178-180.
Erdrnann, W., Die Angewandte Meeresforschung an der

Biolog. Anstalt. (b) Ziichtung von Meerestieren :

Ibid., pp. 180-182, fig. 11.
Wohlenberg, E., Die Angewandte Meeresforschung an der

Biolog. Anstalt. (c) liiologische Landgewinnungs-

arbeiten im Wattenmeer: Ibid., pp. 182-183, figs. 12-13.
Drost, R., Die Vogelwarte Helgoland: Ibid., pp. 184-186,

figs. 14-15.

128

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

tion and related problems, meteorology, regLs-

tration of seismic activities.
Equipment: A principal building on the open sea
with laboratories, collecting rooms, sorting rooms,
administrative rooms, and public aquarium (seven
large and fifty small tanks), 6 stories, 960 sq.m.
Laboratory on the harbor 3 stories, 382 sq.m.
Ornithological station 3 stories, 336 sq.m. Trap-
ping grounds of the ornithological station 2600
sq.m. The Museum, the North Sea Museum,
and Bird Migration Museum, 2 stories, 180 sq.m.
Library, more than 13,000 bound volumes and
more than 13,000 unbound volumes. Research
ship Makrele, 34 m. long, 420 p.s. Diesel motor,
speed 10 knots per hour (for longer voyages, the
institution has at its service the Governmental
research ship Poseidon, 46 m. long). 2 motor
boats. Several small row and sail boats. Several
houses. Shed for fishing gear, boats, gasoline
storage, etc. Seismological room, 1st order,
142 sq.m. 5 servants houses. Studentenheim
"Wilh. Mielck Haus," 27 beds. Work place
for the Deutsche Wiss. Komm. fiir Meeresforsch-
ung. Branch Laboratory in List, on the Island
of Sylt, in the service of the Listitute's investiga-
tion of tide lands and oysters. Im Wesermiinde:
work place Fischereiforschung.

The Biological Institute on Helgoland also
cooperates with the Hansische Universitat Ham-
burg (Mathematisch-Naturwissenschaftliche Fak-
ultat), Institut fiir Seefischerei in Wesermiinde,
Forschungsstellen Westkiiste in Biisum and
Husum, Geologische Forschungsanstalt Sencken-
berg, Wilhelmshaven.
Staff: Director: Professor Dr. A. Hagmeier. The
Director is the head of the administration (Kassa
and Biiro, 1 inspector, 1 secretary, and three
assistants), the research work, the conduct of the
station, the branch laboratory at List, and the
public arrangements of the aquarium and mu-
seum. He was also the editor of the Wissen-
schaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen, Abteilung Hel-
goland (now discontinued).

The heads of the sections in the Institute, and
their assistants are as follows:

Ecology: Director Prof. A. Hagmeier. Scien-
tific assistants: Dr. H. Schack, Dr. B. Werner,
Dr. Ahinke (Wilhelmshaven).

Plankton: Kustos Prof. A. Wulff. Sclent.
Assistant: Dr. C. Kiinne, D.W.K.

Zoology; Kustos Dr. H. Hertling. Oberassistent

Dr. Meunier. Research Assistant: Dr. L.
Jacobi.
Botany: (Kustos Prof. E. Schreiber, on leave),

Substitute: Dr. P. Kornmann.
Applied Marine Research: Sekretar der D.W.K.
Dr. A. Biickmann. Scientific Assistants:
D.W.K. Dr. Lundbeck (Wesermiinde). Dr.
Schmidt, Dr. Risch (Wesermiinde).
Ornithological Station: Kustos Prof. R. Drost.

Scientific Assistant, Dr. Schildmacher.

Technical staff: 16 assistants for scientific work

and aquarium. 9 technical staff and ap)-

pointees for scientific fishery experiments;

10 officers and as.sistants for the office and

library; 2 machinists; 6 members of the

house personnel.

Provisions for visiting investigators: For foreign

investigators there are 50 work places besides 30

places available for those who are taking courses.

Provision for publication of results: (a) Wissenschaft-

liche Meeresuntersuchungen, N.F., Abteilung

Helgoland. Or. 4°. (zitiert: Wiss. Meeresunters.

Abt. Helgoland, BD. XIX, Nr. 1.) Discontinued.

Fortisetzung: Helgolander Wissenschaftliche

Meeresuntersuchungen.

(b) Abhandlungen aus dem Gebiete der Vogel-

zugsforschung, Gr. 4°.

der Vogelwarte Rossitten der Kaiser-
Wilhelm-Gesellschaft und der Deutschen
Ornithologischen Gesellschaft herausge-
gebene Zeitschrift.)

(d) Many scientific contributions of the Insti-

tute appear in other Zeitschriften espe-
cially in the Berichte der Deutschen
wissenschaftlichen Komission fiir Meeres-
forschung (Ber. d. D.W.K.) and in the
publications of the International Council
for the Exploration of the Sea.

Meereschemisches Laboratorium der
Universitat Kiel ('37)

Location: University of Kiel, Kiel, Germany.

Organization to which attached: University of Kiel.

Purposes and scope of activities: Study of the chem-
istry of sea water.

Equipment: One physical and one chemical labora-
tory.

Staff: Chief, Dr. H. Wattenberg; Assistant, Fraulein
Dr. H. Meyer.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— GERMANY, GREECE, HUNGARY

129

Meeresgeologische Forschungsstelle der
Universitat Kiel ('37)

History or origin: Founded January 4, 1936.

Location: Eastern shore of Kiclcr Forde, Baltic Sea.

Organization to which attached: University of Kiel.

Purposes: The investigation of coasts and of the
sediments of the North and Baltic Seas, and
other seas.

(Scope of activities: When called for, work is done for
state institutions, otherwise investigation is not
restricted.

Equipment: Two small vessels, larger are planned;
marinegeological-bottom mechanical laboratory;
optical apparatus; under water photographic
outfit; under water boring apparatus; collection
of marine bottom samples from all seas.

Staff: Chief, Prof. Dr. Erich Wasmund; Assistant
for geology and geotcchnics, Dr. P. Gro.schopf;
Assistant for mineralogy, Dr. K. Lamcke; Help-
ers, a diener, laboratory assistants, shared with
the laboratory for sea-water chemistry.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Sufficient work
rooms for visitors.

Income: From the State, partly private donations.

Provision for publication of results: Two new periodi-
cals:

1. Kieler Meeresforschungen, Bd. 1, Kiel 1936.

2. Geologic der Meere und Binnengewasser, Bd. 1,

Berlin 1937.

Greece

Hydrographic Office of the Navy, Navy
Department ('37)

Location: Athens.

Staff: Director, Capitaine de Vaisseau Hydrographe
Alexandre Cryssanthis.

Assistant-Director, Capitaine de Vaisseau Hy-
drographe Denis Rasikotsicas.
Head of Section of Navigation, Lieutenant Spyros

Maratos.
Head of Surveys and Research, Lieutenant Hy-
drographe D. Valtinos.
Head of Technical Section, Capitaine de Corvette,
Fran^oLs Paxinos.
Equipment:

aURVBTINO VESSEL

Nautilus

DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CHEW

404

Marine Biological Station of Phaleron ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1914 by the Hellenic
Ministry of National Economy, Athens.

Location: 2 Apollonos Street, Old Phaleron, Greece.
Organization to which attached: A state institution
under the Hellenic Ministry of National Economy,
Athens.
Purposes and scope: Investigation of the animals
and plants, the study of currents, tides and
temperatures, and the analysis of sea-water.
Equipment: Laboratory, library, and small museum.
Staff: The station is actively conducted by Mr.
Nicholas Sperantsas. The members of the station
are the following:

President: The Minister of National Economy.
12 others: 1. The Director of the Hydrographic
Service of the Navy.

2. Another officer of the Royal Navy, ap-

pointed by the Minister of Marine.

3. The Director of Fisheries, Mr. D. Bitzanis.

4. The Inspector of Fisheries, Mr. G. An-

thanassopoulos.

5. The Director of the Marine Biological

Station, Mr. Nicholas Sperantsas.

6. The Superintendent of the Geological

Service.

7. The Director of the Athens Observatory.

8. The Professor of Zoology of the University

of Athens.

9. The Professor of Botany of the University

of Athens.

10. The Professor of Inorganic Chemistry

of the University of Athens.

11. The Professor of Organic Chemistry of the

University of Athens.

12. The Professor of Physics of the University

of Athens.
2 elected members.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Visiting in-
vestigators are permitted to make use of all the
facilities offered by the station, including the
laboratory, the library, and the museum.

Income: The station is dependent financiallj' on the
Ministry of National Economy.

Provisions for publication of results: Bulletin de la
Commission Thalassographiquc Hellenique. This
Bulletin is not published regularly, but only as
occasion demands and funds permit.

HiTNGAEY

The Hungarian Oceanographic Institution
(Magyar Tengerkutato Intezet) ('37)

This institution is not functioning at present
for the reason that the country has lost its only

130

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

seaport through the Treaty of Trianon, taking
with it the "SMS Najade," which was given to
Yugoslavia. The instruments used in explora-
tions were in the Austro-Hungarian Naval
Academy in Fiume, but these were lost during
the fight for the port of Fiume.

There is at present a Committee working within
the Magyar Adria Egyesulet (Hungarian Adriatic
Association). Dr. Geza Entz is president and
Dr. Julius Leidenfrost acting vice president.
The latter is also the Director of the Committee.
The Committee is located at Budapest, VIII,
Baross utca 13. It has a library of 5,000 volumes
and has a small collection of Dalmatian fishing
products and sea animals.

The Committee is now working up the objects
collected during the course of the 1913 and 1914
expeditions. In this work Krunoslav Babic of
Zagreb and Ferdinand Pax of Breslau also take
part.

Iceland

Vitamalastjorn (Lighthouse Administration) ('37)

Location: Reykjavik.

Staff: Head of Lighthouse Office, Th. Krabbe;

Assistant Lighthouse Engineer, B. Jonasson;

Hydrographer, Skipherra F. V. Olafsson.
Eguipmrnl:

BURVEYING VESSEL

Hermoddb. . . .

DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

...113 3 6

Ireland
Department of Agriculture, Fisheries Branch ('37)

History or origin: Scientific investigations by the
Department dealing with fisheries have been
carried on uninterruptedly since the Marine
Laboratory of the Royal Dublin Society was
taken over by the newly formed Department of
Agriculture and Technical Instruction, Fisheries
Branch, in 1901.

Location: Dublin.

Organization to ivhich attached: Oceanographic re-
search in relation to fisheries is not carried on by a
separate organization but is part of the duties
allotted to the Inspectors of Fisheries.

Pwposes: To elucidate technical and scientific
questions which arise in the course of the ad-
ministrative work of the Department, and to
carry out original investigations on matters
affecting Irish Free State fisheries.

(Scope of activities: (a) Hydrography of the waters
around Ireland; biology of sea fishes; zooplankton;
biological investigation of fishing ground.

(b) Freshwater investigations on similar lines.

Equipment: Limited laboratory accommodation
in the offices of the Department in Dublin.
The use of the Department's Fishery Protection
Cruiser, which is equipped for scientific research,
is available from time to time. A fisheries library,
including fishery biology, is maintained by the
Department.

Staff: Biologists, Mr. G. P. Farran, chief; Mr. A. E. J.
Went; Miss W. E. Frost. 1 laboratory a.s.sistant.
Assistance is periodically received from the
officer of the Fishery Cruiser.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No permanent
provision.

Incoine: Included in the annual vote for the Depart-
ment.

Provision for publication of results: The members
of the staff publish papers in various scientific
periodicals.

Italy

Istituto di Zoologia della R. Universita di
Catania ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1870.

Location: Catania.

Organization to which attached: The State, local
authorities in charge.

Purposes: Fish in the Gulf of Catania; researches on
Protozoa, Copepods, Isopods, Cirripeds, Echi-
nodermata, etc.

Scope of activities: One of the two university cus-
todians is assigned to the collection of marine
animals. There are also local fishermen who are
paid according to the work done.

Equipment: Technical library.

Staff: Director, Prof. Russo Achille; Aid, Prof.
Filippo Dulzetto; Assistant, Dott. Luigi Patane.

Provisions for visiting investigators:

Income: Sources, R. L^niversity. Amount 8,000 lire.

Provision for publication of results: On subjects
mentioned under purposes.

R. Osservatorio di Pesca marittima di
Ganzirri ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1928.
Location: Ganzirri (Mes.sina).

Organization to. which attached: Istituto di Zoologia
della R. U. Messina.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— HUNGARY, ICELAND, IRELAND, ITALY

131

Purposes: Studies on biology applied to Fisheries.
(Scope of activities: Experimental researches.
Staff: Director, Prof. Giuseppe Mazzarelli; Assist-
ant, C. Scordia.
Income: Sources: Ministero Agricoltura e Foreste.

Istituto Idrografico della R. Marina ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1872.

Location: Genova, Passo all'Osservatorio 4.

Organization to which attached: State institution,
Royal Italian Navy.

Purposes: Physical oceanography with respect to
its practical applications to navigation.

Scope of activities: Marine cartography and hydro-
graphic information; terrestrial magnetism; re-
searches in dynamical oceanography.

Equipment:

SURVEYING VESSELS

DISPLACEMENT

OPFICER.S

CREW

Ammiraglio Magnaghi

. . 2,400

163

OsTIA

708

Cariddi

33.3

-11

A magnetic observatory in a separate building.
Staff: Director, De Pisa, Capitano di Fregata.
As.st. Director, M. Gra.ssi, Capitano di Corvetta.
Technical Secretary, G. Ghiglieri, Tenente di

Vascello.
Head of Division of Chart Construction and Cor-
rection, L. Montella, Capitano di Vascello.
Head of Division of Instruments and in charge of
Instrument Workshop, G. Perdomini, Capitano
R.T.M.
Head of Division of Hydrography and Nautical
Documents, A. Lazzarini, Capitano di Corvetta.
Head of Division of Compasses and of Magnetic
Laboratory, A. Lazzarini, Capitano di Corvetta.
Head of Division of Geophysics, Professore M.

Tenani.
Head of Division of Geodesy, Professore G. Forni.
Head of Division of Photo-Engraving, G. Ghigli-
eri, Tenente di Vascello.
30 technical and clerical a.ssistant.s.
Provision for publication of results: Hydrographic
charts, nautical instructions for Italy and de-
pendencies; Annali Idrografici, Bollettino Idro-
grafico, Ephemerides, Nautical Tables, Tide
Tables, Publ. de Circonstance.

Marine Laboratory of the Istituto di Zoologia
della R. Universita di Genova ('37)

History or origin: Established 1772 (mu.seum), 1910
(laboratory), renovated 1932-1933.

Location: Via Lungomarc Lombardo 18, Genova.

Organization to which attached: State Institution,
University of Genoa.

Purposes: Zoology, especially marine zoology.

Scope of activities: Research on Mediterranean
plankton and abyssal fauna, etc.

Equipment: 3,000 volumes; small motor boat,
private.

Staff: Director, Professor Ettore Remotti; Aid,
Doctor Alessandro Brian, private docent; Volun-
teer a.ssi.stant, Dr. Elisa Fischetti; Technical, 1;
Servant, 1.

Provisions for visiting investigators:

Income: Source: Public and private income.
Amount: About 7,000 lire.

Provision for publication of results: Bollettino dei
Musei di Zoologia e di Anatomia Comparata
della R. Universita di Genova (in collaboration
with the Institute of Comparative Anatomy).
2 series, June, 1926.

Istituto Centrale di Biologia Marina in
Messina^ ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1916.

Location: Me.ssina.

Organization to which attached: R. Comitato Talasso-
grafico Italiano.

Purposes: Researches in marine biology, with em-
phasis on biochemical, biophysical, and physiologi-
cal problems, and the experimental investigation
of the life histories of local organisms.

Equipment: Fishing boats and a motor boat, labora-
tories for microscopic, chemical, chemico-physical,
and physiological researches. Favorable location
for material for laboratory cultures.
Important library.

Staff: Director, L. Sanzo, Professor, Anatomy,
Physiology. Assistants: Dr. A. Sparta; Dr. D.
De Gaetani. Conservator, Dr. G. Cipria.
Draughtsman and photographer, Mazza Filiberto.
Preparator, Arena Giuseppe. Mechanic, and
others for personal service.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The R. Comitato
Talassografico Italiano offers to Italian and
foreign Governments and Institutions, ten study
places in the Istituto Centrale di Biologia Marina
di Me.ssina, each of them for a period of not less
than one year on the payment annually of 1500
lire in gold for foreigners and 3000 lire paper for
Italians. Study places may also be granted to

* Istituto Centrale di Biologia Marina in Messina, Ex-
planatory Notice, Officine Grafiiche Carlo Ferrari, 1932.

132

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

private persons for their own use and upon simple
request, for periods not less than six months.
The amount to be paid in advance is 800 lire gold
for foreigners and 1600 lire paper for Italians.
For each month in addition to .six months, the
monthly rate is respectively 130 lire gold and 260
lire paper. ^

Income: R. Comitato Talassografico Italiano.

Provision for publications of results: Memorie; Bollet-
tino; Monografie del R. Comitato Talassografico
Italiano.

Gabinetto di Oceanografia e Meteorologia

(Napoli) ('37)

History or origin: Founded in compliance with a
Royal Decree dated May 1920, n. 1157.

Location: R. Istituto Superiore Navale, Napoli.

Organization to which attached: R. Istituto Superiore
Navale, Napoli.

Purposes: Teaching oceanography and nautical
meteorology to prospective officers in the Mer-
chant Marine, and to future teachers in the
nautical schools.

/Scope of activities: Scientific and experimental
researches.

Equipment: The usual apparatus for oceanographic
work, such as that for chlorine titration, reversing
thermometers, etc.

Staff: Professor Eredia, Professor of Oceanography.
Scientific: Assistant N.N. Technical: 1. Main-
tenance and operation: 2.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Rooms attached
to the laboratory will be available.

Income: Sources, R. Istituto Superiore Navale,
Napoli. Amount, variable every year.

Provision for publication of results: The Istituto
publishes Annuario del R. Istituto Superiore
Navale, and the Annali del R. Istituto Superiore
Navale, of which volumes 1 and 2 have been
published.

Stazione Zoologica di Napoli' ('37)

History or origin: The Stazione Zoologica di Napoli
was founded in 1872 by Anton Dohrn, a pupil

'To be purchased; Interesting faunistic materials from
the Strait of Messina for scientific research work of mu-
seums.

« Kofoid, C. A. The Biological Stations of Europe, U. S.
Bureau of Education Bulletin, whole number 440, pp. 9-32,
1910, gives a full account of the establishment of this station
and a description of the buildings and their equipment up
to 1909. Most of what is said in this publication is still
valid and it has been utilized in preparing the statement
here given, which has been checked by Prof. Reinhard
Dohrn.

and colleague of Ernst Haeckel and docent at the
University of Jena. In 1868 Dohrn made a
journey to Sicily and established at Messina a
small temporary laboratory for his own researches.
He contemplated founding a laboratory and
aquarium at that place but changed his intentions
and decided to utilize Naples as the site of the
station. In 1870 he procured from the City of
Naples a site in the Villa Nazionale on the water
front of the Bay of Naples, on the condition
that he would erect a station which would remain
the private property of himself and his immediate
heirs for ninety years and then revert to the
municipality, but which would still be used
for its original purpose. The first building was
begun in 1872 and completed in 1874. Toward
the erection of the first building Dohrn con-
tributed out of his private fortune 300,000 francs,
the balance of the total cost of 400,000 francs
was met by outside contribution.?. The German
Ministry of Foreign Affairs first granted an
annual subvention of 30,000 M., which was
increased in 1888 to 40,000 M., and later at
Dohrn's request reduced to 20,000 M. Because
of the increased demands upon the station in 1886
its facilities were enlarged by the construction
of the western block of the building, toward the
cost of which the Italian and Provincial Govern-
ments contributed about 100,000 lire.

In 1903 in order to meet the needs for additional
facilities for researches in comparative phy.siology
and physiological chemistry, a new section of the
building devoted in large part to those purposes
was erected. The German Emperor encouraged
the .subscription to a fund of 300,000 M. for this
purpose.

An account of the history of the Stazione imme-
diately after the World War is given by Miss
Margaret Boveri in an article entitled "Die
Zoologische Station zu Neapel."' The third
section of the article "Gegenwart und Zukunft,"
gives the essence of the struggle of Doctor Rein-
hard Dohrn, son and successor of Doctor Anton
Dhorn, to regain the directorship of the station
after the war and to get it into operation. The
present arrangement for the operation of the
station is indicated in this statement, under the
caption, "Organization to which attached."
Location: In the Villa Nazionale of Naples.

' In L. Brauer, A. Mendelssohn-Bartholdy, and A.
Meyer: Forschungsinstitute, ihre Geschichte, Organisation
und Ziele, Vol. 2, pp. 578-598, 1930.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— ITALY

133

Organization to xohich attached: Ente Morale, Board
consisting of seven members: President, the
Mayor of Naples.

One member designated by the Naples Munici-
pality.

One member designated by the Comitato Talas-
sografico Italiano.

Three members designated by the Minister of
National Education. (Three of these mem-
bers are University Professors.)

Permanent member and director, Professor
Reinhard Dohrn.
Purposes: Purely research, except that the Stazione
maintains a supply department from which uni-
versities and investigators may get material
for both instruction and research.
Scope of activities: Any kind of biological work for
which material, both zoological and botanical,
can be procured in the vicinity of Naples. This
includes systematic biology, morphology, em-
bryology, ecology, physiology, and physiological
chemistry. In addition to the biological re-
searches the station has also served as a base
from which important investigations on marine
bottom deposits and other subjects of geological
significance have been prosecuted.
Equipment: The laboratory building is situated near
the center of the Villa Nazionale. It stands 75
meters north of the sea wall and the first floor
is about four meters above mean tide level. The
material of which it is constructed is tufa masonry
with stucco trimmings and the style is modern
Italian Renaissance.

There is a basement which is about one meter
above sea level, and above it ri.se four stories.
The total dimensions of the entire building are
25 by 100 meters, and it reaches a height above
ground of 16 meters. Its longer axis is along an
east-west line, parallel to the shoreline. The
building is compo.sed of five sections, three of
which are for laboratory purposes and two are
intermediate connecting structures, but with
some laboratory rooms in the eastern connecting
structure. Chronologically the structure first
erected is the middle one which is 25 meters wide
by 33.5 meters long. It was completed in 1874.
The next structure to be erected is at the west
end. It was erected in 1886, and occupied an
area 25 by 18 meters in dimensions. Between
the middle section and this second section there
is an open court; the area of which is 25 by 18
meters. It is enclosed on the ground level by

railings and on the level of the second floor it is
spanned by a bridge, and is bordered on three
sides and a part of the fourth by promenades.
The easternmost section, the one for comparative
physiology and physiological chemistry, was
erected in 1903. The area of the ba.se of this
building is 25 by 33.5 meters. Between the
structure erected in 1874 and the one erected in
1903 is a central court 25 by 17 meters in area,
opening to the .sky and reached on both sides at
ground level by open archways. Above the
arcades formed by these arches there are struc-
tures which are continuous on each side with
the rest of the building, and there are two stories
of laboratory rooms.

The total area of the floor space on the five
floors is 12,725 square meters, and the total
number of rooms, including passages, stairs, and
attic compartments, is 259. The aquarium on
the first floor of the building was completed in
1874. Kofoid, in his description of the Stazione
Zoologica, has given much detail about the
arrangement of the rooms, the salt water supply,
and other features. It is suggested that his
account of the station be consulted.

Visiting investigators are supplied with much
equipment and many articles that must be pur-
chased are furnished at cost. Living biological
material is promjjtly provided, weather and season
permitting. In general investigators are sup-
posed to provide their own microscopes and
certain other apparatus. Doctor Reinhard Dohrn
has been able to make with the customs authorities
at Naples an arrangement to import free of duty
apparatus to be used at the station, but which
will be exported within a year. Permits are
issued for three months and they may not aggre-
gate more than twelve months.

A large and very valuable library. There are
over 25,000 boiuid volumes and about 40,000
reprints, numbers of which have been bound in
volumes of related subjects.
Staff: Scientific: Prof. Reinhard Dohrn, Director;
Prof. Silvio Ranzi, Head of the Zoological De-
partment; Prof. E. Caroli, Zoological As.sistant
and Librarian; Prof. F. P. Massa, Department of
Chemistry; Dr. G. Kramer, Department of
Physiology.

Technical and Clerical: Secretary; Cashier; Ac-
countant; Commercial agent.
Maintenance and Operation: 22 servants, fisher-
men, mechanicians, workmen, etc.

134

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Provisions for visiting investigators: The research
tables at the Stazione Zoologica are leased at a
cost of $500.00 for a full year or the privilege
of the use of a table may be obtained by appoint-
ment to some table under the control of a lessee.
Numbers of the tables are at the disposal of
various institutions that contribute to the support
of the Stazione. Up to seventy people, including
the staff, may be accommodated. Anyone desir-
ing the privilege of working at the Stazione should
correspond ^A^th its Director, Doctor Reinhard
Dohrn, who will supply information not only
on the facilities available for work at the Institu-
tion but also on li\nng conditions in the city of
Naples.

Income: About 800,000 Lire to 1,000,000 Lire a year,
depending on the general economic situation,
especially on account of the fluctuations of the
tourist traffic (Aquarium) and the exchange rates.
Source: Aquarium; sale of preserved material;
sale of publications; table rents; contribu-
tions.

Provision for the publication of results: (a) "Pubbli-
cazioni della Stazione Zoologica." Contents:
Papers on research work done in the Zoological
Station. Number of volumes published, 12.
Continuation of the Mitheilungen aus der
Zoologischen Station zu Neapel, volumes 22.

(b) "Fauna e Flora del Golfo di Napoli."
Monographs of animals and plants in the Gulf of
Naples. Number of volumes published, 39.

Istituto di Ricerche Biologiche in Rodi ('37)

History or origin: Established by a Convention of
1935.

Location: Rodi (Egeo).

Purposes: Offers possibility of undertaking field
researches in oceanogra];)hical, biological, and
chemical sciences, as well as agricultural studies
with special regard to marine biology in relation
to fisheries.

Equipment: Laboratory equipped for biological,
chemical, and physical researches. An aquarium
comprising the local fauna. A library in for-
mation.

Staff: Dott. C. Maldura.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Three rooms
attached to the Laboratory.

Income: Sources: Ministero Agricoltura e Foreste,
U Consiglio Nazionale delle Ricerche, il R.
Comitate Talassografico Italiano, il Governo
delle Isole Italiane dell'Egeo.

R. Comitate Talassografico Italiano ('37)

History or origin: Established by a special law in
1910.

Location: Rome.

Organization to which attached: National Research
Council. (Viale delle Scienze Roma.)

Purposes and scope of activities: To this organization
is entrusted the physical and chemical studies of
Italian seas. It has pursued many oceanographic
expeditions, among them. Exploration of the Sea
of Levant, (with Austria) the Adriatic (14
cruises). Strait of Messina, Red Sea. It has
created an oceanographic commission. The fol-
lowing institutions are subordinate to the R.
Comitate Talassografico :

Istituto Centrale di Biologia Marina in Messina.
Istituto Geofisico di Trieste.
Istituto Italo-Germanico di Biologia Marina di
Rovigno dTstria, together with Kaiser Wil-
helm Gesellschaft of Berlin.

Equipment: Each Institute has its own library.

Staff: Chairman: . Vice

Chairman: Prof. Gustavo Brunelli.

Other officers are listed separately under the
indi\adual institutes which make up the R.
Comitate Talassografico Italiano.

Income: Ministero dell'Educazione Nazionale and
Consiglio Nazionale delle Ricerche.

Provision for publication of results: Bollettino bimes-
trale; Memoirs (214 published); Monographs,
Results of the cruises, periodically.

Ispettorato Generale della Pesca e Divisione
Amministrativa per la Pesca ('37)

History or origin: Institute founded by the Law of
Fishing of March 24, 1921.

Location: Roma.

Organization to which attached: Ministry of Agricul-
ture and Forests.

Purposes: The regulation of the fisheries, the
execution of the laws relating to fisheries, and the
prosecution of scientific research for the improve-
ment of the fisheries.

Staff: Ispettorato Generale della Pesca: General
Inspector, Prof. Gustavo Brunelli. 1 clerk.
Divisione amministrativa per la Pesca: Chef of
Bureau, Comm. Dott. Emilio Ciuffa. 4 secre-
taries; 3 clerks.

Provincial organizations in dependence (Labora-
torio Centrale e R. Stabilimenti ittiogenici).

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— ITALY

135

R. Laboratorio Centrale di Idrobiologia ('37)

History or origin: Established 1924.

Location: Roma, Piazza Borghese 91.

Organization to which attached: Fisheries Office of
Ministry of Agriculture and Forests.

Purposes: Sections of chemistry, systematics,
morphology, physiology of salt- and fresh-water
organisms. Is in cooperation with observers,
limnological and marine, and with the Experi-
mental Squadron of Fisheries.

Scope of activities: Study of fresh- and salt-waters.

Equipment: Library continually growing, and ap-
paratus for chemistry, physics, and biology.

Staff: Director, Professor Gustavo Brunelli; Assist-
ant, Doctor Carlo Maldura; Assistant, Dr.
Lina Rizzo; Assistant, Dr. Gabriella Cannicci.

Provisions for visiting investigators: One place for
re.search.

Income: Source, Ministry of Agriculture and Forests.

Provision for publication of results: BoUettino di
Pesca, di Piscicoltura, e di Idrobiologia.

Istituto Italo-Germanico di Biologia Marina di
Rovigno d'Istria ('37)

History or origin: Founded by Dr. O. Hermes in
1891. Under the Kaiser Wilhelm Gesellschaft z.
Forderung d. Wissenschaften (Berlin) from 1910
to 1918. Under the R. Comitate Talassografico
It. from 1918 to 1931. Since 1931 transformed
into Istituto Italo-Germanico di Biologia marina.

Location: Rovigno d'Istria (Italy).

Organization to which attached: R. Comitato Talasso-
grafico (Italy) and K. W. Gesellschaft zur Forder-
ung dfer Wissenschaften (Germany).

Purposes: Scientific, furnisher of material.

(Scope of activities: Marine biology (morphology,
ecology, physiology), fauna and flora.

Equipment: Laboratories, aquarium, library 12,000
volumes; two motor boats.

Staff: Directors: Prof. M. Sella, Prof. A. Steuer.
Assistants: Doctor A. Vatova, Doctor G. Kramer.
Technical and clerical: 5. Maintenance and oper-
ation : 4.

Provisions for visiting investigators: 18 places,
granted gratuitously.

Income: Sources, Italian and German Governments;
Amount, 300,000 lire yearly.

Provisions for publication of results: Two series of
publications, Thalassia, and Note dell 'Istituto
Italo-germanico di Rovigno.

Istituto Demaniale di Biologia Marina di
Taranto'* ('37)

History or origin: Formerly Laboratorio di Biologia
Marina del R. Ispettorato Tecnico del Mar
Piccolo, established in 1915 at Taranto. The
name was changed as indicated above in Alay,
1930. The construction of the new building was
completed on February 10, 1931.

Location: Taranto, via Roma 3.

Organization to which attached: Under the State
Ministry of Finance.

Purposes: Control of culture of oysters and Mytilus
on lands belonging to the State in Mar Piccolo
di Taranto.

Scope of activities: Biology of oysters and Mytilus,
general marine biology, including bacteriology
and parasitology; oceanography, including physics
and chemistry of sea water.

Equipment: A large building with a basement,
ground floor, and two higher floors. Complete
laboratory equipment for the kinds of researches
listed under scope of activities.

2 motor boats: Enrico Giglioli, 7 m. long,
1.9 m. wide, 8 hp., speed 5 knots per hour; and
Galeso, 10 m. long, 2.5 m. wide, 30 hp., speed 10
knots per hour. Also 2 sail-boats.
Aquarium and 5 large tanks.
The Institute possesses for the culture of
molluscs an experimental tract of 52,000 sq.
meters in area in the first Seno del Mar Piccolo.
A growing library.

Staff: Director, Prof. Attilio Cerruti; Assistant,
Dr. Emilio Vardaro; Custodian, attendant mari-
ner, chauffeur-mechanic, and 10-12 workers on
the experimental grounds for culture of molluscs
in Mar Piccolo.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Besides various
other rooms, there are 4 large rooms specially
set aside for students and guests. It is intended
that any special research will be conducted in
the laboratory designed for that particular kind
of investigation.

Income: Funds from the Ministry of Finances for
the maintenances of boats, for the .supply of
water, gas, electricity, etc., and, moreover,
18,000 L per year.

*.For the history of the Istituto see, Cerruti, A., L'lsti-
tuto Demaniale di Biologia marina di Taranto, Ministero
delle Finanze Direzione Generate del Demanio Pubblico
e delle Aziende Patrimoniali, Taranto, 1932; L' Istituto
Demaniale di Biologia marina di Taranto, Riv. Biol. vol.
15, fasc. 3-4, Nov., 1933; and, L'Istituto di Biologia marina
di Taranto, Intern. Revue Hydrobiol. Hydrograph., Bd. 29,
Heft 3/4, 1933.

136

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Provision for publication of results: Results of workers
appear in Reviews, frequently under the name,
"Contributions of R. Laboratorio di Biologia
marina di Taranto."

Istituto Geofisico di Trieste ('37)

History or origiii: Founded in 1920, taking the
place of the "Sezione Geofisica" dell'ex-Osserva-
torio Marittimo.

Location: Trieste, Viale R. Gessi 2 (150 meters
from the sea).

Organization to which attached: R. Comitato Talasso-
grafico Italiano (Roma) c/o il Consiglio Nazionale
delle Richerche. Viale delle Scienze, of which
the Istituto is the active laboratory for physical
and chemical researches.

Purposes: Research, cruises. Additional duties:
meteorological and seismological observations.

Scope of activities: Dynamical and physical
oceanography, chemistry of sea water.

Equipment: Chemical laboratory, physical labora-
tory, seismologic station, meteorologic observa-
tory, library. Research boats are occasionally
furnished by the Royal Navy.

Staff: Director, Prof. F. Vercelli, physics; Prof. M.
Picotti, Chemist, chemistry; Dr. P. Caloi, Geo-
physics, seismology; Dr. S. PoUi, assistant,
physics; 2 technical and clerical; 2 maintenance
and operation.

Provision for visiting investigators: Only occasionally
(1 to 2).

Income: Grants from the R. Comitato Talassografico.
The staff is directly paid from the same institution.
In addition contributions from the National
Research Council for instrumental equipment.

Provision for publication of results: The members
of the staff publish papers in various scientific
periodicals: Memorie del R. Comitato Talasso-
grafico; etc. The results of the cruises are
published in Annali Idrografici, Genova; Mono-
grafia della Commissione Int. del Mediterraneo
(two volumes).

Ufficio Idrografico del Magistrate alia Acque
a Venezia ('37)

History or origin: Established 1908.

Location: Venezia.

Organization to which attached: Independent state
institution.

Purposes: Research, mareographic and lagoonal,
is provided in: Chemico-physical laboratory,
Maritime Section, at S. Nicolo di Lido (Venezia).

The Office actually collects and elaborates the
mareographs installed in the lagoons and along
the Venetian shore; it also takes note of the rise
and fall of water in the lagoons.

Scope of activities: Hydrography, meteorology,
assistance in public works.

Equipment: Important library.

Staff: A director. Chairman Luigi Miliani, several
civil engineers, a chemist.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Only occasionally.

Income: 1 million lire.

Provision for publication of results: BoUettino Idro-
grafico: part 1, monthly; collections of materials
of observations; part 2, annual: first elaboration
of collected data; eventual publication of mareo-
graphs and studies on lagoons.

Latvia

Hidrografiska Dala, Jurniecibas Departaments,
Finansu Ministrija (Hydrographic Section, Ma-
rine Department, Ministry of Finance) ('37)

Location: Valdemara iela Nr. 1-a, Riga.

Staff: Head of the Hydrographic Section, K. Purns.

Equipment:

StJRVEYINQ VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICEB8 CBBW

HiDOGBAFS 450 2 13

Hydrobiological Station of the University of
Latvia ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1924.

Location: In the center of the city of Riga.

Organization to which attached: University of Latvia,
of which the Station is an institute, connected
with the Institute of Systematic Zoology, under
one Director, Professor Dr. Embrik Strand.

Purposes: Major, research; instruction in oceanog-
raphy.

Scope of activities: Researches in hydrography, on
samples collected in the Gulf of Riga and in the
Baltic {cfr. Folia Zoologica et Hydrobiologica, I,
p. 53 and 149, III, p. 250, IV, p. 58 and 271, V,
p. 38 (1929-1933), VII, p. 30 (1934), VIII, p. 288
(1935), IX, p. 84 (1936)); biology and distribution
of marine animals, zoo- and phytoplankton.
(Also limnological researches.)

Staff: Scientific: Director, Professor Dr. Embrik
Strand; Adjunkt, Cand. rer. nat. Viktor Ozolins;
Laboratory assistant, N. Lisova. Maintenance
and operation: 1.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Seven, in addition
to the Institution's staff, can be accommodated.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— ITALY, LATVIA, LITHUANIA, MONACO, NETHERLANDS 137

Income: Contributions from the faculty of science of
the University.

Provision for publication of results: Professor Dr.
Embrik Strand has founded and publishes the
series "Folia Zoologica et Hydrobiologica" of
which eight volumes have been issued. The
ninth will be completed in 1937. Moreover,
papers have been published in various scientific
periodicals.

Lithuania

Susisiekimo Ministerija, Uosto Valdyba (Ministry
of Communication, Harbor Oflace) ('37)

Location: Malku gatv^ Nr. 32, Klaija^da.

Staff: Director of the Harbour Office, Inzinierius
Balys Slizys. Chief of the Technical Service,
Inzinierius Vosylius Rimdzius. First assistant
engineer, Inzinierius Nikalojus Stonis.

Equi-pment:

BURVEYINQ VESSELa DISPLACEMENT OFPICEBS CREW

Perktjnas 194 2 10

Monaco
Musee Oceanographique de Monaco ('37)

History or origin: Created and endowed in 1906 by
S. A. S. Albert the First, Prince of Monaco, and
recognized by the French Government as a public
utility on May 16, 1906.

Location: Principality of Monaco, Monaco-Ville.

Organization to which attached: Branch of I'Institut
Oceanographique, central office of which is in
Paris.

Purposes: Research and oceanographic exhibition.

Scope of activities: Researches in physical and
biological oceanography (aquarium).

Equipment: 3 exhibition halls: (a) zoological
oceanography; (b) physical oceanography; (c)
applied oceanography. Large marine aquarium

(warm water animals). Laboratories and study
aquaria. A small steamer, L'Eider, length 18
meters, contains 8 beds, 4 forward, 4 aft.

Staff: Director, M. Jules Richard; Laboratory sub-
director, MM. L. Sirvent and Dr. M. Oxner;
Preparator, M. Giauffret (goes out with boat) ; Li-
brarian, M. E. Comet; Skipper, M. Le Berrigand;
Engineer, M. C. Calleri.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The Museum
is open every day without exception to the public
from 10-12, 2-5, from February 1 to October 31;
2-4 from November 1 to January 1. An entrance
fee of 8 francs gives the privilege of visiting exhi-
bition halls and aquaria. Use of the laboratories
is granted to scientific men and investigators of
all nationalities, permission for which is obtained
upon written request to the director, indicating
the nature and purpose of the work contemplated.
Scholarships have been established by the
founder and the Council of Administration to
permit workers to spend definite periods (usually
one month) at the Museum. These are granted
by the Council of Administration and the Com-
mittee of Perfectionnement, on approval of the
director. Workers are permitted to make ex-
peditions on L'Eider on certain days and hours
fixed by the director.

Income: Sources: Derived mostly from admission
fees. The funds left by S. A. S. Albert were
affected adversely by the dechne in the franc.
Budget is a part of that of I'Institut Oceano-
graphique.

Amount: For 1931 the amount was about
860,000 francs.

Provision for publication of results: Bulletin de
I'Institut Oceanographique, Carte Generale
Bathjmi^trique des Oceans, second edition. Les
Resultats des Campagnes Scientifiques de S. A. S.
Prince Albert ler de Monaco.

NETHERLANDS TO YUGOSLAVIA, INCLUSIVE

Netherlands

Koninklijk Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut,

Section of Oceanography and Maritime

Meteorology ('37)

History or origin: January 31, 1854.

Location: De Bilt.

Organization to which attached: Ministry of Public
Works (Waterstaat).

Purposes and scops of activities: Research in me-
teorology, oceanography, and geophysics, and

application of the results in the .special interest
of agriculture, oceanic and aerial navigation,
industry and commerce.

The recent expedition of the Willebrord
Snellius to the Netherlands East Indies was
organized by two scientific societies, but under
the leadership of Commander van Riel, then
director of the section of oceanography and
maritime meteorology.
Equipment: Full equipment for meteorological and
geophysical research at De Bilt, for meteorology

138

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

also at four other observatories. Some oceano-
graphical instruments available. Instruments for
research in meteorology on the oceans are owned
by the ships' companies.

Staff: Director in chief of Institute, Prof. E. van
Everdingen, Jr. Section of Oceanography, Direc-
tor Coram. H. Keyser; Dir. Adj. Lr. Coram. J. A.
van Duynen Montijn. Technical and clerical, 7.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Reading room
and library assistance available.

Income: Sources: From State funds.

Amount: Budget of whole Institute fl. 187,148.-.

Provision for publication of results:

Large publications

K.N.M.I. No. 104. Oceanographische en me-
teorologische waarnemingen in den Indischen
Oceaan; Tabellen, Kaarten, Supplementen.

K.N.M.I. No. 110. Oceanographische en me-
teorologische waarnemingen in den Atlantischen
Oceaan; Tabellen en Kaarten.

K.N.M.I. No. 115. Oceanographische en me-
teorologische waarnemingen in de Chineesche
Zeeen en in het westelijk gedeelte van den
Noord Stillen Oceaan; Kaarten.
Yearly publications (provisionally suspended)
K.N.M.I. No. 107, 107% 107''. Monthly Meteoro-
logical Data for 10° squares in the Oceans.

Miscellaneous

K.N.M.I. No. 102. Mededeelingen en Verhan-

delingen.

(Results of some oceanographic observations
made by the Fishery Service in the North Sea
are published in the Bulletin Hydrographique
of the Int. Council for the Exploration of the
Sea, Copenhagen.)

Zoologisch Station der Nederlandsche Dierkundige
Vereeniging ('37)

History or origin: The original Station of the Nether-
land Zoological Society, dating from 1876, was
a small wooden building. It was used during
summer only and was erected every year at an-
other place on the Dutch coast. It was thus in
operation from 1876 until 1889 and much work,
famous then, was done in it, e.g. the oyster-
investigations in the river Schelde.

In 1890 a brick building was erected at Den
Helder, at the principal out- and inlet to the
Zuiderzee. The building was the private prop-
erty of the Zoological Society, but the main-

tenance of the Station was made possible through
governmental support only. The Government
namely hired most of the rooms for its new
Rijksinstituut voor Biologisch Visscherijonderzoek
(Government Institution for biological Fisheries
Research). Dr. P. P. C. Hoek, well known as a
fisheries expert, a carcinologist, and for his work
as a secretary to the International Council for
the Exploration of the Sea, became director of
both Fisheries Research Institution and Zoological
Station.

In 1902 was given to the Fisheries Research
Institution the execution of the Dutch part of the
program of the International Council and from
that year onward a staff of investigators worked
at Den Helder for a number of years: Dr. J.
Boeke, Dr. P. J. van Breemen, Dr. H. C. Delsman,
Dr. A. C. J. van Goor, Ir. F. Liebert, Dr. W. E.
Ringer, and Dr. J. J. Tesch, while Dr. H. C.
Redeke was in charge of the work. But from
about 1912 onward and especially during and
after the war the fine organization was gradually
broken down, the work became more and more
decentralized and most of the marine biological
part of it came to an end. From 1926-1928 the
investigations on fresh water fisheries only
remained at Den Helder.

In 1928 this last part of the Institution too,
still with Dr. Redeke as director, was taken
away from Den Helder and the Zoological Station
became free. The Netherland Zoological Society
now obtained governmental support for the
reorganization of the Station. From 1931 onward
it became a Marine Biological Laboratory for
purely scientific work under the Ministry of
Education, Arts, and Sciences, with Dr. J. Verwey
as director. Stress was laid on close cooperation
with the Dutch Universities.

The building was modified, a small but good
aquarium installed, a ship built, and now the
laboratory provides good possibilities for scientific
research. From 1937 lodgings for investigators
is provided.

Location: Den Helder, Holland, at the mouth of the
Zuiderzee.

Organization to which attached: The Station, boat,
library, are all the property of the Netherlands
Zoological Society, but the Government (Minis-
try of Education, Arts, and Sciences) provides
most of its support.

Purposes: Marine biological investigations in the
widest sense. The Station at the same time

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— NETHERLANDS, NORWAY

139

represents the marine laboratory for students as
University Extension.

Scope of activities: Marine biological, ecological,
physiological investigations in the southern North
Sea, especially the neighborhood of Den Helder.
Den Helder is a naval base and advantages are
derived from the presence of the Navy. The
investigations from 1931 onward have specially
dealt with a number of physiological investiga-
tions, with bio-ecological problems of some
invertebrates and algae, and with investigations
on growth, maturity, and migrations of some
cephalopods and fishes.

Equipment: Laboratory building with chemical
laboratory, library, aquarium, rooms for investi-
gators, etc. Research vessel Max Weber, a
small cutter of 13 meters length.

Staff: Scientific: Director, Dr. J. Verwey. Students
and lecturers from the four Dutch universities
work at the Laboratory especially from May to
October, but a few practically all the year round.
Technical and clerical assistants: 3.
Maintenance and operation : 2, including skipper
of boat.

Provisions for visiting investigators: From 1937 on-
ward lodgings for 9 persons can be provided.
Laboratory can accommodate fifteen investiga-
tors, except during a few weeks in summer when
courses for students are being held, when ten
can be accommodated.

Income: 12,700 Dutch florins, chiefly from the
Ministry of Education, Arts and Sciences, and
further from some more or less private sources.

Provision for publication of results: Archives N^er-
landaises de Zoologie (the journal of the Dutch
Zoological Society). In it papers from other
institutions also appear.

Department van Defensie Afdeeling Hydrografie

(Department of Defense, Hydrographic

Section) ('37)

Location: 147, Badhuisweg, 's Gravenhage.

Staff: Hydrographer, Schout bij nacht J. C. F.

Hooykaas; Assistant Hydrographer, Kapitein

luit. ter zee R. van Tijen.
Equiptnent:

BURTBTINQ VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

Tydeman 1,160 8 96

WiLLEBRORD Snellitts 930 8 76

ElLERTS DE Ha.^n 312 3 13

Hydrograaf 260 3 13

Ebidantts 996 8 80

Norway

Fiskeridirektoratet, Avdeling for Havundersokelser
(Marine Research Branch) ('37)

History or origin: Established 1900.

Location: Fosswinckelsgate 6 & 8 (Marine Biological
Laboratory), and Fosswinckelsgate 11 (Oceano-
graphical Laboratory), Bergen.

Organization to which attached: Fisheries Directorate,
under the Ministry of Commerce.

Purposes: Marine research.

Scope of activities: Indicated under the staff, after
names of advisors and assistants.

Equipment: 2 research vessels:

The JoHAN Hjort, a motor cutter of 70 tons
gross, length 78 feet, engine (semi-Diesel, 2 cyl.
2 str.), 120 hp., speed 9 knots, crew 7, including
skipper and cook, staff generally 3^, maximum 5,
in commission 10 months.

The Virgo, a motor launch of 35 feet, engine
30 hp., speed 8 knots, crew 2, staff 2, (for fjord
work), in commission 2-3 months during several
shorter periods.

Staff: 3 advisors: Mr. Paul Bjerkan, biology of
sprat, plaice etc.; Dr. Sven Runnstrom, herring
biology; Mr. Oscar Sund, biology of cod and
other gadoids. 2 biological assistants: Mr. Gmi-
nar RoUefsen (biology of the cod); Mr. Einar
Koefoed (fish larvae, etc.). 1 oceanographical
assistant, Mr. Jens Eggvin. 2 technical assist-
ants: Mr. Thv. Rasmussen (draughtsman and
herring age determination, etc.); Mr. Kr. Wil-
helmsen (salinity determination etc.). 3 clerical
assistants. 2 technical assistants.

Provisions for visiting iiwestigators: Only improvised.

Income: Source: From the government. Amount:
About kr. 85,000. From funds, about kr. 70,000.

Provision for publications of results: Publication:
Report on Norwegian Fishery and Marine In-
vestigations. (Fiskeridirektoratets Skrifter, Ser.
Havundersokelsen. )

Det geofysiske Institutt ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1917. A building

was erected in 1926-28 by contributions chiefl}'-

from States Minister Mowinckel.
Location: City of Bergen, near Puddefjord.
Organization to which attached: Bergens Museum, of

which the institution is a department.
Purposes: Research on geophysical problems and

instruction in various branches of geophysics.
Scope of activities: Researches in physical and dy-

140

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

namical oceanography, meteorology, terrestrial
magnetism, and related subjects.

Equipment: 1 large building 210 feet by 44 feet. 2
stories and basement throughout. 3 stories over
central part with a large pent-house on top. A
tunnel, 360 feet long and 16 feet wide in the
rock 50 feet below the basement.

1 research vessel: Armatjer Hansen, 57 tons
gross, 76 feet long, 19 feet beam, motor 2 cyl.
2 str., 80 hp, speed 8 knots, complete outfit for
sailing.

1 motor launch (Arnulf).

Staff: Scientific: Director, Prof. Dr. B. Helland-
Hansen (oceanography) ; Prof. Dr. J. A. B.
Bjerknes (meteorology); Prof. Dr. B. Trumpy
(terrestrial magnetism and cosmical physics);
Dr. J. E. Fjeldstad (mathematics); Dr. H. Mosby
(physics); Mr. K. F. Wasserfall (terrestrial mag-
netism). Maintenance and operation: 6. Cleri-
cal and technical assistants: 9.

Provision for visiting investigators: 10 can be ac-
commodated.

Income: Sources: From the State and other sources.
Amount: Financial year 1935-36, Kr. 120,000.

Provision for puhlication of results: Bergens Mu-
seum's publications and Geofysiske Pubhkasjoner.

Statens Fiskeriforsoksstasjon. (Official Norwegian
Fisheries Research Station) ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1891. Attached to
Fisheries Directorate in 1899.

Location: Thormohlensgt. 66, Bergen.

Organization to which attached: Fisheries Directorate.

Purposes: Investigations concerning the fishing
industry. Improvement of known processes and
development of new. Scientific research and
application of science to practice.

Scope of activities: The fisheries and all products and
problems cormected with these. Also cold storage
of Norwegian fruit.

Equipment: Rather overcrowded old, wooden build-
ing. Chemical laboratories with ordinary, good
equipment, as balances, microscopes, autoclaves,
refractometers, Hilger vitameter, tintometers,
precision viscosimeter, centrifuges, divers other
equipment. Experiniental cold store with 10
chambers, temperatures down to — 20°C. Library
with most modern literature concerning the scope
of activities of the station, 30-40 technical and
scientific periodicals.

Staff: Permanent staff: Director: Chemical engineer
Olav Notevarp. Konsulent: Chemical engi-
neer Harald Weedon. Assistant: Sverre
Hjorth-Hansen. Assistant: Technical chemist
Alfred Monssen. Laboratory assistant:
Temporary staff: 4 chemical engineers, 1 me-
chanical engineer, 1 civil engineer, 4 technical
chemists, 6 other assistants. (Note: All "engi-
neers" are technical university graduates.)
Provisions for visiting investigators: Poor, as building

is very crowded.
Income: Permanent budget; Temporary budget.

Source: Norwegian Government.
Provision for publication of results: Arsveretning
vedkommende Norges Fiskerier, Fiskeridirek-
toratets skrifter, serie Teknologiske undersokelser.
(Report on Technological Research concerning
Norwegian Fish Industry.)

Universitetets biologiske stasjon, Dr0bak ('37)

History or origin: Established 1894.

Location: On the Oslo-fjord in the village of Dr0bak,

about 30 km south of the city of Oslo.
Organization to which attached: University of Oslo,

of which the station is a special department.
Purposes: Instruction : General instruction in marine

zoology and botany, and in elementary micro-
anatomical research methods.

General purpose: Marine research in every

direction as well as biological laboratory work.
Scope of activities: Biology: plankton, fishes, bottom

fauna and flora, microscopic anatomy, ecology.
Equipment: One building, 3 floors, crossbuilt, area

100 sq. m. 1 research motor boat, 30 feet,

equipped to work to a depth 100-150 fathoms

m the neighborhood of the station.
Staff: Scientific: Director, Prof. Dr. Hjalmar Broch.

Teaching committee: The Director and Prof.

Dr. Kristine Bonnevie; Prof. Dr. H. H. Gran;

Prof. Dr. Johan Hjort; Prof. Dr. Otto Lous Mohr.

Maintenance and operation: 1.
Provisions for visiting investigators: 3 tables.
Income: Source: Yearly income from the Norwegian

State.

Amount: Kr. 2,200.
Provision for publication of results: No special

publications.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— NORWAY

141

Bergens Museums biologiske stasjon (Marine

Biological Station of the Bergen

Museum)^ ('37)

History or origin: Erected in 1920-22 to take the
place of a small station on Puddefjord in Bergen.
The latter station was erected in 1891 but, because
of the contamination of the water around Bergen,
it was found necessary either to abandon the
station or to find a site for a new one.

Location: On the Island of Herdla on Herlo Fjord,
27 kilometers north of Bergen. As the water
here does not freeze during the winter, investiga-
tions may be prosecuted throughout the year.

Organization to which attached: Bergen Museum,
zoological department.

Purposes: Instruction and research in Marine
Biology.

Scope of activities: As far as possible to carry through
all-sided marine research by facilitating the
research possibilities of visiting scientists. The
institution in itself has no special tasks, the
members of the staff working with their personal
problems.

Equipment: 1 laboratory building. The ground floor
contains 3 double and 2 single laboratories and a
big room for courses of instruction. When no
courses are going on this room is arranged so as
to give accommodations for 5 research workers.
The upper floor contains the library and 9 bed-
rooms, 8 double and 1 single, for visitors. The
basement contains tanks for keeping somewhat
large organisms, an engine room, etc. This main
part of the building is 12.3 meters broad and 19.3
meters long. At one end of the building a smaller
section has been added, the ground plan of which
is 8.2 meters by 9.3 meters in dimensions. It
contains a mess-room for the scientists and an
apartment for the keeper of the station.

There is an excellent salt-water system and
also a fresh-water reservoir, which provide for a
variety of investigations. Among the rooms
aside from those of more general purposes, the
laboratory for physiology and hydrography and
the room for balances and chemical supplies
should be mentioned.

There is also a research vessel, the Herman
Friele, which is about 23 tons gross, 4.27 meters

' For full information on the Biological Marine Station
of the Bergen Museum, see August Brinkmann, "Die neue
biologische Meeresstation des Museums zu Bergen,"
Bergens Museums Aarbok 1921-22, Naturvidenskabelig
Raekke, Nr. 1.

beam and 14.5 meters long. The height of the
side above the water is 2.13 meters. The station
possesses a motor launch and several row boats.

Staff: Director, Professor Dr. August Brinkmann,
the chief of the Zoological Department of the
Bergen Museum. Amanuensis, cand. real. Ditlef
Rustad. 2 technical assistants.

Provisions for visiting investigators: During the
summer when no classes are being given, ten
visitors can be accommodated. In the winter
there are provisions for five. The work places
are free to all competent visitors, but Norwegians
have preferential rights. With a table, there is
supplied the necessary material, aquaria and
ordinary laboratory equipment, together with a
small quantity of the most common chemicals
and dyes. The cost of consumption above this
must be met by the visitor him.self; although
certain chemicals — upon agreement — can be ob-
tained at cost from the laboratory's supplies.
Visitors must bring their own optical and dissect-
ing instruments, as well as all special apparatus,
and must likewise provide themselves with glass-
ware for the preservation of material which they
take with them from the Station (the laboratory's
glassware can not be taken).

Income: Source: From the State. Amount: About
kr. 25,000 per year.

Provisions for publication of results: The usual me-
dium of publication is in the reports of the Bergen
Museum (Bergens Museums Arbok; B. M.
Skrifter).

Papers published elsewhere after agreement
with the Director must give plain indication,
either in the title or in the uitroduction, that
the work has been made at the Station, and
separate copies must be sent to the Station.

Sjokartverket (Nautical Charts Office) ('37)

Location: Oslo.

Staff: Director, VPL. Premier Loitnant Rolf Kjaer.
Head of 1st Section (provisional) (Calculation,
construction, draftmg, etc., of new charts,
editions) VPL Kaptein J. Z. Lundqui-st, R.N.
(retired) .
Head of 2nd Section (Keeping up to date of plates
and charts, coloring of light sectors) Kom-
mandorkaptein A. Boehmer, R.N.
Head of 3rd Section (Notices to Mariners, Sailing
Directions, Library) VPL Kaptein S. Bjerk-
naes, R.N. (retired).

142

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

In charge of Vessels, Archives of originals and

plane-tables, Kaptein H. A. Buhre, R.N.

(retired).
Magnetic work. Instruments, Tides and Currents,

Loitnant F. Vogt, R.N.R.
In charge of special work, Loitnant R. Kjaer,

R.N.R.
Equipment:

SURVEYING VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

Hydbograf 98 1 5

WiLHELM HtJTH 98 1 5

RosT 1 4

7 accommodation vessels, 9 motor boats.

Troms0 Museum ('37)

History or origin: Founded 1872.

Location: Troms0.

Organization to which attached: Independent.

Purposes: Biological and archeological investigations
and museum. Hydrographical laboratory and
investigations in connection with the biological
researches. Regular hydrographical investiga-
tions of the Troms0 area.

Equipment: 1 boat Sparre Schneider, 38 feet,
with necessary equipment. Laboratory for chem-
ical and colorimetric determinations.

Staff: Director, Mr. Soot Ryen. Scientific: 2.
Technical and clerical: 2. Maintenance and
operation: 1.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

Income: Sources: State and other receipts.
Amount: Kr. 26,000.

Provision for publication of results: Troms0 Museums
Skrifter.

Trondheims Biologiske Station ('37)

History or origin: Foimded in 1900.

Location: Trondheim.

Organization to which attached: Private, subsidized
and controlled by the State.

Purposes: Hydrographical and biological investiga-
tions in the fjords and coasts.

(Scope of activities: Coastal water and adjacent ocean.
Hatching of plaice.

Equipment: 1 boat, Gunnerus, motorship.

Staff: Director, Mr. C. F. Dons; Technical and
clerical, and maintenance and operation 3.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Accommodation
for four students.

Income: Sources: Private, Municipal and State
subvention.

Amount: Kr. 28,000.

Provision for publication of results: "Meddelelser'
(Published by Det Kgl. Norske Vidensk. selskab,
Trondheim).

Poland

Biuro Hydrograficzne Marynarki Wojennej
(Hydrographic Office of the Navy) ('37)

Location: u. Chalubinskiego, 3, Warsaw.
Staff: Hydrographer, Komandor podporucznik Ar-
thur Reyman.
Head of Surveys and Researches, Kapitan Mary-
narki Ignacy Pogorzelski.
Head of Supply Service for Navigation, Porucznik
Marynarki Tadensz Borysiewicz.
Equipment:

SCRVEYINQ VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CEBW

PoMORZANiN (ex- Mbwa) 200 3 37

Portugal

Aquario Vasco da Gama-Estaflo de Biologia
Maritima ('37)

History or origin: Built in 1898 as a public Aquarium
for the series of ceremonies in commemoration of
the fourth centenary of the voyage of Vasco da
Gama to India. After the ceremonies, the
building was delivered to the State (Ministry of
Marine, to whom is assigned the administration
of Navigation and Fisheries). Later on, about
1908, the "Sociedade Portuguesa de Ciencias
Naturals," whose aim is the promotion of research
in scientific natural history, took charge of the
building in order to establish in it a marine bio-
logical station. After many difficulties, owing to
shortage of funds and to the Great War, the
Ministry of Marine again took charge of the sta-
tion and it was officially organized (May, 1919)
as an independent scientific institution for the
study of the sea, mainly connected with fisheries.

Location: Dafundo, near Lisbon, about 10 km
from the mouth, on the right margin of the
River Tagus.

Organization to ivhich attached: Connected with the
Fisheries Administration of the Ministry of
Marine. Autonomous administration by a board
formed by an officer of the Navy, as President,
appointed by the Ministry, the Director and
Naturalist of the Station, and a secretary.

Purposes: General research on the sea near Portugal
(biology and oceanography).

Scope of activities: Researches in oceanography near

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— NORWAY, POLAND, PORTUGAL, RUMANIA

143

Portugal, eventually carried to a distance, as for
instance near Madera, the Straits of Gibraltar,
and the Morocco Coast. Biology of useful fishes
(sardine, tunnies, hake) and of plankton.

Equip7nent: 1 laboratory building (same as the public
aquarium), 1 floor with eight rooms used as
individual laboratories.

Library. The resources of the University of
Lisbon and the libraries of its different institutes
arc more or less available for the workers, as a
supplement to the limited facilities at the aquar-
ium. Tank rooms for fresh and brackish water
animals.

Staff: Director, Dr. Alfredo Ramalho. Naturalists,
R. Boto, B. Gongalves, and H. Vilela. 2 clerical
and technical assistants. 2 maintenance and
operation workers. For aquarium: 2 engineers;
5 fishermen; 1 guard.

Provisions for visiting investigators: There is room
for 2 or 3.

Income: For 1936 the total receipts amounted to
about 240,000 Escudos (one Escudo equivalent,
at the present rate of exchange, to about 5 U. S. A.
cents). 200,000 from the State and the remaining
from the entrance fees in the aquarium (40,000
visitors, not taking account of the pupils of
schools).

Provisions for the publications of results: The papers
are generally published in different journals, only
exceptionally printed by the Station. All arc
distributed in exchange to similar scientific
institutions as "Travaux de la Station de Biologic
Maritime de Lisbonne."

Research Ship Albacora: A ship of the same
type and dimensions of Armauer Hansen of the
Geophysical Institute of Bergen; displacement
about 135 tons, with sails and 60 H.P. motor;
winches for work to a depth of about 3,000 meters;
small laboratory. Built in 1924, in Norway,
under the scientific supervision of Professor B.
Helland-Hansen, of the Geophysical Institute in
Bergen. The ship belongs to the Portuguese
Navy.

Direccao de Hidrografia, Navegagao e Meteorologia

Nautica (Office of Hydrography, Navigation

and Nautical Meteorology) ('37)

Location: Navy Department, Lisbon.

Staff: Director, Capitao de Mar e Guerra Augusto

Fernandes Lopes.
Head of 1st Division, Capitao de Fragata Manuel

da Cunha Rego Chaves.

Head of 1st Section, Capitao de Corveta Amadeu

Julio de Sousa Correia.
Assistant of the 2nd Section, Primeiro tenente

Manuel Zagalo da Silva.
Assistant, 3rd Section, Capitao do Fragata Artur

Jose da Conceigao Santos.
Head of 2nd Division (Nautical Meteorology)

Capitao de Fragata Joao Antonio Correia

Pereira.
Heads of Sections, Meteorologists Primeiro te-
nente Joaquim da Costa and Primeiro tenente

Jos6 Mendes da Rocha Zagalo.
Equipment:

SURVEYINQ VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERa CREW

5 D'OoTtJBRO 1,365 10 89

Albacora 135 1 14

BfiRRio 498 5 48

Beira 405 5 27

Rumania

Romania, Serviciul Hidrografic al Marinei de Razboi
(Hydrographic Service of the Navy) ('37)

Location: Constantza.

Staff: Chief of the Hydrographic Service, Capitan
Alexandra Stoianovici.

Statia Zoologica Maritima "Regele Ferdinand I"

(Maritime Zoological Station "King

Ferdinand I") ('37)

History: Founded by Prof. I. Borcea of the Faculty
of Science at lasi on March 1, 1926, with the
assistance of the Ministers of Public Instruction,
Dr. C. Angclescu and Dr. N. Lupu, and
through the efforts of Prof. A. P. Baznosanu of
the Faculty of Science in Bucharest.

Location: Village of Agigea, Province of Constantza,
between the railroad station "General M. lonescu"
and Eforia baths.

Organization to which attached: Ministry of National
Education, Zoological Laboratory of the Univer-
sity of lasi.

Purposes: In particular the knowledge of the fauna
of the Black Sea and of the neighboring lakes.
The completion of students' zoological education.

Equipment: Two principal buildings, one for the
Director and one for the investigators; two
smaller buildings, one for the administration and
one for students (laboratory); and a small elec-
trical plant. There are about 22 hectares of
land. The equipment otherwise is very limited,
a few mud dredges and a motor boat.

144

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Staff: Scientific: Director, C. Motas, Professor of
Zoology, University of lasi.
Chief of Laboratory, Mrs. Dr. Lucia Borcea.
Assistant: Mr. Sergiu Carausu.
Administrative: An Administrator, a laboratory
worker, two servants.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Two work
tables, free lodging, food to be bought at the
Station's restaurant which operates from June
1 to October L
Income: None.

Results of investigations are published in the review,
Annales scientifiques de I'Universit^ d'lassy
(authors receive 50 copies free).

Scotland

Marine Laboratory of the Fishery Board
for Scotland ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1882.

Location: Aberdeen, Scottish east coast — principal
trawl and great line-fishing port in Scotland.

Organization to ivhich attached: Fishery Board for
Scotland.

Purposes: Fishery biological research.

Scope of activities: The study of the stocks of market-
able fishes and crustaceans in general, of the
haddock, herring, and plaice species in particular
and of all factors biological and physical affecting
such stocks. Operations are carried out con-
sistently over the whole continental plateau to
the north of approximately Lat. 55°30' N.
Occasional trawling, planktonic, and hydro-
graphic surveys also being made to Faroe and
Iceland waters.

Equipment: One laboratory building. Wood Street,
Terry, Aberdeen, "H" shaped, single floor,
mcludes museum of marine fauna and large
library of relevant literature.

One aquarium building. Bay of Nigg, Aberdeen,
with out-buildings (pimiping machinery, store
rooms, etc.), tidal pond, two large concrete sea-
water storage tanks.

One deep-sea research vessel Explorer, Mersey
class trawler, length 138 feet, breadth 21 feet,
gross tonnage 324 tons, fitted with modern trawl-
ing gear, echo sounder, and necessary oceano-
graphic research equipment.

Staff: Scientific: Superintendent, R. S. Clark, M.A.,
D.Sc, F.R.S.E. Naturalists, Senior Grade: H.
Wood, M.A., Ph.D.; J. B. Tait, B.Sc, Ph.D.,
F.R.S.E. Naturalists, Junior Grade: S. G. Gib-

bons, B.Sc, Ph.D., F.R.S.E.; D. S. Raitt, B.Sc,
Ph.D., F.L.S., F.R.S.E.; A. Ritchie, B.Sc, Ph.D.;
B. B. Rae, B.Sc; J. H. Eraser, M.Sc (proba-
tioner naturalist).

There are nine technical assistants and five
non-technical helpers.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No special
provision exists for visiting investigators.

Income: Finances entirely by H. M. Government.

Provision for publication of results: A survey of each
year's work with the general application of results
is published amiually in the Board's report.
More detailed reports of particular researches are
issued separately in a series referred to as "Fish-
eries Scotland, Sci. Invest." All pubhcations
issued by the Board are printed and published by
H. M. Stationery Oflace, 120 George Street,
Edinburgh. On account of Scotland's participa-
tion in the work of the International Council
for the Exploration of the Sea reports and data
relating to Scottish work also appear in the
publications of that body.

The Terry Research Station ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1929.

Location: Aberdeen, Scotland.

Organization to which attached: The Department of
Scientific and Industrial Research. The Torry
Research Station is under the aegis of the Food
Investigation Board of the Department. Head-
c}uarters, 16 Old Queen Street, Westminister,
London SW 1.

Purposes and scope: Investigations of methods of
handling, stowage, transport, storage and, in
general, the preservation of fish and food. Re-
searches into the associated basal physiological
and biochemical problems.

The Station's work is largely coordinated with
researches connected with food at other organiza-
tions under the Department of Scientific and
Industrial Research. Cooperation in similar Em-
pire researches is maintained.

Equipment: A two story brick building, in Abbey
Road, Torry, Aberdeen, containing offices and
laboratories. A two story building of shed
construction close by, containing experimental
plant (cold stores, smoke curing kilns, oil extract-
ing apparatus), further laboratories, workshops.
A research vessel — City of Edinburgh — a
steam drifter adapted for trawling and for certain
laboratory operations, 84 ft. long, 18 ft. beam, 88
gross tonnage.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— RUMANIA, SCOTLAND, SPAIN

145

Staff: Superintendent, Adrian Lumley. Senior Sci-
entific Officers: George A. Reay, M.A., B.Sc,
Ph.D.; J. A. Lovern, B.Sc, Pli.D. Junior Scien-
tific Officers: J. Shewan, B.Sc, Pii.D.; A. Banks,
B.Sc, Ph.D. 7 Technical and Laboratory as-
sistants; 16 Industrial staff.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No special
provision.

Income: Financed entirely by H. M. Government.

Provision for publication of results: Survey of each
year's work appears in the Annual Report of the
Food Investigation Board. Occasionally special
reports (on particular researches) and leaflets (for
information of the fish industry) are jjublished.

These above are printed and published through
H. M. Stationery Office, Adastral House, Ivings-
way, London, W.C. 2.

Scientific papers are published under authors'
names in various scientific and technical journals,
e.g. "Biochemical Journal," "Analyst," "Journal
of the Society of Chemical Industry," "Ice and
Cold Storage."

Marine Biological Station, Keppel Pier,
Millport ('37)

History or origin: The original laboratory was a
barge the Ark brought from the Forth by Sir
John Murray in 1885, and drawn up on the shore
near the present site. The Ark, replaced by a
stone building in 1897, was destroyed by a storm
in 1900.

Location: Near Keppel Pier, on the south east
corner of Cumbrae Island in the Firth of Clyde;
about 1 mile from the town of ]\Iillport.

Organization to which attached: Scottish Marine
Biological Association.

Purposes: Investigation of the fauna and flora of the
Clyde Sea area and provisions of facilities for
research and study for students and others inter-
ested in such work.

Scope of activities: Plankton investigations, growth
of the diatom crop in relation to Calanus; growth,
distribution, etc. of Calanus in relation to physico-
chemical factors; growth, food and distribution of
young herring, leading to the elucidation of the
food chain on which the herring fishery depends.
Quantitative studies of bivalves and Crustacea
in sandy bays in relation to the food supply of
inshore fishes.

Equipment: Laboratory buUding, two floors, 30
feet by 75 feet with 30 foot wing. Fresh sea
water, gas, electric light and power. The labora-

tory contains a Public Museum and Aquarium.
Library appro.\imately 1500 volumes and 2000
pamphlets.

A motor boat M. B. Nautilus, 40 feet long,
12 tons, 30 h.p. engine, equipped for trawling,
sounding, townctting, etc. At the Station is an
18 foot boat with 3J horse outboard motor.

Staff: Scientific: Director, Richard Elmhirst; Bio-
chemist, A. P. Orr, M.A., D.Sc, A.I.C.; Natu-
ralist, Miss S. M. Marshall, D.Sc; Assistant
Naturalist, Aubrey G. Nicholls, Ph.D. Mainte-
nance and operation: Foreman, J. Peden; Labora-
tory Assistant, E. Latham; Skipper and boatman,
R. Kerr; Museum attendant, J. Shields; Boatman
and cleaner, D. Burnie.

Provisions for visiting investigators: 1 research room,
3 small cubicles, and the class room when not
otherwise in u.se (the class room seats 36), give
provision for about five workers.

Plans for a new wing have now matured and
it is hoped to start building in February, 1937, an
extension parallel to the original building giving
provision for the staff and five new work rooms
as well as increased laboratory space.

Income: Derived from subscriptions by members,
subscriptions from various public bodies, dona-
tions, sale of specimens, admissions to the museum
and aquarium and a maintenance grant from the
Development Commission.

Provisions for publication of results: Summary in
Annual Report and otherwise, chiefly in Journal
Marine Biological A.ssociation as well as other
journals.

Spain
Laboratorio Oceanografico de Canarias ('34)

History or origin: E.stablished on November 8, 1928.
A permanent laboratory has not yet been erected
but one is contemplated for the relatively near
future.'"

Location: Las Palmas, Leon y Castillo 264, Canary
Islands.

Organization to which attached: Instituto Espanol
de Oceanografia.

Purposes and scope of activities: For the systematic
investigations of the oceanographic and biological
conditions in the vicinity of the Canary Islands.

Equipment: At present the quarters are only tem-
porary.

'" Primeros trabajos del Laboratorio Oceanogrdfieo de
Canarias por Luis Bell6n y Emma Barddn Mateu. Insti-
tuto Espan. Oceanogr. Notas y Resumenes, ser. 2, no. 48,
pp. 79, 29 figs., 193L

146

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Staff: Luis Bellon Uriarte, Lie. Nat. Sci., Director;
Emma Barddn Mateu, Lie. Nat. Sci.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Consult the
director of the Institute Espanol de Oceanografia,
Alcala 31, Madrid.

Income: Contribution for the Government.

Provision for publication of results: In the publica-
tions of the Institute Espanol de Oceanograffa.

Institute Espanol de Oceanografia ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1914.'^

Location: Madrid, Alcald 31.

Organization to which attached: Subsecretaria de la
Marina Civil, under the INIinisterio de Marina.

Purposes: To study the physical, chemical, and
biological conditions of the seas surrounding the
Spanish Peninsula and apply the results obtained
to the problems of the marine fisheries.

Scope of activities: 1. General oceanography with
special reference to fisheries and also the study
of the physics, marine sediments, and the dynam-
ics of the Spanish seas.

2. Oceanographical chemistry (analysis of wa-
ters and their elements), and industrial chemistry
and its practical application to fish culture and
to the preservation of fishes and their products.

3. Marine biology, mainly its application to
fi.sheries.

4. Fishery economics and technology.
Equipment: At the central offices in Madrid there

are four laboratories, one each for oceanography,
chemistry, general biology (prmcipally of economic
value), and ichthyology. There is also a depart-
ment for commerce and technology of fisheries.
There are five coa.stal laboratories, at Santander,
Palma de Mallorca, Malaga, Las Palmas (Canary
Lslands), and Vigo. The latter has ju.st been
established and is now in process of organization.
For expeditions in waters adjacent to the Spanish
Peninsula and Spanish protectorate and dominion
zones, the naval coast guard vessel Xauen is
used. Some boats provided with a motor are
used by the laboratories.
Staff: Director, Professor Odon de Buen; Sub-
director, Professor Rafael de Buen.
Oceanographical department: Chief, Professor
Rafael de Buen. Assistant, vacant. Assistant
preparator, Jaime Magaz, Lie. Nat. Sci.

" Orgaiiizaci6n y labor efectuada por el Institute Es-
panol de Oceanografia. Institute Espanol de Oceano-
grafia, Notas y Resiimenes, series 2, no. 62, pp. 1-122, 11
pis., November, 1932.

Chemistry department: Chief, Professor Jose
Cerezo. Director, Frutos A. Gila, Lie. Ch.
Assistant, Olimpio Gomez Ibafiez, Lie. Ch.
Assistant preparator, Antonio Rodriguez de las
Heras, Lie. Ch.
Biological Department: Chief, Dr. Fernando de
Buen. Director, Dr. Victoriano Rivera. As-
sistant, vacant. Assistant preparator, Maria
de las Mercedes Garcia Lopez, Lie. Nat. Sci.
Commerce and technology of fisheries: Chief,
Cap. de Navio, Jos6 Maria Rolddn. Assistant,
Jimena Quiros, Lie. Nat. Sci.
Provisions for visiting investigators: See the account

of the coastal laboratories.
Income: Sources: From the budget of the State,
tickets for aquarium and museum, sale of publica-
tions, renting of work rooms at the laboratories,
aided by fishery organizations.
Provisions for puhlication of results: Memorias,
Resultados de Campanas y Trabajos, Notas y
Resiimenes, Boletin de Pesca, now Boletin de
Oceanografia y Pesca.

Laboratorio de Malaga ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1914 in conjunction
with the Laboratorio de Palma de Mallorca to
offer opportunity for study of the interesting
oceanographic and biological conditions in the
vicinity of the Strait of Gibraltar. The building
is temporary. A large laboratory is to be con-
structed near the present site.

Location: Mdlaga, south coast, near the extreme
west of the Mediterranean.

Organization to which attached: Instituto Esi)aiiol
de Oceanografia.

Purposes and scope of activities: Marine biology and
oceanography. Oceanographical conditions of
the region that have been studied during various
years. Many species of fish have been collected.
There are now enough bottom samples to make
possible the preparation and publication of a
chart of the lithology of the sea bottom in the
area adjacent to Miilaga.

Equipment: Laboratories for oceanography, chem-
istry, and biology. A museum, a photographic
room, a boat Principe Alberto de Monaco,
with an auxiliary motor of 35 hp., and 16 tons
displacement.

Staff: Director, Alvaro de Miranda, Lie. Cienc. Nat.;
Assistant, Angel Alconada, Lie. Cienc. Nat.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The laboratory

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— SPAIN

147

has been visited by many Spanish and foreign
professors and students of the universities of
Madrid and Granada and other centers of learn-
ing. Courses have been organized for the study
of the different aspects of the sea.
Provision for publication of results: In the pubUca-
tions of the Instituto Espanol de Oceanografia.

Laboratorio de Palma de Mallorca ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1906 by the Na-
tional Museum of Natural History.

Location: Palma, Island of Mallorca, Belearic Is-
lands, in the Mediterranean.

Organization to which attached: Instituto Espanol
de Oceanografia. (Since 1919.)

Purposes and scope of activities: To send live marine
animals to the universities and other institutions
of learning, to acquaint the students with the
problems of marine biology, to conduct oceano-
graphic investigations and experiments in the
culture of marine animals, and to give needed help
to foreign and Spanish naturalists who desire to
work there. The temperature and salinity of the
adjacent waters have been studied, expeditions
have been made on the gim boat Vasco Nunez
DE Balboa to study hydrographic conditions to
the greater depths, and a chart of the bottom
deposits of the bay has been published.

Equipment: Chemical, biological, and oceanographic
laboratories; photographic rooms; store rooms for
instruments, et cetera; rooms for the preparation
of samples, collections, et cetera; aquarium;
museum; library. Modern installations for in-
vestigations include work rooms with fresh and
salt water. The laboratory has its owm harbor
where it keeps its vessels, all provided with motors.

Staff: Director, Francisco de P. Navarro, Lie. Nat.
Sci.; Assistant, Miguel Massutf, Lie. Nat. Sci.

Provisions for visiting investigators: A large number
of foreign and Spanish professors and specialists
visit the laboratory. Frequent excursions are
arranged for the students of the universities of
Barcelona and Madrid and of foreign centers.
Work rooms are rented permanently by important
German scientific institutions. It is one of the
best known scientific centers in Europe with
regard to oceanography and biology.

Income: Variable (Budget of State).

Provision for publication of results: In the publica-
tions of the Instituto Espanol de Oceanografia.

Instituto y Observatorio de Marina de
San Fernando ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1754.

Location: San Fernando (Cadiz).

Organization to which attached: Government institu-
tion.

Purposes and scope of activities: One of its three
sections is concerned with marine meteorology,
magnetism, nautical instruments, and tides.

Equipment: Important library.

Staff: Director, D. Leon Herrero, Contralmirante
in the Navy; Subdirector, D. Wenceslao Benitez,
Capitdn de Navio.

Provision for publication of results: Almanaque
Nautico, Anales Meteorologicos, Magneticos, y
Sismicos, Catalogo Astrofotografico zona —3° a
— 9°, Carta fotografica del Cielo, Cartas nauticas,
Derroteros, Codigo de seiiales, Avisos a los
navegantes, Cuadernos de Faros.

Servicio Hydrografico ('36)

Location: San Fernando, Cadiz.
Organization to which attached: 4a Section of Ob-
servatorio de Marina de San Fernando.
Staff: Director, Director del Observatorio, Con-
tralmirante Hidrografo D. Leon Herrero.

Sub-Director, Subdirector del Observatorio,
Capitan de Navio Hidrografo D. Wenceslao
Benitez.

Head of the 4th Section of the Observatory,
Capitan de Navio Hidrografo J. Jos6 P^rez.

Charts, Capitan de Corbeta D. Rafael Sanchez.

Sailing Directions, Teniente de Navio Hi-
drografo D. Diego Gomez.

Light lists, Capitan de Corbeta D. Rafael
Sanchez.

Notices to Mariners, Capitdn de Corbeta D.
Rafael Sanchez.

Tides, Capitdn de Corbeta Hidrografo D.
Francisco Fernandez de la Puente.

Hydrographic Commission, Capitdn de Fragata
Hidrografo D. Federico Aznar.
Equipment:

SURVEYING VESSELa DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

Castor 60 12

Pollux 60 12

ToFiNO 1,220 9 79

Malespina

148

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Sociedad de Oceanografia de Guipuzcoa
('27, Magrini)

Location: San Sebastian (Rue Aldemar).
Organization to which attached: Private institution.
Purposes and scope of activities: The popularization

of the problems of oceanography and fisheries.

It renders valuable service in oceanographic

investigations in Spain.
Equipment: Laboratories for oceanography and

marine biology. Fisheries school. Library.
Provision for publication of results: Bulletin.

Laboratorio de Santander ('34)

History or origin: Through the efforts of D. Augusto
Gonzales Linares, this station was established
in May, 1886, under the name of Estacion
maritima de Zoologia y Botanica experimentales.
It became a part of the Instituto Espanol de
Oceanografia when the latter was established in
1914.

Location: Santander, on the Gulf of Biscay.

Organization to which attached: Instituto Espanol
de Oceanografia.

Purposes and scope of activities: The study of the
flora and the fauna of the coastal regions. For-
mation and increase of the scientific collections
of museums and institutions of learning and
the application of scientific studies to the develop-
ment of maritime industries. Teaching of marine
zoology and botany to students of the University
of Madrid and to serve as a place of research for
Spanish and foreign naturalists and biologists.

Equipment: Aquarium, various chemical and bio-
logical laboratories, store house for oceanographic
instruments and fishing gear, and a complete
museum of local marine organisms, library, collec-
tions for study, various work rooms, et cetera,
some boats, two of them provided with motors.

Staff: Director, Dr. Luis Alaejos; Assistant, Dr.
Juan Cuesta.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Investigators
both national and foreign are received, also
pupils, principally for summer school.

Income: From the State and from the corporations
of the locality.

Provision for publication of results: In the publica-
tions of the Instituto Espanol de Oceanografia.

Laboratorio de Vigo ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1934. (In process
of organization.)

Locatio7i: Vigo.

Organization to which attached: Instituto Espanol
de Oceanografia.

Sweden

Borno Research Station ('37)

History or origin: Built in 1901 by 0. Pettersson
and G. Ekman, passed into state ownership in
1932.

Location: Half way up the Gullmar-fjord, the
largest and deepest of Swedish fjords.

Organization to which attached: Svenska Hydro-
grafisk-Biologiska Komissionen.

Purposes: Center for carrying out the hydrographical
part of the Komissionen's program.

Scope of activities: Base of the hydrographic expedi-
tions with the Skagerak. Running observa-
tions of internal water-movements, daily hydro-
graphic soundijigs since 1909.

Equipment: A stock of instruments, partly of special
construction, for the study of internal waves,
currents, light penetration, et cetera, and an
observation pier ailording 34 meters depth, 2
motorboats mainly used for traffic.

Staff: Director, Professor Hans Pettersson (not
salaried); 1st Assistant, Licentiat B. Kullenberg;
2nd Assistant, Licentiat N. Y. Gustafsson; Me-
chanic, A. Fries.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Guests are occa-
sionally received for carrying out special in-
vestigations.

Income: Part of the state grant for the Komissionen
is allotted to Borno, about 16,000 Kr.

Provision for publication of results: Svenska Hydro-
grafisk-Biologiska Komissionens Shrifter, Serie
Hydrografi, also occasional publications in Med-
delanden fr§, Goteborgs Hogskola Oceanografishe
In.stitution.

Klubbans Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: Founded by Professor A. Appellof,

Upp.sala, 1915.
Location: In the fishing village of Fiskebackskil

on the west coast of Sweden. Post address,

Fiskebackskil.
Organization to which attached: University of Uppsala.
Purposes: The principal purpose is instruction of

students of the University in the marine fauna.

Wlien the finances are sufficient, independent

researches are also prosecuted.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— SPAIN, SWEDEN

149

Scope of activities: The Swedish coastal tidal flats
of the Province of Bohuslan.

Equipment: The usual equipment for making zoologi-
cal and ichthyological collections as well as
apparatus for making quantitative investigations
of soft bottoms and a motor boat.

Staff: Director, Sven Ekman, Professor in the
Zoological Museum, University of Uppsala. 2
subordinate officers.

Provision for visiting investigators: The Station has
not yet been outfitted to care for scientific guests
and it can be used only during the summer.

Income: Source: State appropriation.
Amount: 5,000 Swedish Kroner yearly.

Provisions for publication of results: None.

Kristinebergs Zoologiska Station ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1877.

Location: On the west coast of Sweden, near the
mouth of the Gullmarfjord, at Fiskebackskil.

Organization to which attached: Royal Swedish
Academy of Science.

Purposes: Research and some instruction.

Scope of activities: A course in marine zoology is
given every year in June for Swedish University
students.

Equipment: Two laboratories with modern equip-
ment for investigations. Library with 10,000
volumes and reprints. Motor boat Sven LoviiN,
42 feet long, 16 foot beam, with a 30 horse-power
petrol motor. 2 small motor boats. A tower for
sea water, capacity 70 cu. m. Boarding house.
3 official residences.

Staff: Director, Professor Dr. Einar Lonnberg,
Stockholm. Manager, Fil. Dr. Gunnar Gustaf-
son, Fiskebackskil. Maintenance and opera-
tion: 4.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The station is
open all the year. Research material, reagents
and instruments are free for use, without any
cost. The visitors are permitted to stay in the
boarding house and have only to pay the cost for
meals. Foreign investigators are welcome and
have the same privileges. There are 20 work
places.

Income: The yearly budget is 24,500 Swedish Kronor
paid by the Royal Academy of Science.

Provision for the publication of results: The Station
has no series of its own. The result of work done
at the Station is published in the publications of
the Swedish Royal Academy of Science.

Oceanografiska Institutionen vid Goteborgs
Hogskola ('37)

History or origin: Founded as docentur — experi-
mental grant and allotment of three rooms —
by a private donor. Doctor Gustaf Ekman, in
1914. The chair in oceanography was founded in
1930 by Mr. Knut Mark, as professor.

Location: Goteborg, in the building of the Hogskola,
now comprising three rooms and lecture room.

Organization to which attached: Belongs to Goteborgs
Hogskola, a university (incomplete), founded by
private donors and subsidized by the city of
Goteborg.

Purposes and scope of activities: Teaching of students
for graduate and postgraduate courses as a
complement to the course in geography. Also
research in oceanography and geophysics.

Equipment: A stock of oceanographic, physical,
and chemical apparatus acquired from annual
grant.

Staff: Scientific: Director, Dr. Hans Pettersson.
A docent, at present vacant. The assistants of
Svenska Hydrografisk-Biologiska Komissionen
make use of the institution for their research.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No provisions
for regular visitors; occasionally guests have
worked in the institution.

Income: Source: Income from donations made by
Dr. Gu.staf Ekman and Mr. Knut Mark.

Amount: (Of donations from which income is
derived) 100,000 Kronor — Dr. Gustaf Ekman,
for experimental grant (inclusive of salary for
docent). 300,000 Kronor— Mr. Knut Mark, for
salary to professor in oceanograjjhy.

Provision for publication of results: The results from
the scientific investigations of the director, who
is also director of hydrographical work for the
Svenska Hydrografisk-Biologiska Komissionen,
with which body the institution is in close co-
operation, arc published in a series "Meddelanden
frS,n Oceanografiska Institutionen vid Goteborgs
Hogskola" included in "Kungliga Vetenskaps- och
Vitterhetssamhallcts Handlingar Goteborg." The
series which was started in 1931 has at present 12
numbers in large 8 quartos.

Note: Thanks to the munificence of "Knut and
Alice Wallenbergs Stiftelse," the same private donor
who had proxided the Svenska H. B. Komissionen
with its two Stations at Borno and Lysekil, a new
Oceanographic Institute will soon be erected in
Goteborg, building operations to commence in the

150

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

autumn of 1937. The sum allotted for building and
equipment is 370,000 kr. This new institute will
belong to the Royal Society of Goteborg, i.e.,
Goteborgs Kungliga Vetenskaps- och Vitterhets
Samhalle. The Oceanografiska Institutionen of
Goteborgs Hogskola will be housed in the institute
and its chief will be the holder of the chair in
oceanography. Beside the present income from
Gustaf Ekman's donation, a contribution from Ivnut
and Alice Wallenbergs foundation of 10,000 kr.
annually has been granted for a period of 10 years
starting from 1938. In the board of directors, the
Svenska Hydrografisk-Biologiska Komissionen will
be represented through its chairman and Sjofarts-
museet in Goteborg and representatives of Goteborgs
Hogskola. The new institute will thus work in
close cooperation with the said institutes. Its
scope of activities will be partly the same as those
of Komissionen, partly instruction. It wdll afford
facilities for work also to a limited number of resident
visitors. Publications : Medd. Oceanograf Institutet
included in the Forhandlingar of Goteborgs Kungl.
Vetenskaps- och Vitterhets Samhalle.

Svenska Hydrografisk-Biologiska
Komissionen ('37)

History or origin: Arose from Svenska Hydrografiska
Komissionen which was formed in the middle of
the nineties by Otto Pettersson, Gustaf Ekman,
and August Wijkander for the scientific study of
the sea off the Swedish coasts. It was recon-
stituted about 1900 by the inclusion of members
for biology of which P. T. Cleve and Filip Trybom
were among the first.

Location: Goteborg.

Organization to which attached: The Komission is
rmdcr the Department of Agriculture in Stock-
holm, its grant coming under that department.
Two members. Doctor Andersson and Prof. Nils
ZeUon, are Swedish delegates to the International
Council for the Exploration of the Sea. One of
the purposes of the Komission is to carry out
Sweden's part of the international investigations.

Purposes and scope of activities: The purpose of the
Komission's work is to carry out and publish
investigations, oceanographic and biologic, within
the sea around the Swedish coasts and especially
to carry out Sweden's part in the international
investigations. Also to supervise and edit ob-
servations from lightships.

Equipment: The Komission has jurisdiction over the
newly built research motorship the Skagerak

which is fully equipped for all kinds of work in
fishery and oceanography. It has two research
stations, Borno, half way up the Gullmar-fjord,
built in 1901; and Havsfiskelaboratoriet at the
mouth of the same fjord, built in 1929. For
each of these stations, see the appropriate special
statement.
Staff: The members of the Komission serve gratui-
tously.
President of the Komission, the Governor of

Goteborg.
For Hydrography, Prof. Hans Pettersson, Gote-
borg; Prof. N. Zeilon, Lund.
For Fishery and Biology, Dr. K. Anderson of
Lantbrukastyrelsen, Stockholm; Dr. N. Rosen.
Fisheries Inspector of the Western District and
Secretary Lansa.ssessor, A. Thofelt.
Provisions for visiting investigators: No special
provisions for visiting investigators exist although
at Borno guests are occasionally received for
carrying out special investigations.
Income: Source: Government grant. Varies from
year to year.
Amount: About 20,000 Kr., plus about 90,000 Kr.
for running the ship Skagerak.
Provision for publication of i-csults: The Svenska
Hydrografisk-Biologiska Komissionens Skrifter
appear irregularly in two series, "Hydrography"
and "Biology." New series in quarto. Until
now, thirteen numbers of the hydrographic and
five of the biologic have appeared. The lightship
publications are issued annually, one volume in
quarto, since 1923.

Havsfiskelaboratoriet ('37)

History or origin: Built in 1929.

Location: At the mouth of the Gullmar-fjord.

Organization to which attached: Svenska Hydro-
grafisk-Biologiska Komissionen.

Purposes and scope of activities: The biological
(fishery and plankton) part of the Svenska H. B.
Komissionen's work and also technical chemical
investigations on the preservation of fish and other
problems of the fishery industry.

Equipment: Mainly equipped for microscopic and
plankton work but has aquariums with running
sea-water. The chemical technical department
is equipped for chemical and biochemical work.

Staff: 1st Assistant, Dr. A. Molander, Fishery and
biologj\ 2nd Assistant, Licentiat H. Hoglund,
plankton. Extra assistant, Fil. Kandidat G.
Stordal, plankton counts.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— SWEDEN, TUNIS, TURKEY, UNION OP SOUTH AFRICA

151

Chemical-technical Department: Laborator, Dr.
M. Lundborg; Bitrade, Dr. Lucie Ahlstrom.
For both departments : Clerk, Miss Ingrid Ekdalil ;
Mechanic, C. Karlsson.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

Income: Part of the grant allotted to Svenska
Hydrografisk-Biologiska Kommissionen.

Provisions for publication of results: Svenska Hy-
drografisk-Biologiska Komissionens Shrifter, Serie
Biologi.

Kungliga Sjokarteverket (Hydrographic
Service) ('37)

Location: Stockholm.

Staff: Hydrographer, Kommendorkapten E.
Bouveng.

Head of Division of Hydrography and Instru-
ments, Kapten E. Farn.strom.

Head of Division of Charts, H. Odelsio, B.A.

Head of Section of Notices to Mariners, Kom-
mendor (Res.) A. Hagg.

Head of Section of Sailing Directions, Kom-
mendorkapten (Res.) C. B. Erikson.

Head of Geodetic Section, S. Hilding, B.A.

Cartographer, P. Collinder, Ph.D.

Head of Section for control of compasses and
ships' lights, E. 0. Edelstam, M.A.

Head of Section of Magnetic Research, G. S.
Ljungdahl, Ph.D.
Equipment:

SURVEYING VESSELS DISPLACBUENTS OFPICEEIS CREW

johan nordenanckar 260 5 33

Peter Gedda 140 3 23

Ran 200 4 29

SvALAN 125 3 24

Falken 160 3 32

Ejdebn 95 2 16

Tunis

Oceanographic Station of Salammbo ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1924."

Location: Salammbo near Carthage.

Orgariization to which attached: Direction G^n^rale

des Travaux Publics.
Purposes: To investigate the marine organisms,

especially fishes and Crustacea of economic

significance, along the coast of Tunis.
/Scope of activities: General biological investigation

of edible fish and Crustacea (including fishery

" See Heldt, H., Rapport sur I'Organisation,]' Activite
et les Travaux de la Station Oceanographique de Salaramb6
depuis sa creation (1924-1931), Station Oceanographique
de Salammbo, Bull. no. 24, November, 1931.

statistics), ecology of the intertidal and other
coastal areas, faunistic studies, marine algae,
physiology of marine organisms, chemistry of
local waters.

Equipment: ]\Iuseum which exhibits various marme
organisms, fishing gear, and some types of boats;
an aquarium; laboratories for scientific research.
In the laboratory there are 3 rooms for biology,
a chemical laboratory, and a special laboratory
for work in physical chemistry. The different
laboratories are supplied with both fresh and salt
water. There are also photographic rooms.
The library contains several thousand volumes
(6200 in 1933) on general zoology, biology, em-
bryology, histology, oceanography, expeditions,
and fisheries.

Staff: Director Monsieur H. Heldt; Assistant, Mme.
Heldt.

Provision for visiting investigators: Several visitors
can be accommodated and are welcome, some
assistance is given to those who come from
various French educational and scientific in-
stitutions.

Income: From revenues derived by the State from
the exploitation of fishing in Lac de Tunis.
Annual budget about 500,000 francs.

Provision for publication: Notes, 27 published;
Bulletin, 30 published; Annales, 8 published; also
Tables de pH, Illustrated Catalogue of the Mu-
seum and Aquarium, and an Illustrated Guide
for the Museum and Aquarium.

Turkey

Harta Genel Direktorliigii Hidrografi Subesi

(Hydrographic Section of the Cartographical

Service of the Army) ('37)

Location: Ankara.

Staff: Hydrographer, Albay Ahmet Rasim Barkinay.

Equipment:

8DRVEYINQ VESSELS

Atdin-Reiz

DISPLACEMENTS OFFICERS CREW

610

Union of South Africa

Fisheries Survey Division ('37)

History or origin: The present Fisheries was estab-
lished in the year 1920."
Location: Capetown, Union of South Africa.

" Union of South Africa Fisheries and Marine Biological
Survey, Report No. 1 for the year 1920 by J. D. F. Gil-
christ, M.A., D.Sc, Capetown, 1921.

152

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Organization to which attached: Department of
Commerce and Industries.

Purposes and scope of activities: Research work is
carried out at sea to determine the biological
aspects and the distribution of the commoner
types of marine fishes, crustaceans, and other
marine organisms of economic significance.
Oceanographical work is also carried out and the
usual chemical and physical analyses are made.

Equipment: A specially constructed vessel, R. S.
Africana, with all modern equipment necessary
for marine survey work; laboratory Marine Bio-
logical Station at Sea Point, Cape Town.

Staff: Director, Dr. C. von Bonde.

Provisions for irlsiting investigators: See statement on
the laboratory at St. James.

Income: Governmental appropriation.

Provisio7is for publication of results: The Reports of
the Fisheries and Marine Biological Survey. In-
vestigational Reports and Fisheries Bulletins are
issued from time to time.

Marine Biological Station and Headquarters of the
Division of Fisheries ('37)

(After the construction of the building mentioned
below the station at St. James in False
Bay loill be abandoned).

History or origin: Under construction at cost of
$100,000.00.

Location: Sea Point, near Cape Town.

Organization to which attached: Division of Fisheries
of the Department of Commerce and Industries.

Purposes and scope of activities: The new buildings
will house the administrative and research offices
and laboratories of the Division and will replace
the St. James Marine Biological Station which
will be handed over to the Marine Biological
Society of South Africa. Research will be
conducted in connection with the Fishery Indus-
try of South Africa in all its phases.

Equipment: Library with numerous catalogued
reprints and text books dealing with fisheries
research and marine biology. Fish Hatchery
and six laboratories. Fully equipped for all
aspects of marine biological research. Aquarium
of modern construction with 43 tanks. This
aquarium will be a public institution and will be
directly controlled by the Division of Fisheries.

Staff: Scientific and technical: Dr. C. von Bonde,
Director of Fisheries and Honorary Director of
the Aquarium. Mr. J. M. Marchand, M.Sc,
Technical Assistant. A further technical assist-

ant is being appointed and there will be a number
of aquarium assistants under a .superintendent.
Maintenance r Caretakers and technicians.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Accommodation
for ten research workers.

Income: Maintained for the Division of Fisheries
by the Government of the Union of South Africa.
The income from the Aquarium will be handed
over to the Cape Town Municipality who must
pay for the maintenance of the Aquarium.

Provision for publication of results: The Division of
Fisheries publishes an annual report and also
Investigational Reports and Fisheries Bulletins
from time to time.

Marine Biological Station of the Division of
Fisheries Survey, Department of Com-
merce and Industries ('37)

History or origin: Built in 1895.

Location: At St. James on False Bay, 18 miles from
Cape Town. (After the construction of the new
building at Sea Point, near Cape Town, the
station at St. James in False Bay, will be vacated
and handed over to the Marine Biological Society
of South Africa.)

Organization to which attached: Fisheries Survey
Division of the Department of Commerce and
Industries.

Purposes and scope of activities: Research into life
histories and so forth of the marine fauna of
South Africa. Oceanographical researches.

Equipment: Library with numerous catalogued
reprints and text books dealing with marine
biological research. All the more important
publications of various marine stations are
received on exchange basis.

Laboratory capable of accommodating 6 work-
ers. Fully equipped for most aspects of marine
research.

Aquarium with 3 large tanks, 6 medium and 6
small tanks for experimental research work.

Staff: Scientific and technical: Dr. C. von Bonde,
Director of the Fisheries and Marine Biological
Survey. Mr. J. M. Marchand, M.Sc, Technical
assistant to the Director. Maintenance: One
caretaker and general handyman.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Accommodation
for 4 research workers.

Income: Maintained for the Division of Fisheries
Survey by the Government of the Union of
South Africa.

Provision for publication of results: The Division of

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA, YUGOSLAVIA

153

Fishery Survey publishes an annual report in
which papers emanating from the laboratory
appear.

Department van Verdediging (Hydrographic Survey

Section of the South African Naval

Service) ('37)

Location: Department of Defence, Pretoria.
Staff: Officer in charge of Hydrographic Survey,

Lieut. -Commr. James Dalgleish, S.A.N.S.
Equipment:

SURVEYING VESSELS

Apricana

DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

313 4 19

Yugoslavia

Hidrografski ured Kraljevske Mornarice (Hydro-
graphic OflSice of the Royal Navy),
Kraljevina Jugoslavija ('37)

Location: Split.

Staff: Director, Kapetan bojnog broda, August J.
Kuster.
Head of Charts Department, Porucnik boj . broda

a. kl. Anton A. Zupan.
Head of Section of Navigation, Porucnik boj.
broda 2. kl. Predrag D. Lapcevic.
■ Head of Reproduction Department, Dragutin L.
Poljanec.
Head of Meteorological Section, Mihajlo P.
Spasov.

Oceanografski Institut Kraljevine Jugoslavije

(Oceanographic Institution of the Kingdom

of Yugoslavia) ('37)

History or origin: After the Great War and the
creation of the new State of Yugoslavia, upon
the proposal of the Yugoslavian Academy of
Sciences and Arts at Zagreb in 1919 to the Royal
Serbian Academy of Belgrade, there was consti-
tuted within the two academies a committee
which had for its purpose the establishment of an
institute of marine biology. In compliance with
the desires of the academies, the State has made
during a series of years in its annual budgets an
important appropriation intended for the con-
struction of the institution. In the year 1930 a
provisional station was established in rented
quarters, but during the past year 1933, the first
building intended to lodge the officers of the
institution was erected. Leaving the rented
quarters, the station has provisionally occupied

the ground floor of the newly erected building
where it is now installed. At the same time,
work was begun on the large building which will
also contain an aquarium and of which the roof
is already in place. The interior work on the
building will soon be undertaken and it is expected
that it will be entirely complete within three
years.
Location: Split, Yugoslavia, the center of the east
coast of the Adriatic on the tip of the Marjan
Peninsula, 5 kilometers from the center of the
city of Split.
Organization to which attached: The Yugoslavian
Academy of Sciences and Arts at Zagreb and the
Royal Serbian Academy of Sciences at Belgrade,
under the jurisdiction of the Ministry of Public
Instruction. The trustees are as follows:

Dr. Zivojin Cjorgjevi^, professor of zoology

at the University of Belgrade, President.
Dr. V. Vouk, professor of botany at the Univer-
sity of Zagreb, member of the Executive

Committee.
Other members of the Committee:

Dr. A. Gavazzi, professor of geography at the

University of Zagreb.
Dr. J. Gjaja, professor of physiology at the

University of Belgrade.
Dr. J. Had^i, professor of zoology at the

University of Ljubljana.
Dr. B. Zarnik, professor of biology at the

University of Zagreb.
Purposes and scope of activities: The institution is
divided into three sections: (1) biology, (2)
hydrography, and (3) applied biology (fisheries).
Biological and hydrological researches especially
along the Yugoslavian coast of the Adriatic.
Giving expert advice concerning the exploitation
of the sea. Organization of courses in marine
biology for university students. Provisions for
scientific work on the sea and supplying research
material for investigators and for the laboratories
of the University.
Equipment: The station now has at its disposition
10 rooms, laboratories for the officers, laboratory
for personal research, hydrographic laboratory,
experimental aquarium. The large building will
contain an aquarium, 2 large rooms for instruc-
tion, 8 rooms intended for personal research,
different sections such as applied biology (fisher-
ies), biology, botany, chemistry, physiology, and
hydrographic sections and finally the library.
The station has the necessary apparatus for

154

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

marine biology and hydrograpiiic work, as well
as the motor boat Bios and 2 skiffs.
Staff: Director, Dr. V. Vouk, professor at the
University of Zagreb, algae. Assistant director.
Dr. A. Ercebovic, algae, phytoplankton, hy-
drography. Mr. T. Gamulin, zoology, Copepoda.
Dr. A. Kotthaus, zoology, fisheries. Operation
and Maintenance : 4.

Provisions for visiting investigators: In addition to
the staff, five or six work places. The large
institution will have about 20 work places.

Income: Regular annual appropriation from the
State, about 100,000 Dinars.

Provision for the 'publication of results: "Acta Adri-
atica." (Issued 9 vol. at present.)

U.S.S.R., WESTERN PART

The Azerbaidjan Fisheries Station (formerly the
Baku Ichthyological Laboratory) ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1913 by the former
Department of Agriculture.

Location: Baku, Street of the 28th April, No. 8.

Organization to which attached: All-Union Scientific
Research Institute of Marine Fisheries and
Oceanography in Moscow.

Purposes: Investigation of food fishes, hydrobiology,
hydrology, technique of fishing and curing and
manufacture of fish products, pisciculture, and
melioration of rivers and lakes for the fishery.

Scope of activities: The Azerbaidjan fisheries region,
extending along the southwestern coast of the
Caspian Sea from the Samura river to the Persian
boundary. They likewise include the principal
river systems, chiefly the river Kura.

Equipment: Its own premises will be completed by
the middle of 1934. The work of the station Ls
divided into four sections, ichthyological, piscicul-
ture and melioration (with a small hydrochemical
laboratory), fishing technique (a special laboratory
is being organized for testing net fabrics and net
preservation), handling fish and manufacture of
fish products with a technological and chemical
laboratory. A special oceanographic station with
hydrological, hydrochemical, and hydrobiological
laboratories is being organized in the current
year, — 1934. Hitherto corresponding research
work had been conducted by the Ichthyological
Section. Two research ve.s.sels, the motor ship
Delphix, and the motor boat, Ivnirm. Investi-
gations are likewise conducted on board ships of
the fishing fleet. The station is well supplied
with apparatus. A special scientific library of
about 12,000 volumes.

Staff: Director of the Institution: M. K. Gerassimov.

Ichthyologists: V. N. Bcliaiev, chief; L. V.

Arnoldi, M. P. Borsenko, G. N. Goldentracht,

K. F. Voevodko.

Specialist in Pisciculture and melioration: A. N.

Derjavin.
Specialist in fish handling and manufacturing:

S. P. Levanidov.
Specialist in fishing technique: S. S. Sanov.

22 Assistants: Shah Abdoulaiev, Mrs. E. R.
Fortunatova, A. Makhmoudbekov, J. S. Gins-
burg, A. S. Mamedov, T. T. Liagunov, Mrs.
M. S. MaiBorodina, A. Gadjibababekov, Miss
E. N. Kudelina, Miss E. B. Kulikova, N. J.
Babuskin, N. J. Belou.ssov, N. G. Afanassiev,
A. L. Amirdjanov, G. A. Tunikov, Miss M. S.
Fedorova, Miss A. S. Cinkova, T. S. Malian,
T. Djavadian, Miss L. Degtiarieva, Miss S. I.
Peissakhova, A. A. Nadiradze.
Technical and administrative personnel: 74
persons.
Provision for visiting investigators: No special ac-
commodations, but the station rarely refuses place
and instruments to persons desiring temporarily
to conduct investigations at the station.
Income: Sources, State Budget and money received
from industrial organizations for contracts con-
cluded by the station for inve.stigations of special
scientific questions. The budget for 1934 is
estimated at Rbls 463,000.
Provisions for publication of results: The following
publications have appeared: "Reports of the
Baku Ichthyological Laboratory," vol. 1, 2
(issues 1, 2); "Journal of the Azerbaidjan Scien-
tific Station of Fisheries," vol. 3, issues 1, 2, 3.
Papers of members of the station have likewise
been published in other publications, as Bulletin
of the Caspian Scientific Fisheries Expedition
(Baku 1932-33), in all 6 issues; Economic News
of Azerbaidjan; Journal of USSR Fisheries and
others. Over 800 pages are ready for print to be
published in 1934.

Fisheries Station of Georgia ('34)

History or origin: Founded in July, 1931, by the
People's Commissariat of Supplies of the Soviet
Socialist Republic of Georgia.

Location: Batoum (Autonomous Soviet Socialist
Republic of Adjaristan), on the shore of the
Black Sea.

Organization to which attached: Affiliated with the
All-Union Scientific Research Institute of Marine
Fisheries and Oceanography in Moscow.

Purposes: The chief object of the station is the

155

156

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

general study of the biology of the marine and
fresh-water areas of Georgia and of the neighbor-
ing regions to reveal their natural resources.
The principal objects in respect of marine areas
are the study of the distribution, amount, and
migrations of food fishes and useful animals,
study of the productivity of the sea and of the
balance of organic matter, investigations by
field observations and laboratory experiments of
the relations between environment and living
organisms, general oceanographic survey of the
southeastern part of the Black Sea, study and
application of new fishing gear and the improve-
ment and mechanization of existing fishing tech-
nique, investigation of new food fishes and
animals.

Concerning the fresh-water areas of Georgia
the principal objects of investigation are the
study of rivers and lakes suitable for the fish
industry and their melioration and rational ex-
ploitation, the investigation of questions of
pisciculture and the study of the utilization of
various hydrotechnical constructions for pisci-
culture.

/Scope of activities: The whole territory of SSR of
Georgia and the southeast part of the Black Sea.

Equipment: The station is at present in temporary
premises, but it is building a special building
on the shore of the Black Sea, which will have 20
special rooms for laboratories, aquarium, library,
museum, etc. A sail- and motor-research schooner
Abkhazetz of 50 tons, equipped for oceanographic
survey work. No adequate equipment in ap-
paratus and instruments as yet.

Staff: Director, S. M. Maliatski.

Hydrobiologi-sts : Prof. V. N. Nikitin, chief;

Miss N. S. Tchohuri.
Hydrologist: S. S. Liatti.

Ichthyologists : V. G. Marti, Miss A. A. Maiorova.
Specialist in marine mammals: S. E. Heinenberg.
Specialist in pisciculture: L. A. Kutchin.
Specialist in fishing technique: N. N. Danilevski.
Economist: K. P. Gabounia.
Technical staff — 27 persons.

Provision for visiting investigators: There will be
places in the new building for visitors.

Income: The station is financed by the State Budget
and by contracts with industrial organizations.
The Budget of the Station amounted in 1933
to Rbls. 221,211 (exclusive of building fund).

Provision for publication of results: The first volume
of the Memoirs of the Biological Station of Georgia
is to appear in the first part of 1934.

Manguistau Branch of the Uralo-Caspian Scientific
Fisheries Station ('34)

History or origin: Founded September 10, 1933,
when Andrianov, director of the Chief Fisheries
Department, visited the Manguistau district in
connection with the organization there of the
"Caspian Fish and Seal Trust," for the exploita-
tion of the marine resources of this part of the
Caspian Sea.

Location: The town Fort-Alexandrovsky (Post-
office, village Bautino), situated on the north
point of the promontory that separates the Tiub-
Karagansky bay from the sea.

Organization to which attached: Through the Uralo-
Caspian Fisheries Station affiliated with the
Scientific Institute of Fisheries and Oceanography.

Purposes: (1) Biology of fishes and marine animals
of these waters. (Migration routes of the fishes,
character of the migrations, degree and period of
shoaling; fish-feeding areas and productivity,
character of food; collection of statistical data of
fish landings, according to varieties and age;
rate of growth; breeding capacities; investigations
of the method for determining the age of the
Caspian seal; study of the theory of calculating
the number of fishes in the stock.)

(2) Hydrology (hydrological regime of the
marine industrial zone and its influence on the
biology of the fishes and on the fishing industries).

(3) Fish industry (technique and organization
of up-to-date fishing industries; strength and size
of the fishing gear, fishing fleet and their suit-
ability for this district ; the study of the necessary
measures for the development of the technical
side of the industries; the economic profitableness
of the fishing gear employed in the district;
technical indices for the different gear used, e.g.,
quantity of labor, size of catch ; duration of fishing
season; organization of collective farms, "kolhoz,"
in the district; technical education of personnel.

(Scope of activities: From cape Buruntchuk (Busatchi
peninsula) to cape Sue.

Equipment: A rented house for the station and 7
apartments for the staff. A set of hydrological
and meteorological instruments. Considerable
scientific equipment is expected this year. The
Chief Fisheries Department is allotting this
simimer a marine motor drifter for research work.

iSta^: Director, A. N. Roganov (specialist in marine
mammals). Economist, M. F. Kossov. Assist-
ants, B. I. Badamshin, F. A. Aliev. Technical
staff: 8 per-sons. The scientific staff is to be

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— U. S. S. R.

157

increased in summer 1934 by one assistant in
ichthyology.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No places.

Income: Source, contracts with industrial organiza-
tions, "Fish Industry Trust," and State Budget.
From the Fish Industry Trust, Rbls. 50,000,
State Budget, Rbls. 16,500. Building Fund,
Rbls. 7,000.

Provision for publication of results: Two papers are
being prepared, (a) a description of the present
state of the fishing industries of the Manguistau
district, (b) the seal industries of the Caspian Sea;
but in view of the recent organization of this
branch it has as yet no publications.

The Uralo-Caspian Fisheries Station ('34)

History or origin: Founded in August, 1931, by the
Central Scientific Institution of Fishery Investiga-
tions, Moscow, on the initiative of the head local
organizations of Kazakstan.

Location: In the town Gouriev of West-Kazakstan
Province, on the Ural River 20 kilometers from
the Caspian Sea.

Organization to which attached: The All-Union
Scientific Research Institute of Marine Fisheries
and Oceanography of the Chief Fisheries Depart-
ment of the USSR People's Commissariat of
Supplies.

Purposes: Survey of the natural resources of the
Uralo-Caspian fish industry region with the object
of their rational exploitation and propagation.

Scope of activities: The eastern part of the North
Caspian Sea, namely, the whole coast from the
straight line passing through the village Ganiush-
kino on the Manguistau River as its west boundary
to the boundaries of Turkmenistan in the east.
Besides the sea this station also studies the rivers
Denguiza, Ural, and Emba, Lake Tcherkal, and
two large series of lakes, the Kamysh-Samarskaja
and KzUkuginskaia.

Equipment: Premises of 400 sq. meters. A special
hydrochemical laboratory, 2 wooden motor re-
search fishing boats. The scientific equipment
amounts to Rbls. 28,500.

Staff: Director, K. P. Mulikovski.

Ichthyologists: Golovanov, Koshevnikov, Raz-

gonov, Nikitina, Saenkova.
Assistants: Kargina, Doroshkov, Aidanaliev,

Manessy.
Specialists in pisciculture: Diakonov, Gurieva.
Specialists in economic: Miroshkin, Rutz, Kossov.
Specialists in hydrotechnique: Shchelkov.

The total allotted scientific staff is 26, but the

actual number is 16.
Auxiliary technical .staff: 21 persons.

Provision for visiting investigators: No special places,
but college students are always accommodated
in the vacant places.

Income: From the State Budget, Rbls. 2500; Rbls.
255,000 was received from the Uralo-Caspian
State Fish Industry Trust in accordance with
contracts. Income from the realization of the
fish catch from experimental fi.^ihing. The total
yearly budget in 1933 amounted to Rbls. 273,000,
excluding Rbls. 20,000 for the acquisition of
scientific and other equipment and Rbls. 20,000
fund for building and ship-repairing.

Provision for publication of results: No publications
planned in 1933, as that year was exclusively
allotted to the collection of scientific materials.

Asov-Black Sea Scientific Research Institute ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1933 by the order
of the People's Commissariat of Supplies of
U. S. S. R. (reorganization of the Asov-Black Sea
Fisheries Station founded in 1920).

Location: Kertdi, Oulitza Pervoi Domni, No. 24,
on the Kertch Bay in the Kertch Straits.

Organization to which attached: All-Union Scientific
Research Institute of Marine Fisheries and
Oceanography in Moscow, — the Chief Fisheries
Department of the Commissariat of Supplies.

Purposes: Scientific investigations of fisheries and
oceanography.

Scope of activities: Asov-Sea and the Black Sea.

Equipment: Hydrochemical, hydrobiological, ich-
thyologioal laboratories, two research vessels, a
sail and motor schooner and a motor launch;
microscopes, cathometers, thermometers, ap-
paratus for determining currents, chemical
apparatus, special fishing gear, and special field
hydrobiological equipment.

Staff: Director, V. N. Tikhonov.
Chief hydrologist, A. V. Elkinbard.
Chief hydrobiologist, V. L. Pauly.
Hydrobiologist, V. P. Vorobiev.
5 assistant ichthyologists: V. V. Abramov, N. V.
Lebediev, V. N. Maiski, A. N. Smirnov, R.
Kostiutchenko.
3 assistant hydrobiologists : Miss Dolgopolskaia,

Miss L. S. Vorobieva, S. N. Stark.
Chief specialist of fishing technique, A. V. Barshev.
Specialist of fishing technique, V. P. Freiberg.

158

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

SpecialLst of fishing technique and fishing gear,
P. K. Gudimovitch.

SpeciaHst of mechanization of fishing, N. G.
Borissov.

2 economists, S. T. Mudzalevski, A. S. Petaiev.

Assistant economist, Miss V. S. Rojanskaia.

Technical staff — 13 persons.
Provisions for visiting investigators: No place.
Income: Funds supplied by commercial fisheries

organizations according to special contracts.

Budget in 1933 amounted to Rbls. 315,000.
Provision for publication of results: "Memoirs"

(Trudy) of the Asov-Black Sea Fisheries Station.

Ten issues of about 1000 pages. First two were

published in Kertch, the rest in Rostov-on-

the-Don.

The Turkmenistan Fisheries Station ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1929 by act of Soviet
of People's Commissars of the Turkmen Soviet
Socialist Republic.

Location: Is situated on the east coast of the Caspian
Sea in the northern part of Krasnovodsk Bay
in the Muraviev Gulf in the western suburbs of
the town Krasnovodsk on the sea shore.

Organization to which attached: Affiliated with the
All-Union Scientific Research Institute of Marine
Fisheries and Oceanography in Moscow.

Purposes: Study of the biology of food fishes and
other marine useful animals; control of the
effects of the fishing industries on fish and sea
animals; study of the natural resources of the
areas exploited; fish shoals in different seasons of
the year; study of existing fishing gear and
investigation for devising new gear. The prin-
cipal objects of investigation are the Caspian
herring, Caspian sardines, sea-perch, sea-roach,
and crayfishes. The chief gear studied — active
fishing gear, drift nets, purse nets, ring-nets,
and allomans (turkmen-nets).

Scope of activities: The southeastern part of the
Caspian Sea, from Cape Beg Tash in the north
to the Persian boundar}' in the south (exclusively
territorial waters of the TSSR).

Equipment: Its own house of 4 rooms; a separate
building for technical and chemical laboratories,
a small museum (now being enlarged); a store-
house; 2 living houses with lodgings for scientific
staff (9 one-room and 3 two-room lodgings); a
research motor sailing vessel Sokol of 60 tons,
chiefly used as a drifter, but can also be used for
trawling. Set of fishing gear, zoological and

hydrobiological instruments, set of cathometers,
thermometers, etc., for ordinary hydrobiological
investigations, microscopes, binoculars, apparatus
for weighing and measuring. Special library of
2,200 volumes, but with an almost complete lack
of foreign editions.

Staff: Director, V. I. Meissner (ichthyologist).
Ichthyologists: Miss E. V. Pojaluieva, Miss A. A.
Michailovskaia, Miss A. Karatchevskaia, Miss
Z. P. Tereschtenko.
Specialist in economics of fisheries: A. F. Nevraiev.
Assistants: B. V. Bukharin, B. I. Prikhodko.
Administrative and technical staff: 19 persons.

Provision for visiting investigators: Two persons can
be accommodated. Students are taken in for
field work (at shore observing stations and
on board the boat, not more than four students
at a time).

Income: The station is financed by the State Budget
and by contracts concluded with industrial
organizations (The Turkmen Fisheries Trust).
The sale of the fish catch also brings in a certain
income. The year's budget in 1933 amounted to
Rbls. 110,000, for 1934 it is estimated at Rbls.
167,000.

Provisions for publication of results: As yet only the
first volume (170 pages) of the "Memoirs of the
Turkmen Scientific Institution of Fisheries" has
appeared. Four or 5 issues (about 300 pages)
of the second volume are to be published in 1934.
Separate papers of the station have been published
in the Bulletins of the Central Asiatic University
(Tashkent) and in the Bulletin of the Caspian
Expedition (Baku).

Gidrograficheskij Otdel (Hydrographic
Department) ('37)

Location: Rochal Quay, 2, Leningrad.

Staff: Head of the Department, Inzhener flagman 3

ranga, V. V. Vasiljev.
Assistant-Head of Department, Inzhener flagman

3 ranga, N. J. Gorbunov.
Head of Cartographic Section, Inzhener flagman

3 ranga, P. V. Messer.
Head of Instruments Section, Voennyj inzhener 1

ranga K. S. Ukhov.
Head of Buoyage Section, Voennyj inzhener 2

ranga P. A. Krasilnikov.
Head of Hydro-meteorological Section, Voennyj

inzhener 1 ranga L. V. Kudovic.
Head of Planning Section, Voennyj inzhener 1

ranga A. A. Vasiljev.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— U. S. S. R.

159

Head of Distribution Section, Voennyj inzhener 1

ranga, A. N. Rozhdestvenskij.
Head of Compass Section, N. S. Rezvjakov.
Head of the Section of Navigation, K. S. Uchov

Equipment:

SURVEYING VESSELS DISPLACEMENT

astronom 1,050

Bazis 220

Bakan 75

horizont 420

POLJUS 110

Bbglickij 452

Tajmtr 1,330

Peleng 60

Primorje 2,200

Chukeh A 4,500

Sexstan 1,490

Mgla 500

Majak 1,100

MiGALKA 440

Menzula 740

Hydrograph 1,820

Priboj 180

MoRoz 240

MOLNIJ a 50

Stvor 140

SiRENA 350

Mjatel 767

AziMUT 390

Daguestan Fisheries Station ('34)

History or origin: In 1924 the speciaUst S. A.
Mitropolski organized a small ichthyological
laboratory on the wharf of the Daguestan Fish
Trust with the object of studying the fisheries
of the Republic. In 1925 this merged into the
Daguestan Central Scientific and Industrial
Laboratory of the Daguestan Central Soviet of
People's Economy as its Ichthyological Section.
In 1928 the Ichthyological Laboratory of the
Daguestan People's Commissariat of Agriculture
was organized by the specialist N. A. Dmitriev.
In 1929 these two institutions merged under the
name of Daguestan Scientific Fisheries Station
with N. A. Dmitriev as director. In 1933 the
station was renamed "The Daguestan Branch of
the Caspian Scientific Fisheries Institution,"
and in 1934 under the All-Union Scientific Re-
search Institution of Marine Fisheries and
Oceanography it became the Daguestan Fisheries
Station.

Location: Makhach-Kala (formerly Petrovsk Port),
Batareini pereoulok No. 1, in Daguestan Au-
tonomous Soviet Socialist Republic (North Cau-
casus). The town is situated on the west coast

of the Caspian Sea and ha.s a port. The Institu-
tion is located 250 meters from the shore in the
town.

Organization to which attached: All-Union Scientific
Research Institution of Marine Fisheries and
Oceanography.

Purposes: Principal objects of research are the
marine resources, the biology of marine fishes and
other marine useful animals, the physics and
chemistry of the sea.

Scope of activities: The Caspian Sea coast from the
north boundary of the Republic (river Samur)
to the south boundary (river Kunia) and 35^0
miles seawartl (the limit for the research motor
boat) and inland mountain rivers and fresh-water
lakes (Eisenam Lake, the lower course of the
rivers Terek, Sulak, and Samur).

Equipment: The station has its own house with two
laboratories, ichthyological and hydrological, and
two museum rooms. The remaining five rooms
are used as living rooms by the director and
scientific personnel. Two research vessels. Boat
No. 2, a flat-bottomed, steel, sail and motor boat
of 300 tons with 2 45-h.p. Deitz engines, and
OcTioBRENOK, a woodcn sail and motor boat of
the Japanese Kav.'asaki-type, with one 12-h.p.
"Vosrojdenie" engine, for work along the coast.
The scientific equipment of the station is quite
satisfactory. A fully equipped hydrochemical
laboratory, a library of 3345 volumes.

Staff: Director, A. P. Korniev.

Ichthyologists: T. S. Glebov, chief; D. A. Sanu-

shevitch, E. M. Mankevitch.
HydrologLst: D. S. Diemin.
Economist: Miss A. S. Medvedieva.
Assistants — 9 persons.
Technical staff — 22 persons.

Provisions for visiting investigators: There are places
for visitors.

Income: Source: State Budget and sums received
by contract from fishery organizations (chiefly,
the Daguestan Fishery Trust). The 1933 budget
amounted to Rbls. 144,000. The 1934 budget is
estimated at Rbls. 141,000.

Provision for publication of results: The Daguestan
Ichthyological Laboratory published one issue of
"Reports of the Daguestan Ichthyological Lab-
oratory," 1930. The Daguestan Scientific In-
stitution of Fisheries and Oceanography has no
publication of its own. Its papers are published
in the "Bulletins of Fisheries," "Planned Economy
of Daguestan," "Russian Biological Journal,"

160

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

"Bulletin of the Pan-Caspian Fisheries Stations,"
etc. Over 400 pages of printed matter have
appeared.

The AU-Union Scientific Research Institution of
Marine Fisheries and Oceanography ('34)

History or origin: Organized in October, 1933, by the
fusion of two scientific institutions, the All-Union
Scientific Research Institute of Marine Fisheries
and the State Oceanographical Institute.

Location: Moskow, Piatnitskaia 33.

Organization to which attached: Chief Fisheries De-
partment of the U. S. S. R. CommLssariat of
Supplies.

Purposes: Survey of the seas of U. S. S. R. in respect
of the needs of national economy and, in particu-
lar, of the fishery and marine animal industries,
likewise the study of the existing technique of
these industries and of its rationalization.

Scope of activities: Barents, Karsk, Bering, Okhotsk,
Japan, Black, Caspian, and Aral seas: Lakes
Balkhash and Khanka.

Equipment: Affiliated institutions (Asterisk* indi-
cates a separate report).

* The Polar Institute of Fisheries and Ocean-

ography, Murmansk.

* The Pacific In.stitute of Fisheries and Ocean-

ography, Vladivostok.

* The Asov-Black Sea Institute of Fisheries and

Oceanography, Kertch.
The Volga-Caspian Fisheries Station, Astrakhan.
The North Area Fisheries Station, Archangelsk.

(Note: No specific information received.)
The Karelian Fisheries Station, Kandalaksha.
The Ob-Tasovsk Fisheries Station, Tobolsk.

* The Kamchatka Fisheries Station, Petropav-

lovsk ,
The Sakhalin Fisheries Station, Alexandrovsk

(Sakhalin).
The North Caucasus Fisheries Station, Rostov

on the Don.

* The Georgian Fisheries Station, Batoum.

* The Ukrainian Fisheries Station, Odessa.

* The Uralo-Caspian Fisheries Station, Gouriev

(a branch at Fort-Alexandrovsky).

* The Azerbaidjan Fisheries Station, Baku.

* The Daguestan Fisheries Station, Makhach-

Kala.

* The Turkmenistan Fisheries Station, Kras-

novodsk.
The Crimea Hydrophysical Station, Katzivelli.
(Note: No specific information received.)

The Aral Marine Fisheries Station, Aralsk.

The Balkhash Fisheries Station, Balkhash Lake.

The Central In.stitution, located at Moskow,
at present occupies temporary premises, but is
erecting a special large building. It possesses
the following laboratories: physical, chemical,
geological, biological (plankton, benthos, bac-
teriology), mechanization of the industries section,
economical section. All the floating craft belongs
to the affiliated institutions.
Staff: Director, K. A. Mekhonoshiu; Vice-director,

M. T. Chesnokov; Scientific secretary, A. D.

Starostin.

(a) Section of Physics and Chemistry of the Sea.

Director, V. V. Shuleikin, professor, corre-
spond, member of the Academy (physics).
Chemists: S. V. Bruevich, professor; B. A.
Scopinzev, T. Trofimov. Hydrologists : V.
A. Vasnezov, Sazev, Stockman, Lednev,
Boshich, assistants.

(b) Section of Geology of the Sea. Director,

M. V. Klenova. Geologists: T. T. Gorsh-
kova, Kalianov, Batalina, assistants.

Shorygin. Bacteriologists: V. S. Butke-
vich, professor; Dianova, Voroshilova, as-
sistants. Botanists: K. T. Meier, professor;
Persidsky, Kizeeva, as.sistants. Plankton:
A. T. Jashnov, professor; Ussachev, Bogo-
rov, Chajanova, assistants. Benthos: V.
A. Brozkaya; Briskina, Virstein, assistants.

(d) Section of Ichthyology. Director, B. S. IljLn;

N. M. Knipovich, professor; G. N. Monas-
tyrsky, E. V. Messiazeva, T. S. Rass,
Samakhaev, Dmitriev, Berdichevsky, Pa-
khomov, Perzeva, assistants.

(e) Section of Fish-Culture. Director, A. T.

Beresovsky. L. V. Piatakov, Amelina,
Nasariev, Evstafiev, Kusnezova.

(f) Section of Marine Mammals. Director, S. J.

Freiman. Dorofeev, Barabash, Zalkin,
Kluraov, Nicolsky, assistants.

(g) Section of Fisheries Technique. Director,

A. A. Jaschenko. Specialists: Polonsky,

Jampolsky, Uspensky, Liman, Mironov,

Skvorzov, Kanin.
(h) Section of Fisheries Economics. Director, A.

Shitkovsky. Economists: Ivanov, Ras-

kina, Konkina.
Staff of the Institution: Chief specialists, 12;

Scientific staff, 113; Technical assistants,

28; Administrative personnel, 67.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— U. S. S. R.

161

Provision for visiting investigators: Only on the
completion of the new premises will the Institution
be able to accommodate visiting scientists.

Income: The yearly budget of the Institution totals
Rbls. 1,460,300, and consists of funds allotted
from the State Budget and received from various
industrial organizations.

Provision for publication of results: The scientific
papers of the Institution are published in the
"Memoirs" of the All-Union Scientific Research
Institution of Marine Fisheries and Oceanography.

Polar Scientific Research Institute of Marine
Fisheries and Oceanography ('34)

History or origin: The Murman Biological Station
has existed since 1930 as the Murman Branch of
the State Oceanographic Institution. This last
was reorganized at the close of 1930 into the
independent Polar Scientific Research Institute
of Marine Fisheries and Oceanography.

Location: Temporarily located in the building of the
Marine Technicum, Murmansk.

Organization to which attached: All-Union Research
Institution of Marine Fisheries and Oceanography.

Purposes: (1) Oceanographic survey of the Barents
Sea: hydrology and chemistry, study of the cur-
rents and general dynamics; qualitative and
quantitative distribution of the flora and fauna,
ecology of marine organisms; distribution and
origin of the sediments covering the sea bottom.
(2) Scientific study of fi.sh industries: study of
coastal fishing, open-sea fishing, and deep-sea
fishing; study of the herring industry, especially
active methods of fishing. It is expected to
organize two stations in the near future at
Portchnikha on the East-Muram coast and in the
Ura inlet of the Motovsky Bay, for experimental
work on the biology and physiology of marine
organisms in local waters.

Scope of activities: Barents Sea.

Equipment: Property of the Murman Biological
Station has been transferred and is being used for
the organization of the.se laboratories. Two re-
search ships, Perseus, a steamship of 450 tons
and 360 h.p., and the Nikolai ICnipovitch, a
motor vessel of 200 h.p.

iSto;^.' Director, G. I. Khlinovski. Vice-Director of
the scientific branch, M. P. Somov. Chief spe-
cialists, 14; Scientific staff, 21; Technical assist-
ants, 35; Administrative and technical personnel,
61.
(a) Section of Oceanography. Director, M. P.

Ossadchikh; Vice-director, M. P. Somov.
Hydrologist: Tanzura. Geologist: Senko-
vitch. Biologists: Manteifel, Boldovsky.

(b) Section of Fisheries. Director, N. A. Maslov.

Ichthyologists: Aleev, V. F. Schmit,
Brynzcv.

Mentov. Specialists: N. P. Sherstoboev,
Senenov. Economists: Kannibolotsky,
Shishov.
Provision for visiting investigators: Ten visiting

scientists can be accommodated.
Income: The yearly budget totals Rbls. 1,770,000
and consists of funds allotted from the State
budget and received from various industrial
organizations.

The foregoing statement should be supplemented
by a short article that has recently appeared in
Science.' It is as follows:

It is stated in Nature that a new biological station
is being built by the Academy of Sciences of the
U. S. S. R. at Murmansk on the Barents Sea. It is
intended for extensive research in morphology,
anatomy, embryology, physiology, biochemistry,
and ecology of sea organisms.

Owing to the penetration of the warm waters of
the Atlantic into the Barents Sea, the fauna of the
latter is extremely rich and diverse. Of importance
is the fact that at Dalnye-Zelenets Bay the water is
transparent to a depth of 10 meters and that large
stretches of the sea bottom are visible from the
surface. The scientific workers at the station will
make a detailed study of the problems of evolution-
ary physiology, embryology, and the relationship
of the fauna with changed hydrological conditions
effected by the Gulf Stream.

The Murmansk biological station will supply
biological material to the various research institutes
and higher educational institutions of the U. S. S. R.
Superintending the building is a special commission
consisting of S. A. Zernov (director of the station),
L. A. Orbeli, V. I. Vernadsky and N. M. Knipovich,
Professor K. M. Deryugin, of the University of
Leningrad, Professor L. N. Fedorov, director of the
All Union Institute of Experimental Medicine, and
Professor I. M. Kreps.

The cost of building the Murmansk Station is
estimated at 2>\ million roubles, excluding equipment.
A scientific library, the zoological, botanical, mi-

' The biological station at Barents Sea: Science, vol. 85,
p. 536, June 4, 1937.

162

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

crobiological, and hydrochemical laboratories and
the libraries of other departments will be housed
in the main building of the station. An aquarium
designed for scientific work will be installed on the
first floor of this building, whUe several other
aquaria, open to the public, will be erected in the
basement of the building. Premises containing
students' laboratories will be situated near the
central building and will also be equipped with large
aquaria. Special interest is attached to an open-air
concrete reservoir intended to accommodate large
sea animals, including seals.

The spawn of crabs will be brought from the Far
East for acclimatization and breeding in the Barents
Sea. A special vessel, 30 meters long, built for
scientific work in the open sea, will maintain unin-
terrupted communications between the station and
the city of Murmansk.

At the beginning of this year, the Academy of
Sciences of the U. S. S. R. commenced extensive
work in the Dalnye-Zelenets Bay, east of the Kola
Bay (Teriberka district, situated in the Northern
Province), for the construction of this biological
station, which will be the finest in the Soviet Union.
The Soviet architect N. V. Ryiunin and his assistants
have designed all the buildings.

Novorossiisk Arnoldi Biological Station ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1921 by the Scientific
Research Institution of the Kuban-Black Sea
Region, dedicated to the late Prof. V. M. Arnoldi.

Location: In Novorossiisk on the west coast of
Tsemess Bay, 200-250 meters from the shore.
Address: Novorossiisk, Stanitchka, Sleptsov-
skaia I.

Organization to which attached: Science Branch of
the Department of Universities and Scientific
Research Institutions of the People's Commis-
sariat of Education of R. S. F. S. R.

Purposes: The principal objects of the Black Sea:
investigation of practical problems, e.g., en-
crustations on submarine constructions by algae
and mollusks; marine sanitation questions; study
of the fisheries.

Scope of activities: Activities embrace the northeast
part of the Black Sea, the Kertch Straits, and the
district from Anape to Adler.

Equipment: A building of 257 sq. meters, of which
136 sq. meters are occupied by laboratories and
research rooms. A biological laboratory with
zoological and algological sections. Hydrochemi-
cal and bacteriological laboratories. The labora-

tories are well equipped with instruments and

apparatus. The library has over 4,000 volumes

of special literature. Two small .sail and motor

research boats.
Staff: Director, V. A. Vodianitski (zoologist).

Vice-director, E. A. Poteriaicv (hydrochemist).

Chief zoologist, S. G. Krishanovski.

Hydrologist, S. P. Rotar.

Hydrochemist, E. L. Rabushkin.

Botanist, Miss S. N. Mlkhailovskaya.

Zoologist, Miss E. G. Ko.ssiakina.

Zoologist, Miss S. M. Pchelina.

Technical staff — 6 persons.
Provisions for visiting investigators: In the summer

time, one or two places can be temporarily

allotted for visiting investigators.
Income: The Station exists on the Budget of the

People's Commissariat of Education. It also

receives small sums from contracts for special

research work. The budget in 1933 was 66,200

Rbls., including 8,000 Rbls. for scientific equipment.
Provision for the publication of results: The Station

publishes its "Memoirs" (Trudy). Five issues

have appeared, 50-180 pages each.

Ukrainian Odessa Fisheries Station ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1921 by the Ukrainian
People's Commissariat of Supplies.

Location: Odessa, Kolodesni pereoulok No. 9.

Organization to which attached: Branch of the Asov-
Black Sea Scientific Research Institute of Fisheries
and Oceanography, affiliated with the All-Union
Scientific Research Institute of Marme Fisheries
and Oceanography in Moscow.

Purposes: Survey of the natural resources of the
Black Sea and the recon.struction of the fishing
technique. The work of the Station is divided
into 4 sections: Ichthyological; Physics and
chemistry of the sea; Hydrobiology ; Fishing
technique.

(Scope of activities: The U. S. S. R. part of the Black
Sea, chiefly the northwest part, from the Crimea
to the Roumanian boundary.

Equipment: The Station does not possess its own
buildings. It has ichthyological, hydrobiological,
hydrological laboratories, and a research vessel
Telman of 18 reg. tons.

Staff: Director, S. J. Sirovatsky (ichthyologist).
Assistant, Mrs. N. I. Sirovatskaia (ichthyologist).
Specialist of fishing technique, N. N. Vinogradov.
Ichthyologist, F. F. Egerman.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— U. S. S. R.

163

IchthyologLsts, V. D. Kuvshinnikov, E. D. Veli-

kokhatko. .
3 assistant ichthyologists, A. S. Stoianov, Miss

E. A. Nevinskaia, I. I. Ivanov.
Chief hydrobiologist, A. K. Makarov.
Hydrobiologist, N. A. Zagorovski; assistant,

A. M. Borisenko.
Assistant hydrochemists, Miss L. G. Vutte,

S. E. Kaliberdin.
Assistant biologist, Miss N. E. Piliavskaia.

Provision for visiting investigators: Visiting scientists,
post-graduate students, and students are admitted
to the scientific studies of the Station.

Income: In 1933 the budget was Rbls. 153,000,
whereof Rbls. 105,000 was received from Fishing
Industries Trusts, according to contracts con-
cluded. The remaining Rbls. 48,000 was the
surplus left over from the 1932 budget received
from the Chief Fisheries Department (Glavryba).

Provision for publication of results: The Ukrainian
Branch has published 24 bulletins and 6 volumes
of its "Memoirs" (Trudy).

Sevastopol Biological Station ('34)

History or origin: Founded in 1872 by the Novoros-

siLsk Society for Natural Sciences.
Location: Sevastopol, Primorski boulvar, Sevastopol

Bay, on the seashore.
Organization to which attached: Academy of Sciences

of the USSR.

Purposes: Oceanographical and hydrobiological ob-
servations, study of the fauna and flora of the
Black and Asov Seas.

(Scope of activities: Black and Asov Seas.

Equipment: Building, 6,000 cub. meters. Biological,
chemical, and microbiological laboratories. Mu-
seum. Aquarium. Scientific library of 20,000
volumes (hydrobiology and oceanography). 20-
ton research vessel. Hydrological, hydrobiologi-
cal, and optical apparatus.

Staff: Director, S. A. Zernov (member of the
Academy).
Vice Director, V. A. Vodianitsky (chief zoologist).
Chief hydrologist, N. I. Tchigirin.
Zoologist, M. A. Galadjiev.
Zoologist, L. I. Jakubova.
Botanist, N. V. Morosova-Vodianitskaia.
Microbiologist, P. I. Kopp.
Chemist, MLss N. A. Dobrjanskaia.
Technical personnel — 19 persons.

Provisions for visiting investigators: 15 places for
visiting investigators.

Income: State budget, 90,000 rbls. in 1933; special
funds, 45,000 rbls.

Provision for the publication of results: 13 issues in
cooperation with the special Zoological Laboratory
of the Academy of Science and 3 volumes of 160-
200 pages of the Memoirs (Trudy) of the Sevasto-
pol Biological Station.

INSTITUTIONS, WEST SIDE OF THE ATLANTIC

OCEAN

BRITISH DOMINIONS

Bermuda

Bermuda Biological Station for Research ('37)

History or origin:^ Originally established in 1903,
with Professor E. L. Mark of Harvard as director,
at Flatts in connection with a contemplated
public aquarium by agreement between Harvard
University, New York University, and the
Bermuda Natural History Society. In 1907
Agar's Island was leased by the Bermuda Natural
History Society and a public aquarium was
established in association with the station under
the direction of Professor Mark. From 1907 to
1918 there were regular summer sessions. Dr.
W. J. Crozier was resident naturalist from 1915
to 1918. In 1917 to 1918 Agar's Island was
requisitioned for military purposes and the station
was transferred to Dyer's Island but was after-
ward retransferred. In 1926 the station was
incorporated under the laws of the State of New
York. The Biological Station Act of 1927
passed by the Government of Bermuda granted
the Corporation (1) the privilege of holding real
estate in the Islands, (2) the conveyance of the
"Hunter property" to the Trustee when £50,000
endowonent had been raised, (3) exemption from
customs duty on all supplies and equipment of
the Station, (4) an annual grant of £200 for a
period of ten years. In 1929 the Rockefeller
Foundation appropriated £50,000 to meet the
conditions imposed by the Biological Station Act.
In 1930 the Hunter property was reconveyed
to the Bermuda Government and its purchase

1 Bermuda Biological Station for Research, Incorporated
1926, Announcement, Thirty-first Year— 1933.

The Bermuda Biological Station for Research, Incor-
porated 1926, Reports of OfScers for the Years 1926 to 1932,
1933.

Conklin, E. G., The New Bermuda Biological Station for
Research, Incorporated 1926, Announcement of the First
Session at "Shore Hills," St. George's West, Bermuda, June
15 to August 10, 1931 (Twenty-ninth year of the original
Bermuda Biological Station.)

Conklin, E. G., The Bermuda Biological Station for
Research, Inc., Report of the President for the Year 1936.
Manuscript dated December 26, 1936.

price was transferred toward the conversion of
Shore Hills into a biological station. In 1931 the
Shore Hills property was purchased and the
conversion of it into a biological station was
begun. In 1932 the station was officially opened
by His Excellency, the Governor of Bermuda.

In 1936 a proposal was made for cooperative
work on the Gulf Stream System by the Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution and the Bermuda
Biological Station, on condition of adequate
support of this work being secured on the part
of the Bermuda Station. An appeal was made to
the British friends of the Station, and as a result
of their activity a Bermuda Oceanographic
Committee, consisting of twelve leading ocean-
ographers and biologists of Britain, was organized
by the Royal Society of London. This Com-
mittee approved the plan and recommended to
the British Development Commission a grant of
£5,100 for the construction and equipment of an
oceanographic research boat and £3,500 annually
for the scientific and technical support of the
Bermuda Station's part of this work. This
recommendation has now been approved by the
Development Commission; the project has been
endorsed by the Trustees and Corporation of the
Bermuda Biological Station; Columbus Iselin,
of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution,
has been elected President of the Bermuda Sta-
tion. This significant international cooperation
in the study of the Gulf Stream System will be
put into operation as rapidly as possible.

Location: On a property known as Shore Hills on
Ferry Reach, St. George's West, Bermuda.
Dr. J. F. G. Wheeler of the "Discovery" Office,
London, was installed as Director.

Organization to which attached: An independent
organization under the control of an International
Board of Trustees on which are represented
England, Scotland, Canada, Bermuda, and the
United States.

Purpose and scope of activities: To offer facilities for
research in biology and in oceanography in the
region of the Bermuda Islands.

164

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— BERMUDA, CANADA 165

Equipment: The Shore Hills property consists of Income: From fees, investments, and contributions,

more than 14 acres of land fronting on Ferry Provision for the ■publication of results: None.
Reach, a main building of stone and concrete

which is used as laboratory and residence, 5 L^anada

cottages, boat and bathing houses, engine house, Canadian Hydrographic Service, Department

wharf, etc., all completely furni.shed. The build- of Marine ('37)

ings have been repaired and remodeled for the ideation: Ottawa,

uses of the station. g^^^. Hydrographer, Captain Frederick Anderson;

The general laboratory accommodates 12 work- Assistant-Director R J Fraser

ers and there are several small private labora- Division of Hydrography: Atlantic Coast and

tones. There is a chemistry laboratory and in ^reat Lakes Di.strict,-vacant; Pacific Coast

the basement of the building there have been District, Engineer-in-charge, H. D. Parizeau;

mstalled a physiological laboratory with accom- ^hart Construction Division, Chief of Division,

modations for 5 or 6 workers, an aquarium room, q ^ Crichton; Chart Distribution Division,

a dark room, a cold room, and a chemistry store Engineer-in-charge, P. E. Parent,

room. Where needed, there are fresh water, Division of Tides and Currents: Atlantic Coast,

running sea water, electricity (110 volts A.C.), Engineer-in-charge, H. W. Jones; Pacific Coast,

and gas (Philgas). Engineer-in-charge, S. C. Hayden.

On the sea water well beside the station jetty, Division of Precise Water Levels: Engineer-in-

there is an automatic tide recording machine of charee C A Price

the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. Eauivment-
The station posses.ses a 24 foot launch and a

small dory. Also the usual apparatus for collec- «''«^'="'«' "^^^"^ msPLACEMEST officebs chew

., 1 . -11 1 • J • 4-u Acadia 1,067 11 35

tion. A larger boat will be acquired in the near ^, oe< « o,

^ ' C ARTIER 864 9 31

future. LiLLOOET 772 9 32

In the library there are standard works on W. J. Stewart 1,525 13 51

biology, zoologj', and marine research, series of

contributions from various laboratories and uni- Atlantic Biological Station ('37)

versities, and a good collection of reprints. History or origin: At first (1899) a small movable

Staff: Director, J. F. G. Wheeler, D.Sc; 1 Secretary laboratory, located successively at St. Andrews,

and librarian; 3 for maintenance and operation. N. B., Canso, N. S., Malpeque, P. E. I., Gaspe,

Provisions for visiting investigators: Although visiting Que., and Seven Islands (now Clarke City), Que.

investigators may be received without charge. Established by the Government of Canada under

' many colleges, universities, and institutions are a scientific board for the purpose of providing

contributing to the upkeep of the Station by facilities for Canadian scientists to investigate

subscribing for the support of a table or research marine problems with a view to the ultimate

room, such subscription entitling them to the use benefit of the fisheries. After trial of the localities

of all the general f aciUties of the Station by an mentioned and after examination of other portions

approved investigator or research student. of the Canadian Atlantic Coast, a permanent site

Regular fees for research rooms and tables are was chosen near the first place m.entioned.

as follows: For one year, $400.00; for three Location: On the shore of the deep (30 meters)

months, $100.00; for two weeks or less, $25.00. tidal estuary of the St. Croix river, two miles

The Station is prepared to accommodate north of the town of St. Andrews, province of

approved investigators and research students at New Brunswick. Though far inland, the suc-

an inclusive fee of $15.00 per week when there cessive bodies of water leading to the open

are more than six persons in residence; $16.00 Atlantic being (1) St. Croix river, (2) Passama-

per week otherwise. quoddy Bay, (3) Bay of Fundy, and (4) Gulf of

Applications for laboratory and living accommo- Maine, the water has a salinity of over 30% and

dation must be made on the official form to the provides suitable conditions for a variety of open

director at the Station, Dr. J. F. G. Wheeler, St. water forms such as cod, haddock, halibut,

George's, Bermuda, some time before the appli- herring, and rosefish (Sehastes), this owing to the

cant purposes to take up residence. heavy tides. The bodies of water are graded in

166

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

size, present quite varied conditions, and, being
largely enclosed, can be investigated in practically
all weathers.
Organization to which attached: Biological Board of

Canada.
Purposes: The provision of facilities for fundamental
investigation of the problems presented by both
fresh and salt water. The investigation of the
waters in and near the eastern part of Canada, in
particular, of the so-called Maritime provinces,
Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and Prince Edward
Island, with a view to providing a proper basis
for the conduct of the fisheries.
(Scope of activities: Physical and chemical investiga-
tions of the sea and other waters; general bio-
logical investigations; special fishery investiga-
tions.
Equipment: Laboratories, etc. — Main laboratory,
destroyed by fire in 1932, being rebuilt as fire-
proof structure for year round use; part for offices,
individual and general laboratories accommodat-
ing 16 investigators, storerooms, and experimental
aquaria, tanks and constant temperature units,
erected in 1932. Fish-handling building, with
freezing and cold storage facilities, equipment for
rough handling of native material and carpenter
shop. Two other buildings with simple labora-
tory accommodation for summer use. Experi-
mental concrete and earth ponds. Inlet or cove
with dam near mouth, and provided with pools
for experiments in control of tidal interchange
and freshwater inflow. Pools for trout rearing.

Vessels and boats. Zoarches, 90 feet long,
Diesel crude oil engine of 75 H.P., .speed 8 knots,
cruising radius 1000 miles; with power winch,
otter trawl, deck laboratory, and large hold
amidships for experimental work.

Delphine, 28 feet long, high-speed gasoline
engine, 12 H.P., speed 10| knots.

Sagitta, 24 feet long, low speed gasoline engine,
6 H.P., .speed 6 knots.

Gear for hydrography, plankton collecting,
dredging, and fishing.

Main residence, bedrooms for 34 persons, dining
room for 44 persons.

Double cottage, each half with living room,
bathroom, and bedrooms for four persons.

Double cottage, each half equipped with bed-
rooms, bathroom, living room, kitchen and
dining room for a family of six.
Staff: Director, A. H. Leim. A.ssistant Pathologist,
R. H. M'Gonigle. Assistant Hydrographer, H. B.

Hachey. Assistant Zoologist, R. A. McKenzie.
Scientific Assistant, A. A. Blair. Clerical: 2.
Maintenance and operation: 4.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Insofar as ac-
commodation may be available, properly qualified
and accredited investigators are welcomed, irre-
spective of the problems upon which they may be
engaged, and given available facilities insofar as
no expense to the biological Board is involved.
Reports on work done are expected of all investiga-
tors by the end of the year as evidence of bona-
fides.
Income: The Government of Canada furnishes the
funds for the operation, the amount for the fiscal
year April, 1936 to March, 1937, being $44,400.00.
Provision for publication of results: The Biological
Board of Canada has the following publications,
in which the results of work done at the Atlantic
Biological Station appear.

Annual Report.

Journal, a volume of about 500 pages usually
appearing each year, containing accounts of con-
tributions to knowledge.

Bulletins of the Biological Board of Canada,
for the comprehensive presentation of knowl-
edge on particular subjects under investigation
and in somewhat non-technical form.

Canadian Atlantic Fauna. Succinct descrip-
tions of the species, with keys for ready identifica-
tion and with figures illustrating diagnostic
features.

Progress Reports of the Atlantic Stations, sim-
ple accounts of discoveries likely to appeal to the
general reader interested in fisheries.

With the approval of the Board investigators
may publish articles in outside journals.

Prince Edward Island Marine Station ('37)

(A sub-station of the Atlantic Biological Station,

St. Andrews, N. B.)

History or origin: Established in 1929. Present

building constructed in 1930.
Location: Ellerslie, P. E. I. The station is on a

.shallow inlet tributary to Malpeque Bay, P. E. I.
Organization to which attached: Biological Board of

Canada.
Purposes: Chiefly for scientific investigations bearing

on oyster culture. Also for general oceanographic

and fisheries investigations of the Biological

Board.
Scope of activities: Research only. (See Purposes).
Equipment: Space for six scientific investigators.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— CANADA

167

Running fresh and salt water. Electricity and
gas. Two small gasoline boats.

Staff: Scientific: Dr. A. W. H. Needier, Zoologist in
charge. Technical and clerical: None. Main-
tenance and operation: 1.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Investigators
accepted as volunteers by the Biological Board
are given facihties for work. Accommodation
arranged individually with local residents.

Income: Included in amount for Atlantic Biological
Station.

Provision for publication of results: As for Atlantic
Biological Station.

Meteorological Service of Canada ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1872 primarily
for the purpose of giving storm warnings for
shipping on the Great Lakes and in the Maritime
Provinces. It has developed until it now includes
all the activities associated with Meteorological
Services. In 1920 it began the investigation of
the surface-water temperatures in the Pacific.

There was a fairly prevalent theory that the
water temperatures on the Pacific had a definite
bearing on the weather on the North American
continent, especially during the winter, and to
test this out, observations in connection with
the same were undertaken in 1920. For the first
two years various types of instruments were
tried out, and as result it was decided to use
thermographs of the mercury-in-steel type, in-
stalled in the intake of the condenser on the ship,
as it was found these gave accurate sea-water
temperatures and that at the depth of the intake
the temperature did not differ appreciably from
that at the surface. Thermographs were in-
stalled on the ships plying from Vancouver to
Hong Kong in 1922 and there are now fourteen
years of records on the sea-water temperatures
on the ship lanes in the North Pacific. In 1928 a
thermograph was installed on one of the ships
running from Vancouver to New Zealand and
Australia. In 1930 a number of the ships of the
Canadian Pacific Steamship Co. took the route
from Vancouver to Yokohama via Plonolulu,
and as a consequence, observations have also
been obtained over this route during this period.

Location: Toronto, Ontario, Canada.

Organization to which attached: Department of Trans-
port — Dominion Government.

Purposes and scope of activities: This particular
division of the Meteorological Service investigates

sea-water temperatures and their relation to the

climate and weather of Canada.
Equipynent: Fully equipped Meteorological Service

at Toronto; Branch Office, Victoria; Office,

^'ancouver — for ocean temperature observations.
Staff: J. Patterson, M.A., F.R.S.C, Director;

W. A. Thorn, M.A., in charge, Victoria; E. B.

Shearman, in charge, Vancouver.
Provisions for visiting investigators: None.
Income: Received from Dominion Government.
Provision for publication of results: Publications of

the Meteorological Service and various scientific

periodicals.

Station Biologique du Saint-Laurent ('37)

History or origin: Founded in spring of 1931 by

Laval University, Quebec, P. Q., as a section of

the Institute of Marine Biology of that University.

Location: Trois-Pistoles, P. Q., 160 miles down the

river from Quebec City, on the Saint Lawrence.

Organization to which attached: Laval University,

Quebec City.

Purposes: To study the chemical and physical

conditions as well as the fauna and flora of the

Saint Lawrence estuary.

Scope of activities: The Station is open during the

summer months only, from the middle of June

until September, as the work is done mostly by

men of the University of Laval (Quebec) or of

Montreal.

Equipment: A small laboratory for biological and

chemical work, a fine boat equipped with all

necessary apparatus for dredging, collecting of

water samples with the reversing bottle, collecting

of plankton with microplankton and macroplank-

ton meter nets such as are used by the United

States Bureau of Fisheries. The equipment is

quite adequate for the work to be done.

Staff: Director, Rev. Prof. Alexandre Vachon, Laval

University.

Biologists: Dr. J. L. Tremblay, Prof, of Marine

Biology, Laval University; Dr. Georges Pre-

fontaine. University of Montreal; Mr. L.-P.

Dugal, Montreal University; Dr. V. D. Valdy-

kov. Biological Board of Canada, Halifax;

Dr. A. R. Potvin, Professor of Biology, Laval

University; Rev. R. Dolbec, Laval University;

Rev. A. Gagnon, Laval University; Rev. L.

Larouche, Chicoutimi, P. Q. ; Mr. L.-P. Pigeon,

Quebec; Mr. P. Demers, Montreal; Mr. R.

Deschenes, Trois-Pistoles, P. Q.

Chemists: Dr. Lucien Gravel, Laval University;

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

grft E(r/'J'6fcph Risi, Laval University; Mr. Richard
Bernard, Quebec; Mr. L.-P. Bouthillier, Mon-

''^''''t'feal University; Mr. Malcolm Vachon, Laval

''fftjniversity; Mr. Aristide Nadeau, Laval Uni-

■ versity; Mr. Roger Gaudry, Laval University.

Captain of boat : Mr. P.-E. Cloutier. Engineer :

Mr. P. Fillion. Mate: Mr. J. Dumas.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Provisions may
be made for a few workers if application is made
to the Director early in the spring; all necessary
information will be given.

Income: The Station is supported by Laval Univer-
sity. The amount granted by the University
varies; it may average $10,000 a year.

Provision for the publication of results: Results are
published by the University as reports come in;
they are sometimes published in "Le Naturaliste
Canadien," a review of the University, and special
reports are afterwards printed and sent a couple
of times a year.

Newfoundland

Fishery Research Laboratory of Department of
Natiiral Resources

(Date of infortnatio7i, April 19, 1937. Changes in
the staff are contemplated for the near future)

History or origin: Following upon a survey by Dr.
Harold Thomp.son of the Newfoundland fishery
situation in 1930, the British Empire Marketing
Board and the Government of Newfoundland
entered into an agreement providing for a five
year period of fishery research in Newfoundland.
At first the laboratory was estabhshed under a
Fishery Research Commission, but later was
taken over by the Dept. of Natural Resources.
The original five year agreement was extended for
one year and it will be continued for a further
period, probably of five years.

Locatioji: At Bay Bulls, a settlement 18 miles by
road from St. John's.

Organization to which attached: The Department of
Natural Resources, St. John's, Newfoundland.

Purposes: No scientific investigation of the fisheries
of Newfoundland, the main industry of the Island,
had been made up to 1931. The purpose of the
Research Station was to rectify this want.

Scope of activities: Investigation of the fife history,
fluctuation and movements of the principal fi-shes
of Newfoundland, and the improvement of exist-
ing methods, and the development of further

methods of processing fish products also receive
attention.

Equipment: Part of the unused factory of Messrs.
Harvey & Co., fish merchants, was at first rented.
These premises were later bought by the Depart-
ment of Natural Resources. They were originally
erected with the object of carrying on a complete
fishery business in conjunction with the deep sea
fishing fleet, and contain freezing, smoking, dry-
ing, and cod liver oil plant, and a small canning
plant and other additions have been installed.
The Laboratory contains six laboratories, library,
work shop well equipped, dark room, balance
room, store rooms, and a small aquarium. The
latter has pure sea water circulation. A research
vessel is available. Originally a trawler with
full commercial size trawhng gear with usual
scientific installments was run on regular spring
and autumn surveys of the Newfoundland fishing
area, but this has now been replaced by a diesel-
engined refrigerated vessel. All heating is by
electricity and steam, gas is not available.

Staff: Scientific : Director, vacant. Acting Director,
Norman L. Macpherson, Ph.D., M.A. Anna M.
Wilson, M.Sc. Nancy Frost, M.A. Allan R.
Johnstone, B.Sc. Technical and clerical, 23.
Maintenance and operation, 3.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The local hotel
is suitable for summer residence.

Income: At first $43,000 per annum, 50% from the
E. M. B. and 50% from the Government of
Newfoundland. Local scholarships have been
provided for college students for part time work.
Recently available funds were cut by some
$10,000 as cost is now borne entirely by the New-
foundland Government.

Provision for publication of results: Annual and Spe-
cial Reports financed out of general expenditure.
At first Reports of the Newfoundland Fishery
Research Commission, now Department of Natu-
ral Resources, Division of Fishery Research
Reports.

UNITED STATES

Connecticut

Bingham Oceanographic Foundation ('37)

History or origin: The Bingham Oceanographic
Collection was started privately in New York
at the initiative of Harry Payne Bingham, who
undertook three deepsea expeditions on his yacht
Pawnee during the years 1925-1927.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— CANADA, NEWFOUNDLAND, CONNECTICUT

169

Location: New Haven, Connecticut.

Organization to which attached: Yale University, of

which the Foundation with its collections and

laboratories is a separate unit.
Purposes and scope of activities: The first expedition

(1925) visited West Indian waters, the second

(1926) explored the Gulf of California, and the
third (1927) the waters around the Bahama
Islands. The chief purpose of these expeditions
was the collecting of marine life. During the
first two expeditions, mainly shallow-water fishes
and invertebrates were obtained, with numerous
new species discovered. During the third ex-
pedition, the main emphasis was placed upon
bathypelagic trawlings for which the yacht
carried all the necessary equipment. In 1928 the
collections were moved to Peabody Museum of
Yale University, and in 1930 the Bingham
Oceanographic Foundation was endowed by
Harry Pajoie Bingham for the care and further
increase of the collections, and to maintain the
Bingham Oceanographic Laboratory for further
oceanographic and marine biological research.
After the last privately conducted expedition in
1927, the Bingham Oceanographic Foundation
has cooperated with the United States Bureau of
Fisheries in the investigation of the shallow-water
biology of the middle Atlantic coast since 1929,
this cooperation still continuing today. In this
work the Bingham Laboratory has particularly
undertaken to investigate the youngfish biology.
Vessel and crew for the collecting has been fur-
nished by the Bureau of Fisheries. In 1932 Yale
University, through the Bingham Foundation,
sent out an expedition to study the hydrography
of the Gulf of Mexico on the schooner Mabel
Taylor. Subsequently, this arrangement was
superseded by a cooperative arrangement with
the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution for
the further hydrographic exploration of the
Central American seas, with joint expeditions to
the Caribbean region on the Atlantis in 1933,
1934, 1936.

Equipment: The Bingham Oceanographic Labora-
tory is provided with all standard equipment for
laboratory work on marine collections and also
has the necessary apparatus for the standard
chemical determinations of sea water. In regard
to field equipment, the Foundation is completely
provided with everything except a boat. Nets,
seines, trawls, deepsea towing cables, electric
winches, a hydrographic winch, and similar

equipment is maintained in readiness for installa-
tion on any available vessel.

<Sta^.- Curator, A. E. Parr; Assistant Curator,
Martin D. Burkenroad; Assistant, Yngve H.
Olsen.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Although the
space for the time being is rather limited, a
table and the necessary equipment can always be
provided for a visiting investigator.

Income: The total income derived from the Bingham
Oceanographic Foundation, by annual contribu-
tions from Harry Payne Bingham and by a
general oceanographic budget granted by Yale
University, now amounts to $10,800 per year.

Provision for the puhlication of results: Funds are
provided for the printing and distribution of
around two hundred pages of scientific reports
each year. Two series of publications are main-
tained, the Bulletin and the Occasional Papers
of the Bingham Oceanographic Collections.

Supplement: After this report had gone to press,
under date of July 22, 1937, the following in-
formation was received from Dr. A. E. Parr of
Yale University:

There has just been established at Yale the
Sears Foundation for Marine Research, the
income of which will be from an endowment
intended to yield $4,000.00 annually. This
Foundation will be permanently associated with
the Bingham Oceanographic Foundation at Yale.
The chief purpose will be to support two series of
publications, as follows:

First, a quarto memoir series, in which will be
published the results of the investigations con-
ducted under the auspices of both the Sears and
the Bingham Foundations.

Second, an octavo periodical journal, which
will afford means for the pubhcation of results
from any kind of marine research, including such
diverse subjects as marine meteorology, deep-
.sea biology, and the chemistry of sea-water. It
is intended to publish three numbers, with a total
of about 200 pages annually. Only papers of an
interpretative or a theoretical nature will be
accepted. Articles that are merely descriptive
and reviews of literature will not be published.
A charge will be made for subscription to the
journal, but funds derived from that source will be
used to improve and augment the size of the
magazine.

170

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

District of Columbia

Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie
Institution of Washington ('37)

History or origin: The Department of Terrestrial
Magnetism was founded through the initiative of
Dr. Louis A. Bauer, who submitted in 1902 to
the Trustees of the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington a plan for an international magnetic bureau.
This plan was supported by leading investigators
in terrestrial magnetism and terrestrial electricity
at home and abroad. The purpose of the pro-
posed bureau was "to investigate such problems
of worldwide interest as relate to the magnetic
and electric conditions of the Earth and its
atmosphere, not specifically the subject of inquiry
of any one country, but of international concern
and benefit." The Department was formally
established under the auspices of the Carnegie
Institution of Washington in general accordance
with this plan April 1, 1904.

One of the chief problems undertaken was the
magnetic survey of the oceans as a part of the
problem of the world-wide survey. The magnetic
survey of the oceans was begun in the Pacific
Ocean and was continued during August 1905 to
May 1908 with the chartered brigantine Galilee,
which had been adapted for the purpose of mag-
netic observations at sea. The success of these
cruises and the importance of disclosing errors in
magnetic charts led the Institution to authorize
the construction of a non-magnetic ship, the
Carnegie. This vessel was launched June 12,
1909, and carried on work in all oceans between
latitudes 80° north and 61° south until November
29, 1929, when she was destroyed by an explosion
while in the harbor at Apia, Samoa. The com-
bined aggregate of the three cruises of the
Galilee and of the seven cruises of the Carnegie
was 361,413 nautical miles.

When the Carnegie was overhauled prepara-
tory to her seventh cruise (May 1928 to November
1929), laboratories were built and equipment was
added so that in addition to continued magnetic
and electric work an intensive program of physical
and chemical oceanography and marine biology
might be executed. The results included physical
and chemical observations at 162 stations (in
general from .surface to bottom), 1,014 biological
samples, 1,500 .sonic depths, and 87 bottom-
samples. The cruise covered the northern and
southwestern portions of the North Atlantic, and

the eastern portion of the South Pacific Ocean
and the North Pacific Ocean.

The central laboratory, offices, and shop of the
Department were located in rented quarters in
Washington from 1904 to February 1914, when
site and laboratory-building were provided five
miles northwest of the business section of Wash-
ington, D. C. A special non-magnetic standardiz-
ing observatory was built in 1914 and a special
non-magnetic laboratory in 1918, to which was
added in 1933 a large extension, designed particu-
larly for research in nuclear physics. Dr. Louis
A. Bauer was Director through 1929 and there-
after Director Emeritus until his death April 12,
1932. Dr. John A. Fleming, Assistant Director
from 1922, Acting Director from 1930, became
Director January 1, 1935. The annual grant of
the Institution for maintaining the Department
increased from about $20,000 in 1904 to about
$189,000 in 1937, with a peak of about $265,000
in 1929, at the end of which year the Carnegie
was lost.

Location: The Department occupies a site of nine
acres about five miles northwest of the center of
Washington, D. C.

Organization to xohich attached: Carnegie Institution
of Washington, of which the Department is a unit.

Purposes: Major, research in terrestrial magnetism
and terrestrial electricity; oceanographical ob-
servations and research with particular reference
to the continuous changes taking place in the
Earth's magnetic and electric fields, particularly
over oceanic areas; oceanographical research in
connection with magnetic surveys at sea; the-
oretical and experimental investigations in nuclear
physics in connection with their bearings on
terrestrial magnetism and electricity; continuous
observations of the magnetic and electric elements
and of ionization of the upper atmosphere (iono-
sphere) at stations in Peru and Western Australia.

Scope of activities: Researches in terrestrial mag-
netism and electricity and cosmical relations;
magnetic surveys over oceans and on land; con-
tinuous recording of magnetic and electric phe-
nomena; researches on the physics and chemistry
of sea-water samples and data, on the biological
collections, on the meteorological results, and on
marine bottom-samples, obtained during Cruise
VII of the Carnegie.

Equipment: 1 laboratory building, 4 floors, 52 x 102
feet, with deck 29 x 79 feet, and underground
constant-temperature rooms.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

171

1 non-magnetic laboratory building for
standardization of magnetic instruments, 1 floor,
26 X 58 feet.

1 experiment building, 28 x 53 feet, with
extension 34 x 47 feet, and basement 34 x 47 feet.
Library, more than 8,000 volumes and 15,000
reprints.

Several service buildings and foundry (tem-
porary structures).

9-acre site at Washington, D. C.
Magnetic, electric, seismological, radiotele-
graphic, spectrohehoscopic, and auxiliary build-
ings and living quarters for observatory, operated
from 1921, and located on 25-acre site acquired
late in 1919 near Huancayo, Peru, 125 miles
east of Lima.

Magnetic, electric, radiotelegraphic, spectro-
hehoscopic, and auxiliary buildings and living
quarters for observatory, operated from 1919,
and located on 220-acre site acquired in 1917 near
Watheroo, Western Australia, about 120 miles
north-northeast of Perth.

During 1909 to 1929 non-magnetic ves.sel
Carnegie with special equipment, an auxiliary
brigantine of 568 tons displacement, of 33-foot
beam, and 155 feet long over all.
Staff: Dr. J. A. Fleming, Director (terrestrial mag-
netism and electricity, oceanography, field and
obiservatory operations).
O. H. Gish, Physicist and Assistant Director

(terrestrial electricity) .
W. J. Peters, Research Associate (compass-
deviations, magnetic disturbances).
Dr. S. Chapman, Re.search Associate (magnetic

and electric theory).
Dr. J. Bartels, Research Associate (magnetic

activity and correlations).
Dr. H. U. Sverdrup, Research Associate (oceano-

graphical re.search).
Dr. G. Breit (nuclear physics theory).
Dr. G. Gamow (nuclear physics).
H. F. Johnston, Physicist (magnetic variations).
Dr. M. A. Tuve, Physicist (nuclear physics).
L. V. Beckner, Physicist (ionospheric research).
Dr. G. R. Wait, Physicist (atmospheric elec-
tricity).
Dr. L. R. Hafstad, Physicist (nuclear physics).
W. J. Rooncy, Physicist (earth-currents).
Dr. N. P. Heydenburg, Associate Physicist (nu-
clear physics).
W. C. Parkinson, Magnetician (terrestrial mag-
netism).

W. F. Wallis, Magnetician (terrestrial magnetism).

J. W. Green, Magnetician (magnetic secular-
variations and land-survey).

A. G. McNish, Magnetician (magnetic and electric
theory).

E. A. Johnson, Mathematical Physicist (electro-
magnetic design and theory).

C. R. Duvall, Expert Computer (secular variation

and harmonic analysis).
C. C. Ennis, Computer (oceanographical and

magnetic research).

F. T. Davies, Computer (observatory work).

C. W. Torreson, Observer (atmospheric elec-
tricity).

P. G. Ledig, Observer (observatory and land
magnetic survey).

W. E. Scott, Observer (observatory work).

S. L. Seaton, Observer (observatory ionospheric
research).

S. E. Forbush, Observer (magnetic and electric
theory).

H. W. Wells, Observer (ionospheric research).

W. W. Culmsee, Observer (observatory work).

K. L. Sherman, Assistant Physicist (atmospheric
electricity).

R. C. Meyer, Assistant Physicist and Instrument-
maker (nuclear physics and instrumental de-
signer).

H. W. Graham, Biologist and Chemist (research
on biological collections of Carnegie).

W. F. Steiner, Chief Instrument-maker (instru-
mental designer).

Two junior observers and one hand, in addition
to Observer-in-Charge and his two staff-
assistants, at Watheroo Magnetic Observatory
(observatory operation).

One observer, two clerical assistants, and four
general assistants and hands, in addition to
Observer-in-Charge and his one staff-assistant,
at the Huancayo Magnetic Observatory (ob-
servatory operation).
Provision for visiting investigators: In addition to

the Institution's staff, there are occasional visiting

investigators at the laboratory in Washington.

Accommodations for such visiting investigators

are somewhat limited, although as many as four

or five visiting investigators can be accommodated

at one time.
Income: The annual grant of the Department for

1937 from the Carnegie Institution of Washington

is about $189,000. This amount varies somewhat

from year to year. In adchtion, private con-

172

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

tributions for special purposes are received from
time to time; these are, in general, for small
amounts.
Provisions for publication of resiilts: The Carnegie
Institution of Washington through its Division
of Publications publishes a series entitled "Re-
searches of the Department of Terrestrial Mag-
netism," of which six quarto volumes have been
issued. Material for an additional volume has
been made ready for publication, and manuscripts
for the first volume of oceanographic data —
physical, chemical, and biological — obtained on
Cruise VII of the Carnegie are ready. The
members of the staff publish papers in various
American and foreign scientific periodicals; the
total number of such papers since 1904 is nearly
1,500. The Department publishes each year
lists of all its publications, and all publications
are supplied free of charge so far as the limited
editions permit.

United States Coast and Geodetic Survey ('37)

History or origin: (a) In 1807, during the adminis-
tration of President Thomas Jefferson, Congress
authorized the establishment of a national Coast
Survey as a bureau under the Secretary of the
Treasury. The plan adopted for its execution
was that submitted by Ferdinand R. Hassler.
Because of the external relations of the country
it was impracticable to take any steps toward
putting the plan into operation until 1811, when
Hassler was directed to proceed to Europe to
arrange for the construction of the necessary
instruments and standards, some of the most
important of these being made after his own
design. The outbreak of the War of 1812 seri-
ously interfered with his commissions, their
completion being thereby delayed until the close
of 1815, and in consequence actual field work
was not possible until 1816. The work was
suspended in 1818 and resumed in 1832.

For the purpose of furnishing geographic posi-
tions and other data to State surveys the scope
of the bureau was enlarged in 1871, and in 1878
its designation became the Coast and Geodetic
Survey.

On the organization of the Department of
Commerce and Labor in 1903 the bureau was
transferred to it from the Treasury Department
and in 1913 to the Department of Commerce.
The plan upon which it is at present organized
is based on the broad scientific foundation pro-

posed by Hassler and approved by Jefferson;
and its present methods are the perfected results
of experience gained in the field and office during
more than a century of its existence.

Under the direction of a director there are two
main divisions of its work — the field and the office.
In accordance with the plan of reorganization of
1843, the work on shore was divided between
civilian assistants and officers of the Army, and
the hydrographic work was placed almost entirely
in charge of officers of the Navy.

In 1861 the officers of the Army and Navy
were detached, and since that date no officers of
the Army have been assigned to duty on the
survey. After the Civil War the assignments of
officers of the Navy gradually increased in num-
ber, so that the hydrographic work was about
equally divided between them and the civil
a.ssistants during the period which extended to
1898, when the officers of the Navy, becau.se of
conditions created by the outbreak of the war
with Spain, were finally relieved, and in 1900
Congress authorized the establishment of the
survey on a purely civil basis.

(b) Of the oceanographic accomplishments of
the Coast and Geodetic Survey, these may be
mentioned :

1. Study and investigation of the Gulf
Stream, the Gulf of Mexico, and the Caribbean
Sea. The work of the Survey ship Blake,
under the command of Sigsbee and Bartlett, is
particularly well known through the two volumes
of Agassiz i.ssued under the title "Three Crui.ses
of the Blake," and by Pill.sbury's classical in-
vestigation of the Gulf Stream.

2. The development and use of acoustic meth-
ods of determining both depth and position
of soundings. Equipped with these methods,
the Bureau is now able to delineate accurately
the ocean bottom over any section of the conti-
nental shelves. The work that has been accom-
plished as a result of this development reveals the
inadequacy of the data on which oceanographers
in the past have based studies depending on a
knowledge of the configuration of the bottom in
areas out of sight of land. Inasmuch as the use
of the new methods requires a thorough knowl-
edge of the temperature and salinity of the
water, a large amount of information of this
nature is being accumulated. Excellent examples
of the contributions to oceanography resulting
from the new methods are the results obtained

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

173

on the recent survey of Georges Bank, the
approaches to New York Harbor, and the ap-
proaches to Chesapeake Bay.

In the subject of tides, three notable achieve-
ments may be mentioned. First is the design of
the construction of a direct-reading tide predictor
by means of which tide predictions are made more
expeditiously and more accurately than before.
Second, the development of methods for deter-
mining with precision tidal datum planes from
short series of observations. Third, the develop-
ment of the stationary-wave theory of the tide,
which permits a better understanding of the
various features of the tide found in the seven seas.

Location: Washington, D. C.

Organization to which attached: Bureau of Department
of Commerce.

Purposes and scope of activities: The results of coastal
surveys are published, for the guidance of naviga-
tion and the protection of life and property at
sea, on about 750 different charts which constitute
the basic product of the Bureau. The greater
part of the information shown on the charts is
obtained by extensive hydrographic and topo-
graphic surveys and the accuracy and adequacy
of such surveys in any region are, therefore, an
index of the condition of the charts of that
region.

There is also a considerable amount of informa-
tion required by mariners that can not be shown
conveniently on charts. This includes sailing
directions and data relative to port facilities,
weather conditions, radio service, and similar
subjects. To supply this information the Coast
and Geodetic Survey publishes 12 Pilot volumes
for the coasts under the jurisdiction of the
United States and 3 Inside Route Pilots for our
inland waterways.

The geodetic work of the Bureau has for its
principal object the establishment of a great
number of points, distributed along our coasts
and throughout the interior, to provide a founda-
tion or framework for practically all charting and
mapping operations. These are divided into two
general classes — triangulation stations, the posi-
tions of which, with relation to each other and
on the surface of the earth, are determined; and
bench marks, the elevations of which are accu-
rately known.

The bureau's tidal investigations serve two
purposes with respect to chart production; first,
they provide data for the establishment of the

reference plane and for the reduction of all sound-
ings to that plane; second, they enable the bureau
to compile annual tables of predicted tides and
currents, by means of which the mariner can
time the movements of his ship to take advantage
of the tide or, by using the tables in conjunction
with his chart, can ascertain the actual depths
at any time.

With the increase in size of ships and the grow-
ing importance of economy in their operation,
it has been necessary in late years for the bureau
to extend the scope of its current investigations
which are carried on in connection with tidal
observations. Outside the bureau the results
of these operations are of great value in harbor-
improvement work, sewage disposal, and similar
projects.

The magnetic surveys of the Bureau are
carried on for the primary purpose of providing
the data relative to magnetic variation that are
shown on all charts and airway maps and are
essential to the accurate use of the magnetic
compass. The results are equally necessary for
land surveying and for many branches of scientific
research.

The activities mentioned above are all essential
branches of chart and map production work,
however, the Bureau is engaged in two other
activities. One of these is airway mapping. In
addition to being directly in line with other
charting operations, the assignment of this
duty to the Bureau is simply a case of utilizing
trained personnel and a modern map-making
plant to turn out additional work with no great
increase in overhead expenses.

The other activity is seismology, or earthquake
investigation. This was delegated to the bureau
for the reason that the work required is admirably
adapted, both in the field and office, for pro.secu-
tion in conjunction with magnetic surveys and,
hke airway mapping, can be carried on with only
a moderate increase in operating expenses.

The Coast and Geodetic Survey helps other
institutions by collecting samples of marine
plankton and bottom sediments.
Equipment: The Survey owns and operates ten sea-
going vessels, four of which are employed on the
Atlantic and Gulf Coasts, six on the Pacific and
Alaskan Coasts, and one in the Philippine Islands.
The last is owned by the Philippine Government.
In addition, it operates a number of smaller motor
vessels and wire drag launches for work imme-

174

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

diately adjacent to the coast and a large number
of trucks for work in the interior of the country.
The various survejdng units are each equipped
with the most modern surveying instruments and
appliances for undertaking the work assigned to
them. The Washington office, located in the new
Department of Commerce building, is adequately
equipped to handle the material received from
the field and to convert it into the various products
of the Bureau.

SURVEYING VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

oceanographer 1,400 12 59

Surveyor 1,150 11 59

Discoverer 1,180 12 57

Guide 1,180 12 57

Pioneer 1,180 12 57

Pathfinder 875 9 71

Lydonia 585 7 49

Fathomer 550 7 41

Explorer 450 7 45

Hydrographer 987 10 51

Gilbert 90 3 12

Westdahl 90 3 12

Also 13 enclosed power launches of from 25 to
45 tons displacements, 2 to 4 officers, 5 to 10
crew.
Staff: Director, Hydrographic & Geodetic Engineer,

Rear Admiral R. S. Patton.
Assistant-Director, Hydrographic & Geodetic

Engineer, Commander J. H. Hawley.
Head of Division of Hydrography and Topog-
raphy, Hydrographic & Geodetic Engineer,

Captain G. T. Rude.
Head of Division of Geodesy, Hydrographic &

Geodetic Engineer, Captain C. L. Garner.
Head of the Division of Charts, Hydrographic &

Geodetic Engineer, Commander L. O. Colbert.
Head of Division of Terrestrial Magnetism and

Seismology, Hydrographic & Geodetic Engi-
neer, Captain N. H. Heck.
Head of the Division of Tides and Currents,

Hydrographic & Geodetic Engineer, Captain

P. C. Whitney.
Head of the Division of Instruments, D. L.

Parkhurst.
Accountant, J. M. Griffin.
Chief Clerk, C. H. Dieck.

Field force composed of 171 hydrographic and
geodetic engineers, junior hydrographic and
geodetic engineers, and aides, 10 magnetic ob-
servers, 30 tide observers, 41 mates, engineers,
surgeons, deck officers, etc., appro.ximately 500
enlisted men, and an average of 160 additional

employees who are necessary to insure the effec-
tive work of shore parties, besides a number of
laborers hired for brief periods when needed.

Office force, composed of mathematicians,
cartographers, draftsmen engravers, instmment
makers, printers, accountants, clerks, etc., num-
bering 208.

There is a field station at Manila, and the officer
in charge, representing the director, has authority
to arrange for the conduct of insular field and
office operations, and to prepare and publish
charts and sailing directions for the Philippine
Islands. There are field stations also at Boston,
New York, New Orleans, San Francisco, Seattle,
and Honolulu.

Provisions for visiting investigators: It would be of
particular value if scientific workers outside of
the Coast and Geodetic Survey could have the
opportunity to utilize the large amount of scien-
tific data now in its archives. It is probable
that scientific men working at universities or in
private research laboratories might be desirous of
attacking certain problems by the use of the data
of this Bureau. The studies might be of such a
nature that the institution or laboratory could
not or would not finance the investigations. If
Congress would authorize having studies made
at the Washington office by outside scientific
men and, while they were being made, would
pay salaries that would be .sufficient to cover at
least the living expenses of the workers, men
from educational institutions might work here
during their Sabbatical years or during the
usual summer vacation. The cost of such in-
vestigations would be quite small but the product
might be of marked value.

Income: Source: Federal appropriation.

Amount: Approximately $3,000,000 per annum.

Provision for ■publication of results: Publishes its own
nautical charts, and Department of Commerce
Aeronautical charts. Receives allotment from
Department of Commerce for standard publica-
tions such as Coast Pilots, Tide and Current
publications, triangulation, leveling, and magnetic
and seismological data. Papers are also published
in various scientific journals.

United States Coast Guard ('37)

Location: Washington, D. C.

Organization to which attached: United States Treas-
ury Department.

The following is a statement prepared by Rear

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

175

Admiral R. R. Waesche, the Commandant of the
Coast Guard, in addition to that on the Inter-
national Ice Patrol on a preceding page:

Each year the United States Coast Guard
details a force of vessels to the Bering Sea in the
performance of the duties of the Coast Guard
in those waters during the season of marine
activities. These duties involve the cruising
of the vessels throughout all sections of the
Bering Sea, affording opportunities, at times, for
oceanographic observations, and thus contribut-
ing to the meager knowledge now available bearing
upon currents, bathymetry, water temperatures,
and other oceanographic data applicable to that
region.

During the season of 1934 the Coast Guard
cutter Chelan, under the command of Com-
mander F. A. Zeusler, U. S. C. G., in collaboration
with the Oceanographic Laboratory of the
University of Washington, conducted a survey
of the physical and chemical conditions of the
surface waters from the Strait of Juan de Fuca
to Dutch Harbor, Alaska, during the regular
passage of the cutter from Seattle en route to
Bering Sea Patrol duty. From July 26 to August
24, 1934, the oceanographic party aboard the
Chelan made a study of the chemistry of the
Bering Sea ocean floor, of the ocean water, and
of the various organisms and plants, and of the
water circulation, water temperatures, etc.
throughout a major portion of the Bering Sea
area. The results and discussion of the data
obtained during this cruise have been published
in a Coast Guard bulletin, dated June 1, 1936,
entitled "Report of Oceanographic Cruise, United
States Coast Guard cutter Chelan, Bering Sea
and Bering Strait, 1934."

During the season of 1935 and 1936, the Coast
Guard cutter Chelan, in command of Commander
L. V. Kiclhorn, U. S. C. G., in furtherance of the
studies carried on during 1934, conducted an
oceanographic survey of the waters in the general
region of Bowers Bank, Bering Sea (in 1935),
and of the waters to the westward and southward
of Attn Island (in 1936). These ob.servations
developed the presence of a submarine plateau,
previously uncharted, in Western Bering Sea,
and indicated that, contrary to the general belief
formerly entertained, shoal water existed between
the Kormandorkis and the Aleutian Chain, and
that deep water existed in the Aleutian Trough.
The soundings data obtained during the Chelan's

cruises of 1935 and 1936 are recorded on charts
published in the above-mentioned bulletin.

Recognizing the value and importance of
oceanographic observations in the Bering Sea
and North Pacific Ocean region, the Coast Guard
plans to continue such work as opportunity offers
in the course of the regular cruising activities of
its vesisels in that area.

United States Bureau of Fisheries ('37)

History or origin: The Bureau of Fisheries, the sole
Federal Agency concerned with the conservation
and utilization of the nation's aquatic resources,
owed its inception to the widely entertained
opinion that the fisheries in general were diminish-
ing in value and importance on account of the
intensity and methods with which they were
prosecuted, a view which investigation has shown
to be justified with regard to many fishes and
other valuable aquatic animals. The American
Fish Culturists Association (now the American
Fisheries Society) took a leading part in advocat-
ing investigation of the subject, and largely
through its influence and the representations of
State fisheries officers. Congress passed a joint
resolution, approved February 9, 1871, which
provided for the appointment of a Commissioner
of Fish and Fisheries who was directed to conduct
investigations concerning the facts and the causes
of the alleged diminution and the feasibility of
remedial measures. Until July 1, 1903, the
establishment was independent, reporting directly
to Congress, and was known as the U. S. Com-
mission of Fish and Fisheries, but on the organiza-
tion of the Department of Commerce, it was
included by law in the new department, and the
name was changed to its present designation.

Location: The central office is in the Department of
Commerce Building, Washington, D. C. Per-
manent biological laboratories, experimental sta-
tions, and fish cultural stations are located in 39
states and Alaska. Temporary field headquarters
for various investigations are maintained in many
of the leading universities.

Organization to which attached: United States De-
partment of Commerce.

Purposes: The original conception of the Bureau
was a body for scientific and statistical investiga-
tion of the fisheries and that phase of its work
always has been prominent, but it was soon found
that to secure the practical end which effected its
formation it should be clothed with the power

176

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

that would make its own findings effective. This
was in part acoompUshed by the Act approved
June 10, 1872, which gave authority for the propa-
gation of food fisiies, a branch of the service which
has grown until at present it constitutes an
important part of the bureau's activities.
Scope of activities: As now constituted, the Bureau is
concerned with the wise husbandry of our fishery
resources. Its work includes the collection of
biological and statistical data to reveal the
condition and trend of our important fisheries,
the development of the science of aquiculture, the
propagation and distribution of food and game
fishes to replenish the natural supply, the conduct
of economic and technological studies to assure
maximum utilization of fishery products and
by-products, the protection of the sponge fishery
off the coast of Florida, the protection and
conservation of the salmon and other fisheries
of Alaska, the administration of the fur seal herd
on the Pribilof Islands, and enforcement of the
Act of July 2, 1930, regulating the interstate
transportation of black bass. Acting in an
advisory capacity, the Bureau has been able to
exert a powerful influence on the fishery legisla-
tion of the States. Local authorities and interests
hold its work in high regard and, appreciating
that its advice is authoritative and disinterested,
frequently seek it. The Bureau is also repre-
sented on Commissions having to do with inter-
national fisheries questions of con.serving the
supply of aquatic animal life.

The scientific work of the Bureau is conducted
by the staff of the Division of Scientific Inquiry,
and the information presented below refers pri-
marily to that Division. The research program
is divided into three major branches: (1) Com-
mercial fishery investigations, relating to varia-
tions in the supply of important food fishes and
the causes of such variations, such as may be
found in the life history of the various species,
their ecological relationships, including the effects
of commercial fishing and changes in their en-
vironment which involves a limited program of
oceanographic research ; (2) Shellfishery Investiga-
tions, including studies on the physiology and
ecology of oysters and other shellfish and the
practical problems of oyster farming; and (3)
Aquicultural Investigations, including the feed-
ing, breeding, and rearing of food and game
fishes; the survey and improvement of streams,
and the development of an effective policy of

stocking interior waters and overcoming the
effects of pollution of streams.
Equipment: Fisheries Biological Laboratory and
Hatchery, Woods Hole, Massachusetts. Labora-
tory and hatchery building, three floors, contain-
ing marine fish hatchery, public aquarium and
exhibit room, offices, general laboratory with
alcoves, private research rooms, chemical labora-
tories, stock room, dark room, and library.
Residence building, three floors; power house
and storage building. Dock, breakwater, boat
harbor, etc. Running salt water supply. One
diesel driven research boat, 45 feet long, with
live well and hoisting equipment; two 26 foot
launches; row boats.

Fisheries Biological Laboratory, Beaufort, N. C.
Laboratory building, two floors, containing main
laboratory with alcoves, private research rooms,
chemical laboratory, exhibit room, offices, library,
dark room, stock rooms, etc., and 12 dormitory
rooms. Mess hall; power house; boat house;
carpenter shop; residence; dock; 46 foot motor
cruiser, 35 and 26 foot launches; numerous row
boats. Circulating salt water supply.

Fisheries Biological Laboratory, Fairport, Iowa
(temporarily cIo.sed). Laboratory building, three
floors, including offices, exhibit room, private
research rooms, chemical laboratories, dormitories,
library, and dining rooms. Tank house, power
house, carpenter shop, boat house, 5 residence
buildings, and 2 river launches. Approximately
15 acres of earthen and concrete ponds supplied
with river and well water.

Fisheries Biological Laboratory, Seattle, Wash-
ington. Laboratory building, three floors, con-
taining offices, private research rooms, chemical
laboratories and stock room, photographic rooms,
and library. 40 foot motor launch.

Experimental Fish Cultural Station, Pittsford,
Vermont. Hatchery building, small laboratory
building, residence and accessory buildings, ponds
and raceways for experimental trout cidture.

Experimental Fish Cultural Station, Leetown,
West Virginia. Large hatchery and laboratory
building, including offices, library, dark room,
research rooms, and biological laboratory. Shop
and storage building, residences, numerous ponds
and raceways for experimental trout culture and
ponds for culture of bass and other warm water
fishes (approximately 60 acres when completed).

Laboratories and offices well equipped for
experimental and statistical biological research

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

177

are cooperatively maintained at Harvard Univer-
sity, Yale University, Cornell University, Uni-
versity of Michigan, University of Missouri, and
Stanford University.
Staff: Washington Office:

Elmer Higgins, Chief Division of Scientific

Inquiry.
E. W. Bailey, Junior Administrative Assistant.
Dr. S. F. Hildebrand, Senior Ichthyologist.
Isaac Ginsburg, Assistant Aquatic Biologist.
3 clerical assistants.
Office of Experimental Fish Culture: Dr. H. S.

Davis, Pathologist, in charge.
Office of Shellfishery Investigations: Dr. P. S.

Galtsoff, Aquatic Biologist, in charge.
Field Organization:
Commercial Fishery Investigations:

North and Middle Atlantic Fishery Investiga-
tions, Cambridge and Woods Hole, Mass.:
0. E. Sette, in charge; W. C. Herrington,
Aquatic Biologist; R. A. Nesbit, Assistant
Aquatic Biologist; J. R. Webster, Junior
Aquatic Biologist; 4 clerical and technical
assistants.
South Atlantic and Gulf Shrimp Investiga-
tions, New Orleans, La.: M. J. Lindner, in
charge; Dr. Lionel A. Walford, Associate
Aquatic Biologist; J. C. Pearson, Assistant
Aquatic Biologist; W. W. Anderson, Junior
Aquatic Biologist (Brunswick, Ga.).
Great Lakes Fishery Investigations, Ann
Arbor, Michigan: Dr. John Van Oosten,
in charge; Dr. Ralph Hile, Assistant
Aquatic Biologist; Dr. H. J. Deason,
Assistant Aquatic Biologist; 1 clerk.
Pacific Coast and Alaska Fishery Investiga-
tions, Seattle, Wash.: Dr. F. A. Davidson,
in charge; J. A. Craig, Associate Aquatic
Biologist; H. B. Holmes, Associate Aquatic
Biologist; Dr. G. A. Rounsefell, Junior
Aquatic Biologist; E. H. Dahlgren, Jun-
ior Aquatic Biologist; A. J. Suomela,
Junior Aquatic Biologist; Frank Jobes,
Junior Aquatic Biologist; 2 temporary and
2 permanent clerical and maintenance
assistants.
Shellfishery Investigations: New England Oys-
ter Studies, Milford, Conn.: Dr. V. L.
Loosanoff, Assistant Aquatic Biologist.
South Atlantic Oyster Studies, Beaufort,
N. C: Dr. H. F. Prytherch, Director;
4 clerical and maintenance assistants. Gulf

Oyster Studies, Apalachicola, Florida: Dr.
A. E. Hopkins, Senior Aquatic Biologist;
R. O. Smith, Assistant Aquatic Biologist.
Fish Cultural Investigations: Experimental
Hatchery, Pittsford, Vermont: R. F. Lord,
Junior Aquatic Biologi.st; 2 Fish Culturists.
Experimental Hatchery at Leetown, West
Virginia: E. W. Surber, Assistant Aquatic
Biologist; Dr. J. S. Gutsell, Associate
Aquatic Biologist ; 3 Fish Culturists. Pond
Cultural Experiments at Marion, Alabama:
0. L. Meehean, Jimior Aquatic Biologist.
California Trout Investigations, Stanford
University, Calif.: Dr. P. R. Needham,
Associate Aquatic Biologist; A. C. Taft,
Associate Aquatic Biologi.st; 12 temporary
assistants. Pathological Laboratory, Seat-
tle, Washington: Dr. F. F. Fish, Associate
Pathologist. Investigations in the Interior
Waters, Columbia, Missouri, and Fort
Worth, Texas: Dr. M. M. Ellis (tem-
porary), in charge; T. K. Chamberlain,
Associate Aquatic Biologist; 6 temporary
assistants.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Formerly facilities
for research in aquatic biology have been pro-
vided free of charge to competent investigators
at the Bureau's laboratories at Woods Hole,
Mass., Beaufort, N. C, and Fairport, Iowa.
During the current year, owing to reduced
appropriations, facilities are available only at
Beaufort, N. C.
Income: The Bureau receives regular annual appro-
priations from Congress. In 1932, $2,905,540
was appropriated for the Bureau, of which $300,-
340 was for the Division of Scientific Inquiry.
During 1934 upwards of $1,000,000 has been
received from various emergency and Public
Works organizations. For the fiscal year 1937,
the Bureau's appropriation is $1,565,920, of which
$164,700 is for the Division of Scientific Inquiry.
Provision for the publication of results: Publications
of the Bureau of Fisheries include the following:
Administrative Reports, containing the annual
report of the Commissioner and the four Divisions;
Investigational Reports, including the results of
research m applied science in the fields of biology,
technology, economics, and statistics of the
fi.sheries; Bulletin, including scientific contribu-
tions on biological subjects; Fishery Circulars,
consisting of brief accounts of investigations
having economic importance or general interest

178

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

and including information of timely significance
not requiring more extensive treatment ; Statistical
Bulletins (multigraphed), consisting of statistical
and trade information regarding the commercial
fisheries and the marketing and distribution of
fishery products. In 1932, $27,000 was available
for publications; during the current year $14,000
was available.

Hydrographic Office, United States Navy ('37)

History or origin: On December 6, 1830, following a
recommendation by Lieutenant L. M. Gold.s-
borough. United States Navy, to the Board of
Navy Commissioners, a "Depot of charts and
instruments" was established at the seat of
Government. This depot took charge of such
nautical charts and instruments as had been
collected at the various navy yards and assumed
the care and issue of charts and instruments
furnished United States vessels. The object of
the depot was to do away with the difficulties
and dangers to which our national vessels had
been previously exposed from want of an orderly
and sufficient supply of information on all parts
of the world to which their services might be
directed.

The difficulties that were experienced in main-
taining an adequate supply of charts, all of which
were purchased from civilian firms, early led to a
recommendation from the Board of Navy Com-
missioners to the Secretary of the Navy that
means for providing charts should be installed
at the depot. The introduction of a lithographic
press in May, 1835, constituted the initial attempt
at chart production.

In 1842 the Board of Navy Commissioners that
had governed the Navy for twenty-seven years
was dissolved and the present bureau system was
established in its place. The depot of charts and
instruments was placed under the Bureau of
Ordnance and Hydrography. The institution was
officially known from 1830 to 1844 as the "Depot
of Charts and Instruments," but during the next
ten years the names "Naval Observatory,"
"National Observatory," "Hydrographic Office,"
• and others were used indiscriminately. By order
of the Secretary of the Navy, in December 1854,
it was thenceforth called the United States Naval
Observatory and Hydrographical Office. As such
it was known until the statutory establishment of
the Hydrographic Office as a separate institution
in 1866. During the years 1842-1861 in which

Lieutenant M. F. Maury, United States Navy, was
in charge of the instruments, his talents and in-
clinations being essentially those of a meteorologist
and oceanographer, he became recognized as taking
account of scientific matters in general relating
to the ocean. His investigations and writings
on the winds which blew over the surface of the
water and their agencies in minimizing the dura-
tion of the passage of ships; the configuration of
the ocean bed from the sea level down to the
greatest depth; the temperature, circulation, and
physical and chemical properties of sea water;
the currents; the tides; the waves; the com-
position and distribution of marine deposits; the
nature and distribution of marine organisms; the
relation of man to the ocean in the development
of fisheries; commerce, civilization; navigation;
hydrography; and marine meteorology were all
subjects within the purview of this naval scientist.
In 1866 Congress passed an act to establish a
Hydrographic Office, thereby severing the con-
nection between that office and the Naval Ob-
servatory. This act reads in part as follows:

"There shall be a Hydrographic Office attached to
the Bureau of Navigation in the Navy Department,
for the improvement of the means for navigating safely
the vessels of the Navy and of the mercantile marine,
by providing, under the authority of the Secretary of
the Navy, accurate and cheap nautical charts, sailing
directions, navigators, and manuals of instructions
for the use of all vessels of the United States, and for
the benefit and use of navigators generally. (U. S.
Code, Titles, sec. 457.)

The Secretary of the Navy is authorized to cause to
be prepared, at the Hydrographic Office attached to the
Bureau of Navigation in the Navy Department, maps,
charts, and nautical books relating to and required in
navigation, and to publish and furnish them to naviga-
tors at the cost of printing and paper, and to purchase
the plates and copyrights of such existing maps, charts,
navigators, sailing directions, and instructions, as he
may consider necessary, and when he may deem it
expedient to do so, and under such regulations and
instructions as he may prescribe. (U. S. Code, Title
5, sec. 458.)"

In 1866 the Hydrographic Office was moved
to what is known as the "Octagon House," at
Eighteenth Street and New York Avenue. Com-
mander Thomas S. Fillebrown, United States
Navy, was detached from the Naval Observatory
and appointed Hydrographer. In the summer of
1879 the Hydrographic Office was removed from
the Octagon House to the same building in which
the Navy Department was located, and it has

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

179

since been quartered along with the rest of the
department. By act of Congress in 1898 it was
transferred from the Bureau of Navigation to the
Bureau of Equipment; and on July 1, 1910, it
was transferred back to the Bureau of Navigation.
The Hydrographic Office is supplemented by
twenty fully equipped Branch Offices located
at the most important points on the Atlantic,
Pacific, and Gulf seaboards and on the shores of
the Great Lakes, and at Honolulu, T. H. The
Hydrographic Office is under the immediate
direction of the Hydrographer, a naval officer
of high rank. The present Hydrographer, Cap-
tain Lamar R. Leahy, United States Navy,
assumed his duties on May 31, 1935.

Location: In the Navy Building, ISth Street and
Constitution Ave., N. W., Washington, D. C.

Organization to which attached: The United States
Navy Department, of which the Hydrographic
Office is a major sub-division of the Bureau of
Navigation.

Purposes: To place within reach of mariners, at
small expense to them, such useful information
as can not be collected profitably by a private
individual, but which the Government can
readily gather, without additional cost, through
agencies already established, to collect, digest,
and issue timely information calculated to afford
the maximum possible safety and facility of navi-
gation to ships on the seas and to aircraft operating
over the sea routes.

Scope of activities: Under statutory obligations to:

(1) Produce epitomes and manuals for the guid-
ance of navigators in conducting their observa-
tions and keeping their reckoning on the seven
seas;

(2) supply the United States Navy with charts
required by it;

(3) supply the Merchant Marine, United States
and foreign, and the navigators and aviators
generally, with Hydrographic Office charts and
other publications "at the cost of printing and
paper" (there are always on the shelves of the
Hydrographic Office some 300,000 charts and
100,000 journals and books ready for is.sue);

(4) maintain the flow of the latest information
about surface and aerial navigation with some
7,000 mariners and aviators of all nationalities
who keep up a constant flow of information
respecting the sea and the air of the world in
addition to information from the vessels of the
Navy, American consuls, scientffic organizations,

and foreign governments; provide a free exchange
of information and publications between the
Hydrographic Office and the Hydrographic Offices
of the other navies of the world ;

(5) prepare, issue and keep up-to-date the
numerous standard publications that the Hydro-
graphic Office issues, such as sailing directions
and light lists of foreign waters, flying directions
and other aids to navigation, and all other navi-
gational publications and charts;

(6) study oceanic circulation dynamically and
otherwise ;

(7) prepare special and strategic charts required
by the Navy for its operation and maintain a
.sufficient supply of charts, navigational tables,
and manuals necessary to enable the Navy to
operate in accordance with approved war plans;

(8) supervise the operation of the branch offices,
whereby the personal contact with merchant
mariners is secured and maintained, for the pur-
pose of collecting and dis.seminating information;

(9) conducting actual direction of the United
States Naval surveying parties on the high seas,
laying out detailed plans for such .surveys, and
working up the data secured into finished charts,
and;

(10) maintain interchange of information and
publications with scientific institutions, foreign
hydrographic offices, and the International Hy-
drographic Bureau of Monaco.

Equipment: Comparable to any large well organized
concern which not only manufactures and dis-
tributes its own products but in addition does
its own scientific research work.

BCRVETINQ VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CBEW

Hannibal 4,000 14 240

NoKOMis 1,265 11 118

Y. P.-^l

Y. V.~^

Y. P.— 56 210 From NoKOMis

Staff: Sixteen officers and 176 civilians in the main
office at Washington, D. C, with twenty officers
and twenty-four civilians in the branch offices.
The civilians are mostly nautical, hydrographic,
and cartographic engineers; nautical scientists;
computers, engravers; photographers and litho-
graphers.

Officers in charge of Divisions, March 1937:
Hydrographer, Captain L. R. Leahy, U.S.N.
Assistant Hydrographer and Head of Division of

Administration, Captain H. E. Kays, U.S.N.

180

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Head of Division of Maritime Security, Com-
mander F. P. Traynor, U.S.N.
Head of Division of Chart Con.struction, Com-
mander W. G. B. Hatch, U.S.N.
Head of Division of Distribution, Commander

H. J. Nelson, U.S.N.
Head of Division of Air Navigation, Lieut. -Com-
mander W. Sinton, U.S.N.
Head of Division of Research, Lieut. -Commander
J. E. Gingrich, U.S.N.
Provisions for visiting investigators: No special
provisions have been made for any definite num-
ber, but desk room is available for a few persons
at a time.
Income: Appropriations by Congress vary from time
to time. The 1937 appropriation was for the
amount of $701,600.00 alloted as follows: Salaries
Hydrographic Office, .S400,000.00; maintenance
and operation, including Branch Hydrographic
Offices, $136,600.00; printing, .$95,000.00; Ocean
and Lake Survey, $70,000.00.
Provisions for publication of results: The Hydro-
graphic Office publishes fifty-six volumes of
Sailing Directions, six volumes of Lists of Lights
(foreign waters), two Naval Air Pilots, fourteen
Manuals of Tables, and numerous miscellaneous
books, among which arc the two volumes of the
International Code of Signals; about 2,900 navi-
gational charts covering nearly every part of the
world; 64 aviation charts; Pilot Charts of the
surface of all oceans; Pilot Charts of the Upper
Air of the North Atlantic and North Pacific
Oceans and many other special charts, such as
Great Circle Sailing, Star, Track and Distance,
Time Zone Charts of the World; and Magnetic
Declination Charts of the World. Papers are
also prepared by the members of the staff for
various scientific conventions and for publication
in scientific periodicals.

United States National Museum

History or origin: Began in 1846 with founding of
Smithsonian Institution.

Location: Washington, D. C.

Organization to ivhich attached: Smithsonian Insti-
tution.

Purposes: Preservation and exhibition of the
National Collections in natural history, arts and
industries, history, and kindred subjects.

(Scope of activities: Systematic research on collections
which include extensive series representing the
life of the sea.

Equipment: Museum building, laboratories, and
storage .space for collections; laboratory equip-
ment required in systematic work.
Sta,ff: Staff concerned principally with life from the

sea includes the following:
Division of Fishes: L. P. Schultz, Assistant

Curator in Charge.
Division of Marine Invertebrates: Waldo L.

Schmitt, Curator in Charge; C. R. Shoemaker,

Assistant Curator; J. 0. Maloney, Aid.
Division of Mollusks: Paul Bartsch, Curator in

Charge; Harold A. Rehder, Assistant Curator;

J. P. E. Morrison, Aid.
Division of Echinoderns: Austin H. Clark, Curator

in Charge.

Maintenance is covered under general main-
tenances for other museum activities.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Accredited visit-
ing investigators are given access to the collections
in which they are interested under whatever
supervision may be required and are afforded
facilities for work. No scholarships, fellowships,
or tables are maintained.
Income: Income is from governmental appropria-
tions for United States National Museum, with
assistance in research from the private funds
of the Smithsonian Institution, supplemented in
some instances by gifts from private individuals
for specific purposes.
Provision for the publication of results: Publication
offered in Bulletin and Proceedings series of
United States National Museum, and in Mis-
cellaneous Collections of Smithsonian Institution.

Johnson-Smithsonian Deep-Sea Expedition

History or origin: Mr. Eldridge R. Johnson in
October, 1932, placed his palatial yacht Caroline
at the disposition of the Smithsonian Institution
and offered to finance the necessary equipment
for the yacht to render her suitable for marine
exploration. The direction of this work was
placed in the hands of Dr. Paul Bartsch who
outlined a program of exploration of the Atlantic
deeps, beginning with the Puerto Rican Deep.

To this end the yacht was provided with a
sonic sounding apparatus, a hydrographic winch
in a general way corresponding with that on the
Atl.^ntis, carrying 5,563 feet of Special f inch,
6 X 19 Monitor Strand, hemp center, wire rope.
Suitable other equipment for physical, chemical,
and biological investigations was also installed.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

181

The first Johnson-Smithsonian Deep-Sea Ex-
pedition resulted in a series of soundings and
dredging stations. In addition to the soundings,
it should be stated that with every dredging
station soundings were made at very short inter-
vals, gaining a complete contour of the ground
covered during each haul. These have been
plotted and will be published in the final report.
In addition to the physical and chemical data,
we obtained some 2,000 tubes, jars, and tanks
full of specmiens, which haxe been distributed
to the various specialists for report.

Plans have been made for the creation of a new
winch constructed on entirely new lines, which
will carry 15 miles of stranded wire cable, three
spools of 5 miles each, J, §, and f inch. This
winch contains specially controlled devices which
should prove useful when the instrument used
becomes snagged on the bottom.

The first effort is to be followed by others, of
which the next one is scheduled to be in the Puerto
Rican Deep, completing that research. This
began January, 1935.
Location: The shore work was conducted at the
Smithsonian Institution and its branches. The
yacht's home port is Brooklyn, New York.
Organization to which attached: Smithsonian In-
stitution.
Purposes: Physics, chemistry, and biology of the sea.
Scope of activities: Systematic research on collec-
tions which include extensive series representing
the life of the sea.
Equipment: The yacht and the shore facilities of the

Smithsonian Institution.
Staff on the First Cruise:

Scientists: Director, Paul Bartsch; Parasitologist,
E. W. Price; Physicist, Townsend Brown;
Manager of equipment, E. R. Fenimore John-
son ; Assistant Zoologist, Charles Weber.
Technical and clerical: Artist, Elie Cheverlange;
Photographer, G. R. Goergens; Dredging Mas-
ter, John Mills; Winch Master, W. J. Kennedy;
Secretary, Anthony Wilding.
Guests: Mr. and Mrs. Leon Douglass; Miss Ena
Douglass; Miss Florence Douglass; Dr. George
Derby.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Good.
Income: Expedition financed personally by Mr.

Eldridge R. Johnson.
Provision for the publication of results: Smithsonian
Miscellaneous collections.

Marine Division, United States Weather
Bureau ('37)

History or origin: Origin, as a Government project,
goes back to Lieutenant M. F. Maury's justly
famous researches and collections of data, be-
ginning 1850, under the United States Navy.
The work of collecting and compiling marine
meteorological data was kept up by the U. S.
Signal Service from 1871 until 1887, when it was
transferred to the Hydrographic Office of the
Navy, where it remained until 1904. The
Marine Division of the Weather Bureau was
established to handle the work in 1904, in coopera-
tion with the Hydrographic Office. The Act
of June 16, 1910, clarified the field of cooperation
between these two offices, in mamtaining a pro-
gram of Government activity in the field of marine
meteorology. In 1913 the Marine Division was
discontinued, and the work became an adjunct
of the Climatological Service until 1920, when
the Marine Division was restored. Separate
status has since been maintained, until now
(1936) there are ten employees on the staff of the
Marine Division in Washington, and a variable
number of field station employees giving full or
part-time to the marine meteorological project.

Location: At the Weather Bureau Central Office,
24th and M Streets, N. W., Washington, D. C.

Organization to ivhich attached: Weather Bureau,
United States Department of Agriculture.

Purposes: To foster accurate, uniform and coordi-
nated observation of the weather over the oceans ;
and to collect, organize, and as far as possible
digest the results from such a program of marine
meteorological work, for the benefit of commerce,
navigation, and science.

Scope of activities: Ships of all nationalities are
enlisted for co6perati\'e reporting of their weather
observations; methods of observation and in-
strumental equipment are as far as possible
supervised, with the object of attaining good
standards of accuracy in the results of observa-
tion; printed information as to good method,
and also carrying summaries of results of the
ocean weather program, prepared and dissemi-
nated; records are gathered promptly and fully
organized and are filed in permanent archives;
material from ships' observations is combined
with land stations' reports to prepare a continuuig
series of daily .synoptic weatlier charts for the
northern hemisphere which is of the greatest

182

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

practical value as a record of atmospheric events
affecting commerce and navigation, and also
of great value to meteorological science; investiga-
tions are conducted in the field of marine me-
teorology, and results of investigation by other
scientific workers are coordinated.

Equipment: Adequate office quarters and storage
space in Government-owned buildings at Wash-
ington, D. C, and at suitable Weather Bureau
field stations in the major ports of the United
States and its possessions.

Staff: Senior Meteorologist, Chief of Division, I. R.
Tannehill; Associate Meteorologist, Asst. Chief
of Division, W. E. Hurd; Associate Meteorologist,
Gardner Emmons; 2 senior scientific aids; 1
scientific aid; 2 assistant scientific aids; 1 senior
clerk; 1 assistant clerk.

(Personnel at field stations not specifically
assigned to the Marine Division, but cooperating
on a flexible basis.)

Provisions for visiting investigators: Good provision
for individual visiting investigators, but space
not available to accommodate \isiting workers
in groups of more than two or three.

Income: Costs covered as a part of Congressional
appropriations for the Weather Bureau ; no direct
income.

Provision for publication of results: Monthly sum-
maries of weather conditions over North Atlantic
and North Pacific oceans published regularly, and
special articles occasionally, in the Monthly
Weather Review. Compilations of averages, and
special articles and summaries published in the
Pilot Charts and in Sailing Directions and Naval
Air Pilots of the United States Hydrographic
Office.

Florida

Tortugas Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: This laboratory was built upon
Loggerhead Key, Tortugas, in June, 1904, the
site being occupied under a revocable license from
the U. S. Department of Commerce which main-
tains a lighthouse station on the Key. Work
was inaugurated and conducted under the direc-
torship of Doctor Alfred G. Mayor, who died in
June, 1922. Since then the Laboratory has been
open each summer, with Doctor W. H. Longley in
administrative charge, until his death March 10,
1937. Doctor D. H. Tennent is now in charge.
Many studies have been undertaken in continua-

tion of previous work, or in direct relation to
investigations otherwise supported by the Car-
negie Institution of Washington. The site was
chosen on account of the purity of the ocean water
which surrounds this group of seven small sandy
islands, the proximity of the Gulf Stream with
its abundant life, the presence of the richest coral
reefs of Florida, and the absence of local fisheries.
The Laboratory is equipped to afford excellent
facilities to competent investigators for the study
of many problems of the tropical ocean and its
life. Special expeditions have been undertaken
to Australia, Samoa, Fiji, Jamaica, Bermuda,
Porto Rico, Tobago, and the Bahamas. From
1917 until 1920, four expeditions to study the
reefs of Tutuila, American Samoa, were con-
ducted, comprising the first thorough study of any
high island of the Pacific in relation to its coral
reefs.
Location: On Loggerhead Key, The Dry Tortugas,

68 miles west of Key West, Florida.
Organization to which attached: Carnegie Institution

of Washington, Washington, D. C.
Purposes: Research only.

Scope of activities: Systematic zoology and botany;
experimental studies in ecology, heredity, re-
generation and growth ; intensive study of geology,
botany, zoology, and physiography of coral reefs;
chemistry and physics of the tropical ocean with
relation to life.
Equipment: 1 laboratory building; 1 laboratory
building, with annex (serving as aquarium);
1 yacht Anton Dohrn, 71 ft. long, twin-screw,
100 h.p., equipped to work to a depth of 600
fathoms; 2 launches, Velella and Darwin,
28 ft. long; service buildings, including kitchen,
dining-room and machine shop.
Staff: Officer in charge. Dr. D. H. Tennent, Bryn

Mawr, Pennsylvania.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Limited number
of investigators chosen for special .studies during
summer season.
Income: Grant of approximately $14,000 for main-
tenance and expenses for each season.
Provision for publication of results: Twenty-eight
volumes of "Papers from the Tortugas Laboratory
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington" have
so far been published, including 178 papers. The
Institution has also published a few special mono-
graphs and investigators have issued many reports
of their work in appropriate journals.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, FLORIDA, MAINE, MARYLAND 183

Maine
University of Maine Marine Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: Started by the Department of
Zoology at the University of Maine in 1931.

Location: Site of Old Federal Coaling Station,
Lamoine, Maine.

Organization to which attached: Uni\'ersity of Maine.

Pur-pose: The Laboratory opened with the .specific
purpo.se of offering good instructional work in
Marine Zoology and particularly in Marine In-
vertebrates.

Scope of activities: Offering courses in Marine In-
vertebrate Zoology.

Equipment: 65 acres of ground with two residence
buildings, a laboratory building which could
accommodate 48 students, equipped with electric
lights and running fresh and salt water, row boats,
motor boat, and a pier extending 300 feet into
the water and with a 400 foot frontage.

Staff: Prof. J. W. Murray, other members of the
University staff, and visiting instructors.

Income: Student tuition, room rental, sale of ma-
terials, and appropriation by University of Maine.

The Mount Desert Island Biological Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: In 1898 a laboratory was estab-
lished at South Harpswell, Maine, by J. S.
Kingsley of Tufts College. Reorganization of
the Laboratory as a scientific corporation under
the laws of the State of Maine with a board of ten
trustees and J. S. Kingsley as a director, took
place in 1913. In 1921 the Laboratory was
removed to Salsbury Cove on Mount Desert
Island, Maine, and designated the AVcir Mitchell
Station of the Harpswell Laboratory. In 1923,
the Corporation name was changed to Mount
Desert Island Biological Laboratory.

Location: Salsbury Cove on Mount Desert Island,
Maine.

Organization to which attached: A private corporation
(see above).

Purposes: "The purposes of said Corporation," as
provided in its certificate of organization, "are
to establish and maintain a laboratory or labora-
tories for biological study and investigation in
the State of Maine and to carry on other opera-
tions essential to and in furtherance of such aims
and purpo.ses, in accordance with the provisions
of Sections 1, 2, and 3, of Chapter 57 of the
Revised Statutes 1903 of the State of Maine."

Scope of activities: Research on marine biology and
on tis.sue culture of normal and cancerous cells.

Equipment: Ample equipment for ordinary labora-
tory work in marine biology, minimum equip-
ment for marine physiology and for biochemistry.

Staff: Director, William H. Cole, Rutgers Univer-
sity, New Brunswick, N. J. Technical and cleri-
cal: 1. Maintenance and operation: 1.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Qualified in-
vestigators may work in the laboratory upon
payment of $100 fee for the summer season or $40
per month. In special cases the fees may be
reduced or waived upon application.

Income: Sources: Corporation membership dues and
assessments. Annual gifts by non-members. No
endowment.

Amount: $12,000 in 1930; $10,000 in 1931;
$6,500 in 1932; $4,200 in 1933; $4,500 in 1934;
.$2,900 in 1935; $4,200 in 1936.

Provision for publication of results: Abstracts of
researches accomplished are published in the
Annual Bulletin (January) which is widely
distributed to laboratories and biologists, and
which is available on request.

Maryland
Chesapeake Biological Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: Developed from work of a staff
member of Department of Zoology, University of
Maryland, started in 1920. Broadened out to
accommodate a few workers and students in 1927
in temporary building. Present permanent brick
structure built in 1930.

Location: Solomons Island, Maryland, at the
confluence of the Patu.xent River and Chesapeake
Bay.

Organization to which attached: State of Maryland,
and governed by: Goucher College, Johns Hop-
kins University, University of Maryland, Wash-
ington College, Western Maryland College, Car-
negie Institution of Washington, and the
Maryland Conservation Commission.

Purposes: Statement from act creating the Labora-
tory: "To afford a research and study center
where facts tending toward a fuller appreciation
of nature may be gathered and disseminated."

(Scope of activities: (a) Hydrography of the Chesa-
peake Bay region; (b) Problems in experimental
biology; (c) Biological survey of the Chesapeake
region; (d) Practical problems dealing with
conservation of the more economic forms.

184

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Equipment: Standard laboratory equipment, in-
cluding boats, collecting devices, samplers (bot-
tom, plankton, water, etc.), chemical equipment
for four specialists, running water both fresh and
ocean, constant temperature baths, diving equip-
ment (hood and bentharium), photographic
facilities, pier, Weather Bureau station, micro-
scopes, etc.
Staff: Director: Dr. R. V. Truitt, University of
Maryland.
Marine Ecologist: Dr. C. L. Newcombe, Univer-
sity of Maryland.
Ichthyologist: Dr. Vadim D. Vladykov (Perma-
nent member of staff).
Chemist : Mr. William Home (Permanent member

of staff).
Diatomist: Mr. Paul S. Conger, Carnegie Insti-
tution of Washington.
Physiologist: Dr. Norman E. Phillips, University

of Maryland.
Secretary: Miss Erma Dixon.
Captain of Craft: Harvey Mister.
On the Executive Committee of the Laboratory

are:
Dr. David Robert.son, President, Goucher College.
Dr. H. C. Byrd, President, University of Mary-
land.
Dr. Gilbert W. Mead, President, Washington

College.
Dr. Fred Holloway, President, Western Maryland

College.
Dr. R. V. Truitt, Director {Ex officio).
Provision for visiting investigators: Space available

for six or eight investigators.
Income: State supported in.stitution with funds
that vary from time to time according to problems
presented. $8,500 is appropriated annually for
maintenance of Laboratory proper, while cooperat-
ing institutions support personnel.
Provision for 'publication of results: As yet, no pro-
vision has been made for publication of results
though prospects for funds with which to accom-
plish this end are good.

Massachusetts

Department of Oceanography at the Museum of

Comparative Zoology ('37)

History or origin: The department was organized

because of Alexander Agassiz's interest in the sea.

Location: Cambridge, Mass.

Organization to which attached: Harvard University.
Purposes: The care and study of marine collections,
instruction in oceanographic research.

Scope of activities: The main limitation is the fact

that no running salt water is available in the

laboratory.
Equipment: The very exceptional library of the

Museum is the most noteworthy aid to research.
Staff: Scientific: Dr. Henry B. Bigelow; C. Iselin.
Provisions for visiting investigators: There is limited

space for properly qualified investigators and

students.
Income: The Alexander Agassiz Fellowship in

Oceanography and other endowment.
Provision for publication of results: The Bulletin of

the Museum of Comparative Zoology.

North Atlantic Fishery Investigations, Section of the
U. S. Bureau of Fisheries ('37)

{Including the U. S. Fisheries Biological Station,
Woods Hole, Mass.)

History or origin: The North Atlantic Fishery
Investigations section was established within
the Division of Inquiry Respecting Foods Fishes
of the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries in 1929. The
U. S. Fisheries Biological Station at Woods Hole
was established by the U. S. Commission of Fish
and Fisheries in 1881.

Location: The investigating staff has laboratory
facilities at the Biological Laboratories of Harvard
University, Cambridge, Mass., and at the U. S.
Fisheries Biological Station, Woods Hole, Mass.

Organization to which attached: U. S. Bureau of
Fisheries.

Purposes: To determine the nature and causes of the
fluctuations in abundance of the marine food
fishes of the region and to formulate and recom-
mend measures for the perpetuation of the
fishery resources.

Scope of activities: Marine fisheries research related
to the purposes set forth above on the Atlantic
coast from Maine to Virginia, and confined mainly
to the waters lying within the continental slope.
It includes such related subjects as the physics and
chemistry of sea water, ocean circulation, pro-
duction and abundance of plankton, life histories
of fish, their migrations, et cetera.

Equipment: The Fisheries Biological Station at
Woods Hole has a 40 foot motorship for inshore
work and a gasoline launch. The laboratory is
provided with running sea water, gas, electricity,
compressed air, ordinary chemical equipment,
aquaria, tanks, and outside enclosures for holding
live fish.

Staff: Scientific: Oscar E. Sette, In charge, North

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— MARYLAND, MASSACHUSETTS

185

Atlantic Fishery Investigations and Director,
U. S. Fisheries Biological Station.
William C. Herrington, Biologist, in charge of

haddock investigations.
Robert A. Ne.sbit, Assistant Biologist, in charge

of shorefish investigations.
John R. Webster, Jr. Biologist, assisting in had-
dock investigations.
William C. Neville, Sr. Biological Aid, assisting

in shorefish investigations.
F. E. Firth, Assistant Biological Aid, assisting in

mackerel investigations.
Technical and clerical: 2.

Maintenance and operation (provided by the
hatchery staff at Woods Hole).
Provisions for visiting investigators: Laboratory
space and facilities are customarily provided for
approximately twenty visiting investigators during
the summer season at the Fisheries Biological
Station. Since the summer of 1931 such pro-
visions have not been made due to shortage of
funds.
Income: Source: U. S. Governmental appropriations.
Amount (exclusive of maintenance of biological
station and operation and mauitcnance of
vessels): Fiscal year ending June 30, 1932,
$58,450; fiscal year ending June 30, 1937,
$27,530.
Provision for publication of results: Results are pub-
lished in Bulletins of the Bureau of Fisheries and
Reports of the Bureau of Fisheries.

Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution- ('37)

History or origin: The Woods Hole Oceanographic
Institution, founded in 1930, is a research estab-
lishment supported by endowment made by the
Rockefeller Foundation, on recommendation of
the National Academy. While it is wholly
independent in organization, close association
with universities and other educational bodies is
assured through the personnel of its Board of
Trustees.

Location: Woods Hole, Massachusetts.

OrgaTiization to which attached: Independent.

Purposes: To encourage and carry on the study of
oceanography in all its branches.

Scope of activities: (1) Investigations in thermal
interchange between the sea surface and the
overlying air; (2) hydrology and dynamical
oceanography of the western North Atlantic and
adjacent waters; (3) chemistry of sea water; (4)

' Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, Annual An-
nouncement, fourth year, 1934-35.

marine bacteriology; (5) zooplankton and phyto-
plankton; (6) problems in physiology such as
those of zooplankton and of respiration; (7)
marine sediments. There is active cooperation
with United States Coast Guard, United States
Coast and Geodetic Survey, United States
Hydrographic Office, and various universities.
Equipment: 1 laboratory building, 4 floors, 136 x 50
feet.

Through the courtesy of the Marine Biological
Laboratory the staff and visitors to the Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution enjoy the full
facilities of the former's library, which makes
it unnecessary for the Institution to maintain
one of its own.

Research ship Atlantis is a steel ketch with
280 H.P. Diesel engine designed for a speed under
power alone of about eight knots and with a suffi-
cient spread of canvas to sail well. The cruising
radius under power alone is about 3,000 miles.
Her dimensions are 142 ft. length over all, 29 ft.
beam, 17^ ft. extreme draft, about 380 tons
displacement.

Gasoline launch Asterias, 40| ft. long, 12|
ft. broad, draft of 4 ft.; speed, nine knots; living
quarters for four men for short cruises.
Row boats are available.

The laboratory has its own dock with ample
depth of water for Atlantis and a large float
for small boats.

An automatic tide-gage was installed in 1932
by the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Staff: The staff consists of permanent scientific
members and of research associates appointed
for definite terms. The present personnel (1936)
is as follows:

Director, Henry B. Bigelow, Professor of

Zoology, Harvard University.
Junior Biologist, George L. Clarke, Tutor and

Instructor, Harvard University.
Research Associate in Physical Oceanography,
C. 0. Iselin, II, Assistant Curator of Oceano-
graphy, Museum of Comparative Zoology.
Research Associate in Oceanography, A. E.
Parr, Curator of the Bingham Oceanographic
Collection, Yale University.
Research Associate in Physical Chemistry,
Norris W. Rakestraw, Associate Professor
of Chemistry, Brown LTniversity.
Senior Biologist, Alfred C. Redfield, Professor

of Physiology, Harvard University.
Junior Marine Bacteriologist, C. E. Renn,
Harvard University.

186

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Oceanographer, C. G. Rossby, Professor of
Meteorology, Massachusetts Institute of
Technology.
Investigator in Oceanography, H. R. Seiwell.
Research Associate in Oceanography, Floyd M.
Soule, Senior Physical Oceanographer, United
States Coast Guard.
Research Associate in Submarine Geology,
Henry G. Stetson, Assistant Curator of
Paleontology, Museum of Comparative Zool-
ogy.
Marine Bacteriologist, Selman A. Waksman,
Microbiologist, New Jersey Agricultural Ex-
perimental Station.
Research Associate in Physical Oceanography,
E. E. Watson, Lecturer in Physics, Queen's
University.
Honorary Research Associate in Oceanography,

Captain Sir Hubert Wilkins.
Business Manager, William C. Schroeder.
Secretary and Administrative Assistant, Miss

Virginia B. Walker.
Superintendent of Buildings and Grounds,
William Schroeder.
Provisions for visiting investigators: A limited number
of visiting investigators, who desire either to
collaborate with members of the staff in the
regular station program or who are engaged in
their own researches in some branch of oceano-
graphic science, can be accommodated.

In special cases facilities are available for
visitors to carry out investigations at sea, from
Atlantis.

No formal course of instruction is offered at the
Institution.
Income: About $102,000 annually.
Provision for the publication of results: The serial
"Papers in Phy.sical Oceanography and Me-
teorology" supported jointly by the Institution
and by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
provides a medium for prompt publication of
contributions in these fields. Arrangements are
made for publication of investigations in Oceanic
Biology and Chemistry in whatever journal may
seem most appropriate in each particular instance.

New Hampshire

Isles of Shoals Marine Zoological
Laboratory ('37)

History or origin : Established liy the Department of
Zoology of the University of New Hampshire in
the summer of 1928.

Location: Isles of Shoals, located about 10 miles
off Portsmouth. Laboratory proper Ls situated
on Appledore Island.

Organization to which attached: University of New
Hampshire, Durham, N. H.

Purposes: To offer facilities for minor biological
investigations to pre-medical students and under-
graduate zoology majors; to offer more advanced
work in the field of oceanography and marine
ecology to a few select students working for a
Master's degree.

(Scope of activities: Chiefly along the following lines :
General invertebrate and vertebrate taxonomy
including minor problems and assigned topics for
investigation. Comparative anatomy, adapted
chiefly for pre-medical students with minor
problems assigned to more advanced students.
Research work in oceanography and marine
ecology.

Equipment: Approximately twenty-five acres includ-
ing practically all of Appledore Island; 5 well-built
houses formerly connected with the Appledore
Hotel ; dining hall fully equipped and operated by
the University of New Hampshire; 1 30-foot
cabin cruiser; 1 28-foot speed boat; 4 dories;
nets, dredges, and other necessary equipment.

Staff: Scientific: Director, Dean C. F. Jackson;
Director of Instruction, Dr. Norman K. Arnold;
Dr. C. D. Williams, Biological Education; Mr.
Robert Eadie, Anatomy; Miss Eleanor Sheehan,
Invertebrates; Miss Ruth E. Thompson; Addi-
tional laboratory assistants; Technical and cleri-
cal, 3; Maintenance and operation, 4.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No special
provisions. Visitors are welcome at all times
and will be provided with such facilities as are
available.

Income: Sources: Regular appropriations from the
University of New Hampshire.

Amount: (Difficult to determine since this is
an integral part of the Zoology Department of
the University of New Hampshire.) For operat-
ing expenses, $3,000.

Provision for publication of results: No special pro-
vision. Since the primary purpose is to instill
the spirit of research into undergraduates and
first year graduate students, no special avenue
for the publication of results has as yet been
provided.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS-MASS., NEW HAMPSHIRE, NEW YORK, NORTH CAROLINA 187

New Yohk

Department of Tropical Research of the New York
Zoological Society ('37)

History or origin: The department developed as an
outgrowth of the scientific work of the Depart-
ment of Ornithology of the New York Zoological
Society under the direction of Doctor William
Beebe. It was established under its present
name in January, 1916. Oceanographic work
has been stressed since 1925.
Location: Permanent Home Laboratory, New York
Zoological Park, New York City.
Permanent Field Laboratory, New Nonsuch,

St. Georges, Bermuda.
Field Residence, Bermuda Biological Station,
to which researches are accredited jointly with
the N. Y. Z. S.
Field Stations and Vessels: Arcturus Oceano-
graphic Expedition, 1925 (S. Y. Arcturus);
Hudison Gorge Expeditions, 1928 (S. T. Light
Horse); Nonsuch Lsland, Bermuda, 1929,
1930, 1931 (S. T. Gladisfen); Bermuda Bio-
logical Station, 1932, 1933, 1934, 1935 (S. T.
Freedom, S. T. Powerful, S. T. Gladisfen);
Templeton Crocker Expedition, Lower Cali-
fornia, 1936 (Y. Zaca).
Organization to which attached: New York Zoological

Society.
Purposes: The purpose of the Department is to
provide means for investigating the animal life
of the deep sea. Li this respect it Ls the policy
of the Department to confine its activities in the
main to a limited section of the ocean, in.stead of
undertaking lengthy expeditions with wide-
spread stations. Thus for seven years all work
has been confined to the animal life of a circle of
ocean eight miles in diameter, situated five miles
south of Bermuda.
Scope of activities: The scope of activities Ls confined
mainly to the ecological aspects of the oceanic
fauna, and particularly the life-hLstories of deep-
sea fish. Observations upon the living organism
is especially stressed, and this has given rise to
the use of the Diving Helmet and the Bathy.sphere
as means of investigating the life of deep-sea
anunals. Little attention has been paid to the
physical side of oceanography, owing to the
intensive work in this field of other institutions.
Equipment: The home laboratory is completely
equipped with a large library and necessary
instruments for the accomplishment of biological
research. A considerable amount of this material

is transferred to the field laboratory when it is

in operation, and additional field equipment is

available for soimding and for dredging, trawling,

and tow-netting to depths of three miles. The

Bathysphere and its machinery is also used for

observations to depths of one half mOe.

Sta.jf: Scientific: Dr. William Beebe, Director;

Mr. John Tee-Van, General Associate; Dr.

William K. Gregory, Scientific A.ssociate; Miss

Gloria Hollister, Re.search Associate; Miss

Jocelyn Crane, Laboratory Associate.

Technical and clerical: Varies considerably with

each expedition; all clerical details are taken

care of by the clerical offices of the New York

Zoological Society.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Varies according

to expedition.
Income: Source: Donations from private individuals
and from the Board of Directors of the Zoologi-
cal Society.
Amount: Has varied in the past from $3,000.00
to $20,000.00, annually, not including the
salaries of the staff.
Provision for publication of results: All technical
publications are published in "Zoologica," the
Scientific Contributions of the New York Zoologi-
cal Society. Less technical matter finds its place
in the Bulletin of the Society, as well as many
other publications, and in book form.

North Carolina
United States Fisheries Biological Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: The United States Bureau of
Fisheries found its origin in a joint resolution
passed by the Senate and House of Representa-
tives in 1871. Beaufort, N. C, was found to be a
place especially well suited for the study of the
marine fauna and flora. In 1899 the first fisheries
laboratory became established in a rented build-
ing. In 1900 Congress authorized the erection
of a biological station which was completed and
opened to investigators for the first time in 1902.

Location: Piver's Island, Beaufort, North Carolina.

Organization to which attached: Department of
Commerce, Bureau of Fisheries, Division of
Scientific Inquiry.

Purposes: Investigations of marine biology, espe-
cially in relation to species of fish and shellfish
of commercial importance.

Scope of activities: Chief investigations at present
dealing with the biology and culture of the oyster
and diamond-back terrapin.

188

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Equipment: Scientific equipment, boats both motor

and rowboats, laboratory, library, mess hall, and

dormitory.
Staff: Scientific: Director, Dr. Herbert F. Prytherch.

Technical and clerical: 1. Maintenance and

operation: 5.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Dormitory rooms

and laboratory facilities.
Income: Source: United States Government.

Amount: $13,000.
Provision for publication of results: United State.s

Government Printing Office.

Rhode Island

Marine Biological Laboratory of Rhode Island
State College ('37)

History or origin: Made possible by an appropriation
of $8,000.00 in December, 1936, for the construc-
tion and equipping of a laboratory for the study
of Narragansett Bay and adjacent waters.
Location: At Fort Kearney (Old South Ferry).
The War Department has granted the use of land
and a dock.
Organization to which attached: It will function as a
division of the Department of Zoology of Rhode
Island State College.
Purposes: Scientific investigation of marine problems

in Rhode Island waters.
Scope of activities: There will be no restriction in the
scope of the work which can be carried on, so
long as it is marine in nature.

At the present time two programs are being

carried on: (a) A study of the biology of the

zooplankton population, (b) A continuation

of an investigation on the biology of the

starfi.sh in Narragansett Bay — carried on

during the past year under the auspices of

the Federal Bureau of Fisheries and the State

Department of Fish and Game.

Equipment: The laboratory will be fully equipped

for oceanographic work in coastal waters. The

present appropriation provides $1,300.00 for field

gear and $810.00 for laboratory equipment.

$850.00 is available for vessel hire (three months).

Staff: The staff will consist of a director (Charles J.

Fish) and an investigator who will receive a salary.

In addition an assistant will be appointed at a

salary of $80.00 per month during the summer

period. This staff will be supplemented from

time to time by voluntary investigators.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The laboratory

will have three private rooms and space for
twelve investigators in the central room. Visiting
investigators will be welcome to utihze available
facilities but must provide any special equipment
needed.

Income: The work will be maintained by annual
state appropriation by the state to the college.
An appropriation of $5,000.00 for the coming fiscal
year is expected.

Provision for publication of results: As yet no provi-
sion has been made for publication of results.

EASTERN SOUTH AMERICA

Various attempts to procure information on insti-
tutions engaged in oceanographic work in the Latin
American countries met with very little success.
A reply was received only from the Brazilian Servigo
de Caga e Pesca and from Mexico. Therefore, for
other countries, dependence had to be placed on the
Year-Book for 1937 of the International Hydro-
graphic Bureau and such notes as could be found in
publications. Apparently there are hydrographic
services under the Ministries of War and Marine in
Colombia, Cuba, and Venezuela, but, except ad-
dresses in the Year-Book above mentioned, no in-
formation is available on them.

The article referred to below' discusses the pro-
visions for fisheries investigations in the Americas
and emphasizes the paucity of such investigations in
Latin America. Only three countries are mentioned
in this connection, Brazil, Uraguay, and Mexico. A
statement on Brazil of later date than Professor
Beltran's article is given on a subsequent page of
this catalogue and there is also a note on Argentina.
Two paragraphs (p. 12) read as follows:

"En el Uruguay existe establecido un Instituto de
Pesca que, dedicado fundamentalmente a investiga-
ciones cientlficas, se ocupa tambifen de actividades
industriales y comerciales, tales como la fabricaci6n de
hielo (para establecimientos del Gobierno y venta a
particulares) y el arrendamiento de cdmaras frigorificas.

"En Mfexico, el autor de este artlculo logr6 estableoer,
dependiente de la Secretarid de Agricultura y Fomento
(Direcci6n de Estudios Biol6gicos), la Estaci6n de
Biologia Marina del Golfo que, bajo su direcci6n, fun-
cion6 en el puerto de Veracruz en los ailos de 1926-27,
siendo descontinuada despufis por nece.sidades de cardc-
ter econ6mico, cuando prometia los mds halagadorea
frutos de sus actividades."

' Beltrdn, Enrique, Estudios de biologia marina y pesca
en las Americas: Uni6n Panamer., ser. Fin., Indust., y
Comer., Bol. No. 73, pp. 12, Marzo, 1933.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS-NORTH CAROLINA, RHODE ISLAND, ARGENTINE, BRAZIL 189

Argentine

Servicio Hidrografico ('37)

Location: Calle Paraguay, 2137, Buenos-Aires.
Staff: Hydrographer, Capitan Raul G. Aliaga.
Head of Hydrographic Section, Ingeniero Hi-

drografo Miguel Rodriguez.
Head of Section of Lights, Teniente de Navio (R)

Angel Acevedo.
Head of Naval Observatory, Teniente de Navio

(R) Carlos Braida.
Head of Navigation Section, Teniente de Navio

(R) Enrique Monti.
Chief of Technical Division, Teniente de Fragata
(R) Enrique Monti.
Equipment:

SDRVETINO TESSEIfi DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

San Lufs 640 11 53

San Juan 640 2 17

Alferez Mackinlay 800 8 55

Division de Pesca ('34)

Location: Continuacion de la Calle Brasil, Buenos

Aires.
Organization to which attached: Ministerio de Agri-

cultura.
Staff: Director, Dr. Raul Sorcaburu.

Brazil
Directoria de Navegagao, fitats-Unis du Bresil ('37)

Location: Ilha Fiscal, Rio de Janeiro.

Staff: Director General of Navigation, Vice-Al-

mirante Raiil Tavares.
Head of Division of Administration, Capitao de

Fragata Marcelino Jos4 Jorge.
Head of Division of Hydrography, Capitao

Tenente Ary dos Santos Rongel.
Head of Division of Lights, Capitao de Corveta

Carlos Penna Botto.
Head of 1st Section of Division of Hydrography,

Capitao Tenente Fernando Saldanho da Gama

Frota.
Head of 2nd and 3rd Sections of Division of Hy-
drography, Capitao Tenente Mario Camara

Hoffmann.
Head of 4th Section of Division of Hydrography,

Capitao Tenente Paulo Antonio Telles Bardy.
Equipmcftt:

BURVEYINQ TEBSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CHEW

Rio Branco 750 7 79

Tenente Lahmeter 320 2 35

Jose Bonifacio 2,080 8 120

Servifo de Cafa e Pesca (Service of Hunting
and Fishing)^ ('35)

History: In 1912 an attempt was made to establish
a Directorate of Hunting and Fishing, in the
Ministry of Agriculture but the endeavor was
not successful. In 1923 the service was placed
under the Ministry of the Marine and made sub-
ordinate to the Directorate of the Merchant
Marine. This arrangement for various and
obvious reasons was unsatisfactory. As a result
of further consideration of the subject, by a
decree of March 8, 1933, a Servigo de Caga e
Pesca was established under the National De-
partment of Animal Production of the Ministry
of Agriculture.

Location: Rio de Janeiro.

Organization to which attached: As stated above,
Ministry of Agriculture, National Department
of Animal Production. There is a Conselho de
Caga e Pesca (Council of Hunting and Fishing)
composed as follows: One representative of
Servigo de Caga e Pesca, one representative of
fishermen, one representative of hunters, one
representative of vessels engaged in transporting
fish, one representative of the Navy, one repre-
sentative of the National Museum, four members
representing special subjects.

Purposes and scope of activities: There are under the
Service three sections:

1. Secgao de Criagao (Section of Propagation).
This section has charge of pisciculture, of rearing
molluscs, and of parks for game refuges.

2. Secgao de Investigagoes (Section of Investi-
gations). The functions of this section are to
study the biology of forest animals, hydrobiology,
biochemistry, plankton including micro-plankton,
the nutrition of fishes; to promote studies of the
technology of fishes and of their preservation and
of their subproducts. It has charge of zoological
parks and aquaria, and of public instruction,
particularly of hunters and fi.shermen.

3. Secgao de Industrias (Section of Industries).
Besides superintending the enforcement of the
laws governing hunting and fishing and studying
various economic problems, it has as its duties the
study and application of modern processes of

* The statement regarding this service is based upon two
publications as follows:

Codigo de CaQa e Pesca (approvado pelo decreto No. 23,
672, de 2 de Janeiro de 1934), Min. da Agricult., De-
part. Nac. da Prod. Anim., Serv. de Caija e Pesca, Rio
de Janeiro, 1934.

Actividades do Service de Caga e Pesca de Margo de
1933 a Margo de 1934., Ibid., 1934.

190

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

preserving fish, and the study and appHcation of
processes for utilizing fish products, such as oil,
meal, condiments, cakes, etc.

The Service has a museum, and it offers in-
struction in several subjects, including navigation.
For the preparation of bathymetric charts and
oceanographic studies, the Service has an arrange-
ment with the Ministry of Marine.

Equipment: There is an aquarium and laboratories
but no information on them is available.

Stajf: Director: Dr. Joao Moreira da Rocha; Ascanio
Faria; Genneville Hermsdorff. Full information
on the staff is not available.

Income: From the State. Amount not known.

Provisions for publication of results: Besides special
publications, such as those cited at the beginning
of this statement, the Service publishes papers
in the Revisto do Departamento Nacional da
Produ^ao Animal.

Uruguay
Institute de Pesca'^ ('32)

Location: Uruguay 868, Montevideo.

' Carlevaro, R6mulo, El Institute de Pesca del Uraguay,
sus orientaciones, su actividad, su.s perspectivas, Consejo
Oceanographieo Ibero-Americano Revista, Ano 3, No. 1,
pp. 39-43, Feb.; 1932; Ibid., No. 2 pp. 88-89.

Equipment: A fisheries station within the city limits

of Montevideo.
Staff: Director, Dr. Romulo Carlevaro.

Servicio Hidrografico de la Marina (Hydrographic
Office of the Navy) ('37)

Location: Sarandi 122, Montevideo.
Staff: Head of Service and Inspector of Navigation,
Capitan de Fragata Agrimensor Hector Luisi.

Head of Section A: Secretariat, Detail and Ad-
ministration, Capitan de Corbeta Julio A.
Cigliutti.

Head of Section B: Astronomy and Navigation,
Capitan de Corbeta Bervano Bianchi.

Head of Section C: Hydrography, Capitan de
Fragata Julio F. Lamarthee.

Equipment:

8URVET1NO VESSELS

Capitan Miranda.

DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CHEW

527

INSTITUTIONS, EAST SIDE OF THE PACIFIC

OCEAN

CANADA
Pacific Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1908.

Location: Nanaimo, east coast of Vancouver Island,

British Columbia.
Organization to which attached: Biological Board of

Canada.
Purposes: Research.
Scope of activities: Scientific investigation of marine

and fresh-water resources.
Equipment: 2 laboratories, biological and chemical,
with general equipment; 1 library; 1 60-foot
motor boat equipped for oceanographical investi-
gations; several smaller boats.
Staff: Scientific: Dr. W. A. Clemens, Director.
Dr. R. E. Foerster, Chief Biologist, in charge of

sockeye salmon propagation investigations.
Dr. J. L. Hart, Associate biologist for pilchard-
herring investigations.
Dr. A. L. Pritchard, Assistant biologist for salmon

investigations.
Dr. C. R. Elsey, Assistant biologist for shellfish

investigations.
Dr. C. M. Mottley, Scientific assistant for trout

investigations.
Dr. A. L. Tester, Scientific assistant in herring

investigations.
Dr. W. E. Ricker, Scientific assistant in salmon

investigations.
Mr. J. P. Tully, Scientific assistant for oceano-
graphical and general chemical investigations.
Sea.sonal: 5 to 6 appointments.
Technical and clerical: 3 appointments.
Maintenance and operation : 8 appointments.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Accommodation
provided during the summer for 10 to 15 members
of the staff and post-graduate students of Ca-
nadian Universities.
Incoine: Source: Grant from the Government of the
Dominion of Canada.
Amount: Approximately $50,000.
Provision for the publication of results: (a) Journal
of the Biological Board of Canada; (b) Bulletins —
Biological Board of Canada.

Pacific Fisheries Experimental Station ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1926.
Location: Prince Rupert, British Columbia.
Organization to which attached: Biological Board of

Canada.
Purposes: Research and source of information on
marine products for fishing and allied industries.
Scope of activities: Scientific investigation of the
handling, curing, manufacture, and utilization
of marine products and by-products.
Equipment: 2 buildings containing chemical, bio-
chemical, bacteriological, and low-temperature
research laboratories, all well-equipped ; 2 libraries.
Staff: Director, Dr. N. M. Carter.

Dr. H. N. Brocklesby, Associate chemist for fish

oil investigations.
Mr. R. H. Bedford, Associate bacteriologist.
Mr. 0. F. Denstedt, Assistant chemist (on leave

of absence 1936-37).
Dr. L. I. Pugslej', Assistant biochemist in vitamin

investigations (temporary).
Dr. W. A. Riddell, Assistant chemist in investiga-
tion of fishery products.
Mr. 0. C. Young, Assistant research engineer for

refrigeration investigations.
Mr. B. E. Bailc}', Scientific assistant in biochemi-
cal investigations (on leave of absence, 1937).
Seasonal: 1 to 2 appointments.
Technical and clerical: 4 appointments.
Maintenance and operation: 2 appointments.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Accommodation
for one or two temporary assistants under special
circumstances.
hicome: Source: Grant from the Go\^ernment of the
Dominion of Canada.
Amount: $30,000 to $35,000 per annum.
Provision for the publication of results:
Journal of the Biological Board of Canada (scien-
tific).
Bulletins of the Biological Board of Canada

(semi-technical).
Progress Reports of Pacific Stations of Biological

Board of Canada (popular).
Cooperative facihties for publication in Canadian
Journal of Research.

191

192

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

UNITED STATES

California

Kerckhofif Marine Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: Purchased in 1931 with funds
furnished by Mr. WilUam G. Kerckhoff. Offi-
cially opened in September, 1932.

Location: Near the entrance, on the east side of
Newport Bay, CaHfornia. Postoffice address:
Corona Del Mar, California.

Organization to which attached: California Institute
of Technology, Pasadena, California, under the
Department of Biological Sciences.

Purposes: Research, mainly to supplement that
done at the Institute.

(Scope of activities: Experimental embryology, physi-
ology, marine ecology, biophysics, chemistry. A
few of the more advanced undergraduate students
and graduate students who are able to work more
or less independently.

Equipment: Two-story, concrete, Spanish type
building. Three large main laboratories, five
small laboratory rooms, dark room, boat room,
and shop. Salt water system and aquaria.
24-ft. motor boat with dredging equipment.

Staff: Dr. T. H. Morgan, Head of the Department
of Biology; G. E. MacGinitie, Asst. Professor of
Biology, Director; Members of the staff, California
Institute of Technology.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Some investiga-
tors can be accommodated.

Income: Provided from the general research funds
of the Department of Biology.

Provision for the publication of results: The results of
researches are published in appropriate scientific
periodicals.

Pomona College Marine Laboratory and
Summer School ('37)

History or origin: Summer courses under C. F.
Baker, 1911-1913. Building erected 1913 and
work under W. A. Hilton, 1913 to present.

Location: Laguna Beach, Orange County, California,
on the Coast Boulevard.

Organization to which attached: Pomona College.

Purposes: Summer school for undergraduates and a
few graduates, usually six weeks.

Scope of activities: Teaching undergraduates; ex-
ploration of littoral fauna; work with a few
graduates along biological lines.

Equipment: 1 frame building, with several private
rooms and three general laboratories. Equipment
for limited field work and for laboratory work.

Staff: Director, Prof. W. A. Hilton; different teach-
ers from other institutions.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Private rooms
for visitors.

Income: The only income is from tuition or rental
of research rooms. From $1,000 to $2,000, most
of which goes for salaries.

Provision for the publication of results: Journal of
Entomology and Zoology and other journals.

Scripps Institution of Oceanography ('37)

History or origin: The Scripps Institution grew out
of an endeavor begun in 1891 by Dr. Wilham E.
Ritter to find a suitable place for the establish-
ment of a marine biological station in connection
with the Department of Zoology of the University
of California. These efforts resulted in the
erection of a marine biological station about 21
miles north of the village of La Jolla through
funds contributed by Miss Ellen B. Scripps and
Mr. E. W. Scripps. The first building, the
"George H. Scripps Memorial Marine Biological
Laboratory," was erected in 1909, and funds for a
boat, the Alexander Agassiz, and its equipment
were donated by Miss Scripps and Mr. Scripps.
In 1912 the laboratory was taken over by the
University of California under the name of the
"Scripps Institution for Biological Research."
In 1916 the museum-library building and the
Institution's pier were erected. Before Doctor
Ritter retired from the directorship of the Insti-
tution, it was decided bj' the administrative
officers of the University of California and
members of the Scripps family to convert the
"Scripps Institution for Biological Research"
into one for oceanographic research. Dr. T.
Wayland Vaughan assumed the directorship on
the first of February, 1924, and the name of the
Institution was changed to "Scripps Institution
of Oceanography," in October, 1925. The In-
stitution acquired the boat Scripps, which on
November 13, 1936, was destroyed by explosion
and fire. An additional and larger laboratory,
"Ritter Hall," was erected in 1931, and extensive
improvements were made in the first laboratory
building, in the library, and on the grounds.
In the spring of 1937, Mr. R. P. Scripps purchased
a larger vessel for the Institution (see "Equip-
ment" below). The regular income of the
Institution was increased from about $44,000
per year in 1924 to about $90,000 in 1936. On

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— CALIFORNIA

193

September 1, 1936, Doctor Vaughan was suc-
ceeded as Director by Dr. H. U. Svcrdrup.
Location: On the sea front, about 2\ miles north
of the center of the village of La Jolla, and about
16 miles north of the city of San Diego.
Organization to which attached: University of Cali-
fornia, of which the Institution is a department.
Purposes: Major, research; also, general instruction
in oceanography, and special instruction in
different fields.
Scope of activities: Research and instruction in
dynamical oceanography and marine meteorology;
chemistry of sea water; biology, under which
bacteriology, phyto- and zooplankton, foramini-
fera, biology of fishes, and physiology of marine
organisms with reference to their environment,
are included; marine bottom deposits.
Equipment: The laboratory facDities provide for
researches of all kinds indicated by the "scope of
activities" and the specialties of the members of
the staff. In Ritter Hall there are three constant
temperature rooms.

1 laboratory building (Geo. H. Scripps Labora-
tory), 2 floors, 75 x 48 ft.
1 laboratory building (Ritter Hall), 3 floors,

100 X 46 ft.
1 museum-library building, 2 floors and about a

I basement, 60 x 60 ft.
Library, more than 14,500 volumes, 30,000

reprints.
1 wooden aquarium building, 24 x 48 ft., 18

tanks.
1 re-enforced concrete pier, 1,000 ft. long, 20
ft. wide (permanent tidal, hydrographic,
and meteorological station).
1 re-enforced concrete .salt-water storage tank,

capacity 60,000 gallons.
24 wooden cottage residences.
Several service buUdings and garages (tem-
porary structures).
Automatic tide-gage installed at the end of the
Institution's pier by U. S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey.
Anderson- Wood seismograph installed in the
basement of the Museum-Library building
by the Carnegie Institution's Committee on
Seismology.
1 research vessel, M. F. Maury, recently pur-
cha.sed through the generosity of Mr. R. P.
Scripps, a schooner 104 feet long, length on
the water line 86 feet, beam 20.5 feet, equipped

with a Winton diesel engine of 175 h.p., and
under power has a speed of nine knots per hour.
The boat is equipped for any of the usual
kinds of oceanographic work and can make
voyages of any desired length.
Besides utilizing its own facilities for research
the Institution receives assistance from the
United States Navy, the United States Coast
and Geodetic Survey, the United States
Bureau of Lighthouses, the California FLsh
and Game Commission, a number of com-
mercial shipping companies, and other or-
ganizations.
Staff: Dr. Harald U. Sverdrup, Director (physical
oceanography, meteorology).
Dr. F. B. Sumner (biology of fishes).
Dr. G. F. McEwen (physical oceanography,

meteorology).
Prof. W. E. Allen (phytoplankton).
Dr. E. G. Moberg (chemical oceanography).
Dr. D. L. Fox (physiology of marine organisms).
Dr. M. W. Johnson (zooplankton).
Dr. C. E. ZoBell (marine microbiology).
Dr. R. H. Fleming (physical and chemical

oceanography).
Dr. Roger Revelle (physical oceanography and

marine bottom deposits).
Dr. E. E. Cupp (phytoplankton).
Mr. P. S. Barnhart (fishes), Curator of biological

collections.
Mr. S. W. Chambers, Associate in physical

oceanography.
Research assistants, number variable.

5 technical and clerical assistants.

6 maintenance and operation workers.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Between 20 and '

25, in addition to the Institution's staff, can be
accommodated.

l7ico7ne: Regular annual, nearly $95,000, about one-
half from the State of California and one-half
from the Scripps family. In addition, special
contributions of variable amount.

Provisions for publication: The University of Cali-
fornia publishes a series entitled, "Bulletin of
the Scripps Institution of Oceanography of the
L^niversity of California, Technical Series," of
which three volumes have been published, and
for which a number of other papers have been
submitted. The members of the staff also publish
papers in various scientific periodicals.

194

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Marine Biological Station, University of Southern
California ('37)

Location: Since the burning of the Marine Station
building in 1921, the station has been located at
University Park, and since 1928 when a new
Science Building was completed has been housed
in especially prepared rooms on the fourth floor
of that building. This is some twelve miles from
the sea-coast, and located just off the Exposition
Park area.

Organization to tohich attached: The Marine Station
and its facilities are maintained as an integral
part of the Department of Biology at the Uni-
versity of Southern California.

Purposes: Major purpose — research.

Courses are offered on the graduate level
in marine plant biology, marine survey, animal
biology, and marine research. These courses
assume major work in the fields of either Zoology
or Botany.

/Scope of activities: Since its establishment in 1911
trawling and dredging work has been carried on
almost continuously with emphasis upon ecological
relationships of marine forms in the southern
California waters. Some investigations have
been on the classification of fishes, the study of
plankton, foraminifera, and physiological rela-
tionships of marine organisms. Certain phases of
oceanography have been in progress in later years
with an attempt to gather some data on the tem-
perature fluctuations and variations in the
physico-chemical composition of the sea water.

Equipment: Laboratory facilities on the fourth floor
of the new Science Hall include: Office space for
the permanent members of the staff; small re-
search rooms for independent investigation,
together with several cubicles for graduate
students under supervision; a small library;
desks equipped with gas, electricity, compressed
air; a closed system of sea water aquaria of about
500 gallons capacity; a large preparation room for
pre.serving and taking care of marine collections;
ample space and locker material for filing materials
in proper phylogenetic order.

Staff: Director, Dr. Francis M. Baldwin.

Full-time members of the teaching staff. Depart-
ments of Botany and Zoology, University of
Southern California, who contribute to investi-
gation and direction of research work as time
permits.
Part-time: skipper of the launch, first mate.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Not more than

10 at a time, limited to trained investigators
working on their own problems, or under the
guidance of resident members of the staff.

Income: Funds from the University of California.

Provisiojis for tlie publication of results: None re-
ported.

Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University ('37)

History or origin: Four names are inseparably
associated with the founding of the Hopkins
Seaside Laboratory in 1892: Timothy Hopkins,
David Starr Jordan, Charles Henry Gilbert,
Oliver Peebles Jenkins. Back of the obvious
desirability of a marine biological laboratory in
connection with a new university of great promise
was the example of Anton Dohrn's Naples labora-
tory which had greatly impressed Mr. Hopkins,
and the Penikese experiment of Louis Agassiz
in which Dr. Jordan played a part at a formative
stage of his career.

After a careful examination of various sites
along the coast. Pacific Grove, upon the southern
side of Monterey Bay, was selected as combining
the most desirable features. Through the gener-
ous cooperation of Mr. Timothy Hopkins and the
Pacific Improvement Company a suitable site
and a sum of money sufficient to erect the first
building were donated. A plain two-story frame
structure, twenty-five by sixty feet in ground
dimensions, was erected on Point Anion, a low-
rocky headland, and the first session of the new
laboratory was held during the simamer of 1892.
In recognition of the active interest and generosity
of Mr. Hopkins, the station was named the Hop-
kins Seaside Laboratory. Funds for the purchase
of books and equipment were furnished by Mr.
Hopkins from time to time, and in 1893 he erected
a second building to provide more adequately for
the needs of the growing institution.

During the first twenty-five years of its existence
the laboratory, while nominally a part of the
University, and freely using its library and
apparatus, was dependent for its upkeep and
extension chiefly upon student fees and private
gifts, the latter mainly through the constant
sympathetic interest of Mr. Hopkins. Despite
these limitations it offered its facilities to many
investigators and yearly to many students, and
contributed materially to the solution of biological
problems on the Pacific Coast.

With the passing years it became increasingly

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— CALIFORNIA

195

evident that the site upon Point Anion was inade-
quate to the needs of the laboratories.

In 1916 an exchange was effected with the
Pacific Improvement Company through which a
new location was secured, nearly five acres in
extent and consisting of the main portion of
Cabrillo Point, situated a half-mile eastward of
the old site. To this, two and one-half acres
were added by purchase in 1921, and about three
and one-half acres in 1923. The new situation
insures complete control of the coast line of the
point, including a sheltered landing-place and
harbor for boats of considerable size, and provides
room for future expansion. Upon this site the
first building of the new Station was erected
during 1917.

In recognition of the aid rendered by Mr.
Hopkins during the whole life of the laboratory,
the Board of Trustees of the University changed
the name, October 26, 1917, to the Hopkins
Marine Station of Stanford University.

The construction of a second unit of the Sta-
tion, known as the Jacques Loeb Laboratory,
was completed in July, 1928.

After the construction of the Jacques Loeb
Laboratory, devoted to experimental biology, it
became necessary to designate the original build-
ing. Accordingly, in January 1929, the Board
of Trustees of the University named it the
Alexander Agassiz Laboratory, in honor of
America's leading oceanographer.'

Location: On southern shore of Monterey Bay,
California (within corporate limits of town of
Pacific Grove).

Organization to which attached: Stanford University,
of which the Institution is a department.

Purposes: Research in biology and oceanography.
Instruction: undergraduate courses and graduate
work in comparative zoology, comparative em-
bryology, comparative physiology, microbiology,
experimental biology, physico-chemical biology,
physiology of marine plants, morphology of
marine plants, oceanography, shore ecology.

Scope of activities: Researches in dynamical oceanog-
raphy, chemistry of sea water; oceanic biology
(ecology); shore ecology; comparative marine
zoology (including invertebrates and fishes);
embryology of marine organisms; experimental
embryology; protoplasm; microbiology; physiol-

' The foregoing information has been abstracted from
"General Statement" regarding the Hopkins Marine Sta-
tion published by Stanford University.

ogy of marine organisms; physico-chemical prob-
lems in marine biology (restricted fields); marine

algae.
Equipment: 1 laboratory building (Alexander Agassiz

Laboratory) of three floors, 40 x 80 feet.

1 laboratory building (Jacques Loeb Labora-
tory) consisting of a two-story central portion

with two flanking wings of one story, enclosing

three sides of a court, the over-all dimensions,

95 X 152 feet.

1 marine shop and boiler hou.se; one janitor's

cottage.

In cooperation with the California State Fish

and Game Commission, the use of one of three

different sea-going boats for oceanographic work.
Small library and loan service on Stanford

Library.
Staff: Director, Dr. W. K. Fisher, Zoologist.

Associate Director, Dr. C. V. Taylor, Biologist.

Prof. L. R. Blinks, Plant Physiologist.

Prof. G. M. Smith, Botanist.

Prof. C. B. van Niel, Microbiologist.

Prof. Tage Skogsberg, Marine Biologist, Oceanog-
rapher.

Prof. D. M. Whitaker, Biologist.

Prof. F. W. Weymouth, Physiologist.

Dr. R. L. Bolin, Ichthyologist, Ecologist.

.Prof. A. R. Moore, Lecturer, Physiologist.

Dr. Austin Phelps, Microbiologist, Oceanographer.

1 research assistant (varies 1-3).

Clerical and technical assistants: 4.

Visiting members from Stanford and one from
University of Oregon: 3-4.
Provision for visiting investigators: About 10 can be

accommodated in addition to visiting members

of the staff, the number depending on the nature

of the research.
Income: Regular for year 1936-37, $26,500.00.
Provisions for the publication of results: None.

California State Fisheries Laboratory ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1917.

Location: On Terminal Island, near San Pedro, Los
Angeles County, Calif.

Organization to which attached: Bureau of Commercial
Fisheries, Division of Fish and Game of Cali-
fornia, Department of Natural Resources.

Purposes: Research for the Bureau of Commercial
Fisheries.

Scope of activities: Research in the abundance and
changes in the supply of fishes used commercially
and the marine fishes caught by sportsmen;

196

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

condition of the fisheries; life histories of the
species; catch statistics for both commercial and
marine sport species with other compOations of
fish and game data for the State; effects of legis-
lation and proposal of needed protective measures;
various cooperative enterprises with Stanford
University, University of California, and other
agencies.

Equipment: Two laboratory buildings, each of two
stories; library. Half-time use of two patrol
boats, 85 and 60 feet in length.

Staff: W. L. Scofield, Supervisor.

Frances N. Clark, Senior Fisheries Researcher.
G. Houghton Clark, Senior Fisheries Researcher.
Geraldine Conner, Fisheries Statistician.
Richard S. Croker, Senior Fisheries Researcher.
Donald H. Fry, Jr., Senior Fisheries Researcher.
Harry C. Godsil, Senior Fisheries Researcher.
S. Ross Hatton, Junior Fisheries Researcher.
John F. Janssen, Jr., Junior Fisheries Researcher.
Julius B. Phillips, Senior Fisheries Researcher.
Phil M. Roedel, Junior Fisheries Researcher.
Richard B. Tibby, Junior Fisheries Researcher.
10 clerical.

Part time use of patrol officers, varying from 6
to 20.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Accommodation
for 3.

Income: Expenditures of laboratory alone are about
$40,000.00, exclusive of patrol boat maintenance,
statistical and printing costs, and other expendi-
tures cared for by administrative and patrol
branches of the Bureau of Commercial Fisheries.
The Division of Fish and Game is self-supporting,
financed from fisheries privilege tax, licenses and
fees.

Provision for the publication of results: Two publica-
tions of the California Division of Fish and
Game: (1) a series of "Fish Bulletins", and (2)
a quarterly magazine, "California Fish and
Game"; and occasional articles in other journals.

Oregon
Coos Bay Marine Station ('37)
{In process of organization)
Location: Located on a projecting promontory at
the mouth of Coos Bay inlet on the land assigned
to the University of Oregon as a location for such
station by a special act of Congress setting aside a
certain portion, about eighty acres, of a military
reserve held by the government for a number of
years. The site is adjacent to the open sea on

one side and the still water of Coos Bay on the
other. Along the ocean side of the promontory
are extensive reefs replete with marine life and
other material for the study of scientific aspects
of the subject.

Organization to which attached: The station will be
attached to the University of Oregon, the Univer-
sity of Oregon Medical School, and the Oregon
State Agricultural College. It will be under the
direct supervision of a joint board of the Oregon
State System of Higher Education.

Purposes: The major purpose will be to facilitate
research on all scientific aspects of marine phe-
nomena. With the function of research, however,
will be combined instruction in various sciences,
especially during summer session.

(Scope of activities: The activities will extend to all
phases of scientific investigations which concern
themselves with marine biology either in the field
of plant life or animal life. Opportunities will be
given for research in geology and geography,
shore life, paleobotany, and the study of marine
organisms with reference especially to an under-
standing of the type of marine life in the Central
Oregon coast region.

Equipment: It is impossible to describe the equip-
ment at the present time since only tentative
plans have been made for the projected plan.
The present plan contemplates a construction of a
central laboratory building and adjacent resi-
dences, heating plant, and other structures
necessary for carrying on the work.

Staff: Since the work of the marine station has
not been organized, it is impossible to describe
the staff which will be used in connection with
the operation of the plant and the residence
research work which is intended for the station.

Provisions for visiting investigations: Provision will
be made for a limited number of scientific in-
vestigators in all the fields of scientific study
represented, special preference being given to the
colleges of Oregon, to research workers connected
with the Medical School, and the University of
Oregon staff.

Income: It is impossible to say at present what the
income for the station will be. An attempt will
be made to combine appropriation from state
revenues together with some contributions for the
maintenance and operation of the plant. The
budget of the State System of Higher Education
will contain an item, it is assumed, adequate for
the maintenance and operation.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— CALIFORNIA, OREGON, WASHINGTON

197

Washington

United States Fisheries Biological Station,
Seattle, Washington ('37)

History or origin: The first work was carried on in
1925 in Fisheries Hall No. 4, University of Wash-
ington. In May, 1931, the present building
was finished and the work was transferred there.
Three divisions of the Bureau of Fisheries have
quarters there: (1) Division of Scientific Inquiry;
(2) Division of Fisheries Industry; and (3) Divi-
sion of Fish Culture.

Location: 2725 Montlake Blvd., in the City of
Seattle on the shore of Lake Union, about one-half
mile from the University of Washington campus.

Organization to which attached: United States De-
partment of Commerce, Bureau of Fisheries.

Purpose: Research, and administration of the west-
ern states by the Division of Fish Culture.

/Scope of activities: Research on life history, fluctua-
tions in abundance and general biology of fishes;
all of the above studies being directed toward the
end of discovering facts of importance in the
conservation of the fisheries of the Pacific Coast;
also chemical and bacteriological research con-
nected with the packing and preserving of fish,
the use of fish oils, fishery by-products, and
the improvement and preservation of fishing gear.

Equipment: One laboratory building, 3 floors, 128
X 50 feet; Library opened October 1, 1931, with
about 350 volumes and 600 reprints.

Staff: Division of Scientific Inquiry, Dr. F. A.
Davidson, in charge; 7 in charge of principal in-
vestigations, 6 assistants.

Division of Fisheries Industry, Roger Harri-
son, in charge, staff of two.

Division of Fish Culture, Fred. J. Foster in
charge.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None except
through special permission of the Commissioner
of Fisheries.

Income: Division of Scientific Inquiry, $58,065;
Division of Fisheries Industry, $10,000; Division
of Fish Culture, cooperating with Fisheries
Industry on fish diseases and with the University
of Washington.

Provision for the publication of results: Report and
appendixes of the Commissioner of Fisheries;
Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries; Investiga-
tional Report of Bureau of Fisheries; Fishery
Circulars; and Progressive Fish Culturist.

Washington State Department of Fisheries,
Division of Biological Research ('37)

History or origin: June 1, 1935, due to Washington
State Planning Council securing funds.

Location: Fisheries Hall No. 2, University of Wash-
ington, Seattle, Washington.

Purpose: Research for regulation.

Scope: Research on all food and shell fish, habits,
statistics, supply.

Staff: Loyd Royal in charge ; 6 in charge of separate
problems; 1 assistant.

Income: $25,000.

Provision for the publication of results: Biological
Reports, 1935.

Biological Department, of Department of Game,
State of Washington ('37)

History or origin: Made a department in April, 1936.

Location: University of Washington, Fisheries Hall
No. 2, Seattle, Washington.

Purpose: Research on hatchery diseases and foods
of trout, etc., biological surveys; stream pollu-
tion; fish ways; irrigation by-passes.

Staff: Two.

Income: Salaries, $5,000.

Provision for publication of results: Publication on
biological work, title "Washington Hatcheryman"
will appear in April of this year.

Oceanographic Laboratories, University of
Washington ('37)

History or origin: Upon recommendation of Dr. M.
Lyle Spencer who was then president of the
University, the Laboratories were created by the
Board of Regents in March, 1930. The Labora-
tories are composed of three integral parts, (a)
the main laboratories on the campus of the
University in Seattle, located on the shore of
Lake Union; (b) the research ship Catalyst;
(c) the field laboratories in the San Juan Islands.
The field laboratories were founded as a biologi-
cal station in 1904 by Professor Trevor Kincaid,
professor of zoology at the LTniversity of Wash-
ington. The present site of the field laboratories
was deeded to the University by Act of Congress
in 1920, and much of the present physical plant
was constructed under the supervision of Pro-
fessor T. C. Frye, professor of botany and director
of the Biological Station. Since these laboratories
became part of the Oceanographic Laboratories,
many additions and improvements have been

198

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

made and the scientific equipment considerably-
augmented.

Location: (a) University of Washington campus;
on shore of Lake Union; ready access to the sea
via Lake Washington ship canal.

(b) On the sea shore at Friday Harbor, San
Juan Archipelago, about 80 miles north of Seattle.

OrganizatioTi to which attached: University of Wash-
ington.

Purposes: Major purpose, research. Listruction
is given in different phases of oceanography as
affecting the several departments of science.

(Scope of activities: Physical oceanography, oceano-
graphical chemistry, phytoplankton, zooplankton,
marine plant physiology, embryology, and marine
invertebrates, marine bacteriology, bio-chemistry,
and meteorology.

Regions studied, — coastal waters of Wash-
ington north of the Columbia River, Puget
Sound, Gulf of Alaska, together with the many
estuaries and passages of Alaska, the waters of the
North Pacific, and Bering Sea.

The staff of the Oceanographic Laboratories is
composed of members from the departments of
physics, chemistry, bacteriology, botany, and
zoology. Candidates for graduate degrees qualify
as majors in one of the five fundamental sciences,
— thesis and research work being in some phase
of their science as affecting oceanography.

Equipment: (a) One laboratory building, three floors,
134 X 61 feet. University of Washington. Build-
ing equipped with circulating sea water system
and provided with most up-to-date laboratory
furniture and equipment.

(b) At Friday Harbor, one chemistry laboratory,
one floor, 66 x 30 feet; two zoology laboratories,
each one floor, 24 x 56 feet ; one physics laboratory,
one floor, 73 x 30 feet; one botany laboratory, one
floor, 67 X 24 feet; one bacteriology and bio-
chemistry laboratory, one floor, 56 x 24 feet;
one stock room, one floor, 56 x 24 feet; one ob-
servation platform for securing data throughout
the year; one dock with floats amply supplied
with live boxes. Buildings of hollow tile and
stucco construction equipped with running fresh
water and sea water and electricity. Four of the
buildings are equipped with gas.

(c) Research boat Catalyst was put into
commission on June 11, 1932. The dimensions
are: Length, 75 feet and beam 18 feet, with a
draft of 9 feet and gross tonnage of 92 tons. The
hull is of heavy construction and designed to

eliminate motor vibration. The keel is of Douglas
fir, the frame of oak and double planking of Alaska
yellow cedar. On the keel and for two feet at the
water level, the boat is sheathed with ironbark.
The boat is ch'iven by a Diesel engine of 120
horsepower and has a cruising radius of 3500
mUes. Beside the usual pilot house equipment,
the Catalyst is equipped with a sonic depth
finder and a photoelectric pilot. It is equipped
with 4500 meters of j^-inch stainless steel cable
for taking plankton and water .samples and 600
meters of §-inch galvanized cable used in bottom
dredging. Throughout the boat, there are sleep-
ing accommodations for sixteen persons.

The laboratory which is on the main deck, is
19 feet long and 10 feet wide, and has working
space for seven people. Each of the seven sections
is equipped with 110 A.C., and D.C. and one
variable voltage outlet, one outlet for Flamo gas,
and one duriron drain. The laboratory is also
equipped with compressed air outlets and a fume
hood with forced ventilation.
Staff: Director, Dr. Thomas G. Thompson.

Botany: Dr. George R. Rigg, plant physiology;

Dr. Lyman D. Phifer, Phytoplankton.
Chemistry: Dr. Thomas G. Thompson; Dr.

Rex J. Robinson.
Physis: Dr. C. L. Utterback.
Zoolocy: Dr. John E. Guberlet; Dr. Robert C.

Migller.
Bacteriology: Dr. B. S. Henry.
Bio-chemistry: Dr. Earl R. Norris.
1 curator, 1 librarian, 1 secretary; 4 maintenance

and operation; 6 teaching fellows; 2 stock-
keepers.
Research Associates: Dr. Dora P. Henry, zoology;

Dr. Belle A. Stevens, zoology.

Besides the regular members of the staff, various
members of the science faculties are interested
in certain phases of oceanographic research, and
the facilities of the laboratories are placed at
their disposal.

Commander F. A. Zeu.sler and Commander
Edward H. Smith of the Coast Guard are affiliated
with the Laboratories as Lecturers in Ocean-
ography.
Provisions for visiting investigators: The Seattle
laboratories will accommodate approximately
75 students and investigators. The equipment
and facilities of the laboratories are available for
visiting investigators.

The Friday Harbor laboratories will accommo-

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— WASHINGTON, HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, CHILE, ECUADOR 199

date about 175 persons, including students, staff
members, and visiting investigators.

Income: For the initial cost of the research boat
Catalyst and the Seattle laboratories and their
scientific equipment, the Rockefeller Foundation
contributed $45,000 for the former together with
an additional $20,000 for the operation of the boat,
and $200,000 for the latter. The State of Wash-
ington appropriated $50,000 for the construction
and equipment of the laboratories. The entire
plant is now operated and maintained by the
University of Washington. The University ap-
propriated $10,000 for the enrichment of the main
library for literature pertaining to oceanography.

Provision for the publication of results: Investigators
of the laboratories are encouraged to publish
their material in national journals. Reprints
of these articles are purchased to be included in
the Supplementary Series in Oceanography,
maintained by the University. In addition to
this, the University maintains the Publications
in Oceanography.

Hawaiian Islands
Marine Biological Laboratory at Honolulu ('34)

Location: On the shore in the Waikiki district,
about 4 mUes from the center of Honolulu, about
an equal distance from the main campus of
the University of Hawaii.

Organization to which attached: University of Hawaii.

Purposes: In.struction and research. Instruction:
in marine ecology given to the students of the
University; research: advanced and graduate
students have the privileges of the laboratory.
There is also room for a limited number of special
investigators who wish to carry on independent
research.

Scope of activities: In addition to instruction, re-
searches in ecology including growth and develop-
ment of marme organisms; quantitative studies of
zooplankton ; taxonomy of marine animals.

Equipment: 1 laboratory building, 1 floor, 35 x 80
feet, with running fresh and sea water, electricity,
gas, etc.

Laboratory adjacent to Honolulu aquarium
which can be utilized for purpo.ses of research.

Staf: Director, Prof. C. H. Edmondson; AssLstant,
Mr. J. M. Ostergaard.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Room available
for 1 or 2 throughout the year, and 3 or 4 from
June to September.

Income: Maintenance through the budget of the
University of Hawaii. No special income or
contributions.

CHILE, ECUADOR, PERU

Very little information could be obtained on
oceanographic activities in the countries on the west
side of South America, except Peru. For some time
records of sea-surface temperatures have been kept
at the Peruvian Escuela Naval at La Punta and the
Compaiila Administradora del Guano has kept
records of several kinds and has assisted in the
prosecution of research on oceanic phenomena. It
is planned to extend the oceanographic work of both
the Hydrographic and Meteorologic services, but
detailed information on them is not available. The
outlook is good for significant contributions from
those sources.

Chile

Servicio Meteorologico

Location: Santiago, Quinta Normal, Casilla 717.
Detailed information not available.

Departamento de Navegacion, Republica
de Chile ('37)

Location: Valparaiso.

Staff: Hydrographer, Capitdn de Navio Enrique
Cordovez Madariaga.
Assistant Director and Inspector of Navigation,

Capitan de Fragata, Alfredo Novion Valck.
Head of Section of Nautical Information, Teniente

1° en Retiro, Rodolfo Garcia Bouquet.
Cartographer, Horacio Justiniano Marutana.
Head of Section of Instruments, Teniente 2°

en Retiro CrLstian, Wiegand Ognio.
Head of Section of Cartography and Engraving,
Dibujante 2°, Octavio Quinoncs Morales.
Eciuipmcnt:

SURVEYING VESSELS

Aguila

Leucoton

DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CBEW

600
550

100
50

Ecuador

Servicio Hidrografico de la Armada ('37)

Location: Guayaciuil.

Staff: Hydrographer, Capitan de Fragata Luis E.
Jarrin G.
Chief of Hydrographic Section, Teniente de

Fragata Miguel Zea.
Chief of Section for Calculations, Calculador 1°
Angel Valdez.

200

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Chief of Section for Tides, Calculador 2° Hector

Chiriboga.
Chief of Topographical Section, Calculador 2°

C^sar Crespo.
Equipment:

BTTRVETINa VESSELS

DISPLACEMENT OFFJCBBS CBBW

COTOPAXI

CONTRAMAESTRA SuAREZ.

300

Peru

Servicio Hidrografico y Faros (Hydrogrpahic and
Lighthouses Office) ('37)

Location: Calle Estados Unidos No. 4, Chucito,

Callao.
Staff: Head of Service, Capitdn de Fragata A. P.
Victor S. Barrios.
Head of Section of Lights, Capitdn de Corbeta

Ingeniero A. P. Alfredo Rivarola.
Head of Section of Navigation, Tenete 1° A. P.
Julio A. Raygada.

Escuela Naval ('34)

Location: La Punta.

Activities: Keeps records of sea-surface temperatures.

Compafiia Administradora del Guano ('37)

History or origin: Originated as a semi-official
corporation about 1909. (First "Memoria" pub-
lished in 1909.)

Location: Lima, Peru (Casilla 2147).

Organization to which attached: Independent.

Purposes: Administration of the Guano Islands.
Increase of the Guano supply; excavation, and
distribution of Guano.

(Scope of activities: Everything pertaining to above,
including work in applied science, and in pure
science on occasion.

Equipment: Extensive fleet of craft. Laboratories
on the islands. A main laboratory at Lima of the
"Seccion Tecnica," and numerous testing and
demonstration projects.

Staff: SehoT Francisco Ballen ("Gerente"). Numer-
ous associates and assistants, including trained
"agricultural engineers."

Provision for visiting investigators: The Compania
is hospitable to visiting investigators.

Provision for the publication of results: A monthly
"Boletin," one number of which is the "Memoria"
or annual report. Agricultural, meteorological,
zoological, and oceanographic reports and ab-
stracts.

Service Meteorologico del Peru ('36)

Location: Lima, apartado 1308.

Activities: An effort is being made to establish
stations for observing surface water-temperatures
and collecting water samples at numerous places
along the Peruvian Coast, notably at ten of the
principal ports and on all the Guano Islands.

Staff: Director, G. A. Wagner.

INSTITUTIONS, WEST SIDE OF THE PACIFIC

OCEAN

AUSTRALIA TO JAPAN, INCLUSIVE

Australia
Low Island, Queensland ('37)

History or origin: A small marine station was estab-
lished in 1928 by the Great Barrier Reef Com-
mittee of Australia as a base of operations for
the British-Australian Great Barrier Reef Ex-
pedition of 1928-29. The building was destroyed
by a cyclone so that now there is on the island
only a hut.

Location: Eight and one-fourth miles east from Port
Douglas and thirty-six and one-half miles N.N.E.
of Cairns; lat. 16°23' south; long. 145°35' east.
Area of island three and one-half acres; sLx feet
above high-water; rough coral gravel and sandy
ground; lighthouse in center of island (65 ft. high).

Organization to which attached: The Queensland
Government and the Great Barrier Reef Com-
mittee of Australia.

Purposes and scope of activities: Now there is no one
at Low Island. Therefore there is no program.

Provisions for visiting investigators: The above men-
tioned hut could be used for visiting scientists.

The Australian Hydrographic Service ('37)

History or origin: Until 1920 hydrographic surveys
in the vicinity of Australia were undertaken by
the British Admiralty using ships of the Royal
Navy when responsibility for this work was taken
over by the Australian Government.

In 1920 the Australian Hydrographic Branch
was established as part of the Royal Australian
Navy and H.M.A.S. Geranium was commissioned
as the first surveying ship and was employed in
surveying various harbors and harbor approaches;
also many parts of ocean routes. The Geranium
was paid off in 1927. H.M.A.S. Moresby was
commissioned in 1925 and until 1930 was em-
ployed surveying the waters of the Great Barrier
Reef — occasionally also carrying out surveys
elsewhere.

Location: Melbourne, Australia.

Organization to which attached: Naval Board, De-
partment of Defense.

Purposes and scope of activities: Collates data ob-
tained by hydrographic surveyors, prepares and
publishes local charts and arranges for the pro-
mulgation, in the form of Notices to Mariners,
etc., of hydrographical information received.
The Moresby in 1933 resumed the survey of the
Great Barrier Reef. In (1934) she commenced
a survey of the waters off the northwest coast of
Australia.

Equipment:

BURVEYINQ VESSEL

Moresby. . . .

DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

.. 1,650 12 129

Staff: Director, Hydrographic Branch.

Provision for publication of results: All Fair Charts
and other surveying data obtained by the Aus-
tralian Hydrographic Surveying Service are
transmitted to the British Hydrographer for the
production of British Admiralty Charts. In
many cases, however, temporary charts are
produced in Australia for sale and use, pending
the issue of Admiralty Charts, which usually
are not available until some two years later.

Marine Meteorological Section, Commonwealth
Meteorological Bureau ('34)

History or origin: In 1908, the Commonwealth
Meteorological Bureau was formed by the Federal
Government taking over the meteorological serv-
ices of the various States.

Soon afterwards a few marine observers were
enrolled to keep meteorological logs for this
office, and later, upon the development of radio-
telegraphy, W/T reports were obtained from a
few liners and Australian coasting ships. These
radio-telegraphic reports, however, ceased in
wartime.

In 1922 the marine meteorological service was re-
organized and there was established a regular
service of both radio-telegraphed and log reports
from selected ships. The volume of such reports
has since been considerably increased, and pro-
cedure has been brought into accordance with
international practice. Recently the supply of
log reports was augmented by the loan of British

201

202

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

ships' registers of observations recorded in this
part of the world.

Location: At the Commonwealth Meteorological
Bureau, Central Office, Victoria Street, Mel-
bourne.

Organization to which attached: Meteorological Bu-
reau, Commonwealth Department of the Interior.

Purposes: To collect marine meteorological data
relating to that part of the Southern Hemisphere
between 80° East longitude, and 150° West
longitude.

The Marine Section arranges for the enrollment,
instruction, and, as far as funds permit, for the
equipment of marine observers on Australian
ships.

Log reports from ships of other countries also
are arranged for from time to time, but only
when such observers' reports are not required
by the Meteorological service of the country in
which the ships are registered.

(Scope of activities: As far as possible :

(a) The completion of a daily isobaric chart
of the area indicated under "Purposes" and
combining reports of ships and of land stations
in the area;

(b) Calculating of monthly normals (for each 5°
square) of the meteorological elements included
in the ships' reports; and

Equipment: A few of the ships enrolled as marine
observers of the Central Meteorological Bureau
are equipped with official mercurial barometers,
and with sea water thermometers. The number
of ships thus equipped will gradually be increased
as funds become available.

In the case of most of this Bureau's observers,
however, the readings of the ships' barometers
are used, barometers being checked and index
error corrections supplied as required.

For particulars regarding the equipment of
ships, the data of which are borrowed from the
British Meteorological Office, it is desired to refer
to the relevant section of the statement supplied
by the British Meteorological Office.
Staff: Headquarters: 1 meteorologist; 1 meteorologi-
cal assistant.
Agencies: 5 agents, the Divisional Meteorologists
of Sydney, Brisbane, Adelaide, Perth, and
Hobart.
Provision for visiting investigators: As occasion arises.

Income: By parliamentary vote as part of the appro-
priation for the Department.

Provision for publication of results: Results may
eventually be published by the Government
printer if funds can be obtained for the purpose.

Fisheries Department of the Commonwealth
of Australia ('37)

History or origin: In the year 1935 the Common-
wealth Government definitely established a Fish-
eries Department under the care of the Council
for Scientific and Industrial Research, a govern-
mental body responsible for industrial branches
of research.

Location: Sydney, Australia.

Organization to which attached: Council for Scientific
and Industrial Research of the Commonwealth
Government of Australia.

Purpose and scope of activities: Fisheries research.
It is planned to make a special investigation of the
possibilities of pelagic fisheries.

Equipment: Besides facilities for laboratory work a
research vessel about 83 feet long of the purse
seiner type, with a diesel engine, is under con-
struction and will soon be commissioned.

Staff: Scientific Adviser, W. J. Dakin, Professor of
Zoology, University of Sydney; Officer in charge.
Dr. H. Thompson.

Marine Laboratory of the University of Sydney ('37)

History or origin: The Laboratory was set up at
the instigation of Professor W. J. Dakin, Professor
of Zoology, the University of Sydney. The
money available for the initial effort was part of a
fund collected many years ago for the foundation
of a Sydney Biological Station.

Location: At the entrance to Sydney Harbour, coast
of N. S. W., in closest approximation to the open
ocean.

Organization to which attached: Uni^-ersity of Sydney,
Department of Zoology.

Purposes: Chiefly research, marine biology, and
oceanography. Also instruction for senior classes.

(Scope of activities: Investigations in plankton;
hydrographic conditions to a distance of about
five miles off-shore east of Sydney; physiological
studies of certain marine organisms; physical,
chemical oceanography.

Equipynent: 1 small temporary laboratory, single
floor 36 ft. by 12 ft. but closely associated (only
half hour journey) with University laboratories
and libraries. Separate aquarium room with few

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— AUSTRALIA, CHINA

203

small tanks and 1,000 gallon tank with pump.

Auxiliary yacht of 13 tons, with oceanographic

apparatus.
Staff: Director, Professor W. J. Dakin, Department

of Zoology, University of Sydney; Doctor E. A.

Briggs; A. N. Colefax, B.Sc; 4 clerical and

technical assistants.
Provisions for visiting investigators: One or two

research investigators would be welcomed, but

would mainly work in University buildings using

station as essential accessory.
Income: About £180 per annum.

Source: University of Sydney, Commonwealth

Council for Scientific and Industrial Research,

Australian Research CouncU, Private.
Protnsioji for publication of results: Papers published

in scientific periodicals (chiefly Proceedings Lin-

nean Soc. of New South Wales).

China

Summer Survey of the Marine Biological
Association of China ('36)

Location: The Maruie Biological Station, University
of Amoy, Amoy, Fukien.

Organization to which attached: Marine Biological
Association of China.

Purposes: Research in the summer season every year.

(Scope of activities: A continuation of the systematic
survey of certain specified groups of the fauna
and flora of Amoy, including studies in the
morphology, ecology, life history, and food value
of these specified groups only.

Equipment: The providing for laboratory and library
facilities, housing accommodations are all con-
tributed by the University of Amoy.

Staff: Director, Dr. T. Y. Chen; 12 senior investiga-
tors and 6 junior investigators invited by the
Executive Committee of the Association from
among those biologists of professorial rank in the
different institutions in China who are prepared
and willing to work on one of the specified topics.
The University of Amoy also contributes the
service of its staff.

Provisions for visiting i?ivestigators: Specialists in
other groups of animals and plants are to be
cordially invited to cooperate with the Association
in helping to work up the material of the respec-
tive groups collected during the session.

Income: The China Foundation and the Rockefeller
Foundation give grants of $5,000 each for carrying
on the summer survey.

Hydrographic Department of the Chinese Navy ('37)

History or origin: This department has been estab-
lished since 1922, under the authority of Ministry
of Navy.

Location: 140 Municipality Road, Shanghai.

Organization to which attached: Ministry of Navy.

Purposes: Hydrographic survey.

(Scope of activities: Coast and river surveys.

Equipment:

SURVETINQ VESSELS DISPLACEMENT OFFICERS CREW

Kanlu 1,398 12 116

Chiao Jih 500 9 85

Chingtien 279 4 55

KingHsin 140 4 35

Kdng Sheng 280 10 35

Cheng Sheng 276 10 35

Staff: Du-ector, Captain T. P. Liu.

Asst. Director and Chief of Technical Staff, Mr.

S. V. Mills.
Chief of Administrative Section, Commander

V. H. Koo.
Chief of Section of Surveying, Captain K. Y.

Chen.
Chief of Section of Cartography, Captain T.

Chen.
Chief of Section of Calculations, Commander

S. Y. Lee.
Chief of Section of Tides, Commander K. S. Yeh.
Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

Tinghai Marine Station ('36)

History or origin: 1936.

Location: Sen-Kia-Men, Chu.san Islands, Chekiang

(30°N. 120°20'E.)
Organization to which attached: National Research

In-stitute of Biology, Academia Sinica.
Purposes: Biological and oceanographic research.
Scope of activities: As a center of oceanographic and

marine biological researches of the Chinese coast.
Equipment: In preparation.
Staff: Dr. Chin-Chih Jao and others.

Tsingtao Aquarium ('36)

Location: Beach Park, Tsingtao.

Organization to which attached: Chinese Institute of

Oceanography.
Purposes: Research and exhibition.
(Scope of activities: To advance the aquatic knowledge

in popular education and to provide the facilities

for special research in marine biology.
Equipment: 1 building, 3 stories with basement

including 2 specimen show rooms; 18 glass-

204

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

fronted exhibition tanks; 2 ground pools; 1
laboratory for chemical and biological researches;
1 distributing tower; 1 sea-water reservoir;

1 pump house.

Staff: Director, Mr. P. Z. Tsiang; 1 in charge of
general affairs; 2 research and technical assistants;

2 clerical a.ssistants; 1 collector.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Maximum 5, in
addition to the aquarium's staff, can be accom-
modated.

Income: Partly subsidized by the local government
and partly by the subscriptions from various
scientific institutes.

The aquarium is in cooperation with the staff
of the oceanographic department of Tsingtao
Observatory and receives help in its researches
from the professors of the Tsingtao University
and visitors from other institutions.

Department of Oceanography, Tsingtao
Observatory ('36)

Location: Observatory Hill, Tsingtao.

Organization to which attached: Tsingtao Observatory
of which it is a department.

Purposes: Mainly for research.

Scope of activities: Research in dynamical ocean-
ography, marine meteorology, chemistry of sea
water, marine biology, and sea bottom deposits.

Equipment: 1 service building (part of the Observa-
tory); 1 hydrographic and meteorological station
at the Great Harbor, equipped with a self-
registering tidal gauge and a complete set of
meteorological instruments; 1 library, more than
4,000 volumes of scientific books; 1 research
boat, borrowed from the Bureau of Safety,
Tsingtao, equipped with a complete set of instru-
ments for hydrographic investigations; 1 chemical
laboratory in preparation.

Staff: In charge, Mr. P. Z. Tsiang; 2 investigators;
2 clerical and technical assistants; 2 collectors and
observers.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

Income: Regular for the year 1931-32, $10,000.

French Indo-China

Institut Oceanographique de I'Indochine ('36)

History or origin: Established in 1922 by the General
Government of Indo-China under the name of
Service Oceanographique des Peches de I'Indo-
chine; converted into a publicly supported
institution with a civil personnel in 1930 under the
name of Institut Oc^anographiquede I'Indochine.

Location: On the seashore, 6 kilometers south of the
city of Nhatrang (Annam), 450 kilometers north
of Saigon, the capitol of Cochinchina.
Organization to which attached: Placed under the
scientific control of a commission composed of 13
members of the Academy of Sciences of Paris.
Purposes: Scientific and technical researches and the

establishment of a museum.
(Scope of activities: Physical and biological ocean-
ography, limnology, potamology; inventory of the
aquatic fauna, biology of fishes, invertebrates,
and plankton; and the study of the sea bottom.
Industrial utilization of marine products.
Equipynent: A principal building of two stories,
35 X 15 meters, containing a ground floor and a
gallery for collections. On the first floor a
veranda for aquaria and three laboratories. On
the second floor, three laboratories.

1 annex, a building with two stories 15 x 7.80
meters, containing gas producing apparatus and
drafting room.

Aquarium.

An experimental factory for the semi-industrial
study of products prepared in the laboratory (fish
meal and salt fish).

Library.

A hangar for fishing nets.

A jetty 90 milometers long.

Self-registering tidal gauge.

Tunnel of 130 meters long, excavated in rhyolite,
intended to house a seismograph.

5 dwelling houses for the personnel, 1 building
containing garages for automobiles and lodging
for the chauffeur.

1 research vessel, the De Lanessan of 750
tons displacement, length 45 meters, beam 63
meters, draught 4.45 meters; equipped for sound-
ing to a depth of 5,000 meters; provided with a
scientific laboratory, aquaria supplied with run-
ning fresh water and sea water, and a technical
laboratory; cruising radius 1,000 miles.
Staff: Director, Dr. P. Chevey; Assistant biologist,
R. Serene, Lie. Sci. ; Economist, J. Durand;
Captain of the vessel, M. Dauguet; 1 mechanic;
preparators, draughtsmen, photographers, et
cetera (Annamites).
Provisions for visiting investigators: Four or five
investigators can eventually be received at the
laboratory and one or two on board the De
Lanessan.
Income: In 1932, $175,000, in 1933 $87,500 (the
unit of the funds is the piastre). This is an

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— CHINA, FRENCH INDO-CHINA, HONG KONG, JAPAN

205

appropriation from the general budget of Indo-
China. This amount will be still further reduced
in 1934. The Institution, occupying a civilian
status, has the right to receive gifts from different
sources, but up to the present it has been obliged
to content itself with subsidies from the General
Government.
Provision for the publication of results: Two series
"Notes," of which 122 have been issued; and
"Memoirs," of which three have been issued.

Hong Kong
Royal Observatory, Hong Kong ('34)

Location: Kowloon.

Organization to which attached: Government of
Hong Kong.

Purposes: Primarily meteorological but this includes
studies of marine meteorology.

Scope of activities: Meteorology, terrestrial mag-
netism, and seismology.

Equipmejit: Offices, instruments, arrangements for
reports of observations.

Staff: Director, Mr. C. W. Jeffries; Assistant Direc-
tor, Mr. B. D. Evans; Professional Assistant,
Mr. G. S. P. Heywood.

Provision for the. publication of results: The Observa-
tory has published an atlas entitled, "Maps
Showing the Mean Atmospheric Pressure and
Wind Direction and Force over the China Sea
for Each Month of the Year," 1925; "Meteorologi-
cal Records," 1884-1928, Appendix to Hong Kong
Observations 1928, 1929; "Climate of Hong
Kong," by T. ¥. Claxton, Appendix to Hong Kong
Observations, 1931; "Weather Observations from
Ships," Appendix to Hong Kong Observations,
1931. According to an arrangement adopted by
the Directors of the Far Eastern Weather Ser\'ices
made at a conference held at Hong Kong in 1930,
the records of observations received from ships
by wireless telegraphy are published in rotation
by the different Far Eastern Weather Services
represented at the conference.

Japan
Akkeshi Marine Biological Station ('37)

Location: On the sea front of the gulf Akkeshi,
about 70 km. east of Kushiro and 150 km. west
of Nemuro.

Organization to which attached: The Faculty of
Science, Hokkaido Imperial University.

Purposes: Research, instruction for students.

Scope of activities: Research in biology and oceano-
graphy.

Equipment: 1 concrete building, 788 sq. m., 3 floors
including 1 student laboratory; 1 laboratory for
investigators; 5 staff laboratories; 1 aquarium
room of 10 tanks; 1 library; 1 public room; 1
office; 1 motor room; 1 motor boat Misago, 8
meters, 5 tons; 2 wooden residences.

Staif: Director; 4 associates (1 temporary); 4
research assistants (1 temporary); 2 part-time
collectors.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Six to ten per-
sons can be accommodated.

Income: Yen 6,000 for 1932, from the Faculty of
Science.

Amakusa Marine Biological Laboratory
(Amakusa Rinkai Jikken-sho) ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1928. For a
fuller description, see article mentioned in the
foot-note.'

Location: Tomioka, Amakusa, Kumamoto ken,
Japan, about 31 km. southeast of Nagasaki.

Organization to which attached: Kyushu Imperial
University.

Purposes: Researches by investigators associated
with the laboratories and institutes of zoology,
botany, physiology, biochemistry, anatomy, path-
ology, geology, meteorology, et cetera, of the
University, and of other imiversities and colleges.

Scope of activities: Chiefly the survey of the marine
fauna and flora around Tomioka and its vicinity.
Casual visitors may take up any field of research
in marine biology, oceanography, and other
related branches of science.

Equipment: 1 wooden laboratory building, 2 stories,
floor area of 100 sq. m.; 1 janitor's house and
kitchen, 1 story, 66 sq. m.; 1 dormitory, 1 story,
wooden, 100 sq. m.; land, area about 62,000 sq. m.

Staff: Director (professor in Kyushu Imperial
University) ; 2 members of council (professors in
Kyushu Imperial University); 1 administrator;
1 assistant; 1 artist; 1 janitor; part-time collectors
and helpers.

Provisions for visiting investigators: For about 5 or 6
persons only.

Income: Very irregular in amount, paid whenever
required by the University.

' Ohshima, Hiroshima, The Amakusa Biological Labora-
tory: Records of Oceanog. Works in Japan, vol. 1, no. 2,
pp. 78-89, pis. 22, 23, 2 charts, 1928.

206

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Marine Biological Station of Asamushi ('37)

Origin: The following is quoted from the article
cited below.^

The Asamushi Marine Biological Station was
founded in July, 1924, as an extension of the
Institute of Biology, Tohoku Imperial University,
Sendai, Japan. During the years, 1921-1922
one of the authors (S. Hatai) and his colleagues
at the Biological Institute made a thorough in-
vestigation of the entire coast of Northeastern
Japan to select the most suitable site for a marine
iDioIogical station. Although the coast of Miyagi
Prefecture was naturally most thoroughly searched
the present location in Aomori Prefecture was
selected, after careful consideration, as the most
suitable for our purpose. By act of the 46th.
Diet, in session in 1923, the Imperial Japanese
Government granted 150,000 yen for establishing
the Station, and 50,000 yen was given by the
Aomori Prefectural Government. Thus the erec-
tion of the buildings could be commenced in May,
1923, and was completed one year later, entailing
a total expense of 200,000 yen. The Station
was formally opened on July 5th, 1924.

During the four years since its establishment,
various improvements have been made, and the
station is now fast becoming one of the centers
for the promotion of Biological Science in Japan.
Location: Asamushi, Aomori-ken, on the sea front,
about 1.6 km. northeast of the village of Asamuchi.
about 16 km. northeast of city of Aomori, and
about 17 hours by train from Tokyo.
Organization to which attached: The Faculty of

Science, Tohoku Imperial University.
Purposes: Major purpose, research; instruction in

zoology, physiology, and planktology.
Scope of activities: Research in physiology, zoology,
physiological chemistry, planktology, and oceano-
graphy.
Equipment: 1 laboratory building, 2 floors, 386 sq. m.,
of 14 rooms: 8 research rooms for faculty,
student laboratory, physiological laboratory,
library, dark room, reception room, janitor's
room; all furnished with gas, electricity, run-
ning sea and fresh water.
1 undersea laboratory, designed for study of
experimental evolution, physiology, and ecol-
ogy, re-enforced concrete, 15 sq. m., one-half
submerged in the sea at the shore line.

- Hatai, Sinkishi, and Kokubo, Seiji, The marine biologi-
cal station of Asamushi: Its history, equipment, and activi-
ties: Records of Oceanog. Works in Japan, vol. 1, no. 1,
pp. 26-38, pis. 6-12, 1928.

1 aquarium house, re-enforced concrete, 238 sq. m.,
business room, aquarium, museum. 24 tanks
of various sizes, in which both fresh and sea
water fishes are on display to the public.

1 boat house, 70 sq. m., for conservation of motor
boats during the winter.

2 motor boats; one, 8 meters, 20 h.p. gasoline
engine, furnished with fish tank for transporting
live fishes; one 7 meters, 8 h.p. engine.

2 small fishing boats, portable motors.

1 dormitory, 2 story frame building, capable of
accommodating 50 persons, area 636 sq. m.

4 official residences, 116 sq. m. each, of 3 to 5
rooms in addition to veranda, kitchen, bath,
furniture, running water, electricity.
Staff: Director, Doctor Hatai; Curator, Dr. S.

Kokubo; 3 assistants; 1 technical assistant.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Between 20 and

30 can be accommodated besides the staff.
Income: The regular income is Yen 21,000 per year

including salaries, besides a special income of

Yen 6,000 derived from the aquarium.
Provision for the publication of results: Scientific

reports of Tohoku Imperial University.

Imperial Marine Observatory, Kobe ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1919.

Location: Nakayamate-dori 7 tyome, Kobe.

Organization to which attached: Department of
Education.

Purposes: Marine meteorology and oceanographic
investigations.

Equipment: Besides the laboratory and office build-
ing in Kobe, the Observatory operates the M. S.
Syunpu-Maru, a steel yacht of 125 tonnage,
specially intended for oceanographical surveys,
built in 1927. Principal dimensions: length over
all 90 feet, breadth 18 feet, depth 9.6 feet, mean
draft 7 feet, displacement of 125 tons; equipped
with a six cylinder Diesel engine of 150 horse-
power; speed 9 knots in calm weather; carries 13
tons of crude oil in three oil tanks; cruising
radius of about 2,500 miles at a mean speed of 8
knots.

Personnel, a captain and a crew of 16 in all.
Oceanographical observations are conducted by
the experts of the Observatory assisted by the
crew. Four sounding instruments of the Lucas
and Wurzel types are fitted on board. Tem-
perature, density, salinity, acidity, etc., at various
depths are observed in usual ways, and the

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— JAPAN

207

direction and speed of ocean currents are observed

with current meters of the Ekman pattern.
Staff: Director, Dr. T. Okada; Meteorologist, Y.

Horiguti; Meteorologist, K. Tsukuda; Oceanog-

rapher, K. Hidaka; Oceanographer, K. Koenuma;

Instruments, G. Okada; Marine chemist, Y.

Matudaira; Marine Biologist, T. Yanagisawa.
Income: Yen 160,000 (annual).
Provisio7i for publication of results: Annual Report;

Memoirs of the Imperial Marine Observatory;

Daily Weather Charts of the North Pacific;

Journal of Oceanography; Tidal Observations.

Kominato Marine Biological Laboratory ('37)

Location: On the sea shore of Kominato Bay, about
1.6 km. south of Awa-Kominato Railway Station,
Chiba Prefecture, and about 121 km. from Tokyo
via the Boso Railway Line.

Organization to which attached: Imperial Fisheries
Institute, Tokyo.

Purposes: Research and instruction in marine
biology.

(Scope of activities: Researches in biology, under
which planktology, biology of fishes are included;
chemistry and physics of sea water; dynamical
oceanography.

Equipment: Total site 5,000 sq. m.; 1 re-enforced
concrete laboratory building, including aquarium,
2 floors, 165 sq. m. First floor aquarium with 11
tanks; second floor laboratory; 1 wooden dormi-
tory, 2 floors, 121 sq. m. ; 1 wooden bath house,
building area 9.9 sq. m.; 2 wooden cottage
residences; 2 engine houses; 1 fish pond, about
40 X 20 X 8 ft.; sea water tank, about 24,000
gallons capacity, re-enforced concrete structure;
boat house; 1 re-enforced concrete pier, about 20
ft. X 5 ft.; 1 research boat; Library, about 200
volumes, 100 reprints.

Staff: 6 in charge of different lines of investigation.
Director; 3 associates; 1 resident naturalist;
1 collector.

The investigations also receive help in research
from members of the Fish Culture Department
of the Imperial Fisheries Institute and visitors
from other institutions.

Provisions for visiting investigators: About 20, in
addition to .staff.

Income: One year's expenses, about Yen 500 regu-
larly. In addition there is a special contribution
from Kominato Town.

Institute of Physical Oceanography ('34)

History or origin: Established in 1921.

Location: Kyoto, Japan.

Organization to which attached: Osaki Tidal Station.

Purposes: Instruction and research.

Scope of activities: Physical oceanography in general.

Equipment: Ordinary equipment for research in
physics.

Staff: Takaharu Nomit.su; Yoshikazu Toyohara;
Tohichiso Takegami.

Incoine: Source: From the Government.
Amount: Yen 3,000 annually for research.

Provision for publication of results: In "Memoirs
of the College of Science," Kyoto Imperial Uni-
versity, Series A.

Misaki Marine Biological Station (Misaki
Rinkai Jikkenjo) ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1886.

Location: About 60 km. south of Tokyo, 3 km.
north of the village of MLsaki, Kanagawa Pre-
fecture ; one hour by train and 50 minutes by bus.

Organization to which attached: Imperial University
of Tokyo.

Purposes: Research by investigators associated with
the laboratories and institutes of zoology, botany,
fisheries, and medical sciences of the University,
and visiting investigators; laboratory for college
student.s of zoology; summer courses.

Scope of activities: Marine biology, oceanography,
and allied sciences. Aquarium and museum are
open to the public; summer courses in marine
zoology for public and high school teachers;
oceanographic observations; seLsmological ob-
servations; research facilities extended to visiting
investigators.

Equipment: 1 laboratory building, reinforced con-
crete, 59 X 13.5 m., with floor space 1,000 sq. m.
including chemical, physiological, and oceano-
graphical rooms besides general laboratory; 1
office and laboratory, wood, 12 x 9 m.; 1 aquarium-
museum building, reinforced concrete, 2 stories,
29.7 x 7.2 m., with floor space 363 sq. m.; 1
.seismograph room; 3 dormitory buildings, in-
cluding residence for overseas investigators;
1 wooden cottage for staff; 1 motor boat; 3 row
boats.

Staff: Director, Prof. Naohide Yatsu; 1 assistant
professor; 1 research associate; 1 assistant; 1
general manager; 1 technician; 4 collectors; 2
janitors.

208

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Provisions for visiting investigators: Five or six can
be accommodated.

hicome: Annual budget about Yen 12,000 including
salaries (from Science Faculty and Agricultural
Faculty), and about Yen 4,500 from admittance
tickets of the aquarium and museum, and from
table fees.

Provision for publication of results: Journal of Faculty
of Science, Section IV, Tokyo Imperial University.

Miyako Meteorological Observatory ('37)

History or origin: New observatory completed at the
end of 1936. The principal object of this ob-
servatory is to observe the temperature of sea
water off the east coast of N. Japan every day
when the weather permits.

Location: Miyako. 39°38' N., 141°59' E.

Organization to which attached: The Central Meteoro-
logical Observatory, Tokyo.

Purposes and scope of activities: Meteorological and
oceanographic observations.

Equipment: Besides a small laboratory for marine
chemical work, the observatory operates a motor
yacht Kuroshiwo-Maru, 30 tons, and 9 knots
in speed.

Staff: Director, Y. Tudi.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

Income: Yen 10,000 (annual).

Publication: The results of observations made at this
observatory are published in the publications of
the Central Observatory, Tokyo.

The Institute of Algological Research (Kaiso
Kenkyusho) ('37)

History or origin: Established in May, 1933. A
new laboratory was completed in April, 1937.

Location: Hunami-cho, Muroran, Hokkaido, Japan.

Organization to which attached: The Hokkaido Im-
perial University.

Purposes: Research works on the marine algae.

Scope of activities: Systematic, cultural, physiologi-
cal, and ecological studies on marine algae.

Equipments: In the laboratory, one large and two
small rooms for research, three rooms for culture
studies; two small boats; a lodging for visitors.

Staff: Scientific: Y. Yamada, Professor of Botany,
Hokkaido, Imperial University; T. Kanda, As-
sistant. Technical and clerical, 1. Maintenance
and operation, 2.

Provisions for visititig investigators: No special
provision.

Income: Sources : The Hokkaido Imperial University.
Amount: Not fixed.

Palao Tropical Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: Established in compliance with a
recommendation of the Committee of the Biologi-
cal Section of the Japan Society for the Promo-
tion of Scientific Research, organized m 1932.
After the approval of this recommendation by the
trustees of the Society a subcommittee was formed
and it was decided to establish a biological station
in the tropical islands under Japanese mandate.
Prof. S. Hatai who was chosen to carry out this
proposal, after visiting numerous islands, selected
as the site of the station the Island of Korror,
which is near the main island of Palao. The
buildmgs were completed in 1935. For a fuller
description see article cited below.'

Location: On Korror Island, situated close to the
main island of Palao, the South Sea Islands of
Japanese mandated territory.

Organization to which attached: The Japan Society
for the Promotion of Scientific Research, Tokyo.

Purposes: Major purpose, research in biology of
coral reefs.

(Scope of activities: Researches in ecology of coral
polyps and of reef formation, in physiology of
growth, development, and reproduction in each
coral species, in physics and chemistry of coral
skeleton; and general biological and oceano-
graphical survey necessary for investigation of
the above mentioned fields.

Equipment: 1 laboratory building, one storied frame
building, about 7 x 11 meters, of a single large
laboratory and a small dark room for photographic
work.

1 store room, about 5.5 x 3.6 meters; under the
same roof is the motor room.

1 small exhibition house of coral specimens.

2 collecting boats: one, equipped with a kero-
sene oil engine of 3 h.p., and another, a small
row boat with sailing gear.

For long distance trips the government Fisheries
Experimental Station at Palao has generously
placed its large craft at disposal of the
station.

1 salt water tank, capacity 3 tons.

2 fresh water tanks, capacity 3 tons each.
2 residences, about 6x8 meters each.

' Hatai, Sinkishi, The Palao Tropical Biological Station:
Palao Tropical Biological Studies, no. 1, pp. 1-1.5, 6 figs.,
1937.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— JAPAN

209

Staff: Director, Prof. S. Hatai; 3 commissioners

(2 in Palao, 1 in Sendai) ; 2 janitors.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Four can be

accommodated, including the staff and research

members sent by the Society.
Income: Annual budget for 1937: 12,200 yen.
Provision for the publication of results: The Palao

Tropical Biological Studies, issued by the Japan

Society for the Promotion of Scientific Research,

Tokyo.

Seto Marine Biological Laboratory (Seto
Rinkai Kenkyusho) ('37)

History: An account of the establishment of the
Seto station is given in the article cited beloW*
and from it the following is quoted :

The Department of Biology (now the Depart-
ments of Zoology and Botany) of the Kyoto
Imperial University was established in 1917, and
four years later, in 1921, the Government granted
150,000 yen toward the erection of a marine
biological laboratory to be attached to the
department. This sum was spent largely for the
louilding and equipment of the Seto Marine
Biological Laboratory. It was supplemented
by a contribution of 50,000 yen from Wakayama
Prefecture, while a lot of nine acres and a half
was donated by the village of Seto-Kanayama.
The whole building was completed in the spring
of 1922, and the activities began in the summer
of the same year. One thing to be deeply re-
gretted in connection with the establishment of
the Laboratory, was the death of its founder,
Prof. Iwaji Ikeda, which happened just before
the completion of the building.

Location: Seto-Kanayama, Wakayama ken, on the
west coast of Kii Peninsula, about 128 km. south
of Osaka: 4 hours by train, 1 hour by bus, and 20
minutes on boat; or 8 hours by steamer.

Organization to which attached: Faculty of Science,
Kyoto Imperial University.

Purposes: Research work on marine biology;
instruction to students of Kyoto Imperial Uni-
versity.

Scope of activities: Researches in marine biology,
including .systematics, morphology, embryology,
ecology, physiology, planktonology, et cetera;
lectures, laboratory courses in marine biology for

* Komai, Taku, and Ikari, Jiro, The Seto Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory, its equipment, and activities, with
remarks on the fauna and flora of the environs: Records of
Oceanog. Works in Japan, vol. 1, no. 3, pp. 113-129, pis.
27-35, 1929.

University students; special courses in marine
biology for teachers of middle and primary schools,
usually attended by about 30 persons; exhibit of
marine life for public.
Equipment: Buildings are all wooden and one storied;

1 students' laboratory, 220 sq. m.; 1 research
laboratory, 264 sq. m.; 1 library-museum, 13
sq. m. ; 1 aquarium building, 186 sq. m. ; 1 dormi-
tory, 395 sq. m. ; 1 residence for resident members,
61 sq. m.; 1 collecting boat Nyusin Maru, 14.4 x
3.9 m., 19 tons, semidiesel engine; 1 small boat;

2 row boats.

Staff: Acting Director, Prof. Y. Okada; Assistant

Prof. K. Akatsuka; 1 assistant; 1 technical

assistant; janitor and cook.
Provisions for visiting investigators: 10 at most;

usually about 5.
Income: Sources : University of Kyoto.

Amount : Fluctuates from year to year, about Yen

3,000, excluding the salaries of the staff from

Kyoto Imperial University.
Provision for publication of results: Mostly in Mem.

Coll. of Science, University of Kyoto, also in

other journals.

Mitsui Institute of Marine Biology ('37)

History or origin: Established and opened in 1933
by Mr. Takanaga Mitsui.

Location: Susaki near Simoda, Kamo-gun, Siduoka-
prefecture.

Organization to which attached: Independent insti-
tution.

Purposes: Research in marine biology.

Scope of activities: Researches in marine biology in
general, planktology, algalogy, physiology, and
oceanography; biological survey of the neighbor-
ing waters, especially of deep-.sea fauna of Suruga
Bay.

Fellowships are awarded annually by the
committee of the Institute to the research workers
who desire to investigate marine material in the
Institute.

Equipment: 1 laboratory building, reinforced con-
crete, 2 floors, 297 tubo (1 tubo = 6x6 ft.), of
25 rooms: 9 research rooms, 2 libraries, 3 store
rooms, 2 constant temperature rooms, 2 seismo-
logical observatories, office pubHc hall, museum,
engine room, aquarium room, boat house, janitor's
room; all furnished with running sea and fresh
water; 1 small motor boat and a few row boats
for collection and occanographical observation.

Staff: Scientific: Director (changeable by 3 years'

210

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

term) Prof. Ikusaku Amemiya, Tokuo Im-
perial University (1936- ). Permanent staff:
Otohiko Tanaka (oceanography and plank-
tology); Sokiti Segawa (algalogy). Naturalist:
Kojiro Kato (zoology).

Technical and clerical: Clerk, Daisaku Sakata.

Maintenance and operation: 2 collectors and 2
attendants.
Provisions for visiting investigators: At least 3 can be

accommodated.
Income: Sources: Provided from a grant by Mr.
Takanaga Mitsui.

Amount: About 20,000 yen annually.

Shimoda Marine Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: The cornerstone was laid on June
6, 1931, and completed on August 11, 1933.

Location: Shimoda-machi, Shizuoka-ken, Japan.

Organization to which attached: Tokyo University of
Literature and Science.

Purposes: Research; instruction in zoology, botany,
oceanography, geography, et cetera, and science
education on the marine subjects.

(Scope of activities: Investigations on systematics,
physiology, biochemistry, ecology, experimental
studies of animals and plants, meteorology,
oceanography, geography, geology, terrestrial
magnetism, earth current, atmospheric electricity,
and others.

Equipment: Sea-water and fresh-water are supplied
for every laboratory. Two gasoline motor-boats
(16 and 5 h.p.) and four collecting boats. An
aquarium is attached.

Staff: Scientific: T. Fukui (Director); E. Sawano
(Administrator); J. Shimoizumi, T. Sakai, K.
Toyomasu; S. Endo, K. Nishizawa, N. Obara.
Technical and clerical: 5 persons.
Maintenance and operation: 4 persons.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Ten laboratory
rooms and a dormitory with ten rooms are
provided for the visiting investigators.

Income: Sources: Tokyo University of Literature
and Science.
Amount: About 3,500 yen.

Imperial Fisheries Experimental Station (The
Suisan Sikendyo) ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1929.
Location: Tukisima, Kyobasi Ku, Tokyo.
Organization to which attached: Ministry of Agricul-
ture and Forestry.

Purposes: Investigations, researches and experiments

on fisheries and their utihzation.
(Scope of activities: Physical and biological oceanog-
raphy, catching fish, fish culture, preservation of
fish, utihzation of fish as well as other marine prod-
ucts and development of fishing boats, et cetera.
Equipment: Laboratories and experimental stations :
Head office of main station, Tokyo: 3 laboratory
buildings ; 1 experimental water tank for fishing
boat; 2 factories for experiments; 1 freezing
room for experiment.
Branch stations: (1) Kisaki station, Nagano
Prefecture, for raising trout. (2) Toyohasi
station, Aiti Prefecture, for raising freshwater
fish. (3) Otyo station, Hirosima Prefecture,
for raising saltwater fish. (4) Kasaoka station,
Okayama Prefecture, for raising saltwater fish.
Staff: Director, Dr. N. Ka.suga.
Fishing, S. Kameda.
Fish technology, Kintaro Kimura, S. Yamamoto,

D.Sc, and Dr. H. Hirano.
Pisci-culture, S. Nakano and S. Fujimori.
Physics, Dr. H. Hosino.
Chemistry, M. Migita, D.Sc.
Biological oceanography, H. Marukawa, Dr.

Kimosuke Kimura, and Dr. H. Aikawa.
Physical oceanography. Dr. M. Uda.
In charge of fishing boat. Dr. N. Sato.
In charge of machinery. Dr. I. Gensyo.
Biology, T. Kamiya.

Branch stations: Y. Matsui, D.Sc. (Toyohasi);
H. Seki (Otyo); M. Kawajiri (ffisaki); N.
Oshima (Kasaoka).
Captain of M. S. Soyo Maru, K. Imamura.
Expenditure: Annual expense about 250,000 yen.
Provision for publication of results: Journal of the
Imperial Fisheries Experimental Station ; Fisheries
Investigation (Supplementary report); Semi-an-
nual Report of Oceanographical Investigation;
Monthly Oceanographical Chart (in sheet).

Imperial Fisheries Institute (The Suisan
Kosyuzyo) ('37)

History or origin: The Imperial Fisheries Institute
is the successor of the educational enterprises
undertaken by the Dai-Nippon Suisan-Kwai
(the Fisheries Society of Japan). Its predecessor,
the Fisheries Training School, was established in
1889 by the above-mentioned society at Kobi-
kityo, Kyobasi, Tokyo. In July of the same
year it removed to Hakozakityo, Nihonbasi,
T6ky6, and then afterwards to Mita-Sikokutyo,

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— JAPAN

211

Siba, Tokyo. The Imperial Japanese Govern-
ment has donated 6,500 yen a year since 1893 to
train young men for organizing and managing
the fishery industries of Japan, but at the time
of its transfer from the society to the Government,
in 1897, the investigating and the experimental
works pertaining to the fishery industries were
added to its original scope, and the organization
of the present Institute was founded on the 22nd
of March. In 1902 new buildings were erected at
Ettyiizima, Hukagawa, near the mouth of Sumida
River, and the Institute removed there in Sep-
tember. The Institute was formerly composed
of the three departments, i.e., educational,
experimental, and marine investigation, but was
changed into an educational organ pure and simple
at the time of reorganization in 1929.

Location: 8 Ettyflzima, Hukagawa, Tokyo.

Organization to which attached: The Institute is
under the supervision of Minister of Agriculture
and Forestry.

Purposes: The educational object of the Institute
is to give lessons in science and art of the fisheries
and to study the profound theories on them, along
with formation of character.

Scope of activities: Fishing, technology of fisheries,
pisci-culture, physics and chemistry, mechanics,
oceanography, zoology and botany, and bac-
teriology, economics and laws.

Equipment: 2 main buildings, including 51 class-
rooms, 42 laboratories, a large auditorium, and
40 other rooms.

Laboratory for iodine chemistry.
Laboratory for motor machinery.
Several service buildings.
Unyo-Maru, 444 tons, a former training boat.

1. The steam-ship Hakuyo-Maru, 1,327.78 tons,

and a wooden boat Seityo Maru, 55 tons,
are used for the purpose of training fishing
students.

2. Temporary Training Station at Tateyama Bay,

Tiba Prefecture, is used for training and
experimental purposes of fishing students.

3. Marine Laboratory, with an aquarium, at

Kominato Bay, Tiba Prefecture, is a bio-
logical laboratory used by the pisci-culture
students.

4. The Oyster Experimental Station at Kanazawa,

Kanagawa Prefecture, is chiefly used for the
biological study of oysters and other marine
life.

5. The Training Station at Yosida, Siduoka Pre-

fecture, is used for the research on raising
warm-water fish.

6. The Training Station at Oidumi, Yamanasi

Prefecture, is used for the research on raising
cold-water fish.

7. Training Station at Numazu, Siduoka Pre-

fecture, is a research and training station
for students of technology.
Staff: Director, Yasukichi Sugiura.
Fishing Laboratory:

Professors: T. Nagamune, K. Tanaka, J. Ihara.
Assistant professors: T. Sasayama, Dr. J.
Takagi, S. Takayama, Dr. H. Kusama.
Technological Laboratory :

Professors: Y. Miyama, Dr. Y. Shimizu, T.

Kawaguchi.
Assistant professors: S. Iwamoto, K. Kotani,
K. Saruya.
Piscicultural Laboratory:

Professors: Dr. N. Nakai, Dr. K. Oda.
Assistant Professor: Dr. T. Tomiyama.
Physical Laboratory:

Professors: M. Tauchi, D.Sc, Dr. M. Okada.
Assistant Professor: K. Miyoshi.
Instructors: Dr. S. Kamiya, Dr. Y. Takenouchi,
Dr. H. Okuno.
Chemical Laboratory:

Professors: M. Yamakawa, D.Agr., T. Oya,
D.Agr.; Y. Matsuike, D.Sc, Dr. I. Okada.
Assistant Professor : Dr. T. Tamura.
Mechanical Laboratory:

Professor: Dr. K. Tomimasu.
Assistant Professor: Dr. H. Niino.
Oceanographical Laboratory:

Assistant Professor: Dr. H. Niino.
Zoological Laboratory:

Professors: A. Terao, D.Sc, J. Hori.
Assistant Professors: K. Ebina, Dr. T. Mimura,
Dr. D. Inaba, K. Matsubara.
Botanical Laboratory:

Professors: D. Higashi, Dr. S. Ueda.
Instructor: Dr. K. Onda.
Bacteriological Laboratory:

Assistant Professor: M. Kimata.
Instructor: Y. Toyama, D.Agr.
Economical Laboratory:

Professors: Dr. M. Habara, S. Azimi, T.
Miura, Dr. A. Kuragami, Dr. S. Katayanagi,
Dr. S. Tanahashi, F. Katayama, Y. Koishi.
Assistant professor: Dr. S. Ckamoto.
Instructor: Y. Honiden, Dr. Eco.
Experts: J. Nakagawa, Y. Ito, M. Shibato.

212

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Pelagic Fishery:

Professor: T. Tajinia.

Several other educational associates and main-
tenance and operation workers.

Provision for visiting investigators: None.

Income: Temporary annual about 400,000 yen,
from the Government.

Provisions for publication of results: Journal of the
Imperial Fisheries Institute, (both in Japanese,
"Suisan Kosyiizyo Kemkyu Hokoku," and in
European languages).

Hydrographic Department of the Imperial
Japanese Navy ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1871, first under the
War Department as the Naval Hydrographic
Bureau, transferred in 1872 to the Navy Depart-
ment which was established during that year.

Location: Tokyo.

Organization to which attached: The Imperial Japa-
nese Navy.

Purposes: The Hydrographic Department conducts
the preparation and issue of hydrographic and
aeronautical publications, undertakes the survey
of coasts and seas, makes recommendations and
issues notices regarding safety of navigation,
and educates hydrographic experts and their
assistants. It also conducts for the Navy
observations, researches, and study of marine-
meteorological and oceanographical phenomena.

Scope of activities: The Department is divided into

six sections, namely, the First, the Second, the

Third, the Fourth, the Fifth, and the Accounts.

The First Division conducts business connected

with the following:

1. Planning the preparation of hydrographic and

aeronautical charts and books.

2. Planning hydrographic surveys, meteorological

and oceanographical observations.

3. Compilation of hydrographic and aeronautical

publications with the exception of those
concerning magnetism, astronomy, tides,
meteorology, and oceanography.

4. Notices to Mariners and Notices to Aviators

(for correction and supplementing aero-
nautical documents).
The Second Division conducts business con-
nected with the following :

1. Actual conduct of hydrographic surveys.

2. Preparation of original charts and hydro-

graphic accounts.

3. Compilation of publications bearing on ter-

restrial magnetism.

4. Technical education of the hydrographic ex-

perts and assistants engaged in surve3ang
work.
The Third Division conducts business con-
nected with the following:

1. Compilation of hydrographic and aeronautical

charts.

2. Drawing of charts, preparation of plates, and

printing.

3. Technical education of personnel engaged in

the foregoing works.

4. Correction and supplementing of original

plates and of publications in the custody of
the Section.

5. Provision, supply, exchange, distribution, and

contribution, lending custody, and taking
in and out of publications.

6. Sale of publications.

The Fourth Division conducts business con-
nected with the following :

1. Compilation of pubhcations bearing on nautical

astronomy and tides.

2. The technical education of the personnel

engaged in astronomical and tidal calcula-
tion.
The Fifth Division conducts business coimected
with the following:

1. Actual conduct of marine meteorological and

oceanographical observations.

2. Researches and study of marine-meteorological

and oceanographical phenomena.

3. Compilation of pubhcations bearing on the

foregoing phenomena.

4. Technical education of the personnel engaged

in the foregoing observations.
The Accounts Section conducts business con-
nected with the following:

1. Revenue and expenditure.

2. Purchase and sale of office supplies.

3. Receipt, custody, and delivery of office sup-

plies.

4. Correspondence and transportation.
Equipment:

OFTICERS

SURVEYING VESSELS DISPLACEMENT AND CREW

KoMAHAsi 1,688 128

K6sYU 2,270 102

YoDO 1,450 182

Staff: Chief Hydrographer, Kaigun Syosyo (Rear-
Admiral) Tomisaburo Otagaki.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— JAPAN

213

Head of 1st Section (General Affairs; investiga-
tion; projection and compilation) Kaigun
Taisa (Captain) Sadakiti Sitabo.
Head of 2nd Section (Surveys) Kaigun Taisa

(Captain) Kanzo Matubara.
Head of 3rd Section (Cartography and Publica-
tions) Kaigun Taisa (Captain) Kiyosi Ku-
sakawa.
Head of 4th Section (Astronomical Calculations,
research and prediction of Tide), Kaigun Taisa
(Captain) Tosio Akiyosi, B.Sc.
Head of 5th Section (Marine Meteorology and
Oceanography) Kaigun Taisa (Captain) Sohei
Tasiro.
Head of Section of Accounts Kaigun Syukei-
Tyflsa (Paymaster Commander) Gonzo Tokida.
Provisions for visiting investigators: No special

accommodations for visitors.
Income: Estimated expenditures in 1936: Yen

1,113,000.
Provision for publication of results: Notices to Mari-
ners, Translation of Foreign Sailing Directions,
Sailing Directions for Japan, The Russian Mari-
time Provinces, and the China Pilot. These
together with those for Bengal, Philippine Islands,
Borneo, the western and eastern sides of the China
Sea, and most parts of Eastern Archipelago and
Hawaii, 55 volumes; Ocean Passages, 1 vol..
Coastal Passages, 1 vol. ; the Light Lists for Japan
and other parts of the Orient, 2 vols. ; separate
volumes of saiHng directions for various maritime
regulations. Tide-tables, Nautical Almanac, As-
tronomical Navigation Tables, Distance Tables,
List of Japanese Place Names, Hydrographic
Bulletin (Suiro-Yoho), Bulletin of the Hydro-
graphic Department Imperial Japanese Navy of
which eight volumes have been issued (being
irregular reports of studies and investigations).

Central Meteorological Observatory of Japan ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1875.

Location: Takehira-tyo 2, Kozimatiku, Tokyo.

Organizatio7i to which attached: Department of
Education.

Purposes: General meteorological investigations
including allied researches in oceanography,
seismology, and terrestrial magnetism.

Scope of activities: (1) Forecasting weather and
printing weather charts. (2) Radio reception
and sending of weather reports. (3') Work shops
where instruments are made. (4) Repairing
chronometers. (5) Solar radiation and its in-

fluence on plankton. (6) Tidal investigations.
(7) Seismology. (8) Terrestrial magnetic ob-
servations.

Equipment: M. S. Ryohu-Maru, a steel boat of
1,200 tonnage, specially intended for the marine
meteorological and oceanographical observations,
is in course of construction, and will be completed
in June, 1937. Principal dimensions: length 225
feet, breadth 35 feet, depth 24 feet. Twin
screws. Speed: 15 knots.

Staff: Director Prof. T. Okada; Chief of the Fore-
cast Division, Dr. S. Fujiwhara; Chief of the
Tides and Radiation, Dr. R. Sekiguti.

Income: Yen 750,000 (annual) .

Provision for publication of results: Monthly and
annual reports of Meteorological Observations in
Japan; Monthly Weather Review; Geophysical
Magazine; Bulletin; Actinometric Bulletin; Solar
Radiation; Tide tables — Short Report of results
of observations on solar radiation made in Japan.
Report of Magnetic Observations; Report of
Agricultural Meteorology; Report of Aerological
Meteorology.

The Fisheries Experiment Station of the
Government-General of Chosen ('37)

History or origin: Established on May 6, 1921.

Location: Fusan, Chosen.

Organization to which attached: The Government-
General of Chosen.

Purposes: Scientific researches on aquatic products
for the promotion of the Fisheries.

Scope of activities: Chosen and its adjacent waters.

Equipment: Main building in Fusan consists of
laboratories for (a) fishing research and the study
of suitable fishing boats, (b) chemical and physio-
logical researches, (c) biological and aquicultural
researches and (d) oceanographical researches.

Research ves.sels: (a) Misago-Maru, a steel
motor boat of 153 tons for oceanographical ob-
servation, (b) Otori-Maku, a wooden motor boat
of 40 tons and (c) Hayabusa-Maru, a wooden
motor boat of 31 tons, both for fishing researches.
Branch Station at Chinkai for fish culture has
(a) biological laboratory and (b) ponds for fresh
water fish culture.

Branch Station at Seishin for manufacturing
industry of Sardine has (a) chemical laboratory
and (b) factories.

Staff: Head of the fishery department.
Head of the chemical and physiological depart-
ment.

214

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Head of the biological and aquicultural depart-
ment.
Head of the oceanographical department.

Provisions for visiting investigators: No provision.

Income: 6,000 yen.

Provision for publication of results: Bulletin of the
Fishery Experiment Station of the Government-
General of Chosen, and other journals.

JAVA TO STRAITS SETTLEMENTS,
INCLUSIVE

East Indies

Koninklijk Magnetisch en Meteorologisch
Observatorium te Batavia ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1866.

Location: Batavia, Java.

Organization to which attached: Netherlands East
Indian Government.

Purposes and scope of activities: General meteorologi-
cal and geophysical work. Also studies of sea
water temperatures and other physical aspects of
the sea.

Equipment: An excellent laboratory in Batavia in
which there is all of the necessary apparatus for
the conduct of the work within the scope of the
observatory.

Staff: Director, Dr. J. Boerema; Dr. H. P. Berlage,
Jr. Technical and clerical : 40. Maintenance and
operation: 5.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Investigators can
be accommodated.

Income: Sources: State.
Amount: f. 150,000 ('33).

Provision for publication of results: Koninklijk
Magnetisch en Meteorologisch Observatorium te
Batavia, Verhandelingen. Yearbook, Seismol.
Bulletin, Rainfall Observations.

Laboratorium voor het Onderzoek der Zee (Labo-
ratory for Marine Investigations) ('37)

History or origin: Continuation of the former
Fishery Station which was established in 1906
with the intention of carrying out investigations
relating to sea-fishery problems. At present
there is a separate fishery station and the new
laboratory is intended for purely scientific sea-
exploration and marine studies.

Location: Pasar ikan (fish-market), Batavia.

Organization to which attached: Belongs to 's Lands
Plantentuin (Botanical Gardens), Buitenzorg.

Purposes: Scientific marine investigations.

Scope of activities: The former director. Dr. H. C.
Delsman, worked mainly on pelagic fish eggs and
larvae, and later on the plankton of the Java Sea;
coral-reef studies have been made by Dr. Verwey;
Doctor Hardenberg has been occupied with the
fish fauna of river mouths.

Equipment: A laboratory, a small public aquarium,
both situated in a small botanical garden ; possesses
a motor-boat; an auxiliary aquarium on Isle of
Onrust in Bay of Batavia; cruises in the Java
Sea made on board a government steamer.

Staff: Acting Director Dr. J. D. F. Hardenberg,
biologist. European waiter and servants at-
tached to the laboratory.

Provisions for visiting investigators: One room in the
laboratory, with about 5 working-places, is
reserved for visiting investigators. These places
are free.

Income: AH costs are paid by the government. The
available sum has been greatly reduced.

Provision for publication of results: Results are pub-
lished in "Treubia" the zoological periodical of
the Botanical Gardens.

New Zealand

Porto Bello Marine Fisheries Investigation
Station ('34)

History or origin: Establishment of the station was
first undertaken by the Otago Institute and was
effected by means of funds raised by scientific
societies and the New Zealand Government. It
was formally opened in 1904.

Location: Near Dunedin on Otago Harbor.

Organization to which attached: Associated with the
marine fisheries investigation of the Marine
Department of New Zealand.

Purposes: To study the problems of significance to
New Zealand fisheries.

(Scope of activities: Biological investigations, es-
pecially those of economic significance, of con-
siderable range, and local hydrographic work,
especially water temperatures and local currents.

Equipment: Indoor aquarium and large outside
ponds; laboratory and library; fishing launch and
gear; residences for staff.

Staff: Chairman of the Board, Prof. W. B. Benham.
There is at present no residential biologist. The
Station is under the care of Mr. W. Adams.

The Station is under the control of a Board
appointed by the Government. The members
are: Prof. W. B. Benham; Dr. Church; Mr. L. D.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— JAPAN, EAST INDIES, NEW ZEALAND, PHILIPPINE ISLANDS 215

Coombs; Mr. A. E. Hefford; Prof. J. Malcolm;
Mr. J. McG. Wilkie; Mr. C. A. Wilson; Mr. W.
George Howes, in charge of Station and its
activities. Also acting as Honorary Secretary
and Treasurer. Technical and clerical: 1.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Some investiga-
tors can be accommodated, subject to arrange-
ments made through the Hon. Secretary.

Income: Sources: There is a grant from the Marine
Department of New Zealand, New Zealand
Government.

Amount: £300 per annum.

Provision for 'publication of results: Various scientific
publications, especially New Zealand.

Philippine Islands
Bureau of Science, Philippine Islands ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1901.

Location: Manila.

Organization to which attached: The Department of
Agriculture and Natural Resources.

Purposes and scope of activities: Routine work in
making chemical analyses, tests, and estimations
of several different kinds; the identification of
plants, animals, and minerals; manufacture of
vaccines and serums; and several kinds of re-
search. The fields of research include medical
biology, botany, organic chemistry, inorganic
chemistry, soils and fertilizers, geology and mines,
food preservation, malaria and mosquito studies,
and participation in the United States Army
Medical Department Research Board. There
is under the Bureau of Science a section of fisher-
ies, and in the past, several members of the stail,
including the paleontologist and those connected
with the fishery section, were active in certain
kinds of oceanographic work.

Equipment: Offices and well-equipped laboratories
for work of the kinds listed above.

Staff: Director, Angel S. Arguelles. A staff with
specialists for each kind of work.

Income: From the Philippine Government.

Provision for the publication of results: The Philip-
pine Journal of Science (monthly), Monographs
(occasional), Popular Bulletin (Occasional), Min-
eral Resources, Annual Report.

Coast and Geodetic Survey ('37)

History or origin: Established in 1901.

Location: Central office in Manila.

Organization to which attached: Philippine Govern-

ment and the United States Coast and Geodetic
Survey.

Purposes and scope of activities: Hydrographic and
topographic surveys and the preparation of
nautical charts and air-way maps in the Philip-
pine Islands, and the study of tides, currents, and
oceanographic conditions in Philippine waters.

Equipment: Offices and surveying vessels. An
office and printing presses are maintained in
Manila. In 1936 the vessel Fathometer was
in active service.

Staff: Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey are
assigned by the director of the organization in
Washington, D. C, for work in the Philippines.
The Director of the Coast and Geodetic Survey
for the Philippine Islands in 1936 was Captain
T. J. Maher, U.S.C. and G.S.

Income: Source: From the Government of the
United States and the Government of the Phihp-
pine Islands.

Amount: For the year 1932 the total amount
was 736,996 Filipino pesos.

Provisions for the publication of results: The charts of
the Philippines are published by the Coast and
Geodetic Survey in Manila, and the Coast Pilot
of the Philippine Islands is published in the
United States. A revised bathymetric chart of
the Philippines is published in Publ. Manila
Observatory, vol. 3, illustrating art. no. 8, 1931.

Fish and Game Administration ('37)

History or origin: Originally this was merely a
section in the Biological Laboratory of the
PhiUppine Bureau of Science and continued to be
so until 1920 when it became the Division of
Fisheries. The present institution was created
February 1, 1933, independent of the Bureau of
Science by virtue of Memorandum Order No. 6
of the Department of Agriculture and Commerce
from the consolidation of the activities of the
Divisions of Fisheries and Zoology of the Bureau
of Science and the Division of Forest Fauna and
Grazing of the Bureau of Forestry.

Location: Bureau of Science Building, Manila, P. I.

Organization to which attached: Department of Agri-
culture and Commerce, Government of the
Philippine Islands.

Purposes: For scientific and economic research work
relative to the fishes, sponges, and other aquatic
resources of the Philippine Islands; for the diffu-
sion of knowledge among the fishermen of the
Philippine Islands; for the study, improvement,

216

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

propagation of the fishes and aquatic resources
most suitable for Philippine waters; for the es-
tablishment, maintenance, and operation of ex-
perimental stations, farms, aquariums, and fish
culture laboratories; for giving practical instruc-
tion in the culture of fishes and other aquatic
resources, in the most economic and efficient
manner of fishing, in the preservation of fish and
other aquatic products, in the management of
fisheries and canneries; and for all other pur-
poses the object of which shall be to foster,
propagate, and protect fishes, shells, sponges,
and other aquatic resources of the Philippine
Islands.

Scope of activities: Dissemination, through corre-
spondence and interviews, of information per-
taining to fish culture, fish preservation and
fishing methods; preparation of indorsements,
regulatory measures and other important matters
of the kind; care of the collections of fishes, rep-
tiles, batrachians, birds, crustaceans, mollusks,
and insects; systematic studies in the laboratory
based upon the above collections; recording and
identification of specimens in the above collec-
tions; operation of the propagation ponds in the
Bureau of Science grounds; maintenance of the
experimental fish farm at Hinigaran, Occidental
Negros; management of the aquarium; prepara-
tion and maintenance of exhibits in all classes
of zoology pertaining to work ; field investigations
on fishery resources and industries, on the mi-
gratory, spawning, and feeding habits of fishes
and other aquatic animals, and on their distribu-
tion and abundance; oceanographic work as time
and facilities permit; preparation of papers for
publication on research work conducted in the
field and in the laboratory; issuance of hunting
and fishing licenses; gathering of statistical data
relative to commercial fisheries; enforcement of
laws and regulations for the protection of fish
and game.

Equipjnent: Working collections of fishes, reptiles,
batrachians, birds, crustaceans, mollusks, and
insects. Motor launch Science I, about 30 tons
gross, is used for survey and extension work.
Laboratory facilities.
Bureau of Science Library.

Staff: Scientific: Hilario A. Roxas, Chief, Fish and
Game Administration; Deogracias V. Villadolid;
Heraclio R. Montalban; Florencio Talavera;
Canute A. Manuel; Jose R. Montilla; Claro
Martin; Guillermo Ablan; Agustin Umali. Tech-

nical and clerical: 30. Maintenance and Opera-
tion: 21.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Accommodation
and facilities in the laboratory, access to the
collections, use of the hbrary, company of mem-
bers of the scientific staff in field investigations.

Income: Fees authorized to be collected under
insular fisheries of Fisheries Act No. 4003, and
under Act No. 4005.
About P100,000.00.

Provision for publication of results: Scientific and
technical papers are published in the Philippine
Journal of Science.

Manila Observatory ('37)

History or origin: Founded in 1865 as Meteorological
Observatory.

Location: Manila.

Organization to which attached: Philippine Jesuit
Mission. Cooperation with Department of Agri-
culture and Natural Resources of the Philippine
Islands.

Purposes: Meteorology, astronomy, seismology, and
magnetism.

Scope of activities: Observation and research. The
Manila Observatory is not an oceanographic
institution and has no means nor equipment to
conduct any oceanographic research. It does,
however, cooperate with other scientific institu-
tions of the Philippines in the compilation of
observations that may prove of value to pro-
fessional oceanographers.

Equipment: Meteorological, seismic, astronomical,
and magnetic instruments.

Staff: Scientific: Rev. Miguel Selga, S. J., Director;
Rev. Charles E. Deppermaim, S. J. ; Rev. William
C. Repetti, S. J.; Rev. Francis J. Heyden, S. J.;
Rev. Bernard F. Doucette, S. J. Technical: 5.
Maintenance and operation: 4.

Provisions for visiting investigators: None.

Income: Sources: Government appropriation.
Amount: Variable as per annual budget.

Provision for publication of results: "Publications
of the Manila Observatory," of which volume 3
is devoted to a series of oceanographic papers,
consisting of 10 numbers, published in 1931, a
report of the Philippine "Weather Bureau, Manila
Central Observatory," is entitled, "Weather
Observations from Ships for the year 1930"
published in 1932. This report is published in
compliance with an arrangement entered into by
the directors of the Far Eastern Weather Service.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, SIAM

217

Puerto Galera Marine Biological Laboratory of the
University of the Philippines ('37)

History or origin: Through the request of Dr. Law-
rence D. Griffin, President of the University, Dr.
Murray Bartlett, entered into an agreement with
Dr. R. P. Strong of the Bureau of Science to send
a joint expedition to undertake a marine bio-
logical survey of the Philippine waters. The
first place visited was Puerto Galera, Mindoro,
and a temporary station was established at this
place in 1912. In 1924, the Board of Regents
granted the Departments of Zoology and Botany
authority to conduct yearly si.x weeks of field work
for the purpose of giving summer courses.

Location: Municipality of Puerto Galera, extreme
northern point of Island of Mindoro (long. 120° 58'
E., lat. 13° 31' N.), about 89 nautical miles from
Manila, 16 nautical miles from Batangas, 17 nauti-
cal miles from Bauan, Batangas, and 18 nautical
miles from Calapan, the capitol of the province
of Mindoro. The station is best accessible from
Bauan or Batangas where motor- and sail-boats
can easily be chartered. The University usually
makes special arrangements with the several
inter-island steamship companies of Manila to
take its equipment, supplies, and personnel yearly
direct from Manila to Puerto Galera.

Organization to which attached: The University of
the Philippines.

Purposes: To provide biologists of the Philippines
and other countries place and equipment for
carrying out investigations on marine animals
and plants.

(Scope of activities: Investigations of purely biological
problems on general physiology, embryology,
animal behavior, ecology, experimental biology
and systematics, and to study other problems of
direct economic importance; to gather more data
on the habitats, life-histories, natural enemies,
food, et cetera, of the known edible animals.

Equipment: The laboratory building is equipped
with laboratory tables, light, tanks for fresh and
sea water, chemicals, and books, as well as other
necessary apparatus. During summer session
(April and May) the visitors may take their
meals in the mess ($30.00 a month) and rent a
small hut ($5.00 a month) (Philippine pesos).
During other months, investigators have to bring
their own provisions and rent a small house.
An investigator is provided by the station with
microscope, chemicals, and other facihties com-

mon to scientific undertakings. However, any
visiting investigator may bring his own apparatus
necessary for the performance of his particular
line of research.

Staff: Scientific: Hilario A. Roxas, Director; Leo-
poldo S. Clemente; Felix V. Santos; Amado T.
Feliciano; Jose S. Domantay; Miss Lucia A.
Manikis; Miss Angela de la Paz; Jose V. Pay-
Chiongco. Technical and clerical: 4. Main-
tenance and operation: 5.

Provision for visiting investigators: Every visiting
investigator is welcome in this laboratory station.
The visitor to Puerto Galera may take the train
from Manila to Batangas and may take a boat
from Batangas to Puerto Galera. The trip from
Manila to the place of the station may take ten
hours.

Income: The station has no fixed appropriation, but
obtains its necessary running expenses both from
the College of Liberal Arts and the Summer
School.

Provision for publication of results: Results of work
done in this station may be published either in
the U. P. Natural and Applied Sciences or in the
Philippine Journal of Science.

SlAM

Krom Uthoksat (Hydrographic Service of the Royal
Siamese Navy) ('37)

History or origin: The present Hydrographic Service
was formerly a mere Depot of Charts and In-
struments intended for the Navy. The difficulties
that were experienced in maintaining an adequate
supply of charts, all of which were purchased
from foreign countries, early led to a recommenda-
tion from the Naval General Staff that means for
providing charts should be installed at the depot.
It also became apparent that charts should be
constructed by the Siamese in their own country.
The survey work in Siamese waters was begun
in the year 1856 by Master John Richards, R.B.N.,
with the assistance of Mr. G. H. Inskip and Mr.
J. W. Reed, R.B.N., on board H.B.M.S. Saracen.
After that time there were many foreign surveying
parties in different parts of the Siamese waters.
The hydrographic work in the Siamese Navy was
initiated in 1908, and in 1913 a Hydrographic Office
was created under the administration of the Naval
Science Department. Up to 1912 Danish Naval
officers were the instructors and chiefs of survey-
ing. In 1914 two survey divisions were formed

218

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

and directed by Danish officers. In 1915 both
survey divisions were directed by Siamese naval
officers, but until 1926 the work was under the
general supervision of a Danish officer. Although
the survey of Siamese waters has been carried
on for more than 50 years, it was not until the
present century that it became necessary to
concentrate the work under the management of a
special authority.

After the Siamese Navy undertook the surveys
in the Siamese waters, it was the practice to send
the working charts to Copenhagen for final
draughting and reproduction. The first sheet
was published in 1914. In 1915 two Siamese
officers were sent to Denmark, where they were
attached to the survey work of the Hydrographic
Department (Sokart Arkevet, Copenhagen) to
study drawing and the construction of charts.
Upon their return to Siam in 1917 a school to
instruct students in the art of chart drawing and
chart reproduction was established at the Hydro-
graphic Office. In 1921 the first chart was
printed in Siam. Now the Hydrographic Service
has charge of all construction and publication of
charts.

In 1929 the Siamese Navy sent two of its
officers to the United States to study hydrography
and such allied subjects as geodesy, tide harmonic
analysis, oceanography, meteorology, modern
information, and instruments of this branch in
U. S. Navy, and they visited the International
Hydrographic Bureau. In 1932 the officers came
back and with their chief set to work to remodel
the organization of the office so as to cope,
technically and financially, with the awkward
situation caused by the general depression.

Location: Bangkok.

Organization to which attached: Siamese Navy.

Purposes: To collect, digest, and issue timely
information calculated to afford the maximum
possible navigational safety and facility to the
ships on the seas or to mariners on the whole.

Scope of activities: There are sections as follows :
Administration, Marine survey and chart con-
struction. Lights and beacons. Maritime se-
curity, Oceanography, and Meteorology.

Equipment:

Staff: Director, Nai Nava Ek (Captain-Capitaine de

Vaisseau) Luang Samruat Vithin Smudh.
Asst. Director, Nai Nava Tho (Comm'-Capitaine

de Fregate) Luang Joldhan Brudhikrai.
Chief of Section of Marine Survey and Chart

Construction, Nai Nava Tri (Lt. Comm"'-

Capitaine de Corvette) Luang Subhi Utakdhan.
Chief of Section of Lights and Beacons, Nai Nava

Tri (Lt. Comm''-Cap. de Corvette) Luang

CholasiicLseni.
Chief of Section of Maritime Security, Nai Nava

Tri (Lt. Comm'-Cap. de Corvette) Luang

Pichywari.
Chief of Section of Oceanography, Nai Nava Tri

(Lt. Comm'-Cap. de Corvette) Luang Thien

Cholapratheep.
Chief of Section of Meteorology, Nai Rua Ek.

(Lt.-Lt. de Vaisseau) Charoon Bunnag.
Provisions for visiting investigators: Nothing special.
Income: The budgets of the Hydrographic Service
from the years of 1921 were as follows:

rBABS

AMOUNT

YEARS

AMOUNT

Ticals

1921

203,342

1930

176,180

1922

253,790

1931

199,400

1923

248,424

1932

146,432

1924

257,399

1933

146,202

1925

244,224

1934

177,833

1926

194,045

1935

235,920

1927

194,019

1936

219,103

1928

178,666

1937

Data are not

1929

190,289

available

SURVEYING VESSEI^

DISLACEMENT OFFICEHS CREW

Pal.

Gut.

597
597

56
56

Provisions for publication of results: Charts, "Siamese
Notice to Mariners" (since 1920 in both Siamese
and English). "List of Lights in Siamese Waters",
"Bangkok Bar Tide Tables", "Catalogue of Siamese
Charts", "Distance Table in Siamese Waters" and
"Year Books".

Siberia
The Kamchatka Fisheries Station ('35)

Location: Petropavlovsk, Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka.

Organization to which attached: The AU-Union Scien-
tific Research Institution of Marine Fisheries
and Oceanography.

Purposes: To study comprehensively and in detail
the waters adjacent to the Kamchatka Pen-
insula.

(Scope of activities: The site of the station is very
advantageous for making stationary observations
in great depths in the open ocean. Within a few
tens of miles from Avatcha Bay, the depths of

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— SIAM, SIBERIA, STRAITS SETTLEMENT AND 219

FEDERATED MALAY STATES, EGYPT

the open ocean exceeds 4000 meters. The sea
remains in this region, free of ice during the entire
winter. Preliminary explorations made in 1932
near the station have revealed a large benthonic
fauna. As soon as the new vessel now under
construction, has been put into commission, it
will make a regular passage four times a year on
the latitude of Avatcha Bay. This station since
1932 has conducted oceanographic and biological
researches jointly with the Kamchatka section
of the Pacific Scientific Institute of Fisheries.
The latter institute is especially occupied with
the study of the supply of commercial fishes
of the Kamchatka region.

Equipment: The station owns a motor boat of the
Japanese type (Kawasaki) equipped for work to
a depth of 300 meters. The construction of a
motor vessel of 166 tons displacement, to work
to a depth of 4000 meters is underway. The
station also uses fishery trawlers.

Staff: Director, P. Ushakov; Senior Specialist Hy-
drologist, K. Vinogradov; Junior Hydrologist,
M. Beckman; Chemist, 0. Fishman; Hydrologist,
Streeshin.

The Pacific Institute of Fisheries and Oceanog-
raphy ('35)

History or origin: August, 1925, established under
the direction of Prof. K. M. Derjugin, owing to
decline of Far East salmon fisheries.

Location: Six km. from Vladivostok, near Ussuri
Bay (which is free from ice during winter).

Organization to which attached: The All-Union Scien-
tific Research Institution of Marine Fisheries
and Oceanography.

Purposes: Research in hydrology, hydrobiology of
Japan, Okhotsk, Bering Seas, and rivers; study
of fishes of those basins ; investigation of Russian
Far Eastern fisheries, propagation of fishes,
especially salmon.

Scope of activities: Fishery division, hydrobiological
division, fish culture.

Equipment: 1 large building which contains lab-
oratories, mu.seum, aquarium, library, rooms for
specialists; 2 hatcheries at the disposal of the
Station; 17 temporary field stations, research
station; 1 motor boat.

Staff: 45 persons, scientific, technical, adminis-
trative.

Provisions for visiting investigators: Laboratory and

aquarium are free to all interested in marine
biological and oceanographical research.
Provision for the publication of results: Hope to
publish in near future (1926).

Straits Settlement and Federated Malay

States

Department of Fisheries, Straits Settlements and

Federated Malay States ('36)

History or origin: For an account of the organization
for the year 1931 see publication cited below.*
Since then there have been further developments,
but detailed information on them is not available.
It was intended to establish a laboratory and
aquarium and to acquire a vessel for work at sea.

Location: Singapore.

Organization to which attached: The Governments of
the Straits Settlements and the Federated Malay
States.

Purpose: Fisheries research.

Scope of activities: Statistics, imports and exports,
fishery development (including preservation and
marketing of fish), studies of the various economi-
cally valuable fish, shell-fish, and turtles. Ocean-
ographic work as related to fisheries is planned.

Equipment: As stated above a laboratory, aquarium,
and fishery-research vessel are planned.

Staff: Officer in charge, W. Birtwistle; Several
fishery officers; Chief clerk and other clerks.

Income: For 1931, 60,029.31 Straits dollars, divided
between the Straits Settlements and the Federated
Malay States.

Provisions for publication: Annual reports, other-
wise none.

INSTITUTIONS ON THE RED SEA AND
IN INDIA

Egypt

The Marine Biological Station of the University of
Egypt ('37)

History or origin: Established in December, 1930.

Location: The name is given as "Hurghada" on
maps. This is incorrect but better known to
Europeans. On the edge of the shore reef 5
kilometers (3 miles) north of the camp of the Anglo
Egyptian Oilfields, six miles from steamer piers.
Ghardaqa is in Lat. 27° 16' N., south of the
entrance to the Gulf of Suez, on the African side.

' Birtwistle, W., Annual Report on the Fisheries Depart-
ment, Straits Settlements and Federated Malay States for
the year 1931, pp. 37, Singapore, 1932.

220

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Organization to which attached: The University of

Egypt, subsidized by the State.
Purposes: (1) Research, biological in the wide sense
including physiology and chemistry, coral reef
problems, and oceanography.

(2) Instruction. It is proposed to give general
instruction to senior students of the University
and possibly to secondary school teachers.
Scope of activities: Physical, chemical, and bio-
logical oceanography of the Red Sea. As the
Red Sea is still so imperfectly known biological
exploration and the formation of a reference
collection are likely to take a considerable amount
of time in the next few years. For instance, to
mention only the groups with which I have some
acquaintance, new spp. of Polychaeta and a
striking new coral have already appeared, though
collecting has only just begun. Examination of
living specimens of, e.g., the soft corals is likely to
reform the systematics of several groups. The
occurrence of Syllis remosa Mc.I. in shallow
water in the Red Sea is another indication of the
necessity for this preliminary survey.
Equipment: All buildings in wood and asbestos,
single story. One laboratory of four rooms total,
area 19 m x 5 m, and one sorting room, 6 m x 6 m,
on reef edge, connected with shore by dry stone
pier 150 m long and one additional store 6 m x
5 m on pier.

Office Building, 25 m x 5 m, containing 2 office
rooms, director's workroom and large preparation
room.

Three rest houses for research workers.

Bungalows for director, clerk, and engineer.
Another has been added this year (1936) for a
scientific assistant.

5 huts for sailors, drivers, etc.

2 garages, general store, 2 fuel stores, 1 net
and boat store, workshop, and engine-house.

1 launch, open 35 ft. x 8 ft. 6 in., 32 hp. paraffin
engine, with winch for nets, winch for water
bottles, Lucas sounder, to work up to 500 fathoms.
1 sailing boat, 30 feet long, 2 dinghies, and 2
canoes.

There is no aquarium and nothing in the way
of a public exhibition, the .station being intended
purely for research. An outside tank, 10 m x 2 m
is set up on the seaward side of the laboratory
and a windmill and pump will be added to it next
spring. On failure of wind the electrically driven
pump supplying the laboratory will also supply
this tank.

Library. The library has now all the Red Sea
and Indian Ocean expedition reports, monographs
on Red Sea fauna, etc., and a large number of
separate papers. A library building, museum,
etc., are to be built next summer, offices also to
be moved onto reef and the present office building
used for work on the Mabahith results. The
new buildings will contain laboratories for Director
and as.sistants, leaving the four original rooms en-
tirely for visitors. The chemical laboratory will
probably be moved to the shore building thus
making five rooms for visitors.

Staff: Consists at present of Director Cyril Cross-
land, A. H. Gohar, Assistant, A. H. Nast second
Assistant (temporary), clerk, storekeeper, me-
chanic, sailors, and drivers. A scientific assistant
will soon be appointed, and a chemist of the
Faculty of Science will undertake water analyses.
An engineer is to be appointed soon. On com-
pletion of the station other scientific staff may be
appointed, permanently or temporarily.

Provisions for visiting investigators: 4 visitors can
be accommodated, or 6 with a little crowding.

Income: The station is on the budget of the Uni-
versity.

Provision for the publication of results: Publication
of the results by the Government has been
approved by the Finance, and details will be
settled shortly.

Supplementary note:

A. The Red Sea affords the most northerly
extension of the Indo-Pacific fauna. This station
is, therefore, the most accessible point at which
the coral and other faunas of the tropics of the
old world can be studied. It is hoped that this
will enable the University of Egypt to produce
notable contributions to tropical ecology, et
cetera, and coral reef problems, and also that
European and American Universities will be able
to assist in the wide field thus opened up.

B. The fauna in the immediate neighborhood
of the station is extremely rich. There are three
lines of coral reef between us and the open sea,
separated by water of average depths of three, ten,
and twenty fathoms. Outside is a large area 40
to 50 fathoms deep, the hundred fathom line
being about 6 miles from the station. Reefs two
or three hundred yards from the laboratory are as
rich in corals as any I have seen elsewhere.

C. Having clear water right at the end of the
jetty simplifies and cheapens the installation very

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— EGYPT, INDIA

221

greatly. There is no need for the usual storage
tanks and elaborate filters, so pure water can be
supplied direct in unlimited quantities from the
sea via a small delivery tank.

In order to have a pure water supply in the
laboratory, and avoid the introduction of unknown
quantities in experiments, the water will come
into contact with no metal. The pump (elec-
trically driven) is lined with stoneware, all pipes
are of celluloid and the tank of concrete. Com-
pressed air is also supplied. Gas for ovens, et
cetera, is installed from Bubagas cylinders.

D. Each room is intended to be complete in
itself, the storage of live specimens to be under
the control of each worker; large specimens can
be kept in the tank outside or in cages afloat in
the harbor.

E. The station has the inestimable advantage
of its own boat harbor in which apparatus, ex-
perimental or for storage of live stock, can be left
secure from interference. This allows us to dis-
pense with much of the tank and circulating
water apparatus usually necessary, and makes
possible experiments which cannot be undertaken
in a public harbor.

F. The buildings are all of inexpensive con-
struction, but visitors will find them perfectly
comfortable at any time of the year. In a mari-
time climate insulation, however desirable, is
entirely subordinate to movement of the air, and
all buildings have been so placed that the wind
can be admitted, to the extent desired, at all
times. Further we are some hundred miles from
the area of low pressure and high humidity which
has given the Red Sea its reputation for unbear-
able heat in summer. I can testify to the differ-
ence from my own experience.

(Signed) C. Crossland

INDIA
Marine Survey OflBce, British India ('37)

Location: Bombay.

Staff: Surveyor in charge, Commander L. Sander-
son, R. I. N.

Assistant surveyors, Lieut. Commander J.
Ryland; Lieut. Comm. J. W. Jefford, R. I. N.

Equipment:

SURVEYING VESSEL

Investigator

DI-gPLACEMENT OFKrcEItS CREW

.. 1,985 G 108

The Zoological Survey of India ('37)

History of origin: Established in 1916.

Location: The Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Organization to which attached: Government in-
stitute.

Purposes: The function of the Zoological Survey of
India is to investigate the fauna of India and
Indian Seas.

Scope of activities: Care and maintenance of the
zoological and anthropological collections of the
Government of India. The identification of
specimens and the investigations of the ecology
and bionomics of the Indian fauna. The main-
tenance of the zoological and anthropological
galleries, open to the public, in the Indian
Museum.

Equipment: The Investigator, on the retirement
of Maj. R. W. G., Hing.ston, I.M.S., from the
post of Surgeon-Naturalist in 1926, ceased to
carry out oceanographic work and marine investi-
gations. The post of Surgeon-Naturalist, that
had always been an Indian Medical Service ap-
pointment, was abolished and in its place the post
of Naturalist to the Marine Survey of India was
created and was embodied in the Zoological
Survey of India, but owing to financial stringency
this post has never been filled.

Staff: Dr. Baini Prashad, F.R.S.E., is the Director;
4 As.sistant Superintendents (zoological) ; 1 Assist-
ant Superintendent (anthropological); Naturalist
to the Marine Survey of India (vacant).

Provision for publication of results: Records of the
Indian Museum, Memoirs of the Indian Museum.
Prior to its conversion into the Zoological Survey
of India in 1916 this department formed the
zoological and anthropological section of the
Indian Museum and the trustees of the Indian
Museum published a large number of compre-
hensive monographs dealing especially with the
collections of the Marine Survey of India.

The following statement on the marine work of the
Zoological Survey of India was made by Dr. Sunder
Lai Hora:

The curators of the Museum of the Asiatic
Society of Bengal, for example McClelland and
Blyth, were mainly interested in the study of
the freshwater and terrestrial fauna of India.
With the establishment of the Indian Museum,
and more especially after the creation of the
post of the Surgeon-Naturalist, more and more

222

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

interest was taken in the study of the marine
fauna of India, as well as in the real oceano-
graphical work. The large number of mono-
graphs and reports published from the Indian
Museum on the marine animals shows the extent
of the faunistic work accomplished by the suc-
cessive Surgeon-Naturalists; while Lt. Col. R. B. S.
Sewell's oceanographic monographs in the
Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal reveal
extensive data collected over a number of years.
Though a certain amount of faunistic work has
been done by other individuals and institutions,
the real oceanographical work has been done by
the Surgeon-Naturalists on board the Investi-
gator.

Since the establishment of the Zoological
Survey of India in 1916 attention, apart from the
work of successive Surgeon-Naturalists, has been
paid mainly to the freshwater and terrestrial
fauna of India. Dr. S. W. Kemp, however, made
large collections of marine animals in the
Andamans, and at Goa, Kilakarai, Madras, and
Vizagapatam in India. Other members of the
Survey have also made collections at Karachi,
Puri, Vizagapatam, Tuticorin, Krusadai, and the
Andamans. The results of these investigations
are embodied in a number of papers by several
authors.

The late Dr. N. Annandale and Dr. S. W. Kemp
started observations on the peculiar fauna that
is found in the estuarinc and brackish waters
of India. As early as 1907, Annandale began to
describe the fauna of the brackish pools at Port
Canning. Kemp's account of the fauna of the
Matlah River is of special interest in this con-
nection. Both Annandale and Kemp made a
comprehen.sive survey of the Chilka Lake, a large
stretch of brackish water, and showed the adapta-
bility of animals to withstand a great variation
in the range of salinity. To compare his results
with other similar lakes in Asia, Annandale made
a tour of the Far East and studied the fauna and
the conditions governing animal life in Tale Sap,
Siam, Lake Biwa in Japan, and Lake Tai Hu in
China. Other members of the Zoological Survey
of India have .studied the fauna of the Salt Lakes,
Calcutta, and of the Cochin Backwaters with in-
teresting results. Most of the work of the Survey
is of a systematic nature, but extensive biological
and ecological observations were made in all cases,
though in no case were up-to-date limnological

investigations carried out. Mention may also be
made of the valuable collections from the Sand-
heads received from the Pilot Service.

Recently, valuable Trochus and Turbo beds
were found in the Andamans, and to establish
the fisheries on a proper scientific basis an officer
of the Zoological Survey has been put in charge of
these fisheries. Besides his usual work in con-
nection with the fisheries this officer and his
assistant make collections of the marine animals.
The results obtained so far have been extremely
valuable.

For a number of years the Zoological Survey has
been feeling very keenly the necessity of a marine
biological station in Indian waters. Proposals
were submitted to the Government for establish-
ing a station at Port Blair in the Andamans, but
without any success. Later a station at Karachi
was suggested with a view to train young men from
the universities as well as to look after the coastal
fisheries, but the scheme is held up for financial
reasons. There is, however, a small marine
laboratory of the Madras Fisheries Department
at Krusadai and at present efforts are being made
to have a marine biological station at Bombay.

Ennur Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: Opened in 1921 by the Madras
Fisheries Department for the supply of biological
specimens to schools and colleges.

Location: On the sea-front close to a back-water
about 18 miles north of Madras on the Madras
and Southern Maharatta Railway.

Organization to lohich attached: Madras Fisheries
Department.

Purpose: Supply of biological specimens to mu-
seums, colleges and schools, and aiding research
workers by procuring collections for them.

Scope of activities: Preparation of museum exhibits,
collection tours.

Equipment: 1 laboratory; 1 boat; edible oyster beds
in the Ennur back-water, in the Puhcat lake,
and at Gokulapalle.

Staff: Technical: Mr. S. Ramaswami Ayyangar,
Research Assistant; Mr. B. Eraser, Laboratory
assistant. Maintenance: 1 fieldman.

Provision for visiting investigators: Three seats.

Income: Source: Sale of zoological specimens.
Amount: About Rs 2,000 annually.

Provision for publication of results: In the publica-
tions of the Madras Fisheries Department.

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INDIA

223

Krusadai Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: Krusadai Island was acquired in
1916 from the Rajah of Ramnad by the Govern-
ment to serve as a Biological Station.

Location: Krusadai Island in the Gulf of Mannar,
close to Pamban Railway Station on the Indo-
Ceylon Railway.

Organization to which attached: Madras Fisheries
Department.

Purpose: Fishery research with special reference to
Pearl and Chank Fisheries.

Scope of activities: Collection and analysis of plank-
ton, collection of data regarding various economic
fisheries of the neighborhood, collection and iden-
tification of various food fish, the maintenance of
a daily record of hydrographical observations
including the collection of surface samples of sea
water, studies of live fish and other marine or-
ganisms, pearl fishery research, studies of chanos
culture.

Equipment: Laboratory, aquarium tanks, two fish
ponds for cultivating Gambusia (Barbadoes Mil-
lions), a mosquito larvecidal fish; 1 boat; 1
canoe.

Stajf: Assistant Biologist, Dr. D. W. Devanesan,
M.A., Ph.D., D.I.C.; Research Assistant, S. T.
Varadarajan, M.A. ; 1 laboratory attendant; 2
boatmen.

Provision for visiting investigators: Six places.

The Madras Aquarium ('37)

History or origin: Opened on October 21, 1909.
Location: Sandy sea beach (Marina Beach), near

the Presidency College, Madras.
Organization to which attached: Madras Fisheries

Department.
Purpose: To provide amusement to the public;

to study the habits of live sea-fish.
Scope of activities: Exhibiting live-fish in Aquaria;
exhibiting delicate marine organisms such as her-
mit crabs, sea crabs, and sea-anemones; analysis
of samples of .sea-water.
Equipment: Aquaria for marine fishes supplied with
sea-water from overhead tanks; a turtle pond; a
gold fish pond; laboratory; restaurant.
Staff: Scientific: Director of Fisheries, Dr. B.
Sundara Raj, M.A., Ph.D.; Assistant biologist;
Dr. D. W. Devanesan, M.A., Ph.D., D.I.C.;
Personal assistant to the director, Dr. M.
Ramaswami Naidu, B.A., Ph.D.

Technical: Mr. M. K. Giriappa, laboratory assist-
ant.
Maintenance: 3 keepers and one peon.

Provision for visiting investigators: Three seats.

Income. Source : Aquarium gate collections.
Amount: About Rs 7,000 per annum.

Provision for publication of results: In the publica-
tions of the Madras Fisheries Department.

Madras Fisheries Department

History or origin: In April, 1907, the Government
accepted the proposal of Sir F. A. Nicholson for the
initiation of a small Bureau of Fisheries for Madras.

Location: Madras Presidency (with Headquarters
at Madras).

Organization to which attached: The Government of
Madras.

Purposes: To introduce improved methods of fish-
ing ; to improve methods of manufacture in existing
fishing industries, and to introduce new industries;
and to work for the socio-economic betterment of
the fishing population.

Scope of activities: Oceanographical research so far
as it relates to the Department and administration
of the Fisheries of the Madras Presidency.

Equipjnent: (1) Krusadai Fishery Research Station,
Gulf of Manner. (2) West Hill Fishery Research
Station, South Malabar. (3) Ennur Fisheries
Station (near Madras) for supply of biological
specimens. (4) Marine Aquarium (Madras) with
a small Fishery Laboratory attached to it. (5)
Library of Fishery Literature.

Vessels:
Lady Nicholson — motor schooner; built in 1913 at
Calcutta; original cost Rs 115,000; gross tonnage 86
tons; 131 horse-power; speed 8.14 knots;length 107 feet,
breadth 24 feet. Employed for the inspection of pearl-
banks.

Sea Scout — motor launch; built in 1923 in England;
original cost Rs 37,000; gross tonnage 20 tons; 40
horse-power, speed 8.66 knots; length 48 feet 6 inches,
breadth 9 feet. Employed for towing pearl and chank
fishing boats.

Leverett — motor launch; built in 1917 at Cochin;
original cost Rs 7,000; gross tonnage 10 tons; 26-30
horse-power; speed 10 knots; length 28 feet 7 inches,
breadth 8 feet. Employed for towing pearl and chank
fishing boats.

Pearl — motor launch; built in 1909 by Dan Motor and
Co., Ipswich; original cost Rs 3,847; gross tonnage 5
tons; 7 horse-power; speed 4.5 knots; length 25 feet 3
inches, breadth 7 feet 2 inches. Emploj'ed for towing
pearl and chank fishing boats but at present disabled.

224

INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Staff: Director, Dr. B. Sundara Raj, M.A., Ph.D.,
Oceanography.
Assistant Biologist, Dr. D. W. Devanesan, M.A.,

Ph.D., D.I.C., Marine Zoology.
Personal Assistant to the Director of Fisheries,
Dr. M. Ramaswamy Naidu, B.A., Ph.D.,
Oceanography.
Provision for visiting investigators: Three to six work-
ers can be accommodated in each of the labora-
tories mentioned under Equipment.
Income: Sources: Fish curing yards, fishery rentals,
pearl and chank fisheries, aquarium gate collec-
tions and zoological specimen supply, tanur
productions, oyster supply, Nilgiri Fisheries,
fishing license.
Amount: Rs. 380,500.
Provision for 'publication of results: Fish Statistics,
Madras Fisheries Bulletin, Trawler's Reports,
Bulletin on Marketable Fish, Bulletin on Pearl
Fisheries, other publications relating to Madras
Fisheries.

Meteorological Department, Government of
India ('34)

Location: Central Office, Poona near Bombay.
Organization to which attached: Government of India.
Staff: Director-General of Observatories, Dr. C. W.
B. Normand.

In the Indian Ocean the meteorological phe-
nomena are of so great influence on the ocean that
a memorandum entitled, "Brief Notes on Marine
Meteorological Work undertaken by the Indian
Meteorological Department" prepared by Doctor
Normand is quoted in full. It is as follows:
Storm Warning for Ports and Shipping:

Whenever a storm or a disturbance exists in the
Indian seas, suitable visual warning signals are
hoisted at such ports on the coasts as are likely to
be affected by the disturbance. The Meteorologi-
cal Department keeps Port Officers supplied with
the latest information with respect to all disturban-
ces, and ships in port apply to them for information
to supplement the storm signals. In addition to
the regular ports on the west coast and on the
Bay of Bengal there are some river ports and River
Police Stations and a number of District Police
Stations which have to be warned in connection
with disturbed weather at the head of the Bay of
Bengal. Of the ports on the Bay of Bengal some
are provided with additional "locality signals"
which indicate the particular areas in which weather

is disturbed. The details of these arrangements
are described in this department's publication
entitled, "Code of Storm Warning Signals for use
at Indian Ports."

Shipping at sea is also supplied with the latest
weather information bymeans of wireless bulletins,
which briefly describe the position, development in
intensity, probable movement of storms whenever
any exist, or describe the general weather situation
in the sea areas. The issues, which are ordinarily
twice daily, are increased in disturbed or stormy
weather to three or six times a day. When neces-
sary, further messages are broadcasted at interven-
ing times also. The radio stations at Bombay,
Karachi, and Aden serve the Arabian Sea area, and
those at Calcutta, Rangoon, and Madras serve the
Bay of Bengal area; the wireless station at Matara
serves both areas. The details of the arrange-
ments for broadcasting meteorological bulletins to
ships at sea and for ships to transmit by wireless
their weather messages to the coastal radio stations
are fully explained in this department's publica-
tion named, "Indian Ship's Weather Code."

The warnings to ports and shipping in the
Arabian Sea against the approach of cyclonic
storms, or of bad weather is done from the head-
quarters office at Poona, while similar warnings for
disturbances in the Bay of Bengal are issued by
the Meteorological Office at Alipore, Calcutta.
Collection of Marine Meteorological data:

Coded wireless weather messages from ships at
sea constitute the chief source of marine data
available for all purposes and, in supplement to the
telegraphic observations from coast stations, they
are essential in the maintenance of the warning
system for ports and shipping at sea.

Another important source of marine meteorolog-
ical data is the extracts from steamer's weather logs
collected by the marine clerks of this department
in Calcutta and Bombay, and sent from some
steamers direct. Two log forms are in use — one
for use during ordinary weather and the other, the
pink form, for use during disturbed weather — and
are designed to secure the collection of full marine
meterological data for purposes of later study.
The port authorities at Rangoon also help in the
collection of these extracts by allowing the ob-
servers of the Time Ball and Tidal Observatory
of the Port Commissioners to copy or collect ship's
weather logs. Occasionally, in special cases, logs
of steamers with experience of disturbed weather
are collected at Madras; and the Colombo Port

CATALOGUE OF INSTITUTIONS— INDIA

225

authorities also help this department similarly,
when requested. The data thus obtained are en-
tered on weather charts, and are used for reference
in the storm-warning work of the department, in
the preparation of accounts of the storms of the
year for publication in the India Weather Review
(Annual Summary), in the special studies of indi-
vidual storms — their causes of development, move-
ment, recurvature and dissipation — and for gen-
eral climatological study of the Indian Sea areas.
This work is being aided, slowly but steadily, by
lending meteorological instruments to ships and by
obtaining from the steamers meteorological logs
and the readings of the instrument lent.

Other non-recurring duties:

In addition to the duties mentioned above, the
department seeks generally to maintain contact
with mercantile shipping interests. It has ren-
dered all possible help in the marine meteorological
training of thecadetsof the I.M.M.T.S. Dufferin
by examining the meteorological essays written by
the cadets in meteorological subjects and by giving
a meteorological prize annually to the best candi-
date, by preparing for the cadets weather chart exer-
cises for Indian areas, and by occasional lectures on
board the training ship on meteorological subjects.
Meteorological data for Indian Sea areas are sup-
plied whenever required to the International
Meteorological Committee for their occasional In-
ternational publications on marine meteorology
and for preparing charts, et cetera, by them.

Publications:

From time to time the department has published
atlases and books useful to those interested in
marine meteorology, such as Eliot's "Handbook
of Cyclonic Storms in the Bay of Bengal" and
the "Cyclone Memoirs," pts. 1-5, and Dallas'
"Meteorological Atlas of the Indian Seas." Some
of the publications issued in recent years are :

1. Atlas of Storm Tracks in the Bay of Bengal— C. W. B.

Normand.

2. Atlas of Storm Tracks in the Arabian Sea — C. W. B.

Normand.

3. A brochure on Winds, Weather, and Currents on the

coasts of India and the Laws of Storms — S. Basa.

Results of recent investigations on storms of the
Indian seas have appeared in the following scientific
articles:

Structure and Movement of Cyclones in the Indian Seas.
S. C. Roy and A. K. Roy (Beitrage Zur Physik der
Freien Atmosphare pp. 224-234, Vol. XVI, 1930).

Scientific Notes. Vol. Ill, No. 18. The structure of the
Madras Storm of January 1929. K. R. Ramanathan
and A. A. Narayana Aiyar.

Scientific Notes. Vol. Ill, No. 22. The Structure
and Movement of a Storm in the Bay of Bengal during
the period 13th to 19th November 1928. K. R.
Ramanathan.

Scientific Notes. Vol. Ill, No. 29. The Bengal Cyclone
of 1919. V. Doraiswamy Iyer.

Scientific Notes. Vol. IV, No. 34. A study of Two
Premonsoon Storms in the Bay of Bengal and a Com-
parison of their structure with that of the Bay Storms
in the Winter Months. K. R. Ramanathan and H. C.
Banerji.

Scientific Notes. Vol. IV, No. 39. A study of the
Structure of the Bay Storm of November 1926. Sob-
hag Mai and B. N. Desai.

Recent Investigations and Movement of Tropical
Storms in Indian Seas — C. W. B. Normand. Gerlands
Beitrage zur Geophysik, vol. 34, 1931, pp. 223-243.

West HUl Biological Station ('37)

History or origin: Opened in 1921 for marine fisheries
research by the Madras Fisheries Department.

Location: Calicut, Malabar Coast.

Organization to which attached: Madras Fisheries De-
partment.

Purpose: Fishery research and compilation of fishery
statistics.

Scope of activities: Plankton investigation, sardine
and other fishery investigations, hydrographical
investigations.

Equipment: 1 laboratory; 1 canoe.

Staff: Scientific: Assistant Biologist, Dr. D. W.
Devanesan, M.A., Ph.D., D.I.C.
Technical: Research Assistant, Mr. V. John, B.A.
Maintenance and operation: 1 peon, 1 watchman,
2 boatmen, 1 laboratory attendant.

Provision for visiting investigators: Three seats.

Income: Nil.

Provision for publication of results: In the publica-
tions of the Madras Fisheries Department.